PUB.

(ENROUTE)

SAILING DIRECTIONS

★

★

2010

181

GREENLAND AND ICELAND

Prepared and published by the

NATIONAL GEOSPATIAL-INTELLIGENCE AGENCY

Bethesda, Maryland

© COPYRIGHT 2010 BY THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT

NO COPYRIGHT CLAIMED UNDER TITLE 17 U.S.C.

ELEVENTH EDITION

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office

Internet: http://bookstore.gpo.gov Phone: toll free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800

Fax: (202) 512-2250 Mail Stop: SSOP, Washington, DC 20402-0001
II

Pub. 181

Preface

0.0 Pub. 181, Sailing Directions (Enroute) Greenland and Iceland, Eleventh Edition, 2010, is issued for use in conjunction

with Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic

Ocean. Companion volumes are Pubs. 182 and 183.

0.0 Digital Nautical Chart 19 and 28 provides electronic chart

coverage for the area covered by this publication. 

0.0 This publication has been corrected to 30 October 2010,

including Notice to Mariners No. 44 of 2010.

Explanatory Remarks

0.0 Sailing Directions are published by the National GeospatialIntelligence Agency (NGA), under the authority of Department

of Defense Directive 5105.40, dated 12 December 1988, and

pursuant to the authority contained in U. S. Code Title 10,

Sections 2791 and 2792 and Title 44, Section 1336. Sailing

Directions, covering the harbors, coasts, and waters of the

world, provide information that cannot be shown graphically

on nautical charts and is not readily available elsewhere.

0.0 Sailing Directions (Enroute) include detailed coastal and

port approach information which supplements the largest scale

chart produced by the National Geospatial-Intelligence

Agency. This publication is divided into geographic areas

called “Sectors.”

0.0 Bearings.—Bearings are true, and are expressed in degrees

from 000° (north) to 360°, measured clockwise. General

bearings are expressed by initial letters of points of the compass (e.g. N, NNE, NE, etc.). Adjective and adverb endings

have been discarded. Wherever precise bearings are intended

degrees are used.

0.0 Charts.—Reference to charts made throughout this publication refer to both the paper chart and the Digital Nautical

Chart (DNC).

0.0 Coastal Features.—It is assumed that the majority of ships

have radar. Available coastal descriptions and views, useful for

radar and visual piloting are included in geographic sequence

in each Sector.

0.0 Corrective Information.—Users should refer corrections,

additions, and comments to NGA’s Maritime Operations Desk,

as follows: 

0.0 1. Toll free: 1-800-362-6289

0.0 2. Commercial: 301-227-3147

0.0 3. DSN: 287-3147

0.0 4. DNC web site: http://www.nga.mil/portal/site/dnc

0.0 5. Maritime Do0.0 main web site: http://www.nga.mil/portal/site/mari

0.0 time

0.0 6. E-mail: navsafety@nga.mil

0.0 7. Mailing address: Maritime Domain

0.0 National Geospatial-Intelligence

0.0 Agency

Mail Stop D-44

0.0 4600 Sangamore Road

0.0 Bethesda MD 20816-5003

0.0 New editions of Sailing Directions are corrected through the

date of the publication shown above. Important information to

amend material in the publication is available as a Publication

Digital Update (PDU) from the NGA Maritime Domain website.

0.0NGA Maritime Domain Website

http://www.nga.mil/portal/site/maritime

0.0

0.0 Courses.—Courses are true, and are expressed in the same

manner as bearings. The directives “steer” and “make good” a

course mean, without exception, to proceed from a point of

origin along a track having the identical meridianal angle as the

designated course. Vessels following the directives must allow

for every influence tending to cause deviation from such track,

and navigate so that the designated course is continuously

being made good.

0.0 Currents.—Current directions are the true directions toward

which currents set.

0.0 Dangers.—As a rule outer dangers are fully described, but

inner dangers which are well-charted are, for the most part,

omitted. Numerous offshore dangers, grouped together, are

mentioned only in general terms. Dangers adjacent to a coastal

passage or fairway are described.

0.0 Distances.—Distances are expressed in nautical miles of 1

minute of latitude. Distances of less than 1 mile are expressed

in meters, or tenths of miles.

0.0 Geographic Names.—Geographic names are generally

those used by the nation having sovereignty. Names in parentheses following another name are alternate names that may

appear on some charts. In general, alternate names are quoted

only in the principal description of the place. Diacritical marks,

such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to

specific letters in certain foreign languages, are not used in the

interest of typographical simplicity. Geographic names or their

spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political

status of an area by the United States Government.

0.0 Heights.—Heights are referred to the plane of reference

used for that purpose on the charts and are expressed in meters.

0.0 Index-Gazetteer.—Navigational features and place-names

are listed alphabetically in the back of the book. The approximate position, along with the Sector and paragraph numbers

(e.g. 1.1), facilitate location in the text.

0.0 Internet Links.—This publication provides internet links to

web sites concerned with maritime navigational safety, including but not limited to, Federal government sites, foreign Hydrographic Offices, and foreign public/private port facilities.

NGA makes no claims, promises, or guarantees concerning the

accuracy, completeness, or adequacy of the contents of the web

sites and expressly disclaims any liability for errors and omissions of these web sites.

0.0 Light and Fog Signals.—Lights and fog signals are not described, and light sectors are not usually defined. The Light

Lists should be consulted for complete information.

0.0 Ports.—Directions for entering ports are depicted where

appropriate by means of chartlets, sketches, and photos, which

facilitate positive identification of landmarks and navigational

aids. These chartlets and sketches are not always to scale, however, and should be used only as a general informational guide

in conjunction with the best scale chart. Specific port facilities
III

 Pub. 181

are omitted from the standard format. They are tabulated in

Pub. 150, World Port Index.

0.0 Radio Navigational Aids.—Radio navigational aids are not

described in detail. Publication No. 117 Radio Navigational

Aids and NOAA Publication, Selected Worldwide Marine

Broadcasts, should be consulted.

0.0 Soundings.—Soundings are referred to the datum of the

charts and are expressed in meters.

0.0 Special Warnings.—A Special Warning may be in force for

the geographic area covered by this publication. Special

Warnings are printed in the weekly Notice to Mariners upon

promulgation and are reprinted annually in Notice to Mariners

No. 1. A listing of Special Warnings currently in force is

printed in each weekly Notice to Mariners, Section III, Broadcast Warnings, along with the notice number of promulgation.

Special Warnings are also available on the Maritime Division

website.

0.0 Wind Directions.—Wind directions are the true directions

from which winds blow.

Reference List

0.0 The principal sources examined in the preparation of this

publication were:

0.0 British Hydrographic Department Sailing Directions.

0.0 Canadian Sailing Directions.

0.0 Various port handbooks. 

0.0 Reports from United States Naval and merchant vessels and

various shipping companies.

0.0 Other U.S. Government publications, reports, and documents.

0.0 Charts, light lists, tide and current tables, and other documents in possession of the Agency.

0.0 Internet Web sites, as follows:

0.0 1. Fraser Port Authority

0.0 http://www.fraserportauthority.com

0.0 2. Lighthouses of British Columbia

0.0 http://fogwhistle.ca/bclights

0.0 3. Nanaimo Port Authority

0.0 http://www.npa.ca

0.0 4. Port Alberni Port Authority

0.0 http://www.alberni.net/harbor-havre

0.0 5. Prince Rupert Port (The New World Port)

0.0 http://www.rupertport.com/home.html
0.0SECTOR LIMITS — PUB. 181
VI Pub. 154

Conversion Tables

Feet to Meters

Feet 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 0.30 0.61 0.91 1.22 1.52 1.83 2.13 2.44 2.74

 10 3.05 3.35 3.66 3.96 4.27 4.57 4.88 5.18 5.49 5.79

 20 6.10 6.40 6.71 7.01 7.32 7.62 7.92 8.23 8.53 8.84

 30 9.14 9.45 9.75 10.06 10.36 10.67 10.97 11.28 11.58 11.89

 40 12.19 12.50 12.80 13.11 13.41 13.72 14.02 14.33 14.63 14.93

 50 15.24 15.54 15.85 16.15 16.46 16.76 17.07 17.37 17.68 17.98

 60 18.29 18.59 18.90 19.20 19.51 19.81 20.12 20.42 20.73 21.03

 70 21.34 21.64 21.95 22.25 22.55 22.86 23.16 23.47 23.77 24.08

 80 24.38 24.69 24.99 25.30 25.60 25.91 26.21 26.52 26.82 27.13

 90 27.43 27.74 28.04 28.35 28.65 28.96 29.26 29.57 29.87 30.17

Fathoms to Meters

Fathoms 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 1.83 3.66 5.49 7.32 9.14 10.97 12.80 14.63 16.46

 10 18.29 20.12 21.95 23.77 25.60 27.43 29.26 31.09 32.92 34.75

 20 36.58 38.40 40.23 42.06 43.89 45.72 47.55 49.38 51.21 53.03

 30 54.86 56.69 58.52 60.35 62.18 64.01 65.84 67.67 69.49 71.32

 40 73.15 74.98 76.81 78.64 80.47 82.30 84.12 85.95 87.78 89.61

 50 91.44 93.27 95.10 96.93 98.75 100.58 102.41 104.24 106.07 107.90

 60 109.73 111.56 113.39 115.21 117.04 118.87 120.70 122.53 124.36 126.19

 70 128.02 129.85 131.67 133.50 135.33 137.16 138.99 140.82 142.65 144.47

 80 146.30 148.13 149.96 151.79 153.62 155.45 157.28 159.11 160.93 162.76

 90 164.59 166.42 168.25 170.08 171.91 173.74 175.56 177.39 179.22 181.05

Meters to Feet

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 3.28 6.56 9.84 13.12 16.40 19.68 22.97 26.25 29.53

 10 32.81 36.09 39.37 42.65 45.93 49.21 52.49 55.77 59.06 62.34

 20 65.62 68.90 72.18 75.46 78.74 82.02 85.30 88.58 91.86 95.14

 30 98.42 101.71 104.99 108.27 111.55 114.83 118.11 121.39 124.67 127.95

 40 131.23 134.51 137.80 141.08 144.36 147.64 150.92 154.20 157.48 160.76

 50 164.04 167.32 170.60 173.88 177.16 180.45 183.73 187.01 190.29 193.57

 60 196.85 200.13 203.41 206.69 209.97 213.25 216.54 219.82 223.10 226.38

 70 229.66 232.94 236.22 239.50 242.78 246.06 249.34 252.62 255.90 259.19

 80 262.47 265.75 269.03 272.31 275.59 278.87 282.15 285.43 288.71 291.99

 90 295.28 298.56 301.84 305.12 308.40 311.68 314.96 318.24 321.52 324.80

Meters to Fathoms

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 0.55 1.09 1.64 2.19 2.73 3.28 3.83 4.37 4.92

 10 5.47 6.01 6.56 7.11 7.66 8.20 8.75 9.30 9.84 10.39

 20 10.94 11.48 12.03 12.58 13.12 13.67 14.22 14.76 15.31 15.86

 30 16.40 16.95 17.50 18.04 18.59 19.14 19.68 20.23 20.78 21.33

 40 21.87 22.42 22.97 23.51 24.06 24.61 25.15 25.70 26.25 26.79

 50 27.34 27.89 28.43 28.98 29.53 30.07 30.62 31.17 31.71 32.26

 60 32.81 33.36 33.90 34.45 35.00 35.54 36.09 36.64 37.18 37.73

 70 38.28 38.82 39.37 39.92 40.46 41.01 41.56 42.10 42.65 43.20

 80 43.74 44.29 44.84 45.38 45.93 46.48 47.03 47.57 48.12 48.67

 90 49.21 49.76 50.31 50.85 51.40 51.95 52.49 53.04 53.59 54.13
Pub. 154 VII

Abbreviations

The following abbreviations may be used in the text:

Units

°C degree(s) Centigrade km kilometer(s)

cm centimeter(s) m meter(s)

cu.m. cubic meter(s) mb millibars

dwt deadweight tons MHz megahertz

FEU forty-foot equivalent units mm millimeter(s)

grt gross registered tons nrt net registered tons

kHz kilohertz TEU twenty-foot equivalent units

Directions

N north S south

NNE northnortheast SSW southsouthwest

NE northeast SW southwest

ENE eastnortheast WSW westsouthwest

E east W west

ESE eastsoutheast WNW westnorthwest

SE southeast NW northwest

SSE southsoutheast NNW northnorthwest

Vessel types

LASH Lighter Aboard Ship ro-ro Roll-on Roll-off

LNG Liquified Natural Gas ULCC Ultra Large Crude Carrier

LPG Liquified Petroleum Gas VLCC Very Large Crude Carrier

OBO Ore/Bulk/Oil

Time

ETA estimated time of arrival GMT Greenwich Mean Time

ETD estimated time of departure UTC Coordinated Universal Time

Water level

MSL mean sea level LWS low water springs

HW high water MHWN mean high water neaps

LW low water MHWS mean high water springs

MHW mean high water MLWN mean low water neaps

MLW mean low water MLWS mean low water springs

HWN high water neaps HAT highest astronomical tide

HWS high water springs LAT lowest astronomical tide

LWN low water neaps

Communications

D/F direction finder MF medium frequency

R/T radiotelephone HF high frequency

GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System VHF very high frequency

LF low frequency UHF ultra high frequency

Navigation

LANBY Large Automatic Navigation Buoy SPM Single Point Mooring

NAVSAT Navigation Satellite TSS Traffic Separation Scheme

ODAS Ocean Data Acquisition System VTC Vessel Traffic Center

SBM Single Buoy Mooring VTS Vessel Traffic Service

Miscellaneous

COLREGS Collision Regulations

IALA International Association of Lighthouse

Authorities

No./Nos.

PA

Number/Numbers

Position approximate

IHO International Hydrographic Office PD Position doubtful

IMO International Maritime Organization Pub. Publication

loa length overall St./Ste. Saint/Sainte
Pub. 181 IX

Contents

Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . II

Chartlet—Sector Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V

Conversion Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VI

Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VII

Sector 1

Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Sector 2

Greenland—West Coast—Kap Desolation to Nuuk (Godthab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Sector 3

Greenland—West Coast—Nuuk (Godthab) to Disko Bugt (Qeqertatsuup Tunua) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Sector 4

Greenland—West Coast—Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua) to the Svartenhuk Peninsula (Sigguup Nunaa) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Sector 5

Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Sector 6

Greenland—Southeast Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Scoresby Sund . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Sector 7

Greenland—East Coast—Scoresby Sund to Kap Morris Jesup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Sector 8

Iceland—West and North Coasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Sector 9

Iceland—East and South Coasts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Glossaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Pub. 181

1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolution

1.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 1 — CHART INFORMATION
3

Pub. 181

SECTOR 1 

GREENLAND—SOUTH COAST—PRINS CHRISTIAN SUND TO KAP DESOLATION

1.0 Plan.—This sector describes the S coast of Greenland from

Nunap Isua, first extending NE to the limits of the E entrance

of Prins Christian Sund, the Prins Christian Sund Passage, and

the other fjord-like passages in the Nunap Isua Archipelago,

then extending NW to Kap Desolation. 

General Remarks

1.1 The great fjords of southern Greenland, even during

the summer months, are subject to the influence of ice. As the

cold arctic current off the E coast flows S, it brings pack ice together with freshwater ice from the glaciers on the E coast of

Greenland. As the ice mass reaches the S tip of the W coast, it

is deflected N by a branch of the Gulf Stream up the W coast of

Greenland. As it moves N, it collides with larger masses of ice,

which are from the glaciers on the E coast of Greenland, especially from Disko Bugt.

In the coastal regions of this vast territory, there exists an almost continuous ice-free belt, which varies in width from 1 to

more than 100 miles. Between Nunap Isua and latitude 73°N,

the average width of this ice-free belt is 50 miles. The coast described in this sector, encompassing about 190 miles, consists

of a narrow strip of ice-free land at the back of which rises the

inland ice; it is mountainous and divided up by fjords, sounds,

and connecting channels much more than the other portions of

western Greenland. 

Courtesy of NASA

Southern portion of Greenland
4 Sector 1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation 

Pub. 181

1.1 The approaches to this part of the coast are, in general, deep

and clear; although, a comparatively shallow continental shelf

extends 12 to 33 miles offshore. In some places, narrow but

navigable inner routes lead between the off-lying islands and

the mainland. However, most of the inshore approaches are obstructed or narrowed by the innumerable rocky islets. The S

part of the W coast of Greenland forms the E shore of Davis

Strait and its S approach. This may be considered to include all

of the coastline situated between Nunap Isua (Eggers O) and

Disko Island, a distance of more than 600 miles. Julianehaab

(Qaqortoq) and Narssarssuaq (Narsarsuaq) are the principal

ports situated along this part of the coast. 

1.1 Winds—Weather.—It is difficult to describe the surface

wind field within the Baffin Bay/Davis Strait region because

the wind characteristics at most of the coastal stations are

largely determined by local influences which are not amenable

to regional generalization. There is also a frequent cyclonic activity which produces highly variable surface winds. Therefore,

a pronounced prevailing direction is not demonstrated. It has

been shown that at several stations the frequency data indicates

that, during the course of a year, the winds tend to blow as

much from one direction as another. In winter, the surface

winds along the coastal sections are directed from the interior

towards the coast. The speed of flow depends mainly upon the

steepness of the slopes, the narrowness of the fjords, and the

pressure gradient along the coast. These winds are strongest

and of longest duration when the temperature contrast between

the coast and the interior is greatest. Wind speeds under this

system have indicated gusts up to 75 knots.

1.1 Local topography plays a key role in determining wind speed

and direction. At many coastal points the winds are so local in

character that they bear little resemblance to the general pressure pattern. Sheltering bluffs and the trends of the fjords largely determine the local wind direction and speed at these stations.

1.1 Precipitation along the S part of Greenland and over the Baffin Bay and Davis Strait region reaches about 2,540mm annually. In contrast, the N part has only about 102mm. Snow is the

most common form of precipitation and is observed over the

Davis Strait area almost all year round, except during July and

August. 

1.1 Fog, precipitation, and blowing snow are the principal obstructions to visibility. Fog frequencies are highest during the

summer coincident with the navigational season. The belt of

most frequent fog formation lies along the coastal sections and

extends 20 to 30 miles seaward. This indicates that fog is not as

frequent over the open waters of the Baffin Bay and Davis

Strait area. During the summer, visibility of less than 2 miles is

common for 30 to 40 per cent of the time along the coastal sections of W Greenland, from Upernavik to Godthab or Nuuk.

Fog in this area is common for 10 to 16 days per month.

1.1 Tides—Currents.—The West Greenland Current flows N

along the SW coast of Greenland. Between the latitudes of

62°N and 63°N, a branch of this current flows W and then S

along the W side of the strait. The diminished main current

continues N round the head of Baffin bay. It then curves W and

S and is enhanced by water emerging from Nares Strait, Jones

Sound, and Lancaster Sound. This combined flow sets SE and

then S off the E coast of Baffin Island and is known as the Canadian Current.

1.1 In the S, the West Greenland Current swerves at a considerable rate, especially near the coast. During September, coastal

runoffs and tributary discharges result in average current rates

of 3 knots close inshore and 1.5 knots a few miles offshore.

During June, the corresponding rates are 1 knot and 0.75 knot

respectively.

1.1 The Canadian Current generally runs at a rate of 0.5 to 1

knot.

1.1 Along the S and W coasts of Greenland, the tides are semidiurnal or mixed. At some places considerable diurnal inequality occurs between successive H and LW. Mean tide ranges

vary from 1 to 3m at different locations. The tide progression is

clockwise along the Greenland coast. However, a solid cover of

Nunao Isua (Kap Farvel)

Southern portion of Greenland, including Disko Bugt and 

Baffin Bay
Sector 1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation 5

Pub. 181

ice may alter the tides to an extent where the times may be retarded and the ranges decreased.

1.1 Pilotage.—It should be noted that any person who is assigned to act in Greenland waters as “kendtmand”, a ship’s

guide with local knowledge, is not considered to be a pilot in

the sense of the word normally used in international shipping.

While serving on board, this ship’s guide with local knowledge, or as may be referred to as an “unlicensed pilot,” is to act

exclusively in an advisory capacity and the navigation of the

vessel is at no time to be entrusted to that person. 

1.1 Ice.—Most icebergs off the SW coast of Greenland originate

from the glaciers of the E coast. Having rounded Nunap Isua

(Kap Farvel) most of thes latter bergs drift NW and W to melt

in the central part of Davis Strait.

1.1 On the W coast, the chief iceberg-producing glaciers are

found in the region between Disko Bugt and Melville Bugt.

The glaciers in this region are said to produce thousands each

year. Some of these icebergs ground in the fjords into which

they are calved and never become free. The majority eventually

drift out into Baffin Bay, especially after the breakup of the fast

ice inshore in summer.

1.1 Once in the bay, these ice bergs drift under the influence of

currents and winds. Most ice bergs round the head of Baffin

Bay with the predominantly counterclockwise current, first

running N off the Greenland coast and then S off the coast of

Baffin Island.

1.1 Ice is sometimes found floating in the Arctic Ocean as an ice

island. An ice island is a large slab of ice whose horizontal dimensions may be measured in miles. They are derived from ice

shelves in the N coasts of Ellesmere Isand (Canada) and

Greenland. At rare intervals, ice islands or their remnants are

carried by the currents into some of the channels within the archipelago.

1.1 Ice Center Narssarssuaq (Narsarsuaq) transmits daily at

1200, 1400, and 2200 UTC, giving the latest information of ice

in S Greenland waters. Information is transmited by telex and

facsimile. Ships can, free of charge, request telegraphic information from Tasillaq (Ammassalik) Coast Radio Station

(OZL) or Qaqortq Coast Radio Station (OXF).

1.1 Caution.—Local magnetic anomalies have been observed

off the W coast of Greenland and in the N part of Baffin Bay.

1.1 Mirages and other visual distortions have been observed in

these regions. Halo phenomena and auroral displays of brilliance are somewhat common in these Arctic waters.

1.1 For the safety of vessels navigating in Greenland waters and

to assist in the coordination of SAR operations, two ship reporting systems have been established. GREENPOS is for vessels on passage to and from Greenland waters.

KYSTKONTROL is for vessels on coastal passage in Greenland waters. For further details on both systems, see Pub. 180,

Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean.

Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation

Fata Morgan mirage
6 Sector 1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation 

Pub. 181

Nunap Isua (Kap Farvel) to Prins Christian Sund

1.2 Nunap Isua (Kap Farvel) (59°47'N., 43°55'W.),

670m high, is the southernmost point of Itilleq (Eggers O). It is

fringed by numerous round-topped islets and rocks which extend up to 0.75 mile offshore. In addition, small islands and

dangerous rocks lie up to 4 miles offshore in the vicinity of this

point. When passing Nunap Isua (Kap Farvel) at a considerable

distance, it is difficult to identify any salient points in the area.

However, within 10 miles of the point, vessels can easily make

out the characteristic mountains on Itilleq (Eggers Island). It is

reported that Nunap Isua appears as a small clifftop. 

1.2 Caution.—Nunap Isua (Kap Farvel) is notorious for foul

weather and heavy seas. During gales, vessels approaching

from the E are advised to keep well clear of the point and make

a landfall farther up the coast. 

1.3 Nunap Isua Archipelago.—This island group, situated at the S extremity of Greenland, consists of several large islands which are mountainous and separated from the mainland

and each other by fjord-like passages.

1.3 Itilleq (Eggers Island) (59°51'N., 44°02'W.) rises to an elevation of 1,251m in its N part. It is nearly as high in its SW

part. The far N shore of the island is low and is in sharp contrast to the S shore which is bare and rocky. Two inlets indent

the S shore and are separated by a mountainous headland

which terminates in Nunap Isua (Kap Farvel). 

1.3 Avatdlerssuaq (59°49'N., 43°35'W.) lies off the E end of Itilleq and rises to an elevation of 491m. A group of five islets,

known as Saningassoq, lies close N of this island and off the

SE entrance to Ikeq (59°55'N., 43°50'W.) This channel leads

to that part of Prins Christian Sund Passage which forms Ilua

(60°11'N., 44°13'W.), another channel. 

1.3 When approaching Ikeq, vessels should bear E and N of the

islands mentioned, as much of these waters have not been adequately surveyed. Underwater hazards are reported to lie S of a

small island which is located 2.75 miles E of the N end of Saningassoq. Vessels should navigate E and N of this unnamed island and through the center of the channel. They should make

for a position situated opposite Quernertup Kangia and between the islands of Quernertoq and Sangmissoq. From this

position, vessels should favor the N side of the channel and

stay a little closer to Sangmissoq than to Itilleq (Eggers O). 

1.4 Christian IV Island (Christain IV O), lying on the S

side of Prins Christian Sund, is the largest island in the Nunap

Isua Archipelago. Glaciers are situated in the S and W parts of

this deeply-indented island. The S part of Christian IV Island is

almost severed by two narrow inlets; Manak extends W while

Tangnera (Tannera) extends E. 

1.4 Sangmissoq, located on the S entrance point of Tangnera

(Tannera), is the nearest settlement to Nunap Isua. 

1.4 Qernertoq (59°58'N., 43°26'W.), an island rising to an

elevation of 1,081m, lies with Pamiagdluk Kujatdlek, its S

extremity, situated 2 miles E of Serratit. 

1.4 Qernertup Kangia, a channel, is entered between Kap Serratit and Pamiagdluk Kujatdlek and leads N for 8.5 miles to the

entrance of Manak. It separates Qernertoq from the E side of

the S portion of Christian IV Island. Two islands lie in the S

part of the channel by Pilike Bay; several small islets and rocks

are reported to lie in the N part. 

1.4 Ikerasakasik, a narrow channel, leads N into Kipisako (Aqajaqqip Imaa) and separates Walkendorffs Oer from Qernertoq. 

1.4 Kap Hoppe (59°56'N., 43°15'W.), 562m high, is the SE extremity of Walkendorffs Oer, the SE of the larger islands which

form the archipelago. A submerged rock, visible at LW, lies 2

miles SW of the SW end of Walkendorffs Oer. 

1.4 Kingigtuarssuk, an island, marks the SE extremity of the

Akajaruanek Promontory. Several islands and islets lie in the

SE entrance to Aqajaqqip Imaa (Kipisako) in the vicinity of

Kingigtuarssuk. 

1.4 Qipingajaq and Sangmerqat (Sammeqqat) are two groups of

islands, islets, and rocks which lie off the E side of the Akajaruanek Promontory and extend about 1.7 miles E. 

1.4 Anchorage.—Anchorage is available, in a depth of 28m,

soft bottom, in Qasigissat (Qasigisat) (60°06'N., 44°06'W.), a

small bight located on the S side of the W extremity of

Christians IV Island. This anchorage affords shelter from all

winds; however, foul ground fringes the W entrance point of

the bight. 

1.4 Anchorage is also available in a small indentation on the E

side of the Akajaruanek Promontory, abreast the Qipingajaq Islands. 

Qernertoq
Sector 1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation 7

Pub. 181

1.5 When approaching Prins Christian Sund (60°04'N.,

43°02'W.) from the E, the land situated N of the entrance is

easily identified by the large sloping white expanse of a glacier.

In addition, high jagged mountains stand on the land situated S

of the entrance.

1.5 Aluk Avatdleq (Aluk Avalleq), located 6 miles N of the Prins

Christian Sund, is dark brown. The islands lying S of Aluk

Avatdleq are reddish brown and heavily scarred by ice action.

These islands are easily recognized and form good marks. 

1.5 Natsek Cove (Naajat Kangerluat), an indentation, is located

1.5 miles within the entrance of the sound. This is the site of

the Prins Christian Sund coast radio and weather station. Prominent radio masts stand at the highest point of the terrain and a

light is shown from a tower, 4m in height, standing near the

weather station. In addition to these landmarks, a conspicuous

tank stands on a small peninsula located in the SE corner of the

cove. Vessels should approach the station by heading for the radio masts on a course of 260°. At night, vessels should steer in

the white sector of the light, bearing between 263° and 288°. A

racon is situated at the light structure. 

1.5 There are no pilots, but persons with local knowledge are

available. There is a quay, 10m long, with a depth of 4m

alongside, located at the station. Small vessels up to 31m in

length and 3.1m draft have been handled alongside. The radio

station can be contacted by VHF. Tides rise about 3m at

springs and 1.5m at neaps. During the flood, the current off the

weather station sets SW at 2 to 4 knots; during the ebb, it sets E

and SE at 1 to 4 knots and may form eddies.

1.5 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor off the weather station at

Natsek Cove (Naajat Kangerluat). The berth is indicated by the

intersection of the alignments of two pairs of anchorage beacons; the E pair in line bear 130° and the W pair in line bear

220°. Vessels up to 80m in length and 6m draft have used this

anchorage. 

1.5 Caution.—During the winter months, Natsek Cove (Naajat

Kangerluat) has been found to be choked with bergs and growlers; therefore, vessels should not enter during this season. 

Prins Christian Sund Passage

1.6 The passage formed by the E part of Prins Christian

Sund, the connecting channel Ilua, and Torssukatak, has a total

length of 56 miles. During bad weather or unfavorable ice conditions which make it difficult to pass S of Nunap Isua, this

passage, when not blocked by ice, provides a safe and easy inner route. The greatest width of the passage is 2 miles, and it

narrows to a width of only 0.25 mile, 13 miles within the E entrance. The shore on either side of the passage is bold and precipitous. A small projection, forming a harbor for small craft,

is located at Aappilattoq (Augpilagtoq) (60°08'N., 44°18'W.),

on the NW side of the entrance to Ilua. A beacon stands on this

projection. A light is shown from close W of the beacon.

1.6 The depths throughout the passage are generally great. A

least fairway depth of 14.6m has been reported to lie in Ilua,

0.4 mile SSE of the small projection at Aappilattoq.

Prins Christian Sund

Prins Christian Sund Light
8 Sector 1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation 

Pub. 181

1.6 Caution.—A strong S set may be experienced in the approach to Prins Christian Sund.

Aappilattoq Beacon

Aappilattoq

Courtesy of Greg Wilkins - UK

Aappilattoq

Aappilattoq

Courtesy of Caroline Goodhart - UK

Aappilattoq

Courtesy of Caroline Goodhart - UK

Aappilattoq Harbor
Sector 1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation 9

Pub. 181

1.6 The frequent passage of low pressure in the Nunap Isua area

often causes very strong winds to blow through Prins Christian

Sund.

1.6 Submarine cables extend from Frederiksdal (60°00'N.,

44°39'W.) to the E end of Prins Christian Sund and S from the

E side of Nunarssuaq. Vessels are prohibited from anchoring in

the sound except in the designated berths.

1.7 Kangerdluk (60°10'N., 43°38'W.), a fjord entered 4

miles NNE of Aappilattoq, extends 4 miles NW. It affords anchorage at Puiattoq, in a depth of 55m, good holding ground,

1.25 miles within the entrance. An isolated shoal depth of 4.5m

is reported to lie in the middle of the entrance to this fjord. 

1.7 Svaerdfisken Havn, 3.5 miles WNW of the entrance to

Kangerdluk, affords good anchorage, in a depth of 59m, mud

and clay. The berth is indicated by two pairs of range beacons.

The indentation can be recognized by two small glaciers which

do not reach down to the water. 

1.7 Igdlorssuit Havn (Illorsuit Havn), located 10 miles WNW of

Svaerdfiskens Havn, affords anchorage on a terminal moraine

that slopes gradually into the sound from the foot of a wide glacier. 

Niaqornaq is the NW extremity of Christian IV Island. A

small islet, marked by a beacon, is located close NW of this

point. A narrow channel, lying between the islet and the point,

has a least depth of 12.8m and is navigable. The main and wider channel, which is the recommended one, leads NW and W

of the islet and has a least depth of 99m. From Niaqornaq, the

sound trends SSW for 2 miles, then NW for 2 miles, and enters

the SE side of Ilua.

1.7 Ilua Channel, the outer part of which forms the connecting

link between Prins Christian Sund and Torssukatak, leads N to

Kangerdluk Fjord (Kangerluk), Kangikitsoq, and Nup Kangerdlua (Nuup Kangerlua), its three branches. Good anchorage

may be obtained at the head of Kangikitsoq, where depths are

between 55 to 66m. Steep mountains with jagged peaks rise to

elevations of between 1,070m and 2,130m around the shores of

the channel. 

1.7 Nuk(Nuuk) (60°15'N., 44°10'W.), a small Eskimo settlement, stands on the narrow common entrance point of Kangikitsoq and Nup Kangerdlua (Nuup Kangerlua), situated 7 miles

NNE of the S entrance. Kangerdluk Fjord, the S branch of Ilua

Channel, should not be confused with the bay of the same

name that lies on the N side of Prins Christian Sund. 

1.7 Kangikitsoq, the main branch of Ilua, is entered N of Kangderdluk (Kangerluk). Two or three small glaciers descend to

the sea between the mountains at the head of the fjord. Vessels

can anchor at the head of the fjord, in depths of 56 to 66m. 

Niaqornaq Beacon

Courtesy of Greg Wilkins - UK

Entrance to Kangikitsoq

Courtesy of Greg Wilkins - UK

Kangikitsoq

Courtesy of Rob White - UK

Kangikitsoq
10 Sector 1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation 

Pub. 181

1.8 Torssukatak, which forms the SW end of Prins Christian Sund Passage, leads between the mainland and Pamiagdluk (Pamialluk) to the E side of the Davis Strait, a distance of

18 miles. Two small islets lie close off the S shore of the entrance to the channel; a beacon stands on the W islet. Pamiagdluk (Pamialluk), a large island located on the E side of the

channel, rises to an elevation of 1,371m. A beacon is reported

to stand on its W extremity. 

1.8 The depths in the channel are generally great, with a least

known fairway depth of 56m.

1.8 From its NE entrance, situated close SW of Aappilattoq,

Torssukatak extends N for 5 miles and then forms two

branches. Stordalens Havn, the smaller branch, extends NW

for 1.5 miles to a glacier at its head. The other branch leads E

along the N side of Pamiagdluk (Pamialluk) into Ilua.

1.8 Vessels can anchor, in a depth of 64m, in the outer part of

Stordalens Havn, but the inner part shoals rapidly.

1.9 Nunarssuaq, rising to an elevation of 939m, lies off

the S entrance to Torssukatak and is the W island in the Nunap

Isua Archipelago. A group of bare, precipitous islets and rocks,

forming the E side of the E approach to the channel, lie 1 mile

E of Nunarssuaq. Depths in the approach to the channel are

irregular, but the least reported depth in the fairway is 137m.

1.9 Qornoq, the channel separating Nunarssuaq from the mainland, forms the W approach to the S end of Torssukatak. The

least depth, in mid-channel, is reported be 90m. 

1.9 An isolated rock (position doubtful) lies about 1.5 miles SSE

of the S extremity of Nunarssuaq; above and below-water

rocks are reported to lie about midway between.

1.9 Anchorage is reported to be available on the W side of

Torssukatak in an indentation situated close N of the NE entrance to Qornoq. This anchorage affords good shelter from

winds and protection from drift ice floating in the sound.

1.10 Kangersuak Kujallek (Kap Christian) (59°47'N.,

44°05'W.), the SW extremity of Itilleq, lies 5.25 miles WNW

of Nunap Isua and rises to an elevation of 486m. 

Nunat (59°45'N., 44°11'W.) an islet 25m high, lies 4 miles

SW of the cape. A smaller islet, on which the sea breaks during

bad weather, lies 1.25 miles N of Nunat.

1.10 Qornoq, the channel separating Itilleq from the islands lying

to the W, is entered between Kangersuak Kujallek and Tornarssuk (Toornaarsut). The entrance is encumbered with numerous islets and rocks. Qeqertat, a group of islets, lies from 1

to 2.5 miles S of Tornarssuk (Toornaarsut). 

1.10 Pamiagdlup Kujatingua Sound separates Tornarssuk (Toornaarsut), 1,402m high, from Pamiagdluk (Pamialluk). There

are numerous islets and rocks lying on either side of the S entrance to this sound.

1.10 Quvnerit (Qunnerit), a wedge-shaped island, lies between

Tornarssuk (Toornaarsut) and Itilleq and rises to an elevation of

1,250m at its N end. 

1.10 Angnikitsoq (Annikitsoq) lies E of Pamiagdluk (Pamialluk)

South entrance of Torssukatak (Torsukattak) from S

Stordalens Havn

Qagik Beacon
Sector 1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation 11

Pub. 181

and is separated from the N shore of Quvnerit by Sivinganerup

Ima. Prominent peaks stand near the N and S ends of this island. 

Torrsukatak (Torsukattak) (Southwest End of

Prins Christian Sund Passage) to Kap Desolation 

1.11 Narsaq Kujalleq (Frederiksdal) (60°00'N.,

44°40'W.) is a small fishing port situated within the E entrance

point of Narssap Sarqa (Narsap Saqqaa), a short fjord. It stands

at the head of a bay, open to the S, which forms a small harbor. 

1.11 Medium-sized vessels can anchor, in depths of 18 to 26m,

clay and sand, good holding ground 0.5 mile S of the church in

the port. At the intersection of two pairs of range beacons,

small vessels can anchor 0.3 mile SSE of the church, in a depth

of 11m, good holding ground. 

1.11 When the main anchorage berths cannot be used because of

ice or swell, vessels may anchor within the small bays located

0.75 mile and 1.5 miles NNW of the church. There are no pilots, but persons with local knowledge are available. The harbor can be contacted on VHF channels 12 and 16 during the

day.

1.11 Narssap Sarqa (Narsap Saqqaa) is entered between Nugssuaq (59°59'N., 44°40'W.), the SE extremity of the Fredeiksdal

Promontory, and the SW extremity of the Ostproven Promontory, 2 miles W. Tikaquta (Tikaagutaa) Mountain, rising to an

elevation of 1,405m, stands at the head of this fjord. 

1.11 Range lights are established on Nugssuaq and, in line bearing 063°, lead from SW into the entrance of the fjord. A radio

mast stands close ENE of the rear light. 

1.11 Range lights are established on an islet lying off the

Osproven Promontory. They lead, in line bearing 285°, from E

into the entrance of the fjord.

1.11 Foul ground extends 0.75 mile N of Nugssuaq.

1.12 Klapmydsoerne is a chain of islands, islets, and rocks

separated from the mainland by Kitsissut Tunua. The chain

consists of two main groups, Nordlige Kitsissut (59°57'N.,

45°12'W.) and Sydlige Kitsissut, and extends in a general NW

direction for 19 miles from Naajat (Naujat) (59°52'N.,

44°57'W.), the southeasternmost island. 

1.12 Angissoq (59°59'N., 45°11'W.), the largest and highest island of the chain, lies 14.5 miles NW of Naujat. A peak, 101m

in elevation, stands near the center of the island. Several coves

and a bay indent the E side of this island. A beacon stands on

this projection; a light is shown from close W of the beacon.

Approaches to Nanortalik
12 Sector 1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation 

Pub. 181

1.12 Angissoq Havn is formed by the bay at the E side of the

island. There is a boat harbor and a quay, 10m long, with a

depth of 3m alongside. 

1.12 Anchorage can be obtained off the harbor, in a depth of 20m,

good holding ground, at the intersection of the alignments of

two pairs of beacons. Vessels of up to 80m in length and 6m

draft have been handled at this anchorage. Vessels discharging

bulk oil products anchor and secure their sterns to a point close

S of the quay. There is no pilot, but persons with local knowledge are available.

1.12 Nunarssuaq (60°02'N., 45°16'W.) is the pair of northwesternmost islands of the chain. A trading station is established on

this island during the fishing season in the Klapmydsoerne. 

1.13 Igdlukasik (Illukasik) (60°02'N., 44°51'W.), an island lying W of the Ostproven Promontory, is separated from

the mainland by a narrow channel, Igdlukasip Tunua (Illukaslip

Tunua). The seaward side of this island is fronted by several

small low islands and rocks which are, for the most part, covered with sharp gravel. 

1.13 Anchorage can be obtained in Igdlukasik Havn, a small bay

at the SE end of the island, in depths of 12 to 16m, good holding ground. A steep-to islet lies 0.3 mile SW of the entrance to

the bay which is narrow but deep in mid-channel. The tidal current can run strongly between this islet and the entrance.

Strong winds from SE and N are experienced in the anchorage.

1.13 The general route for vessels navigating between Frederiksdal and Nanortalik is through Kitsigsut Tunua. However, there

is an alternate inner route, for part of the passage, which is suitable for small coastal craft. This inner route, which has a least

depth of 5m in the fairway, runs through the channel situated

between Igdlukasik (Illukasik) and the islands and islets lying

close SW. The E entrance of the channel lies 1.25 miles S of

the SE extremity of Igdlukasik and is marked by a beacon. Local knowledge is required. 

1.13 Tasermiut Fjord is entered between the S end of a peninsula,

on which is situated the settlement of Tuapait (Tuapaat)

(60°07'N., 45°11'W.), and an unnamed point, 2 miles S. There

is high land on both sides of the entrance terminating on the E

side in Jakobinerhuen, a 634m high mountain. On the W side,

Tusardluarnaq, a 730m high mountain, stands 1.75 miles NNE

of Tuapait. There is much higher land, up to 2,100m in elevation, standing on both sides of the upper reaches of the fjord.

Within the fjord, the first 12 miles afford depths of more than

180m. The depths then decrease to 55m up to a position about

0.5 mile from the head. 

1.13 Close E of the middle part of the fjord, up the rapids of a rivulet,

there is a natural amphitheater, sheltered by high mountains,

which is called the “Greenland Eden” because of the amount of

vegetation, unusual for Greenland, which flourishes there.

1.13 Inigsugtalik (Inussuttalik), an island with a beacon standing

on its E side, lies 2.5 miles S of Tuapait. Numerous small islands, islets, and rocks extend N and NW from Inigsugtalik

across the SW approach to the fjord. 

1.13 Range lights are established at Taterakasik, on the S side of

the SE entrance point. In line, they lead S of Inigsugtalik and

toward the entrance of the fjord.

1.13 A light is shown from a structure, 7m high, standing close E

of the settlement at Tuapait on the NW side of the entrance.

Nanortalik Island lies with its S extremity located 3 miles

NW of Inigsugtalik. A headland, on the SW side of the island,

rises steeply from the sea; close N of it stands Qaqarssuasik, a

559m high mountain, which is easy to identify from seaward.

The W side of Nanortalik Island is fronted by islets and rocks.

A below-water rock lies about 2 miles W of the S extremity of

the islet.

1.13 A radiobeacon is located at the head of a bay at the SE end

of the island. It is reported that a small quay, with a depth of

7.3m alongside, has been constructed here.

1.14 Nanortalik Havn (60°08'N., 45°14'W.) (World Port

Index No. 560) lies on the E side of Nanortalik Island within

Kirkegaardsbugt (Kirkegardsbugten), a small bay open SE,

which forms a harbor having general depths of 10 to 30m. A

aeromnautical radiobeacon is located about 0.25 mile NW of

Nanortalik. 

1.14 The open season is from August to May. During summer

large amounts of polar ice usually occur. The port handles general cargo and containers.

1.14 Winds—Weather.—Very strong fjord winds can occur with

the passage of a low pressure system. Also, during the autumn

and winter periods, strong local mountain squalls can occur.

Tasermuit Fjord

Outside of Nanortalik
Sector 1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation 13

Pub. 181

1.14 Ice.—The harbor can usually be navigated from the middle

of June until the middle of January. Pack ice can hinder navigation from January to June.

1.14 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 3m at springs and 1.5m

at neaps. During mountain squalls and the passage of a low

pressure system, the water level in the harbor can be lower than

predicted.

1.14 Depths—Limitations.—There are two quays, 10 and 20m

long, with depths of 1.4 to 2m alongside. They are used by

small vessels with drafts up to 3.6m. A third quay, 30m long,

has 7.3m alongside. Vessels up to 4,000 dwt, with a maximum

length of 90m and a maximum draft of 6.5m, can be accommodated, although under extreme wind conditions, the maximum

draft is limited to 5.7m. There are also several buoys for stern

mooring.

1.14 The main approaches to the harbor are indicated by range

beacons and lighted ranges. The harbor can also be approached

from S by a deep channel, marked by unlit beacons, which

leads W of Inigsugtalik (Inussuttalik) and is part of the inner

route from Nanortalik to Sydproven (Alluitsup Paa). It is, however, easily blocked by ice. 

1.14 The narrow channel, similarly marked, between Nanortalik

and the mainland NE, has a least depth of 3m and is encumbered with below-water rocks, but affords a passage for small

vessels.

1.14 Pilotage.—Taking a pilot is not compulsory, but is advisable. An unlicensed pilot is available by making arrangements

with the Port Operator. 

1.14 Vessels should send request for pilot through Qaqortoq

(Julianehab), call sign “OXF,” or on VHF channel 12, 13 or 16.

The pilot boards off Akia or by arrangement. 

1.14 The Port Operator is to be advised of vessel’s ETA 24 hours

prior to arrival and may be reached through VHF extension

from Qaqortoq (Julianehab) or directly to Nanortalik Radio using VHF channel 13 or 16. 

1.14 Anchorage.—There is a designated anchorage berth, in

depths of 26 to 30m, marked by the intersection of the alignments of two pairs of lighted range beacons. Contact port officials for permission to anchor.

1.15 Sermersoq, lying N of Nanortalik Island, is the largest

island in Julianehaab Bugt and forms the W side of Sermersup

Sarqa. The mountains, particularly on the E side, are perpetually covered with ice and appear as towers and spires of an old

castle. Kitdlavat, the highest peak, rises to an elevation of

1,276m and, in good visibility, can be seen from a considerable

distance. 

1.15 Kangeq (Kap Egede) (60°11'N., 45°25'W.), the S extremity

of Sermersoq, is a steep headland fronted by islets and belowwater rocks which extend up to 1.5 miles seaward.

1.15 Niaqornaq, a small peninsula, projects from the W side of

Sermersoq, 7.5 miles N of Kangeq. Its seaward end is marked

by a beacon. Vessels can anchor on either side of the peninsula,

sheltered according to the direction of the wind.

1.15 Qornoq is a navigable channel leading between the SE side

of Sermersoq and Nanortalik. Semersup Sarqa, its continuation

between the middle part of Sermersoq and the mainland E, is

navigable. Thomsens O, located 1.75 miles NE of the N end of

Nanortalik Island, is a small island marked by a beacon on its

NE side.

1.15 Amitsoq, rising to a height of 870m, is a long and narrow island which lies between the NE part of Sermersoq and the

mainland to the E. 

Nanortalik

Nanortalik

Courtesy of Greg Wilkins - UK

Approaching Nanortalik
14 Sector 1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation 

Pub. 181

1.15 Angmalortoq, an island rising to a height of 1,253m, lies W

of Amitsoq and NE of the N end of Sermersoq in the entrance

to Sondre Sermilik Fjord.

1.15 Kanajormiut (60°24'N., 45°13'W.), an elongated island,

lies 1.5 miles N of Sermersoq and close off the S end of a high

peninsula of the mainland which forms the W side of Sondre

Sermilik Fjord. Below-water rocks and islets lie in the deep

channel situated between this island and Sermersoq. A beacon

stands on the easternmost islet. Anchorage is afforded off the E

side of Kanajormiut and in Niaqornarssuaqon, a small bay on

the S side of the mainland peninsula. These anchorages should

be approached from E as the W end of the narrow channel between Kanajormiut and the peninsula is foul.

1.15 Kangerdluak (Kangerdlua) (60°22'N., 45°16'W.) is a small

bay which indents the N side of Sermersoq Island. Qegertasugssuk, an islet 60m high, with a rock close NW, lies on the W

side of the entrance to this bay. A beacon stands on the islet.

Anchorage is available in the SE part of the bay, in a depth of

about 12m. It is sometimes exposed to N winds. 

1.16 Aputajuitsok, the highest mountain within this stretch

of coast, rises to an elevation of 2,103m about 75 miles N of

Kangeq.

1.16 Sagdlek (60°16'N., 45°29'W.) a chain of islets and rocks,

lies close W of Semersoq. Angissoq, the S islet of the chain,

lies 4.75 miles NNW of Kangeq and is marked by a beacon. A

radiobeacon is reported to be located on this islet. Vessels with

local knowledge can find sheltered anchorage among the islets

of the chain. A small islet and several below-water rocks lie

about 1 mile WNW of Angissoq. 

1.16 Igardlut (Ikardlut) (60°15'N., 45°38'W.), an above-water

rock, lies 4 miles WNW of Angissoq. A 7.3m shoal patch lies

about 0.5 mile N of the rock. Several below-water rocks lie

within 0.5 mile SW of the rock. 

1.16 Qeqertarssuatsiaq (60°21'N., 45°27'W.), an island, 225m

high, lies N of Sagdlek and 2 miles off the NW side of Sermersoq. Beacons mark N and S extremities of the island. Anchorage is afforded within a small bay, in depths of 7 to 11m,

situated midway along the E side of the island. 

1.16 Inuarugdligaq (60°23'N., 45°40'W.), an island, 166m high,

lies 5 miles WNW of Qeqertarssuatsiaq. This island can be

readily identified by its summit which looks like the crest of a

helmet. Arnargat, a group of islets, lies 1 mile E of the island.

Ikardlugssuit, a group of rocks, is located on a submerged ridge

which lies between the N end of Qeqertarssuatsiaq and Arnargat. Icebergs frequently ground on this ridge. 

1.16 Anchorage can be obtained off the NW side of Inuarugdligaq.

1.16 Unartoq Fjord is entered 16 miles N of Kangeq and is separated from Sermilik Fjord by a mountainous peninsula. Its entrance lies between the SW extremity of this peninsula and

Akuliaruseq, the S extremity of another peninsula, 7 miles

WNW. The fjord extends NE for 14 miles and its inner part

narrows to a width of less than 1 mile.

1.16 Tugtutuarssuk (Tuttutuarsuk) and Unartoq (Uunartoq) are

two islands which lie in the middle of the entrance to Unartoq

Fjord (Uunartoq Fjord). Tugtutuarssuk (Tuttutuarsuk), the outer and larger island, is cut almost in half by two small bays.

Anchorage is afforded, sheltered from N winds, in the bay on

the E side of the island. A small islet, marked by a beacon, and

several below-water rocks lies within 1 mile of the S side of the

island. 

1.17 Alluitsoq Fjord (Lichtenau Fjord) (60°28'N.,

45°30'W.) is entered between Akuliaruseq and Alluitsup Paa

(Sydproven), 1.75 miles SW. It extends in a general NE direction for 12.5 miles and is then divided into two arms by a broad

promontory on which stands Akuliarusersuaq, a conspicuous

mountain, 1,465m high. Sioralik is the NE arm; Qagdlimiut

Ima (Qagdlumiut Ima) is the NW arm. Amitsuarrssuk, an inlet,

opens off the NW arm. 

1.17 There are several drying rocks with a reef extending SW

from them to the coast in the approach to Lichtenau.

1.17 Alluitsup Paa (Sydproven) (60°28'N., 45°34'W.), the largest

settlement, is located on the low, indented and irregular tongue

of land which forms the W entrance point of the fjord. Kingigtoq Mountain, 513m high, with a cairn on its summit, stands

2.75 miles NW of Alluitsup Paa (Sydproven). Vessels up to

60m in length and 3.5m draft can anchor off this settlement,

but the berth is frequently affected by swell. 

1.17 There are a number of settlements in the fjord, including

Ammassivik (60°36'N., 45°24'W.), situated 3 miles within the

W entrance point, which is the site of an old Moravian Mission. Ruins of a number of Norse farms are found around the

shores of the fjord. Vessels up to 60m in length and 3.5m draft

have anchored off the settlement, but the berth is open to swell.

Although ice-free and navigable during periods between the

end of July to end of January, local knowledge is required.

1.17 Qallimiut (Qullumiut) (60°42'N., 45°22'W.), a small settlement, should be approached during daylight hours only. Ships

larger than 20m length should take anchorage in the bay off the

harbor inlet, in a depth of 15m. 

1.18 Inner Route—Nanortalik to Alluitsup Paa.—The

tendency for Julianehaab Bugt to act as a pocket for ice coming

N from Nunap Isua is accentuated by the fact that winter ice

does not usually form in the fjords between Nanortalik and Alluitsup Paa. Therefore, during spring and summer, there is no

outflow of melted ice water from them to keep ice coming

from Nunap Isua.

1.18 During the period of ice, between January and July, these islands act as a barrier to the ice. Within them there are three

routes by which navigation between Nanortalik and Alluitsup

Paa may be practicable, as follows:

1. The first route leads N from Nanortalik through Ikerasarssuk Channel and then E and N of Sermersoq. This

route can be used by vessels with drafts up to 4m; however,

there is a least depth of 3m in Ikerasarssuk Channel at LW.

2. The second route leads close S of the S extremity of

Nanortalik and then E of Sermersoq, joining the first route N

of Thomsens O.

3. The third route leads S of Nanortalik, S and W of

Sermersoq, and then E and N of Qeqertarssuatiaq.

1.18 Caution.—Parts of the second and third routes lead through

narrow passages but there is deep water throughout.

1.19 Alluitsup Paa to Julianehaab.—Between Alluitsup

Paa and the W extremity of Akia, a large island located 23

miles WNW, numerous islands, islets, and rocks extend for

several miles offshore. In the SW approach to Alluitsup Paa,
Sector 1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation 15

Pub. 181

there is a concentration of several islands with adjacent

dangers. The mainland coast is indented by a number of inlets

and fjords and vessels navigating inshore are advised to adhere

to the inner routes available between Alluitsup Paa and

Julianehaab.

Qaersup Kangia (Torssukatak), a small fjord situated W of

AlluitsoqFjord (Lichtenau Fjord), is entered between a point,

4.75 miles NW of Alluitsup Paa, and the SE extremity of the

Saarloq Peninsula, 5.5 miles W. The shores of this fjord are

heavily indented and its inner part is scattered with islets. 

1.19 Kinalita Mountain (60°34'N., 45°39'W.), 702m high,

stands N of the E entrance point and is conspicuous. Qeqertarssuaq Island lies in the entrance to the above fjord and restricts

the E and W channels. This fairly large island is surrounded by

great depths.

1.19 A group of islets, with adjacent dangers, lies W and S of the

Saarloq Peninsula and can best be seen on the chart.

1.20 Ikardluk (60°30'N., 46°05'W.), a rock, awash, lies

about 3 miles SSW of Sardlok. Numerous islets and rocks extend NNW for 5 miles from this rock to the islands which lie

off the mainland coast. 

1.20 A below-water rock, the position of which is doubtful, lies

about 4 miles SSW of Ikardluk.

1.20 A rock, with a depth of 4m, lies 4 miles WNW of Ikardluk.

The E side of the approach to Julianehaab Fjord lies between

this rock and the W extremity of Akia, 8 miles N. Numerous

Ammassivik

cove at Alluitsup Paa (Sydproven)

Alluitsup Paa (Sydproven)
16 Sector 1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation 

Pub. 181

dangers exist in this area they are covered by the red and green

sectors of Saarloq Light.

1.20 A 9.1m shoal patch lies 3 miles W of Ikardluk. The white

sector of Saarloq Light leads between this danger and the rock

mentioned above.

1.20 Caution.—Numerous sunken dangers have been reported

(1970) to lie in the area between Ikardluk and Alluitsup Paa.

1.20 Zacharias Havn (60°33'N., 45°55'W.), a narrow inlet, lies

1.5 miles NNW of Alluitsup Paa (Sydproven). A beacon is located on the S entrance point at Ilerssuit. Two islets lie in shoal

water N of the entrance point. The channel is about 0.1 mile

wide and has a minimum charted depth of 10m. 

1.20 Anchorage.—Vessels may anchor, in a depth of about 14m,

sand and clay, good holding ground, about 1 mile E of the S entrance.

1.20 Caution.—Shoal areas lie up to 0.2 mile from the coast; a

shoal, with a minimum depth of 6.2 m, is located near S of the

anchorage area. 

1.21 Talerua (60°33'N., 45°55'W.), an irregularly-shaped

island, lies off the SW side of the Saarloq Peninsula. Umanassuaq, a hill 365m high, stands on the NE end of the island.

Umanarssup Tunua, a narrow channel, leads between the SW

side of the peninsula and the NE side of the island. A bay, situated on the N side of the island, affords good anchorage for

medium-sized vessels, in a depth of 60m.

1.21 Saarloq (Sardloq) (60°32'N., 46°02'W.) is the northernmost

island of a group of islands and islets which lie close W of Talerua. Saarloq Light is shown from the NW islet.

1.21 Saarloq Havn, a settlement, is situated at the W end of the S

side of Saarlo. It is sheltered by the other islands of the group.

There is a small jetty and several mooring buoys in the bay.

Vessels up to 40m in length and 3.5m draft can anchor off the

jetty and secure their sterns.

1.21 Kangeq, a large island situated close E of Akia, is separated

on its N side from a mainland peninsula by Tuno, a channel 0.4

mile wide. Good anchorage, sheltered from the SE, can be obtained in the W bay on the N side of this channel.

1.21 Umanaq (Uummannaq) (60°35'N., 46°08'W.), an island,

205m high, lies 4.5 miles SW of Kangeq. A ridge, on which

stand several cairns, encircles the island. Anchorage can be obtained off the E side of the island, in a depth of 18m. 

1.22 Julianehabs Fjord is entered between the low-lying W

extremity of Akia (60°40'N., 46°13'W.) and the SE extremity

of Hollaendero, a large island 4 miles W.

1.22 All of the larger islands on this part of the coast are separated

by narrow intricate channels. Several bays, which indent their

shores, form good harbors and anchorages. Numerous smaller

islands, islets, and rocks obstruct the area, but Julianehaabs

Fjord, the main channel leading through these obstructions, is

clear. This fjord forms the recommended approach to the Port

of Julianehaab.

1.22 From its entrance, Julianehaabs Fjord extends 11 miles ENE

to Karrarmiut Island where a broad arm opens N to form

Qaqortoq Fjord. The main fjord then continues 4 miles farther

ENE to Qeqertarssuaq, beyond which it leads into Igaliko

Fjord.

1.22 There is a least charted depth of 27m in the fairway leading

from Julianehaab Fjord and along the W and N sides of Arpatsivik (60°47'N., 45°55'W.) to the anchorage at the head of the

fjord. The channel on the E side of Arpatsivik is encumbered

with rocks and shoals and considered unsafe for navigation. A

rock, awash, lies near the middle of the fjord about 1.25 miles

N of the NE end of Arpatsivik.

1.22 Ivigssuartoq, an islet marked by a beacon, is located 4.5

miles SSW of the E entrance point. Several above and belowwater rocks extend up to 1.5 miles N, S, and SW of this islet.

1.22 Qagssissalik, a small island, is located 2.5 miles S of the E

entrance point. An islet, marked by a beacon, lies 1 mile E of

this island. Numerous above and below-water rocks lie up to

0.75 mile E, S, and W of the island.

1.23 Paggivik Light (60°37'N., 46°11'W.) is shown from

an islet located 0.5 mile N of Qagssissalik.

1.23 Islets, rocks, and shoal patches encumber the W side of the

entrance to the fjord and extend up to 2.25 miles E and SE of

the W entrance point.

1.23 A 14.6m shoal patch was reported to lie about 9 miles SW of

Paggivik Light, but was reported (1979) not found by a vessel.

1.23 Pardlit, an island on the NW side of the fjord, is located 2

miles N of the E entrance point. Pardlit Light is shown from the

SE extremity of the island. Kilagtoq is an island located 0.5

mile N of Pardlit. A light is shown from its NE extremity.

1.23 Hvide Naes Light is shown from a point on the N shore of

the fjord, 3.5 miles ENE of Pardlit Light. A 9m shoal patch lies

2 miles WSW of Hvide Naes Light.

1.23 Isarut, a hill, 205m high, stands 0.5 mile within the W entrance point of the fjord and is prominent from seaward.

1.23 Because of their elevations, the mountains far inland to the

NE of the fjord entrance may be visible at considerable distances.

1.23 Approaching from SW, Redekammen Mountain (60°53'N.,

45°45'W.), 1,210m high, observed over the W end of Akia Island leads into the entrance clear of all dangers. Alternatively,

Ilimaussaq Mountain (61°00'N., 45°56'W.), 1,390m high, in

line with the highest point of Nordfjeld, 418m high, located 3

miles NNE of Pardlit Light, can be used.

1.23 Frequently, when these summits are obscured by cloud, Tugtutoq, a long island located 12 miles NW of the fjord entrance

becomes easy to identify. In the approach to the fjord, the island, which rises to an elevation of 449m, has the appearance

of a long, dark ridge sharply defined above the lower islands to

seaward of it.

1.23 At night, the approach and entrance fairways are indicated

by the various sectors of the above-mentioned lights.

1.24 Qaqortoq (Julianehaab) (60°43'N., 46°02'W.) (World

Port Index No. 580) is the largest town in southern Greenland,

with a population of approximately 3,200 inhabitants. The

main industry is fishing. There is also a fur manufacturer and

tannery in Qaqortoq.

1.24 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise an average of 2.8m at springs

and 1.4m at neaps. The current flows NW, but in the S part of

the port there is little effect.

Depths—Limitations.—Qaqortoq (Julianehaab) is located

on the N shore of Julianehaabs Fjord, 8 miles within its entrance. An inlet, open S, forms an inner and outer harbor. A

breakwater, 145m long, extends from the W shore and protects
Sector 1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation 17

Pub. 181

the inner harbor. A range indicates the fairway.

1.24 Atlantic Quay, the main wharf in the inner harbor, is 100m

long, with a depth of 6.6m alongside. Vessels up to 110m in

length and 6.5m draft have berthed at this quay.

1.24 The port is open, generally, throughout the year. However,

entry is restricted from 1 January to 31 July to only icestrengthened vessels.

1.24 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but is advisable. An

unlicensed pilot is availabe by arrangement with the Port Operator. Vessels should send request for pilot through Qaqortoq,

call sign “OXF” or by VHF. The pilot boards off Akia or by arrangement.

1.24 The vessel’s ETA is to be advised to the Port Operator 24

hours prior to arrival. 

1.24 Winds—Weather.—Winds from E and NE are the most frequent, occurring as stiff breezes during the summer, but as

storms during the winter months. Strong winds also blow from

NW and WNW. Winds from S are less frequent, but raise a

heavy sea and swell in the port. Winds from SW, W, and NW

can set ice into the harbor.

1.24 Anchorage.—Contact port officials for anchor positions.

1.25 Qaqortoq Fjord, fronted by Karrarmiut Island, is entered between the E entrance point of Julianehaab outer harbor

and an unnamed point, 4 miles ENE.

1.25 A large part of the S end of the fjord is occupied by Arpatsivik, an island 425m high, which lies off the E shore. The narrow channel between the E shore and the island is encumbered

by rocks and shoals.

Upernaviarsuk (60°45'N., 45°54'W.) consists of a research

station and a jetty, 10m long, with a depth of 3.5m alongside.

Anchorage, in depths of 10 to 70m, can be taken off the station,

but the holding ground is poor. Spring tides rise to 2.8m.

1.25 Qaqortoq Fjeld, a mountain rising to 1,059m, stands 1 mile

N of the entrance to Tasiussaq (60°50'N., 45°43'W.) the E of

three small inlets which indent the N shore of the fjord. The ruins of Qaqortoq Church, the best preserved of all the old Norse

buildings in Greenland, are situated on the shore of the fjord

below this mountain. 

1.25 Anchorage.—Vessels can obtain anchorage off a pebble

Qaqortoq Harbor

Qaqortoq (Julianhabb)

Qaqortoq (Julianhabb) Harbor

Upernaviaksuk research station and jetty
18 Sector 1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation 

Pub. 181

beach, which fronts the church, in a depth of 37m, good holding ground. However, vessels should approach the anchorage

on a course of 090° to avoid a rock, awash, which lies about 0.1

mile offshore W of the anchorage. There is also foul ground E

and S of the anchorage.

1.26 Igalikup Kangerlua (Igaliko Fjord) (60°44'N.,

45°45'W.), a continuation of Julianehaabs Fjord, is entered 7

miles E of Julianehaab harbor and is fronted by Qeqertarssuaq,

an island 212m high. From this island, the fjord extends NE for

18 miles to a broad promontory where it divides into two arms.

Settlements are located at the extremities of each of these arms.

A least depth of 16.5m is reported to lie in the fairway.

1.26 Igaliku (Igaliko) (60°59'N., 45°26'W.) is the small settlement which is situated at the head of the NW arm. It stands on

the site of Gardar where there are the relics of an old Norse cathedral and Bishop’s residence. Two islets and a rock, with a

depth of less than 2m, lie at the head of the arm about 0.5 mile

NE of the settlement. The remains of several old Norse farms

also lie in the vicinity.

1.26 Vessels may anchor off the settlement or berth at the quay;

the quay can handle vessels up to 35m long and 3m draft. 

1.26 Spring rise is up to 3.5m; neaps rise up to 1.4m. The tidal

current at the berth runs E and SE at 1 knot, and less at the anchorage. With the Southeaster, the water level reduces to 1m

below chart datum.

1.27 Pardlit Island is the farthest NE of a group of three

main islands and several islets and rocks lying on the NW side

of Julianehabsfjord. Agssakataup Nuna and Sivingarngup Nuna are the other two main islands in the group.

1.27 Ikerassaq Qiterdleq is a navigable channel which leads along

the SW side of Agssakataup Nuna. A beacon stands on an islet

located on the S side of the W entrance to this channel.

1.27 Kilagtok, an island of irregular shape, lies close N of the

group. A narrow channel leads between this island and the

mainland E into Mato Lob (60°45'N., 46°17'W.) and Skovfjord.

1.27 Mato, a small island, lies 0.5 mile N of the N extremity of

Kilagtok in the entrance to Singitsut, a small cove. A beacon

stands on its NW side.

1.28 Hollaendero, a large island, forms the W side of the

entrance to Julianehaabs Fjord and the E side of the entrance to

Skovfjord. Hollaendero Havn (MacMillan Harbor) is formed

by an inlet and several small islands, which lie close offshore,

at the SE end of Hollaendero. Vessels can anchor in the inlet, in

a depth of 30m, but the anchorage is open to the entry of ice.

1.28 The main advantage of the harbor is that it provides access to

the hills on Hollaendero from where an excellent view of ice

conditions at sea can be obtained.

1.28 Qeqertasugssuk, an indented small island, lies close off the

middle of the E side of Hollaendero.

1.28 Qatitit, another small island, lies off the NE side of Hollaendero. It is marked by beacons standing on the SE and NW extremities.

1.28 Ikerasarssuk, a narrow channel, leads S of Qatitit and between the N side of Hollaendero and the S side of Kingigtoq. It

is navigable and part of the inner route system. The channel has

a least width of 0.12 mile and a least depth of 10m in the fairway, but is sometimes obstructed by pack ice. 

1.29 Skovfjord (Skovfjorden), with its inner continuation

called Tunugdliarfik, is situated W of Julianehaabs Fjord. The

recommended entrance lies between the W end of Hollaendero

and Simiutaq, 1 mile W. 

1.29 From the entrance, the fjord extends NE for 19 miles to the

SW end of a peninsula which projects from the mainland. Both

sides of the fjord are bordered by islands and islets. Near this

peninsula, the fjord divides into two arms. The NE arm is

known as Tunugdliarfik. Narssaq Sund, the NW arm, connects

the fjord to Bredefjord.

1.29 Within the entrance, Skovfjord narrows in places to a width

of under 1 mile, but the depths in the fairway are great.

1.29 The fjord may be approached by channels which lead E and

W of Simiutaq; however, the W channel is encumbered with

rocks and shoals and frequently blocked by ice. 

1.29 Ilimaussaq, 1,390m high, stands on the mainland 27.5 miles

NE of Simiutaq and is an excellent mark. In addition, the long

island of Tugtutoq, 450m high, is located 12 miles NNE of Simiutaq and is easy to identify.

1.29 Range beacons stand on the W side of Hollaendero and, in

line, lead into the fjord.

1.30 Angissit (60°38'N., 46°43'W.), a rounded islet, 30m

high, is located at the outer end of a chain of islands, islets, and

rocks which extend 4.5 miles SW from Simiutaq. Two beacons

stand on this island. A drying rock (position doubtful) lies

about 3 miles E of Angisit on the W side of the approach to the

fjord. Other dangers lie within 2 miles E, 6 miles WSW, and 8

miles W of Angisit and may best be seen on the chart.

1.30 Qioqe, 15m high, is the largest of a group of three islets located 2.5 miles S of the front range beacon on the W side of

Hollaendero. This oval-shaped island is black in color and easy

to identify, even at night, with the sea breaking over it. There

are several shoals in the vicinity of Qioqe; several rocks, some

of which dry, lie between it and the S coast of Hollaendero.

Shoal patches, with depths of 12m and 16m, lie about 1 and

2.25 miles, respectively, SW of Qioqe on the E side of the approach to the fjord.

1.30 Simiutaq, on the W side of the recommended entrance, is

marked by three radio masts which stand close together near

Sivingarngup Nuna Beacon
Sector 1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation 19

Pub. 181

the center of the island. A mast, 61m high, stands on the SW

part of the island. It is reported that a radiobeacon is located at

this mast.

1.30 It is reported (1992) that a racon is located on a small islet

lying off the SE side of Simiutaq.

1.30 Anchorage can be obtained close within the entrance to Skovfjord, in a narrow inlet on the SE side of Simiutaq, at the

head of which stand the previously-mentioned radio masts.

1.30 Caution.—Any approach to the shore in the vicinity of the

entrance must be made with caution because of the many small

islets and rocks which may be scarcely visible. Vessels approaching the fjord from the W should keep well to seaward of

the overfalls and breakers charted W and WSW of Angisit.

These may indicate the presence of below-water rocks and other uncharted dangers.

1.30 The entrance to Skovfjord is the least conspicuous of any of

the various fjord entrances situated along this coast.

1.30 A W set, of up to 2 knots, may be encountered in the approaches.

1.31 Niaquornap Nunaa (60°44'N., 46°35'W.) is the largest island in the chain which forms the NW side of Skovfjord.

Its N shore is deeply indented. Several beacons, marking inner

routes for small coastal craft, stand on the island. Hvide

Humpel Lob, a narrow channel, leads between Niaqornap and

Kerrortuskok, a small island SW, and forms part of the inner

route system. An alternative inner route is through Nordlysets

Lob, which leads between Kerrortuskok and Avatarmiut, close

SW. It has the disadvantage that a single iceberg can block it

and the tidal current runs strongly through it.

1.31 Igdlukasik (Illukasik) lies on the NW side of Skovfjord 2.5

miles NE of Niaqornap. Mathaeus Havn, an inlet at the NE end

of this island, affords the only anchorage within Skovfjord for

large vessels. The berth has a depth of 40m, good holding

ground, in shells, pebbles, and mud. However, it is not recommended during S and SE winds. In addition, ice has been

known to fill the inlet. Depths in the inlet shoal gradually from

deep water, at the entrance, to 13m, at about 0.1 mile from the

head. Below-water and drying rocks lie close off both sides of

this inlet.

1.31 Qangue, a small island, lies close NE of Igdlukasik. There is

a settlement on the island. A rock, which dries, lies in the channel between the two islands.

1.31 Kingittoq, the largest island on the SE side of the fjord, lies

close N of Hollaendero 

1.31 Alangorssuaq, a narrow peninsula extending SW for 12

miles from the mainland, forms the SE side of Skovfjord NE of

Kingittoq. A beacon stands on its SW extremity.

1.31 Kangerdluarssuk, a fjord on the SE side of Alangorssuaq,

can be entered from either Skovfjord or from Mato Lob, the inner channel leading from Julianehaabs Fjord (see paragraph

1.22). A high, dark islet, with a cairn on its summit, fronts the

mouth of a salmon river situated close within the W entrance

point of Kangerdluarssuk. Anchorage can be obtained 0.2 mile

NE of this islet, in a depth of 64m, good holding ground.

1.31 Eqalugaarsuit (60°37'N., 45°55'W.), a settlement, is situated on the mainland coast at the head of a narrow inlet. This inlet opens off a small bay on the S side of the entrance to

Kangerdluarssuk, at its junction with Mato Lob. There is a

small harbor with depths of 2.8 to 6.6m. Vessels up to 40m in

length and 3m draft can berth with an anchor down and their

sterns secured to the S shore. Larger vessels can anchor off the

harbor, in a depth of 50m.

1.31 Igdtalik (Igdlutalik), on the S side of Narssaq Sund, is the innermost island of the chain which forms the NW side of Skovfjord. An 8.8m shoal patch lies about 0.75 mile N of the NE

extremity of this island.

1.31 Narssaq Pynt, a projection, is located 2 miles ENE of the NE

extremity of Igdtalik. It marks the junction of Skovfjord,

Narssaq Sund, and Tunugdliarfik.

1.32 Narsaq (Narssaq) (60°55'N., 46°03'W.) (World Port

Index No. 585), a large settlement, stands on the mainland

coast at the head of a cove 1.25 miles NW of Narssaq Pynt. A

radiobeacon is reported to be situated close SE of the settlement. 

1.32 Winds—Weather.—Winds from the SE occur most frequently, but they can be accompanied by very strong mountain

squalls. Winds from the SW rarely occur, but do so without

previous warning, sending a violent sea and swell into the harbor.

1.32 Tides—Currents.—Spring tides rise 3m and neap tides

1.6m. Winds from SW can raise the water level by as much as

0.3m. Winds from NE can lower the level by the same amount.

1.32 Depths—Limitations.—West Harbor, located in the cove,

Narsaq

Narsaq
20 Sector 1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation 

Pub. 181

can be used by small vessels which anchor and moor stern-to,

in depths up to 8m.

1.32 East Harbor is located in a bay close SE of the settlement.

There are mooring buoys in the E part of the harbor. There is a

quay for fishing vessels and a small oil jetty in the N part of the

harbor. The main quay is 60m long, with a depth of 8.3m

alongside. Vessels up to 135m in length and 7.5m draft can be

accommodated alongside. Vessels can also anchor in the middle of the harbor, in a least depth of 20m. The recommended

anchorage berth lies at the intersection of the alignments of two

pairs of range lights. 

1.32 A small islet, connected to the coast by a spit, is located on

the E side of the entrance to the cove. A 3.4m shoal patch lies

0.1 mile NW of the islet, at the S end of a bank with depths of

less than 10m, which occupies the central part of the entrance

to the cove.

1.32 When anchoring in East Harbor, local knowledge is required

due to the presence of outfall pipelines and poor holding

ground.

1.32 The open season is March to February, but winter ice may

occur and close to the port during summer. It is reported that

only ice-strengthened vessels may enter the port from January

to early August. 

1.32 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory but is recommended.

An unlicensed local pilot is available. Vessels should send an

ETA at least 24 hours in advance. The harbor may be contacted

on VHF channels 13 and 16 or via Julianehaab radio. 

1.32 Tunugdliarfik, a continuation of Skovfjord, is entered E of

Narssaq Pynt. There is high land around it, with elevations

reaching 1,750m on Igdlerfigssalik, 24 miles ENE of the entrance. The sides of the mountains fall steeply down with a

continuous steep gradient underwater, so that, with few exceptions, it is possible to approach quite close to the shores of the

fjord and still find deep water.

1.32 Tunugdliarfik Fjord extends for 21 miles and then branches

into two arms. The NE arm, known as Qoroq, extends to a glacier at its head. The other arm, known as Narssarssuaq Reach,

trends N for 10 miles to Qinqua, a bay lying at its head.

1.32 Anchorage.—Anchorage, suitable for an extended time, can

be obtained at the head of Narssarssuaq Reach, in depths of 18

to 29m. Tidal currents are reported to attain a rate of 1 to 1.5

knots in the reach.

Narsaq

Narsarsuaq and airport, right side
Sector 1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation 21

Pub. 181

1.33 Narsarsuaq (Narssarssuaq) (61°09'N., 45°26'W.)

(World Port Index No. 590) is locate inside Skovfjord and

Tunulliarrrfik. The settlement is situated on the E side of the

reach approxiamtely 4 miles within the entrance. The port is

open from May to November and closed during the winter

months because of ice accretion. There are facilities for handling cargo and small containers.

1.33 A pier, 140m long, extends from the shore. There are depths

of 6 to 11m alongside its W side and 5 to 8m alongside its E

side. Vessels up to 130m in length and 8m draft have been accommodated.

1.33 A meteorological observation station and airfield are located

here.

1.33 Winds—Weather.—Winds from the SE can reach very

strong gale strength. In addition, mountain squalls can blow

out of Qoroq. There is heavy mooring equipment on the quay

and it should be used by larger vessels during SE winds.

1.33 Ice.—An ice patrol and reporting service covering West

Greenland is operated from Iscentralen Narsarssuaq

(61°09'N., 45°25'W.). See Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean for further information.

1.33 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise 3.0m at springs and 1.6m at

neaps. Strong winds from the SE may lower the water level by

up to 1m.

1.33 Pilotage.—There are no pilots, but persons with local

knowledge are available. An ETA should be sent at least 24

hours in advance. The port may be contacted by VHF.

1.33 The port is ice-bound during the winter and is open to entry

only during the season from about mid-May to mid-October.

1.33 Caution.—Areas outside the fairway are not sufficiently

well charted for vessels to proceed into them without local

knowledge.

1.33 A strong NE current can occur off the pier. The pier is not

solid and caution is advised during berthing.

1.33 Qassiarsuk (Qagssiarssuk) (61°09'N., 45°31'W.) a small

settlement, is situated on the W side of Narssarssuaq Reach opposite Narssarssuaq. It is reported to be the site of Eric the

Red’s farmstead. There is a jetty for small craft. Vessels can anchor off the settlement, in a depth of 16m.

Ikersauq (Bredefjord) (60°46'N., 46°47'W.) is the longest

and deepest of the fjords which open off Julianehaab Bugt. It

trends NE for 27 miles to the junction with Narssaq Sund.

Nordre Sermilik, the inner NW continuation of the fjord, has

two arms, which both terminate in large glaciers.

1.33 Bredefjord is entered between Qarmat (Karmat) (60°44'N.,

46°55'W.) and Upernivik, another island 2 miles NW. It can be

safely navigated in mid-channel and has a least width of 1.5

miles. The SE side of the fjord is formed by a chain of islands

which separate it from Skovfjord; the largest of these islands is

Tugtutoq.

1.33 From the approach to Bredefjord, several mountains along

with the lower but still prominent island of Tugtutoq, located in

front of them, can all be seen at considerable distances in good

visibility. Closer in, Upernivik Island, brown in color, appears

to stand out well against the background. A number of beacons

and a cairn stand on Qarmat Island.

1.33 Avatlek (Ydero) (60°41'N., 47°04'W.), a small islet lying 5

miles SW of Qarmat, is located at the seaward end of a chain of

islands, islets, and rocks on the SE side of the approach to the

fjord. Several dangers lie within about 1 mile of this islet and

may best be seen on the chart.

1.33 Caution.—Areas lying SW, S, and SE of Avatleq have not

been completely surveyed. Vessels should use extreme caution

in this vicinity.

1.34 Inugsugtut, another islet in the chain, lies 1.5 miles

WSW of Qarmat. A light is shown from a tower, 5m in height,

standing on this islet. The white sectors of this light, bearing

ahead and astern, lead into the entrance and up the fjord.

1.34 It is reported (1993) that a racon is situated at the light structure.

1.34 Avatdleg (Avalleq) (60°43'N., 47°15'W.), a rocky islet, 9m

high, is located at the seaward end of a chain of islands and islets on the NW side of the approach to the fjord, 7 miles WSW

of Upernivik. Shoal patches, with depths of less than 5m, lie

within 1 mile of this islet and may best be seen on the chart. 

1.34 Takissoq, an island in the chain, lies 2.25 miles NE of Avatdleg and is marked by a beacon. Shoal patches, with depths of

less than 12m, lie within 1 mile SE of the island on the NW

side of the approach fairway and may best be seen on the chart.

Narsarsuaq airstrip-foreground, Qassiarsuk-background

Qassiarsuk, opposite Narsarsuaq
22 Sector 1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation 

Pub. 181

1.34 When approaching from E, vessels should keep well to seaward to avoid the many dangers which lie along the coast between Skovfjord and Bredefjord.

1.34 Ice.—Although Bredefjord usually contains glacier ice, it is

generally navigable. Icebergs, which calve from the glaciers in

the N part of Nordre Sermilik, may inconvenience navigation

after the winter ice has broken up.

1.35 Apoqataq, located close E of Upernivik, is a small island on the NW side of Bredefjord. When ice blocks the main

entrance, the fjord can be entered by passing close W and N of

Upernivik and N of Apoqataq. There is a least depth of 12.8m

in the passage between Apoqataq and the S part of Qaarsuarsuk

(Kanertek), lying close N.

1.35 Anchorage.—Hoyers Havn. a small cove, indents the N side

of Qarmat. Other than during E or NE winds, vessels are able

to anchor in this cove with their sterns secured to the shore, and

their bows to the NE. Vessels can also anchor in Apoqataq

Havn, an open bay indenting the S side of Apoqataq Island, in

depths of 31 to 33m, good holding ground.

1.35 Unertoq (Unektok), 45m high, is an islet located on the SE

side of the fjord 0.25 mile E of the E extremity of Qarmat. Its

summit is marked by a cairn; a beacon stands on its N end.

1.35 Lille Tugtutoq (60°45'N., 46°48'W.), an island located N of

Unertoq, extends NE for 5 miles on the SE side of Bredefjord.

Numerous islets lie close off all its sides except that which faces the fjord. The SW part of the island rises to a summit, 150m

high, and several cairns stand along its SW shore.

1.35 Putdlatit, a small island, lies close off the S side of Lille Tugtutoq, 2.5 miles E of Unertoq. Constance Havn (60°44'N.,

46°46'W.) is located in a bay which indents the S side of this

island. Vessels can anchor here, in a depth of 15m. When approaching from the W, a useful landmark is the ruins of an old

house which stand on a flat headland close W of the harbor.

When approaching from the E, two round hills, standing on a

headland close E of the harbor, are useful marks. Within the

harbor, there are depths of 5.3 to 16.5m. It is spacious and affords protection from drifting ice. 

1.35 Anchorage can also be obtained within a small bay, located

close NE of the E entrance point of Constance Havn,(60 in a

depth of 20m.

1.35 Qaarsuarsuk (Kanertek), a large irregular island, lies on the

NW side of Bredefjord, with its S extremity located close N of

Apoqataq. Kangerdluarssuk, the larger of two inlets, which indent the SW side of the island, extends in a NE direction for 6

miles and to within 2.5 miles of the NE shore. On its NE side,

Qaarsuarsuk is separated from the mainland by a channel

known as Torsukatak, the entrances of which are encumbered

with islets. A prominent mountain, 507m high, stands on the

NW side of this channel; its summit is marked by a cairn.

1.35 Tugtotoq lies close NE of Lille Tugtotoq and extends in a NE

direction for 17 miles. This conspicuous island is bisected, near

its middle, by deep inlets.

1.36 The Qassimiut Islands is a group of islands and islets

located between the entrances to Bredefjord and Qaqaligatsiaq

Fjord (Kakaligatsiak Fjord). A small islet lies about 390m S of

the outermost islet of this group. 

1.36 Qassimiut (Qagssimiut) (60°47'N., 47°10'W.), the easternmost island of the group, is located 6 miles NW of Inussuttuut

Light and is surrounded by numerous islets and rocks. 

1.36 Qassimiut’s harbor is situated in a small inlet, with the settlement on its W and N sides. Smaller craft can berth alongside

the jetty where depths are from 1.3 to 3m. The largest vessel

berthed at the jetty was 30m long, with a draft of 3m on HW.

Vessels can anchor, in 20m, about 100m SE of the jetty; however, larger vessels should also use the stern moorings to the

ringbolts, one on each side of the inlet. Tankers anchor about

100m from the leading beacon and use stern moorings off the

tank farm. The holding ground in both places is good, but with

SE or N winds, vessels should leave the anchorage in good

time before the heavy swell sets in. 

1.36 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents run strong in the sound

W of the settlement but weaken inside the inlet. Spring tides

rise to 2.4m; neap tides rise to 1.7m. The maximum tidal rise

can reach 3.5m 

1.36 The inner route for small coastal craft leads across the mouth

of Ikersauq (Bredefjord), S of the islets and rocks lying off the

SE end of Qagsimiut, and W into either Nordlige Maagelob or

Sydlige Maagelob, two navigable channels which lead through

the islands into Qaqaligatsiaq Fjord. Nordlige Maagelob, the N

channel, is the preferred one, having a least depth of 9.1m in

the fairway. Sydlige Maagelob, the S channel, is often affected

by ice conditions at its E end. Both channels are marked by

beacons and local knowledge is required.

1.36 Avatdlianguak (Avatdlinguaq) (60°43'N., 47°22'W.), with a

below-water rock lying 1 mile WSW, is the outermost islet of

the group.

1.36 Numerous shoal patches and rocks front the seaward side of

the group and may best be seen on the chart.

1.36 Caution.—Kekertat Oerne (Qeqertat Oerne) (60°35'N.,

47°34'W.), a group of low islets and rocks, lies about 10 miles

SW of Avatdlianguak. 

1.37 Qaqaligatsiaq Fjord (Kakaligatsiak Fjord) is an open

bay lying between the Qassimiut Islands, to the E, and the large

island of Nunarssuit, with its fringing islets, to the W. It can be

entered between the island of Unamaq (Unamai) (60°43'N.,

47°40'W.) and the islets of the Satut Group, 1.5 miles E, or between Unamaq and the coast of Nunarssuit, 0.5 mile NW.

1.37 The approaches are encumbered in places by islets, rocks,

and shoal patches; local knowledge is necessary.

1.37 The inner continuation of the fjord, known as Sermilik (Sermitsialik), extends for 14 miles to a glacier. The SE side of Sermilik is formed by a chain of islands, but little is known about

them or the passages leading between them.

1.37 Ice.—The islands, which form the E side of the fjord, are the

first of those along the route from Julianehaab to Nunarssuit to

become ice bound in winter. Icebergs can also block the E entrance to Nordlige Magelob, but this channel, unlike Sydlige

Maagelob, is seldom obstructed.

1.38 Nunarssuit (60°45'N., 48°00'W.) the largest island in

this vicinity, is located with Alangorssuak to the NW, close off

the mainland coast between the entrances to Qaqaligatsiaq

Fjord (Kakaligatsiak Fjord) and Kobberminebugt (see paragraph 2.3). Both of these large islands are fronted, on their W

sides, by groups of small islands and islets. 

1.38 The S side of Nunarssuit is steep and rugged, but by contrast,
Sector 1. Greenland—South Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Kap Desolation 23

Pub. 181

its N side is quite low, with flat plains. Malenefjeld, a steep

mountain 494m high, stands close to the E end of Nunarssuit

and is conspicuous from seaward.

1.38 Torssukatak and Ikerasagssuaq, two narrow channels, form a

passage, 22 miles long, leading N of Nunarssuit. They are used

by small coastal craft navigating the inner route system between Julianehaab and Ivigtut. Local knowledge is required.

The channels, marked by beacons, join in a narrows, about

45m wide, at Knaekket, a flat point located on the SE end of

Alangorssuak. 

1.38 Torssukatak, lying between Nunarsuit and Alangorssuaq, is

characterized by steep shores and subject to almost constant

fogs.

1.38 Ikerasagssuak, lying between Nunarsuit and the mainland,

has lower and more sloping shores and is less foggy. That part

of the narrows lying at the W end of Ikerasaqssuaq is the most

difficult part of the passage to navigate because of a very swift

tidal current which attains a rate of 4 knots. The flood stream

sets W and the ebb stream sets E through both channels.

1.38 There is a least depth of 7.5m in the center of the fairway of

the combined sounds; this depth occurs in the narrows at the E

end of Torsukatak. A hill, 185m high with two conspicuous

small summits, stands at the W entrance to Torsukatak on the

NW extremity of Nunarsuit.

1.38 Ice.—Torssukatak is frequently filled with pack ice from

seaward. However, the outflow of water from Sermilik through

Qagaligatsiaq Fjord (Kakaligatsiak) keeps the drifting pack

from penetrating into Ikerasagssuaq. Locally formed winter ice

is more prevalent E of the narrows than to the W. Generally, the

channels are not completely open throughout their length until

the first half of June. Vessels capable of forcing the ice can use

them from early May.

1.38 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained in a bay at Bangs

Havn, 2.5 miles E of Knaekket, in a depth of 15m, clay. Anchorage may also be obtained in a cove at Aurora Havn, 9.5

miles ESE of Knaekket, in depths of 13 to 15m. Vessels may

use a single anchor or secure their sterns to the N shore.

1.39 Kap Thorvaldsen (60°40'N., 47°54'W.), the S extremity of Nunarsuit and the NW entrance point of Julianehaab

Bugt, is situated 7.5 miles SW of Umanaq (Umanai). The shore

between is fronted by islets, rocks, and shoal patches. The

cape, rising to a height of 377m, is conspicuous from seaward.

1.39 Islets and above-water rocks extend 1.25 miles S of the cape;

a 1m shoal patch lies about 3.5 miles ESE of it.

1.39 Caution.—An area lying S of Kap Thorvaldsen has not been

completely surveyed. Vessels should use extreme caution in

this vicinity. A depth of 23.8m was reported (1992) to lie about

11.5 miles S of the cape.

1.39 Tasiusaq and Amitsuarssuk, two short fjords, are entered 6

and 8 miles, respectively, WNW of Kap Thorvaldsen. Both of

their entrances are fronted by off-lying islands. These fjords

are reported to be clear of dangers and provide shelter for

vessels shut in by ice under the SW side of Nunarsuit. Good

anchorage is available in the innermost part of Amitsuarssuk, E

of a small island on the N side, in a depth of 26m. Anchorage is

also available in the N part of a cove located on the S side close

within the entrance, in a depth of 33m.

Torssukatak

Courtesy of Roger Parry - UK

View of Torssukatak from Augilagootoq

Amitsuarssuk
25

Pub. 181

2. 

Greenland—West Coast—Kap Desolation to Nuuk (Godthab)

2.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 2 — CHART INFORMATION
27

Pub. 181

SECTOR 2 

GREENLAND—WEST COAST—KAP DESOLATION TO NUUK (GODTHAB)

2.0 Plan.—This sector describes the SW coast of Greenland

NNW from Kap Desolation, at the NW side of the entrance to

Nuuk (Godthab). 

General Remarks

2.1 This section of Greenland, consisting of 280 miles of

coast with Frederikshaabs Isblink midway, has an irregular,

rugged, and mountainous profile. The outer part of the coast is

formed by a zone of islands, islets, and rocks which separates

the mainland from the open sea. The coastal waters have irregular but ample depths and several large banks lie close offshore

between Frederikshaabs Isblink and Godthabs Fjord. Numerous dangers fringing the coast render the inshore approaches

complex and difficult, and several of the fjords have not been

surveyed.

Kap Desolation to Paamiut (Frederikshab)

2.2 Kap Desolation (60°44'N., 48°11'W.), 600m high

and the SW extremity of Nunarsuit, is located 9 miles WNW of

Kap Thorvaldsen. The reddish peaks and jagged cliffs of the

stretch of coast between these capes presents a superb landscape. Kitdlavat, a conspicuous mountain range, rises to an elevation of 782m close NNE of Kap Desolation. 

2.2 Caution.—Between Kap Desolation and Arsuk Fjord, 30

miles NNW, the coast is deeply indented with numerous off-lying islands, islets, rocks, and shoal patches.

2.2 A shoal bank, with a least depth of 14.6m, is reported to lie

about 19 miles WNW of Kap Desolation. A depth of 18.5m has

been reported to lie about 3.5 miles farther to the N. Vessels

should use caution when in the vicinity.

2.2 Naujartalik (60°46'N., 48°15'W.), the westernmost and

largest of a group of reddish round-topped islands, lies 3 miles

NW of Kap Desolation. Rocks, above and below-water, extend

W and SW for about 1 mile from the island. Anchorage can be

obtained by small vessels, in a depth of 15m, within a small

harbor on the E side of the island; vessels may secure their

sterns to the shore. The harbor is open to the S and, if much ice

is present, should be examined before entry.

2.2 Torssukatak, the channel lying between Nunarssuit and

Alangorssuaq, is entered 4 miles NNW of Kap Desolation, and

is described in paragraph 1.39. Numerous islets and below-water rocks lie up to 2.5 miles W of the entrance and may best be

seen on the chart. 

2.2 Quairtorfik (Kuairtorfik) (60°50'N., 48°15'W.), an island,

127m high, is located off the W side of Alanngorssuaq, 2 miles

N of the entrance to Torssukatak. A navigable channel, which

forms a link in the inner route between Julianehaab and Ivigtutf, lies between this island and Qatit (Kautit), a group of

small islets, located close W. The channel has a least depth of

11m. 

2.2 Ydre Kitsigsut and Indre Kitsigsut, two groups of small islands, front the W sides of Nunarssuit and Alangorssuaq up to

7 miles W. They can best be seen on the chart.

2.2 Ydre Kitsigsut consists of some 30 islands, islets, and rocks

lying from about 5 to 10 miles WNW of Kap Desolation.

Thorstein Islaender (60°46'N., 48°26'W.), 116m high, is the

highest and largest island of the group; it can be easily identified.

2.2 Indre Kitsigsut consists of a heavy concentration of low reddish islets and rocks which lie scattered from 2.75 to 8 miles

NNE of Ydre Kitsigsut. This extensive group is dominated by

Tulugartulik, 58m high, located 5 miles NNE of Thorstein Islaender.

2.3 Kobberminebugt (60°51'N., 48°14'W.) extends ENE

for 23 miles to the edge of the Inland Icecap, which is visible

from the entrance. It is entered between the NW extremity of

Alangorssuaq and the SW extremity of Sanerut Island, 10

miles NNW. The outer part of the bay and the S part of the entrance are encumbered with numerous islets, rocks, and shoals.

These extend NE in small, scattered groups from Indre Kitsigsut and continue as a long chain to the head. Ikerasargap Nuna

is the largest islet within the chain. A navigable channel,

named Sanerutip Ima, lies between the N side of the chain and

the S side of Sanerut Island. The inner end of this channel leads

NE and connects by a narrow passage with the head of the

fjord, which lies on the N side of Sanerut. Sanerutip Ima is reported to have a least depth of 14.6m in the fairway. The

branch leading NE has a depth of 5.5m. The narrow passage

dries and can only be used by boats at high water. A channel,

which separates the chain of islets from the mainland S, dries

at its inner end.

2.3 Ice.—Large icebergs frequently drift in and ground around

the numerous islets in the S part of the bay.

2.3 Caution.—Numerous above and below-water rocks lie within Kobberminebugt and breakers have been reported in several

places. Local knowledge is advised.

2.4 Satut (60°55'N., 48°18'W.), a low and rocky islet, lies

in the middle of the entrance to Kobberminebugt.

2.4 Baake, an islet with three prominent knolls, is located in the

entrance 2.5 miles S of Satut. The inner route to Arsuk Fjord

passes between Baake Island and the above-water rock, in

depths of 12.7m.

2.4 Ikermuit and Qernertut (60°54'N., 48°07'W.) are small islets located on the N side of the approach to Ellens Havn, an

indentation located on the N side of Alangorssuaq Island,

where there are some disused copper mines. Breakers have

been reported 1 mile NW of Ikermuit. Islets and rocks extend

on the S side of the approach, from the NW extremity of

Alangorssuaq to the NE islet of Indre Kitsigsut.

2.4 Amorsinguaq (60°57'N., 48°06'W.), a group of scattered islets and rocks, is located in the middle part of the bay, close W

of Avssangiut, an irregularly-shaped island.

2.4 Angniksorssuak, rising to a height of 630m, stands near the
28 Sector 2. Greenland—West Coast—Kap Desolation to Nuuk (Godthab) 

Pub. 181

NW extremity of Alangorssuaq and is conspicuous. Alangorssuak Fjeldt, 2 miles NE of Angniksorssuak, rises precipitously

from a narrow foreshore to two bare peaks. The SW peak,

675m high, is somewhat higher than the NE peak and each is

marked by a cairn. Amitsuarssup Qaqa stands 3 miles NE of

the NE peak and rises to a height of 371m.

2.4 Kitdliarssuk Kaka, 115m high, is a small headland situated

at the NE end of Alangorssuaq. Rinks Havn, a small harbor, is

located close E of this headland. It is preferred to Ellens Havn

because of its better shelter. Local knowledge is necessary for

entering Ellens Havn or Rinks Havn. 

2.4 Sanerut (61°00'N., 48°20'W.), a large island, is steep, rugged, and brownish in appearance. A prominent peak rises to an

elevation of 943m at its W end. 

2.4 Borgs Havn lies in a cove, fronted by islets, 7.5 miles E of

the SW extremity of Sanerut. The harbor is entered from the E

through a narrow channel and affords anchorage, in depths of

13 to 27m. Local knowledge is required.

2.5 Kobberminebugt to Arsuk Fjord.—A large unnamed island is located to the N in the channel between Sanerut and Tavdlorutit. Kangerssup Avangnamut Nua, the NW

extremity of Sanerut, is the S entrance point of the channel.

Depths in its wide, outer part appear to be uneven. A chain of

soundings, leading ENE from the S entrance point to the middle of the inner part of the channel, indicates a least depth of

25m, with a depth of 300m nearby. The charted soundings continue, with sufficient depths, E along the S side of Tavdlorutit

and pass N of an islet, located at the W entrance of the narrows

lying between the E ends of Tavdlorutit and Sanerut. A single

chain of soundings, with depths of more than 35m, extends

along the NE side of Sanerut Island to Qipisargo (61°01'N.,

47°52'W.), at the head of the channel.

2.6 Arsuk Fjord (61°12'N., 48°14'W.) is deep and almost

free of dangers as far as its head, which is occupied by a

glacier. The principal approach to Arsuk Fjord lies between

Stor O (Kekertarssuak), an island located 5 miles NW of the

NW extremity of Sanerut, and Arsuk Umanak, an island about

6 miles NNW. 

2.6 From the approach, two channels lead to the fjord. The S

channel, Sondre Lob, is entered between Stor O and Manitsoq,

4.5 miles NE, and leads S and E of Arsuk O (61°09'N.,

48°22'W.), a large island. This channel is used by large vessels

and indicated by ranges which can best be seen on the chart.

2.6 The N channel, Torssukatak, is entered between Middluvik,

an islet 0.5 mile N of Manitsoq, and Qajartalik, an islet 1.5

miles NW. Karra, 0.5 mile E of Qajartalik, is the S promontory

point of the mainland. Two wrecks lie nearby. A light, indicating the approach, is shown from the SW side of Qajartalik.

This channel leads N of Arsuk O and passes through a narrows

at the E end where it enters the main fjord. Although

Torssukatak provides the shortest route to the inner fjord, the

narrows restrict vessels to a maximum length of 66m and a

maximum draft of 5m. This channel is also, at times, wholly or

partially blocked by icebergs or growlers. 

2.6 The fjord can also be entered from S through Simpson Passage, which is located between Tavdlorutit and the islets lying

off the E side of Stor O. The entrance lies between the SW side

of Tavdlorutit and Camilla, a small islet, 3 miles WSW. The

channel leads N into the fjord between the NW side of Tavdlorutit and Evqquitsut, an islet 1.25 miles WNW.

2.6 Aspect.—The land, at first sighting, is usually covered by

low-hanging clouds and a snow haze; vessels may be well

within the approach before sighting it. The mountain elevations

in the vicinity are considerable and, to those unfamiliar with

Greenland, it is wise to concentrate on the clouds at first approach, as some of the sky cover may turn out to be mountain

ranges seen at a distance. In clear weather, the fjord may be

identified without difficulty by an almost level range of mountains located to the N and a remarkable round-topped peak

which rises abruptly to the S. Many of the islands and islets in

the approach are radar conspicuous. A steep terrain, rising

abruptly to a height of 610m, surrounds the fjord.

2.6 Arsuk Umanak (61°10'N., 48°40'W.), on the N side of the

approach, has two distinctive hills and can easily be identified

from a distance of several miles. This island rises to a height of

540m. 

2.6 Stor O, on the S side of the approach, rises to a height of

745m can be easily identified. The island has three peaks, of

which the lowest is a distinctive conical hill standing at its NW

end.

2.6 Umanarssuk, located 0.5 mile off the SW side of Stor O, has

a dark and conical peak 245m high.

2.6 Arsuk O, lying between the N and S entrance channels, appears as a high, dark mass marked by three main peaks.

2.6 Kungnat (61°13'N., 48°26'W.), rising to an elevation of

1,418m about 30 miles N of Kap Desolation, is the highest

mountain along this stretch of coast. It has no well-defined

features, but its height in clear weather makes it an excellent

landmark.

2.6 Ice.—The ice, which arrives off Kap Farvel about January

each year, generally reaches Arsuk Fjord about March. During

April, May, or June, this ice may form an impenetrable barrier

across the entrance and fill the fjord with packed ice and bergs.

However, more usually a belt of free water, a few miles wide,

will be found between the coast and the pack. In addition, the

ice is frequently sufficiently scattered to permit penetration.

After July, the coast is generally free of ice until the end of the

year, but it may be found a few miles off during December or

even November. From December, until as late as May, locally

Arsuk
Sector 2. Greenland—West Coast—Kap Desolation to Nuuk (Godthab) 29

Pub. 181

formed ice, up to 1m thick, will be found in the fjord as far S as

Ivigtut.

2.6 The Naval Radio Station at Gronnedal will report the latest

ice conditions in the fjord and the approaches.

2.6 Caution.—Permission to enter Arsuk Fjord must be secured

immediately before entry from the Greenland Command Naval

Station at Gronnedal. On the approach to the fjord and during

the passage through it, vessels must display their national flag

and, on passing the W entrance point of Ivigtut roadstead, report by VHF to the Naval Signal Station at Gronnedal.

2.7 Arsuk (61°10'N., 48°27'W.), on the N side of

Torssukatak, is a small harbor located in an inlet which is open

to the SW. There is a quay for small coastal craft with drafts up

to 3.5m. Larger vessels, up to 80m in length, may anchor with

stern moorings, in depths of 17 to 30m, close SW of the quay. 

2.7 Pilotage.—The port can be contacted on VHF channels 9,

13, and 16. There are no pilots, but people with local knowledge are available.

2.7 Berthing for up to 33 cutters is provided by a group of 66

mooring buoys within the protection of an ice boom.

2.7 Akussak, the E extremity of Arsuk O, is located on the W

side of Sondre Lob and is marked by a beacon. Anchorage can

be obtained in a bay located 0.5 mile WSW of Akussak. Anchorage can also be obtained, in depths of 9 to 15m, gravel, off

the entrance to a small bay at Isua, close SW of Akussak.

2.7 Taylors Havn, on the E side of Sondre Lob, is situated 2

miles NNE of Akussak. This bay is open to the S; the harbor is

encumbered, in its E part, with rocks. Anchorage can be obtained, in a depth of 11m, soft bottom, in its W part; vessels

must be secured to the shore by hawsers because of the lack of

swinging room.

2.7 Webers Havn, located 1 mile NW of Taylors Havn, is a sheltered bay kept free of ice, for most of the year, by a rapid ebb

tidal current. Range beacons, standing on the E shore, lead into

the harbor between its W entrance point and some islets and

rocks which front the bay. Anchorage can be obtained, in

depths of 13 to 15m, stiff clay, in the N part of the harbor.

2.7 Ivigtut (Ivittuut) (61°12'N., 48°11'W.) is situated on the S

side of the inner part of Arsuk Fjord. A light is shown from Kamigtalik Point, 0.5 mile WNW of the port. In 1989, the port

was closed and all maintenance discontinued.

2.8 Gronnedal (Kangilinguit) (61°14'N., 48°06'W.)

(World Port Index No. 605), situated 3 miles E of Ivigtut, is a

Danish Naval Station and handles general cargo. The harbor is

located in a bay at the E side of the fjord. A river enters the bay

through a valley enclosed by high ground. The open season is

April through December. The port may be closed during the

summer polar ice period. 

2.8 Winds—Weather.—Winds from between S and SE are the

most frequent. Occasionally, these winds will blow through the

river valley, S of the harbor, at strengths up to 80 to 100 knots.

During winter months, winds from SE (fohn winds) have

occasionally reached strengths of up to 130 knots.

2.8 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 3m at springs and 1.6m

at neaps. There are no notable tidal currents.

2.8 Depths—Limitations.—There is a T-shaped quay and two

pontoon jetties. The berth on the W side of the quay is 90m

long, with a depth of 11m alongside. The berth on the E side of

the quay is 50m long, with a depth of 6.5m alongside. Vessels

Kangnet - viewed from the Arsuk Fjord

Ivigtut (Ivittuut) - abandoned cryolite mine area
30 Sector 2. Greenland—West Coast—Kap Desolation to Nuuk (Godthab) 

Pub. 181

up to 110m in length and 7.5m draft have been accommodated

alongside.

2.8 It is reported that two mooring buoys, located in the S part of

the harbor, can accommodate vessels up to 10,000 dwt.

2.8 Aspect.—Range lights, indicating the approach, are shown

from the N part of the bay and may best be seen on the chart.

2.8 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but is advisable; an

unlicensed pilot is available on request. Vessels should send an

ETA at least 24 hours in advance. The port can be contacted by

VHF channel 16.

2.8 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained in Eqaluit

(61°15'N., 48°06'W.), a bay situated 0.75 mile N of Gronnedal,

in a depth of 28m; however, SE winds blow more violently

here than elsewhere in the fjord. 

2.8 Anchorage can be obtained in Christian Havn, a bay situated

4 miles W of Gronnedal on the N side of the fjord. The best

berth, in depths of 11 to 16m, mud, lies at the W side of the

bay, between some islets and the mainland shore.

2.8 Anchorage can be obtained in Ellerslie Havn (61°19'N.,

48°08'W.), a bay situated 3 miles NE of Eqaluit on the W side

of the fjord. The best berth is at the W part of the bay, in depths

of 9 to 15m, clay and sand. 

2.8 Caution.—The berths alongside the quay are sometimes untenable when strong winds blow down the river valley. Vessels

shall leave the quay during strong SE winds.

2.8 That part of the fjord ,which lies within 2 miles of the port, is

considered to be a prohibited area. The seaward limit of this area is marked by beacons. Vessels must receive permission from

the Greenland Command Naval Station before entering.

2.9 Arsuk Fjord to Paamiut (Frederikshaab).—Two

very conspicuous mountains stand along this 60 mile long

stretch of coast and can be seen from a considerable distance

offshore.

2.9 Tindingen (Kingigtok) (61°30'N., 49°06'W.), 913m high, is

a pinnacle mountain standing on the coast 16 miles NNW of

the W extremity of Sermersut. 

2.9 Norssaerserfik (Nautsarsorfik) (61°43'N., 48°38'W.),

1,643m high, stands 26 miles N of the E extremity of Sermersuut.

2.9 Sermersuut (61°16'N., 48°50'W.), an island on the NW side

of the approaches to Arsuk Fjord, appears as a high plateau.

Sermersut Umanarssua, 314m high, is a prominent conical

peak standing at the SW end of the island. From a distance, it

may appear detached from the island. A beacon stands on the

NE extremity of Sermersuut.

2.9 Nunanguit (61°13'N., 48°47'W.), 198m high, is the largest

of a group of islets lying 3 miles SSE of Sermersuut. 

2.9 Isa (Issa), an island, 282m high, is located 1.5 miles E of the

E end of Sermersuut. Anchorage is available in a bay, encumbered with small islets, formed between the SW end of Isa and

two small off-lying islands, close SW. Vessels can anchor, in

depths of 9 to 14m, gravel, with fair protection from N winds.

2.9 Tornarssuk, a large island, is located 1 mile N of Isa. It is

separated from the N side of Sermersut by Tornarssuk Lob, a

channel with a least middle depth of 75m. Oqutalik, the westernmost of several small islets, lies off the W end of Tornarssuk.

2.9 A shoal patch, with a least depth of 15m, lies about 5 miles

WSW of Oqutalik Beacon.

2.9 Sondre Kangeq (Sioraq) (61°21'N., 48°59'W.), 5 miles NW

of Sermersut, and Nordre Kangeq (Kangek), 4 miles farther

NW, are two projecting points of a mainland promontory,

fronted by rocks. A beacon stands on Sondre Kangeq.

2.9 Sitdlisit Havn (61°22'N., 48°56'W.) lies within a chain of islets on the SE side of the promontory, 1.75 miles NE of Sondre

Kangeq. Anchorage can be obtained, in a depth of 22m, good

holding ground, within the harbor. Vessels should secure their

sterns to the N shore. The harbor can be entered through several danger-free channels which lead between the islets fronting

it. 

2.9 Tigssaluk Havn, 2.5 miles NE of Sondre Kangeq, affords anchorage, in a depth of 21m. The harbor, which is clear of dangers, is entered in mid-channel between two low-lying arms of

the mainland. Tigssaluk Mountain, rising to an elevation of

640m, stands 2.5 miles ENE of the harbor.

2.9 Sermiligaarssuk Fjord (Sermiliarsuk Fjord) is one of two

true ice fjords located S of latitude 69°00'N. The other, Sermilik, lies 20 miles NW.

2.9 Sermiligaarssuk Fjord is entered between Nordre Kangeq

Gronnedal - Danish Naval Station

Sermersuut
Sector 2. Greenland—West Coast—Kap Desolation to Nuuk (Godthab) 31

Pub. 181

and a headland, fronted by rocks, 4 miles NNE. It continues

ENE for 25 miles to its head. Kangarssup Umanak, with small

islets around it, is located near the middle of the entrance; foul

ground extends up to 1.5 miles WNW from the island.

2.9 Tindingen, previously described above, stands close N of the

entrance to the fjord.

2.10 The large mainland projection located between Sermiligarssuk Fjord and Sermilik Fjord is indented by three

smaller fjords, named from S to N, Qasigialik (Kasigialik),

Neria (Neriak), and Tasissaq (Tasiusak). Several lakes drain into the heads of Neria and Tasiussaq.

2.10 Smallesund (61°33'N., 49°16'W.), located S of the entrance

to Neria, is a much-used safe harbor. It is formed in a sound lying between the mainland and Anarsivik (Anarsuak), an island,

130m high, located close W. Qioqe (Kioke), an isolated and

prominent islet, 218m high, lies 3 miles WSW of the entrance

to Smallesund.

2.10 Narsalik (61°39'N., 49°19'W.), a large island, 221m high,

fronts the mainland between Neria Fjord and Tasiussoq Fjord.

It is fringed by rocks which extend up to 1.5 miles offshore.

Narssalik Havn, a small inlet on the NW side of the island, affords anchorage for vessels up to 35m in length. 

2.10 A chain of islets, extending NE from the island, connects it

to Nuk, the W entrance point of Sermilik Fjord. Sermilik Fjord

extends NNE for 20 miles from Nuk.

2.10 Caution.—Ice calved from the glaciers in the fjords frequently hinders navigation in the vicinity of Narsalik. From the

end of June or the beginning of July until some time in August,

the waters off the entrance to these fjords are so closely packed

with icebergs that vessels are advised to keep about 5 miles offshore in order to avoid them.

2.10 Vesterland (Anarnitsoq), a large island rising to a height of

260m, is located 3 miles NNW of Narsalik. Qeqertat (Kekertak), a group of islands and islets of which Akinaq (Akingnak)

is the largest, extends SW for 4.5 miles from the S extremity of

Vesterland. This group is bordered by foul ground and rocks

and should be given a wide berth.

2.11 Frederikshab Umanak (61°46'N., 49°36'W.), a

round-topped island 300m high, is located 14 miles S of Frederikshaab and serves as an excellent landmark for the approach. It is the largest of several islands, islets, and rocks

lying seaward of Vesterland.

2.11 Kangerdluarsuk, fronted by islets, is an inlet in the mainland

entered 2.5 miles NE of the N extremity of Vesterland. It provides anchorage, in a depth of 20m, good holding ground, but

local knowledge of the area is required.

2.11 Igaussaq (61°53'N., 49°29'W.), a large island, is located

close off the mainland 6 miles NNE of Frederikshaab Umanak.

A mountain, given the same name, rises to a height of 599m at

the SE end of this island.

2.11 Satuarssugssuag, an islet, is located 3.5 miles NW of the NW

extremity of Igaussaq. Numerous small islets and rocks lie between the NW extremity of the island and this islet. A light is

shown from a structure, 7m high, standing on the islet. It was

reported (1992) that a racon was located at the light structure.

2.11 Vardeo, a small but prominent islet, 24m high, is located 4.5

miles W of the NW extremity of Igaussaq. Numerous obstructions lie between this islet and the W side of Igaussaq.

2.11 Kvanefjord (61°59'N., 49°44'W.) is entered between the N

side of Igaussaq and the S side of a peninsula which projects

from the mainland. It extends ENE for 13 miles and then NNE

for 6 miles to where it divides into three short branches, each

with a glacier at its head.

2.11 The main approach fairway into the fjord lies between Satuarssugssuag, on the S side, and the outermost of numerous

small islets which front the SW end of the peninsula, 1.25

miles to the N. Vessels are cautioned to avoid the shoal patches

lying within 1.5 miles NW of Satuarssugssuag.

2.11 Caution.—A submarine outfall extends about 0.5 miles SW

from quay S of Pakhus (61°59.8'N., 49°40.8'W.).

2.11 A narrow channel, leading into the fairway from S, lies close

E of Satuarssugssuag.

2.11 Kvaneo, 70m high and almost joined together, are two islands which lie in the middle of the entrance to the fjord, 0.75

mile N of Igaussaq.

2.11 Eqaluit, an inlet, opens off the N side of the entrance to Kvanefjord N of Kvaneo. It extends NNE for 5 miles.

2.11 Qaqarssuatsiaq Kujatdleq (62°02'N., 49°33'W.), rising to

a height of 510m, stands on the N side of the fjord about 4.5

miles N of Kvaneo. It is very prominent when there is snow on

the ground with which its bare sides contrast sharply.

2.11 Knoffeld (Arferfik) (62°00'N., 49°23'W.), 925m high,

stands 5 miles NE of Kvaneo. This mountain is the most prominent in the vicinity and is reported to resemble the four knuckles of a clenched fist.

2.12 Paamiut (Frederikshab) (62°00'N., 49°40'W.) (World

Port Index No. 610) is located at the SW extremity of the peninsula which projects from the mainland on the N side of the

entrance to Kuannersooq Fjord or Kvanefjord. It lies on the NE

side of Kanderdlunguaq, an inlet bordered on both sides by numerous islets. 

2.12 Winds—Weather.—The port is situated in an outlying location and consequently, the climate is humid and raw, with a

great deal of fog, especially during the summer.

2.12 Ice.—Extreme conditions can occur during the winter with

ice forming locally between December and May. Due to ice,

access is sometimes difficult between April and August when

pack ice and icebergs can hinder navigation. The best periods

for finding the port ice-free are between March and April and

from the end of August.

2.12 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 3.8m at springs and 2m

at neaps. There is a W current, with a rate of 1 to 2 knots, in the

mouth of the inlet. Tidal currents set weakly at about 1 knot in

the harbor.

2.12 Depths—Limitations.—Atlantic Quay, a main cargo wharf,

is 90m long, with depths of 7.8 to 8.6m alongside. Vessels of

up to 110m in length and 7m draft have been accommodated

2.12 There is a total of about 170m of berthing space, with depths

of up to 4m alongside, for fishing vessels. There is a small

tanker jetty, with a depth of 5m alongside, in the S part of the

harbor.

2.12 Paaimut (Frederikshab) has an open season from August to

January. Large amounts of polar ice usually occur during

spring and summer. The port handles general cargo and

containers. 

2.12 Aspect.—The extremity of the peninsula is fringed with

numerous islets and rocks. The port can be approached by two
32 Sector 2. Greenland—West Coast—Kap Desolation to Nuuk (Godthab) 

Pub. 181

narrow channels which lead through these islets and dangers

lying S and W of the harbor. However, these channels are not

recommended for safe navigation.

2.12 The main approach channel leads through the entrance to

Kvanefjord N of Satuarssugssuag Light. The main fairway

through Kanderdlunguaq is indicated by a range. The outer islets at the mouth of the inlet are marked by beacons, which

may best be seen on the chart.

2.12 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but advisable. A representative, with local knowledge, is available on request. Vessels should send an ETA at least 24 hours in advance. The port

can be contacted by VHF channel 16.

2.12 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained in the approach

channel, in depths of 18 to 22m, about 0.5 mile SW of the harbor. the holding ground is not good and vessels should anchor

at very slow speed. The anchorage area is exposed to swells

and SW winds.

2.12 Caution.—A submarine outfall extends about 0.5 mile SW

of the quay in position 61°59.8'N, 49°40.8'W.

Paamiut (Frederikshab) to Nuuk (Godthab)

2.13 From the peninsula on which Paamiut is located, the

coast trends NW for 30 miles to the S end of the Frederiskhaab

Isblink. This stretch of coast is extremely irregular, being indented by many fjords and fronted by innumerable small islets

which form an almost continuous chain from one to several

miles wide.

2.13 Qeqertarsuaaraq (Sonde Storo) (62°03'N., 49°42'W.), an

island 240m high, lies in the mouth of a wide bay 4 miles NNE

of the entrance to Kvanefjord. A beacon stands on its SE side.

It is reported that drift net fishing with nets up to 500m long, is

carried out between this island and the mainland. Kangerdluarssuk, a narrow inlet, opens off the E side of the bay.

2.13 Nerutussoq (Nerutusok), a fjord, is separated from KangerdPaamiut (Frederikshab)

Paamiut (Frederikshab) approach

Paamiut-right side, airstrip-center
Sector 2. Greenland—West Coast—Kap Desolation to Nuuk (Godthab) 33

Pub. 181

luarssuk by a peninsula, 550m high. It seldom freezes over as it

is exposed to the open sea. 

2.13 Nordre Storo (62°08'N., 49°45'W.) is an island lying close

off the N entrance point of Nerutussoq. Islets; rocks extend

nearly 2.5 miles SSE and 3.25 miles W from this island.

2.13 Qagssit (Kagsit), a fjord, is located 5 miles N of Nerutussoq

and extends ENE for 15 miles. Iterdlak, a large island, fronts

this fjord and rises to a height of 505m. Kuanit Island

(62°14'N., 49°53'W.), a smaller island, lies off the N entrance

point of the fjord. 

2.13 Anchorage can be obtained, with limited swinging room, in

depths of 25 to 50m, in a small bay on the N side of Iterdlak,

off a settlement. Anchorage can also be obtained, in a depth of

18m, in a small harbor on the S side of Kuanit (Kvaneo) near a

settlement. 

2.13 Two islands, Oqaitsua and Umanaq (Umanak), the latter being the larger island and 65m high, are located 3 miles SW of

Kuanit (Kvaneo), at the SW end of a group of islands and islets. Umanaq (Umanak) is a good landmark in the seaward approach to these anchorages. 

2.13 Qagssissalik (62°12'N., 50°00'W.), a small group of islets,

lies 4 miles WSW of Kuanit (Kvaneo). A beacon stands on the

S part of the highest islet. 

2.13 Tinignertoq Fjord, entered 6 miles NNE Qagssissalikof, indents the coast close S of Frederikshaab Isblink and dries.

There is a strong current in the entrance to the fjord which is

much frequented by salmon fishermen. Nunasarmak, 370m

high, along with several smaller islands, forms the W side of

the fjordq and lies about 3 miles within the entrance.

2.13 Frederikshabs Isblink (Frederikshaabs Glacier) (62°29'N.,

50°19'W.) is the most remarkable feature along the stretch of

coast between Kvanefjord and Graedefjord, about 90 miles

NNW. It consists of a wide tongue of the Gronland Ice Cap,

which reaches almost to the sea 30 miles NNWof Kvanefjord.

It is fronted by extensive mud flats and narrow islands. The

seaward edge of the ice is a lofty, perpendicular cliff about 10

miles long, from which the glacier slopes steeply upwards,

rising in its N part to an elevation of approximately 350m and,

at distances of 30 to 35 miles inland, to heights of 1220 to

830m. New deposits of clay and sand are constantly being

carried along by the glacial rivers so that, for several miles

seaward, the water has a milky appearance due to the clay

particles. Frederikshaabs Isblink also creates a very strong

glare which is visible from a considerable distance.

2.13 Caution.—Vessels proceeding along this coast are advised

to keep at least 8 miles W of Frederikshaab Isblink.

2.14 Between Frederikshab Isblink and the N side of the

entrance to Godthabs Fjord, 106 miles NNW, the coast is rugged and mountainous. However, at the N side of the entrance to

the fjord, it changes very quickly to a low and rolling land, the

so-called "North Country." North of Frederikshaab Isblink, the

coastal area of ice-free land continues to widen, so that in the

vicinity of Faeringehavn, 27 miles SSE of the entrance to

Godthabs Fjord, the Inland Ice is more than 50 miles distant

from the shore.

2.14 Caution.—The greater part of this section of the coast is

fronted by Frederikshaab Banke, Danas Banke, and Fiskenaes

Banke, several extensive relatively shallow banks which can

best be seen on the chart.

2.14 Tulugartalik (62°29'N., 50°19'W.), 25m high, is one of several islets that lie off the middle of Frederikshaab Isblink and

close outside the drying flat which, at this point, is from 2 to

about 3 miles wide. A beacon stands on this islet. 

2.14 The coast extending 12 miles N of Frederikshaab Isblink is

divided into narrow peninsulas by three fjords.

2.14 Majorarissat, the southernmost and shortest fjord, is blocked

by sand and clay.

2.14 Kuvnilik (Tasiusarsuaq), the middle fjord, is encumbered at

its entrance by islands and islets. 

2.14 Agdlumersat (Allumersat) (Bjornesund) (62°48'N.,

50°18'W.), the northernmost fjord, extends NE for nearly 25

miles and contains Inland Ice. 

2.14 Ikatoq (Ikkattoq) (62°38'N., 50°15'W.), a channel, lies on

the SE side of the chain of islands and islets situated in the entrance to Kuvnilik. Kakarssuak (Qaqarssuaq), a prominent

mountain, rises to a height of 940m on the peninsula between

Kuvnilik and Agdlumersat. 

2.14 Ravns Storo (62°43'N., 50°23'W.), 209m high, is the largest

Frederikshab Isblink
34 Sector 2. Greenland—West Coast—Kap Desolation to Nuuk (Godthab) 

Pub. 181

of several islands lying off the coast. Beacons stand at the N

and S ends of the E side of the island. 

2.14 A rock, existence doubtful, was reported (1953) to lie about

10 miles SW of Ravns Storo.

2.14 Sondre Kitdlit, marked by a beacon, is the larger of two islets

located 3.25 miles WSW of the W end of Ravns Storo. Nordre

Kitdlit is the larger of two islets, fringed by rocks, lying about

1 mile N of Sondre Kitdlit. Sorte Stribe is a prominent black

basalt stripe located on the NW and larger of the two islets lying close off the SW side of Ravns Storo.

2.14 Sondre Fiskerihavn, formed in a bay on the SW side of Ravns

Storo, affords anchorage for several vessels, in depths of 26 to

44m. It was reported (1973) that a vessel of 85m length and 6m

draft had used this anchorage.. It was reported (1987) that there is

weed on the bottom which may foul small anchors. Also, the

buildings and jetty were in a dilapidated condition.

2.14 Nordre Fiskerihavn, a small cove on the N side of Ravns

Storo, affords anchorage. It was reported (1973) that a vessel of

40m length and 3.5m draft had anchored here. It was reported

(1987) that the buildings and jetty were in a dilapidated condition.

2.14 Tides—Currents.—At Ravns Storo, tides rise about 3.8m at

springs and 1.5m at neaps.

2.14 Ice.—Ice, which drifts N from Kap Farvel, may reach Ravns

Storo between April and mid-June and block its anchorages.

When ice is present, fog is frequent.

2.15 Fiskenaes Fjord (Fiskaesfjorden) (63°05'N.,

50°41'W.) is located 21 miles NNW of Ravns Storo. The coast

between is deeply indented and fronted by numerous islets and

rocks. 

2.15 The main entrance to the fjord lies between Qeqertarsuatsiaat, a large island on the SE side, and Manisat, a large island

and one of a chain of islands and islets forming the NW side.

The fjord can also be entered by a narrow channel situated between Qeqertarsuatsiaat and the mainland E.

2.15 Qioqe is the outermost islet of a group of islets and rocks

which extend up to 2 miles SSW from the S end of Qeqertarsuatsiaat.

2.15 Fiskenaes Fjord Light is shown from a tower, 5m high,

standing on an islet 4.5 miles NW of Qioqe. A sector of the

light indicates the entrance to the fjord.

2.15 Hellefiskeoer, marked by a beacon, is a group of islets and

rocks which lies on the N side of the approach 8.5 miles NW of

Qioqe.

2.15 A racon is situated on a small islet 1 mile SW of Hellefiskeoer.

2.15 Qagsse (Qassi), the highest mountain E of the fjord, rises to

a height of 1016m about 14 miles ENE of Fiskenaes Light.

2.15 Ilivertalik (Qarartoq), a jagged-topped mountain, rises to a

height of 1,079m, about 14 miles NNE of Fiskenaes Light.

2.15 Kangarssugssuaq (Kangarssuk), 376m high, stands near the

coast 10.5 miles NW of Fiskenaes Light. This mountain is very

prominent from N and S. 

2.15 Irkens Havn (Eqalugissat) (63°04'N., 50°47'W.) is the NW

and narrower of two inlets which open off the N side of the

fjord. A beacon stands on the point situated between the two

entrances. 

2.15 Fiskenaesset (Qeqertarsuatsiaat), a settlement, is situated on

the shores of a cove, fronted by several islets, near the NW extremity of Qeqertarssuatsiaq. Tides rise about 3.6m at springs

and 2.0m at neaps. 

2.15 There is a 10m long quay, with a depth of 4m alongside, and

a 17m long quay, with a depth of 2.2m alongside. Vessels up to

60m in length and 4.5m draft have been accommodated at high

water.

2.15 Anchorage can be obtained in the cove, in a depth of 22m,

with both the bow and stern secured to the shore.

2.15 There are no pilots, but persons with local knowledge are

available. The harbor can be contacted through the agents at

Nuuk.

2.16 The coast between Fiskenaes Fjord and Graedefjord,

17 miles NNW, is indented by several smaller fjords and fronted with numerous islands, islets, and rocks which extend, in

places, up to 4 miles offshore.

2.16 Fiskenaes Banke lies from about 12 to 35 miles offshore

along this part of the coast and can best be seen on the chart.

2.16 Marraq (63°26'N., 51°15'W.) is a promontory connected to

the W end of a broad peninsula by a low isthmus. A cairn is located at an elevation of 119m near its seaward end.

2.16 Marraq Havn indents the N side of the promontory and affords anchorage off its entrance, in depths of 18 to 22m, good

holding ground.

2.16 Marraq Ikerat is a large bay located on the S side of the

promontory.

2.16 Caution.—The approaches to Marrat Ikerat and Marraq

Havn are encumbered by numerous rocks, shoals, and islets,

some of which are marked by beacons. Local knowledge is required to navigate these waters.

2.16 Graedefjord (63°21'N., 51°06'W.), the longest fjord in this

area, extends E for 25 miles. It is approached from the S by a

deep channel situated between two groups of islands, islets,

and rocks. Ikerasarssuk (Ikerasarssup Tima) is the largest island of the N group fronting the fjord. Avatdleq, low and black,

is the southernmost islet of this group. Inugsugtut (Inussuttuut)

is the largest island of the S group. Shoals and rocks, some of

which dry, extend up to 1.25 miles NW from this island, leaving a fairway between them and Avatdleq, 0.5 mile wide. 

2.16 Sermitsiak (63°21'N., 50°19'W.), a prominent mountain,

1,247m high, stands on the S side of the fjord. Umivit (UmiiviFiskenaes Fjord light
Sector 2. Greenland—West Coast—Kap Desolation to Nuuk (Godthab) 35

Pub. 181

it), 1,477m high, stands on the N side of the fjord, 3 miles ENE

of Sermitsiak. 

2.17 Sermilik Fjord (63°29'N., 51°12'W.) is entered 3

miles NNE of Marraq. It extends to a long glacier which fills

what would otherwise be a continuation of the fjord. It is reported the depths within the fjord are unknown. The N side of

the inner part of the fjord is formed by a large, unnamed island

which is separated from the mainland by Alangordlia (Alanngorlia), a long winding branch of the fjord. The approaches

and entrance to the fjord are encumbered by numerous islands,

islets, rocks, and shoals. 

2.17 Kasuk, a prominent hill, 270m high, stands 1.25 miles NE of

the N entrance point. 

2.17 Kidlavat, a mountain, 1,292m high, stands 7.5 miles ENE of

Marraq on the S side of the fjord and is a good landmark.

2.17 Qingmut (63°35'N., 51°33'W.) is the outermost group of numerous islets and rocks which front the coast, up to 6 miles offshore, between Serrmilik Fjord and the approaches to

Kangerluarsoruseq Fjord, 13 miles NW. Many of these islets

are marked by beacons indicating the inner route system for

small vessels. Dangers extend up to 4 miles W of these groups

and larger vessels should give them a wide berth. 

2.17 Kangerluarsoruseq Fjord (63°42'N., 51°33'W.), entered

5.5 miles N of Qingmut, is short and narrow.

2.17 Sankta Maria Skaer, a group of drying rocks, lies 5 miles

NNW of Qingmut and 1.5 miles WSW of the S entrance point.

2.17 Satut (63°42'N., 51°36'W.) is the outermost of several islets

which lie close NW of the entrance to the fjord. A light is

shown from a structure, 3m high, standing on this islet. A beacon is situated close NE of the light structure. The sectors of

the light indicate the approach to the fjord. A racon is reported

to be located at the light structure.

2.17 Sorte Skaer (Sorteskaer), a small rock with an orange patch

painted on it, lies at the S end of a foul area which extends 0.75

mile S from Satut. 

2.17 The main fairway leading into the fjord passes between Sorte

Skaer, to the N, and Sankta Maria Skaer, to the S.

2.17 Den Smukke O, an islet 13m high, is located in the mouth of

the fjord. A light is shown from this islet.

2.18 Kangerluarsoruseq (Faeringehavn) (63°42'N.,

51°33'W.) (World Port Index No. 630) consists of a fishing

harbor and an oil terminal. The town stands on the NW side of

an islet-encumbered bay at the N side of the fjord entrance.

2.18 Kangerlarsoruseq, a natural port, has anchorages for large

vessels. The main wharf is 225m long, with 5m alongside.

Nordafar quay is 250m in length and has depths from 4.7 to 7m

alongside. It is reported (2010) to be under repair. 

2.18 The bunkering station at Kangerlauarsoruseq is open all

year, and during winter there may be difficulties entering the

harbor due to ice.

2.18 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 4m at springs and 2m

at neaps. A strong and unpredictable current often sets across

the quay at Polaroil. The tidal streams run very strongly in the

fjord, particularly off Den Smukke O.

2.18 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but is recommended.

Pilots are normally available from May to October. Vessels

should send an ETA at least 24 hours in advance. The port can

be contacted by VHF. Vessels should not attempt to berth at the

oil terminal without local knowledge. The port can be contacted between 0600 and 2200 by telephoning the Harbormaster

(299-20) or on VHF channel 9, 12, 13, 14, or 16.

2.18 Nordafar, 1.5 miles E of Faeringehavn, is much used in summer, from May to October, by the fishing fleets of many nations. There is a 250m long quay, with depths of 4 to 6.9m

alongside. Vessels of up to 135m in length and 7m draft have

been accommodated here at high water.

2.18 Polaroil, an oil terminal, is situated 1.25 miles SE of

Faeringehavn within Sydhavnen, a small bay on the S side of

the fjord. There is an 18m long quay and a mooring dolphin

with depths of 6 to 8.8m alongside for small vessels. Larger

tankers are handled at a mooring/anchorage berth off the pier.

Vessels anchor and then secure to the shore with permanent

moorings which are hauled up from surface buoys. Tankers up

to 30,000 dwt, 180m in length, and a draft of 12m, can be accommodated. It has been reported (1994) that these moorings

are no longer in service and lie on the sea floor.

2.18 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in a depth of 40m, within

a bay situated close NE of Polaroil. Anchorage is afforded alSermitsiak

Kangerluarsoruseq (Faeringehavn)
36 Sector 2. Greenland—West Coast—Kap Desolation to Nuuk (Godthab) 

Pub. 181

most anywhere within the fjord, in depths of 7 to 64m, E of

Sondre Naes, a point on the mainland 0.4 mile ENE of Den

Smukke O.

2.19 Between Kangerluarsoryeq Fjord and Lysefjord (Ameralik), the southernmost of the fjords within the Nuuk area 20

miles N, the coast recedes to form a bight. Several groups of islands, islets, and rocks front this bight and a navigable channel,

which provides access to the Nuuk area from the S, lies between these dangers and the shore. 

2.19 Skinderhvalen (63°44'N., 51°32'W.), 244m high and resembling the back of a whale, stands near the coast 3 miles N of the

entrance to Kangerluarsoryeq Fjord.

2.19 Buksefjord, fronted by islets and rocks, is entered 4 miles

NE of Skinderhvalen and extends for 17 miles. Steep

mountains border the inner part of this fjord and several lakes

drain into its head.

2.19 Qeqertarsuaq (Kekertarssuak) (63°54'N., 51°30'W.), a

large island isolated from the remainder, is located in the

middle of the channel between the coast and the outer dangers,

6 miles NNW of the entrance to Buksefjord. 

2.19 Johan Mollers Skaer (63°46'N., 51°53'W.), a rock with a

depth of less than 1.8m, lies at the SW side of the dangers

fronting the bight, 8.5 miles WNW of Satut Light.

2.19 Simiutat (Simiuttat), a group of islands surrounded by islets

and rocks, lies on the SE side of the dangers, 5 miles NNW of

Satut Light. Nungarussuit, a chain of rocks, extends between

this group and Johan Mollers Skaer.

2.19 An extensive area of foul ground exists in the vicinity of the

dangers lying off the bight between Kangerluarsoryeq Fjord

and Lysefjord (Ameralik). Within this foul area there are many

large islands with elevations up to 140m. 

2.19 Augissunguaq (Angissungsuak) (63°57'N., 51°45'W.), a

large island, lies near the N edge of the foul area, 7 miles

WNW of Qeqertarssuaq. Range lights, indicating the inner

route channel, are shown from the N end of the island.

2.19 Ravneoer (Ravneoerne) (63°58'N., 51°53'W.), a group of islets, lies near the NW edge of the foul area, 12 miles N of Johan Mollers Skaer.

2.19 Kigtorqat Light (63°56'N., 51°35'W.) is shown from an islet on the W side of the inner route channel, 1.75 miles WNW

of Qeqertarssuaq.

2.19 Tukingasunnguaq Light (Tukingassrassuaq Light)

(64°00'N., 51°42'W.), indicating the inner route channel, is

shown from an islet in the Qagssissagdlit Group, situated 2

miles NE of the N end of Augissunguaq. 

2.19 Simiuta Light (64°03'N., 51°38'W.) is shown from the SW

extremity of Simiuta Island.

2.19 The fairway of the inner route channel, which leads between

this island and Kingigtoq Island, 0.35 mile W, is reduced to a

width of 0.15 mile by rocks and shoals on both sides.

2.19 The channel is marked by range lights

2.20 Kookoerne (Kitsissut) (64°03'N., 52°04'W.) is an extensive cluster of about 200 islets and rocks lying in the SW

approaches to Godthabsfjord. They have a peculiar domeshaped appearance, and are low and close together, and may

appear as a single, dark mass from seaward. The islets are a

good mark for establishing the entrance to Godhabsfjord. However, they should not be confused with Satsigsuarqat (64°09'N.,

52°10'W.), 6 miles NNW, which is a more scattered group of

islets, smaller and fewer in number than Kookoerne, and surrounded by rocks, awash and below water. 

2.20 It has been reported that the Kookoerne islets are not easily

identified on radar at distances over 10 miles., although the

high land NE may be detected between 35 to 50 miles.

2.20 Attorssuit (64°03'N., 52°07'W.), an islet, is located on the

NW side of Kookoerne. A light, indicating the approach channel, is shown from this islet. A racon is situated at the light

structure.

2.20 Avatdleq, the westernmost islet of The Kookoerne, lies 1.5

miles WSW of Agtorssuit.

2.20 Radio O (64°02'N., 52°05'W.), an islet in the middle of

Kookorne (Kookoerne), approximately 1.75 miles SE of

Agtorssuit Light. A prominent radio mast reported at 114m

stands on this islet. A radiobeacon is situated on an islet

located 2.5 miles NE of Radio O. 

2.20 Kookoernes Havn, a harbor suitable for small vessels, lies in

the NE part of the group.

2.21 Godthabsfjord extends NE from the NW part of the

common entrance with Lysefjord (Amerilik). With its numerBuksefjord

Attorsuit Light
Sector 2. Greenland—West Coast—Kap Desolation to Nuuk (Godthab) 37

Pub. 181

ous branches and great depths, it is the largest and broadest

fjord in West Greenland. 

2.21 The entrance to this fjord is considered to lie between Jakobsholm (Napparutilikasik) (64°04'N., 51°55'W.) a small islet, approximately 8 miles SW of Nuuk, and Kangeq, an island,

111m high, 3.5 miles NW. It is reported that Jakobsholm is difficult to identify against the higher background. 

2.21 Store Malene (Ukkusissat), a mountain standing on the NW

side of the entrance to Kobbefjord, has a rounded summit with

two peaks, the E and higher of which rises to a height of 759m.

Lille Malene, 420m high, stands close N of the W peak of

Store Malene. Sadlen, 1,210m high, is the summit of a large island located 5 miles NE of Nuuk (Godthab). 

2.21 These mountains, along with Hjortetakken (Kingigtorssuaq)

described in paragraph 2.22, are conspicuous from the approach to the fjord and are referred to as the beacons of

Godthab. 

2.21 It is reported that the mountain skyline in this vicinity can be

seen from up to 50 miles seaward.

2.21 Renso, a small islet, is located on the NW side of the fairway, 2.75 miles ENE of the S extremity of Kangeq. A light, indicating the entrance to the fjord, is shown from this islet.

2.21 Saelskaeret (Ikkarlussuaq), a reef, lies 1 mile NNW of

Agtorssuit Light and is the SW extremity of the foul ground

which extends from Kangeq. This reef usually breaks and can

be easily identified although, in calm weather, there may only

be a slight ripple over it. 

2.21 Nord Lob, the deep water approach channel from seaward,

passes between the NW side of Kookoerne and Saelskaeret.

2.21 Caution.—Entry to Godthabs Fjord E of Kookoerne is not

recommended due to incomplete surveys.

2.21 Magnetic anomalies have been reported in an area 20 to 25

miles seaward of the entrance to Nuuk (Godthab).

2.21 It has been reported (2008) that a stranded wreck lies near

position 64°34'N, 52°09'W. 

2.21 In fog, the sounding depths over the off-lying banks located

W of the approach provide good navigational information.

Nuuk (Godthab) (64°11'N., 51°45'W.)

World Port Index No. 640

2.22 Nuuk (Godthab) is the capital of Greenland and the

country’s political and administrative center. It lies approximately 155 miles S of the Arctic Circle. Most of Greenland’s

Renso Light

Courtesy of Tony Wright

Approach to Nuuk (Godthab) from Godthabsfjord
38 Sector 2. Greenland—West Coast—Kap Desolation to Nuuk (Godthab) 

Pub. 181

industry is concentrated in Nuuk, and the town is considered

Greenland’s industrial powerhouse. There are approximately

15,000 inhabitants in the Nuuk area, which includes the main

town and the two settlements of Kapisillit and Qeqertarsuatsiaat (Fiskenaesset). 

2.22 Winds—Weather.—Nuuk, being situated near the open sea,

has the weather characteristics of a coastal area. There is a high

incidence of fog, strong winds, and heavy precipitation. The

worst storms come from the S and SW, often being followed, in

the winter, by a heavy and protracted snowfall.

2.22 The average annual precipitation at Nuuk is 598mm, which

is heavy for such a high latitude. Much of this precipitation

falls as rain during summer and early fall.

2.22 Winter fogs are rare, but during the months of June, July, and

August, fog occurs on an average of 36 days and, at times,

moves into the fjord, covering Nuuk completely.

2.22 Ice.—The pack ice (storis) from the E coast of Greenland

seldom reaches Nuuk and when it does, generally in June or

July, it is usually so well scattered that it does not seriously impede navigation. Generally, except for an occasional iceberg,

ice is never seen in the vicinity of Nuuk during the winter.

2.22 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 4.4m at springs and

3.3m at neaps. Tidal currents in the fjord are strong. During

spring tides, the rate at the anchorage in Godthab Red has been

estimated at 2 knots.

Depths—Limitations.—The port, which is ice-free all the

year round, handles general cargo and containers. Although the

harbor is navigable throughout the year, day and night, large

vessels should make arrangements in advance with the harbor

authority.

2.22 The main facilities include the following:

1. Eastern Atlantic Quay—170m long, with depths of

4.6 to 7.0m alongside.

2. Western Atlantic Quay—102m long, with a depth of

10.0m alongside.

3. Schooner Quay—52m long, with depths of 3.9 to

4.5m alongside.

4. Coastal Passenger Quay—40m long, with a depth of

5.4m alongside. 

5. Sand Jetty—30m long, with a depth of 5m alongside.

Hjortetakken (Kingigtorssuaq)

Courtesy of Tom Wright

Nuuk (Godthab)
Sector 2. Greenland—West Coast—Kap Desolation to Nuuk (Godthab) 39

Pub. 181

6. Fishing Quay—205m of berthing space, with depths

of 2.6 to 6.6m alongside.

2.22 Vessels up to 135m in length and 7m draft have been accommodated.

2.22 Small tankers can anchor and stern moor out from the petroleum installations, using an oil pipeline connection.

2.22 A tanker berth, consisting of two platforms connected to the

shore by walkways, has a depth of 12.6m alongside and can

handle vessels up to 30,000 dwt.

2.22 There are also several mooring buoys within the port.

Aspect.—The town of Nuuk is located at the mouth of

Godthabsfjord, at the W end of a small peninsula which separates Godthabfjord (Nuup Kangerlua) from Lysefjord (Ameralik Fjord). Godthabsfjord (Nuup Kangerlua), one of the largest

fjords in the world, and Lysefjord (Amerilik) have arms or

branch fjords which extend to the inland ice, approximately 65

miles from the coast. There is an narrow entry to the port, but

the port is well protected. 

2.22 Lysefjord (Amerilik) is entered close NE of Simiuta Island

between two high peninsulas of the mainland. Iviangit

(64°01'N., 51°36'W.), a prominent mountain, 345m high,

stands on the S side of the entrance. The peninsula on the N

side of the fjord attains a height of 1,478m midway along it.

Lysefjord (Amerilik), which appears to be deep, divides into

two branches at Nua, 28 miles within the entrance. In its outer

part, the shores are bare, high, and often steep, making landing

impossible. Beyond Nua, the mountains become lower and recede from the shore. Praestefjord (Ekaluit), entered 4 miles

within the entrance, is a deep inlet indenting the S side of the

fjord. 

2.22 Kobbefjord, a short and narrow fjord, lies midway between

Lysefjord (Amerilik) and Godthabsfjord (Nuup Kangerlua), at

the W end of the peninsula which separates them. There is high

land on both sides of this fjord. Hjortetakken (Kingigtorssuaq),

a truncated peak, 1,183m high, stands on the SE side of the

entrance to Kobbefjord and is prominent. 

2.22 Prominent in Nuuk are the church spire standing at the NW

end of the town; the radio station situated on a hill 0.4 mile S of

the spire; Ny Herrnhut, a former Moravian mission consisting

of a long building with a spire, standing at the SW end of the

town; and the hospital standing close ENE of Ny Herrnhut.

2.22 Range lights, situated on an islet at the SE side of the

Nuuk (Godthab) Container Quay

Nuuk (Godthab) Dolphin Berth

Nuuk E entrance light

Nuuk harbor range lights
40 Sector 2. Greenland—West Coast—Kap Desolation to Nuuk (Godthab) 

Pub. 181

peninsula, indicate the fairway through the fjord to the harbor.

2.22 An aeronautical radiobeacon is situated on a small

promontory at the NW side of the town; an aeronautical lighted

beacon is shown, at an elevation of 99m, from a tower standing

1.5 miles ENE of it.

2.22 A chain of islands, islets, and rocks extends across the entrance to Kobbefjord and into the approach to Nuuk. A light is

shown from the E side of Serfartorssuaq (64°06'N.,

51°38'W.), the southeasternmost island of the chain.

2.22 The inner route to Nuuk leads between this chain and the entrance to Kobbefjord. It is reported that it can be used by vessels of up to 61m in length and 4.9m draft.

2.22 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but advisable. The

Port Manager is available and will act as an unlicensed pilot on

request. Vessels should send an ETA 36 hours and 24 hours in

advance when a pilot is required. The harbor can be contacted

by telegraph at Handel Godthaab or on VHF channel 9, 13, or

16. The harbor master monitors channel 16, call sign “Nuuk

Nuuk (Godthab)—Atlantic Quay in winter from NE

Nuuk (Godthab) inner harbor from S
Sector 2. Greenland—West Coast—Kap Desolation to Nuuk (Godthab) 41

Pub. 181

Havnekontor.” Pilot boards off Avatdleq,15 miles WSW of Agtorssuit U. Nuuk also provides pilotage for Kangerluarsoruseq

(Faeringehavn).

2.22 Anchorage.—Large vessels should anchor on a bank at the

W side of Malene Bugt, a bay at the E side of the peninsula, in

depths of 15 to 19m. Close S the depths increase rapidly and

the holding ground is not good.

2.22 Small vessels can anchor in Godthabs Red, the roadstead

fronting the town at the SW side of the peninsula, in depths of

22 to 46m. It is exposed and only recommended in good

weather with no ice.

2.22 Caution.—An overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of 60m, spans Lysefjord about 6 miles above the entrance

to Praestefjord.

2.22 An overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of 60m,

spans Kobbefjord 3 miles within its entrance.

Small vessels have ocasionally been ice-bound in the inner

harbor during winter. A wreck lies in a depth of 12m within the

small bay close SE of Nuuk.

2.23 Godthabsfjord extends inland above Nuuk for 50

miles as far as Kangersuneq (Kangersunek), the head. This is

separated by a narrow isthmus from the head of Pisigsarfik

(Kapisillit Kangerluaq), a branching arm which, in turn, is

separated by a low and narrow isthmus from Itivdleq, the NE

arm of Lysefjord, thereby forming an almost landlocked basin.

There are several large and lofty islands, separated by clean

and deep fairways, within this basin. The depths are generally

considerable throughout this extensive area, no bottom having

been found (1973) in several places at 600m. 

Soundings are not available for the inner part of

Kangersuneq, the head of which is filled with ice from the

interior. The “North Country,” on the W side of this area, is

relatively low-lying, with many large lakes. The land to the E is

high, with elevations up to 1,630m.

2.23 Sadelo, the southwesternmost island of the area, is located

5.5 miles NW of Nuuk. Sadlen, previously mentioned in paragraph 2.21, stands on the W side of this island.

2.23 Bjorneo, an island close N of Sadelo, extends NNE for 15.5

miles. Its greatest elevation, 1,256m, is located at the N end.

2.23 Qornoq (Qoornoq) (64°32'N., 51°06'W.), the site of a meteorological station and a settlement, stands on a low-lying island

off the NE end of Bjorneo. Small vessels can anchor in a bay S

of the station.

Nuuk (Godthab) from SW 

Qornoq (Qoornoq)
43

Pub. 181

3. 

Greenland—West Coast—Nuuk (Godthab) to Disko Bugt 

(Qeqertatsuup Tunua)

3.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 3 — CHART INFORMATION
45

Pub. 181

SECTOR 3 

GREENLAND—WEST COAST—NUUK (GODTHAB) TO DISKO BUGT (QEQERTARSUUP 

TUNUA)

3.0 Plan.—This sector describes the W coast of Greenland N

from Kangeq, on the NW side of the entrance to Nuuk

(Godthab) to Sarqardlit, on the S side of the entrance to Disko

Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua).

General Remarks

3.1 This sector describes about 270 miles of coastline.

The ice-free land, which lies at the back of this entire stretch,

widens to about 60 miles between the coast and the Gronland

Ice cap to the E. It consists of a low plain with numerous lakes

and swampy patches. The mainland coast is indented by numerous fjords that are separated by peninsulas and extend up to

100 miles inland, usually ending at glaciers or at valleys leading to glaciers.

3.1 The section of coast between Godthabsfjord (see paragraph

2.21 and paragraph 2.23) and Fiskefjord (Niaqunngunaq), 40

miles N, is indented by several short fjords and fronted by a

chain of large islands lying close inshore. Numerous islets lie

up to 4 miles seaward of this chain of islands.

3.1 Between Fiskefjord (Niaqunngunoq) and Sukkertoppen, the

coast is more indented and has fewer off-lying islands, which

are farther offshore. 

3.1 In the area of Sukkertoppen, 85 miles NNW of Nuuk

(Godthab), the coast presents a succession of precipitous and

lofty headlands. North of Sukkertoppen, the ice-free land attains a width of over 100 miles.

3.1 Between Sukkertoppen and Egedesminde, on the S side of

the entrance to Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua), 197 miles N,

the mainland coast is high and mountainous, except for a 45

mile-long stretch at the N end, where the land is reported to be

the flattest and most featureless in Greenland. 

3.1 Caution.—Due to numerous islets, rocks, shoal patches, and

foul ground, the waters along this coast are difficult for safe

navigation. Vessels without local knowledge should not approach closer than 10 miles and should keep in depths of over

50m. 

3.1 A below-water rock lies in a shoal area in position 64°13'N,

52°20'E, about10.5 miles NW of Kangeq and 5 miles offshore.

Nuuk (Godthab) to Sukkertoppen

3.2 Kangeq (64°06'N., 52°03'W.), an island 111m high,

is located on the NW side of the entrance to Godthabfjord. Habets O is an island lying close N of Kangeq and is connected to

its N part by a narrow isthmus.

3.2 It is reported (1992) that a stranded wreck lies 3 miles off the

coast, 23 miles NNW of Kangeq.

3.2 The low, rolling aspect of the coast between Kangeq and Sukkertoppen is marked by two mountains that are conspicuous

from seaward. Toqqusaq (64°53'N., 52°10'W.), 516m high,

stands near the coast; Finnefjeld (65°16'N., 52°09'W.), 1,119m

high, has a serrated summit which resembles the fin of a fish and

is especially remarkable from N or S.

3.2 Ice.—It is only in exceptionally heavy ice years, such as

1898 and 1940, that the East Greenland pack ice drifts so far N

as to block this section of the coast. The coast between Nuuk

and Sukkertoppen (65°25'N., 52°55'W.) is nearly free of pack

ice, more so than any other part of West Greenland, lying as it

does, just outside the S limit of the pack ice which drifts S from

Baffin Bay.

3.2 Caution.—Toqqusaq Banke (64°25'N., 53°25'W.) lies in

the SW approach to Fiskefjord, with its NE extremity located

37 miles NW of Kangeq. There is a least charted depth of 41m

on this bank, which is about 8 miles wide and 22 miles long.

3.2 Sukkertop Banke lies in the SW approach to Sukkertoppen,

with its SE extremity located 52 miles NW of Kangeq. There is

a least charted depth of 33m on this bank, which is 25 miles

wide and 36 miles long.

3.3 Fiskefjord (Niaqunngunaq) (64°45'N., 52°05'W.) is

the next fjord of any size N of Godthabfjord. It penetrates the

coast for 27 miles and is fronted by numerous islets and rocks

which extend up to 5.5 miles offshore. There are many small

islands in Fiskefjord, which is much indented by narrow channels that are characterized by strong tidal currents. A submerged wreck lies near the S entrance buoys, about 0.5 mile off

the W cape. The shores are low at the entrance and rise gradually to the head, where, on the S side, they fall steeply to the

sea. Kakatsiak (65°01'N., 51°30'W.), a prominent mountain

669m high, stands near the head of the fjord. Tasiusarsuaq is

the upper branch in Niaqunngunaq. Three mooring buoys and a

quay, about 300m long and 35m wide, have been established at

a unnamed settlement near position 64°59'N, 51°35'W. 

3.3 Angmagssivik (Ammassivik), a short fjord branching into

two arms, is separated from Fiskefjord (Niaqunngunaq) by

only a narrow peninsula. It is also fronted by numerous dangers. A river enters the N arm from a lake. 

 Fiskefjord bend
46 Sector 3. Greenland—West Coast—Nuuk (Godthab) to Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua) 

Pub. 181

3.3 Atammik (Atangmik) (64°48'N., 52°11'W.), a trading station, is situated at the head of a bight 1 mile within the N entrance point of the fjord. The harbor is navigable from early

April to mid-December, but is restricted to only small vessels

up to 40m in length. It is reported that several prominent buildings stand at the station; these include a modern trading terminal, a store, warehouses, and a chapel/school. Anchorage is

available, in a depth of 15m, close NNW of the station. 

3.4 Toqqusaq Havn (64°52'N., 52°12'W.), 4.5 miles N of

Atangmik, is located close under Toqussaq, a conspicuous

mountain previously described in paragraph 3.2. A short spur

extends W from the foot of the mountain and forms Inderhavn,

an inner harbor, on its N side. Small vessels can berth here at

high water. Qaersup Ilua, on the S side of this spur, is a large

bay in which the depths are too great for anchoring. Lango, a

long narrow island, lies close off the spur and almost landlocks

Inderhavn and Qaersup Ilua. A beacon stands 0.5 mile N of its

S extremity. Inderhavn can be entered through Sydlob, a channel 200m wide and 24m deep, which leads between Lango and

the mainland. A small fishing station, used in summer, is situated in the middle of the E side of Lango. 

3.4 The approaches to Inderhavn and Lango are encumbered

with small islets, rocks, and patches of foul ground; local

knowledge is required.

3.4 Talerulik (64°59'N., 52°22'W.), an elongated island, and

Nunarssuaq, close NW, are the largest of a group of islands, islets, rocks, and shoals which lie off the entrance to Kangia

Fjord. Napasoq (Napassoq), a hunting base and trading station,

is situated on the E side of a small island lying 1.75 miles ENE

of the N extremity of Nunarssuaq. It is reported that the buildings of the base are visible from a considerable distance. 

3.4 Kangia Fjord, 4 miles wide at its outer part, extends NE for

17 miles to its head into which a river flows. The depths in the

fjord appear great, but its entrance is encumbered with islets,

rocks, and shoals. Tasiusaq (Tasiussaq) and Amitsuarssuk, two

short branches of the fjord, are entered on the SE side of its

outer part. 

3.4 Alanngua (Alangua), a short and broad fjord encumbered

with islets and rocks, is entered between the NW side of the island forming the outer part of Kangia Fjord and the SW extremity of a peninsula extending from the mainland, 3.5 miles

NW. Groups of rocks, awash and below-water, lie 1.5 and 4.5

miles SW of the SW extremity of the above peninsula on the

NW side of the approach to the fjord. 

3.4 Uummannaq (65°16'N., 52°35'W.), an island, 281m high, is

located close offshore 5 miles NNW of the N entrance point of

Alangua Fjord. Several patches of foul ground and rocks extend up to 2 miles W and SW from it.

3.5 Sondre Isortoq is a long and narrow fjord, entered 5

miles NNE of Uummannaq, at 23 miles from its entrance,

divides into two arms. Nukappiaq (Nukagpiaq) (65°30'N.,

51°51'W.), a mountain, 1,269m high, stands near the S shore of

the fjord, located within 12 miles from its entrance. 

3.5 Kangerluarsuk (Kangerdluarssuk), a short and narrow fjord,

is entered 8 miles N of Umanaq. A small settlement is situated

at the head of a small bay close within the E entrance point. 

3.5 Maniitsup Sermilia (Manitsup Sermilia), a fjord entered 11

miles NNE of Umanaq, terminates at the foot of a glacier.

3.5 From the seaward end of the peninsula, which separates

Kangerluarsuk (Kangerdluarssuk) from Maniitsup Sermilia

(Manitsup Sermilia), an area of foul ground with numerous islets and rocks extends up to 8 miles SSW. Spaniolo (65°18'N.,

52°48'W.), an islet, 28m high, is located at the SW extremity of

this foul ground area. Below-water rocks extend 0.5 mile SSW

and up to 2.5 miles SSE of Spaniolo in the approaches to the

fjords. A narrow channel, marked by beacons, is reported to lie

across the middle of the foul ground area. 

Settlements and villages in the vicinity of Maniitsoq

Courtesy of Wedigo Ferchland - Denmark

Maniitsoq (Sukkertoppen)
Sector 3. Greenland—West Coast—Nuuk (Godthab) to Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua) 47

Pub. 181

3.5 Maniitsoq (65°28'N., 52°57'W.), a rugged island of irregular

shape, is located 7 miles NNW of Spaniolo and 3 miles off the

mainland coast. It is comparatively free of snow and brownish

in color. The area between this island and the mainland is encumbered with numerous islands, islets, and dangers. There are

also many dangers lying off its S and W sides.

3.5 Kin of Sal, a steep brownish-colored island 375m high, lies

close off the SW side of Manitsoq and is very conspicuous

from the S and N, standing out distinctly against the background. Naujarssuit, located 1.25 miles SW of Kin of Sal, is

the northwestern islet of a chain of barren islets and rocks that

extends SE for 4 miles. A below-water rock lies about 1 mile

W of Naujarssuit.

3.5 Pattefjeld, a mountain 570m high, stands on Manitsoq, 3.25

miles NNW of its S extremity; it has a rounded summit and is

very prominent.

3.5 Kistefjeld (65°32'N., 52°46'W.), a mountain, 898m high,

stands on the mainland 5.25 miles E of the N extremity of

Manitsoq. It is prominent from about 2 miles offshore, but not

from a greater distance as it stands against a backgroud of

higher and serrated mountains that dominate the coast. It may

be identified by a cleft located on the S side of the summit that

descends almost to the water. 

3.6 Maniitsoq (Sukkertoppen) (65°25'N., 52°55'W.)

(World Port Index No. 670) is one of Greenland’s largest settlements. It is situated on the SE side of Maniitsoq Island. The

open season is from March to Janurary. Winter ice may occur.

The port handles general cargo and containers. 

3.6 Ice.—Ice occurs locally from December to April, but breaks

up easily.

3.6 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 4.2m at springs and 2m

at neaps. A tidal current is reported to run across the entrance

to the harbor. During the ebb, the S current attains a rate of 2

knots.

3.6 Depths—Limitations.—Atlantic Quay is 60m long and has

a depth of 8m alongside. There is an extensive quay, with a

depth of 3.5m alongside, for fishing vessels. There is also Fishing pier, with a depth of 6.5m alongside.

3.6 Vessels up to 7,500 dwt, 110m in length, and 7.5m draft have

been accommodated.

3.6 Aspect.—The approach to Maniitsoq harbor is one of the

most difficult in West Greenland. The main channel lies between the foul ground extending NNE from Spaniolo, on the E

side, and the foul ground extending S from Manitsoq, on the W

side.The harbor can also be approached from N by a narrow

channel that leads close to the E coast of Manitsoq.

3.6 A radiobeacon is located close N of the harbor.

Kitdliaraq, a small islet, is located 3.75 miles NNW of Spaniolo at the W edge of the foul ground. A light is shown from a

tower, 7m high, standing on this islet; a racon is located at this

light.

Maniitsoq (Sukkertoppen)

Approach to Maniitsoq (Sukkertoppen)

Maniitsoq (Sukkertoppen) outer harbor
48 Sector 3. Greenland—West Coast—Nuuk (Godthab) to Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua) 

Pub. 181

3.6 Faltings Skaer, a detached rock with a depth of less than

1.8m, lies on the W side of the approach fairway, 2.25 miles

WNW of Kitdliaraq Light.

3.6 Ikermiut Rev, a reef with depths of 1.8m, lies on the E side of

the fairway, 1.75 miles NW of Kitdliaraq Light.

3.6 Hellefiskeskaer, a group of rocks, lies on the W side of the

channel, 2.5 miles NW of Kitdliaraq Light. Numerous dangers

extend NNE from these rocks to the S side of the harbor entrance.

3.6 Kirkegaardsnaes Light, indicating the approach fairway, is

shown from the NE end of a point located 0.5 mile NE of the

harbor.

3.6 The harbor is entered between Portusoq (Portussoq), an islet

40m high, and the coast of Maniitsoq, 0.1 mile SW. The entrance fairway is indicated by a light shown from the W side of

the harbor. 

3.6 Pilotage.—Taking a pilot is not compulsory but is advisable.

Unlicensed pilot is available by arrangement with Port Operator. Vessels should send request for pilot through Nuuk (call

sign “OX”). Pilot meets vessel outside the harbor or at Faltings

Skaer, 2.5 miles S of Maniitsoq Light. The harbor can be entered day or night throughout the year. However, no attempt

should be made during strong S to SW winds which cause a

heavy sea and swell in the harbor. 

3.6 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor in the roadstead 1 mile E

of the harbor, in depths of 13 to 29m, but the holding ground is

not good. A 9m shoal patch lies close N of it.

3.6 Anchorage may also be found between the entrance to Ata,

an inlet lying about 2 miles NNW of Maniitsoq, and an islet

0.7 mile E. There is a 5.8m shoal on the north side of the anchorage and a 10.3m patch on the S side.

3.6 Caution.—A pipeline runs from the fish quay within Yderhavn and then leads SE through the harbor entrance.

Maniitsoq (Sukkertoppen) to Sondre Stromfjord

(Kangerlussuaq) 

3.7 On the high land near the coast, between Sukkertoppen and Sondre Stromfjord (Kangerlussuaq), there is a large,

isolated glacier and the tongue of the Gronland Icecap. Otherwise, this section of the coast consists of the broadest ice-free

belt in West Greenland. 

3.7 Between Maniitsoq and Sondre Stromfjord (Kangerlussuaq),

37 miles NW, the coast is indented by five fjords and fronted

by several large islands. These islands are fringed by numerous

small islets and rocks on their seaward sides. The high land

within the coast includes some of the loftiest mountains in

West Greenland. 

3.7 Hamborgerland (Sermersuut), a large island, fronts the coast

N of Maniitsoq and can be identified by its snow-capped

mountains in the N part. 

3.7 Ammaqqoq (Angmarqoq), a channel separating Hamborgerland (Sermersuut) from Maniitsoq (Sukkertoppen), is deep and

free of off-lying dangers. 

3.7 Hamborgersund, deep in mid-channel, separates the N side

of Hamborgerland (Sermersuut) from a large peninsula of the

mainland. It is entered from E by a deep passage that lies between the island and Ikamuit, a small settlement situated 0.75

mile E on a small projection of the mainland. It is entered from

W by a narrow channel that passes between several groups of

islets and rocks and has a least depth of 7m.

3.7 Appamiut Kangerdluarsuat, a fjord entered 3 miles N of the

W entrance to Hamborgersund, extends NE and is surrounded

by steep mountains. Numerous islets and rocks extend up to 4

miles SW from the 631m high SW extremity, of the narrow

projection that forms the NW side of this fjord.

3.7 Ikermiut (65°46'N., 53°20'W.), two islets surrounded by

Maniitsoq (Sukkertoppen)

Hamborgerland (Sermersuut)

Passage inside of Hamborgerland (Sermersuut)
Sector 3. Greenland—West Coast—Nuuk (Godthab) to Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua) 49

Pub. 181

rocks, lie 4.5 miles NNW of the entrance to Appamiut Kangerluarsuat (Agpamiut Kangerdluarssuat); the SW islet is marked

by a beacon. 

3.7 Evighedsfjord, long and branching, is entered 3 miles NE of Ikermiut. Twenty miles within the entrance, two outlets of a large

glacier lead down from Sukkertoppen Icecap and terminate in

high ice walls, which calve into the fjord at frequent intervals.

Taateraat (Taterat), 2,187m high, stands near the head of the fjord

and is conspicuous. It rises almost vertically for 915m from the

glacier and then slopes skyward to a pyramidal summit. Qinngua

Avannarleq (Avangnatdlek) opens off the SE side of the fjord 3

miles from the head; this long arm extends 28 miles farther inland. 

3.8 Kangaamiut (Kangamiut), an island rising to a height

of 469m in its N part, is located 2 miles W of the N entrance

point of Evighedsfjord. 

3.8 Kangaamiut (Kangamiut) (65°50'N., 53°21'W.) (World Port

Index No. 680), a small natural harbor, is formed between the

SW side of Kangamiut Island and a chain of islets which front

the shore. It can be entered at either end of the chain, but the S

channel is normally used. 

3.8 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 4m at springs and 2.1m

at neaps. The tidal streams are weak.

3.8 Depths.—Limitations.—There is a quay, 10m long, with

depths of 2.5 to 4m alongside, and a fishing vessel wharf. Vessels up to 40m in length and 3.5m draft have been accommodated. It is reported that there are three mooring buoys for the

use of cutters.

3.8 Pilotage.—There are no pilots, but persons with local

knowledge are available.

3.8 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor close N of the settlement,

in depths of 30 to 40m. Mooring berths are available in the harbor for small vessels with anchors down and their sterns secured to ring bolts.

3.8 Caution.—It has been reported that a rock, over which the

depth is unknown, lies near position 65°57'03''N, 53°29'53''W

near Ungorsivik. 

3.9 Uummannat (Umanat) (65°52'N., 53°24'W.), an island located close NW of Kangamiut, can be easily identified

from a considerable distance by its cone-shaped peaks, the

highest of which attains an elevation of 423m. From the SW,

Uummannat and Kangamiut appear as a single dark bluff, but,

when observed from the N, they stand out as two separate islands. 

3.9 Kangaamiut Kangerluarsuat (Kangamiut Kangerdluarssuat),

a short fjord entered 2.5 miles NE of Umanat, is encumbered in

its approach by numerous scattered islets and rocks, through

which an unmarked and narrow channel leads. The fjord extends NE for 12 miles to a glacier, but is mostly unsurveyed. 

3.9 Lille Hellefiske Banke, with depths of 24 to 48m, lies centered 10 miles offshore in the SW approaches to Kangerlussuaq (Sondre Stromfjord) and can best be seen on the chart. 

3.9 Between Umanat and the entrance to Sondre Stromfjord, 9

miles NNW, the coast is fronted by numerous small islands, islets, rocks, and shoals extending up to 3 miles seaward.

3.10 Kangerlussuaq (66°02'N., 53°32'W.), a narrow and

long fjord, extends NE for 85 miles from its entrance to Nakajanga, a broad promontory, where Umiiviit (Umivit), a short

and broad branch, opens SE. North Fork, the continuation of

the main fjord, extends NE for a farther 12 miles to the head.

Kangerlussuup Umiarsualivia (Camp Lloyd), a marine terminal serving an airfield, is situated within North Fork. 

3.10 Kangerlussuaq is entered between Qeqertassuk (Qeqertasugssuk), a small island lying close off the mainland, and Simiaataq (Simiutag), a large island, 0.75 mile NW. Numerous

islets, rocks, and reefs lie in the entrance channel and reduce

the fairway to a width of 240m. 

3.10 Qeqertassuk (Qeqertasugssuk), on the SE side of the entrance, rises to a height of 162m. Simiutag, on the NW side of

the entrance, is rugged and attains a height of 783m near its

center It is distinguished by a lower, but prominent spur 1.5

miles E of the summit. Cruncher Island lies on the NW side of

the fairway, 0.4 mile W of the N end of Qeqertassuk (Qeqertasugssuk). A square building and several masts are reported to

stand on this island. 

3.10 The entrance should be approached from the W. Range

lights, situated on the N and S parts of Qeqertasugssuk and on

the N side of the fjord, indicate the fairway and may best be

seen on the chart. Depths in the fairway of the entrance and indenting the fjord for 6 miles vary from 16 to 110m. Caution is

advised as dangers lie along the sides of the fairway. A racon is

located near the SW extremity of Qeqertasugssuk.

3.10 The navigations beacons are normally withdrawn and removed during the winter months.

3.10 Ice.—In winter the fjord, from 30 miles within the entrance,

freezes over completely and is regarded as closed to navigation

from early January to the end of June. During this period and in

the spring, some ice is carried into the W part of the fjord by

the tidal current.

3.10 Tides—Currents.—Currents set strongly across the approach to the fjord entrance. They attain a rate of 7 knots, setting NE on the flood tide and SW on the ebb tide. The

maximum rates decrease to 3 knots, 20 miles within the fjord,

but the effect of the tidal stream is noticeable for another 40

miles.

3.10 Aspect.—In the vicinity of Sondre Stromfjord, the inland ice

recedes and the belt of ice-free land bordering the coast widens

to about 100 miles. From a position about 12 miles within the

entrance, the narrow strip of ice-free land along the SE shore of

the fjord is backed, for a distance of more than 20 miles, by the

great Sukkertoppen Ice Cap (Sukkertoppen Iskappe)

(66°13'N., 52°02'W.); the latter embraces an area of approximately 900 square miles between the fjord and Evighedsfjord.

3.10 About midway within the fjord, where the depths increase,

the sharp rugged mountains are replaced by rolling mountains

and then finally by rather low hills. Inland on either side of the

inner half of the fjord lies a rolling plain, covered with low

scrubs and dotted with lakes.

3.10 Puto (66°07'N., 53°10'W.), 1,020m high, stands on the SE

side of the fjord 10 miles within the entrance. The peak derives

its name from a small hole or tunnel near the summit, but this

is only visible when bearing almost SW from mid-channel. 

3.10 Augpilagtunguaq, 1,430m high, stands on the NW side of

the fjord 6.5 miles NNE of Puto. Its horned summit, from

which a black basalt strip extends almost to the water, is very

prominent. 

3.10 Sorte Klippe (Black-Faced Rock), a point at the SE side of
50 Sector 3. Greenland—West Coast—Nuuk (Godthab) to Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua) 

Pub. 181

the fjord almost directly across from Augpilagtunguaq, is a low

and distinctly marked black ridge.

3.10 Revet (The Reef), a pinnacle rock that dries, lies 0.5 mile N

of Sorte Klippe and is the only known danger in the fairway. It

resembles the back of a whale and eddies surround it.

3.10 Qaqortorssuaq, 6.5 miles NE of Augpilagtunguaq on the NW

side of the fjord, is a sheer light-colored mountain with a flat

top making it an excellent mark.

3.11 Fiskemesterens Havn (66°01'N., 53°28'W.) is a landlocked bay, 0.75 mile wide, formed between the E side of

Qeqertasugssuk and the mainland. The channel affording access to the bay and Paa (Pa Havn), an inlet opening S of Fiskemesterens Havn, is entered from the outer part of Kangerlussuaq (Sondre Stromfjord) between the NE extremity of

Qeqertasugssuk and the mainland. 

3.11 Anchorage.—Anchorage is available, in a depth of 40m,

mud, close off the entrance to a cove that forms the head of

Fiskemesterens Havn; however, at times, the tidal current runs

very strongly through this anchorage.

3.11 Large vessels can anchor, in depths of 40 to 60m, clay, in Paa

(Pa Havn) within the basin at the E end of the inlet. 

3.12 Sarfartooq Point (Sarfartok Point) (66°31'N.,

52°03'W.), located on the SE side of the fjord 48 miles above

the entrance, is the N entrance point of the Sarfartoq River estuary. This estuary, 0.75 mile wide, is a labyrinth of sand banks

and tidal channels.

3.12 Angujaarzorfik (Angujartorfik), a short and wide inlet on the

SE side of the fjord, is entered 18 miles NE of Sarfartok Point.

A river, which drains from some inland lakes, flows into its

head. Vessels can anchor in this inlet, in depths of 18 to 55m,

but it is affected by gale force winds which funnel through the

surrounding hills. 

3.12 Tatsip Ataa (Tatsip Ata), a small inlet, is located on the SE

side of the fjord 12 miles NE of Angujaarzorfik (Angujartorfik). Vessels can obtain good anchorage in this inlet, in depths

of 18 to 55m. 

3.12 Umiviit (Bowdoin Bay), the S branch of Sondre Stromfjord

(Kangerlussuaq), is entered on the SE side of the fjord, 3 miles

NE of the entrance to Tatsip Ata. 

3.12 North Fork, leading to the head of the fjord, is entered between Borup Pynt (Point Brainard), the E entrance point of

Umiviit, and Hancock Pynt (Hancock Point), 2.5 miles NW.

Depths within the fjord decrease rapidly toward the head.

Brennan Pynt (Brennan Point) lies 2.75 miles NE of Hancock

Point. 

3.13 Kangerlussuup Umiarsualivia (Kangerlussuaq)

(Camp Lloyd) (66°58'N., 50°57'W.) (World Port Index No.

695) is situated at the head of Soendre Stroemfjord and is open

to the S, approximately 90 miles from the open sea. It is on the

N side of North Fork, 1.5 miles NE of Brennan Point. 

Kangerlussuup Umiarsualivia (Camp Lloyd) is a former

United States air base, built in 1941, but after technological

progress eliminated its military significance, it was turned over

to Greenland’s Home Rule in the 1990s. It provides a connection between the coastal passenger services and the continental

and internal air services operating from the airfield. 

3.13 Winds—Weather.—Due to its location far inland, Kangerlussuaq has an exceedingly stable climate with warm dry summers and very cold winters. Open season is from mid-June to

the beginning of December. The port is closed in winter because of ice. 

3.13 The prevailing winds at the port are NE; these are off the ice

cap and are cool and dry. During the summer season, there are

occasional strong winds from the S quadrant. From Evans

Fjeld (Mount Evans), where the topographic influence was

practically eliminated by the 397m elevation of the observatory, it was reported that 60 per cent of the winds were from W to

N. Kangerlussuaq has a sub-arctic climate; the area is generally

free of snow and seldom does the depth reach over 0.3m. Fog is

rare and the rainfall is extremely low. The harbor is normally

ice free from mid-June to the end of October. The harbor is

navigable day and night during the ice-free period.

3.13 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 3m at springs and 1.6m

at neaps. The high water at the head of the fjord occurs about 3

hours later than at the mouth.

3.13 Depths—Limitations.—The port consists of a bridge, 45m

long, with a depth of 1.5m. There is a quay, 20m long, for the

use of small craft.

Kangerlussuup Umiarsualivia (Camp Lloyd)

Kangerlussuup Umiarsualivia (Camp Lloyd) 
Sector 3. Greenland—West Coast—Nuuk (Godthab) to Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua) 51

Pub. 181

3.13 Two submerged oil pipelines extend SE for 0.5 mile from the

harbor, the ends marked by buoys. At the seaward end of these

pipelines there is a tanker terminal with bow and stern moorings; the berth is 300m long with depths of 10.5 to 15.0m. 

3.13 There is a mooring buoy situated about 0.5 mile SSW of the

harbor, in a depth of 60m.

3.13 Aspect.—Range lights indicate the approach to the harbor

and can best be seen on the chart. It is reported (2008) that the

paint on one of the rear leading light structures has faded and

therefore the beacon is difficult to see in daylight.

3.13 Two radio masts stand about 1.25 miles N of the harbor. An

aeronautical light is reported to be shown from a position 9

miles E of the radio masts. 

3.13 Pilotage.—Local residents, with knowledge of local conditions, are available if requested. Vessels should establish contact by radiotelephone at least 1 hour prior to arrival. 

3.13 Local residents are also available to assist in the entry and

navigation of the fjord. Vessels should send an ETA at least 24

hours in advance. The harbormaster may be contacted by VHF

and radiotelephone.

3.13 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor 0.5 mile E of Brennan

Point, in a depth of 80m, or 3 miles E of the same point, in a

depth of 40m. Tankers moor to a large buoy 0.4 mile SSE from

Emmons Pynt. The ground is good and consists of mud and

clay. However, the bottom slopes steeply and vessels are advised to contact the port before anchoring.

Kangerlussuaq (Sondre Stromfjord) to Sisimiut

(Holsteinsborg)

3.14 The coast between the entrance to Kangerlussuaq

(Sondre Stromfjord) and Sisimiut (Holsteinsborg), 55 miles N,

appears as a range of snow-capped hills weathered into fantastic shapes that seem to rise almost vertically from the sea. 

3.14 In parts, the coast is indented by several small inlets. Large

rivers, which drain the lakes lying a few miles inland, flow into

the heads of these inlets.

3.14 Caution.—Numerous groups of islets and rocks, surrounded

by very shallow water, form an almost continuous belt along

this stretch of coast and vessels are advised to keep at least 10

to 12 miles offshore.

3.14 Local magnetic anomalies have been observed along this

stretch of coast.

3.14 Kingatsiaq (Qinngatsiaq) (66°10'N., 53°36'W.), a mountain,

543m high, stands on the coast 8 miles N of the entrance to

Sondre Stromfjord. It is outstanding for its steep dark sides and

dome-shaped summit. 

3.14 Kangerdluarsuqssuaq (66°14'N., 53°37'W.), a narrow

fjord, is entered 4 miles N of Kingatsiaq. It widens to 0.25 mile

and extends ENE for 12 miles to the head. The central part of

the mainland between this fjord and Itivdleq, 18 miles N, is occupied by an inactive glacier that rises to an elevation of

1,156m, about 2.25 miles NE of the head of Kangerdluarssuaq.

3.15 Anders Olsens Sund (Anders Olsen Sund)

(66°29'N., 53°40'W.) lies 15 miles N of Kangerdluarssugssuaq.

It separates Inugsugtussoq, a large island, from several smaller

islands located close offshore. The sound can only be entered

from N as the S entrance is encumbered with rocks. Anchorage

is available for small vessels, in a depth of 42m, about 0.75

mile within the sound, 75m E of a house standing on Inugsugtussoq. 

3.15 Itivdleq, a long and deep fjord, is entered between Cape

Burnil (66°32'N., 53°34'W.) and a point on the mainland 4

miles NE. Qeqertarssuatsiaq, an islet 38m high, is located 1.25

miles NNW of the entrance to Anders Olsens Sund on the S

side of the approach to the fjord. A light, indicating the

entrance to the fjord, is shown from this islet. A submerged

wreck lies about 7 miles NE of the light in the vicinity of

several small islets. 

3.15 The shores of Itivdleq are backed by magnificent mountains.

Qaqatsiaq (Kakatsaak ) (66°33'N., 53°09'W.), 1,062m high,

stands on the N side and is prominent. Qaqatoqoq

(Kakadokak) (66°38'N., 52°52'W.), a snow-capped peak

1,453m high, stands 3.5 miles N of the N shore of the fjord and

is very conspicuous.

3.15 The N side of the approach to the fjord is formed by a chain

of islets and rocks extending 7 miles WSW from the N entrance point. Anarnitsut, an islet, lies 3 miles NNW of Qeqertarssuatsiaq Light and 1.5 miles within the outer end of this

chain. Below-water rocks, with depths of less than 1.8m, lie 3.5

miles NNW and 1.5 miles W of this islet. These rocks are the

outer dangers in the approach to the fjord.

3.15 Itivdlaq Harbor lies between two islets at the inner end of the

chain forming the N approach to the fjord. It can be approached from N or S through channels which have depths of

24m and are marked by beacons. The harbor is entered from W.

Tides rise about 3.8m at springs and 1.9m at neaps. There is a

24m long quay, with depths of 0.5 to 1.5m alongside. Vessels

up to 30m in length and 3.5m draft have been handled at HW.

There is a mooring berth, in depths of 20 to 30m, where vessels

anchor and secure their sterns to the NW extremity of an islet

in the harbor. There are no pilots, but persons with local knowledge are available from Sisimiut. The harbor is icebound in

January and February; during severe winters, the immediate

approaches to the fjord are also icebound.

3.16 Between Itivdleq and Sisimiut, 23 miles N, the coast

is indented by four large fjords. These fjords are deep and,

within their entrances, appear to have few off-lying dangers.

Kangerlussuaq (Camp Lloyd) Air Traffic Control Tower
52 Sector 3. Greenland—West Coast—Nuuk (Godthab) to Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua) 

Pub. 181

However, they have not been completely surveyed and caution

is advised.

3.16 Kangerluarsuk (Kangerdluarssuk), the southernmost fjord of

the four, is entered 10 miles NE of Itivdleq. It is flanked by

bare rugged mountains and extends E for 15 miles. It is reported to have a least depth of 35m. Kinngaq (Kingaq) (66°38'N.,

53°26'W.), a conspicuous mountain 640m high, stands 4.5

miles NNE of Itivdleq. 

3.16 Qeqertalik (Kekertalik), a short and broad fjord, is separated

from Kangerluarsuk (Kangerdluarssuk) by a narrow promontory that rises to a height of 734m. It is restricted by Qeqertarssua, a large island 480m high, located in its central part. Rocks,

with depths of less than 1.8m, lie between the island and the S

shore of the fjord. 

3.16 Ikertoq, a long and branching fjord, is entered 11 miles N of

Itivdleq and separated from Qeqertalik by an irregular promontory that rises to a height of 610m. It freezes over from December to March. Sallersuaq (Saglerssuak), a large island, 541m

high, lies close off the seaward end of this promontory and

forms the S side of the outer part of the fjord. Sarfanguaqland,

a very large island 401m high, lies 18 miles NNE of Itivdleq

and forms the N side of the outer part of the fjord. Numerous

islets and rocks lie off the seaward ends of Sallersuaq (Saglerssuak) and Sarfanguaqland. 

3.16 Maniitsorsuaq (Manitsorssuaq), a large island, lies 1 mile off

the NW coast of Sarfanguaqland. Ingigsorssuaq, a prominent

mountain 353m high, stands on the W part of this island. Umanarssugssuaq, a smaller island, 154m high, lies 1 mile SW of

the SW side of Maniitsorsuaq (Manitsorssuaq). 

3.16 Amerloq (Amerdloq), a deep fjord, is entered between the

NW extremity of Maniitsorsuaq (Manitsorssuaq) and the mainland 2.5 miles N. It is connected at its inner end to Ikertoq by a

narrow channel which leads E of the E extremity of Sarfanguaqland. The fjord freezes over from December to April; the

inner part not clearing until the end of May. The S side of the

approach to the fjord is encumbered with islets, rocks, and

shoals that extend up to about 5 miles W and SW of the W end

of Manetorssuak. 

3.16 Sarfanguaq, a settlement, is located at the E end of Sarfanguaqland and approached through a very narrow channel.

Small craft can moor alongside a jetty or anchor, in depths of 5

to 15m, off the settlement. Local knowledge is required.

3.17 Sisimiut (Holsteinsborg) (66°56'N., 53°41'W.)

(World Port Index No. 690), one of the leading fishing centers

of West Greenland, is situated on the S side of an inlet that indents the mainland coast close N of the entrance to Amerdloq

Fjord. 

Sisimiut is located north of the Arctic Circle and is Greenland’s nothernmost town with an ice-free harbor during winter.

With its 5,400 inhabitants divided between the town proper and

the nearby settlements of Sarfannguaq and Itilleq, Sisimiut is

the second-largest municipality in Greenland.

3.17 Ice.—The winter ice forms about the first of January and

rarely breaks up until the latter part of April or the beginning of

May. It attains a considerable thickness at Sisimiut; the heaviSisimiut (Holsteinsborg)

Sismiut (Holsteinsborg)
Sector 3. Greenland—West Coast—Nuuk (Godthab) to Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua) 53

Pub. 181

est observed had a thickness of about 0.8 to 1.7m. The harbor

can normally be entered all year round.

3.17 Early in the spring, W ice occasionally blocks the approaches to Sisimiut; however, this ice seldom remains against the

coast later than April, after which it is usually encountered

from 40 to 50 miles offshore. Icebergs are seldom seen at Sisimiut.

3.17 The port consists of an inner and outer harbor providing accommodation for small general and bulk cargo ships and fishing vessels.

3.17 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 4.4m at springs and 2m

at neaps. The tidal currents are weak inside the harbor. Gales

from the W can increase the water level in the harbor. In the

offing, the tidal currents are strong. The flood current, with a

rate of 2 to 3 knots, sets to the NNW and assumes a more N set

as it slackens. The ebb current sets in the opposite direction

with a rate of 1.5 to 2 knots. These are the usual directions and

rates, but winds often influence the currents.

Depths—Limitations.—Vessels of up to 180m in length

and 7.5m draft have been accommodated alongside. There are

anchor berths with stern moorings within the harbor. There are

extensive quays for fishing vessels, with depths of 0.5 to 5m

alongside, in the inner harbor.

Off the tank farm, there is an anchor berth with stern moorings for tankers up to 30,000 dwt.

Sydlobet is normally the preferred approach channel. Vessels

approach from the W and pass S and E of Mollers O. A range,

situated on the N side of the inlet, indicates the fairway leading

N between Stone Island and the 3m pinnacle rock close E. Another range, situated at the E side of the port, indicates the fairway leading E into the outer harbor. There is a least charted

depth of 11m in the fairway.

3.17 A bridge crosses the entrance to the bay, with a supporting

pillar at mid-point. The channel N of the pillar is 35m wide,

with a vertical clearance of 8m; the channel S of the pillar is

17.5m wide, with a vertical clearance of 6m. 

3.17 Aspect.—Augpilagtorssuag, a conspicuous mountain 898m

high, stands 10 miles E of the port.

3.17 Kaellingehaetten, a mountain 773m high, stands 3 miles

ESE of the port. It has a distinctive peak when seen from the

W. From close in and from the S, identification is helped by a

remarkable rock called Manden (The Man), which stands close

E of the summit and resembles a human figure.

3.17 Praestefjeldet, a precipitous ridge, rises to a height of 550m

about 1.5 miles NNW of the port; it becomes less steep as it

trends inland. Two cairns, visible from about 5 miles seaward,

stand on it. The highly elevated landscape located to the E of

this ridge is snow-covered even during the summer.

3.17 The mountainous countryside in the vicinity of the port, in

contrast to the low land on the S side of Amerdloq Fjord, may

help to identify the entrance to the harbor.

3.17 A radiobeacon is located close SW of the port.

3.17 Outlying islands and dangers lie up to 11 miles seaward of

the port. In the approach, an extensive archipelago of dangers

fronts the harbor and extends 8 miles NNW. A section of this

archipelago, which fringes the coast, has not been completely

surveyed.

3.17 The outer islets of the archipelago lie within three small

groups and may best be seen on the chart.

3.17 Qagssit (67°00'N., 54°08'W.) is the southwesternmost and

outermost of these groups. The northwesternmost and highest

islet of this group is 17m high and surmounted by a beacon.

Foul ground, consisting of sunken rocks and detached shoals,

extends SSE for 3.25 miles from the group. It is reported that

uncharted pinnacles exist in the vicinity of Qagssit.

3.17 Avangnardlerssuaq (Revet), marked by a beacon, lies 2.5

miles NE of Qagssit. It is the northernmost and largest islet of

the middle group. Below-water rocks and detached shoal

patches extend S from this group.

3.17 Inugsulinguaq, 37m high, lies 3 miles NE of Avangnardlerssuaq. It is the northernmost and largest islet of the NE group.

3.17 Nordlobet, a secondary approach channel from the N, is entered between the middle and NE groups.

3.17 Mollers O (66°55'N., 53°45'W.), an island, is located 1.75

miles SW of the port. A light is shown from a tower, 7m high,

standing on the SW extremity of this island; a racon is located

at the light. A dangerous rock lies 4 miles W of the light.

3.17 Frederik VII’s O, an island 80m high, lies 0.75 mile N of

Mollers O on an area of foul ground. A beacon stands on its

summit.

3.17 Stone Island lies near the outer edge of a foul area 60m E of

Mollers O. A pinnacle rock, with a depth of 3m, lies about 0.25

mile E of this island; occasionally, the sea breaks over it.

3.17 Jacobs Skaer, an isolated low rock, lies on a shoal patch 2

miles SW of Mollers O Light. There are always breakers or ripples on it.

3.17 Ikermiut, a rock, awash at high water, lies on a shoal patch

1.75 miles WNW of the N extremity of Frederik VII’s O.

3.17 Victoria Skaer, the westernmost of a group of below-water

rocks, lies 1 mile NE of Mollers O Light.

3.17 Qingmit, a small islet, lies 1.5 miles NE of Mollers O Light,

on the S side of the entrance to the harbor.

3.17 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but is advised. Unlicensed pilots are available on request and will board in the vicinity of Jacobs Skaer, 2 miles SW of Mollers O Light.

3.17 Regulations.—Vessels should send an ETA, along with its

pilotage request, at least 36 hours in advance. The port can be

contacted by VHF channel 12 and 16. The port is open day and

night, and normally year round.

3.17 Anchorage.—Vessels may anchor anywhere in the outer

harbor, in depths of 30 to 50m, blue clay and sand. Small vessels can anchor in the inner harbor, in a depth of 23m, clay. It is

reported that vessels can also anchor outside the harbor. 

3.17 Directions.—In clear weather, approach Sisimiut from the S

with Praestefjeldt to the NNE or from the WSW with Kaellingehaetten to the ENE. Both lead to Jakobs Skaer. On approach to land, care must be taken not to be set to the N.

Sisimiut—Berth Information

Berth Length Depth

Atlantic Quay 60m 8-12m

Industry Pier 80m 9.5m 

Offshore Quay 15m 6-8m

Schooner Quay 14m 7.0m
54 Sector 3. Greenland—West Coast—Nuuk (Godthab) to Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua) 

Pub. 181

3.17 Caution.—The prominent mountains in the vicinity of the

port may often be obscured by mist or fog.

3.17 Numerous dangers lie adjacent to the sides of the fairways.

3.17 Anchoring or navigating in parts of the harbor may be restricted during the operation of seaplanes.

3.17 An unmarked sewer outfall pipe extends about 0.2 mile NW

of Industry Pier, on the NE corner of Tommermandsoen. In addition, an oil pipeline and a submarine cable are laid across the

entrance. 

Sisimiut to Disko Bugt

3.18 Between Sisimiut and Vester Ejland, 102 miles N, the

coast is deeply indented by numerous fjords, of which Nordre

Isortoq (Sisimuit Isortuat), Nordre Stromfjord, and Arfersiorfik

are the largest. Inland, the belt of ice-free country is about 100

miles wide, narrowing to about 50 miles at the N end. 

3.18 Kangerdluarssuk Tugdleq (Kangerluarsuk Tulleq) and Kangerdluarssuk Ungatdleq are two narrow and short fjords entered

4 and 8 miles, respectively, NW of Sisimiut. The numerous islets, foul ground, and dangers lying within the archipelago,

which extends NW from Sisimiut, encumber the entrances of

both these fjords.

3.18 A power cable crosses Kangerdluarssuk Tugdleq at about

position 65°59.5'N, 53°36.0'W. The vertical clearances are

11m S of the island of Qeqertarssuaq, 24m on the sounding

line N of the island of Qeqertarssuaq, 24m in the channel N of

the unnamed island that lies NE of Qeqertarssuaq, and 6.8 m in

the channel that leads to Tarajornitsoq Fjord.

3.18 Nordre Isortoq, a fjord entered 15 miles NNW of Sisimiut, is

encumbered by islets which lie about 2 miles within the entrance where the width decreases. No depths are indicated in

the outer part of the fjord and its inner reaches are shallow and

filled with mud flats. Prominent high land, rising to a height of

887m, stands on the S side of the entrance. Umataussaq (Umatuasak), a mountain 1,530m high, stands on the N side of the

fjord; although located 23 miles NE of the entrance, it is prominent from seaward. 

3.18 Sydbay (Isortoq), an island 86m high, lies off the N entrance

point of Norde Isortoq. It is the largest and highest of a group

of islands located off this fjord. A light is shown from this island. A beacon stands on a small islet lying close off the S end

of the island.

3.18 Vessels can obtain anchorage, in a depth of 16m, sand, within a channel lying between Sydbay and the mainland. The anchorage is well sheltered, with good holding ground. Local

knowledge is required

3.19 Nordre Stromfjord, entered 32 miles N of Sisimiut,

extends about 100 miles from its entrance to the inland icecap

and is one of the longest, if not the longest, fjord in West

Greenland. There are depths of over 100m in its entrance with

no known off-lying dangers; no soundings are available for the

remainder of it (1973).

3.19 From its entrance, Nordre Stromfjord extends NE for about

35 miles and divides into two arms that pass on either side of

Qeqertaussaq (Qeqertaasaq), a broad promontory, 630m high.

One arm, known as Amitsuarssuk (Amitsuarsuk), continues

NE for 23 miles to its head, while the main fjord trends E for

26 miles to a peninsula where it branches SE, E, and N. 

3.19 Caution.—A rock, over which the depth is unknown, has

been observed inside Amitsuarsuk fjord. The rock dries at low

water. 

3.19 Pertutussut, a group of islets and rocks, extend up to 1.25

miles offshore from the W side of the S entrance point.

3.19 Simiutat (Simiuttat), a chain of islets and rocks, extends up

to 2.25 miles WSW from the N entrance point; the tidal currents are reported to run very strongly among them. 

3.19 Eqalugssuit, a small inlet, indents the coast 9 miles N of

Nordre Stromfjord. It is the salmon-fishing center for the district of Egedesminde (Aasiaat). Simiutanguit (Simuitannguit),

a chain of islets and rocks, extends from 1 to 3 miles W of the

N entrance point. The channel between them is deep. A river at

the head of the inlet drains a great volume of water from

Gieseckes So (Giesecke So), a lake about 25 miles long and the

largest known in Greenland.

3.19 Shoal patches, with depths of 8 and 9m, are reported to lie

about 7 miles WNW of Simiutat.

3.20 Faeringe Nordhavn (67°40'N., 53°35'W.), a narrow

inlet, indents the coast 3.5 miles NE of Eqalugssuit. It is approached between the N side of Simiutanguit (Simuitannguit)

and Aorfit (Aarfit), a small island lying 1 mile NE. A beacon

stands on the SW side of this island. Kangeq, a large island

fronted by islets and rocks, forms the N side of the approach

between Aorfit (Aarfit) and the mainland, from which it is separated by a narrow channel. Large vessels can anchor, in a

depth of 30m, close NE of the largest islet, Qeqertarssuaq, on

the S side of the approach to Faeringe Nordhavn. Small vessels

can anchor within the inlet, in depths of 20 to 25m, about 240m

from its head. 

3.20 Kingigtoq, a prominent mountain, 730m high, stands 7 miles

NE of the head of Faeringe Nordhavn on the S side of Gieseckes S. It can be easily identified by its twin peaks. 

3.20 Numerous islands and dangers extend up to 11 miles from

the section of coast between Faeringe Nordhavn and the entrance to Arfersiorfik, 30 miles NNE. They may best be seen

on the chart.

3.20 Kitsigsut (Kitsissut) (67°47'N., 53°59'W.), an islet surrounded by foul ground, lies at the SW extremity of this area

4.5 miles NW of Kangeq. A beacon stands on this islet.

3.20 Shoals, existence doubtful, with depths of 9 and 13m, are reported to lie about 8 miles WSW and 9.25 miles NW, respectively, of Kitsigsut (Kitsissut). 

3.20 Manetsok (Maniitsoq), an island, 73m high, lies 4 miles NE

of Kitsigsut, with foul ground in between. Numerous shoals

and dangers lie between this island and the mainland. 

3.21 Rifkol (67°58'N., 53°47'W.), an island, 271m high,

lies 10 miles NNE of Kitsigsut. It is the highest of the outermost islands along this stretch of coast and is surrounded by islets and rocks.

3.21 A dangerous rock, existence doubtful, is reported to lie about

9.25 miles W of Rifkol.

3.21 Attu (Agto) (67°57'N., 53°38'W.) (World Port Index No.

700) a trading station, stands at the head of a small bay located

3.5 miles ESE of Rifkol. Anchorage can be obtained, in depths

of 40 to 45m, good holding ground, 120m NW of the station.

The tidal currents in the vicinity are strong. Pilots are not available, but mariners without local knowledge may obtain assis-
Sector 3. Greenland—West Coast—Nuuk (Godthab) to Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua) 55

Pub. 181

tance by contacting the Port Authority. Ajetty with a berthing

face 6.6m in length has 3.2m depth alongside.

3.21 Ikerasak, a settlement, lies on the SW side of an island

located 3.5 miles NE of Rifkol.

3.21 Simuitaluk, an island 70m high, lies 8.5 miles NNE of Rifkol at

the end of a chain of islands and islets extending from Rifkol. A

chain of islets and rocks extends 3.5 miles ENE from Simuitaluk

to Alangorssua, a peninsula extending W from the mainland.

3.21 Ataneq, a long and deep fjord, is entered S of the W extremity of Alangorssua. The N part of the entrance is encumbered

with islets and rocks. Ataneq extends ESE to within a few

miles of the NE arm of Nordre Stromfjord. The hills around the

fjord rise from heights of 90m in the outer part to 455m in the

inner reaches. Iginiarfik (Iginniarfik), a trading station, stands

on the shores of a harbor located in a bay 6 miles within the N

entrance point of the fjord. The bay and harbor are used by

fishing vessels with local knowledge. Winter ice may remain in

the bay until the early part of July, but it normally clears in

June. 

3.21 Simiutarssuaq, a large island 96m high, lies 3 miles N of

Simuitaluk. A cairn stands on its summit. A chain of islands,

islets, and rocks extends 10 miles ENE from the E side of the

island into the entrance of Arfersiorfik.

3.21 Arfersiorfik, a long and complicated fjord system, is entered N

of Alangorssua. It works its way generally in an ESE direction

for about 80 miles and terminates at the inland icecap. Depths in

the fjord are mostly unknown. For a distance of about 15 miles

within the entrance, the fjord resembles a bay encumbered by

numerous islands. There are several trading stations located

within the fjord system, but local knowledge is required.

3.21 Simiutarssup Ikardlue (68°11'N., 53°58'W.), a small group

of drying and below-water rocks, lies 5 miles W of Simiutarssuaq and 24 miles N of Kitsigsut at the NW end of this section

of coast. A dangerous rock lies 2.25 miles SE of the group.

3.21 Dangerous rocks, existence doubtful, have been reported to

lie 11.5 miles W, 8 miles WSW, and 11.25 miles SW of Simiutarssup Ikardlue.

3.21 Kitdliat (Killiat) (68°17'N., 53°45'W.), the outermost of the

islands in the approach to Arfersiorfik, lies 4.75 miles N of Simiutarssuaq. A chain of islands, islets, and rocks extends 5.5

miles ESE from this island along the N side of the approach to

the fjord. 

3.22 Naternaq (68°20'N., 52°00'W.) is a large land area

lying between Arfersiorfik Fjord and the SE part of Disko

Bugt. From its W side, a long and irregular peninsula, named

Tunorssup Nuna, extends WSW for nearly 20 miles. The seaward shores of both Naternaq and Tunorssup Nuna are much

indented by small fjords and bays and fronted by numerous

large and small islands. The coasts of Naternaq are low; the

land rises gradually from them towards the interior, where

there are elevations of 214 to 457m.

3.22 North of the entrance to Arfersiorfik Fjord, the coast recedes

to form an extensive bay bounded on its N side by Sarqardlit, a

large island. Numerous chains of islands, islets, and rocks lie

within and front this bay.

3.22 Kangatsiaq (Kangaatsiaq) (68°18'N., 53°28'W.), a settlement, is situated 5.5 miles ENE of Kitdliat. It stands on a level

plateau located on the W extremity of Tunorssup Nuna and is

fronted by islets, through which the tidal currents run with

great strength.

3.22 The harbor is normally navigable from the latter half of May

to the end of November, but there are numerous dangers in the

approach and local knowledge is required. A quay, 12m long,

has a depth of 3m alongside and there are four mooring buoys

for the use of fishing vessels. Coastal vessels can berth with an

anchor down and their stern secured to the quay. Vessels up to

60m in length and 4m draft have been handled. A light is

shown from close WSW of the quay; another light is shown

from an islet close WSW of the first light.

3.22 Vessels can anchor, in depths of 30 to 35m, between 60 and

120m SE of the quay; however, the holding ground is poor.

Two pairs of beacons have been established to assist vessels

when anchoring.

3.22 Qeqertarssuatsiaq, a large and irregularly-shaped island, lies

8 miles NE of Kangatsiaq in a bight formed on the N side of

Tunorssup Nuna. Knofjeld, a hill 194m high, stands on its W

end.

3.22 Qioqerssuit and Qioqinquit, both small groups of islets and

rocks, lie 6 miles NW and 8.5 miles NNW, respectively, of

Kangatsiaq and are among the outermost dangers along this

stretch of coast.

3.22 Sarqardlit (Sarqardlip Nuna), a large island, lies on the S side

of the entrance to Disko Bugt and is narrowly separated from

the mainland at the E end. It rises to a height of 247m in its

central part. The settlement of Egedesminde (Aasiaat) is situated on the NW end of one of the numerous islands lying off its

N side. Manermiut, a very small settlement, stands on the N

side of the W extremity of Sarqardlit. Nivap Suvdlua (Sarqardleq), a channel, separates the islands lying off the NW side

of Natermaq from the S side of Sarqardlit (Saqqarliit). This

channel, for which no soundings are indicated and in which

Attu (Agto)

Kangatsiaq
56 Sector 3. Greenland—West Coast—Nuuk (Godthab) to Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua) 

Pub. 181

there are a number of islets and rocks, extends ENE for about

16 miles. 

3.22 A belt of islets and rocks, up to 3 miles wide, extends SW for

about 10 miles from the W end of Sarqardlit (Saqqarliit). Sioragdlit (68°30'N., 53°36'W.), a small islet, lies at the seaward

end of this belt, 4 miles NNE of Qioqinquit. Ivnalinguaq, a

small islet 68m high, lies 1 mile N of Sioragdlit and is among

the outer dangers along this stretch of coast. 

3.23 Akulliit (Akugdlit) (68°35'N., 53°30'W.), a group of

small islands and islets, is located 3.5 miles NNE of Ivnalinguaqa; the center island is 43m high and marked by a beacon.

This group, fringed by dangerous rocks, is among the outer

dangers along this section of coast. An isolated rock, with a

depth of 5m, lies about 2.25 miles W of the group.

3.23 Vester Ejland, the largest island of a group of islands and islets, is located 2.5 miles N of Akugdlit in the SW approaches to

Disko Bugt, the S part of a large bay extending NNW from

Sarquardlit. Arfersiorfik
57

Pub. 181

4. 

Greenland—West Coast—Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua) 

to the Svartenhuk Peninsula (Sigguup Nunaa)

4.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 4 — CHART INFORMATION
59

Pub. 181

SECTOR 4 

GREENLAND—WEST COAST—DISKO BUGT (QEQERTARSUUP TUNUA) TO THE SVARTENHUK PENINSULA (SIGGUUP NUNAA)

4.0 Plan.—This sector describes the W coast of Greenland from

Vester Ejland, on the S side of Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup

Tunua), to Sigguup (Svartenhuk Point) on the Svartenhuk Peninsula (Sigguup Nunaa). It includes descriptions of Disko Bugt

(Qeqertarsuup Tunua), Disko Island, Vaigat, Umanak Fjord,

and Karrats Fjord (Karrat Fjord). 

General Remarks

4.1 The coastal area described in this sector is characterized by broad bays, long peninsulas, off-lying islands, and

branching fjords which extend to the Inland Ice Cap in many

places. Anchorages are available at the ports and at several other localities throughout this area; however, most of them are

suitable only for small vessels.

4.1 Winds—Weather.—During the summer in good weather,

the prevailing winds blow in or out of the bight, but in stormy

weather there are winds from other directions. The level of

tides can be increased up to 0.3m by winds from the W and decreased up to 0.5m by winds from the E through S.

4.1 Fog frequently extends through the entrance to Disko Bugt

(Qeqertarsuup Tunua) past Egedesminde (Aasiaat) and

Godhavn; it enters with the afternoon wind from seaward and

remains until the offshore E wind arrives in the morning. Fog

also enters from N through Vaigat and covers the E part of the

bight. When close drift ice remains N of Jakobshavn Isford,

fog will sometimes form in the area. 

4.1 The climate of Christianshaab is reported to be the best in

Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua). The prevailing winds are

from E and NE, especially in the fall, with not much force.

However, the katabatic wind is as violent here as anywhere in

Greenland and has, at times, done considerable damage. Fog is

rare, but will often form when many icebergs are in the vicinity. The average number of days with clear and calm weather is

high. Summer temperatures rise to 20°C in the shade. The sun

remains above the horizon from May 22 to July 23. The sunless

period lasts from December 2 to January 23-25. 

4.1 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents run at a greater rate

on the S side of the bight than in the N part, except along the N

shore; in consequence, there are always fewer bergs and less

calfved ice near the S shore of the bight than near the SE coast

of Disko Island (Qeqertarsuaq). 

4.1 The West Greenland Current sets N along this section of the

coast, with a maximum rate of 0.5 knot. During the summer

months, when the rate increases, a branch of this current sets E

into the S side of the entrance to Disko Bugt.

4.1 Ice.—Normally, Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua) is frozen

solid in winter with ice extending seaward up to a line between

Egedesminde and Godhavn. Christianshaab and Godhavn are

rarely ice-free until June and the other settlements are not navigable until the end of June at the earliest. Fast ice and new ice,

developing into winter ice, begin to form in Disko Bugt and

Vaigat towards the end of November or early December. When

the winter ice is established, sledging is sometimes possible

between Egedesminde and Godhavn, but storms frequently

break up the ice at the seaward side. The winter ice does not

clear until about the end of May. When the ice breaks up, numerous icebergs from Jacokshavn, 60 to 90m high, fill the

bight and render it unnavigable for several days. Many of these

bergs ground on the foul areas at the entrance and within the

bight. 

4.1 Usually the pack ice appears in early January and retracts by

the middle of April. The heaviest winter ice observed had a

thickness of 1m; it can reach a thickness of about 0.3m by January 1 and nearly 0.6m by February 1.

4.1 In the S, the advance of Baffin Bay pack ice almost fills the

sea to the W of Disko Bugt and Disko Island from January

through April. It decreases during May and is usually gone by

the end of the month.

Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua) to Aasiaat

(Egedesminde)

4.2 A large bight indents the coast and extends about 120

miles N from the N side of Sarqardlit (Saqqarliit), previously

described in paragraph 3.22. Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua)

is the S part of this bight. The N side of the bight is formed by

the SW coast of the Nugssuaq Peninsula. Disko Island (Qeqertarsuaq) occupies the NW part of the bight and its S shore

bounds the N side of Disko Bugt. Vaigat, a wide strait, separates Disko Island from the Nugssuaq Peninsula. 

4.2 The settlement of Egedesminde is situated on one of the numerous islands lying off the N coast of Sarqardlite (Saqqarliit)

in the SW part of Disko Bugt. Godhavn is situated on the S

side of Disko Island, 35 miles NNW of Egedesminde. The setIceberg from Jakobshavn Glacier in Disko Bugt 

(Qeqertarsuup Tunua)
60 Sector 4. Greenland—West Coast—Disko Bugt to the Svartenhuk Peninsula 

Pub. 181

tlements of Christianshaab and Jacobshavn are situated on the

E side of Disko Bugt, about 50 miles within the bight. 

4.2 Vester Ejland (68°37'N., 53°32'W.), the largest of a group

of islands, islets, and rocks, lies in the SW approach to Disko

Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua), about 9 miles W of the W end of

Sarqardlit. A light, with a racon, is shown from a prominent

tower, 7m in height, standing near the center of the island. A

small islet, located 1.25 miles W of the light, lies at the outer

edge of an area of foul ground which extends from Vester Ejland. An isolated rock, with a depth of 7m, lies 1 mile N of the

light. 

Approaches to Aasiaat (Egedesminde)

4.3 Numerous islands and dangers lie off the N coast of

Saqqarliup Nunaa (Saqqarliit), in the approaches to Aasiaat

(Egedesminde), and may best be seen on the chart. The dangers

described below are those which lie adjacent to the approach

channels. 

4.3 Maniitsoq, a prominent island, 154m high, lies 16 miles NE

of Vester Ejland and is the N of the numerous islands fronting

the N side of Saqqarliup Nunaa (Saqqarliit). Cairns stand on its

summit and E extremity. 

4.3 Appalilik (Kullen), a small island, 94m high, lies 2.5 miles

W of Maniitsoq and is reported to be easy to identify. 

4.3 Appaliliup Ikkarlussua (Braendevinsskaeret), a small islet,

lies 2.5 miles WNW of Appalilik (Kullen). An isolated rock

with a depth of 19m, lies 6 miles W of this islet. 

4.3 Susanneoer, a small group of islets and rocks, lies 8.5 miles

ENE of Vester Ejland. A light is shown from the N islet of the

group.

4.3 Oqaatsoq (Oqaatsut), an island located 1.5 miles NE of Susanneoer, lies at the SW end of a chain of small islands which

extends 6 miles NE. Lights are shown from the S side of this

chain, about 3 miles NE of Qqaatsoq (Oqaatsut). 

4.3 Skarveholmene, a group of islets marked by beacons, lies

about 3 miles NE of Susanneoer and close S of the chain of islands extending NE from Qqaatsoq.

4.3 Iginiarfik, an island, lies 1.5 miles ENE of Skarvholmene

and 0.25 mile S of the chain of islands extending NE from

Oqaatsoq.

4.3 Anartalik, a small island, lies 0.5 mile S of the S side of Maniitsoq and 0.75 mile N of Hareo (Hare), the NE island in the

chain extending NE from OQqaatsoq.

4.3 Angisoq, a small island, lies 1 mile SE of the E extremity of

Manitsoq and 2 miles ENE of Anartalik.

4.3 Zimmers Vardeo, a low islet, lies 0.25 mile E of Angissoq. A

light is shown from this islet.

4.3 Torveo, located 1 mile SSE of the E extremity of Hareo

(Hare), lies in the entrance to the harbor. 

4.3 There are three channels in the approaches to Aasuaat

(Egedesminde), as follows:

1. Sydvestlobet, the SW and most frequently used approach channel, is entered between Vester Ejland and

Akugdlit and passes close N of Susanneor. The fairway then

narrows and leads between Qqaatsoq, on the N side, and

Skarveholmene and Iginiarfik, on the S side. It is indicated

by a range which may best be seen on the chart.

4.3It is reported that there is a least depth of 35m on the

range, but a depth of 5m lies very close SE of the line, E of

Qqaatsoq. Due to it being narrow, ice frequently blocks this

channel.

2. Nordvestlobet, the NW channel used by vessels proceeding between Godhavn and Egedesminde, is entered between Braendevinsskaer and Kullen. The fairway then leads

ESE and passes S of Kullen and between Anartalik, on the N

Grounded icebergs in Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua) 
Sector 4. Greenland—West Coast—Disko Bugt to the Svartenhuk Peninsula 61

Pub. 181

side, and Hareo (Hare), on the S side. It then leads S to the

harbor. 

It is reported that this channel has a least depth of 9m at its

inner end N of Hareo (Hare). 

3. Nordostlobet, the NE channel used by vessels proceeding between Christianshaab and Egedesminde, leads between Angissoq and Zimmers Vardeo and then SW into the

harbor. The fairway, which is indicated by Zimmers Vardeo

Light and a range, is reported to have a least depth of 17m.

4.3 Anchorage.—Vessels up to 50m long can anchor in Hollaenderhavn, a harbor located on the N side of Natassit, in a

depth of about 40m. 

4.3 Caution.—Several areas lying in the approaches and adjacent to the channels are not completely surveyed. Local knowledge is recommended for navigating in the entrance fairways,

which are intricate and pass between numerous dangers.

Aasiaat (Egedesminde)

4.4 Aasiaat (Egedesminde) (68°43'N., 52°53'W.) (World

Port Index No. 760) is the administrative center of North

Greenland. The harbor lies in a bay, fronted by Torveo, and is

formed by the NW end of Aassiaat (Ausiat Island) and the NE

end of Raeveo Island. Transtoen, an islet, lies 0.25 mile S of

Torveo and divides the inner harbor from the roadstead. The

beacons around Transitoen cannot be expected to be in place or

in working order. 

Polar darkness at Aasiaat lasts from December 2 to January

11;the midnight sun lasts from May 22 to July 23. 

4.4 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 2.6m at springs and

1.5m at neaps.

4.4 Depths—Limitations.—Atlantic Quay, the N part of the

main wharf, is 1,100m long and has a depth of 8.1m alongside;

the S part 70m in length and 6.5m alongside. Vessels up to

136m in length and 7.5m draft have been accommodated.

4.4 There is an anchorage berth with stern moorings, in a depth

of 13m, near the tank farm; it can be used by vessels up to 61m

in length. There is another anchorage berth with stern moorings, in a depth of 30m, in the outer harbor. 

4.4 An extensive fishing harbor is located 1.25 miles ENE of

Aasiaat (Egedesminde). It has a wharf, with depths of up to

7.4m. 

4.4 Aspect.—A radiobeacon is situated 1 mile E of the harbor.

4.4 Lighted range beacons, which can best be seen on the chart,

indicate the harbor entrance fairway and the mooring berths.

4.4 It is reported that, among several buildings standing in the

Towns and villages in the vicinity of Disko Island

Aasiaat (Egedesminde)
62 Sector 4. Greenland—West Coast—Disko Bugt to the Svartenhuk Peninsula 

Pub. 181

settlement, a two-story church building with a cross on its gable is very prominent.

4.4 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but advisable. There

is no official pilot, but experienced local assistance is available

if requested with the ETA message; the pilot usually boards off

the harbor entrance. Vessels should send an ETA at least 24

hours in advance. The harbor can be contacted by VHF, call

sign OYR. The harbor is reported to be open from May to December and closed for the winter. 

4.4 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained in the roadstead,

but is not recommended as there is limited swinging room,

poor holding ground, and the winds rise frequently here.

4.4 Caution.—Submarine power cables lie in the harbor and

may best be seen on the chart.

Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua) 

4.5 Several groups of islands, islets, and rocks span the

entrance to Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuaq) and lie between the S

coast of Disko Island and the dangers fronting Aasiaat

(Egedesminde), previously described in paragraph 4.4. 

4.5 Five navigable channels lead E through these groups into the

bay.

4.5 Rotten (68°52'N., 53°25'W.), a low islet, lies 11.5 miles NW

of the N extremity of Manitsoq. Foul ground fronts its W side.

4.5 Hunde Ejland (Kitsigsuarssuit) (68°52'N., 53°07'W.), lying

6 miles E of Rotten, consists of two groups of small islands, islets, and rocks separated by a channel about 0.3 mile wide. A

cairn stands on the S island, which is 38m high. Hunde Ejland

is fringed with shoals; large vessels without local knowledge

should not approach within 1 mile of it.

4.5 Kronprinsens Ejland (Whale Fish Islands), a large group of

islands, islets, and rocks, lies in the middle of the entrance to

Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua), 9 miles N of Rotten. A

channel, about 0.4 mile wide, runs through the center of the

group. From the SW, the narrow passages between the various

islands and islets can be plainly seen. However, from the S,

when viewed with the high land of Disko Island (Qeqertarsuaq) behind them, they appear as one large island. Cairns

stand on most of the islands and islets. 

4.5 Ausigsut (Bruendevinsskaer), a detached group of three islets and several rocks, lies 3.5 miles NW of the main group.

Rocks, with depths of 5.9m and 8.6m, lie 1.75 miles NE and

1.5 miles N, respectively, of Ausigsut.

4.5 West Parry Skaer, a rock with a depth of 0.1m, lies 9 miles

WNW of Ausigsut and 7.5 miles S of Kangaarsuk (69°16'N.,

53°51'W.), a point on the SW coast of Disko Island.

4.5 East Parry Skaer, a rock with a depth of 3.7m, lies 4 miles

ENE of West Parry Skaer; the sea rarely breaks on this rock.

Disko Island (Qeqertarsuaq)—West Coast 

4.6 Disko Island (Qeqertarsuaq) occupies the NW part of

Disko Bugt and is the largest island on the W coast of Greenland. Landmarks on its W side are not reconizable from the offing; however, on closer approach, the entrance points of Disko

Fjord, Mellemfjord, and Nordfjord are easily identified. The

steep sides of the flat-topped mountains in the W part of the island appear, from seaward, to be rust-colored and the stratification of the rocks is quite apparent. 

4.6 Itilleq (Laksebugt) (69°18'N., 53°56'W.), a bight in the SW

end of Disko Island (Qeqertarsuaq), is entered between Kangaarsuk, a point previously mentioned in paragraph 4.5, and a

point 4.5 miles NW. Below-water rocks encumber the NW part

of this bight. 

4.6 Blafjeld, 714m high, stands 7.25 miles NW of Kangaarsuk.

From S, this mountain appears high and flat-topped with steep,

prominent sides. At the N end it slopes away gradually to the

entrance to Disko Fjord. A cairn stands on its summit.

4.6 Luciefjeld, a mountain, 359m high, stands 4 miles N of Kangaarsuk and is prominent.

4.6 Maligiaq (69°27'N., 54°14'W.), flat and barren, forms the S

entrance point of Disko Fjord. Satoq, an islet fringed by rocks,

lies 1 mile W of the point. A small cove, located close SE of

the point, is the site of an abandoned Loran station.

4.6 Disko Fjord (Kangerdluk), long and branching, is entered N

of Maligiaq and extends E for 8 miles to Sioraq, the SW end of

a broad promontory, which divides it into two arms. Qeqertaq,

an island 622m high, lies in the entrance to the fjord and divides it into two channels. A cairn stands on the summit of the

island. Depths in the channel leading N of the island are unknown. It is reported that there are depths of over 90m in the

center of the channel leading S of it. Kangerdluarssuk, an inlet

indenting the promontory E of Qeqertaq, is reported to provide

good anchorage.

4.6 Nordre Laksebugt, a small bay, is located 5 miles NW of the

N entrance point of Disko Fjord. Its narrow head terminates in

sand and clay. Vessels with local knowledge can anchor in a

cove located 0.75 mile within the S entrance point.

4.7 Mellemfjord (69°46'N., 54°52'W.), entered 9 miles N

of Nordre Laksebugt, extends SE for 12 miles. A drying flat

extends 0.75 mile offshore at its head. A warm spring and several valleys lie within the head. Several prominent mountains,

rising up to 1,009m in height, stand in the vicinity of the fjord

and may best be seen on the chart.

4.7 Vessels with local knowledge can anchor in the middle of

Enoks Havn, a small bay located 2.5 miles within the S entrance point of the fjord, in a depth of 18m.

4.7 Small vessels with local knowledge can anchor close inshore, sheltered from all winds, under the lee of the promontory on which Narssarssuaq, a settlement, is situated 3 miles E of

Enoks Havn. It is reported that there is an airfield at this settlement.

4.7 Qasiqisat, a small bay, is entered 6 miles N of Mellemfjord

and affords shelter for small vessels during S winds.

4.7 Nordfjord (North Fjord), 7 miles NNE of Mellemfjord, is entered between Nugarssuit and a point 6 miles NNE, on which

Igdluluarssuit, an abandoned settlement, stands. A rock, with a

depth of 8m, lies about 0.5 mile WSW of Nugarssuit. Avatarpait, a small group of rocks, lies 1.5 miles offshore 3.5 miles

NW of Igdluluarssuit.

4.7 The fjord extends ESE for 12 miles to its head, from which a

drying mud flat extends 1 mile offshore. Its inner part is very

shallow. Kingigtussoq, a prominent mountain 660m high,

stands 3 miles ENE of Nuugarssuit; a cairn stands on the summit.

4.7 Anchorage.—In a small bay 8 miles within the entrance, on

the S side of the fjord, there is anchorage for small vessel.
Sector 4. Greenland—West Coast—Disko Bugt to the Svartenhuk Peninsula 63

Pub. 181

There is another anchorage 4 miles within the entrance off Perdlertut and near an abandoned settlement, situated on the N

side of the fjord. In both cases, local knowledge is required.

4.7 Igdlorpait (Illorpaat), an abandoned settlement, is situated on

a point located 11 miles N of the N entrance point of Nordfjord. This stretch of coast is fringed with foul ground, extending up to 0.75 mile offshore; numerous rivers flow into the sea

through it. 

4.7 Serfarsuit (Sarfarsuit) (70°20'N., 54°23'W.), the N extremity of Disko Island (Qeqertarsuaq), is located 10.5 miles NE of

Igdlorpait (Illorpaat). 

4.7 Hareo (Hare Island) is centered 11 miles NW of Serfarsuit. It

is separated from the N coast of Disko Island by Maligiaq (Maligat), a 7-mile wide channel. The island rises to a height of

517m in its S part. A cairn stands on its summit and a beacon

stands on a hill in its N part. There are no harbors, but vessels

can find shelter in deep water close up to the precipitous sides

of the island. 

Disko Island (Qeqertarsuaq)—South Coast

4.8 Kangaarsuk (69°16'N., 53°51'W.), previously mentioned in paragraph 4.5, is a point on the SW coast of Disko Island. Fortune Bay lies between Kangaarssuk and a point 2.25

miles ESE. It is protected from the SW by several islands, islets, and rocks which extend about 1 mile from the coast. Anchorage can be obtained, in a depth of 23m, in the middle of an

arm which opens off the NE corner of the bay. The anchorage

should be approached from E of Qaqaq, the largest and outermost island, which is marked by a cairn. Local knowledge is

required because of the numerous above and below-water

rocks lying in the vicinity. 

4.9 Qeqertarsuaq (Godhavn) (69°14'N., 53°32'W.)

(World Port Index No. 840) is situated on the SW coast of Disko Island, approximately 6.5 miles E of Kangarssuk. The settlement stands on the shore of a small bay located on the W

side of an irregular peninsula which extends S from the coast.

A pipeline has been installed across the fjord at the E end of the

inner bay. The pipeline is surrounded by a protection zone of

200m along the length and to either side of the pipeline. Anchoring, sand dredging, stone extraction and the use of bottomtrawled gear are prohibitied in thes protection zone. 

4.9 Various scientific and research institutions, including the

Danish Arctic Station, are at Qeqertarsuaq. The harbor provides excellent shelter for small vessels, but the importance of

the port has declined since the time of the Baffin Bay whaling

industry and it has lost much of its shipping to Aasiaat

(Egedesminde). 

4.9 The port handles general cargo and containers.

4.9 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 2.4m at springs and

1.4m at neaps. Tidal currents are weak in both the harbor and

the approaches.

4.9 Depths—Limitations.—The outer harbor has depths of 26

to 44m; the inner harbor has depths of 12 to 16m in its central

part. Schooner Quay, the main wharf, is 15m long,with a depth

of 5.0m alongside. Vessels of up to 60m in length and 3.5m

draft have been accommodated alongside. There are anchor

berths with stern moorings in the outer harbor for vessels up to

100m in length and 7m draft.

4.9 A 15m long quay for fishing vessels, with a depth of 7.0m

alongside, has been constructed.

4.9 The port is open from early May to the end of November.

Ice-strengthened vessels can use the port from about midApril. The port is closed during the winter. The polar darkness

lasts from November 25 to January 15. The midnight sun lasts

from May 19 to July 26.

4.9 Aspect.—The mountainous coast to the W of Qeqertsuaq is

very irregular in comparison to the E.

4.9 Apostelfjeld, a prominent mountain, 709m high, stands 3

miles NNE of Qaqqaliaq (Udkiggen) and has two cairns on its

summit.

4.9 Lyngmarksbraeen, an ice cap, is located N of Qeqertarsuaq

and can be seen from the W approaches.

4.9 Skarvefjeld, a mountain, rises steeply from the shore 3.5

miles NE of Qeqertarsuaq. It has twin W and E peaks which

rise to heights of 830m and 899m, respectively, and are marked

by cairns.

4.9 Blaesdalen, a deep valley, lies between Skarvefjeld and Lyngmarksbraeen and can be seen from the S approaches.

4.9 A radiobeacon is situated on the E side of the peninsula 1

mile NNE of Qaqqaliaq (Udkiggen).

4.9 Qaqqaliaq (Udkiggen) is a point at the S extremity of the

peninsula on which Qeqertarsuaq stands and is the S extremity

Qeqertarsuaq

Qeqertarsuaq (Godhavn) 
64 Sector 4. Greenland—West Coast—Disko Bugt to the Svartenhuk Peninsula 

Pub. 181

of Disko Island. A light, which indicates the approaches, is

shown from a tower, 5m in height, standing on the point. A

beacon, formed of four whale jawbones covered with boards,

stands close NW of the light tower. A racon is located at the

light.

4.9 Range lights indicate the entrance fairway leading to the harbor and can best be seen on the chart.

4.9 Kodo, a bare islet 9m high, lies 0.5 mile NW of Qaqqaliaq

(Udkiggen). A beacon stands on this islet. A small islet lies on

foul ground close ENE of Kodo.

4.9 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but is advised. Unlicensed pilots are available on request. The harbor can be contacted by VHF channels 13, 16. Vessels should send request for

pilot with their ETA and arrange the pilot boarding position.

4.9 Anchorage.—Anchorage is afforded in the middle of the

outer harbor, in a depth of 37m, sand and clay mixed with rock,

but it is exposed to the W and SW.

4.9 Contact port officials for permission to anchor.

4.9 Caution.—It is reported that swarms of mosquitoes may be

encountered in the vicinity of the port.

4.9 Kirkegaardsbugten (False Bay), an inlet entered 0.5 mile N

of Qaqqaliaq (Udkiggen) and fronted by Kodo, should not be

mistaken for the entrance to the harbor.

4.9 A pipeline extending in a N-S direction is positioned close E

of the inner bay. A protection zone, marked by beacons, extends a distance of 200m along each side of the pipeline Anchoring, dredging, fishing, and trawling are prohibited in this

area. 

Disko Island (Qeqertarsuaq)—Southeast Coast

4.10 The SE coast of Disko Island (Qeqertarsuaq), which

extends from Udkiggen to Norujuk (Nuk), 45 miles NE, forms

the N side of Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua). It is unusually

even and unindented; however, deep valleys extend from near

the shore to the ice-covered interior of the island. A few isolated small islets and rocks lie close offshore, at irregular intervals, along this stretch of coast. Behind the coast, mountains

rise to heights of 609 to 914m, but towards Norujuk, the high

land recedes farther from the shore and leaves a wide coastal

belt. 

4.10 Per Dams Skib, a conical islet, lies on a shoal patch close

offshore, 6.5 miles ENE of Qaqqaliaq (Udkiggen).

4.10 Brededal, a large prominent valley, extends N from a point

about 2 miles E of Per Dams Skib to the head of Disko Fjord.

4.10 Skansen (69°26'N., 52°26'W.), a trading station, is centered

around some local coal deposits 26 miles ENE of Qaqqaliaq

(Udkiggen). A basalt cliff resembling a palisade, rises from the

sea in perpendicular pillars on the SW side of the station. The

buildings of the station stand on a fairly high sandstone cliff

and are reached by way of a narrow gorge. There is no harbor

or suitable anchorage here; the beach is fronted by shoals.

4.10 Nunguaq, an islet lying on shoal ground, is located 1.75

miles SSW of Skansen. A below-water rock lies about 0.5 mile

W of it. The channel, 0.75 mile wide, lying between the islet

and the coast, is navigable by small vessels with local knowledge.

4.10 Skorstensfjeldet, a prominent mountain 978m high, stands 7

miles N of Skansen. It is one of several which are surmounted

by chimney-like formations. However, this mountain is unique

because of its isolated position and prominent snow drifts

which extend downward and inward on either side.

4.10 Iviangernat, a prominent mountain 683m high, stands 3

miles NW of Skansen.

4.10 Porsild Grund (69°19'N., 51°53'W.), a rock with a least

depth of 17m, lies on a shoal patch about 14 miles SE of

Skansen.

4.10 Norujuk (Nuk) (69°39'N., 51°50'W.), 18 miles NE of

Skansen, is the E extremity of Disko Island and the SW entrance point of Vaigat. It is low-lying and fronts a lagoon

formed by a long sand spit which extends 3 miles NW into

Mudderbugten. The stretch of coast extending 16 miles SW

from Norujuk is known as Flakkerhuk. It is flat and radar responses from it are poor. The good responses received from the

mountains standing inland should not be confused with the low

shore.

Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua)—South Side

4.11 Between Egedesminde and Nuk, the SW extremity of

a mainland peninsula 35 miles E, the S coast of Disko Bugt

(Qeqertarsuup Tunua) is rather low in profile and almost featureless. Sorpiussat Qaqat, a mountain, 399m high, stands 34

miles ESE of Egedesminde and is the only landmark of any

prominence along this part of the coast. 

4.11 Numerous islands, islets, and rocks front the N and E sides

of Sarqardlit and may best be seen on the chart. A few small

boat harbors are located among some of the islands, but local

knowledge is required to enter them. Ikardlukasit, a small islet,

lies at the outer end of a chain of islets and rocks which extend

4.5 miles E from the E extremity of Sarqardlit.

4.11 Sydostbugten, the S extrimity of Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup

Tunua), is entered between Ikardlukasit and Niaqornaq, the

NW extremity of a long and narrow mainland promontory, 18

miles E. Its S shore, which is formed by the mainland, is composed of low land with broad stretches of sand and clay. Cliffs

and a few peaks rise above the low land and project into the

bay as capes and peninsulas. Sarpiussat, 15 miles SE of Ikardlukasit, is reported to be the most prominent peninsula. Numerous small islands fringe the shores of Sydostbugten and several

fairly large islands lie in its E part. 

4.11 Kangersuneq, a short fjord, extends NE from the NE end of

Sydostbugten and is entered between Niaqornaq and Niaqornarssuk (Niaqornarssuaq), a point 2 miles NW. Orpigsoq (Orpissooq), an arm of this fjord, extends off its S side. A belowwater rock is reported to lie in the entrance to this arm. Angiarfik, a prominent mountain, 539m high, stands 2 miles NE of

the head of Kangersuneq. 

4.11 Caution.—No soundings are available for Sydostbugten, but

it is believed to be fairly deep in the W part.

4.12 Gronne Ejland (Kitsissunnguit) (68°50'N.,

51°55'W.), a chain of islands, islets, and rocks, lies in the S part

of Disko Bugt along the S edge of an extensive area of foul

ground. The islands are low-lying and greenish-brown in color.

The islands are contained within a designated marine reserve

area; landing is prohibited. 

4.12 Basiso, 28m high, is the largest island. It is located in the

center of the chain, 8.5 miles NE of the E extremity of Sarqardlit. There is an anchorage for small vessels in a small bay
Sector 4. Greenland—West Coast—Disko Bugt to the Svartenhuk Peninsula 65

Pub. 181

on the S coast of this island. A racon is located on the S extremity of the island.

4.12 Angissat, the E island of the chain, rises to a height of 33m.

An islet and some below-water rocks lie 0.75 mile ENE of the

E end of this island.

4.12 Satuarssuit, a small group of islets, lies at the W end of the

chain. A detached area of foul ground lies 3 miles NNE of Satuarssuit. Vessels are advised to give the N side of the chain a

wide berth.

Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua)—East Side

4.13 The E side of Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua) lies

between Nuuk (68°45'N., 51°19'W.) and Itivdlerssuaq, the SE

entrance point of Vaigat, 46 miles N.

4.13 Nuuk, a point 112m high, forms the SW extremity of the

peninsula on which Christianshaab is situated.

Qasigiannguit (Christianshab) (68°49'N., 51°11'W.) (World

Port Index No. 790) is situated at the head of an inlet which indents the W side of a broad peninsula, 5 miles NNE of Nuk.

4.13 Ice.—At Qasigniannguit (Christianshab), icebergs and glacier ice rarely obstruct navigation as the outer harbor is large

and at least one of the entrance channels is likely to be clear.

4.13 Much ice can be encountered off Qasigiannguit (Christianshab) when it breaks up in Disko Bugt (Qeqertarsuup Tunua) in

early summer, but normally it does not lie close inshore, which

makes navigating close to the coast possible with care and caution. 

4.13 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 2.8m at springs and

1.6m at neaps. The tidal currents within the harbor are weak.

4.13 Depths—Limitations.—Atlantic Quay is 40m long, with a

depth of 8m alongside. Vessels up to 135m in length and 7.5m

draft can be accommodated alongside.

4.13 There is a 75m long jetty, with depths up to 4m alongside,

for small craft and fishing vessels. There is a 10m long tanker

jetty with a depth of 3.5m alongside where vessels berth sternto. There is an anchor berth with stern moorings, in a depth of

13m, in the inner harbor.

4.13 The port can be approached N or S of Savik and its adjacent

dangers. Two entrance channels, which pass on each side of a

small islet, lead between Spaekholmen and Napissaq and into

the harbor. A mast surmounted by a radar reflector stands on

the small islet. The N channel has a least depth of 18m in the

fairway, which is 60m wide; when navigating this channel, a

vessel should make good a course of 122°. The S channel has a

least depth of 20m in the fairway which is 120m wide.

4.13 Another deeper entrance channel, 450m wide, leads S of

Napissaq and has a least depth of 24m.

4.13 The port is open from May to December. It is closed during

the winter. The polar darkness lasts from December 2 to JanuNuuk Point

Qasigiannguit (Christianshab) 

Qasigiannguit (Christianshab)

Qasigiannguit (Christianshab) 
66 Sector 4. Greenland—West Coast—Disko Bugt to the Svartenhuk Peninsula 

Pub. 181

ary 11; the midnight sun lasts from May 22 to July 23.

Aspect.—Qeqertatssiaat (Jakobsholm), a large island, lies

7.5 miles N of Nuuk. A beacon surmounts its summit, which is

152m high, and serves as an excellent landmark in the N approaches. Savik, a large island, lies 2 miles W of the port. A

beacon stands on its summit, which is 83m high, and is a prominent mark from all directions. A light is shown from a tower

standing at the NW end of the island. Several islets lie close off

the W and S sides of the island and a 7m shoal patch lies 0.5

mile S of its S end. 

4.13 Kingigtuarssuk (Kingittuarsuk), an islet, 78m high, is located 1 mile SSE of Savik on the SE side of the approaches. From

it, chains of islets extend 1 mile ENE and 2 miles NE, respectively, to the S and N entrance points of the inlet in which the

port lies. Spaekholmen, an islet at the N end of the NE chain,

lies close off the N entrance point and is connected to it by a

causeway. Napissaq, an islet, is located 0.5 mile SW of

Spaekholmen. A light, indicating the approaches, is shown

from its N extremity. 

4.13 The land in the vicinity of Christianshaab consists of numerous rounded mountains rising to heights of 400 to 500m. Of

these, Qaqarssuaq, standing 1 mile E of the settlement, has an

imposing appearance.

4.13 A radiobeacon is situated on the N side of the inlet 0.5 mile

NNE of Spaekholmen.

4.13 A prominent red factory chimney is reported to stand in the

settlement.

4.13 Ranges, which can best be seen on the chart, indicate the entrance fairways into the outer and inner harbors.

4.13 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but is advisable. An

unlicensed pilot is available on request. Vessels should send an

ETA and a request for a pilot at least 24 hours in advance. The

port and the pilot can be contacted on VHF channes 9, 13, and

16.

4.13 Anchorage.—Large vessels can anchor in the outer harbor,

in depths of 20 to 40m, clay and rock. However, strong E winds

with gusts from the mountains sometimes render the anchorages unsafe. 

4.13 Caution.—An outfall pipe lies about 250m SE of the base of

the oil jetty. 

4.14 The stretch of coast between Qasigiannguit (Christianshaab) and Qeqertatssiaat (Jacobshavn), 24 miles NNE, is

generally low-lying and backed by a high mountain range

which rises gradually to heights of 400 to 600m. A few small

islands, islets, and rocks lie close off the shore.

4.14 Sagdliup Tunulia (Salliup Tunulia), a mountain, 540m high,

stands 4.5 miles ENE of Christianshaab and is conspicuous. 

4.14 Rypeholm (Oqaatsuarsuit), an island, 69m high, is located

close off the coast 1.5 miles NNW of Spaekholmen. A cairn

marks its summit. 

4.14 Laksebugt, an inlet, is entered between Rypeholm (Oqaatsuarsuit) and the S side of Qeqertatssiaat (Jakobsholm), previously described in paragraph 4.13, 2 miles N. It extends NE for

7 miles between steep shores. 

4.14 Between the N entrance point of Laksebugt and another

point 10 miles N, the coast recedes to form a large bight. The

depths within this bight are unsurveyed and several islets and

rocks front the shore.

4.14 Qilangalik (Qilanngalik), an islet, 12m high, lies 2.25 miles

offshore, 6 miles N of Jacobsholm. It is the outermost danger

off this stretch of coast and is surrounded by foul ground.

4.14 Maagefjeld (Nuajanguit), a mountain 432m high, stands near

the coast, 6 miles NE of Jacobsholm and is prominent. 

4.14 Agpat (Appat), a small peaked island, lies close off the N entrance point of the bight, 3.5 miles NNE of Qilangalik. A cairn

stands on its summit. Itivdliup Ilua, a small deep bay, is entered

close N of this island. 

4.14 Claushavn (Ilimanaq), a trading station, is situated 2.5 miles

NNE of Agpat (Appat). It stands on both banks of a river which

drains from a large inland lake. Islets and rocks, lying on foul

ground, front the station and extend 1.25 miles SSW. Small

vessels, up to 30m in length, can anchor off the station, but the

roadstead is frequently obstructed by glacier ice and the holding ground is poor. Local knowledge is required. 

4.14 Jakobshavns Isfjord is entered between Avqutdluk (Eqe), a

point 3.25 miles N of Claushavn, and Nua, another point, 3.75

miles NNW. It extends E for about 20 miles to Jakobshavns Isbrae (Sermeq Kujalleq), a glacier which is a tongue of the

Greenland Icecap. The fjord is never navigable because of the

tremendous quantity of ice produced by the glaciers within it

and its branches.

4.15 Illulissat (Jakobshaven) (69°13'N., 51°06'W.) (World

Port Index No. 810) stands on the SW side of a narrow inlet

which opens from the head of a bay entered 1.5 miles NNE of

Nua. Ililissat (Jakobshavn) is situated N of Kangia (Icefjord of

Illulissat). 

Towns and villages in the vicinity of Illulissat
Sector 4. Greenland—West Coast—Disko Bugt to the Svartenhuk Peninsula 67

Pub. 181

The port is a narrow open bay, with its entrance to the NW,

and has an outer and inner port. The outer port contains Atlantic Quay and a bunkering station; the inner port has another

quay and a fishing harbor.

The open season is from May to December. Heavy ice may

occur in winter. The port handles general cargo and containers.

4.15 Winds—Weather.—Winds from the SW and W may block

the approach to the harbor with ice. Winds from the NE and E

occur almost daily in the fall and can be rather strong, especially in the morning. Fog is rare.

4.15 Ice.—During the navigation season, the harbor occasionally

becomes filled with ice floes, but as a rule, this condition lasts

only until the tidal current changes. When icebergs have just

been discharged from Jakobshavns Isfjord, the entrance may

appear to be blocked by bergs; however, on closer inspection,

lanes of open water will frequently be found.

4.15 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 2.8m at springs and

1.6m at neaps. The tidal currents in the harbor are weak. During calm weather, a current sets NNW at a rate of 1 to 3 knots

from the vicinity of Jakobshavns Isfjord.

4.15 Depths—Limitations.—Atlantic Quay, in the outer harbor,

is 110m long, with a depth of 8m alongside. Vessels up to

110m in length and 6.8m draft can be accommodated. There is

a wharf for fishing vessels, with depths up to 6.5m alongside.

There is an anchorage berth with stern moorings in the inner

harbor, in depths of 5.5 to 6m. 

4.15 Across the entrances to the inner harbor and the outer harbor,

a heavy wire, which is used as an ice boom, is suspended at a

depth of 2.5m to prevent ice from entring. The wires are

marked by red barrel buoys and slackened down when vessels

are entering the harbors.

4.15 An outfall pipeline extends 135m NW into the harbor from

the vicinity of the shrimp factory.

4.15 Aspect.—Akinaq (Akinnaq), a prominent mountain, 380m

high, stands 2.75 miles NE of the harbor. 

4.15 Several islets and rocks lie on patches of foul ground in the S

part of the bay on the SW side of the approach to the harbor inlet.

4.15 A range, situated on the N side of the inlet, indicates the approach fairway which leads N of the dangers in the bay. Another range, situated at the head of the inlet, indicates the entrance

fairway to the harbor.

4.15 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but is recommended.

An unlicensed pilot is available on request. Vessels should send

an ETA at least 24 hours in advance. The harbor can be contacted by VHF. Vessels should confirm that the ice boom wires

have been slackened down. The port is ice free from June to

December. The polar darkness lasts December 1 to January 12;

the midnight sun lasts May 21 to July 24.

4.15 Anchorage.—Large vessels can anchor off the harbor, in

Ice in the vicinity of Ilulissat (Jakobshaven)

Ilulissat (Jakobshaven)

Ilulissat (Jakobshaven)

Ilulissat (Jakobshaven)
68 Sector 4. Greenland—West Coast—Disko Bugt to the Svartenhuk Peninsula 

Pub. 181

depths of 20 to 40m, good holding ground, but the roadstead is

only partly protected from E winds.

4.15 Caution.—A peculiarity of Illulissat is an effect called the

“kanele,” which is produced, particularly at the time of spring

tides, by the calving of large icebergs, or by a discharge of ice

from Jakobshavns Isfjord. This causes a regular and heavy

swell and, without any warning, a long flat wave, up to 2m in

height, enters the inner harbor, with a frequency of about 6

minutes; the water in the innermost part of the harbor is violently disturbed and covered with white foam. The effect is also strong where the inlet narrows, between the inner and outer

harbors. Special precautions are necessary during this period.

4.16 Bredebugt (69°17'N., 50°59'W.), a small and irregular bight, indents the coast 3.5 miles NNE of Jacobshavn. The

depths within it are unknown. Saverneq (Saveerneq), the largest of a group of islands and islets fronting the bight, lies close

off the S end of a narrow promontory of the mainland which

encloses the N part of Bredebugt. 

4.16 Rodebaynaesset (69°21'N., 51°01'W.), a headland and the S

entrance point of a bay, is located 3.5 miles N of Saverneq.

Oqaatsut (Rodebay), (69°21'N., 51°01'W.), a settlement,

stands on the E side of this headland. Qeqertaq (Pamiua), an island 134m high, lies close off the headland and forms the NW

side of the bay. The head of the bay forms a safe harbor, even

for fairly large vessels. Small craft can enter this harbor

through a narrow channel, 30m wide, lying between the headland and the SW side of Qeqertaq. The fairway has a least

depth of 3m, but rocks, awash, lie in the vicinity. The main approach channel lies between the E side of Qeqertaq and the

mainland 0.5 mile E. The fairway, which has a least depth of

21m in the center, is about 60m wide with shoal water on both

sides. Vessels can anchor at the head of the bay, in depths of 28

to 68m. This anchorage is sheltered and has good holding

ground, clay and rock bottom. Local knowledge is required.

The winter ice remains late in the bay, sometimes until the

middle of July. 

4.16 Niaqornaq, an outpost settlement, is situated 6.75 miles NNE

of Qeqertaq. It stands on the S side of the S entrance point of

Pakitsoq, a fjord. Three small islets lie within 1 mile of this

point. Small vessels can anchor off the settlement, in a depth of

35m, poor holding ground.

4.16 Sigssarigsut, the N entrance point of the fjord, lies 1.75 miles

NNE of Niaqornaq. An islet lies 0.75 mile W of this point.

4.16 Ata Sund (Ataa Sund) (69°40'N., 50°55'W.) is formed between the mainland and the E side of Arveprinsen Ejland, a

large island located at the SE end of Vaigat. It is entered between Sigssarigsut and Niaqornaarsuk, the S extremity of

Arveprinsen Ejland, 5 miles WNW. The sound trends N for 14

miles and then NE for 6 miles to where it broadens into a spacious nameless basin. Depths of 80 to 90m lie in the entrance

except for a depth of 22m which was reported (1991) to lie

near the center. Throughout most of its course, the sound has a

width of about 3 miles and is reported to be very deep, with

depths of over 500m. Kangerdluarssuk, a short fjord, leads

ESE from the E side of the sound, about 10 miles N of the entrance. Several islands and islets lie between the NE end of

Arveprinsen Ejland and the mainland. They are located on the

N side of the basin, mentioned above, and on the S side of Torsukattak, a fjord to which the sound connects. 

4.16 Paakitsoq (Pakitsoq) (69°29'N., 50°53'W.) extends NE for 5

miles to its head where another smell settlement is reported to

stand. A narrow channel leads from the SE side of fjord into a

large and almost landlocked basin. 

4.16 Berggren Havn, a small bay, lies at the W end of the promontory and is reported to be a sheltered harbor. Islets and rocks lie

near the entrance. 

Vaigat (Sullorsuaq)—West Side 

4.17 Vaigat (Sullorsuaq), the channel lying between Disko

Island (Qeqertarsuaq) and the mainland, connects Disko Bugt

(Qeqertarsuup Tnua) with Baffin Bay in the N. Its S entrance

lies between Norujuk (Nuuk) and Itivdlerssuaq (Niaqornaarsuk), 17 miles SE. The W side of this channel is formed by the

E side of Disko Island. For the most part, the coast is backed by

a mountain range and deep valleys extend inland to the interior

glaciers. 

4.17 Mudderbugten (69°41'N., 52°00'W.), a small bay, is entered close N of Norujuk (Nuuk). It extends W for about 3

miles and narrows to about 1.5 miles at the head from which a

drying mudflat extends 1.75 miles offshore. A sounding of

88m, clay and sand, was reported in the middle of the entrance

to the bay, but from this position, the depths apparently decrease very rapidly. Shoal water extends off both entrance

points and a below-water rock lies close offshore, about 1.5

miles SSW of the N entrance point. A dangerous wreck is reported to lie approximately 1 mile NE of Nuuk (69°39'N.,

51°50'W.). 

4.17 Isunguak (Isunguaq), a conical peak 849m high, stands 3.5

miles NW of the N entrance point of Mudderbugten. A cairn

stands on its summit and forms a prominent landmark.

4.17 Ingigsooq, a prominent mountain 856m high, stands 3 miles

NW of Isunguak.

4.17 Ujarasussuk (69°52'N., 52°27'W.), a small settlement, is

situated near the coast 13 miles NW of the N entrance point of

Mudderbugten. It affords anchorage with good holding ground,

but there is no shelter and in SW winds there are heavy squalls

from the surrounding mountains. There is no harbor at the settlement and foul ground is reported to extend some distance

offshore.

Vaigat (Sullorsuaq)
Sector 4. Greenland—West Coast—Disko Bugt to the Svartenhuk Peninsula 69

Pub. 181

4.17 Qullissat (70°05'N., 53°00'W.), an abandoned coal mining

settlement, is situated 30 miles NW of the N entrance point of

Mudderbugten. There is an open roadstead lying at the foot of

the mountains which rise to heights of 900 to 1,200m. Anchorage can be obtained about 110m off the settlement, in a depth

of 20m. The berth is indicated by the alignments of two pairs

of beacons, but these are no longer maintained. Anchorage,

marked by similar beacons, is also available off the former coal

mine, in a depth of 6m, 0.5 mile S of the settlement. Both

berths are exposed to ice and untenable in strong winds.

4.17 Orllingasaq, a prominent mountain, 848m high, stands 1.5

miles within the coast, 13 miles NW of Qullissat.

4.17 Serfarsuit (70°20'N., 54°23'W.), 19 miles WNW of Ordlingassaq, is the N extremity of Disko Island and the NW entrance

point of Vaigat. The coast between Qullissat and this point is

steep and intersected by several rivers some of which have deltas formed at their mouths. These rivers drain the interior glacier.

Vaigat (Sullorsuaq)—East Side

4.18 Niaqornarssuaq, a cape 141m high, is located 2.5

miles NW of Itivdlerssuaq (Niaqornaarsuk), the S extremity of

Arveprinsens Ejland and the SE entrance point of Vaigat. The

cape is fronted by foul ground and a few small islets. 

4.18 Kangeq (69°43'N., 51°24'W.), a broad promontory, is located 13 miles NNW of Itivdlerssuaq (Niaqornaarsuk). Its seaward face has a distinct profile and forms a good landmark.

Qaqarssuaq, a prominent mountain 663m high, stands on this

promontory. 

4.18 Kugssuk, a conical peak 816m high, stands about 5 miles E

of Kangeq and is the highest mountain on the island.

4.18 Langebugt (69°51'N., 51°09'W.), a short fjord, is entered 7

miles NE of the N extremity of Kangeq. The coast between is

indented by several small and narrow inlets and fronted by a

group of islands. The fjord extends NE for 5 miles and almost

severs the NW part of Arveprinsens Ejland from the rest of the

island. Anchorage, with good shelter from all winds, can be

obtained on the S side of this fjord.

4.18 Kangaarsuk, a cape, 131m high, is located 9 miles N of

Kangeq and is the NW extremity of Arveprinsens Ejland. 

4.18 Oqaitsoq, an island 520m high, lies 2 miles N of Kangarssuk. It is surmounted by a cairn at the S end. Smalle Sund,

the shores of which are bordered by below-water rocks, separates this island from the NW end of Arveprinsens Ejland. The

NE end of the sound, which leads into Torssukatak (Torsukattak), is very narrow and deep, but free of dangers; however, the

tidal currents in the narrows are strong. Small vessels can obtain anchorage close S of the narrows in an inlet, fronted by an

islet, at the E end of Oqaitsoq. Good holding ground lies about

200m SSE of the oil storage tanks, in a depth of about 40m.

4.18 Northwest of Arveprinsens Ejland, the E side of Vaigat is

formed by the SW coast of the Nugssuaq Peninsula.

4.18 Torssukatak (Torsukattak) (69°56'N., 51°00'W.), a deep

fjord, is entered between the W extremity of Oqaitsoq and Igdlutsiait Point, 3 miles NNW. It trends ENE for 26 miles and is

reported to have depths of 400 to 700m. Numerous icebergs are

discharged from two large glaciers at its head. Qeqertap Ilua, a

branching arm of the fjord, opens off the N side close inside the

entrance. Ikorfat and Nugaq (Nuugaaq), both small settlements, stand, respectively, near the W and E entrance points of

Qeqertap Ilua. Naajat, a prominent mountain 710m high,

stands 3 miles ENE of Nugaq (Nuugaaq). Qeqertaarsuk, two

small islets, lie on foul ground 1.75 miles ENE of Ikorfat.

Qeqertaq (70°00'N., 51°19'W.), an island, lies on the W side of

Qeqertap Ilua, about 2 miles within its entrance. A small trading station is reported to be situated at its S end. 

4.18 Sarqaq (Saqqaq) (70°01'N., 51°57'W.), a trading station, is

situated at the head of a cove 10 miles WNW of the W entrance

point of Torssukatak (Torsukattak). It can be easily identified

by a prominent church. Qeqertaq, a small flat island, fronts the

station about 60m offshore. Vessels with local knowledge can

anchor W of Qeqertaq, in depths of 10 to 50m. 

4.18 Tartunaq, an abandoned settlement, is situated 6 miles WNW

of Sarqaq, on the W side of a rocky promontory which is easily

identified by a prominent hummock. A chain of small islets extends up to 0.75 mile seaward from the end of the promontory.

Small vessels can anchor off the station and, in depths of 30 to

40m, good holding ground, in a cove located at the NW end of

a wide bay which extends 2.5 miles WNW from Tartunaq. 

4.18 Ata (Ataa) (70°18'N., 53°00'W.), an abandoned settlement,

lies 27 miles NW of Sarqaq (Saqqaq). A river discharges

through a delta located close S of the former settlement. It is

backed by some of the highest peaks in the area. 

4.18 Narsaq (Nussaq) (70°26'N., 54°05'W.), the NE entrance

point of Vaigat, is located 23 miles WNW of Ata. An abandoned settlement stands at the head of the cove. A small cove,

about 2.5 miles SW of the point lies on the S side of the point

and affords good anchorage. A shoal patch is reported to lie

near the coast, with a depth of 1m. 

Vaigat (Sullorsuaq) To Umanak (Uummannaq)

Fjord 

4.19 Kussuaq, a long river, flows through the Nugssuaq

Peninsula and enters Baffin Bay 4 miles NW of Narssaq. It discharges through a wide and constantly-changing delta, from

which discolored water extends up to 0.75 mile seaward. It is

reported that a stranded wreck lies close off the N part of the

delta.

4.19 Niaqornarsuk (68°14'N., 52°52'W.) a small hook-shaped

peninsula, extends a short distance NW from the coast, 5 miles

NNW of Narssaq. Rocks, with depths of 1.8m or less and on

which the sea breaks, are reported to lie up to 0.25 mile N and

1.25 miles NW of this peninsula. A cairn is reported to stand

near the S end of the peninsula; a white house with a flagstaff,

stands near the shore of a small bay, 0.75 mile NE of it. 

4.19 Poor anchorage is found in the bay, in depths of 75 to 85m,

rock bottom. The bay is open to drifting icebergs and eddys,

with a predomenent NW current at a rate of 0.75 knot. Vessels

at anchor are advised to have their engine available at all times.

4.19 Itivdle (Itille), a wide and prominent valley, extends NE from

the coast about 6 miles NW of Niaqornarssuk. 

4.19 Nussuta (Nugssuta) (70°39'N., 54°36'W.), a small promontory 12.5 miles NW of Niaqornarssuk, is the W extremity of

the Nussuta Peninsula. A beacon stands at its seaward end.

Rocks fringe the promontory and extend up to 1.25 miles offshore. 

4.19 Kangeq, a point marked by a beacon, is located 4 miles N of

Nugssuta. The coast between is indented by several coves and
70 Sector 4. Greenland—West Coast—Disko Bugt to the Svartenhuk Peninsula 

Pub. 181

fronted by numerous islets and rocks. 

4.19 Nugsuak (Nugssuaq) (70°41'N., 54°35'W.), a harbor suitable for small vessels, lies off the site of an abandoned trading

station situated within one of these coves, 2 miles N of Nugssuta. Range beacons indicate the entrance into the harbor. Vessels

with local knowledge can anchor in the harbor, in depths of 12

to 22m, and secure lines to the shore. Anchorage from all

winds can also be found 0.5 mile N of the harbor. 

4.19 Kanisut, the N extremity of the Nugssuaq Peninsula, is located 11.5 miles NE of Kangeq. A beacon stands on the point.

Cairns stand on the summits of several mountains located near

the N end of the peninsula. Small vessels can anchor within a

small cove located 1.5 miles SW of the point. The cove is open

to the N; two rocks lie on the W side of the entrance.

Uummannaq Fjord

4.20 Uummannaq Fjord (70°53'N., 53°00'W.) is entered

between Kanisut and the S extremity of Uberkyendt Island

(Ubekendt Ejland), a large island 14 miles NE. Karrat Fjord

opens off the inner, SE end of the fjord. The depths in Uummannaq Fjord appear generally to be very great, with only a few dangers. The winter ice in the fjord seldom breaks up before the

latter part of June. However, shortly after this breakup, a great

mass of bergs and calf ice drifts out of the fjord. 

4.21 Uummannaq Fjord—South side.—Niaqornat

(70°48'N., 53°40'W.) (World Port Index No. 870), a small settlement, is situated 9.5 miles ESE of Kanisut on a low sandy

cape fringed by rocks. The settlement is surrounded by dark

basalt mountains and, from a distance, the area appears barren,

but there is, however, considerable vegetation. Medium sized

vessels can anchor, in a depth of 35m, off a small cove located

on the W side of the cape. With NW winds, however, the cove

fills with ice and large bergs may find their way into it. Small

vessels can obtain anchorage on the E side of the cape.

4.21 A river flows through the NE part of the the valley of Itivdle

(Itille), previously mentioned in paragraph 4.19, and discharges into the fjord via a delta located at the head of a wide bay, 2

miles W of Niaqornat. 

4.21 Ikorfat, a small and rounded projection, is located 11.5 miles

E of Niaqornat. A cairn stands, at an elevation of 173m, about

0.5 mile S of the projection.

4.21 Qaersut (Qaarsut) (70°44'N., 52°38'W.), a trading station, is

situated 9.5 miles ESE of Ikorfat. Vessels can obtain anchorage, poor holding ground, rock bottom, NNW of the pier, in 10

to 30m, or for tankers, NNE of the oil storage tanks, in 25m.

The roadstead is exposed to E winds and only partially sheltered from W winds. 

4.21 Slibestenfjeldet (Slibesten Mountain), a prominent mountain

with a cairn stands at 741m high, near the coast 5 miles W of

Qaersut. Qilertinguit, a conspicuous mountain with a remarkable small peak, rises to a height of 1,968m 5.5 miles S of

Qaersut. 

4.21 Sangmissunguaq, a point 12 miles SE of Qaersut, can be

considered as the NW entrance point of Qarajaq Isfjord. Several streams flow into the fjord through the coast NW of this

point and several hunter’s huts stand along the shore.

4.22 Uummannaq Island lies in the approach to Qarajaq Isfjord, with its S extremity located 3.75 miles N of Sangmissunguaq. The central part of the island is made up of a mountain,

Uummannaq from W
Sector 4. Greenland—West Coast—Disko Bugt to the Svartenhuk Peninsula 71

Pub. 181

1,175m high, with a series of jagged peaks. A cairn stands near

the N end of the island. 

4.22 Rocks, with depths of 15m and 2.7m, lie 1.5 and 6 miles, respectively, N of the N end of the island. Isfjeldsbanken, a bank,

with a least depth of 50m, extends 2.5 miles S from the SE extremity of the island.

4.22 Qasigissat (Spraglebugt), a bay indenting the W side of

Uummannaq ((70°42'N., 52°08'W.), is entered about 1 mile N

of the S extremity of the island. An islet, marked by a cairn,

lies in the middle of the entrance. The bay is nearly always icefree during the navigation season and provides an alternative

harbor for small vessels calling at Umanak. 

4.22 Range beacons indicate the entrance fairway during the

months of May through December. The front beacon

(70°40.6'N., 52°07.6'W.) aligns in range with the rear beacon

22m NW, on a bearing of 312.5°. Vessels anchor, in a depth of

10m, mud and clay bottom, and secure stern lines to ring bolts

on the shore. An anchor painted on a rock and a beacon are

used as marks for anchoring. 

4.23 Uummannaq Harbor (70°41'N., 52°09'W.) (World

Port Index No. 890), which handles general cargo and

containers, is situated at the head of a cove close NE of the S

extremity of Ummannaq Island. The island is in the approaches

to Qarajaq Isfjord, which is approximately 40 miles ESE of

Kanisut.

4.23 Winds—Weather.—Warm and violent winds from the E

and SE are common off Uummannaq.

4.23 Ice.—Icebergs may occur in the open season.

4.23 The harbor is normally ice-free from the end of June to the

end of November. After the ice breaks up, drift ice often persists in the vicinity for as long as a month and may be carried

into the harbor by SE winds, hindering navigation.

4.23 Many icebergs come from Qarajaq Isfjord; some of the largUummannaq 

Uummannaq 

Uummannaq Harbor

Uummannaq Harbor
72 Sector 4. Greenland—West Coast—Disko Bugt to the Svartenhuk Peninsula 

Pub. 181

er ones strand on the bank S of Uummannaq. While they provide some protection from the mass of calf ice and smaller

icebergs which fill the inner part of Uummannaq Fjord after

the spring break-up, they also cause considerable inconvenience when they calve on the bank. This sends large waves into the harbor and special precautions have to be taken to secure

vessels against damage. 

4.23 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 2m at springs and 1.3m

at neaps. There is reported to be a constant S or SSE set, of 0.5

to 2 knots, out of the harbor.

4.23 The water level in the harbor may increase by 0.5m during

strong NW winds and decrease by the same amount during SE

winds.

4.23 Depths—Limitations.—A main quay, 12m long, has a

depth of 4.2m alongside. There is a quay for lighters, with

depths up to 1.5m alongside, and a quay for fishing vessels,

with depths up 2m alongside. There is an anchorage/mooring

berth within the harbor, in a depth of 12m. Vessels up to 80m in

length and 6m draft have been accommodated. 

4.23 The harbor may be entered at any time, but during daylight

only for larger vessels. The open season is from June to November.

4.23 From August to December, an ice barrier is laid across the

entrance between the SW side of Kodo and the NE point of

Sedeoen. It consists of a below-water wire with a blue nylon

rope, marked by orange buoys on the surface. The entrance will

normally be open for vessels with a draught of more than 3.5m.

Small vessels should enter the harbor N of Kodo. The time period may vary according to weather conditions.

4.23 Aspect.—The fairway, which leads between the dangers in

the approach, is indicated by a range situated close W of the W

entrance point. Vessels approaching Uummannaq from W are

advised to keep close to the coast of the Nugssuaq Peninsula,

which is steep-to and where a favorable current is likely to be

found. Fewer icebergs are also likely to be met that father out

in the fjord. On near approach to the S extemity of Unmmannaq a N course can be steered along the E side of Smedeoen

Kodo, another islet jointed by reclaimed land to the N entrance

point, fine to starboard. Depths of 9m or less extend up to 30m

off the NE side of Smedeoen. 

4.23 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but is advisable. An

unlicensed pilot is available upon request. Vessels should send

an ETA at least 24 hours in advance. The port is open from the

end of June to December, but icebergs may be encountered

during the open season. 

4.23 The pilot and port can be contacted on VHF channels 13 and

16. Vessels should send a request for pilotage with their ETA

message. The pilot boards off the harbor entrance.

4.23 Anchorage.—Large vessels can anchor outside the harbor

entrance on Isfjeldsbanken; a good berth is found 0.25 mile E

of the entrance, in a depth of 46m.

4.24 Salliarliseq (Storoen) (70°43'N., 51°48'W.), a large

island, is located with its W side 3 miles E of Umanak Island.

It rises to a height of 1,419m in its N part. Akugdleq, a small

island 204m high, lies close E of the E extremity of Storoen.

4.24 Qarajaq Isfjord, the SE arm of Umanak (Uummannaq) Fjord,

extends SE for about 35 miles. 

4.24 Great Qarajaq Glacier and Little Qarajaq Glacier, which

flow into the E end of the fjord, have movements of up to 18m

and 50m, respectively, per day. Both these glaciers discharge

vast quantities of ice into Qarajaq Isfjord. 

4.24 Ikerasak (70°32'N., 51°30'W.), a long and narrow island,

lies 5 miles SE of Storoen and forms the outer NE side of

Qarajaq Isfjord. Ikerasak (70°30'N., 51°19'W.), a settlement,

stands on the N side of the SE end of the island, at the head of a

small bay which is divided into two coves by a projecting

point. The S cove affords anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge. It is reported that there is a small wharf for fishing vessels. 

4.24 Qeqertarsuaq, a small island, 108m high, lies off the SE extremity of Ikerasak Island and protects the anchorage from E.

Talerua (Issua), a narrow island, 356m high, lies close off the

SW side of Ikerasak Island. 

4.24 Drygalskis Halvo, a projection of the mainland, lies with its

NW end about 5 miles SE of Storoen. It is much indented on

all sides by small inlets, bays, and coves.

4.25 Uummannaq Fjord—North side.—Ubekendt Ejland (Illorsuit) (71°09'N., 53°42'W.), located on the N side of

the entrance to Ummannaq Fjord, is large and rugged. A valley,

which runs in an E-W direction across the middle of the island,

separates the high land into two parts. The N and S parts attain

heights of 1,029m and 1,149m, respectively.

4.25 Illorsuit (71°14'N., 53°31'W.) a trading station, stands on

the NE side of the island, 5 miles SSE of the N extremity. The

station is situated on the S side of an open bight which is clear

of rocks and has a steep beach of dark sand. Anchorage can be

obtained in the bight and stern lines can be secured to ring bolts

on the shore. Large vessels anchor, in a depth of 30m; however,

the roadstead is open to N winds and the holding ground is insecure. 

4.25 Upernivik, a large island lying between two peninsulas of the

mainland, is located 6 miles ENE of Ubekendt Ejland. It is separated from the latter by Illorsuit Sund, a deep sound, which

connects Uummannaq Fjord to Karrat Fjord. There are two

coal mines in the SW part of the island. 

4.25 Inukassait (71°15'N., 52°19'W.), a channel 2 miles wide,

separates Upernivik from Qioqe, a broad promontory extending 26 miles SW from the mainland. The channel extends NNE

from Umanak Fjord and, by a curving course, leads into the S

side of Kangerdlussuaq, a branch of Karrat Fjord. 

4.25 Kangerluarsuk, a fjord, is entered between the S extremity of

Uummannaq Harbor
Sector 4. Greenland—West Coast—Disko Bugt to the Svartenhuk Peninsula 73

Pub. 181

the Qioqe Promontory and the SW extremity of Alfred Wegener Halvo, about 5 miles ESE. The fjord extends NE for about

10 miles and gradually narrows to a width of about 2 miles. It

then opens out into a basin which is 7 miles wide and extends E

to the glaciers at the head. 

4.25 Perdleriup Kangerlua (Perlerfuit) (71°02'N., 51°30'W.) is

one of the largest of the branch fjords which lead from the head

of Umanak Fjord. It is entered between the SE extremity of Alfred Wegener Halvo and the SW extremity of a broad promontory, 4 miles SSE. The fjord extends NE and E for about 10

miles and a glacier lies at the head. 

4.25 Ukkussissat (Ukkusigssat) (71°04'N., 51°54'W.) (World

Port Index No. 920), a trading station, lies close S of the S entrance point of Perdleriup Kangerdlua. It stands at the N end of

a bight which provides anchorage for medium-size vessels,

holding ground is poor. 

4.25 Qaumarujuk (Qaamarujuk), the NE arm of Perdleriup Kangerdlua, is entered on the N side of the fjord 8.5 miles within the

entrance. Two inlets indent the SE shore of this arm. Tasiussaq,

the outer and larger inlet, is located 2 miles within the entrance

and is encumbered by small islets and rocks. Agfardikavsa, the

inner inlet, is entered 5 miles within the entrance of the arm. It

is narrow and generally deep, with a mid-channel depth of 21m

over the bar which lies across the mouth. A dangerous rock lies

120m NW of the W entrance point. It was reported (1991) that

a large quantity of rock had been deposited in the inlet and

depths may be less than charted.

4.25 Marmorilik (Maarmorilik) (71°08'N., 51°17'W.), lying

close within the W entrance point of Agfardikavsa, is the site

of a closed ore-loading facility. 

4.26 Appat (Agpat) (70°54'N., 51°55'W.), the largest of

the islands lying at the head of the N part of Umanak Fjord, rises to a height of 1,688m. 

4.26 A small settlement of the same name is situated on the W

side of the island, 4.5 miles SSW of the N extremity. Umiasugssup Ilua, an inlet, is located on the SE side of the island. It is

reported (1991) that a small vessel anchored, in a depth of

15m, near the head of this inlet.

4.26 Torssukatak, a channel, is entered from the W between Akulairuseq and Pania, the N extremity of Appat (Agpat). The

channel leads SE for 18 miles to the entrance of Itivdliarssup

Kangerdlua. Qaqortuatsiaq, 3 miles SE of Pania, is the site of a

former marble quarry. Iliarssuit Qeqerta (Itilliarsuup Kangerlua), a group of islets, lie on the NE side of Torssukatak. A

cairn stands on the largest islet. 

4.26 Salleq (Sagdleq), an island, 1,070m high, lies off the W end

of Appat (Agpat) Island, from which it is separated by Agpat

Ikerat, a channel 2 miles wide. A small islet, surrounded by

shoal water, lies close off the S side of the island.

4.26 Qasigissat (71°00'N., 52°15'W.), a group of islands, islets,

and rocks, lies about 1.25 miles N of Sagdleq. Qasigissat, with

the same name, a detached group of low-lying islets and below-water rocks, lies close WNW of Qeqertat. A rock, awash,

lies on a patch of foul ground about 5 miles WNW of Qeqertat. 

4.26 Small vessels may obtain anchorage in the N part of the inlet, in depths of 3 to 10m, where the narrow channel to the E of

the inlet widens before reaching the inner pool. The narrow

channel has a least depth of 3m.

4.27 Itilliarsuk Fjord (70°49'N., 51°00'W.), a fjord with a

3.5-mile wide mouth, is entered 7 miles ESE of Appat (Agpat).

It extends SE for 13 miles to Kangilleq (Kangidleq), a glacier

at its head. Sermeg Silardleg (Sissartartoq Glacier), another

glacier, empties into the NE side of this fjord. 

4.27 Several islands, islets, and rocks lie in the channel between

the SE end of Appat (Agpat) and the NW end of the mainland

peninsula which forms the SW side of Itilliarsuk Fjord. 

4.27 Ukalilik, a small island, 339m high, lies 1 mile NW of the S

entrance point of the fjord. Its summit is marked by a cairn.

Tugdligtalik, a larger island, 255m high, lies 1 mile S of Ukalilik.

4.27 Saattut (Satut) (70°49'N., 51°39'W.), 72m high, is located 2

miles SSE of the S extremity of Agpat. It is the S island of a

group that fronts the SE side of Agpat and extends 4 miles NE.

The settlement of Saattut (70°49'N., 51°39'W.), with a jetty

for small craft, stands near the W extremity of the island. 

4.27 Agssordlit (Assorliit) and Orqordlit (Oqqorliit), two small islets, lie 2 miles WSW of the W extremity of Satut. 

Karrats Fjord

4.28 Karrat Fjord (71°30'N., 53°40'W.) is entered between Eqqua (Erqua), the W extremity of Illorsuit (Ubekendt

Ejland), and Kap Cranstown, 631m high, the SW extremity of

Sigguup Nunaa (Svartenhuk Halvo), 27 miles NW. From its

entrance, the fjord extends NE for more than 29 miles to

Qeqertarsuaq, a large island, where it branches E, NE, and N.

Immense glaciers flow into these branches and discharge their

icebergs into the main fjord, making navigation dangerous. 

4.28 The known depths in the W part of Karrat Fjord are considerably less than those in Ummannak Fjord. However, no information regarding depth conditions in the inner part of the fjord

is available. 

4.28 A 3.6m shoal patch, position doubtful, is reported to lie in

the entrance to the fjord, about 7.25 miles NW of Erqua. Two

dangerous rocks are reported to lie about 15 miles NW of Erqua. Shoal patches, with depths of 3.6m, positions doubtful,

are reported to lie about 3.5 and 6 miles WNW of Ingia, the N

extremity of Ubekendt Ejland (Illorsuit). 

4.28 Winter ice in Karrat Fjord forms in October and November

and lasts until July. The frozen surface of the sea is frequently

broken up by the calving of glaciers; in summer, when the last

masses of the winter ice finally melt away, the fjord becomes

so choked with fresh bergs that no vessel can make its way

through. 

4.28 Schades Oer (71°23'N., 53°51'W.), a group of small low islands, lies in the narrowest part of the entrance, about 6 miles

NW of Ingia. A hunter’s hut stands on the largest island of the

group that lies in the N. Anchorage can be obtained in a bay,

which makes a good harbor for small vessels, on the E side of

Saatukujooq (Satukujoq), the S island of the group. Agssordlinguit, a small detached group of islets, lies 1.5 miles NE of

Schades Oer. 

4.28 Arfertuarsuk (Arfertuarssuk), a small fjord, lies close NE of

Kap Cranstown. It affords several good anchorages sheltered

from N and W winds. A conspicuous traveler’s hut stands on

the S side of the Svartenhuk Peninsula (Sigguup Nunaa), 7.5

miles ESE of Kap Cranstown; a hunter’s hut stands 5.5 miles

farther E.
74 Sector 4. Greenland—West Coast—Disko Bugt to the Svartenhuk Peninsula 

Pub. 181

4.28 Itsako (71°41'N., 53°52'W.), an almost circular promontory

948m high, extends S from the E side of the Svartenhuk Peninsula (Sigguup Nunaa). It lies on the NW side of Karrat Fjord

and separates two short branch fjords, Umiiviup Kangerlua (on

its SW side and Kangiussap Ima on its NE side. 

4.28 Karrat O (71°30'N., 53°00'W.), a narrow island, 782m high,

lies in the middle of the entrance to Karrat Isfjord, which is a

continuation of Karrats Fjord. 

4.29 Kangilleq (Kangerdluk) (71°37'N., 52°00'W.), a

branch fjord, extends E from Karrat Fjord to Rinks Isbrae

(Kangilliup Sermia), one of the most active glaciers in the vicinity. This glacier calves every 10 to 20 days, completely filling the fjord with ice. However, when a strong E wind has been

blowing for several days the bergs shift out, leaving the fjord

clear of ice. Umiamako Isbrae, another active glacier, discharges close N of the entrance to Kangilleq (Kangerdluk), into the

N side of Karrat Fjord. The combined output of the two glaciers constitutes the Karrats ice stream, which drifts out

through Karrat Fjord. 

4.29 Qeqertarsuaq (Kekertarsuak) (71°32'N., 53°13'W.), a large

island, 1,630m high, lies at the inner end of Karrat Fjord, close

off the mainland. Nugatsiaup Tunua, a channel about 2 miles

wide, separates this island from a mainland projection located

to the N. 

4.29 Nuugaatsiaq (71°32'N., 53°13'W.), a trading station, is situated on the S extremity of Qeqertarsuaq. The station stands at

the foot of high land, on a flat beach at the head of a small

cove. Rocks extend 1 mile SW from the W entrance point of

the cove and below-water rocks encumber its head.

4.29 Anchorage can be obtained in the cove, in a depth of 10m,

hard gravel, but it is open to the S and exposed to the constant

menace of ice bergs. A better anchorage berth has been reported to lie in a bight close W of the station. Local knowledge is

required for both these anchorages. The station is normally approached through Illorsuit (Igdlorsuit) Sund, Karrat Fjord being inadequately surveyed (1973). 

4.29 Ukkusissat Fjord is entered about 6 miles NNW of the NW

extremity of Qeqertarsuaq. It extends NNW from the N side of

the head of Karrat Fjord for a distance of 38 miles, passing between the NE side of the Svartenhuk Peninsula (Sigguup

Nunaa) and the mainland to the E. A narrow point separates the

entrance of this fjord from Ingia Fjord. Ingia Fjord extends NE

for about 20 miles to a glacier at its head. A small glacier,

which melts without producing icebergs, discharges into

Uvkuigssat Fjord and fills the inner part of the fjord with clay

deposits. The fjord is exposed to all winds and is little frequented. 

4.29 Sigguup (Svartenhuk Point), the W extremity of the Svartenhuk Peninsula (Sigguup Nunaa), is located 22 miles NNW of

Kap Cranstown and is described in paragraph 5.2. 
75

Pub. 181

5. 

Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea

5.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 5 — CHART INFORMATION
77

Pub. 181

SECTOR 5 

GREENLAND—WEST COAST—BAFFIN BAY TO THE LINCOLN SEA

5.0 Plan.—This sector describes the W coast of Greenland from

Sigguup (Svartenhuk Point) to Kap Morris Jesup. It includes

Baffin Bay, the E shores of Nares Strait, and the Lincoln Sea.

The coastline between the two main points trends in a NW, N,

NNE, and NE direction. 

General Remarks

5.1 Baffin Bay is bounded on its E side by the W coast of

Greenland and on its W or Canadian side by Baffin Island,

Devon Island, Ellesmere Island, and several other smaller

islands. The bay extends NNW from its S limit, at latitude

70°00'N, for about 530 miles to Nares Strait, which leads to the

Arctic Ocean about 285 miles NE. Refer to Pub. 180, Sailing

Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean. 

5.1 The N end of Disko Island, the Nugssuaq (Nusussuaq) Peninsula, Nordostbugten, and the S end of the Sigguup (Svartenhuk Point) lieswithin the S limit of Baffin Bay. 

5.1 The coast between Sigguup (Svartenhuk Point) and Wilcox

Head is formed by a narrow belt of ice-free terrain. This belt is

composed of numerous islands and mountainous peninsulas

which are separated by fjords and backed by the Inland Icecap. 

5.1 Baffin Bay is generaly clear of dangers and deep. A depth of

37m, with possible less water in its vicinity, was reported

(1958) to lie about 115 miles from the coast in approximate

position 73°00'N, 62°00'W. A detached shoal with a depth of

35m, is reported to lie about 57 miles WNW of Disko Island in

approximate position 70°00'N, 54°00'W.

5.1 The general characteristics of Melville Bugt (Qimusseriarsuaq) include a coast that is formed largely by the seaward

margin of the Inland Icecap, fronted in places by a few small

scattered islands, and occasionally interrupted by promontories

partially enclosing open bays; approaches which lead through

relatively unsurveyed stretches of water and are dangerous due

to numerous icebergs and changing pack ice conditions; the

nonexistence of ports or surveyed anchorages; a relatively unexplored coastline; no habitation, except for a small settlement

in the NW part; and there is no line-of-communication, except

for a few native trails. 

5.1 The chief characteristics of the coast lying between Kap

York and Kap Alexander are two large indentations, Wolstenholme Fjord and Inglefield Bredning, and the extent of ice-free

land located between the coast and the Inland Icecap. The most

extensive ice-free area lies S of Wolstenholme Fjord. The

coastal terrain is mostly steep and rocky, with elevations of

300m in places, backed by highlands with local snow fields

and small glaciers. Between Kap York and Kap Alexander,

glaciers from the Inland Ice Cap reach the sea, in places, at the

heads of indentations located along the outer shores. Soundings in the area indicate that the sea is moderately deep and,

with a few exceptions, the offshore underwater gradient is

steep. Communication is principally by means of coastal vessels which are subject to storms and ice conditions. A radio station, meteorological station, and an airstrip are maintained at

the port for Thule Air Base situated on the SE side of Wolstenholme Fjord. Several anchorages are available, but only

those in the port for Thule Air Base are extensively used.

5.1 Winds—Weather.—During all seasons, the most frequent

wind direction along the shores of Baffin Bay is NW. This frequency of NW winds is most marked in the autumn and winter

and not quite so evident in midsummer. During July and August, SE and E winds are likely to be the most frequent directions over the water. In midsummer, there is an average of two

days per month with gales, but this number increases in September and October. Gales from the N and NW are most frequent, but some may blow from the NE, or SE.

5.1 Ice.—Pack ice normally covers about eight tenths of Baffin

Bay and, in occasional winters, fills the bay solidly from shore

to shore. The Baffin Bay pack has its greatest extent in March

and least in August and September. During some winters, the

ice completely fills the bay while, during others, open patches

of water are numerous and extensive, especially in the vicinity

of Lancaster Sound, Jones Sound, and Smith Sound.

5.1 The “North Water,” a considerable area of open navigable

water at the extreme N end of Baffin Bay and in Smith Sound,

forms in May; however, during especially favorable years, it

may appear in April. It is roughly oval in shape with its major

axis lying in a N-S direction. It is bounded by the fast ice of

Smith Sound and, farther S, by the Baffin Bay pack ice, which

has a coverage of eight to ten tenths. The S boundary of North

Water usually lies close N of the 75th parallel. This area of

open water has been known to explorers for two centuries and

was referred to as the “North Water” by the nineteenth century

whalers; its origin is not definitely known and more than one

possible explanation has been suggested. Though essentially

open water, the “North Water” is not entirely ice-free and small

patches of ice may occur within in it.

5.1 The “North Water” was reported to be present, during May,

for 15 years, during a period between 1920 and 1938; it normally persists in June when it may extend to the 75th parallel,

but loses its identity in July because of the increasing clearance

of the ice to the S.

Icebergs in Baffin Bay
78 Sector 5. Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea 

Pub. 181

5.1 Tides—Currents.—The circulation of the waters within

Baffin Bay is known only in a general way. However, it seems

established that a general counterclockwise circulation prevails, so that from the W and most ice-encumbered side there is

an outflow through Davis Strait, while a compensating indraft

flows N along the Greenland side. Current conditions within

Baffin Bay are mostly unknown and it must be assumed that

several weak eddies are to be found in the central part of the

bay.

Directions.—Between Sigguup (Svartenhuk Point) and Wilcox Head, navigation along the coast is dangerous due to the

lack of information and the existence of numerous icebergs. In

spite of 200 years of whaling operations in the area and the

many exploration vessels that have passed through it, most of

these waters along the coast remained unsurveyed as late as

1900 and were considered unknown territory. Even today it

remains comparatively unknown and, in places, there are

considerable discrepancies between existing charts. Navigation

along this section of the coast in good visibility and when reasonably clear of ice, presents no difficulties providing vessels

remain at least 1 mile W of the outermost islands. The waters

lying W of a line of bearing between the outermost islands are

deep and clear of dangers.

5.1 Navigation across Melville Bugt, from the vicinity of Wilcox

Head to Kap York, is rendered difficult and dangerous by the

uncertain movements of the pack ice; the SW winds drive the

pack ice towards Melville Bugt and it may be pressed close up

against the shore ice. During July, August, and September, the

sea lying between the shore ice and the pack ice is generally

navigable. August is the best month; however, about one year

out of every three the bay may be blocked. It was once reported

that an old whaling vessels had crossed Melville Bugt in the

month of June, when the winter ice lay solid along the coast.

This crossing was possible only by using an open channel that

exists between the pack ice and the shore ice.

5.1 During favorable times of the navigation season, vessels can

navigate along the W coast of Greenland as far N as Etah, close

N of Kap Alexander. As a general rule, during July, vessels

could expect to navigate between Kap York and Kap Atholl;

vessels also, at this time, may find it possible to proceed as far

N as Kap Parry. The fairway leading to Kap Alexander is navigable during August and September.

5.1 During July and August, under normal conditions, vessels

passing Melville Bugt should steer directly for Kap York from

a position on the coastal track lying 21 miles W of Upernavik

(72°47'N., 57°20'W.). If seriously obstructed by ice, vessels

should find easier conditions toward the W. Fewer icebergs are

met when these waters are clear of sea ice; however, vessels

should steer from Upernavik for a position lying about 15

miles SW of Kap York.

The Svartenhuk Peninsula (Sigguup Nunaa) to

Kangersuatsiaq (Proven)

5.2 Sigguup (Svartenhuk Point) (71°41'N., 55°53'W.),

the W extremity of the Svartenhuk Peninsula, is a dark and

bold vertical promontory which rises to a round flat-topped

mountain, 652m high. The sea off the promontory is subject to

frequent storms and fogs. In winter, the ice off the promontory

is constantly broken by strong currents. 

5.2 Caution.—Magnetic disturbances have been repeatedly

observed in the areas W of the Svartenhuk Peninsula. 

5.2 Midlorfik and Amitsoq are two inlets which indent the NW

coast of the Svartenhuk Peninsula, either side of a broad promontory, 10 miles NE of Sigguup (Svartenhuk Point). Anchorage, reported to be good, can be obtained in Midtlorfik by

vessels with local knowledge. 

5.2 Qeqertaq (Skalo) (71°52'N., 55°36'W.), a roughly circular

island, lies 11.5 miles NNE of Sigguup (Svartenhuk Point).

The island, which fronts the entrance to Umiarfik Suvdlua, has

precipitous sides and rises to a height of 162m. It is easily

recognized from seaward. 

5.2 Umiarfik, a long fjord, is entered 2 miles E of Skalo and

separates the Sigguup (Svartenhuk Peninsula) from the Innerit

Peninsula. It extends NNE for 26 miles from the entrance,

which is 2 miles wide. A river flows into the head and drains

some of the lakes which lie at the junction of the two

peninsulas. 

5.2 Kangaarsuk (72°00'N., 55°37'W.), the site of an abandoned

settlement, is situated close NE of the W extremity of the

Innerit Peninsula. Two islets and a below-water rock lie off the

point, with a narrow but navigable channel between. Excellent

anchorage is afforded, sheltered from N winds, just off the

settlement site. 

5.2 Innerit, an inlet, indents the W coast of the Innerit Peninsula, 6 miles NE of Kangarssuk. A rock, with a depth of 4.6m,

lies 2.5 miles WNW of ithe SW entrance point. Another rock,

with a depth of 1.2m, lies 2 miles WNW of the NE entrance

point. A dog quarantine station has been established close

within the SW entrance point of the inlet. 

5.3 Kigataq (Kigatak) (72°05'N., 55°50'W.), the southernmost island of a chain, lies 5.5 miles NW of Kangarssuk

and rises to a height of 451m. Nuua, its W extremity, is dark

colored and bluff. Beacons stand on the SE and NE extremities

of the island. 

5.3 Tukingasoq, an island rising to a height of 163m at its center,

lies 1.75 miles NW of Kigatak. A monument, reported to be

prominent, stands on a hill at the SW side of the island. Due to

Sigguup (Svartenhuk Point) from Qaarsorsuaq
Sector 5. Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea 79

Pub. 181

the presence of a reef, vessels are advised to give the W extremity of the island a berth of at least 3 miles.

5.3 Store Flado (Satoq) (72°16'N., 55°55'W.), a basalt island

56m high, lies 2 miles N of Tukingasoq, at the N end of the

chain. Uigordluk, an islet, lies 0.5 mile N of the N extremity of

Store Flado (Satoq). Anchorage is available off the NW end of

Lille Flado, from which shoal water extends for about 0.5 mile. 

5.3 Ivssortussoq (Issortussoq), a small detached island marked

by a beacon, lies 3.5 miles E of Saattoq.

5.4 Qeqertaq (72°16'N., 55°20'W.), a very large island,

is located with its SW extremity lying 3 miles N of the NE extremity of Kigataq.

5.4 Upernavik Kujalleq (Sondre Upernavik) (72°09'N.,

55°32'W.) (World Port Index No. 940), a settlement, stands on

the E side of a small peninsula which forms the S extremity of

Qeqertaq. A beacon stands at the S end of the peninsula; a

prominent red and white chapel stands on a hill near the

settlement. 

5.4 Anchorage can be found close NE of the settlement, in

depths of 19 to 22m, good holding ground. The roadstead is

open to the S and E and, although subject to heavy squalls during SW gales, icebergs seldom enter. It is free from dangers

and there are only weak tidal currents. Vessels of up to 70m in

length and 4.5m draft have anchored off the settlement.

5.4 Kangersuatsiaq (Proven) (72°22'N., 55°30'W.), a group

consisting of four islands, along with several islets and rocks,

lies between the Qeqertaq Peninsula and the Kangeq Peninsula, 5 miles N. Nisterfik, the outermost islet of the group, lies

2.5 miles NNW of the NW extremity of Upernavik Kujalleq

(Sondre Upernavik) and is marked by a beacon. Sioraq

(Sandoen), an island, 120m high, lies 1.5 miles NE of Nisterfik; a beacon stands on its SE extremity. Avalleq (Torveoen),

marked by a beacon, lies close N of Sandoen and is the northernmost islet of the group. Kivisaaq, an island 100m high, lies

at the S end of the group 2 miles NE of the NW extremity of

Upernavik Kujalleq (Sondre Upernavik). Small islets and rocks

extend up to 1 mile S and 0.5 mile NE from this island.

Saffiorfik, the largest island, lies 0.5 mile NW of Kivisaaq

(Kivssaq) and rises to a height of 211m. Provens Island, 150m

high, lies between Sagfiorfik and Sandoen, from which it is

separated by narrow channels. A cairn stands in the middle of

this island. 

5.4 Kangersuatsiaq (Proven) (72°22'N., 55°34'W.) (World Port

Index No. 950), a trading station, stands on the N side of a cove

which indents the W coast of the Proven Islands and is encumbered with below-water rocks. Local knowledge is recommended. There is an anchorage and mooring berth for small

vessels at the entrance to the cove. Larger vessels may anchor

over a ledge N of the cove in a depth of 40m, rock, poor holding ground.

Kangersuatsiaq (Proven) To Upernavik

5.5 The Kangeq Peninsula (72°27'N., 55°05'W.) terminates at its broad W end in a bold promontory with steep, dark

bluffs and is marked by a number of mountain peaks. Kissavvaasaq, a prominent mountain, 805m high, stands 8 miles E

of the W extremity; a beacon stands near the coast 2 miles SSE

of the same point. The islands of Maniitsoq, Salleg, and Iperaq

lie off the NW side of the peninsula, along with several islets

and rocks. Beacons stand on the NE extremity of Maniitsoq, on

the W extremity of Iperaq, and on an islet lying close to the N

extremity of Salleg. A narrow channel with deep water lies

between Iperaq and Salleg. 

5.5 Eqalugaarsuit Sulluat (Laksefjorden) is entered between the

NW extremity of the Kangeq Peninsula and the SW extremity

of Akuliaruseq, 2 miles NE. The latter is the SW island of a

group of islands which lie N of the peninsula and form the N

side of Eqalugaarsuit Sulluat (Laksefjorden). 

5.5 At the head of the fjord there are several valleys occupied by

lakes and streams which drain from the ice cap.

5.5 Angmarqua (Ammaqqua) (72°36'N., 55°17'W.), a narrow

sound, extends NE from the entrance to Eqalugaarsuit Sulluat

(Laksefjorden). It is one of a series of sounds called Norde

Sunds which lead between the above islands and connect

Laksefjorden with the head of Upernaviks Isfjord; the depths

within them are unknown. 

5.5 Nutaarmiut, the largest of the off-lying islands, rises to a

height of 1,000m and forms the W side of Norde Sunds.

5.5 Singarnaq (72°35'N., 55°46'W.), an island marked by a beacon at its W extremity, lies 1 mile S of the SW extremity of

Nutarmiut and rises to a height of 630m. Kangeq, a small island marked by a beacon at its N end, lies close to the SW end

of Singarnaq. There is a least depth of 5m in the narrow passage lying between this island and Singarnaq.

5.5 Qaarsorsuaq (72°42'N., 56°00'W.), a large island close W

of Nutaarmiut, is located with its S extremity lying 4 miles

NNW of Singarnaq. A number of islets and rocks lie in the

channel between the S side of this island and Singarnaq.

Anana, the outermost islet of these, rises to a height of 192m

and is prominent. A beacon stands on the N islet, Qorssorfik,

which lies close off the S extremity of Qaersorssuaq.

5.5 Qaarsoq, an outpost reported to be occupied during the winter, is located on a green slope on the W side of a small bay, 1.5

miles NE of the S extremity of Qaarsorsuaq. Anchorage, with a

sandy bottom, has been found off the outpost.

5.5 Sandersons Hope (72°43'N., 56°11'W.), the W extremity of

Qaersorssuaq, is formed by steep precipitous cliffs, which rise

to heights of 305m and, in places, overhang. It is famous for

Kangersuatsiaq (Proven)
80 Sector 5. Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea 

Pub. 181

the sea birds which congregate along the face of the cliffs. A

racon is local on Aorrussaq (Hvalo), a 27m high islet lying

about 3 miles SW of Sandersons Hope.

5.6 Upernavik (72°46'N., 56°09'W.) (World Port Index

No. 960), the northernmost principal settlement on the coast of

West Greenland, is situated on a small island of the same name.

The island lies midway along the SW side of the extensive

archipelago between Kangeq peninsula and Upernaviks Isfjord.

5.6 The open season is June to November. There is heavy ice in

winter. The port handles general cargo and containers.

5.6 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 2m at springs and 1.3m

at neaps. The tidal currents are weak.

5.6 Depths—Limitations.—Schooner Quay is 15m long and

has a depth of 4.2m alongside. Vessels up to 70m in length and

3.4m draft have been accommodated. There is an anchorage/

mooring berth in the harbor, in depths of 15 to 20m. Vessels up

to 75m in length and 5m draft have been handled.

5.6 Aspect.—The principal approach to the settlement is from

the S, but numerous dangers lie adjacent to the channels. A

range indicates the entrance fairway into the harbor. An aeronautical radiobeacon is situated near the port.

5.6 When the presence of ice makes it difficult in low visibility

to identify Upernavik O by radar, an aeronautical radiobeacon,

which transmits from the N side of the harbor, is a useful navigational aid.

5.6 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory but is advisable. Unlicensed pilots are available by arrangement with the Port

Operator.

5.6 Vessels should send request for a pilot with the ETA. The

pilot boards 1 mile off the harbor entrance.

5.6 Regulations.—The vessel’s ETA should be sent to the Port

Operator 24 hours prior to arrival.

5.6 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained off the S end of

Upernavik Island, in depths of 30 to 40m.

5.6 Directions.—Vessels making for Upernavik from the S must

approach from E of the rocks 14 miles SSW of the harbor and

then proceed between Aorrussaq (Hvalo) and Qeqertusussuk

(Bruuns O) to the W, and Qaersorssuaq, to the E. Care must be

taken to avoid rocks awash and below water, up to 0.25 miles

to seaward of Smedeo, an near islet SW of Upernavik Island,

before turning into the harbor entrance W and N of Isabel

Islets, which lie off the S entrance point. The rocks off Smedeo

lie E of a line joining Sondre Naes and the W extremity of Karrat. 

5.6 Vessels making for Upernavik from the NW should approach

with the summit of the prominent mountain on Qaersorssuaq

bearing SSW. This leads towards Kingittortallit (Kingigtortadglit), a group of islets and rocks off the entrance to

Upernaviks Isfjord, which are a good navigational marks and

can be passed close on the SW side. Vessels should then proceed SW of Kiatanguaq, between that islet and Talbot Reefs,

directly to Upernavik. 

5.6 Caution.—Fog often occurs during the breakup of the winter ice and usually in conjunction with N or SW winds.

5.6 During poor weather from the W, vessels may have to vacate

the harbor.

Upernavik To Kap York

5.7 Upernavik Isfjord (72°53'N., 55°20'W.), a long

channel, runs in an ESE direction through the middle of the

mass of islands which lie between Upernavik and QagssersUpernavik

Upernavik
Sector 5. Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea 81

Pub. 181

suaq, a broad and rugged mainland promontory, 18 miles NE.

It is reported that this promontory is not prominent, particularly to seaward.

5.7 Avssaqutaq (Assaqutoq), a group of islands and islets, is located 13 miles NNW of Upernavik and forms the S entrance

point of the fjord. Beacons stand on the islets lying close to the

NW and NE extremities of the main island of the Kingigtorssuaq group, about 3 miles within the entrance to the fjord. 

5.7 Tussaaq (Tugsaq) (73°03'N., 56°08'W.), an island, is located

16 miles N of Upernavik and forms the N entrance point of

Upernavik Isfjord. A settlement with a boat harbor stands on

the E side of this island and, under good conditions, small vessels can anchor NE or SW of it; however, at times, grounded

icebergs send large waves through the narrow entrance channel, making the harbor dangerous.

5.7 Numerous icebergs collect in great numbers among the

islands, which form the S side of Upernavik Isfjord, and tend to

block the shallow channels between them until late in July.

Once these channels are open, navigation is assisted rather than

impeded as some of the icebergs ground on rocks while others

float, affording some evidence of deep water.

5.7 Kingittortallit (73°02'N., 56°55'W.), a group of islets and

rocks, is located 19 miles NW of Upernavik. It is the outermost

of several dangers which lie in the approaches to Upernavik

Isfjord. The largest islet of this group, which rises to a height of

88m, is covered with moss and grass and some ruins stand on

its summit. A local magnetic anomaly was reported about 25

miles W of Kingittortallit. 

5.7 Kitsissut, a group of islets and rocks surrounded by shoal

water, lies on the N side of the approach to Upernavik Isfjord, 8

miles NE of Kingittortallit (Kingigtortagdlit). Larger areas of

shoal water, with islets and rocks, extend 1.5 miles farther NE. 

5.7 Aappilattoq (72°53'N., 55°36'W.), an island, lies 17 miles

within the entrance to Upernavik Isfjord. A settlement stands at

the head of a small bay on the NW side of this island. It is

normally approached from the SW, direct from Upernavik,

keeping in mid-channel between the islands, but ice from

Upernavik Isfjord can frequently hinder navigation. Small

vessels with local knowledge, can anchor off the S end of the

settlement, N of a small islet, in a depth of 25m. During unfavorable ice conditions, anchorage can be found closer inshore,

in a depth of 10m. 

5.7 Qaersorssuatsiaq, a large island, lies 5.5 miles N of Tussaaq

(Tuvssaq). It affords good anchorage, with shelter from SW

winds, within a bay on its E side. Beacons stand on the SE, E,

and NE extremities of this island. 

5.7 Ivnarssuit (Innaarsuit) (73°12'N., 56°02'W.), a small settlement, is situated 9 miles NNE of Tuvssaq. It stands on the W

side of a peninsula which projects from the NW side of an

island lying E of Qaersorssuatsiaq. Anchorage off the settlement is impossible because depths are too great. Small vessels

with local knowledge can anchor, in a depth of 20m, in a small

bay located on the E side of the peninsula. A quay, with 2m

alongside, is located at the settlement. 

5.7 Naajaat (73°09'N., 55°51'W.), a very small settlement,

stands on the E side of the W island of a group lying 9 miles

NE of Tuvssaq. Small vessels can anchor S of the settlement, in

depths of 20 to 40m, rock bottom. Although the area has not

been surveyed, the settlement can be approached directly from

Upernavik Isfjord, keeping in mid-channel between Tuvssaq

and Kanek. 

5.8 Tasiusaq (73°22'N., 56°00'W.) (World Port Index No.

990), a large island 525m high, lies 14 miles NNE of Tuvssaq.

A settlement stands within the N entrance point of a bay

located on the W side of this island. A church, situated in the

settlement, is visible from seaward. Small vessels can anchor

off the settlement, but huge waves caused by capsizing icebergs sometimes roll into the bay, which is open to the SW, and

endanger them. Safer anchorage, with shelter from SW gales,

is available, in depths of 30 to 40m, poor holding ground, rock

bottom, within a cove located on the SE side of the bay, 0.75

mile from the settlement. A beacon stands on the N entrance

point of the cove. The bay is navigable from July to September. 

5.8 Tasiusaq Bugt (73°12'N., 55°30'W.) lies between the Qagsserssuaq promontory and Nunatarssuak (Nunatarsuak). Two

large glaciers form the head of this bay.

5.8 Ikerasaarsuk (73°32'N., 56°26'W.), a settlement, stands on

an islet which lies close off the NE extremity of Nutarmiut, an

island. The islet forms part of a narrow sound in which there is

a good harbor for small craft. The harbor is protected from all

winds, but navigation is difficult because of several rocks lying

on the SE side of the sound. The largest craft that can anchor

SE of Nutarmiut is 40m long and 3m draft. 

5.9 Tuttoqortoq (73°40'N., 56°58'W.), a large island,

bounds the S side of the outer part of Gieseckes Isfjord. It rises

to a height of 587m and is divided into two cliffy masses by a

deep valley.

5.9 Kangerlassuaq (Giesecke Isfjord) (73°37'N., 56°00'W.), a

long channel, extends in a SE direction between the NW extremity of Tuttorqortoq and Kap Shackleton, 6 miles N. Horse

Head (Agpalarsalik), a small island, is located 1.5 miles W of

Tuttorqortoq, from which it is separated by a safe and deep

channel. A rock with a depth of 9m, lies 2.5 miles SE of the

island. Horse Head, the NW extremity of Agpalarsalik, forms a

prominent landmark and is easy to identify, except from the W,

when it blends with the land behind it. Ikardlunguaq, consisting of a below-water rock and a rock, awash, lies in the approach to Gieseckes Isfjord, 4 miles NW of Tugtorqortoq. 

5.9 Kap Shackleton (73°47'N., 56°50'W.), the W extremity of

Horsehead (Agparssuit), an island, 658m high, lies 6 miles N

of Tuttorqortoq and is the N entrance point of Giesecke Isfjord.

The cape, from which a reef extends, is formed by a bold headland rising steeply from the sea to a height of 426m. Its cliffs

are the nesting places of many birds. 

5.9 Several small islets lie off the NW side of Horsehead (Agparssuit) and the innermost of these is marked by a beacon at

its E end. The N extremity of Horsehead (Agparssuit) is bordered by below-water rocks and a beacon stands on its E

extremity. 

5.9 Qutdlikorssuit (Qullikorrrsuit) (73°52'N., 56°20'W.), the

largest of the islands off this part of the coast, rises to a height

of 822m and forms the N side of the outer part of Gieseckes

Isfjord. It is easy to recognize, being reddish brown in color

and of massive appearance, with a steep W face 440m high.
82 Sector 5. Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea 

Pub. 181

The island is separated from Horsehead (Agparssuit) by a deep

channel with a least known depth of 225m. 

5.9 The two bays which indent the W and S sides of Qutdlikorssuit afford good anchorage sheltered from all directions.

Rocks were reported to lie within the bay on the E side where

icebergs frequently ground.

5.9 Kuk (Kuuk) (73°43'N., 56°13'W.), a small settlement, stands

near a cove at the S end of Mernok, an island lying on the N

side of Giesecke Isfjord. Small vessels may anchor off the

cove, in a depth of 25m. 

5.9 Nuuluk (73°33'N., 55°58'W.), an island, lies mid-way along

the SW side of the inner part of Giesecke Isfjord. A small harbor is located within a bay on its N side near the site of an

abandoned settlement.

5.9 Giesecke Glaciers (Giesecke Braeer) discharge into the NE

side of the inner part of the fjord at several places. As the tidal

currents in the fjord are very strong and the depths considerable, icebergs immediately drift away from the front of the

glaciers leaving, in both summer and winter, a large ice-free

basin at the head. Although most of the icebergs drift seaward

along the NE side of the fjord, a considerable number veer to

the SW side and block the channels between the islands. Some

of the large icebergs on reaching the outer fjord are carried N

and eventually strand in the large bay which indents the S side

of Qutdlikorssuit. Here they remain until they break up into

small bergs and make their way seaward through the narrow

channels. 

5.10 Sugar Loaf Bugt, extending E for 20 miles, is entered

between the NW extremity of Qullikorsuit and the SW extremity of Nugssuaq (Nussuak), 15 miles NW. The central part

of its head is occupied by an irregular land mass which rises to

a height of more than 900m. Ussing Isfjord, on the S side of

this land mass, extends SE for 10 miles to its head. Ryders

Isfjord, on the N side of this land mass, extends NE for 6 miles

to its head. Several small islands lie within Sugar Loaf Bugt. 

5.10 Kittorsaq (73°56'N., 56°45'W.), an island, lies on the SE

side of the entrance to Sugar Loaf Bugt. Good anchorage is

available off the site of an abandoned settlement situated on

this island.

5.10 Kitsissorsuit (Edderfugle Oer), a scattered group of islands

and rocks, lies between 7 and 10 miles SW of Nugssuak, in the

W approach to Sugar Loaf Bugt. There are three islands in the

group, two of which lie close together and appear as one island,

with the third located about 2 miles NE. The southwesternmost

island is the highest and rises to a height of 82m; its summit is

surmounted by a cairn. Rocks extend up to 2 miles from the

islands. The tidal currents in the channel between the two

close-lying islands are strong. It has a rocky bottom and is not

suitable as an anchorage.

5.10 Umanak (Sugar Loaf) (74°01'N., 56°58'W.), the outermost

of the islands in the bay, lies in the middle of the entrance. It

has a symmetrical, rounded summit, which rises to a height of

280m, and is very conspicuous from seaward. A rock, with a

depth of 9m, lies 1 mile W of this island.

5.10 Nussuak (Nugssuaq), a rugged peninsula with many sharp

peaks, extends 25 miles SW from the mainland and has an

average width of about 3 miles. It separates Sugar Loaf Bugt

from Unugsulik Bugt to the N. 

5.11 Kraulshavn (Nuussuaq) (74°07'N., 57°04'W.), a

small supply outpost, is situated on the E entrance point of a

bay which indents the S side of the Nussuak Peninsula, 3 miles

E of its SW extremity. The bay forms a large deep harbor in

which small vessels can anchor. It is normally navigable from

mid-June to mid-October. The tidal currents within the bay are

reported to be weak. Qeqertanguaq, a small island, 49m high,

is located 90m E of the W entrance point of the bay and

marked by a beacon. Range beacons, bearing 048°, stand on

the E side of the bay close N of the supply outpost and lead W

of this island and into the anchorage. Vessels usually anchor, in

a depth of 15m, about 90m NW of the outpost. Shallow draft

vessels can also obtain anchorage in an inlet which indents the

N coast of the peninsula, 2 miles N of the outpost.

5.11 Inugsulik Bugt (74°19'N., 57°00'W.) is entered between the

SW extremity of Nussuak (Nugssuak) and Wilcox Head, 23

miles N. Two glaciers discharge into the head of this bay, but as

the icecap levels off in this vicinity, the icebergs produced are

not high. During the summer, the land located around the bay

has a comparatively rich vegetation and the remains of earlier

habitations have been found in many places. Several groups of

small islands, islets, and rocks, lie within the bay and can best

be seen on a chart of the area. 

5.11 Kangerluarsuk (Kangerdluarsuk), a short fjord, indents the

SE corner of the bay and extends almost as far as the icecap

located between Nugssuak and a shorter peninsula, 1.5 miles

N. A steep bluff, located at about the middle of the N shore of

the fjord, is prominent. 

5.11 Igdlulik (74°21'N., 56°43'W.), a small settlement accessible

only by boat, is situated at the W end of the N peninsula.

5.11 Pokulufik (Pukulugfik) (74°15'N., 57°30'W.), a small and

low islet, lies in the approaches to Inugsulik Bugt, 9 miles

NNW of the S entrance point. This islet is sometimes difficult

to identify.

5.12 Melville Bugt, an extensive bight, lies between Wilcox Head and Kap York, 160 miles NW. Most of its shoreline

is covered by enormous glaciers, their crevassed surfaces broken only occasionally by steep mountain tops. In contrast to the

numerous islands that fringe the coast to the S, only a few

islands front this stretch of coast; all of them are small and they

lie up to 15 miles offshore.

5.12 Melville Bugt contains large numbers of icebergs throughout

the year. During average years, the bight is only ice-free from

pack ice and fast ice from mid-August until the end of September. In the spring, the fast ice normally lies in a direct line from

Wilcox Head to Kap York. The break-up begins in June with

the formation of leads between this fast ice and the pack ice of

Baffin Bay. However, the movements of the latter are uncertain

and SW winds may close the gap; on the other hand, a continuous lead may develop right across the bight, ending S of

Wilcox Head.

5.12 During July, in average years, the break up of the fast ice and

pack ice in the region is rapid and by mid-August none remains. From then till the end of September it does not normally

impede navigation, but August is generally the best month for

navigation.

5.12 Caution.—Vessels making way within Melville Bugt are

advised to keep in depths of over 600m so as to prevent from

getting caught in ice. 
Sector 5. Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea 83

Pub. 181

5.12 Kiatassuaq (Holms Oer), an island, 935m high, is the largest

within the bight and lies close to the E shore. 

5.12 Wilcox Head (74°29'N., 57°31'W.), the W extremity of

Holms O and the SE entrance point of Melville Bugt, is a salient point 750m high. A large cairn stands on this headland.

Areas of foul ground are reported to exist up to about 7 miles

W and NW of the headland.

5.12 Alison Bugt lies at the SE end of Melville Bugt, between the

E end of Holms O and the mainland to the E. Wandels Land, a

table-like mainland peninsula, rises to a height of 940m on the

NE side of Alison Bugt. A small and heavily-crevassed glacier,

which discharges icebergs to the W, is located on the N side of

this peninsula.

5.13 Ryders Oer (74°39'N., 57°40'W.), a group of four

small and widely-separated islands, lies between 6 and 13

miles NNW of Wilcox Head. Foul ground is reported to lie in

the vicinity of this group. It was reported that vessels had

obtained anchorage off the southernmost and northwesternmost islands of the group.

5.13 Sardlia, a small island, lies 4 miles NE of Wilcox Head. Its

W end is lower than the E end, which rises to a height of 122m,

and a marshy depression lies between them. A bay lies at the S

end of this depression and forms a good anchorage, but the

depths within it are unknown.

5.13 Kullorsuaq (74°36'N., 57°10'W.), an island, lies 2 miles NE

of Sardlia, on the S side of the approach to Alison Bugt.

Djavelens Tommelfinger, a remarkable landmark, stands on the

S side of this island. It consists of a 540m high column of rock

which has the appearance of a gigantic thumb extending upwards from a hand.

5.13 Kullorsup Timmilerssua (Sarqardlerssuaq), an island 583m

high, lies between Kullorsuaq and the N side of Holms O.

Good anchorage is available off the NW side of this island, in a

depth of 35m; however, the bottom is uneven and the area has

not been surveyed (1973).

5.14 Amdrups O (74°45'N., 57°30'W.), an island, 415m

high, lies on the N side of the approach to Alison Bugt, 13

miles N of Wilcox Head. Blochs O, an island 90m high, lies off

its SW extremity. A vessel detained here because of ice

reported finding anchorage off both islands.

5.14 Hovgaards Kystland (74°43'N., 56°55'W.), a small ice-free

part of the coast, lies 10 miles NW of Wandels Land. Hayes

Gletscher (Hayes Brae), a glacier, forms the shore between

Hovgaards Kystland and Lille Renland, a mountain, 765m

high, standing 15 miles NNW. 

5.14 De Greers Oer (De Geer Oer), three small islands, and I.A.D.

Jensens Oer, two islands and an islet, lie centered 2.5 miles SW

and 9 miles W, respectively, of Lille Renland, with a detached

islet between them. Hammers O, 70m high, Gardes Oer, and

Bluhme Oer, lie, in that order from NW to SE, between I.A.D.

Jensens Oer and Amdrups O. 

5.14 Kjaers Gletscher (Kjer Gletscher), which produces few icebergs, forms the shore between Lille Renland and Red Head,

13 miles NW. 

5.14 Red Head (75°04'N., 58°08'W.), a promontory bordered by

islands and islets, extends about 2 miles SW from the edge of

the icecap and rises to a prominent rock knoll, 263m high,

which falls steeply on its NW side.

5.14 Steenstrups Gletscher (Sermersuaq), the largest glacier in

Melville Bugt, covers the shoreline NNW of Red Head for a

distance of 14 miles. This glacier produces many icebergs up to

25m high. 

5.14 Depot Oer and N.E. Balles O, two small groups of islands

and islets, lie about 9 miles seaward of Steenstrups Gletscher.

5.14 Tuttulissuaq (Kap Seddon) (75°21'N., 58°39'W.), located

19 miles NNW of Red Head, is the SW extremity of Tuttulissuaq (Kap Seddon), a narrow and prominent promontory

which extends 7 miles SW from the NW side of Steenstrups

Gletscher. Numerous ruins found on the promontory indicate

that it was once the site of a large settlement. 

5.14 A small islet with a rock close off its SE side, lies close S of

Tuttulissuaq (Kap Seddon) and there are indications that a bank

extends up to 7.5 miles WNW of the cape. Hoj O, an islet, lies

about 11 miles NW of the cape. 

5.14 Between Tuttulissuaq (Kap Seddon) and Kap Walker, 31

miles NNW, the coast recedes for about 12 miles and forms a

bight in which there are several islands.

5.14 Duneira Bugt, a small bay fronted by islands, lies in the bight

between Tuttulissuaq (Kap Seddon) and Kap Lewis, 14 miles

NNE. 

5.14 Mylius Erichsens Monument, a solitary pillar 545m high,

appears from offshore to be encircled by peaked mountains and

rises above the glacier ice 10 miles NE of Kap Lewis.

5.14 Devil’s Thumb (75°46'N., 59°25'W.), a familiar landmark

to Arctic navigators, is a small island lying about 5.5 miles

ESE of Kap Walker. When seen from SW, the island appears

very similar to Kullorsuaq (see paragraph 5.13) and is very

conspicuous.

5.15 Off-lying islands and dangers.—Sabine Oer

(75°30'N., 60°13'W.), two low islets, lie about 25 miles WNW

of Kap Seddon. During most of the summer months, open

water extends inshore as far as these islets. Several islets and a

below-water rock, position doubtful, lie in an arc between

about 6 miles NE and 15 miles ESE of Sabine Oer. Five rocks,

awash, are reported to lie about 7 miles N of Sabine Oer.

5.15 It was reported (1988) that a useful emergency anchorage

can be found between the two islets of Sabine Oer, in a depth

of about 10m. The approach from the SW was reported to be

clear of dangers, with a least depth of 8m existing at the entrance to the anchorage. A prominent hut is reported to stand at

the W end of the westernmost islet.

5.15 Thoms O (75°43'N., 60°36'W.), a small island, lies 15 miles

NNE of Sabine Oer. In its center there is a cone-shaped rock

formation, 90 to 120m high, with a rounded summit. It is

formed of alternating red and gray strata, not found elsewhere

in the vicinity. Below-water rocks lie about 1.5 miles WNW

and 3 miles NE of this island, but their positions are doubtful. 

5.15 Caution.—A Marine Nature Reserve area lies within Melville Bugt. The seaward limit of this area extends from Tugtulipaluk (75°34'N., 58°23'W.) near Sverdrup Brae in a WSW

direction to the SW extremity of Sabine Oer, then to Thoms O,

Bryants O, and finally to Kap Melville. Navigation is prohibited within this protected area. Exceptions may be made to

allow local hunters and scientific expeditions to operate within

certain parts of the reserve. 
84 Sector 5. Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea 

Pub. 181

5.16 Nuussuaq (Kap Walker) (75°48'N., 59°45'W.) is the

SW extremity of the Nuussuaq Promontory. This promontory,

which projects about 8 miles SW from the edge of the land ice,

has steep ice covered sides and rises to heights of over 1,000m. 

5.16 Kong Oscar Brae and Peary Gletscher are two glaciers which

occupy the shoreline between Kap Walker and Thalbitzers

Naes, 23 miles NW. Peary Gletscher discharges few icebergs,

but Kong Oscar Brae is reported to be very productive. The

iceberg bank, which occupies the bay on the NW side of the

Nuussuaq. Promontory, extends for about 12 miles along the

face of these glaciers. 

5.16 Thalbitzers Naes (76°03'N., 60°58'W.), 220m high, is the

SW extremity of the largest of several small islands which lie

close together off the NW end of Peary Gletscher.

5.16 Kap Murdoch (76°08'N., 61°52'W.), located 14 miles

WNW of Thalbitzers Naes, is the S extremity of an unnamed

island which rises to a height of 480m.

5.16 Between Kap Murdoch and Thalbitzers Naes, the coast recedes to form a bay that is fronted by many small islands. Two

glaciers form the head of the bay and several mountains (nunataks) interrupt the faces of these glaciers.

5.16 Fisher Oer, a group of several islands, lie up to 7 miles E of

Kap Murdoch. 

5.16 Balgoni Oer, a chain of three small islands and rocks, extends about 4 miles W from Thalbitzers Naes. Kloft O, a small

island, lies 3.75 miles S of Balgoni Oer. Heilprin O, a larger

island than most in this vicinity, lies 4 miles SW of Fisher Oer.

It rises to a height of 350m and a small islet lies 1 mile off its

NW extremity.

5.16 A large bay lies between Kap Murdoch and Kap Melville. It

is encumbered by a number of islands and has several glaciers

along its shores.

5.16 Kap Melville (Nallortup Nuua) (76°03'N., 64°01'W.), 275m

high and prominent, is the S extremity of an L-shaped promontory which is connected to the shore by a low isthmus, awash

at high water. The cape can be recognized by a large, steep, and

black mountain wall, 512m high, which extends seaward on a

low headland. Huts used by hunters stand on its S side. 

5.16 Bushnans O, an island 230m high, lies 14.5 miles WSW of

Kap Melville and is almost divided in half by a glacier. It appears to be fertile, especially around the site of an old settlement standing on its SW side. A rocky shoal, with a depth of

4.9m, lies close off the NW coast of this island.

5.16 Caution.—It was reported (1976 and 1988) that shoal water

extends up to 2 miles W of Bushnans O. It was observed

(1988) that pack ice and numerous bergs were in the area between Bushnan O and Cape York.

5.17 Meteorite Oer (76°03'N., 65°00'W.), 336m high, is

located 1.5 miles N of Bushnans O and is the largest island

located off the N shore of Melville Bugt. It lies on the W side

of the entrance to Meteorbugt.

5.17 Savissavik (Savigsivik) (76°01'N., 65°05'W.), a trading station, is situated on the N side of a bay which indents the SW

coast of the island. Vessels up to 90m in length and 6m draft

have anchored, in a depth of 16m, about 60m off the station, in

August. The maximum tidal range is 3.5m. Local knowledge is

advisable. 

5.17 Pattefjeldene, a prominent mountain 380m high, stands 15

miles NE of Kap York on the W extremity of a peninsula which

separates Meteorbugt from Sidebrikdfjord.

5.17 Georg O (George O), 345m high, and Salve O, 470m high,

are two steep islands which lie off the SW side of this peninsula, with some islets between. 

5.17 Akuliaruserssuaq, located 4.5 miles NW of Salve O, is the S

extremity of a broad promontory which separates Sidebriksfjord from De Dodes Fjord.

5.17 Kap York (Innaanganeq) (75°54'N., 66°27'W.), the NW

entrance point of Melville Bugt, is the outer extremity of a

narrow peninsula which extends 13 miles SE from the mainland. The cape itself consists of a bold and bluff headland,

450m high, with dark snow-capped cliffs. It is very conspicuous from seaward. There is deep water close off the S and W

sides of the cape, but the depths on the E side are unknown.

Peary Minevarde, a prominent monument 18m high, stands on

the cape. 

5.17 The high land forming the cape has been reported to be visible

at a distance of 30 miles. When seen from between E and SE, the

left tangent of the cape rises abruptly as a steep dark cliff, then

trends NW and slopes gradually towards a large glacier. The

land then becomes a series of snow-capped peaks which rise to

heights of over 760m and are interrupted by glaciers.

Kap York To Kap Atholl

5.18 The coast between Kap York and Kap Atholl, 54

miles WNW, can be divided into two quite distinct parts. As far

as Parker Snow Bugt, 33 miles WNW of Kap York, it consists

of steep bluffs and precipitous cliffs, about 300 to 600m high,

which are separated by numerous small glaciers above which

rise snow-capped summits. Anchorages are available off this

part of the coast, but a sudden inset of ice may make them

untenable. Most of the coast is ice-free except for Pituffik

Gletscher (Petowik Gletscher), which enters the sea about 15

miles SE of Kap Atholl.

5.18 Numerous seabirds breed all along this stretch of coast. The

fertilizing effect of their presence combined with the natural

deep rock gives the cliffs, in summer, unexpected rich colors.

In addition, during early summer when the melting of the snow

is well advanced, the presence of numerous microscopic plants

produces a phenomenon of red or pink snow. Because of this

effect, the cliffs are called the Crimson Cliffs.

5.18 Caution.—Local magnetic disturbances have been reported

to exist off this part of the coast.

5.18 Parker Snow Point (Appat Appai), the W extremity of a bluff

550m high, is located at the NW end of the Crimson Cliffs. 

5.18 Conical Rock (Igannaq), an islet 299m high, lies 2.25 miles

SW of Parker Snow Point (Appat Appai) and is steep and

sharp-pointed. Because of its shape and color, the islet forms

an excellent landmark. Vessels may pass either side of the rock,

depending upon ice conditions at the time. 

5.18 Parker Snow Bugt (76°09'N., 68°37'W.) is entered between

Parker Snow Point and Kap Dudley Diggs (Cape Dudley

Digges). The shores of this bay rise in abrupt cliffs to heights

of about 450m. Two glaciers are located near the head, but they

terminate against steep banks of boulder clay and do not discharge into the bay. A settlement, normally deserted in sum-
Sector 5. Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea 85

Pub. 181

mer, stands on a plain on the N side of the bay near its head.

Excellent anchorage can be found in the innermost part of the

bay, about 100m offshore, in a depth of 20m, clay.

5.19 Kap Dudley Diggs (76°10'N., 68°49'W.), the W

extremity of a fairly extensive area of ice-free land N of Parker

Snow Bugt, is a precipice 245m high. It is reported to be clear

of snow with yellow vegetation at the top.

5.19 Pituffik Gletscher, located close N of Kap Dudley Diggs, is

conspicuous and easy to identify. Its outer face, about 3 miles

wide, extends about 1 mile seaward from the land on either

side and presents a line of low abrupt cliffs rising directly from

the sea. Large icebergs frequently break off from the face of

this glacier; some of them ground on ledges which extend on

each side of the glacier. Good anchorage can be obtained off

the N side of the face of the glacier, in depths of 42 to 46m.

5.19 Hule, a prominent cave, is located close N of Pituffik Gletscher; it is about 6m high and wide.

5.19 Quaratit (76°19'N., 69°21'W.), the former site of the Kap

Atholl Loran Station, is located 7 miles NW of the N end of the

face of Pituffik Gletscher and about 5 miles SE of Kap Atholl.

5.19 Kap Atholl (Kangaarasuk) (76°23'N., 69°38'W.) is located

12.5 miles NW of the N end of the face of Pituffik Gletscher. It

is 230m high and forms the S entrance point of Wolstenholme

Fjord. Tonge Skaer, a low table rock, almost awash, lies 3 miles

SE of Kap Atholl and about 0.75 mile from the shore. A dark

patch on the mountain side in the vicinity of this rock is

prominent from a considerable distance. 

Outlying Islands

5.20 Carey Oer (76°47'N., 72°58'W.), an isolated group

of islands, islets, and rocks, lies with its center located 50 miles

WNW of Kap Atholl. Some of the greatest depths in the N part

of Baffin Bay, over 600m, are found to lie between this group

and the mainland NE. The islands lie on foul ground where

icebergs strand and rocks, awash and below-water, are located

off the SW side of the group. They must be approached with

care as the waters in the vicinity are not completely surveyed.

The group is only accessible to vessels from early August until

the middle of September, although the surrounding waters are

never completely frozen over.

5.20 Bjorlings O (Bjorling O) (76°43'N., 72°33'W.), the easternmost island of the group, rises to a height of 300m and is surmounted by a cairn. 

5.20 Nordvest O (Nordvesto), the largest and westernmost island

of the group, lies 7.5 miles W of Bjorlings O and rises to a

height of 225m. This island is fringed by islets and rocks which

extend up to about 1 mile from its NE extremity. 

5.20 Bordo, Hollaenderhatten, Fireo, Isbjorneo O, Mellemo O,

and Tyreojet are the more important islands and islets which

complete the group.

5.20 Isbojorn (76°44'N., 73°03'W.), a harbor, is formed in the SE

end of a channel which separates Isbjorneo O from Mellemo O

to the SW. It affords almost landlocked anchorage, reported to

be sheltered in all weathers, in depths of 16 to 22m. The anchorage berth lies off a small bight which indents the S side of

Isbjorneo O. A cairn surmounted by a staff stands on the shore

of the bight. It is reported that there is little swell and weak

tidal current is experienced within the harbor.

5.20 Anchorage can also be found in a bay at the SE end of Mellemo O.

Kap Atholl to Port of Thule Air Base (Pituffik)

5.21 Bylot Sund (76°30'N., 69°30'W.), deep and free of

dangers, is entered between Kap Atholl and the S extremity of

Wolstenholme O, 5 miles WNW. The sound extends NE for 14

miles, between the mainland on the E and some islands on the

W, to join Wolstenholme Fjord. For information on the ship

reporting systems covering the waters of Greenland (GREENPOS and KYSTKONTROL), see Pub. 180, Sailing Directions

(Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean. 

5.21 Wolstenholme O is a steep-sided island which, when viewed

from the S, appears saddle-shaped. Its E and higher part rises to

a height of about 550m and is surmounted by a cairn.

Dalrymple Rock (Iganak), a peaked islet 146m high, lies 1 mile

NW of Wolstenholme O and is the breeding place of numerous

sea birds. 

5.21 Caution.—A local magnetic anomaly has been reported in

the vicinity of Dalrymple Rock (Iganak). 

5.21 Ederfugleoer, consisting of two islets and a rock, awash, lies

on a shoal located 2 miles N of Wolstenholme O; a belowwater rock lies midway between them. It was reported that an

isolated shoal patch with a depth of 25m, lies about 7.5 miles

W of Ederfugleoer.

5.21 Saunders O (76°34'N., 69°43'W.), located 5 miles NNE of

Wolstenholme O, rises steeply to an almost level top about

380m high. The prominence of this island is enhanced by the

color of its cliffs, banded in red and yellow, which are the

breeding place of innumerable sea birds. The NW part of the

island is comprised of a huge semi-detached mass of rock over

305m high. On its SW and E sides there are small, flat, raised

patches of debris lying at the foot of the cliffs.

5.22 Wolstenholme Fjord (76°38'N., 68°30'W.), fronted

by the above islands, is entered between an unnamed point,

located 13.5 miles NE of Kap Atholl, and Kap Abernathy, 10.5

miles NNW. The fjord extends E for about 22 miles, terminating in three great glacier faces. A prohibited area, best seen on

the chart, lies in the fjordt.

Wolstenholme Fjord
86 Sector 5. Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea 

Pub. 181

5.22 Several good anchorage roadsteads lie in the fjord, the best

of which is North Star Bugt, located 2 miles within the SE

entrance point.

5.22 Dundas Fjeld (76°34'N., 68°53'W.), a dark and isolated

mountain, stands on the N shore of North Star Bugt and forms

a very prominent landmark. A cairn stands on the E side of its

flat top and its steep sides are dangerous due to avalanches.

5.22 North Star Bugt (76°34'N., 68°52'W.), a small bay, is

formed between Dundas Fjeld (Uummannaq) and Pituffik

(Astro), a low-lying point, 1 mile SSE. The width of the

entrance to the bay is reduced to 0.65 mile by a causeway and

berthing pier which extends 245m WNW from Pituffik (Astro).

5.22 The bay forms a harbor. The whole of this area is a U.S.

Defense area. On the S side there are port facilities for the U.S.

Air Force Base at Thule; the installations are situated 1 mile SE

of the port. 

5.22 The bay is open to navigation from July 20 to September 30.

Icebreakers are stationed in the area to assist vessels during

difficult periods.

5.22 Aspect.—An airfield is situated 2 miles SSE of the cairn

standing on Dundas Fjeld (Uummannaq). The buildings in its

vicinity are prominent. An aeronautical light is shown from a

position close S of the airfield. A conspicuous red house stands

on the N side of the bay, in the settlement of Dundas. A radar

dome is reported to stand about 0.75 mile ESE of the root of

the causeway. A group of storage tanks stand close SE of the

root of the causeway.

5.22 Caution.—North Star Bugt is a restricted U.S. Defense Area

and permission to enter must be obtained from the authorities.

5.22 Submarine cables lie within the approaches to the bay and

can best be seen on the chart. A large and prominent sign

“Submarine Cables—Do Not Anchor” stands on the SE shore

of North Star Bugt, 0.75 mile NE of the root of the causeway.

5.22 Dundas, a small Danish settlement, lies at the head of the

bay. Originally founded as Thule, this name now applies to a

larger settlement situated in the vicinity of Ingelfield Bredning

(see paragraph 5.28).

5.22 Vessels up to 80m in length and 5.5m draft have anchored at

Dundas, close SSW of the settlement.

Port of Thule Air Base (Pituffik) 

(76°32'N., 68°52'W.)

World Port Index No. 1000

5.23 The port of Thule Air Base is situated on the S side of

North Star Bugt. There are anchoring and berthing facilities for

Courtesy of Steffen Winther

Dundas Fjeld (Uummannaq)

Dundas Fjeld (Uummannaq) and North Star Bugt

Wolstenholme Fjord, Inglefield Bredning, Thule Air Base, 

and vicinity
Sector 5. Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea 87

Pub. 181

large vessels. Pituffik (Pitugfik) is a harbor and oil terminal

exclusively reserved and secured to serve the Thule Air Force

Base (TAB). Vessels must obtain permission from the authorities prior to entering and anchoring as directed in the North

Star Bugt.

During the navigation season, ice conditions in the North

Star Bugt may unexpectedly change and vessels may be required to leave the bay on short notice.

5.23 Winds—Weather.—The wind direction is quite variable,

but generally prevails from a W direction in June and July,

shifting to the E in September. Average winds are light, being 4

to 11 knots or less 82 per cent of the time. September and

October are months in which the possibility of storms is greatest. Storms are rare in July and August, but, when occurring,

come mostly from the SE quadrant. Icebreakers are available

during severe ice conditions.

5.23 Tides—Currents.—Tides in the bay rise about 3m at

springs and 1.7m at neaps. The tidal currents within the bay are

weak.

5.23 Depths—Limitations.—The principal berth in the port is a

pier, 305m long, connected to Pituffik (Astro) by a 430m long

causeway. 

5.23 The pier has a depth of 9.4m alongside its N side. The S side

is not used because of shoal depths and rocks. It is reported that

range beacons stand close E of the root of the causeway and

indicate the approach to the pier. 

5.23 Vessels up to 130m in length and 7m draft can be accommodated alongside.

5.23 A submarine pipeline extends in a W direction for nearly 0.5

mile from the S side of Pituffik (Astro). Tankers moor at the

seaward end of this pipeline, where six mooring buoys are

available.

5.23 A number of hulks, lying at the head of the bight close S of

Pituffik (Astro), are used as finger piers for the handling of

cargo, but are reported to be in poor condition.

5.23 Pilotage.—Pilots are not available; however, U.S. harbor

service personnel assist in the berthing and securing of vessels.

5.23 Vessels bound for the bay should send an ETA in advance to

the U.S. Base Authority at Thule and also to the Danish Harbor

Authority at Dundas. The port can be contacted by VHF. 

5.23 Regulations.—Refer to Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean for vessels entry requirements and

other pertinent information.

5.23 Anchorage.—Anchorage is obtained under a steep cliff

which extends for 0.65 mile from the head of the bay along the

SE shore, terminating in a shallow bight, into which flows the

Pitugfiu Kugssua River. Vessels may only berth at North Star

Bugt as directed by the U.S. Harbor Authority. A number of

designated anchor berths have depths 10 to 30m, good holding

ground, sheltered from SE winds, which occasionally occur. 

5.23 There are a number of mooring buoys close SW of the

berthing pier. Between these and the root of the causeway there

is a submarine oil pipeline. Tankers discharging fuel secure at

the outer end of the line using the starboard anchor with hawsers to three mooring buoys.

Port of Thule Air Base (Pituffik) to Inglefield

Bredning

5.24 Within the region of Wolstenholme Fjord and Inglefield Bredning is the municipality of Qaanaaq (Thule). The

municipality consists of one town, Qaanaaq (Thule), and five

villages. 

From Kap Abernathy (76°41'N., 69°16'W.), the N entrance

point of Wolstenholme Fjord, the coast trends NW for 35 miles

Courtesy of Steffen Wintherf

Aerial view of Thule Air Base and North Star Bugt

Thule Air Base Pier

Thule Air Base Pier
88 Sector 5. Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea 

Pub. 181

to Kap Parry. The coast in this area has several indentations,

the largest of which is Granville Fjord.

5.24 Manson Oer, two small islands, lie close off Kap Abernathy

in an extensive area of water which remains unsurveyed. Near

76°39'N 69°10'W, there are two small islands about 2 miles SE

of Kap Abernathy. Approximately 1.25 miles S of the W part

of Manson Oer there is an additional island, about 150m long

and 40m wide and about 16m high. There is also a rock that is

exposed at low tide approximately 0.5 mile SW of the W part

of Manon Oer’s S point. Vessels should not approach this area

due to other uncharted rocks. 

5.24 Moriusaq (Manussaq) (76°45'N., 69°54'W.), a native settlement, is situated 10 miles NW of Kap Abernathy on the SE

entrance point of Granville Fjord. Vessels can anchor 90m offshore, in a depth of 33m, with a prominent red house in the settlement bearing 214°. Range beacons, situated close E of Manussaq and bearing 007°, lead into the anchorage.

5.24 Granville Fjord is entered between Manussaq and Uvdlisautinguag, a point 8 miles NW. Three Sister Bees, a group of

small and flat islands, lie in the middle of the entrance to the

fjord. The shores of the fjord are bound by mountains with icecovered summits. Two glaciers enter a basin that forms the

head of the fjord at the edge of the Greenland Icecap.

5.24 Drown Bugt (76°52'N., 70°48'W.), a small bay, lies 9.5

miles NW of the Three Sister Bees. This bay forms part of the

SW side of Steensby Land, the W end of an ice-covered peninsula which rises to a height of 1,190m.

5.24 Booth Sund is entered 5 miles NNW of Drown Bugt. A sand

bar, barely awash, extends across the entrance to this sound.

Fitz Clarence Rock, an islet 105m high, lies 1 mile within the S

entrance to the sound and is a very conspicuous mark.

5.24 Kap Parry (77°01'N., 71°22'W.), one of the most striking

landmarks on this coast, rises to a height of 470m and is precipitous on its W and NW sides. Winter ice rarely forms off

Kap Parry.

5.24 Caution.—The waters within the vicinity of the cape are

subject to sudden offshore storms; warning of these storms is

usually given by low fast-moving woolly clouds gathering over

the cape. 

Approaches to Inglefield Bredning

5.25 Hvalsund and Murchison Sund, two channels, lead

from Baffin Bay into Inglefield Bredning and Olrik Fjord. The

former channel passes on the S side of Hakluyt O, Northumberland O, and Herbert O, and the latter channel passes on

the N side of these islands.

5.25 Hakluyt O (77°26'N., 72°42'W.), a small island 400m high,

lies 1.5 miles W of Northumberland O. A tableland, about 1

mile long, forms the top of the island. In summer, grass and

flowers flourish on its SE side. Northumberland O, an island,

1,030m high, can be recognized from the S by a snow-covered

peak standing on its W end. Foul ground, the outer extremity of

which is awash, extends up to 2.5 miles from the SE side of the

island.

5.25 Herbert O (77°25'N., 70°29'W.), an island, 890m high, lies

3 miles E of Northumberland O and is separated from it by a

channel with a least known depth of 16m. Icebergs frequently

strand on foul ground that borders the E end of this island. It is

formed from a vertical flat-topped mass of sandstone. Three

glaciers descend from a small icecap to the N side of the island,

but only one reaches the sea. 

5.25 A small settlement is situated at Qeqertarssuaq (77°25'N.,

70°09'W.), a low foreland 4 miles NW of the E extremity of the

island. Vessels can anchor, in depths of 20 to 25m, 120m off

this settlement. Range beacons, in line bearing 177°, lead

through a foul area to the roadstead. Larger vessels anchor on

the same bearing 0.5 mile offshore, in 40m.

5.25 Hvalsund (77°19'N., 70°40'W.) is the S approach channel.

Its S side between Kap Parry and Kap Radcliff, 7 miles NNE,

is high and bold with scanty vegetation. Drifts of snow remain

here throughout the year, under the crests of cliffs. Barden

Bugt, an inlet into which several glaciers descend, is entered

between Kap Radcliff and Kap Powlett, 4.5 miles NE. A reef,

partially awash and of unknown extent, stretches SW from Kap

Powlett. A rock, on which the sea breaks, lies 0.75 mile off

shore, midway along the S side of the inlet. It is reported that

vessels can anchor off Natsilivik (77°10'N., 70°52'W.), a winter settlement standing 1 mile within Kap Powlett, in depths of

85 to 90m, soft bottom. Anchorage can also be found approximately 4 miles ENE of Kap Powell near a reef approximately

0.2 mile from Narsaaq (77°12'N., 70°36'W.), good holding

ground, in depths of 25 to 30m. 

5.25 Caution.—A local magnetic anomaly exists in the W part of

Hvalsund.

5.26 Olrik Fjord (77°12'N., 67°35'W.), long and narrow,

is unique on the NW coast of Greenland, being more like a

river than a fjord. Between Kap Powlett and Kap Trautwine, 11

miles ESE, the S side of the approach is formed by a continuous line of multi-colored cliffs which rise vertically to a height

of 680m. The tidal currents in the fjord are strong. Its outer part

is probably navigable as far as a reef which is reported to extend S from the N side near the narrows, about 13 miles within

the entrance. At its head, the fjord is almost joined to Inglefield

Bredning by Academy Bugt, but is blocked by Leidy Gletscher. 

5.26 Murchison Sund, the N approach channel, is 28 miles wide

at its NW entrance between Hakluyt O and Kap Robertson, on

the mainland NE. The outer part of the NE side of the sound

between Kap Robertson and Kap Cleveland, 20 miles SE, is

deeply indented by Robertson Fjord and MacCormick Fjord.

Herbert O
Sector 5. Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea 89

Pub. 181

5.26 Kap Robertson (77°48'N., 71°26'W.), the NE entrance

point, is the W extremity of a large mainland promontory. This

promontory can be recognized by three glaciers, located on its

S side, which extend toward the S, but do not reach it.

5.26 Robertson Fjord is entered between Kap Robertson and

Iglunaksuak Pynt. Close within its entrance the fjord narrows

to a width of 3 to 4 miles and maintains this width to the head.

The scenery in the fjord is very bold and the precipitous cliffs

at its head are majestic. Verhoeff Gletscher, a rapidly moving

glacier, terminates at the head of the fjord in a wall of ice

nearly 30m high. The depths within the fjord are great and decrease only close inshore.

5.26 Siorapaluk (77°47'N., 70°42'W.), a small trading station, is

situated on the SW side of Robertson Fjord. Siorapaluk is the

northernmost community on earth. Vessels can anchor, in

depths of 27 to 50m, sand, about 150 to 200m off the station.

At times, numerous icebergs are reported to drift by the station.

A supply vessel is reported to call here during August. Vessels

up to 70m in length and 6.5m draft have been handled.

5.26 MacCormick Fjord (77°39'N., 70°00'W.) is entered between Iglunaksuak Pynt and Kap Cleveland. The shores of the

fjord present an almost continuous line of beach. The head of

the fjord is occupied by a glacier about 1 mile wide; it has a

vertical face, about 30m high, from which numerous icebergs

are discharged. On the NW side of the fjord, the land, which

slopes up moderately from the shore, is intersected by numerous ravines and crested with an isolated icecap.

5.26 Piulip Nunaa (Red Cliff Halvo), a peninsula separating MacCormick Fjord from Bowdoin Fjord, extends 15 miles S from

the coast to which it is joined by an isthmus, 8 miles wide. It is

about 22 miles wide at its seaward face and is fringed by foul

ground. 

5.27 Qaanaaq (Thule) (77°28'N., 69°18'W.) was first established during the 1950’s when the U.S. airbase needed to be

extended. The permanent inhabitants were moved approximately 60 miles N to what is now the settlement of Qaanaaq or

Thule. 

5.27 The town of Qaanaq stands on the S coast of Piulip Nunaa

(Red Cliff Halvo) and is situated in Inglefield Fjord.

5.27 There are no quays or piers at Qaanaaq. Cargo must be

handled to the shore by small boats. There are anchorages and

mooring berths approximately 600m offshore. 

5.27 The port is normally navigable from the end of July to midSeptember.

5.27 Pilotage.—Taking a pilot is not compulsory but is advisable.

Unlicensed pilot is available by arrangement with the Port

Operator. The vessel’s ETA must be sent to Port Operator 24

hours prior to arrival. 

5.27 Tides rise about 3m at springs and 1.7m at neaps. Vessels

with local knowledge normally anchor about 180m off the

settlement, in a depth of 15m; the holding ground is good, but a

sternline is secured ashore. Anchor beacons indicate the berth.

Vessels up to 135m in length and 7m draft have been handled.

5.27 The ice-free calling period lasts from early July until the end

of September. The dark period lasts from 3 November to 9

February; the midnight sun period lasts from 24 April to 18

August. 

Inglefield Bredning 

5.28 Inglefield Bredning (77°26'N., 68°00'W.), a wide

and branching fjord, is entered between Kangeq (77°16'N.,

69°06'W.) and Kap Ackland. For the greater part, the fjord is

Panoramic view of Qaanaaq

Fjord and cliffs facing Qaanaaq

Aerial view of Qaanaaq
90 Sector 5. Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea 

Pub. 181

bordered by promontories, 300 to 900m high, from the base of

which the snow melts off in summer. At several places, the

shores are interrupted by fjord-like depressions through which

short glaciers flow from the Greenland Ice Cap and discharge a

few small icebergs. The innermost part of the bay, by contrast,

is almost entirely occupied by large and very productive

glaciers, which are fronted by ice-scoured islands.

5.28 Tidal currents are reported to run very strongly along the S

shore of Inglefield Bredning, with many eddies.

5.28 Bowdoin Fjord is entered 8 miles ENE of Kap Ackland.

Igdlorssuit, a small settlement, is situated on the W side of this

short fjord, about 2 miles N of Kap Tyrconnel (77°31'N.,

68°36'W.), the W entrance point. Vessels can anchor, in a depth

of 55m, soft bottom sloping steeply and poor holding ground,

about 0.1 mile off the settlement; a windmill and a flagpole in

line, bearing 205°, indicate the berth. 

5.28 Academy Bugt, a short arm of Inglefield Bredning, extends

SE between a number of lake-strewn and ice-free plateaus,

about 1,000m high, and terminates close N of the head of Olrik

Fjord, in a glacier common to both. The SW side of this arm is

formed by a continuous, inaccessible, and vertical cliff that extends from a bluff at the entrance to beyond the glacier face.

The NE side of the arm is also bold, but, towards the entrance,

there are some deep valleys that give access to the easternmost

plateau.

5.29 The Head.—The S side of the head of Inglefield

Bredning, E of Academy Bugt, is bold but ice-free. The E and

N sides form an almost continuous glacier face. Four huge ice

streams, separated by precipitous mountains (nunataks), flow

down from the Greenland Icecap to release great quantities of

icebergs along this face. As a result of this heavy discharge, the

ice located in the interior E part of the head has settled down

into a huge semi-circular basin.

5.29 Several islands lie at the head; some of these islands are

located in the face of the glaciers and others at a short distance

from them. Josephine Peary O, the northernmost island, has

almost vertical cliffs, 500m high, at its S end. Harward Oer,

two large islands 100m high, lies in the middle of the semi-circular basin described above; Qeqertat (77°30'N., 66°42'W.), a

settlement, stands on the SW end of the larger island. Vessels

with local knowledge can anchor 100m away from this settlement, in a depth of 28m, holding ground is poor. Several islets

and rocks are reported to lie on foul ground about 1 mile S of

the settlement.

Murchison Sund to Kap Alexander

5.30 From Kap Robertson, the NE entrance point of Murchison Sund, the coast trends NNW for 15 miles to Kap Chalon

and consists of alternating cliffs and glacier faces. Kap Saumarez, 445m high, is located 5 miles NNW of Kap Robertson

and separates two glaciers, Morris Jesup Gletscher and Diebitsch Gletscher.

5.30 Caution.—A local magnetic disturbance has been observed

about 3 miles SW of Kap Saumarez.

5.30 Kap Powell (77°54'N., 71°54'W.), 435m high, is located 5.5

miles WNW of Kap Saumarez. It is the NW extremity of a

broad promontory which separates Diebitsch Gletscher from

Clements Markham Gletscher.

5.30 Kap Chalon, a sandstone mountain 581m high, can be readily identified by a black, basalt dike which extends E along the

coast for 2 miles to the face of Clements Markham Brae

Gletscher. This dike, 9 to 15m high, forms a retaining wall for

a mass of stratified sandstone which rises to heights of 305 to

365m above it. Icebergs are reported to ground on a bank lying

off Kap Chalon.

5.30 Prudhoe Land (78°00'N., 71°00'W.), an immense area

capped with ice, backs the irregular coast between Kap Chalon

and Kap Alexander, 16 miles NW. Numerous glaciers descend

to the sea from this area. Generally, the ice-free land consists

only of a narrow band fringing the extremities of the projecting

promontories.

5.30 Sonntag Bugt (78°00'N., 72°26'W.) is entered 5 miles NNW

of Kap Chalon. Several glaciers enter the bay and a moraine,

50m high, on the W part of the northernmost glacier is sometimes used as a route to the Greenland Icecap. Radcliff Pynt is

the SE extremity of a promontory which separates Sonntag

Bugt from a small unnamed bay, the head of which is occupied

by Storm Brae, an enormous glacier.

5.30 Caution.—A local magnetic disturbance has been reported

close off the S part of the entrance to Sonntag Bugt.

5.30 Sutherland O, a rough-grained sandstone island, lies in the

entrance to the bay 3 miles SE of Kap Alexander and rises to a

height of 90m.

5.30 Kap Alexander (78°10'N., 73°09'W.), the W extremity of

Greenland, forms the SE entrance point to Smith Sound. The

cape, about 1 mile wide, extends 4 miles W from the glaciers at

its base. It is composed of layers of light yellow sandstone and

dark columnar basalt. Rising to a height of 350m, it is reported

to be the highest and steepest of all the capes along this coast. 

Nares Strait

5.31 Nares Strait, a channel leading NNE from Baffin Bay

to the Arctic Ocean, passes between the W side of the N part of

Greenland and the E coast of Ellesmere Island in Canada. The

strait consists of, from S to N, Smith Sound, Kane Basin,

Kennedy Channel, Hall Basin, and Robeson Channel.

Qaanaaq
Sector 5. Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea 91

Pub. 181

5.31 Although the strait and neighboring sea are at times hazardous for navigation due to severe ice conditions, they have long

been attempted by explorers seeking a NW passage between

the Atlantic Ocean and the Pacific Ocean. However, prior to

1948, only five vessels were recorded as having successfully

navigated N of Kane Basin, the middle part of Nares Strait.

Thereafter, the strait has provided a route, navigable in August

by icebreakers, to supply a meteorological station at Alert, on

the NE coast of Ellesmere Island.

Smith Sound 

5.32 Smith Sound (78°24'N., 73°30'W.) leads N from

Baffin Bay into Kane Basin and forms part of the Nares Strait

route to the Lincoln Sea. It lies between the E coast of Ellesmere Island, Canada, and the W coast of Greenland. The

sound, with a general width of about 25 miles, is entered

between Kap Alexander, located on the coast of Greenland,

and Cape Isabella, located 26 miles WNW on the coast of

Ellesmere Island.

5.32 The shores on both sides of the sound are high, but differ

greatly in aspect. The Greenland coast, although consisting

mostly of worn headlands, has fertile land, with long grass in

summer. The Ellesmere Island coast is bleak, barren, desolate,

and backed by extensive ice fields.

5.32 From limited information, the depths in Smith Sound appear

to be deep, being nowhere less than 183m and generally more

than 365m. No known dangers appear farther than 1 mile offshore (1973). The tidal currents within the sound are reported

to be weak.

5.32 Ice.—The S end of the sound normally remains open

throughout the year, although winter ice forms in the inner

parts of the bays S of Etah, midway along the Greenland coast.

The remainder of the sound freezes over entirely from shore to

shore every winter. The S limit of this solid ice forms a bridge

across the sound, opposite Etah, which is used by Eskimo

hunters.

5.32 After the breaking up of this ice, usually in June or July, conditions vary and are liable to alter radically, even within a few

hours; these conditions depend upon the wind and the current

that affects the entry of heavy Arctic pack ice from Kane

Basin. New ice begins to form off Etah in September.

5.33 McCormick Bugt (78°14'N., 72°48'W.) lies 5 miles

NNE of Kap Alexander. Kap Kenrick, the N entrance point of

the bay, is a prominent headland 240m high. A drying reef, on

which icebergs ground, extends off the S side of this point.

Pandora Havn, the inner part of the head of the bay, forms a

harbor for small vessels, but is exposed to W winds. Vessels

can anchor, NE of a small projection on the S side of the harbor, in a depth of 12m, good holding ground.

5.33 Hartstene Bugt is entered between Kap Kenrick and Sunrise

Pynt, 5 miles NNW. A bight is located close within Kap

Kenrick and, at its head, a cascade falls over 100m from the

hills. A small bay indents the N shore of Hartstene Bugt and

has been reported to be bordered by an icefoot fringed by

rocks. Anchorage has been obtained by small vessels, in a

depth of 15m, within this bay.

5.33 Foulke Havn, a small deep inlet, is fronted by three small islands and indents the head of Hartstene Bugt. It is fully exposed to the SW and open to the entry of ice. It was reported

that a small vessel with a draft of 2.4m was icebound in the bay

and wintered there protected from SW winds by grounded

icebergs off the entrance to the inlet.

5.33 Foulke Fjord, about 1 mile wide and 4 miles long, opens E

from the head of Hartstene Bugt, close N of Foulke Havn. It

has been visited by many expeditions and used as a winter

base. Numerous islets and rocks encumber both sides of the

entrance and a 12.8m shoal patch lies in the middle of it.

Vessels entering this fjord are advised to keep slightly N of

mid-channel to avoid the known dangers. 

5.33 Several mountains, 610 to 740m high, stand on the N side of

the inner part of the fjord and are fronted by shores which rise

almost vertically to a height of 330m.

5.33 Etah (78°19'N., 72°36'W.), lying at the head of a bay 1.5

miles within the N entrance point of Foulke Fjord, is the site of

a former Eskimo settlement.

5.33 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor in the inner part of Foulke

Fjord, in depths over 25m, about 30m off a small peninsula.

5.33 Kap Ohlsen, a prominent steep cape of light reddish rock, is

located 11 miles NNE of Kap Alexander. The cliffs in its vicinity are precipitous.

Littelton O (78°21'N., 72°52'W.), a small island 180m high,

is the largest of a group of islands, islets, and rocks which lie

close NW of Kap Ohlsen. It is flat-topped and prominent and

has been used as a repository for the records of various expeditions. McGary O, a much smaller island, lies close NW of

Littelton O. Rocks encumber the SW end of the passage that

lies between them. Small vessels have anchored at the NE end

of this passage, but found it unsatisfactory due to the limited

swinging room and the entry of ice.

5.33 Kap Hatherton (78°28'N., 72°34'W.), located 6 miles NNE

of Kap Ohlsen, is a bold, rocky mass. The small bays lying

close N and S of the cape have sandy bottoms but are shallow.

Refuge Havn, an inlet located 3 miles NNE of the cape, is open

to the S and the W and can be entered close S of Cairn Pynt.

Small vessels can anchor, in a depth of 14m, in the NW part of

this inlet.

Kane Basin

5.34 Kane Basin lies between Smith Sound and Kennedy

Channel. It is about 110 miles long and has a greatest width of

about 80 miles in its middle.

5.34 Cairn Pynt (78°31'N., 72°29'W.), the SE entrance point of

Kane Basin, is a square-faced headland surmounted by a cairn.

It forms the W extremity of a small, but prominent, peninsula

of laminated rock.

5.34 Inglefield Land, a broad strip of ice-free land, extends from

Foulke Fjord to Kap Agassiz, 83 miles NE. The coast which

fronts it is generally formed of almost vertical cliffs, from 150

to 305m high, some of which have long slopes of rock debris

reaching to an icefoot at their bases. Bays and deep inlets indent the shore, but none afford refuge or shelter from the ice,

the pressure of which is severe along this coast. The ice-free

land, which extends inland for about 20 miles, is comparatively

level, except in its E part where small elevations alternate with

the valleys.

5.34 Rensselaer Bugt is entered 15 miles ENE of Cairn Pynt,

between Kap Ingersoll and Kap Leiper, 7 miles farther ENE. It
92 Sector 5. Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea 

Pub. 181

is reported that a small vessel wintered in this bay by mooring

to the shore, in a depth of 13m, between two islands in the innermost part, safe from outside ice pressure. However, the

vessel had to be abandoned because the winter ice failed to

move out of the bay.

5.34 Bancroft Bugt (78°47'N., 70°16'W.) is entered between Kap

Francis, 5 miles NE of Kap Leiper, and Kap Taney, 4 miles

farther NE. The Minturn River, about 0.75 mile wide at its

mouth, discharges 8 miles ENE of this inlet and is shallow,

5.34 Marshall Bugt lies 13 miles NE of Bancroft Bugt and is

entered between Inuarfigssuaq and Kap Russell, 2 miles N.

The bay penetrates 6.5 miles into the coast, its inner part

having the character of a fjord. It connects to the mouth of a

river which drains several lakes located near a glacier. A group

of small steep-sided islands occupies the outer part of this bay. 

5.35 Dallas Bugt (79°05'N., 68°00'W.) is entered between

Kap Kent and Kap Scott, 5 miles ENE. This bay extends 3

miles SE to its head where it receives the flow of two rivers.

Several islets lie near the head and a small islet lies close off

Kap Scott.

5.35 Advance Bugt, an irregular bay, is entered 2 miles E of Kap

Scott from which it is separated by a small inlet and promontory. This bay is 4 miles wide and extends S for 1.5 miles. It is

fronted by an island chain and encumbered with islets. A river

flows into its head.

5.35 Bonsall Oer (79°10'N., 66°39'W.), a chain of islands and

islets about 6 miles long, fronts the coast 4 miles WNW of Kap

Agassiz. They lie close off the shore, which is indented by

numerous small inlets and bays.

5.35 Kap Agassiz (79°08'N., 66°10'W.) is the NE extremity of

Inglefield Land. A number of islets lie close off this cape.

McGary Oer, a small group of islands, lies 4 miles N of the

cape and close off the S end of Humboldt Gletscher.

5.35 Peabody Bugt (79°37'N., 65°10'W.), the E part of Kane

Basin, fronts Humboldt Gletscher, the glacier which covers the

coast from close N of Kap Agassiz to Kap Forbes, 50 miles N.

The edge of this glacier slopes down evenly to the bay and is

almost without crevasses. In most places, the edge is no more

than 50m high and, in several places, it is easily accessible

from a boat. The icebergs from Humboldt Gletscher look like

huge pieces of ice from polar regions and are never as high as

those discharged from the glaciers of Inglefield Bredning and

Melville Bugt, to the S.

5.35 Benton Bugt, an open bight, is formed by the shore which

recedes N for 2.5 miles between Kap Forbes and Kap Clay, 10

miles WNW. Putdlerssuaq, an island 1 mile long, lies near the

E end of this bay, 2 miles SW of Kap Forbes.

5.36 Cass Fjord (80°05'N., 64°32'W.), a branching indentation about 2 miles wide, extends 15 miles NE and N from its

entrance. Poulsens Klint, 180m high cliffs, extend NE for

several miles along the N shore of this fjord. 

5.36 Nygaard Bugt indents the mainland coast for 4 miles

between the N entrance point of Cass Fjord and Kap Webster,

10 miles WSW. The W shore of this bay is bordered by the

Talilenguaq Klipper and a river enters its head. 

5.36 Wright Bugt is entered between Nunatami, a point 2.5 miles

W of Kap Webster, and Kap Jackson, 11 miles WNW. This bay

penetrates 4.5 miles N to a narrow inlet at its head. The cliffs

on its E side rise to a height of 490m and those on its W side,

known as Troedsson Klipper, rise to a height of 365m.

5.36 In the vicinity of Kap Webster and Wright Bugt, the limestone cliffs are of fantastic formation, with gray cold colors at

their feet and glowing red shales near their summits.

Kennedy Channel

5.37 Kennedy Channel connects Kane Basin with Hall

Basin. It is entered from the S between Cape Lawrence

(80°21'N., 69°35'W.) and Kap Jackson. The channel extends

NE for about 80 miles between comparatively regular and

almost parallel shores, 15 to 20 miles apart. Its junction with

Hall Basin lies on a line joining Cape Baird and Kap Morton,

22.5 miles SSE.

5.37 There is deep water throughout Kennedy Channel; depths

average 336m on the NW side and range from 183m to 275m

on the SE side. No offshore dangers have been reported within

the waters of the channel, but several islands are located in its

middle part. On a rising tide, the tidal current sets SW through

the channel; on a falling tide, it sets NE. A current is reported

to set SW in the channel and may attain a considerable rate

following N winds.

5.37 The relatively large range of the tide in Kennedy Channel, up

to 3.8m, keeps it open late and reopens it early, in the season.

Some floes of old polar ice, which are nearly always moving S

through the channel, collect on the edge of the open water and

pile up on the existing ice, forming high and uneven areas.

They have also been known to pack up to 20m high against the

islands and temporarily block all ice movement.

5.37 Kap Jackson (80°03'N., 67°03'W.), which forms the SW

extremity of that part of Greenland known as Washington

Land, is located at the junction of the E shores of Kane Basin

and Kennedy Channel. The cape is described as bluff and comparatively low, but when viewed from a distance, it appears

flat. Strong currents are reported to set around the cape.

5.37 Morris Bugt (80°08'N., 67°04'W.) is entered 2.5 miles N of

Kap Jackson, between Kap Calhoun and Kap Madison, 6 miles

NW. High hills, up to 200m high, stand to the E of the bight,

beyond which lies a bare limestone plateau, cut by a few deep

valleys, rising toward small icefields some distance inland.

5.37 From Kap Madison, the coast trends N for about 8 miles to

Kap Hamilton and then another 2 mile, to Kap Jefferson. This

part of the coast is known as Nicolaj Nielsen Kyst. It is fronted

by a limestone foreshore, up to 2 miles wide, which dries and

appears at high water as a collection of low-lying reefs and

islets.

5.38 Lafayette Bugt (80°27'N., 66°47'W.) indents the

coast between Kap Jefferson and Kap Independence, 13.5

miles NNE. The shores of this bay are formed by steep mountains, up to 430m high, fronted by a low and narrow foreshore.

Kap Independence is a precipitous headland which rises to a

height of 185m.

5.38 Kap Constitution, located 2 miles N of Kap Independence, is

also a precipitous headland and rises to a height of 500m.

5.38 Crozier O (80°30'N., 67°11'W.) is the southernmost island

in Kennedy Channel. It fronts Lafayette Bugt and is reported to
Sector 5. Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea 93

Pub. 181

be easily identified. The cliffs at its SW side rise to a height of

60m.

5.38 Franklin O, the largest island in Kennedy Channel, lies 3

miles N of Kap Constitution and is easily identified. It is light

brown in color, very steep-sided, flat-topped, and rises to a

height of about 210m on its SE side. 

5.38 Hans Island is located 9 miles NNE of Franklin O, almost in

the middle of the channel. This island, which rises to a height

of 150m in its S part, is under Canadian sovereignty.

5.38 John Brown Kyst is the name applied to that part of the

coastal strip which lies between Kap Constitution and Kap

Bryan, 44 miles NNE. Along the N part, the ice foot is narrow

and the sea ice presses hard against it, with the result that the

surface of the ice foot is covered, in many places, with large ice

blocks. The S part of John Brown Kyst is indented by a wide

bight, into which flow several streams and where signs of

ancient habitation have been found. 

5.38 Alakratiak Fjord (Aleqatsiaq Fjord) (80°40'N., 65°47'W.)

is entered between Kap Resser, 300m high, and Graptolit

Naesset, which rises to a height of 530m, 4.5 miles NE. A river

discharges into the head of this fjord. The Pentamerus

Mountains back the coast N of Alakratiak Fjord, about 800m

high, and extend 12 miles NE to E to merge with the John

Brown Icecap, about 1,100m high. 

5.38 Fossil Bugt lies 11 miles NNE of Alakratiak Fjord. Several

streams discharge into the head of this wide bay. A large bay,

into which several streams discharge, lies between Kap Godfred Hansen, 5 miles NNE and Kap Ulrich. 

5.38 From Kap Ulrich, the coast trends NE for about 4 miles to

Kap Field and then another 8 miles to Kap Bryan. 

5.39 Kap Bryan (81°07'N., 64°00'W.), 360m high, is the

W entrance point of Bessels Fjord and the N point of Washington Land. Violent gusts of wind have been reported to sweep

down the mountains, which rise steeply to a height of 650m in

this vicinity. The ice foot here is narrow and impassable.

Hannah O lies close NE of Kap Bryan and has been described

as an immense heap of pebbles and drift, probably the remains

of an old glacier.

5.39 It has been reported that a vessel anchored off the entrance to

Bessels Fjord, in a depth of 15m, on a bank which extended E

from Hannah O. A very strong flow over the bank was observed.

5.39 Bessels Fjord is entered between Kap Bryan and Kap

Maynard, 3 miles ENE. It is long and narrow and extends SSE

between John Brown Iskappe, the ice cap to the W, and

Petermann Halvo, the peninsula to the E. The precipitous cliffs

on both sides of the fjord are cut by many ravines, from which

small but active glaciers discharge icebergs. Many of these icebergs have been observed aground in shallow water at the entrance and much older ice has been noted in the upper reaches

of the fjord.

Hall Basin 

5.40 Hall Basin (81°25'N., 63°00'W.) lies between Kennedy Channel, to the SW, and Robeson Channel, to the NE. It

is entered between Cape Baird, on the E coast of Ellesmere

Island, and Kap Morton, on the NW coast of Greenland. The

basin is irregular in shape; its W shore is almost entirely

broken by the entrance to Lady Franklin Bay, off which opens

an extensive fjord system. The E shore is more regular, but

deeply indented by Petermann Fjord at its S end.

5.40 The basin appears to be deep, except on the E side, where

depths of 55m have been reported to lie up to 5 miles from the

coast. However, there are no known off-lying dangers (1973).

Ice conditions in the basin depend much upon the wind and

may change from day to day.

5.40 Kap Morton (81°12'N., 63°26'W.), the N extremity of

Petermann Halvo, lies at the termination of Kennedy Channel.

Joe O, located 2.5 miles NNW of Kap Morton, is a small,

mushroom-shaped island over 100m high. Deep water lies in

the channel between the island and the cape.

5.40 Petermann Fjord is entered between Kap Lucie Marie and

Kap Tyson, 13 miles NE. From about 11 miles within its

entrance, the fjord is occupied by Petermann Gletscher, the

longest glacier in Greenland, which extends nearly 50 miles

SSE to the Greenland Ice Cap. However, the seaward face of

this glacier is low and few icebergs are discharged from it.

5.40 On either side of Petermann Fjord, steep cliffs rise to icecovered plateaus, 800m high, from which small glacier tongues

occasionally form over the cliffs. The projecting ice then

breaks off, frequently carrying with it masses of rock torn from

the face of the precipice.

5.40 Offley O (81°18'N., 61°51'W.), a small and steep island, lies

1.5 miles S of Kap Tyson. Its NE extremity presents a precipitous face about 150m high. 

5.40 Polaris Bugt, which indents the shore for 3 to 4 miles to the

E, lies between Kap Tyson and a small, low point, where a

stream enters the sea, 12 miles NNE.

5.40 Thank God Havn (81°38'N., 61°48'W.) is a small bight

formed between the above low point and Kap Lupton, 4 miles

N. The land behind this bight is high and consists of a series of

elevations and depressions. It is reported that vessels can also

anchor, in a depth of 55m, mud and silt, about 0.6 mile W of a

river delta located within the bight.

Robeson Channel

5.41 Robeson Channel (81°57'N., 60°47'W.) extends 50

miles NE from the N end of Hall Basin, lying between Cape

Murchison and Kap Lupton, to its junction with the Lincoln

Sea, lying between Cape Sheridon and Kap Stanton, 37 miles

ESE. It has a least width of 11 miles and is the narrowest part

of Nares Strait.

5.41 The Greenland coast of Robeson Channel is almost uniformly high and bold, except where it is broken by Newman

Bugt, a long inlet, opening SE, 17 miles within the entrance.

The channel itself appears to be deep throughout with depths of

over 360m. It has steep-to shores and no known off-lying

dangers to navigation (1973).

5.41 During summer and autumn, close pack ice drifts in the

channel, concentrating and building up pressure, particularly in

the narrowest parts. However, conditions can vary greatly, the

channel having been observed almost ice free in August and

even, for brief periods, as late as mid-October, although previously closely packed with ice.

5.41 Kap Lupton (81°41'N., 61°53'W.), the SE entrance point of

Robeson Channel, is a prominent landmark on the W coast of
94 Sector 5. Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea 

Pub. 181

the Polaris Promontory. In this vicinity the character of the

coast changes, the low-lying land to the S being replaced by

high steep cliffs.

5.41 Kap Porter and Kap Ammen are located 5.5 miles N and 9

miles NNE, respectively, from Kap Lupton. The land close

within the coast between these capes rises to a height of over

880m and the cliffs continue round the seaward face of the

Polaris Promontory, 9 miles farther NE, to Kap Sumner, its N

extremity. The only significant break in the cliffs is a remarkable opening in the land near Kap Ammen that, when viewed

from the W, has the appearance of an indentation. However, it

is a straight line of coast, with a low, level plain stretching

inland for 2 miles to a line of hills.

5.42 Kap Sumner (81°54'N., 60°41'W.), the SW entrance

point of Newman Bugt, is steep and moderately high, though

much less so than the cliffs to the SW. In summer it is bare of

snow. A deep ravine is located close S of the cape.

5.42 Newman Bugt is entered between Kap Sumner and Kap

Brevoort (81°59'N., 60°17'W.), 6 miles NE. This bay

separates the Polaris Promontory from Nyeboe Land

(81°55'N., 58°20'W.), a large ice-free area extending 45 miles

E. The middle part of the bay is encumbered with islands.

Several streams empty into the bay from the slopes draining on

either side. The head of the bay is occupied by a glacier which

is part of the Greenland Ice Cap.

5.42 Congress Hojland backs the NW coast of Nyeboe Land,

about 7 miles inland, between Kap Brevoort and Kap Stanton,

28 miles ENE. Most of this stretch of coast consists of rocky

cliffs. Gap Dal, a valley through which a small stream enters

the sea, is located 6 miles NE of Kap Brevoort.

5.42 Repulse Havn (82°06'N., 59°08'W.), a small bay, lies 11

miles NE of Kap Brevoort. The low-lying land surrounding it

can scarcely be distinguished from the sea ice so that some

hills in the background give the bay the appearance of being

much larger with two islands in it. A small cairn stands on one

of the entrance points.

5.42 Black Horn Klint is named for a remarkable black rock

which projects like a horn from one of the cliffs. These cliffs

extend along the coast 16 to 20 miles ENE of Kap Brevoort.

They rise precipitously from the sea to a height of 305m, with

neither a foreshore nor an ice foot at their base.

The Lincoln Sea

5.43 The NW coast of Greenland from Kap Stanton to Kap

Morris Jesup, about 170 miles ENE, forms the SE side of the

Lincoln Sea. The land is extensively indented by numerous

fjords and in most places the shore consists of steep and stratified cliffs. The fjords are usually, if not always, filled with

heavy polar pack ice.

5.43 Kap Stanton (82°13'N., 57°18'W.), the E entrance point,

lies at the N end of Robeson Channel and also forms the SW

entrance point of Hand Bugt. Rock Bakke, a mountain 1,050m

high, stands at the head of this inlet.

5.43 Frankfield Bugt is separated from Hand Bugt by a promontory, the seaward face of which is about 3 miles wide and rises

to a mountain, 365m high. The entrance of this inlet is 1.5

miles wide and its E entrance point is known as Rest Pynt. A

mountain range, which rises to a maximum height of 1,250m,

extends between the inlet and Hand Bugt and forms the base of

the above-mentioned promontory.

5.43 Kap Bryant (82°20'N., 55°15'W.), the N extremity of Nyeboe Land, lies 10 miles ENE of Rest Pynt. Wyatt Bjerg, 610m

high, and Punch Bjerg, 1,100m high, stand 4 miles S and 11

miles SSE, respectively, of the cape. Punch Bjerg is reported to

be the most prominent landmark in this vicinity.

5.43 Saint George Fjord is entered between Kap Bryant and

Dragon Pynt, the N extremity of Hendrik O, a large island 11

miles ESE. It extends S for 45 miles to the face of Steensby

Gletscher. The W side of the fjord, formed by the E coast of

Nyeboe Land, consists of cliffs as far as Kap Fulford, 4 miles

from the entrance. The remainder of this shore is regular in

character but with several small valleys leading inland from it

through mountainous country, on which there are some minor

ice caps.

5.43 Hendrik O (82°03'N., 53°18'W.), which separates the outer

part of Saint George Fjord from Sherard Osborn Fjord, extends

S and SE for a total distance of 29 miles. This island has an

average width of about 5 miles and rises to a height of 1,152m

in its N part. It is ice-free except for a few small glaciers.

Warming Land, a peninsula located S of the island, is separated

from it by Hartz Sound. 

5.44 Sherard Osborn Fjord (82°15'N., 52°06'W.) is entered between Dragon Pynt and Kap May, 19 miles NE. From

its entrance, the fjord narrows gradually to a width of about 10

miles abreast the S end of Hendrik O. The head of the fjord is

occupied by a glacier. Castle O, an island, lies on the W side of

Sherard Osborn Fjord, 6 miles within the entrance; it rises to a

height of 520m at the N end. Reef O, a small island, lies close

off the E shore opposite Castle O. Wedge O, a small island

150m high, lies close S of Reef O.

5.44 Kap May is the N extremity of Wulff Land, an extensive

mainland peninsula that forms the E side of the fjord. The W

side of the fjord is formed by Hendrik O and Permin Land, a

smaller glacier-covered peninsula, lying between Wulffs Land

and Warming Land.

5.44 At the head of Sherard Osborn Fjord, in the SW part of

Wulff Land, there is an ice-free strip of land called Aage Bistrup Land. This strip is completely encircled by Ryder Gletscher, a glacier which slopes down evenly from the Greenland

Ice Cap into the head of the fjord. After passing between Kap

Buttress, 1,070m high, and the E extremity of Permin Land,

and the coast of Wulff Land, 3 miles E, the glacier spreads out

and extends many miles N through the E part of the fjord and

as far as Wedge O. 

5.44 Kap V Nordman, 800m high, is the N extremity of Permin

Land. It is separated from the SE extremity of Hendrik O by a

channel less than 1 mile wide.

5.45 Depot O (82°30'N., 50°30'W.), a small island, lies

close off the NE end of Wulff Land, 9 miles E of Kap May. Between them, the N coast of the peninsula is ice-free but mountainous. Several fertile valleys lead inland from the coast, the

largest being Gunnar Andersson Dal, located close W of Depot

O.

5.45 Victoria Fjord is entered between Depot O and Kap Wohlgemuth, 18 miles ENE. The latter cape, 700m high, is the NW
Sector 5. Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea 95

Pub. 181

extremity of Nares Land, a very large and high island covered

with ice. Ostenfeld Gletscher, a glacier, occupies the head of

the fjord and stretches from shore to shore. Its edge extends to

within about 20 miles of the entrance.

5.45 Stephenson Island, 1,050m high, lies with its N extremity

located 9 miles E of Depot O, on the W side of the outer part of

Victoria Fjord. It is separated from Wulff Land by Nares Sund

which has a least width of 3.5 miles.

5.45 Nordenskiold Fjord is entered between Kap Middendorff

(82°40'N., 47°30'W.), the N extremity of Nares Land, and Kap

Wegener, the W extremity of Freuchen Land, a high and

mountainous peninsula 9 miles NE. Between Nares Land and

Freuchen Land, the fjord extends SE for about 40 miles and

then divides into two arms at its head. The middle and inner

parts of the fjord are entirely covered by Jungerson Gletscher, a

large glacier, the edge of which lies within 10 miles of the

entrance. The land on both sides of the fjord rises from the

shores to glacier-covered heights of 600 to 850m. It is reported

that icebergs have been found to be densely packed across the

fjord, a few miles within the entrance. 

5.45 J. P. Koch Fjord is entered between Kap Wegener and the SE

extremity of Elison O, 5 miles NW. This island, together with

Sverdrup O and Nansen Land bounds the N side of the fjord

which, along its outer part, consists of wild and mostly ice-free

alpine country. The land along the outer part of the S side of

the fjord, which is formed by Freuchen Land, and on both sides

of the inner part, is covered with glaciers except for a small icefree shore margin.

5.46 Elison O, the S extremity of which forms the NW

entrance point of J. P. Koch Fjord, lies 5 miles NNW of Kap

Wegener. This island is composed almost entirely of rugged,

but ice-free mountains which rise to heights of 1,000m. Kap

Salor (82°56'N., 48°05'W.), the NW extremity of the island, is

precipitous.

5.46 Sverdrup O is a much larger island than Elison O and rises to

a height of 1,290m. It lies with Kap Emory, its low-lying W

extremity, 2.5 miles NE of Kap Salor. The channel between

these two islands is known as Chipp Sund. Numerous coves

indent the shores of Sverdrup O. Markham O, a small island,

lies close off Kap Emory.

5.46 Lemming Fjord is entered between Kap Emory and a point,

1 mile NE. It extends SE almost as far as a small bay located

on the S side of Sverdrup O and nearly separates the SW part

of the island from the larger NE part.

5.46 Blue Kap and Black Kap, the NW extremity of Sverdrup O,

are located 2 miles and 4.5 miles, respectively, NE of Kap

Emory. Linn Bugt, a small bay, indents the coast between

Black Kap and Kap Benet, the N extremity of the island, 2.25

miles NE. 

5.46 Mascart Sund is entered between Kap Benet and Kap Payer,

5 miles NE. It extends SE between Sverdrup O and Nansen

Land and into the W coast of the latter. From the SW side of

the sound, a narrow channel leads S into J. P. Koch Fjord and

separates Sverdrup O from Nansen Land. It provides a connection between the fjord and the Arctic Ocean.

5.47 Peary Land is the extensive region that forms the N

part of Greenland. With its mostly indented NW coast, extends

95 miles ENE from Kap Payer (83°08'N., 46°30'W.) to Kap

Morris Jesup. Numerous icecaps are located inland, but there

are also large ice-free areas and large valleys.

5.47 Nansen Land, the W part of Peary Land, is a large irregular

projection of the mainland which lies between J. P. Koch Fjord,

to the SW, and DeLong Fjord, to the NE. Four islands lie close

off its seaward face, which extends 22 miles ENE from Kap

Payer to Kap Mohn. The edge of the Lincoln Sea pack ice lies

close up to the outer projection of the coast, within which the

land slopes up evenly and is very fertile.

5.47 Distant Cape (83°10'N., 46°05'W.), located 1.5 miles NE of

Kap Payer, is the N extremity of a high promontory which

forms the E shore of the outer part of Mascart Sund.

5.47 Jewell Fjord is entered 4 miles E of Distant Cape, between

Low Pynt and a rounded projection, 4 miles farther NE. Three

glaciers terminate at its head.

5.47 Gardiner Fjord, short and irregular, is entered close NE of

Jewell Fjord. Islands lie close off each of the entrance points

which are located 1 mile apart. The southwesternmost island,

825m high, lies with its SW extremity located 10 miles ENE of

Kap Payer. The channel lying between the two islands is the

widest opening leading into the fjord.

5.48 Kap Mohn (83°17'N., 43°24'W.) is the N extremity

of an island which is located on the W side of the entrance to

De Long Fjord. Kap Hommock, the E entrance point of De

Long Fjord, lies 11 miles ENE of Kap Mohn and is the NW

extremity of Hazen Land, a long narrow island which bounds

the E side of the fjord. Nansen Land forms the W side of the

fjord. From its entrance, in which lie several islands, De Long

Fjord branches into three arms named from W: Thomas

Thomsens Fjord, Adolf Jensen Fjord, and O.B. Bogild Fjord.

5.48 Thomas Thomsens Fjord, entered 7 miles SSE of Kap Mohn,

is formed between Nansen Land and a long narrow island

which, in turn, forms the W side of Adolf Jensen Fjord. The

two fjords join S of the island and Adolf Jensen Fjord continues SE into Peary Land, terminating in Tjalfes Gletscher, a

large glacier.

5.48 O.B. Bogild Fjord is entered through Wild Sund, the channel

which separates Inge O, a small island fronting the entrance to

Adolf Jensen Fjord, from Hazen Land. The fjord is formed

between the W coast of Hazen Land and an island which, in

turn, forms the E side of Adolf Jensen Fjord. To the S of this

island, the two fjords join and O.B. Bogild Fjord continues E

into Peary Land.

5.48 Weyprecht Fjord is entered between Kap Hommock

(83°22'N., 41°31'W.) and Kap Christiansen, the NW extremity

of Lockwood O, 6 miles NE. The fjord is bounded to the E by

the W coast of Lockwood O, which rises to a height of 760m,

and the W coast of Amundsen Land. It is bounded to the W by

Hazen Land. At its inner end, off the SE end of Hazen Land,

the fjord joins with Harders Fjord, which extends E into

Amundsen Land and merges into a glacier. An island lying at

the junction of the two fjords almost fills the entrance to Harders Fjord.

5.48 Conger Sund is entered between Kap Christiansen and Kap

Kane, 4 miles NE. It separates Lockwood O from Amundsen

Land and joins with Weyprecht Fjord, S of the island.

5.48 Amundsen Land forms the N part of Peary Land. From Kap

Kane (83°27'N., 38°55'W.), the N coast extends 42 miles ENE

to Kap Morris Jesup. Many promontories, separated by inlets
96 Sector 5. Greenland—West Coast—Baffin Bay to the Lincoln Sea 

Pub. 181

or fjords, project from this irregular stretch of coast, which is

backed by the Roosevelt Range, with peaks rising to 2,000m.

5.48 Hunt Fjord is entered between a point, located 1 mile E of

Kap Kane, and Kap Robert Lincoln, 5 miles ENE. Both entrance points are ice-free, but otherwise the shores of the fjord

are ice-covered, except for a few protruding mountains.

Thomas Gletscher, a large glacier, enters the head of the fjord.

5.49 Kap Washington (83°31'N., 38°50'W.), 885m high,

is located 9 miles ENE of Kap Kane. 

5.49 Benedict Fjord lies close E of Hunt Fjord and is entered

between Kap Washington and Kap Cannon, 5 miles ENE. It

extends SE for 8 miles to the face of Harmsworth Gletscher, a

glacier that occupies the innermost part of the fjord. A small

branch extends S for about 3 miles from the SW side of the

fjord and almost the whole of its E shore is formed by a glacier.

5.49 Gertrude Rask Land is a promontory lying between Benedict

Fjord and an unnamed fjord, 16 miles ENE. Most of it is occupied by glaciers, but a number of mountain peaks rise above

the ice. It is reported that there are four separate glaciers on the

N coast of Gertrude Rask Land; however, only three of them

descend to the sea. The glacier located immediately E of Kap

Cannon, the NW extremity of the promontory, is the only one

on the NW coast of Peary Land that discharges icebergs.

5.49 Kap Christian IV, located 30 miles ENE of Kap Kane, is the

N extremity of a small projection that forms the W side of the

above unnamed fjord. From Kap Christian IV, the coast trends

ESE for 3 miles to Kap Hans Egede, the W entrance point of

Sands Fjord. This fjord extends S for about 4 miles facing the

MacMillan Gletscher and the mountains, rising to heights of

800m on their sides.

5.49 Kap Morris Jesup (83°40'N., 33°24'W.), a small projection,

is the N extremity of Greenland.

5.49 To the N of the cape, pack ice, up to 16m high, with snowcovered crevasses and narrow passages, has been observed in

May with, farther to seaward, indications of open leads. Open

water has also been seen during this month a few miles

offshore, E of the cape.
6. 

Greenland—Southeast Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Scoresby Sund

6.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 6 — CHART INFORMATION
99

Pub. 181

SECTOR 6 

GREENLAND—SOUTHEAST COAST—PRINS CHRISTIAN SUND TO SCORESBY SUND

6.0 Plan.—This sector describes the SE coast of Greenland from

the N entrance point of Prins Christian Sund to the S entrance

point of Scoresby Sund. The coastline between the two sounds

trends in a NE direction. 

General Remarks

6.1 Between Prins Christian Sund and Tasiilaq (Ammassalik or Angmagssalik), the principal settlement of East Greenland, the coast trends NNE for about 375 miles and is known as

Kong Frederik den VI Kyst. This stretch of coast is characterized by numerous short fjords and small islands. A narrow belt

of ice-free land extends along it, to the W of which rises the Inland Icecap. It is often difficult to approach the coast because

of the movement of pack ice in the area. The ice limit varies

from season to season and from year to year. 

6.1 From Tasiilaq (Ammassalik), a stretch of coast, known as

Kong Christian den IX Land, trends NE for about 450 miles to

Scoresby Sund and fronts the Denmark Strait. In its first section, between Tasiilaq (Ammassalik) and the great ice fjord

Kangerdlugssuak, numerous and widely ramified fjords cut

deeply into the land, producing a maze of peninsulas and islands, separated by narrow channels. In the section NE of

Kangerdlugssuak, the coast is formed by an alternation of steep

promontories and fjords, the interiors of many of which are

reached by productive glaciers that flow down from the Inland

Ice Cap. Here rises Gunnbjorns Fjeld, the highest peak in all of

Greenland. Finally, there is a section called the Blosseville

Coast; this is an area lying S of Scoresby Sund, where the Inland Ice Cap generally comes down to the shore. The coast in

this area is only slightly indented and there are only a few offlying islands.

6.1 To the NE of Tasiilaq (Ammassalik), the pack ice generally

lies farther offshore than it does to the S. Additional dangers to

navigation are present here due to the large numbers of icebergs that are discharged from the fjords. The Blosseville

Coast portion of the coast is one of the most difficult regions of

Greenland to approach from seaward, for the pack ice tends to

set against the shore, and further hindrance is caused by strong

currents. 

6.1 Winds—Weather.—The wind force is highest in winter and

lowest in summer. Winds are also stronger over sea areas than

along the coasts where there are topographic interferences.

This is especially true in Greenland. The wind is also closely

related to the distribution of atmospheric pressure and the

movement of cyclones. In this region of marked cyclonic activity, the winds are strong and changeable, especially during the

colder months. The winds at points located to the N of the

paths of cyclones will mainly increase from an E direction and

then back through N to W as the storm progresses. Similarly,

points to the S of the storm track will experience SE winds that

will shift to SW or W as the storm moves E in accordance with

Ballots Law. For this reason, winds over the ocean between latitudes 50° and 60°N prevail from a WSW direction, while between latitudes 60° and 65°N prevailing directions are more

variable. To the N of latitude 65°N, all months show prevailing

wind directions to be E or N.

6.1 During the winter, widespread gale force winds occur on

about two days out of every three over the open ocean areas

SW of Iceland. The most violent winds known in this region

are the well-developed “foehn” winds that sweep down from

the Greenland Ice Cap and may, at times, attain velocities of

over 100 knots in favorably situated exposures along the E

coast.

6.1 During the summer months (June through August), gales are

at a minimum, observations throughout the ocean area record

less than 7 per cent. They increase in September with the greater cyclonic activity and average between 8 and 11 per cent of

the observations. Gales occur in the strait between Greenland

and Iceland with the most frequent occurrences in January.

These gales sometimes exceed 3 day’s duration with local

winds reaching hurricane force.

Prins Christian Sund to Danells Fjord

6.2 Toqulineq (60°05'N., 43°06'W.), a large islet, lies 2

miles NE of the N entrance point of Prins Christian Sund. This

islet is reddish brown in color and one of the largest in a chain

that extends from the coast.

6.2 Kekertatsiak (Qeqertarsuaq), a much indented island, 524m

high, fills the greater part of a large bay, which is entered between a point located 3 miles NNW of Toqulineq and Kap Ivar

Huitfeldt, 8 miles NNE. Aluk, a dark brown islet, 459m high,

lies close SE of Kekertatsiak (Qeqertarsuaq). 

6.2 Kap Ivar Huitfeldt, 398m high, is located 6 miles N of Aluk.

It is a precipitous, pyramidal headland of blackish appearance

with slanting yellowish strata. The mountains rising to the S of

this cape are reported to be the color of copper.

6.2 Kanajormiut, lying 6 miles N of Kap Ivar Huitfeldt, is an island, 311m high, with a double summit. Several islets lie close

off its N end and submerged rocks lie within 1.25 miles N and

NW of them.

6.2 Dronning Louise O (60°21'N., 43°15'W.), separated from

Kanajormiut by a narrow channel, is actually a peninsula, on

which three peaks stand; the W and highest peak rises to a

height of 781m. An expedition reported that several harbors,

suitable for ocean-going vessels, were located NW of the peninsula. These harbors were observed to be ice-free from the 10

to 15 July 1932, a time when there was much ice in Lindenow

Fjord and off the coast.

6.2 Lindenow Fjord (60°27'N., 43°17'W.) is entered between

an islet, lying 1.25 miles NNW of Dronning Louise O, and the

SE extremity of Nanuseq, a peninsula. It extends in a WNW direction for about 30 miles and, from a width of 2 miles at the

entrance, narrows to about 1.5 miles near the head. About midway within the fjord, arms branch N and S. Nanuseq, an islet

670m high, lies close off the N entrance point. A small islet
100 Sector 6. Greenland—Southeast Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Scoresby Sund 

Pub. 181

and an area of foul ground lie on the N side of the approach,

about 2 miles SE of Nanuseq.

6.2 Peersvig, on the N shore of the fjord, 7 miles within its entrance, is the site of a former Eskimo settlement. 

6.2 Ice.—The time of arrival off the fjord of pack ice from the N,

following the ice-free period in the autumn, varies from year to

year, but observations over a period of 16 years give a mean

date of 25 January with the ice normally remaining until midJuly.

6.3 Nanuseq Fjord (60°29'N., 43°13'W.), formerly

known as Oyfjord, is entered between Nanusaq, the peninsula,

and the S side of Angnikitsoq (Anikitok), a projection located

1.5 miles NE. It extends NW for 7.5 miles with irregular depths

but no known dangers. Two small rocky islets lie close within

the entrance to the fjord and an island lies in mid-channel,

about 2 miles NW of them. A small bay located near the S entrance point of the fjord affords anchorage to vessels with local

knowledge.

6.3 Torgilsbu (60°33'N., 43°13'W.), a former meteorological

station, is situated on the N part of the head of the fjord. Vessels can anchor, in a depth of 35m, stiff mud, about 275m off

the station site. 

6.3 Nagtoralik (Nattoralik) Fjord, an inlet with islets and rocks encumbering the entrance, lies 3.5 miles N of Nanuseq and extends

4 miles W. 

6.3 Kap Walloe, 310m high, is located 4.5 miles ENE of the N

entrance point of Nagtoralik Fjord. A trapper’s hut is reported

to stand on the S side of this cape.

6.3 Kangerdluaraq Fjord, entered on the N side of Kap Walloe,

is narrow and extends W for 11 miles. It is surrounded by high

mountains.

6.3 Kutseq Fjord, entered 8 miles NNE of Kap Walloe, extends

SW for 6 miles and then WNW for 10 miles. Kutseq

(60°41'N., 42°47'W.), an islet, is the largest of a group which

extends 1 mile NE from Ingerdlarsiutit (Ingerlaarsiutit), the extremity of a long and narrow peninsula forming the S side of

the fjord. 

6.3 Patussoq (Patursok), a fjord, is entered 5 miles N of Kutseq

and extends 12 miles WNW. Two rocks, awash, lie in the entrance. Qasingortoq, 355m high, is the extremity of a promontory that forms the N side of the fjord. The surrounding land in

this area is covered by glaciers that reach down to the sea; however, in some parts, solitary black mountains (nunataks) show

above the ice.

6.3 Kap Discord, located 12 miles NNE of Kutseq, rises to a

height of 430m and forms the E extremity of Iluileq, an island,

which extends 10 miles W and lies in the entrance to Danells

Fjord. This island has rugged cliffs and attains a height of

829m. Ivingmiut, a group of islets and rocks, lies close off the

S extremity of Iluileq, 4 miles SW of Kap Discord.

6.3 Danells Fjord (60°51'N., 43°09'W.) extends in a WNW direction for 27 miles to its head. The fjord is about 2 miles wide

throughout most of its length, but the inner part is nearly always blocked by ice, making it difficult to reach the head by

boat.

Danells Fjord to Tingmiarmiut Fjord

6.4 Umanarssuaq (Umanarsuk) (60°56'N., 42°38'W.), an

islet 153m high, lies 4.5 miles N of Kap Discord. An unnamed

islet lies W of it and is located on an area of foul ground which

extends up to 2 miles seaward.

6.4 Kangerdluk, a short fjord 2 miles wide, is entered 3 miles W

of Umanarssuaq and extends 4 miles NNW. Several glaciers

project into the interior of this fjord and are backed by a chain

of high mountains over 1,400m displaying purple and blue

strata. 

6.4 Nuk, a small cove, is located on the mainland, 1 mile N of

the NE entrance point of Kangerdluk. Serkertnua, 1.5 miles

farther N, is reported to be the only place in this vicinity where

boats can be hauled up on the beach. The rocks in the vicinity

are reported to contain an intensified geomagnetic field.

6.4 Kangerdluluk (Kangerluluk) (61°05'N., 43°08'W.), a fjord,

is entered between Qeqertatsiaq (Qajartalik), an islet lying 3

miles N of Nuk, and Kap Olfert Fischer, 3 miles N. It extends

24 miles WNW, but at times is blocked by ice. High mountains,

rising to heights of 1,615m, stand along its S shore and head. 

6.4 Igutsait Fjord (Igutsaat Fjord), entered between Kap Olfert Fischer and Kap Herluf Trolle, 7 miles NNE, is similar to Kangerdluluk but shorter. Umanarssuk, a lofty islet, lies in the S part of the

entrance to this fjord, 2 miles N of the S entrance point. Numerous

islets and rocks fringe the outer part of the N shore of the fjord. It

is reported that several ruins of Eskimo houses can be seen on fairly fertile land on the shores within the fjord. Kap Herluf Trolle,

580m high, is reported to be very steep and prominent.

6.4 Taterat (61°14'N., 42°38'W.), an ancient site near Taateraat

Nuuat, a cape, is located 4.5 miles NW of Kap Herluf Trolle. A

large grotto, into which the sea flows, lies near this point.

6.4 Avarqqat Kangerlua Fjord (Puiagtoq Fjord) (61°17'N.,

42°55'W.) is entered between Taterat and Karrat Pynt, a point

2.75 miles N. An arm of the fjord, entered 2 miles W of Taterat, extends 4 miles WSW. Two islets, fringed by rocks, lie in

the approach to the fjord, 4 miles SE of Karrat. 

6.5 Kap Tordenskjold (61°25'N., 42°22'W.), 658m high,

is one of the best landmarks on this coast. The cape consists of

two peaks separated by a deep cleft. The inner and highest peak

has a round summit covered with ice; the outer peak is black

with a flat top. It was reported that there is a sheltered boat harbor with a narrow entrance, on the NE side of the cape. Two

small islands are reported to lie 0.5 mile SSE of Kap Tordenskjold.

6.5 Nuk (61°28'N., 42°19'W.), located 4.5 miles N of Kap

Tordenskjold, is the NE extremity of a narrow peninsula. Anoritup Kangerlua (Anoritoq), a fjord entered N of Nuk, extends

W for 16 miles. Several deep bays are located on the S side of

this fjord, near the entrance; a number of glaciers are located at

the head. Several high peaks stand in the vicinity of the head

and rise to heights of 1,340m.

6.5 Qutdleq (Kutdlek) (61°31'N., 42°13'W.), an island, 451m

high, lies 5 miles NE of Nuk, on the N side of the approach to

Anoritup Kangerlua. The former site of a Loran station stands

on its SE end. A large bay, which is usually ice-free, is located

on the SW side of this island and forms a sheltered harbor. Vessels, with local knowledge, can anchor within this harbor and

secure sternlines to the shore. The bay provides shelter from all

winds except from S. Four beacons standing on the shores of

the bay assist entry and indicate the anchorage berth. A 5.5m

shoal patch is reported to lie in the middle of the entrance to
Sector 6. Greenland—Southeast Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Scoresby Sund 101

Pub. 181

the bay and an 8m shoal patch is reported to lie 2.5 miles ESE

of the S end of the island.

6.5 Napassorssuaq Fjord (61°42'N., 42°30'W.) is entered between a point, 10 miles N of Qutdleq, and Kap Daniel Rantzau,

5.5 miles NE. It extends W and NW for 18 miles. Between the

entrance of Anoritup Kangerlua and this fjord, the coast is very

irregular and indented by four inlets. Qeqertarssuit, a group of

three islands, lies N of Qutdleq and fronts these inlets.

6.5 Kap Daniel Rantzau, 461m high, is a precipitous headland,

under which, at times, the ice becomes closely packed. The

cape forms the SE extremity of an irregular island that extends

6.5 miles N; Tunua, a narrow strait, separates this island from

the mainland. Kusanartoq, 1 mile within the S entrance of this

strait, affords sheltered anchorage, in a depth of 13m, mud, to

vessels with local knowledge. The approach has a least depth

of 13m, but shoals are reported to lie in the entrance. The N entrance to the strait has not been examined and should not be

used.

6.5 Kap Cort Adelaer (61°50'N., 42°05'W.), 707m high, lies

2.75 miles NNE of Kap Daniel Rantzau. Umanarssuk, an islet,

lies close E of this cape. A harbor, located on the S side of a

bay which indents the coast between Kap Daniel Rantzau and

Kap Cort Adelaer, is reported to be well-sheltered and frequently ice-free; however, it is subject to occasional heavy

swells.

Sermip Nua, 6 miles NW of Kap Cort Adelaer, is the NW

entrance point of Tunua, and the S entrance point of Puisortup

Kangerlua, a fjord which extends W for 4 miles. Several small

islets lie close N of Sermip Nua.

6.5 Puisortup, a glacier, extends along the coast between 3 and 6

miles NE of Sermip Nua. It is considered dangerous to approach closely, on account of its frequent calving, but, at times,

the only passage along the coast is close to its foot. It rises vertically from the sea to a height of about 180m and then unites

with the glaciers which cover the high land above.

6.6 Kap Steen Bille (62°01'N., 42°05'W.), a yellowish

and rocky projection, 640m high, lies 12 miles N of Kap Cort

Adelaer.

6.6 Otto Rud Oer, an island, is located 4 miles NNW of Kap

Steen Bille and mostly covered with ice. It was reported that

the channel between this island and the mainland is still

blocked by winter ice at the end of June.

6.6 Ingerqajorpik (Inqeqqajarpik), located 3 miles NNW of the

N end of Otto Rud Oer, is a cleft in the rocky coast where there

is just enough room to haul up boats. The coast extending S of

this cleft is low, with the snow and ice of the glaciers coming

right down to sea level in most places. 

6.6 Mogens Heinesen Fjord (62°23'N., 42°30'W.) is entered N

of a point lying 17 miles N of Kap Steen Bille. It extends NW

for 21 miles to some lofty mountains which stand at its head.

Several glaciers discharge into this fjord. Ikermiit (Ikermiut),

an island, 295m high, lies 2.5 miles SE of its S entrance point.

Maligissat, a group of islets, lies midway between Ikermiut and

the mainland. 

6.6 Qasinngortooq (Qasingortoq), located 3 miles NE of the N

entrance point of Mogens Heinesen Fjord, is a low, narrow, and

precipitous point, bare of snow. Nagtoralik (Qasingortup Ingmikortukaja), lying close N of this point, is an island of a dark

or blackish aspect that rises to a height of 529m. It is reported

that the narrow channel lying between this island and the mainland affords good shelter. 

6.7 Uvtortiutit (Uttorsiutit) (62°30'N., 42°09'W.), an island, 643m high at its SE end, lies with its S extremity located

2.75 miles N of Nagtoralik. Qasingortup Kangerdlua, a fjord, is

approached between these two islands and extends W and NW

for 12 miles. Inlets indent the N and E coasts of Uvtortiutit and

anchorage is obtainable, with local knowledge, at their heads.

The approach through the N inlet has a least depth of 10m

while the approach through the E inlet has a least depth of

12m; the latter inlet is normally used. Vessels have taken anchorage in a bay located close N of the SW extremity of Uvtortiutit, off some islets near its S shore. 

6.7 Tingmiarmiut Fjord (62°39'N., 42°43'W.) is entered between the N end of Uvtortiutit and Auluik, an island 220m

high, lying 4 miles N. The fjord extends WNW for 27 miles between high mountains and several islands lie within it. Its inner

part narrows and is often blocked by icebergs which are discharged from the glaciers at the head. Tingmiarmit, a large island on the N side of the outer part of the fjord, is 12 miles

wide and rises to a height over 1,200m. A number of islets lie

off its S side. Anchorage is reported to be obtained W of the islet in a depth of 18m at the settlement.

6.7 Tingmiarmit Turnorqutaria (Ikerasak) is the channel separating Tingmiarmit Island from the mainland N of it. Kamoen, a

small and precipitous island 680m high, lies close N of the E

end of Tingmiarmit. It was reported that vessels can anchor in a

well-sheltered cove located at the W end of the channel.

Tingmiarmiut Fjord to Kap Moltke

6.8 Griffenfeld O (62°58'N., 41°30'W.), located 11 miles

NE of Kamoen, is a deeply indented island. Three prominent

peaks, the highest rising to a height of 701m, stand on it. Several islets lie close off the S extremity of the island and several

more lie between this point and Kamoen. It was reported that

there was a good roadstead, free of ice and swell, located within a long and narrow fjord which indents the S end of the island.

6.8 The channel separating Griffenfeld O from the mainland is

bounded on either side by lofty mountains. It is reported to be

deep and free of dangers; a passage through is possible when

the state of the ice permits.

Sehested Fjord
102 Sector 6. Greenland—Southeast Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Scoresby Sund 

Pub. 181

6.8 Sehested Fjord is entered between Griffenfeld O and Uiivaq,

a large island 2 miles N. It extends 23 miles NW and has several branches. Mountains, rising to heights of 2,070m, stand at

the head. Rans Sund, a narrow inlet, lies on the N side of this

fjord 7 miles within the entrance. It is reported to afford good

anchorage for small craft. Annat Fjord, an inlet, is located on

the N side of the fjord 14 miles within the entrance. It is also

reported to afford sheltered anchorage for small craft.

6.8 Skjoldungen (63°20'N., 41°30'W.), a large island over

1,500m high in its NW part, stretches 27 miles in a NE/SW direction. It is separated from the mainland by Sonder Skjoldungesund (Inugsuarmiut), to the SW, and Nordre Skjoldungesund, to the NE. Kap Niels Juel, the SE extremity of the

island, is a narrow rocky point, reddish-brown in color. 

6.8 Kap Skjold (63°07'N., 41°12'W.) is the extremity of a

promontory located 4.5 miles NE of Uiivaq.

6.8 Sonder Skjoldungesund is entered between Kap Skjold and

Kap Niels Juel. A submerged rock, position doubtful, lies in

the entrance to the sound, about 3.5 miles NNW of Kap Skjold.

Caroline Amalies Havn lies on the SW shore of the sound, 6

miles within its entrance. It is a small but excellent harbor with

depths of 5.5 to 9m, sand. The entrance is protected by a barrier of rocks and islets.

6.8 Halvdans Fjord (63°14'N., 41°20'W.) is located on the N

side of Sonder Skjoldungesund, 7 miles W of Kap Niels Juel. It

is a sheltered harbor that is accessible as a refuge for fairly

large vessels. From its entrance, the fjord extends 2 miles N,

then turns W and opens into a broad basin in which there are

depths of 18 to 64m, soft bottom. A small low island lies close

within the entrance and may be passed on either side, but the

channel to the W of the island is preferable.

6.8 Norre Skjoldungesund, the channel on the NE side of Skjoldungen Island, separates the island from the Langenaes Peninsula. Morkensund, connecting the heads of Sonder Skjoldungesund and Norre Skjoldungesund, is a narrow but deep

channel, 4 miles long.

6.9 Graah Fjord (63°24'N., 41°17'W.) is entered between Kap Langenaes and Imaarsivik, an island, 300m high,

2.25 miles NE. Graahs Havn, a good but small harbor, lies on

the W side of this island and is formed by a deep and narrow

inlet leading into an inner basin.

6.9 Finnsbu, the site of a former temporary meteorological radio

station, is situated on the SW shore of the fjord, 7 miles NW of

Kap Langenaes.

6.9 Jaettefjorden, located 8 miles within the entrance, is a branch

of Graah Fjord that extends 11 miles NNW. The main fjord extends 12 miles NW and branches into two arms at its head.

Lommen, a group of islets, lies in mid-channel within the N

arm.

6.9 Good anchorage for ocean-going vessels was reported to be

obtained N of Lommen in a basin at the head of that branch.

6.9 Kangerdlikajik (Ilertakajik) (63°27'N., 41°09'W.) is located

3.5 miles E of Jaettefjorden and extends W and NW for 14

miles to the foot of a glacier. The shores of this fjord are

backed by steep mountains which attain heights up to 1,590m

near the head. Several islands and islets lie off the entrance to

the fjord and can best be seen on the chart.

6.9 Kap Moltke (63°29'N., 40°47'W.) is located 20 miles NNE

of Kap Niels Juel. This cape is reddish-brown in color and consists of high cliffs up to 460m high. It is the SE extremity of a

mainland promontory.

Kap Moltke to Dannebrogs O

6.10 Sattiaatteq (Sagiarusek) (63°38'N., 40°37'W.), an island located on the S side of the entrance to Bernstorff Isfjord,

lies 9 miles NNE of Kap Moltke. A small inlet, with a meadow

and a stream at its head, lies on the S side of this island. 

6.10 Bernstorff Isfjord is entered between Sattiaatteq and Kap

Mosting, 3 miles NE. It extends WNW for about 30 miles and

is usually, if not always, blocked by heavy ice. It is reported

that a bank of icebergs usually lies off the entrance and navigation is especially hazardous in the approaches to the fjord, as a

rapid current sets out of it, causing numerous eddies and whirlpools inside the bank of icebergs.

6.10 Kap Mosting (63°41'N., 40°30'W.), a precipitous and prominent headland, rises to a height of 475m. From this point, the

bold and steep coast, covered with glaciers that protrude into

the sea at every cleft or ravine, trends in a N direction for 14

miles, to a position at the S entrance point of Otte Krumpen

Fjord. Taterakajik, an island fringed by islets and rocks, lies

close inshore, 8 miles N of Kap Mosting. 

6.10 Otte Krumpen Fjord (63°57'N., 40°40'W.) extends 5 miles

W. Its S entrance point is fronted by a group of islets and rocks.

Pingasukasit (Pingasikkajiit), its N entrance point, is a bold

projection that extends SE and rises to a height of 584m. Tingmiartalik is the largest of a group of islets that lies close inshore N of Pingasukasit (Pingasikkajiit). 

6.11 Gyldenlove Fjord (64°10'N., 41°00'W.) lies between

the N side of Colberger Heide and the S side of Upernarsuak

(Upernattivik), 2 miles N. Upernarsuak was formerly believed

to be a large island and is shown as such on present charts.

However, it was reported (1931) to be a peninsula which extended NE from the mainland W of Colberger Heide; consequently Gyldenlove Fjord is probably much shorter than

charted. Pikitse, an islet close SE of Uppernattivik, rises to

about 50m. 

6.11 Umiivik, a large indentation in which lie several islands and

intricate channels, is located between Upernarsuak and a mainland promontory, 6 miles NE.

6.11 The region around Umiivik and Gyldenlove Fjord is called

the Umiivik area and it is different from many of the fjord systems of East Greenland. In this unique region, the inland ice

cap comes down to the shore in smooth, even waves, with only

occasional glimpses of bare rock.

6.11 Umiiviitaa (64°20'N., 40°12'W.) is the NE islet of a group

of islets, islands, and rocks. Gerners O, the largest island of the

group, lies 1.5 miles W of Umiiviitaa and attains a height of

369m; a cairn stands on its summit. Ikasartik, the narrow channel between Gerners O and the mainland, is foul at its SW entrance, but was reported to afford sheltered anchorage at its NE

entrance.

6.12 Kiataq (64°22'N., 40°32'W.), 766m high, stands on a

small promontory and is reported to be the most distinctive

peak in this vicinity. It has a large red streak stretching from its

summit to the water’s edge. Ruins of a settlement are reported

to lie at its foot.
Sector 6. Greenland—Southeast Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Scoresby Sund 103

Pub. 181

6.12 Nansens Bugt, an inlet located at the head of Umiivik, extends 9 miles W from Kiataq between the mainland and Nunarssuaq, an island on which stands the sites of former Eskimo

settlements. Torssukatak, a narrow channel, leads W between

Nunarssuaq and Upernarsuak to Sverdrups Sund, a wide basin

that extends 15 miles W and contains one or more large islands.

6.13 Kap Poul Lovenorn (64°28'N., 40°09'W.), a bare

point which projects from a precipitous headland 280m high, is

light colored and intersected by black strata. It forms the SE

extremity of Jens Munks O, a long and narrow island, which is

separated from the mainland by Kagssortoq (Kattertooq), a

channel 25 miles long and from 0.5 to 4 miles wide. Anikitsek,

a mountain 1,235m high, stands 17 miles NW of the cape.

6.13 Pamiagdlussaq, located 9 miles NNW of Kap Poul Lovenorn, is the N entrance point of Peder Oxe Bugt, a wide bay

that indents the E coast of Jens Munks O. Pros Munds O is the

largest of a group of islands which lie in the middle of the entrance to this bay. Ilipigtivaq, a group of islands fronted by

above and below-water rocks, lies 2.5 miles NE of Pamiagdlussaq. 

6.13 Kap Torfaeus (64°42'N., 40°24'W.), located 7 miles N of

Pamiagdlussaq, is the N entrance point of Lemon Bugt, a wide

bay somewhat similar to Peder Oxe Bugt. Two islets lie close E

of the point. 

6.13 Ikermit (Ikermiit) (64°49'N., 40°17'W.) is the largest of a

group of islands which lie 5 miles NE of Kap Torfaeus and 4

miles ESE of Upernagssivik, an indentation in the coast.

6.13 Koge Bugt, a large bay, is entered between Putugua, an island lying 6 miles NW of Ikermit (Ikermiit), and Ole Romer O,

5 miles NNE. The head of this bay is surrounded by lofty

mountains, which are usually bare of snow, and indented by a

number of inlets and coves. 

6.13 Comanche Bugt (Igtip Kangertiva) (65°02'N., 40°18'W.),

entered between Ole Romers O and Aqitseq, 5 miles E, is a

narrow inlet. It extends 8 miles NNW and the shores are surrounded by a strip of ice-free land. 

6.13 A hunting station is reported to be situated on the shore of a

small cove on the E side of the inlet, 6 miles N of the E extremity of Ole Romers O. Vessels can anchor in this cove, in a depth

of 46m, with a beacon, standing on the S side, bearing 106°

and another beacon, standing on the N side, bearing 060°. Vessels can also anchor, in a depth of 66m, with the beacon, standing on the S side, bearing 075° and the beacon, standing on the

N side, bearing 021°.

6.13 The W shore of Comanche Bugt (Igtip Kangertiva) is fringed

by a number of low islets. Vessels should not attempt to navigate this inlet without local knowledge. 

6.14 Graah Oer (65°09'N., 39°39'W.) is a maze of islands

and islets which fringe the coast of the mainland between Ole

Romer O and Dannebrogs O, 30 miles NE. They can best be

seen on the chart. 

6.14 Qertartip Saliaqita (65°00'N., 39°50'W.), surrounded by

numerous smaller islands and islets, is the largest island in the

S part of Graah Oer. 

6.14 Hornemann O, an island, 350m high, lies 10 miles NNE of

Saliaqita. Vessels with local knowledge may anchor, in a depth

of 10m, near the head of a sheltered inlet located on the W side

of this island. Vahls O, 152m high, and Vend Om, 103m high,

are islands lying 2 miles E and 2.5 miles NE, respectively, of

Hornemann O. 

6.14 Kap Gudbrand Torlaksen (65°15'N., 39°41'W.) is the E extremity of a mainland promontory. The cape is prominent and

Tornartik (Toornaartik), a mountain, rises to a height of 400m

close within it. 

6.14 Dannebrogs O (65°18'N., 39°34'W.), over 400m high, lies 4

miles NNE of Kap Gudbrand Torlaksen and is the largest island of the Graah Oer group. It is of irregular shape, with two

projecting peninsulas on its E side; a cairn stands, at a height of

217m, on the N peninsula and an islet lies 1.25 miles SE of the

S peninsula. An excellent boat harbor is reported to be located

halfway along the SW side of the island. 

Dannebrogs O to Amassalik

6.15 Ikertivaq (Ikerssuaq) (65°30'N., 39°38'W.) is approached between Dannebrogs O and Sunnikajik, 9.5 miles

NE. This fjord extends 10 miles NW and its head is divided into several inlets by irregular promontories. Ikertivaq has been

described as the most dangerous fjord in the S part of East

Greenland because many large icebergs, which ground at its

entrance, form a barrier and keep the calf ice, discharged from

the glaciers, inside the fjord.

6.15 Sunnikajik (Sujunikajik), an island, 222m high, is fringed on

the E side by numerous rocky islets.

6.15 Isertup Kangertiva (Ugssugtussoq) (65°38'N., 39°07'W.) is

entered between Akiliaitseq, a promontory, and an unnamed

peninsula, 3 miles ESE. This fjord extends 12 miles NNW.

Igssalik, an islet 51m high, is separated from the E entrance

point by Isertoq, a narrow channel encumbered by small islets

and rocks.

6.15 Kitak (65°32'N., 38°45'W.), an island, 200m high, is the

largest and easternmost island of an archipelago which extends

8 miles E from the E side of Igssalik and is separated from the

mainland by narrow channels. Ikasartik, a channel, lies between the NW side of Kitak and the mainland. An indentation

located in the NW side of Kitak is reported to provide a sheltered anchorage suitable for ocean-going vessels.

6.15 Orssuiagssuak (Orssuiagssuaq), the S island of the archipelago, lies close off the SW extremity of Kitak. It is the former

site of a Loran station.

6.15 Nuukajik (65°33'N., 38°33'W.), the S extremity of a promontory, is located 4 miles E of Kitak and rises to a height of

300m. Ise, a small peninsula, is located 4 miles N of it.

6.15 Nattivit (Nagtivit Kangertivat) is entered between Ise and Ingmikerteq, an islet lying close off a mainland promontory, 1.5

miles E. This fjord curves 6 miles W and NW to Bussemandgletscher, a glacier, which slopes gradually from the head upward to the Gronland Icecap. Tasitalik, an inlet, indents the NE

shore of the fjord, 2 miles within the entrance, and extends

2.25 miles N to the foot of Sulugssut, a 500m high mountain. 

6.15 Isip Ilua (65°38'N., 38°18'W.), a broad bay, indents the

coast between the extremity of Tungortug, a peninsula 400m

high, and Kap Tycho Brahe, 6 miles ENE. Torssukatak, an inlet

located in the NE corner of the bay, was reported to be ice-free

and apparently suitable as a harbor for ocean-going vessels.

Kap Tycho Brahe is prominent and rises to a height of 990m.
104 Sector 6. Greenland—Southeast Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Scoresby Sund 

Pub. 181

6.15

6.16 Sermilik (Egede og Rothes Fjord) is entered between

Kap Tycho Brahe and Ikateq, 6 miles E. The fjord extends 45

miles NNE and has a width of 3 to 7 miles. It divides into two

branches at the head. 

6.16 On the W side of the fjord between Kap Tycho Brahe and the

S entrance point of Johan Petersens Fjord, 10.5 miles NNE, the

coastline is very irregular, steep, and mountainous.

6.16 Johan Petersen Fjord (65°52'N., 38°15'W.) extends 15

miles NW from its entrance which is 2.25 miles wide. The S

side of Qeertartivatsiaq, a large island, forms the N entrance

point of the fjord. Several glaciers are reported to discharge

icebergs into the inner part. 

6.16 Stoklunds Fjord, entered between the NW side of Qeertartivatsiaq and the mainland, extends 4 miles N between mountains. The N side of Qeertartivatsiaq is separated from the

mainland by a narrow channel which connects Sermilik Fjord

and Stoklunds Fjord.

6.16 Umigtuartivit (65°54'N., 38°00'W.), located 5 miles N of

Johan Petersens Fjord, is the site of an abandoned Eskimo settlement which was situated on a small peninsula. Sukersit, 4.75

miles N of the settlement site, is an islet that lies in the mouth

of a small bay.

6.16 Qipa (66°10'N., 37°50'W.), a point located lies 10 miles N

of Sukersit, is near Igte, the site of a former Eskimo settlement.

6.16 Tasilaq, a broad bay, is entered between Qipa and Akiliaitseq, 1.5 miles NE. It contains several islets and a number of inlets indent the shore. Tasilajik, one of these inlets, extends 1

mile WNW and has been reported to afford shelter for small

craft. Akiliaitseq is the S extremity of a peninsula which separates the N part of Tasilaq from the outer part of Helheimfjord 

6.16 Amanga (66°14'N., 37°36'W.), an islet, 400m high, lies in

mid-channel, 5 miles NE of Akiliaitseq.

6.16 Helheimfjord (66°18'N., 37°42'W.), the W branch of Sermilik, extends 15 miles WNW from the N end of Amanga. It is

about 4 miles wide and a glacier discharges into the head.

6.16 Ikateq (65°38'N., 37°57'W.), the E entrance point of Sermilik, is the largest of a number of islets which lie close off the

SW end of Tasiilaq (Ammassalik). Numerous small islands and

islets lie off the N end of the W side of the point.

6.16 Pupik, a point, is located 8.5 miles N of Ikateq. The coast between is scattered with numerous remains of Eskimo dwellings. Ukiverajik, an islet, lies close inshore, 1 mile S of Pupik.

Sarpaq, an islet, is located 7 miles NNE of Pupik in the entrance to Ikerasagssuaq (Ikasagtivaq). 

6.17 Tiniteqilaaq (65°54'N., 37°48'W.), a mainland peninsula, is located close N of Sarpaq and forms the N entrance

point of Ikerasagssuaq (Ikasagtivaq). An Eskimo settlement is

reported to lie at its S extremity. No local information on the

conditions, harbor approaches, depths, or tidal data is available.

Pikitse, an islet, lies 4 miles NNE of Sarpaq (65°52'N.,

37°47'W.) and contains the ruins of a former Eskimo settlement. It is uncertain whether the local traffic is made through

Ikerasagssuaq (Ikasagtivaq) (65°45'N., 37°35'W.) for a passage

between Tiniteqilaaq and Tasiilaq (Ammassalik). 

6.17 Ivnarssip Kangerdlua, an inlet, is entered 4 miles N of Pikitse. It

indents the coast for 1.5 miles and is reported to be ice-free, easily

accessible, and suitable as a harbor for ocean-going vessels.

6.17 Itterajik (66°04'N., 37°44'W.), a former Eskimo settlement, is

situated on the N side of a bold promontory which rises steeply

from the waters edge to a height of 600m. Another former settlement, also in ruins, lies 2 miles E, at the head of a small inlet.

6.17 Paornakajit (Paarnakagiit), a former settlement, is situated

on a small point, 2 miles NE of Itterajik, which forms the N entrance point of an unnamed bay. This bay, which is 2 miles

wide at its entrance, extends SE for 2 miles and then becomes a

narrow inlet at its head. Nuk, a small projection, is located 5.5

miles NNE of Paornakajit. 

Ammassalik O, a large island, is about 20 miles long, from N

to S, and 16 miles wide, from E to W. The island forms the E

side of the S end of Sermilik. Its N end is separated from the

mainland by Tiniteqilaq and Ikerasagssuaq (Ikasagtivaq), two

channels, and its deeply indented E side is bounded by Tasiilaq

Fjord (Ammassalik Fjord). 

6.18 From Ikateq (65°38'N., 37°57'W.), the coast extends

4 miles SE to Naujatalik, the extremity of a peninsula which

rises to a height of 700m. Manginersiorfik, close SE of Naujatalik, is an islet which, with an unnamed islet, forms the W

entrance point of an unnamed bay extending 2 miles NW between high mountains. Ikateq is fronted by a group of islets

and rocks which can best be seen on the chart. 

6.18 Qasigissat (65°34'N., 37°41'W.), the S extremity of Ammassalik O, forms the W entrance point of a small inlet. Ortunuviaq, 1 mile E, is the steep granite extremity of a peninsula that

forms the E side of this inlet. 

6.19 Tasiilaq (Angmagssalik) (Ammassalik) (65°36'N.,

37°37'W.) is the township in Tasillaq District with the largest

population on the E coast of Greenland. Ammassalik (Tasiilaq)

is located on the S side of Angmagssalik Island. The open season is from the end of July to mid October. The port is closed

in winter 

6.19 Winds—Weather.—The strongest of all the Piteraqen (foehn) blows from NNW at hurricane strength. 

6.19 Fog is mostly predominent over the storis along the outer

coast. Inside the fjord and over the harbor areas, fog covers

during the morning and evening. 

Settlements in the vicinity of Tasiilaq (Ammassalik)
Sector 6. Greenland—Southeast Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Scoresby Sund 105

Pub. 181

6.19 Tides—Currents.—There is a strong, clockwise circulating

current at the entrance, 4 to 5 knots, influenced by a branch of

East Greenland Current. For more information, refer to Pub.

180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean.

6.19 Aspect.—A narrow inlet leads from SW side of Kong Oscar

Havn to a sheltered harbor at Tasiilaq (Ammassalik), entered

during daylight only. 

6.19 Pilotage.—Taking a pilot is not compulsory, but is advisable. An unlicensed pilot is available; arrangements are made

through the Port Operator. The vessel’s ETA should be sent to

port officials 24 hours prior to arrival.

6.19 Anchorage—Contact port officials for permission to anchor.

6.20 Kong Oscar Havn (65°37'N., 37°37'W.), an almost

landlocked inlet, indents the S shore of Ammassalik O. It is entered through a channel, about 0.5 mile wide, and forms a harbor which can accommodate vessels of practically any size and

draft. Tasiilaq (Ammassalik) stands on the SW shore of the inlet.

6.20 Ice.—Tasiilaq (Ammassalik) and Kong Oscar Havn are usually ice-free from early August to early November. During a

good season, this part of the coast may be accessible as early as

the beginning of June and as late as early December, but in a

bad year, the area may only be accessible from early September to early November. Offshore winds often open up leads,

sometimes several miles in width, but these leads quickly close

up when the normal NE winds become reestablished. 

6.20 Tasilap Nua (65°35'N., 37°34'W.), from which a light is

shown, is the E entrance point of the harbor. Shoal patches,

with depths of 5m and 6m, lie 0.75 mile SE and 0.25 mile S,

respectively, of the point. Solos Pynt, a small projection, lies

on the W side of the entrance 1 mile NNW of Tasilap Nua. It is

fronted by a bank with depths of less than 20m, which extends

up to 30m E. Elsewhere the depths in the channel are deep.

6.20 From Solos Pynt, the harbor widens and extends for 2 miles

in a general NW direction to Kap Horring (65°38'N.,

37°38'W.), the S extremity of a narrow peninsula which divides the head of the harbor into two branches. Fugleoerne, a

group of islets and rocks, lies close SE of Kap Horring and partially restricts the entrances of both of these branches. 

6.20 Tasiilaq (Ammassalik) stands on the shores of a small cove

located 0.75 mile NW of Solos Pynt. A flagstaff and several radio masts standing near the settlement are conspicuous.

6.20 Olieoen, an islet connected to the mainland by a causeway,

Tasiilaq (Ammassalik)

Tasiilaq (Ammassalik) 

Courtesy of Tom Nyman - Fin

Tasiilaq (Ammassalik)

Tasiilaq (Ammassalik) 
106 Sector 6. Greenland—Southeast Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Scoresby Sund 

Pub. 181

lies in the entrance to the cove; the small harbor is sheltered

and working cargo is easy except at low water when the inner

part of the cove dries. A wharf is situated on the SE side of

Olieoen; it is 30m long, with a depth of 8.7m alongside. Vessels generally berth alongside, bows NE, with two anchors

down. Local knowledge is required; however, a harbor foreman

is reported to act as a berthing pilot.

6.20 Anchorage.—Vessels may anchor, in a depth of 20m, rock,

about 50m E of Olieoen. However, this anchorage is exposed to

NE gales which occur suddenly. It has been reported that during these conditions, sheltered anchorage may be obtained at

the head of the E branch of Kong Oscar Havn.

6.20 Caution.—A local downwind may occasionally be experienced during the winter months; this wind, which often reaches

hurricane force, is known as the Piteraqen and is characterized

by a sudden clearing of the sky. Piteraqen warning lights are

shown from the settlement.

Ammassalik Fjord

6.21 Ammassalik Fjord is entered between Tasilap Nua

and Kap Dan, 9 miles SE. It extends NE and N for 26 miles to

the S extremity of a peninsula that divides its head into two

branches. The depths in mid-channel are generally great, but a

considerable number of dangerous islets and rocks have recently been reported (1985) and, therefore, local knowledge is required.

6.21 The outer part of the fjord lies between the SE coast of Ammassalik O and the S part of an extensive archipelago of islets

and rocks that extends 32 miles NNE. From Ammassalik

Fjord, Ikerasagssuaq (Ikasagtivaq) leads NW to Sermilik,

while Ikasak and Ikateq lead NE to Sermiligaq. 

6.21 The SE coast of Ammassalik O is heavily indented by numerous fjords. Sarpakajik (65°37'N., 37°31'W.), the outermost fjord, is entered between Tasilap Nua and Qamavik, a

point located 2 miles E. It extends 3.5 miles N and the outer

part is encumbered by islets.

6.21 Tasilartik (65°38'N., 37°25'W.), 2.5 miles E of Sarpakajika,

is a narrow fjord that extends 2 miles N. A beacon stands near

its E entrance point, close S of a former Eskimo settlement.

6.21 Nugarssik (65°38'N., 37°20'W.) is the NE entrance point of

Qasigiarmiut, a bay 0.75 mile wide. Qitalivajik, the largest of a

group of three islets, lies in the entrance to this bay and contains the remains of a former settlement. A prominent beacon

stands on the coast 0.5 mile NE of Nugarssik. 

6.22 Nerernaq (65°41'N., 37°18'W.), 2.5 miles N of

Nugarssik, is the S entrance point of an unnamed bay and the

site of a former Eskimo settlement. At the head of this bay,

Sangmileq Fjord extends 3 miles W and Tasilag Fjord extends

8 miles NW. Qernertivartivit, an island, lies in the mouth of the

bay. An Eskimo settlement stands at its S extremity and several

islets lie close off the NE and SW coasts. Ikasagtivaq, an islet,

lies 3.5 miles NE of Nerernaq at the extremity of a long and

narrow peninsula. It is the N entrance point of the bay.

6.22 Ikasagtivaq Channel, entered between the islet and Qernertoq, the extremity of the peninsula, extends 15 miles NW and

then 4.5 miles SW to its junction with Sermilik. The NE coast

of Ammassalik O, which forms the SW side of the channel, is

comparatively smooth and even, with high mountain peaks.

6.22 A dangerous submerged rock is reported to lie nearly in midchannel, 0.5 mile off the NE shore, 2.5 miles within the SE entrance of the channel. Two above-water rocks, one in midchannel, are reported to lie about 1.5 miles NW of this submerged rock. It was reported (1988) that another rock, with a

depth of 2m, lies about 3.5 miles within the SE entrance of the

channel.

6.22 Tasilartik, a fjord on the N side of Qernertoq, extends 5 miles

parallel with and 1.5 miles NE of Ikasagtivaq. Rodhorn, a

prominent mountain 1,050m high, stands near the head of this

fjord.

6.22 Kigtajik (65°51'N., 37°05'W.), the site of a former Eskimo

settlement, is the S entrance point of Ikasaulaq, a fjord which

curves 14 miles NW and NNW. Maries Havn, a small bay, is

located on the S shore of Ikasaulaq, 1.5 miles W of Kigtajik. A

beacon stands on Griseoen, an islet that lies in the NW entrance to this bay. Ocean-going vessels can obtain sheltered anchorage between this islet and the shore, at the head of the bay.

The roadstead is usually ice-free due to the outflow from a

stream which flows into the head of the bay.

6.22 Sioraq (Seraq), a short fjord, indents the shore 4 miles N of

the entrance to Ikasaulaq. 

6.22 Qingertivaq (66°03'N., 37°12'W.), the W branch at the head

of Ammassalik Fjord, extends 10 miles NNW from Misugtoq

(Mitigtoq) (65°58'N., 37°05'W.). Cassiopefjeld, a prominent

mountain 1,100m high, stands close W of a glacier that discharges into the head of this branch. 

6.23 Kap Dan (65°31'N., 37°11'W.), the E entrance point

of Ammassalik Fjord, forms the S extremity of Kulusuk, an island easily identified by the dome-like shape of its E end. A

foul area, with many islets and rocks, extends SW and S from

the cape. The outermost known dangers are two above-water

rocks and a rocky 35m high islet, which lie 2.5 miles WSW

and 3 miles SE, respectively, of Kap Dan. The W and N coasts

of Kulusuk are fringed with islets and above and below-water

rocks. Vessels can obtain anchorage within a large bay located

on the S side of Kulusuk. An aeronautical radiobeacon is situated 1 mile N of Kap Dan.

6.23 Kap Dan Settlement stands 3.5 miles N of the cape, near the

NW extremity of Kulusuk. It is reported to be one of the largest

permanently-inhabited native settlements in the area. Local

knowledge is required for approaching and anchoring off the

settlement. 

Settlement on Kulusuk
Sector 6. Greenland—Southeast Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Scoresby Sund 107

Pub. 181

6.23 A disused airstrip, 1,520m long, is situated on the N coast of

Kulusuk. It is reported to be in a poor state of repair; however,

it is still capable of light aircraft operations. A racon is established on the NW coast of Kulusuk near position 65°34'N,

37°13'W. 

6.23 Ikasartik (Ikerasarssik), a foul channel, separates the NE

coast of Kulusuk from an unnamed island lying to the N. A

beacon stands near the W extremity of this unnamed island.

The channel has not been thoroughly sounded and is not recommended. Tunoq, a narrow channel, separates Kulusuk from,

Auluit, a group of islands and islets lying to the NW.

6.23 Amangaq (65°46'N., 36°58'W.), a small island 300m high,

lies in a 2 mile wide channel between two unnamed islands on

the E side of Ammassalik Fjord.

6.24 Kangartik (65°49'N., 37°01'W.), the site of a former

settlement, is the SW extremity of a narrow mainland peninsula and the N entrance point of Ikasak

6.24 Kuummiit (Kungmiut) (65°51'N., 37°00'W.), 2.5 miles N of

Kangartik, is the site of a large Eskimo settlement. A mountain,

1,250m high, stands 3 miles N of the settlement. This peak is a

grayish color that contrasts with the darker surrounding land

and makes it prominent when viewed from the middle of Ammassalik Fjord. Fog often lies in Ammassalik fjord when there

is extensive drift ice.

6.24 The harbor lies in the N part of the fjord, and Fiskeribro pier,

10m long, with a depth of 4m, is situated there. The largest vessel that has berthed at the pier had a length of 74m and a draft

of 4.3m (vessels lie best when berthed starboard side-to).

Spring tides rise 3m; neap tides rise about 2.2m. 

6.24 Vessels may anchor, in a depth of 50m, S of the jetty, good

holding ground. 

6.24 Tasilaq, the E branch at the head of Tasiilaq Fjord (Ammassalik Fjord), is entered through a narrow channel running 1

mile NE from Misugtoq (Mitigtor). The branch extends 6 miles

farther N.

6.24 Ikasak ( 65°51'N., 36°53'W.), a channel, is entered between Kangartik and Igdlukasak, 1 mile S. It extends NE for 6

miles to a junction with an unnamed sound, which leads to the

S. A group, consisting of three islets, lies close within the SW

entrance to the channel. The largest islet of the group lies about

700m NNE of a low point that projects from the S shore,

marked by a beacon. Tuno, a fjord, extends 4 miles N from the

unnamed sound.

6.24 Ikkatteq (65°38'N., 37°57'W.) lies between the mainland

and the NW side of Qianarteq, a large island, which forms the

E side of the unnamed sound. A beacon stands on the W extremity of this island. The channel is entered between Igdlerajik, the N extremity of Qianarteq, and a point on the mainland,

1.5 miles N. It extends 7 miles NE to the junction with Sermiliigaq. A prominent peak, 600m high, stands on the SE side of

the channel, 2.5 miles NE of Igdlerajik.

6.24 At each end of Ikateq, the mid-channel depths are great, but

decrease to about 55m for 0.5 mile midway along the NW

shore. A bank, with depths of less than 9m, extends 320m offshore abreast the mouth of this valley. Vessels may anchor, in a

depth of about 37m, 0.25 mile S of the mouth of the valley.

Tasiilaq Fjord (Ammassalik Fjord) to Kap Wandel

6.25 Between Kap Dan and Erik den Rodes O, 27 miles

NE, the coast is fronted by numerous islands, islets, and rocks. 

6.25 Kitsissit Oqqorsiit (Kitsigsit), the outermost group of islets,

lies 15 miles ENE of Kap Dan. A below-water rock is reported

to lie about 6 miles E of this group. 

6.25 Erik den Rodes O (65°47'N., 36°18'W.), 480m high, is one of

the larger of a group of islands and islets which lie on the E side of

the approach to Sermiligaaq (Sermilgaq). The middle of this island is almost bisected by Qissivit, a fjord, which indents the E

coast and runs NW for almost 2 miles. Several islets front the E

and S sides of the island. Uigertertivit, 200m high, is the SE of

these islets. 

6.25 Leifs O, the largest island of the group on the E approach to

Sermiligaq, lies with its S extremity 1 mile W of Erik den

Rodes O and Sarfaq Pynt. The N extremity lies 1 mile E of a

mainland peninsula. Ikasak and Ikasak Kiateq are channels

Settlement on Kulusuk

Settlement on Kulusuk
108 Sector 6. Greenland—Southeast Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Scoresby Sund 

Pub. 181

separating, respectively, the NW and NE sides of Leifs O from

the mainland. Sermiligaq Settlement, on the mainland, stands

on the NW entrance point of Ikasak. 

6.25 Sermiligaq (Sermiligaaq) (66°00'N., 36°28'W.), a fjord, is

entered between Sermiligaq Settlement and the E side of Qianarteq. It extends 10 miles N and branches into two arms at

the head. The fjord is generally full of icebergs, which discharge into the E arm from Knud Rasmussens Gletscher, a

large glacier. It is reported that the fjord is only navigable by

small vessels from July through September; winter ice closes

navigation from October to June. Sermiligaq is usually filled

with icebergs from Knud Rasmussen Gletscher. The area S of

the fjord has many dangers to navigation, including widelyscattered skerries, small islands, strong S and SW currents

causing severe ice screwing, unknown depths, and undeterminable safe anchorage. 

6.25 Kangertivartikajik, a fjord, is entered close NW of the N extremity of Leifs O. It is about 1 mile wide and trends in a generally N direction for 4.5 miles. Nutugat (Amagat), a peninsula

880m high and 1 mile wide, extends S between this fjord and

Sangmilik, a smaller fjord to the E.

6.25 A short peninsula, 1.5 miles wide, projects S between Sangmilik and Iliartakil, another fjord which extends N for 2 miles.

Between Iliartakil and Kap Nordenskiold, 19 miles NE, the

mainland is fronted by several islands and islets. Tikivipik, the

southwesternmost of these islands, is separated from the mainland by Jerno Sund.

6.25 Bjornbugt (66°04'N., 35°55'W.) is entered between a short

promontory and Kangikajik, the E extremity of a peninsula,

which rises to a height of 830m, 2 miles NE. This bay extends

2 miles NW. Below-water rocks encumber its entrance and

three islets lie off the S entrance point.

6.25 Depotfjord is entered between Kangikajik and Akilerut, a

point 2.5 miles N. It extends WNW for 5 miles and maintains a

width of about 2 miles throughout this distance. A glacier

flows into a narrow and short arm at the SW corner of the head.

6.25 Ananap Kangertiva Kiateq is entered between Akilerut and

the extremity of a narrow peninsula, 2 miles E. This fjord extends 6 miles NW. Depoto, an islet 300m high, lies off the E

entrance point. Several smaller islets lie in the vicinity of Depoto.

6.26 Kap Nordenskiold (66°08'N., 35°36'W.) is the E extremity of a peninsula which forms the E side of Ananap

Kangertiva Kiateq. Storo, an island 880m high, is located 2

miles NNE of the cape. Odesund, a narrow passage, separates

Storo from the mainland and leads to Vestfjord, which extends

2 miles SW.

6.26 Kangertittivatsiaq (Kangerlugssuatsiak) (66°22'N.,

35°46'W.), a long fjord, is approached between Eskimo O, a

small island close N of Storo, and Kap Japetus Steenstrup, 4

miles ENE. It is entered between Nuuluk, a point on the mainland 4 miles WNW of Eskimo O, and Sarqarmiut, the W extremity of a rounded promontory 2 miles NNW. The fjord

extends 17 miles NW to Glacier de France at its head. Sangmilik (Sammilik), a short fjord, indents the SW shore 3 miles

within the entrance.

6.26 Kap Japetus Steenstrup (66°16'N., 35°05'W.), 880m high,

is the extremity of a mountainous promontory that extends 9

miles ESE and rises to a height of 1,156m.

6.26 Mont Forel, the second highest mountain in Greenland, rises

to an elevation of 3,360m about 37 miles NNW of the head of

Kangertittivatsiaq. It is surrounded by numerous peaks between 2,750 and 3,050m high.

6.26 Nigertuluk (66°16'N., 35°02'W.), a fjord, is entered between Kap Japetus Steenstrup and a point, 1.5 miles NE. It extends NW for 5 miles and then N for 5 miles to a glacier at the

head. Several islets lie off the N entrance point. The fjord,

about 1.5 miles wide, is enclosed by mountains on either side.

Two submerged rocks lie close to the E shore of the fjord, 5

miles within the entrance. 

Kap Wandel to Kangerlussuaq (Kangerlussuak)

6.27 Kap Wandel (66°19'N., 34°52'W.), 880m high, is located 6.5 miles NE of Kap Japetus Steenstrup. Ailsa O, a small

island 281m high, lies 1 mile SSW of the cape.

6.27 Tuttilik, a fjord, is entered W of Kap Wandel and extends 4

miles N to a square basin with steep mountains on either side.

A wall of ice, 30m high, stands at the head and forms the front

of an active glacier. A monument stands on the S entrance

point of a short branch that extends 2 miles W from the head of

the fjord. A hut stands near the head of this short branch on the

site of a former expedition base. Generally, the fjord is clear of

ice from July to the end of October.

6.27 Vahl Fjord, with a rocky headland on its NE side, is entered 3

miles NE of Kap Wandel. Nassippik (Nasigfik) is the SE extremity of a small mallet-shaped peninsula that rises to a height

of 700m and lies on the E side of this fjord.

6.27 K.I.V. Steenstrups Sondre Brae and K.I.V. Steenstrups Nordre Brae, located 4 and 9 miles, respectively, N of Nassippik

(Nasigfik), are two great glaciers which discharge into the sea.

Their faces are formed by walls of ice 60 to 90m high. Two icefree peaks, 610 and 670m high, stand on the NE side of the

face of the N glacier.

6.27 Ikertivaq (Ikersuaq) (66°36'N., 34°30'W.), a fjord, is entered between the ice-free peaks, described above, and Kap

Gustav Holm, 3.5 miles NE. Similaq, an islet, lies in mid-channel 1.5 miles within the entrance. Ostre Tasiisaq, a branch of

Ikertivaq, extends 8 miles N on the W side of Kap Gustav

Holm. Vester Tasiisaq (Tasilap Agtertikajia), a second branch,

indents the W shore 6 miles within the entrance and extends 3

miles SW. It has been reported that Ostre Tasiisaq contained a

harbor suitable for ocean-going vessels. 

6.28 Kap Gustav Holm (66°34'N., 34°21'W.) is the S extremity of a mountainous peninsula which rises to a height of

966m and extends 7 miles NNE to Kap Buchholz. Nanertalik,

an islet, is located 0.75 mile off a small projection on the coast,

4 miles NE of Kap Gustav Holm. A dangerous submerged rock

lies close off its SE side. 

6.28 Between Kap Buchholz and Kap S.M. Jorgensen, 8 miles

NNE, the coast is irregular and indented by several short fjords.

6.28 Kap Hildebrandt (66°48'N., 33°54'W.), 3 miles NNE of

Kap S.M. Jorgensen, is the SE extremity of a heavily indented

island that lies close N of the NE part of Ilivtiartik. Several islands and islets lie close off the large bight which indents the N

side of this island. Laubes Gletscher, a large glacier, discharges

into the sea 9 miles NNW of Kap S.M. Jorgensen. Imilik, an is-
Sector 6. Greenland—Southeast Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Scoresby Sund 109

Pub. 181

let 209m high, is separated from Kap Hildebrandt by a narrow

and foul channel, 0.5 mile wide.

6.28 Kialaneq (Skraekkensbugt) is an area partly enclosed by islands. Aaluiartik (66°55'N., 33°52'W.), the largest island, and

Lilleo, 1 mile N, partly enclose the W side of Kialaneq. Nulak,

a promontory 1,100m high, projects from the mainland, 1 mile

W of Lilleo, and forms the SW side of Ilivtalip Kangertiva, a

small fjord. The remaining islands and islets which surround

Kialaneq may best be seen on the chart.

6.28 Kap Warming (67°01'N., 33°43'W.) is the SE extremity of

an island which lies 1 mile from the mainland and rises to a

height of 500m. This island is the SW of a chain which lies

close off the coast and extends 15 miles NE. The ice cap comes

down to the coast in this vicinity and numerous glacial tongues

discharge into the sea between isolated promontories. Peaks,

which rise above the ice cap close within the coast, attain

heights of over 1,220m.

6.28 Kap Heggeman (67°04'N., 33°27'W.) is the E extremity of

Lango, a narrow island. Jakos Sund, entered between this cape

and Nyo, 1.5 miles N, curves in a general NNW direction and

separates Nyo from the mainland.

6.28 Kap C Christiansen (67°13'N., 33°22'W.) is the NW extremity of Milait, an island 675m high, which is separated from

the mainland by Qornitsiaq, a narrow channel.

6.28 Kruuse Fjord is entered between Kap C Christiansen and

Nugalik, 2 miles N. It extends 9 miles W and is almost completely surrounded by ice. Sondre Aputiteq, a small island, lies

3 miles E.

6.28 Kap Louis Ussing (67°18'N., 33°18'W.), 300m high, is the

S extremity of a peninsula that forms the NE side of Agtertia, a

fjord. This fjord extends 9 miles NW and its shores are largely

covered by glaciers. An islet, 107m high, lies on the N side of

the approach to the fjord, 0.75 mile SSE of the cape. It was reported (1932) that a reef, with a heavy ground swell over it, apparently stretches completely across the entrance to Agtertia.

6.29 Aggas O (67°23'N., 33°13'W.), an island, 275m high,

lies 5 miles NNE of Kap Louis Ussing and 1 mile offshore.

Uunartit, a chain of islets, extends nearly 7 miles NNE from

the coast close W of Aggas O.

6.29 Between Uunartit and Kap Deichmann, 45 miles NNE, the

coast contains numerous glaciers and is reported to always be

blocked by ice.

6.29 Deception O (67°37'N., 32°54'W.), an island, 111m high, is

located 9 miles NNE of the N island of the Uunartit chain and

about 3 miles offshore. Islets lie close off the N extremity and

W side of this island.

6.29 Ittutarajik and Paatuulaajivit (Pagtulajivit), 151m high, are

islands lying 6 and 9 miles, respectively, E of the S end of Deception O. A chain of islets extends 2.5 miles E from a point

located 1 mile N of Paatuulaajivit. Flado, an island 183m high,

lies close offshore, 9.5 miles NE of Deception O. 

6.29 Nordre Aputiteeq (67°48'N., 32°16'W.), a small island,

90m high, lies 4.5 miles E of Flado. An automatic unmanned

weather station and a disused radio station stand on this island.

A small quay, with a depth of 6m alongside, is reported to be

situated in a bay on the SW side of the island.

6.29 Kap Edvard Holm (67°51'N., 32°11'W.) is the S extremity of

a bold promontory which rises to a height of 800m and projects

SE from the mainland. Keglen, an islet 139m high, lies 3 miles

NE of the cape. Between this cape and Kap Deichmann, 13

miles N, the coast is indented by several short inlets.

6.29 Kap Deichmann (68°03'N., 32°02'W.) is the S extremity of

a small promontory, 830m high, which forms the NE side of an

unnamed bay. A small island and several islets lie close SW of

the cape. A submerged rock is also reported to lie 1 mile WSW

of the cape, 0.25 mile offshore.

Kangerlussuaq (Kangerlussuak)

6.30 Kangerlussuaq (Kangerlussuak) (68°22'N.,

32°14'W.), the second-largest fjord in the SE part of Greenland,

is entered between Kap Deichmann and Kap Hammer, 10

miles ENE, and extends 40 miles NNW. The outer section of

Amdrup Fjord lies 10 miles NW of Kap Hammer; 5 miles farther N, Watkins Fjord is entered.

6.30 Anchorage within the fjord itself is difficult due to its great

depths and strong currents; however, vessels can obtain anchorage in Uttental Sund.

6.30 Sortskaer (Black Reef) (68°06'N., 31°58'W.) lies about 4.75

miles NNE of Kap Deichmann and about 2 miles SE of Amdrup Pynt. This reef consists of two rocks, 9m high and blackish in appearance. Amdrup Pynt, 6 miles N of Kap Deichmann,

is the extremity of a sharp promontory that projects 2 miles E.

6.30 Amdrup Fjord lies on the W side of Kangerlussuaq and is

entered between Amdrup Pynt and Bagnaesset, a point 4 miles

NW. From its entrance, the fjord trends WNW for 10 miles. A

mountain peak stands at the head.

6.30 Skaegardshalvo, 5 miles NW of Kap Hammer, is a rocky

peninsula that projects 1.5 miles SW. A submerged rock lies

0.25 mile SSW of its W extremity. An unnamed bay lies on the

E side of this peninsula.

6.30 Kraemer O (68°12'N., 31°51'W.), a large island, is located

with its SE extremity lying 6 miles NNW of Kap Hammer. It is

separated from the E shore of Kangerlussuaq by Uttental Sund.

A bay deeply indents the W side of this island.

6.30 Uttental Sund, a narrow passage, is entered between the W

extremity of Skaegardshalvo and the SE side of Kraemer O, 1.5

miles NNW. The SE shore close within the entrance is encumbered by several islets and rocks. The N side of the entrance is

reported to be clear of dangers. Depths in the fairway are reported to be 18 to 26m. Sheltered anchorage is obtainable, by

vessels with local knowledge, in a depth of about 30m, close

off the E shore of the sound, 2.5 miles within the S entrance.

6.30 A reef, which nearly dries, is reported to lie in the N entrance

to the sound, at its junction with Watkins Fjord.

6.30 Watkins Fjord (68°15'N., 31°55'W.) is entered between the

NW end of Kraemer O and Spaekpynten, a point on the NE

shore of Kangerlussuaq 3 miles NNW. There are few glacier

tongues running along the N shore of this fjord, which is generally filled with ice.

6.30 Courtauld Fjord indents the E shore of Kangerlussuaq 9

miles NNW of Spaekpynten; it extends 5 miles N.

6.30 Near its head, the fjord widens and forms a basin which is

surrounded by high and rugged mountains. Batbjerg, a mountain, 1,660m high, stands at the root of a short promontory

which projects from the head of the fjord and forms two

branches. Nordfjord Gletscher flows into the head of the E

branch while Kangerlussuaq Gletscher flows into the head of

the W branch.
110 Sector 6. Greenland—Southeast Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Scoresby Sund 

Pub. 181

Kangerlussuaq (Kangerlussuak) to Kap Vedel

6.31 Miki Fjord (68°08'N., 31°30'W.), entered 5 miles E

of Kap Hammer, extends NW for 4 miles and then, turning

sharply, runs E for 4 miles. It maintains a width of about 1 mile

throughout. The entrance is flanked on either side by mountains which rise almost perpendicularly from the sea.

6.31 Anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 18 to 20m, within a

small cove located abreast of a conspicuous hut on the W side

of the fjord; local knowledge is required. Good anchorage is also available, in depths of 24 to 40m, clay bottom, at the head of

the fjord. There are no known dangers in this fjord, but ice

bergs may cause considerable inconvenience at either of these

anchorages.

6.31 Kap Irminger (68°05'N., 30°56'W.), located 15 miles E of

Kap Hammer, is 610m high and the SE extremity of a broad

and mountainous promontory. J.C. Jacobsen Fjord is separated

by this promontory from Miki Fjord and extends 10 miles NW

from its entrance. It has been reported that submerged rocks

probably lie off the entrance to this fjord as ground swells have

been experienced in the vicinity.

6.31 Kap J.C. Jacobsen (68°06'N., 30°30'W.), located 10 miles

E of Kap Irminger, is the SE extremity of a broad promontory.

Stomo, an islet 250m high, lies close offshore 3.5 miles W of

the cape. Ryberg Fjord is entered E of the cape and has a glacier at its head.

6.31 J.A.D. Jensen Fjord is entered between an unnamed point,

located 10 miles ENE of Kap J.C. Jacobsen, and the SW extremity of Sokongen O, an island 2 miles NE. This fjord has a

glacier at its head and appears free of dangers.

6.32 Kap J.A.D. Jensen (68°10'N., 29°49'W.), an imposing vertical basaltic mass about 1,000m high, is the SE extremity of Sokongen O. A short and narrow channel separates the

island from the mainland and connects J.A.D. Jensen Fjord

with Nansen Fjord. A vessel anchored about 365m from the S

end of this channel, 1 mile W of its E entrance, in a depth of

83m; however, the berth was reported to be poor. Subsequent

examination disclosed a more suitable anchorage, in depths of

27 to 46m, off the NW extremity of Sokongen O, at the W entrance to the channel, 365m offshore.

6.32 Nansen Fjord, entered between Kap J.A.D. Jensen and Kap

Nansen, 9 miles ENE, extends 15 miles NNW and appears to

be free of dangers. Christian IV’s Gletscher, a large glacier, is

located at its head.

6.32 Between Kap Nansen (68°13'N., 29°26'W.) and Kap Ravn,

29 miles ENE, the coast consists of a succession of headlands,

between which are short indentations with active glaciers at

their heads.

6.32 Watkins Bjerge is a range of mountains extending far NW,

with elevations ranging from about 2,100m close within the

coast, to Gunnbjorns Fjeld (68°55'N., 29°52'W.), 3,700m

high and, as far as known, the highest point in Greenland.

6.32 Kap Hartz, located 2 miles NNE of Kap Nansen, has a short,

unnamed fjord on either side of it. Kap Garde, located 6 miles

NE of Kap Nansen, is the extremity of a peninsula that forms the

W side of Kivioq Fjord. This fjord, which extends 7.5 miles NW,

is entered between Kap Garde and Kap Normann, 8.5 miles NE.

Between Kap Normann and Kap Rink (68°22'N., 28°38'W.), 5

miles ENE, the coast is indented by an unnamed bay.

6.32 Kap Stephensen (68°25'N., 28°31'W.), 1,000m high, is located 4 miles NE of Kap Rink. It is the NE entrance point of

Stephensen Fjord and the W entrance point of Ravn Fjord.

6.32 Kap Ravn (68°25'N., 28°15'W.), located 5 miles E of Kap

Stephensen, is the S extremity of a promontory which separates Ravn Fjord from Wiedemann Fjord.

6.32 Wiedemann Fjord lies on the E side of the promontory that

terminates in Kap Ravn. It is 3 miles wide at the entrance and

extends NW for 5 miles to a glacier at the head. It is reported

that a vessel obtained good anchorage, in a depth of 15m, about

0.25 mile from the E shore of the fjord, 2 miles from the glacier at the head. The berth was near the mouth of a stream, the

current from which kept the ice at a distance.

6.32 Kap Johnstrup (68°28'N., 28°02'W.), 450m high, is one of

the steepest and most jagged headlands on this coast. It is located 6 miles ENE of Kap Ravn and is the SE extremity of a

peninsula that separates Wiedemann Fjord from Vedel Fjord. A

small bay indents the coast on the W side of the cape.

6.32 Vedel Fjord extends 8 miles N from its entrance which lies

between Kap Johnstrup and the S extremity of a peninsula

which forms the E side of the fjord.

6.32 Kap Vedel (68°30'N., 27°38'W.), 800m high, is located 10

miles ENE of Kap Johnstrup. It is the E extremity of the peninsula that forms the E side of Vedel Fjord.

Kap Vedel To Kap Brewster

6.33 Blosseville Kyst (68°44'N., 26°20'W.) is the stretch of

coast lying between Kap Vedel and Barclay Bugt, 70 miles NE.

It is characterized by steep, rather narrow, and very rough basaltic promontories which separate many fjords. The Inland Ice

Cap reaches down to the heads of these fjords, producing a

large number of icebergs. Farther inland, high mountains can

be seen projecting above the ice cap. The current off the steep

promontories is very strong and a number of comparatively

shoal areas exist in several places, causing the large icebergs to

ground, with the result that the pack, driven by the current, accumulates around them, and at times, obstructs all navigation.

6.33 Grivel Bugt (68°32'N., 27°40'W.) is entered N of Kap

Vedel. This bay has an entrance 4 miles wide and extends 5

miles WNW. Grivel Fjord extends 2 miles N from the N shore

of this bay. Savary Fjord is entered between Kap Grivel, located 9.5 miles ENE of Kap Vedel, and Kap Savary, 5 miles farther ENE. It extends 4.5 miles NW.

6.33 Kap Savary (68°36'N., 27°03'W.), 730m high, is very steep. It

was reported that the current off this cape is particularly strong.

6.33 Sortebrae, a moderately large glacier with a black surface,

fills the coast between the cape and Kap Daussy, 5 miles ENE.

6.33 Sokongens Bugt (68°40'N., 26°40'W.), lying on the E side

of Kap Daussy, is an open bay with two arms at its head. Vessels can anchor, in a depth of 16m, within the E, 0.25 mile offshore.

6.34 Kap Tupinier (68°45'N., 26°19'W.) is located 13

miles ENE of Kap Daussy. A small bay, Johan Peterson Bugt,

lying on the NE side of this cape has a hot spring at its head.

Storbrae, a large glacier, descends to the sea 10 miles NE of

Kap Tupinier. Kap Beaupre is located 16 miles NE of Kap Tupinier. De Reste Bugt, an inlet, lies on its N side. 

6.34 Kap Coster (68°58'N., 25°27'W.) is the extremity of a
Sector 6. Greenland—Southeast Coast—Prins Christian Sund to Scoresby Sund 111

Pub. 181

promontory which rises to a height of 945m and separates de

Reste Bugt from d’Aunay Bugt. The head of d’Aunay Bugt is

divided into three branches. The W branch is generally full of

ice bergs and the NE branch is open to the prevailing swell.

The center branch, which has an islet lying in its entrance, offers excellent anchorage near its head. Vessels can anchor, in a

depth of about 27m, soft mud; sheltered from all quarters. In

this branch, as soon as the soundings shoal from 73 to 55m, the

depths decrease very rapidly and caution is necessary when anchoring.

6.34 Kap Ryder (69°04'N., 25°07'W.), located 10 miles NE of

Kap Coster, is the extremity of a promontory which lies midway between d’Aunay Bugt and Barclay Bugt. A bank, with a

least depth of 40m, was reported (1932) to extend 8 miles ESE

from a position 2 miles SE of this cape.

6.34 Barclay Bugt is entered between a point, located 8 miles N

of Kap Ryder, and Kap Barclay, 8 miles farther ENE. This bay

extends WNW for about 9 miles. Host Havn, an inlet located

on the W side of the promontory terminating in Kap Barclay, is

reported to afford sheltered anchorage, in depths of 13 to 20m,

clay.

6.34 Kap Barclay is the NE extremity of a promontory which separates Barclay Bugt from Knighton Fjord, to the NNE. This

fjord is entered between the cape and Kap Ewart, 9 miles NE,

and extends 7 miles NW. Mountains surround the fjord and behind them, the Icecap is visible. An inlet extends 2 miles NNE

from close NW of Kap Ewart. Its entrance is narrowed by a spit

that extends from the SE shore. Vessels can obtain sheltered

anchorage, in a depth of about 20m, mud, within this inlet.

6.35 Kap Dalton (69°24'N., 24°10'W.), located 7 miles

NE of Kap Ewart, is a bold headland 400m high. It is connected by a low isthmus to a mountainous peninsula which consists

entirely of basalt and reaches a height of 1,433m, 7 miles NW

of the cape. This low isthmus forms part of the NE shore of an

unnamed bay. A sulfur spring is located on the shore close NW

of the cape. Anchorage is obtainable, in depths of 22 to 29m,

sand and gravel, in a small bay on the N side of Kap Dalton.

This anchorage is open to the NE and caution is necessary, as

the depths in the bay decrease rapidly. Two lagoons lie on the S

side of the bay, separated from the sea by narrow strips of land.

The outermost lagoon, although mostly shallow with drying

rocks, affords sheltered anchorage inside the mouth for small

craft.

6.35 Unatertaqartikajip Orqungmut Kangertiva indents the coast

between Kap Dalton and the S extremity of Henry Land, 9

miles NE. This fjord extends 11 miles NW. Bartholin Brae, a

large glacier, lies at the head of an inlet located 4 miles within

the NE entrance point of the fjord. Henry Land is a broad peninsula that rises to a height of about 1,000m.

6.35 Romer Fjord (69°39'N., 23°36'W.) is entered between Akileqita, the E extremity of Henry Land, and the S end of Turner

O, an island 6 miles NE. It extends 8 miles NE. Turner Sund, a

narrow passage 8 miles long, separates the island from the

mainland and leads to Deichmann Fjord.

6.35 Deichmann Fjord is entered between the E extremity of

Turner O, and the S extremity of Manby Halvo, 5 miles NE. It

extends 10 miles NW to Stenos Brae, a glacier at the head.

Manby Halvo, a peninsula, extends nearly 10 miles SE from a

narrow isthmus which connects it to the mainland; two islets

lie close off the NE side of this peninsula.

6.35 Stewart O (69°54'N., 22°50'W.), an island 950m high, lies 5

miles N of the NE extremity of Manby Halvo. It is reported to

be a good landmark and it is seen from a distance of almost 30

miles. Dunholme, an islet, lies 3 miles ENE of the island.

6.35 An uncharted island, 2m high, was reported (1990) to lie

about 2 miles ESE of Dunholme.

6.35 Kap Brewster (70°09'N., 22°03'W.) is located 20 miles NE

of Stewart O. It is the NE extremity of Savoia Halvo, a narrow

and bold peninsula with high cliffs, and the S entrance point of

Scoresby Sund. Mountains, which gradually increase in height

to over 1,200m, stand within the cape.
113

Pub. 181

7. 

Greenland—East Coast—Scoresby Sund to Kap Morris Jesup

7.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 7 — CHART INFORMATION
115

Pub. 181

SECTOR 7 

GREENLAND—EAST COAST—SCORESBY SUND TO KAP MORRIS JESUP

7.0 Plan.—This sector describes the E coast of Greenland from

Scoresby Sund to Kap Morris Jesup, the N extremity of Greenland. The coastline trends in a N direction to Nordostrundingen, the E extremity of Greenland, and then NW to Kap Morris

Jesup. 

General Remarks

7.1 The area known as Kong Christian den X Land, lying

between and including Scoresby Sund and Dove Bay, is markedly different in character from the regions to the S and N. The

shore line, which has a N trend for about 400 miles, is broken

into one of the largest and most complex systems of fjords,

bays, and connecting channels to be found anywhere in the

world. On either side of this fjord region, the coastline is more

regular and the ice-free land is narrower. The strip of ice-free

land, which lies at the back of the coastline, attains its greatest

width in the vicinity of Scoresby Sund, where, according to reports (1940), it has a breadth of more than 150 miles. This icefree land is composed of mainly rugged mountains, but on

some of the islands and peninsulas, which face the open sea,

the vegetation is luxuriant and there is a profusion of game.

7.1 The fjord region is considered to be the most easily-accessible portion of the E coast because the pack ice here usually lies

farther offshore than it does to the S. It has long been believed

that the pack is usually more scattered between the parallels of

73°N and 75°N than elsewhere along the coast, so that a landfall by vessels approaching from the E could be made more

easily in these latitudes than farther S. However, since 1924,

there have been a number of years when ice conditions have

permitted vessels from Europe to proceed direct to Scoresby

Sund instead of having to take the longer N route.

7.1 Winds—Weather.—See paragraph 6.1.

Scoresby Sund

7.2 Scoresby Sund is entered between Kap Brewster and

Kap Swainson, 17 miles NNE, and extends W and NW for

about 150 miles. The outer part of the sound, which is 20 miles

wide and 68 miles long, lies between the entrance and Kap Leslie, the SE extremity of Milne Land, a large island. Here the

sound divides into two branches. The S branch extends 25

miles WSW and then subdivides into Gasefjord and Fohn

Fjord. Hall Bredning Inlet, the N branch, extends 40 miles

NNW before subdividing into O Fjord and Nordvestfjord.

7.2 The shores of the sound are generally steep and often inaccessible. The greater part of the surrounding country is mountainous, with many peaks rising to heights of over 2,000m.

7.2 The entrance to the sound is deep, with a least depth of 117m

lying close to the N shore.

7.2 Ice.—Scoresby Sund is usually accessible by mid-August.

Though the sound itself remains ice-free until early October, its

approaches are affected by the arrival of the Greenland Sea

pack ice in mid-September. During a severe season, the entrance to the sound may remain inaccessible throughout the

summer, though the sound itself is ice-free. In a good year, the

entrance to the sound may be clear as early as mid-June, but

the earliest clearance within the sound has been late July. The

best approach to the entrance is usually directly from the E,

since the width of the Greenland Sea pack ice, as it breaks up,

is narrower off the entrance than it is farther S.

7.2 Tides—Currents.—There is a regular tidal current of considerable strength in the sound, but apparently only near the

surface. Objects with little draft are carried along with the tidal

currents, while those with a deeper draft appear not to be affected.

Scoresby Sund
116 Sector 7. Greenland—East Coast—Scoresby Sund to Kap Morris Jesup 

Pub. 181

7.2 The currents in the sound appear to be both surface and subsurface. A number of icebergs that were observed within Cape

Brewster, were, in 3 days, carried out beyond the cape by the

undercurrents.

7.2 Aspect.—The S side of the outer part of the sound lies between Kap Brewster and Kap Stevenson, 60 miles WNW. It

consists of a high basalt wall, with numerous small glacial

tongues descending to the sea.

7.2 The outer part of the N shore of the sound lies between Kap

Swainson and Kap Hope (70°28'N., 22°23'W.), 14 miles W. It

is formed by the S side of Liverpool Land.

7.2 Hartz Vig is the E of two small indentations which are located between Kap Swainson and Kap Tobin, 4.5 miles WSW. A

warm spring is located at the head of the W indentation. An Eskimo settlement is reported to be situated at Unnartoq, a point

1 mile WNW of Kap Tobin.

7.2 Rosenvinge Bugt (70°27'N., 22°05'W.) is entered between

Unnartoq and Basaltnaes, a point 6.5 miles NW. This bay

extends 5 miles NE. Amdrups Havn is a cove located 4 miles N

of Unnartoq. A bank lying in the middle of the entrance to this

cove has a least depth of 11m. Small craft can anchor in the

cove, but the rocky holding ground makes the berth dangerous

during squalls. 

7.3 Scoresbysund (Ittoqqortoormiit) (70°29'N., 21°

58'W.) is the Scoresby Settlement. It stands near the N entrance

point of Amdrups Havn. The settlement contains a church,

administrative buildings, and native houses.

7.3 The port and pilots can be contacted on VHF channel 13 or

16.

7.3 Range beacons, bearing 005°, indicate the approach to the

anchorages located off the settlement. The anchorage berth for

small vessels lies, in depths of 26 to 29m, 275m offshore. It is

marked by the intersection of the approach alignment and the

alignment, bearing 303°, of two beacons which stand close

within the N entrance point of Amdrups Havn. A red house,

with a prominent gable, is reported to stand close SW of the

rear beacon. The anchorage berth for large vessels lies, in a

depth of 29m, from 180 to 365m farther S. A small pier, suitable for boats, is situated at the settlement.

7.3 Hvalrosbugt, the inner part of Rosenvinges Bugt, affords anchorage, in a depth of 40m, good holding ground, in its NE

part.

7.4 Hurry Inlet (70°37'N., 22°31'W.) is entered between

Kap Hope and Kap Stewart, 4 miles W. It trends N for 25

miles; Fame Oer, a group of islets, lies near the head. A small

vessel is reported to have anchored, in a depth of 24m, close E

of the two small S islets. The channels lying between the other

islets in the group are reported to be encumbered with rocks.

7.4 An anchorage berth, located near the head, is indicated by

the intersection of the alignments, bearing 040° and 105°, of

two pairs of range beacons which are situated on the E side of

the inlet. Anchorage may also be obtained, in a depth of 40m,

mud, with the S islet of Fame Oer bearing 056°, distant 2

miles. However, this berth is exposed as the wind nearly always blows up and down the inlet.

7.4 Jameson Land (71°00'N., 23°30'W.), an extensive tract lying between Hurry Inlet and Hall Bredning, is relatively low

and undulating, with numerous short streams along its S and W

coasts. It is light brown in color, differing from other coasts in

the vicinity, which are rugged, mountainous, and dark brown.

7.4 Kap Hooker, the SW extremity of Jameson Land, is located

30 miles WNW of Kap Stewart. Anchorage may be obtained,

in a depth of 26m, good holding ground, off the mouth of a river located 2 miles SE of the cape.

7.5 Hall Bredning, the N branch of Scoresby Sund, is entered between Kap Leslie and the W coast of Jameson Land.

From Kap Leslie, the inlet extends in a NNW direction for

about 40 miles to Sydkap, at its head. Charcots Havn, a bay, is

located 9 miles N of Kap Leslie and affords anchorage. However, due to icebergs vessels should anchor only on the S side

and within 0.5 mile of its entrance.

Ittoqqortoormiit—Scoresby Settlement (winter)

Ittoqqortoormiit—Scoresby Settlement

Ittoqqortoormiit—Scoresby Settlement
Sector 7. Greenland—East Coast—Scoresby Sund to Kap Morris Jesup 117

Pub. 181

7.5 Bregnepynt, located 17 miles N of Kap Leslie, is the NE extremity of Milne Land. Bjorne Oer, a group of islands, lies between 5 and 16 miles N of this point and encumbers the

entrance to O Fjord. Two islets, 2m high, are reported to lie

about 2 miles seaward of Bjorne Oer. 

7.5 Sydkap (71°17'N., 25°03'W.), the site of a former settlement, is located 24 miles NNE of Bregne Pynt. Two islands lie

between 2 and 4 miles SE of the point. Nordostbugt, a wide

bay, is located E of the point and forms the NE corner of Hall

Bredning. Anchorage is reported to be available, in depths of

46 to 64m, between Sydkap and the islands off it. Anchorage is

also reported to be available, in a depth of 58m, 550m off the

site of the former settlement.

7.5 Gurreholm Station (71°15'N., 24°36'W.), a hunting station,

stands on the E side of Nordostbugt, 11 miles E of Sydkap. Anchorage is obtainable, in depths of 18 to 27m, 275 to 365m offshore, W of the station. 

7.5 Renland is a large promontory, the SE coast of which forms

the NW side of Hall Bredning between O Fjord and Nordvestfjord. Scoresby Land is the tract of mainland located NW of

Jameson Land that extends N from the inner end of Hall Bredning to Kong Oscars Fjord.

7.5 Nordvestfjord (71°30'N., 25°40'W.), entered between Sydkap and the E extremity of Renland, is an extension of Hall

Bredning. It stretches 75 miles NW and is the deepest known

fjord. A depth of 1,508m was reported to lie 50 miles NW of

Sydkap.

7.5 North Bugt (Nordbugten) indents the N shore of Nordvestfjord about 30 miles within the entrance. During the month of

October, a vessel anchored, in a depth of 80m, about 0.5 mile

from the head of this bay. At the time, several icebergs were

sighted outside the entrance but the bay itself was relatively

clear. 

7.5 Flyverfjord, located 47 miles within Nordvestford, extends

20 miles W, between Renland and Hinksland.

7.6 O Fjord (71°00'N., 26°12'W.) extends 30 miles SW

from the NW part of Hall Bredning to Storo, an island, which

is separated from the NW coast of Milne Land by Snesund.

Rypefjord extends 15 miles NW from Storo. Harefjord leads

WNW from the vicinity of Storo. Rode Fjord leads from Storo

to Rode O, located off the W side of Milne Land.

7.6 The S branch of Scoresby Sund is entered between Kap

Stevenson and Kap Leslie, 16 miles N. It extends 25 miles

WSW to Gase Pynt, the E extremity of Gaseland, a promontory

which divides the branch into Gasefjord and Fohn Fjord. Gasefjord extends nearly 50 miles WSW to a glacier at its head.

Anchorage is reported to be obtainable in Mudder Bugt, on the

S coast of Milne Land, 15 miles WSW of Kap Leslie.

7.6 Danmarks O, an island lying in the entrance to Fohn Fjord, is

separated from the S coast of Milne Land by Ren Sund. Hekla

Havn, a small bay, is located on the S side of the island. A vessel is reported to have obtained anchorage, in a depth of 38m,

about 0.5 mile from the head of another small bay located 2.5

miles NE of Hekla Havn.

Scoresby Sund to Davy Sund and Kong Oscars

Fjord

7.7 Liverpool Land (71°00'N., 22°00'W.) is a malletshaped peninsula which extends from Scoresby Sund to Kap

Gladstone, 68 miles N. From Kap Swainson to Kap Gladstone,

the coast presents a dark, rugged, and alpine appearance from

seaward, with peaks rising steeply in precipitous cliffs. The

whole interior of the peninsula seems to be covered with ice

from which numerous glaciers flow. None of these reach the

sea in the S part.

7.7 Kap Hodgson (70°33'N., 21°30'W.), 700m high, is located 9

miles NNE of Kap Swainson with Kap Lister, steep and easily

identified, lying midway between them. Between Kap Hodgson and Kap Greg, 24 miles N, all the larger indentations have

glaciers at their heads.

7.7 Raffles O, located 1.5 miles N of Kap Hodgson, is one of

several islands which lie close off the coast between Kap

Hodgson and Kap Greg. It has a peak jutting out into the sea

and a rock, resembling a ruined castle, standing on its summit.

The other main islands are, from S to N, Rathbone O, Majskaer, and Glasgow O.

7.7 Kap Hoegh (70°43'N., 21°33'W.), located 10 miles N of

Kap Hodgson, is the E extremity of Sandbach Halvo, a rugged

promontory. A conspicuous hunter’s hut is reported to stand 1

mile W of the cape. Janus O, located 10 miles N of the cape,

has warm springs on its S side. This island lies in Holloway

Bugt, a small bay which indents the coast between Horsens

Fjord and Kap Greg.

7.7 Kap Greg (70°57'N., 21°35'W.) is 600m high and steep. It is

connected to the mainland by a narrow isthmus on which

stands a hunter’s hut. Randers Fjord and Mariager Fjord indent

the coast 3 miles W and 4 miles NW, respectively, of the cape.

7.7 Kap Buddicom is located 7.5 miles NNW of Kap Greg. A

mountain, 900m high, stands close within the cape and resembles a church.

7.7 Storefjord is entered between this cape and Kap Jones, 2

miles NNE. It extends 12 miles WSW between high mountain

ranges. Depths in the fairway of this fjord are reported to be

great and there are no known dangers. A bank, which is foul

and should be avoided, is reported to extend 4 miles E from

Kap Jones.

7.7 Kap Smith (71°15'N., 21°38'W.) is the SE extremity of an

unnamed island which rises to a height of 777m. It is separated

from the mainland, on the SW side, by Tvaersund and, on the

NW side, by Campbell Sund.

7.7 Kap Topham is located 5 miles N of Kap Smith and forms

the extremity of a narrow peninsula which separates Campbell

Sund from Neild Bugt. It is a sharp point of bare rock with a

peculiar stratification. Kap Hewitt is located 10 miles N of Kap

Smith and a small islet lies off it.

7.8 Kap Gladstone (71°31'N., 21°53'W.), located 8 miles

NNW of Kap Hewitt, is a bold headland which forms the N extremity of Liverpool Land. Two islands lie close offshore,

about 3 miles ESE of the cape.

7.8 Carlsberg Fjord is entered between Kap Gladstone and Kap

Wardlaw, 12 miles N. It extends 26 miles SSW and narrows to

a width of 2 miles near the head. Both sides of the outer part of

the fjord are much indented.

7.8 A small bank, which has a least known depth of 51m, lies in

the entrance to the fjord. This bank should be avoided ,as the

depths on it are very irregular and it may contain dangerous

pinnacle rocks.
118 Sector 7. Greenland—East Coast—Scoresby Sund to Kap Morris Jesup 

Pub. 181

7.8 Depths in the fairway of the fjord are deep; the least known

depth of 46m lies about 3.5 miles from its head. A rock, with a

depth of 2m or less, is reported to lie about 2.5 miles from the

head.

7.8 During early September, a vessel anchored, in a depth of

55m, soft mud, off the delta of a river located on the W shore of

the fjord. At this time, the fjord was clear of ice, except for a

few small growlers.

7.8 Canning Land (71°40'N., 22°12'W.), an indented peninsula,

separates the outer part of Carlsberg Fjord from Nathorst Fjord.

Kap Wardlaw is its NE extremity. Two submerged rocks, reported to be dangerous, lie about 1.5 miles N and 2.5 miles

NNE of the N extremity of this peninsula. A rock, with a depth

of 15m, lies about 3 miles NNE of the same point. The area lying between these rocks and the coast is reported to be foul.

7.8 Nathorst Fjord (71°41'N., 22°30'W.) is entered between the

N extremity of Canning Land and Kap Brown, 4 miles NW.

The fjord extends 14 miles SSW and its entrance is encumbered by foul ground. Depot O, a small and flat island, lies in

the inner part. A hunting hut stands close within each entrance

point; a third hut stands on the E shore opposite Depot O. Kap

Brown, 930m high, is a prominent reddish-brown headland.

7.8 Fleming Fjord is entered between Kap Brown and Kap Biot,

7 miles NNW. Its entrance is easily recognized by these two

bold headlands. The fjord extends 17 miles SW and generally

has deep depths in the fairway until near its head. A rock, with

a depth of 7m, is reported to lie about 1 mile SE of Kap Biot. In

several places on both sides of the fjord, the mountains rise

very steeply and terminate in sharp peaks. During the month of

August, anchorage was obtained by a vessel, in a depth of 58m,

in a bay located 5 miles SW of Kap Biot. A vessel also anchored, in a depth of 75m, off the SE shore of the fjord, 9 miles

within the entrance. At this time, the fjord was ice-free; however, during most years, it is reported to be filled with ice.

Davy Sund

7.9 Davy Sund (72°00'N., 22°00'W.), a large channel, is

entered between Kap Biot and Kap Simpson, 14 miles NNE. It

extends 12 miles NW and then becomes Kong Oscars Fjord.

The tidal currents in the channel are reported to be of considerable strength.

7.9 Antarctics Havn, a bay on the S side of Davy Sund, is entered 12 miles NW of Kap Biot. No dangers are known to exist

in this bay, but a shoal extends about 140m NW from its SE entrance point. The bay extends 3 miles SW to drying flats at its

head. Karlsbak, a hunting station, stands at its S corner. Vessels

can anchor, in a depth of 55m, good holding ground, near the

head of the bay, with the NW entrance point bearing 005°. 

7.9 Kap Simpson (72°07'N., 22°15'W.) is the SE extremity of

Traill O, the SW coast of which forms the NE side of Davy

Sund. The cape is formed by Vandyke Klipper, a stupendous

cliff, which rises directly from the sea at an angle of 50° or upwards, to a height of 729m. This cliff is predominantly bluegray and intersected by irregular strata of bright yellow and

red.

7.9 Drommebucten (Drommebugten), a small inlet, is located on

the N side of the channel, 8 miles WNW of Kap Simpson. The

shore between is steep, with mountains which rise to heights of

1,020m. 

Kong Oscars Fjord

7.10 Kong Oscars Fjord is entered between Antarctics Haven and Drommebugten.

7.10 Mesters Vig (72°08'N., 23°44'W.), a small cove, is located

13 miles NW of Antarctics Havn. It is unexamined but apparently shoals. Archers Oer, two small and low islands, are located close offshore, 2 miles N of the entrance to the cove. A

channel, with a depth of 4m, lies between the W island and the

mainland. A vessel is reported to have obtained anchorage, in a

depth of 47m, off the entrance to Mesters Vig, close S of Archers Oer.

7.10 Nyhavn (72°16'N., 23°53'W.), a bay 2 miles wide at its entrance, is located 5 miles NW of Archers Oer. A beacon stands

on the SE entrance point and four pairs of anchorage beacons

stand on the W shore of the bay. An airfield is reported to be

situated 1 mile S of the bay. Nyhavn was a former shipping

port for a lead mine situated 8 miles inland. It is no longer

used.

7.10 Ran Oer consists of two small islets which lie 5.5 and 7.5

miles NW of Archers Oer; a beacon stands on the SE and larger islet.

7.10 Menanders Oer, a chain of islets, extends 3 miles NNW from

a small projection located 12 miles NW of Archers Oer. Vessels can anchor, in a depth of 35m, close SW of this projection;

the berth is reported to be indicated by a pair of beacons.

7.10 Kap Petersons is located 6.5 miles from the NW extremity of

Menanders Oer. Several islets lie close N and SE of this cape; a

hunter’s hut stands on the coast 1 mile SE of it.

7.10 Haslums Oer (72°28'N., 24°05'W.), a group of islands and

rocks, lies close off a low projection on the NE side of the

fjord, 31 miles NW of Drommebugten.

7.10 Holms Bugt, a small bay, is entered between Haslums Oer

and Palisaderne, a low irregular-shaped peninsula, 3.5 miles N.

A small islet lies close off the S end of this peninsula. Hawleys

Rock, a submerged rock lying on a shoal, is located 3.25 miles

NW of Haslums Oer. A rock, awash, and a small islet lie 1 mile

SSW and 0.75 mile N, respectively, of Hawleys Rock. Caution

is necessary in this area due to the possibility of pinnacles.

Beacons stand at the head of Holms Bugt and in line, bearing

about 083°, lead between Hawleys Rock and the rock, awash,

SSW of it. Vessels can anchor, in a depth of 46m, about 0.75

mile offshore.

7.10 Segelsallskapets Fjord (72°26'N., 25°00'W.) is entered between Kap Petersons and Kap Lagerberg, 6 miles N. Its entrance is encumbered by a chain of islands and rocks which

extends 5 miles NE from an unnamed point located 4 miles W

of Kap Petersons. Beacons stand on some of these islands.

7.10 The fjord extends 12 miles SW to Kap Maechel (72°23'N.,

25°16'W.), the NE extremity of Nathorst Land. It then divides into

Alpe Fjord, which extends 20 miles SSW, and Forsblads Fjord,

which extends 20 miles W. Inland of Kap Maechel, the land rises

steeply to heights of over 2,000m. Arwidssons O, an island, lies

close off Kap Maechel. It has been reported that vessels can anchor in the channel between the island and the cape.

7.11 Hammers O, an island 60m high, is located 1 mile

NNE of Kap Lagerberg. Kap Dufva is located 8 miles N of

Hammers O. Between Kap Dufva and Kap Alfred, 14 miles

NW, the coast forms the SW side of Narhvalsund, the channel
Sector 7. Greenland—East Coast—Scoresby Sund to Kap Morris Jesup 119

Pub. 181

which passes between Lyells Land and Ella O and leads to

Kempes Fjord.

7.11 The E side of the inner part of Kong Oscars Fjord is bold,

steep, and without prominent features or projections. The W

and NW extremities of Traill O are each marked by a beacon.

7.11 Ella O (72°51'N., 25°00'W.), an island 1,360m high, is triangular in shape and mountainous. From Kap Harry, the SE extremity of the island, the S coast extends 10 miles NW in a

steep, almost vertical line of cliff, 760 to 1,040m high, with the

skyline being unbroken by glaciers or peaks.

7.11 Winter ice normally closes navigation from October to June.

Fog often lies off the station when there is much drift ice in the

fjord and sound. 

7.11 Solitaerbugt, a bay on the NW side of Ella O, is sheltered

from all except N winds. A scientific station, consisting of a

large red building and two smaller buildings, stands on the

shore of a cove at the head of the bay. The W entrance point of

the cove is foul for 90m offshore, but elsewhere in the bay the

depths are deep. Range beacons, in line bearing 178°, lead to

an anchorage; the berth lies in a depth of 55m, 185m offshore.

Vessels may also anchor slightly E of the range line, in a depth

of 44m. Small craft can anchor, in depths of 5.5 to 7m, within

the cove. 

7.11 Maria O (72°57'N., 24°54'W.), an island, 269m high, is located 2 miles N of Ella O. Submerged rocks have been reported

to lie within 0.5 mile of this island.

7.11 Shoal depths of 6m and 12m lie, in the fairway of the main

fjord, 0.5 mile E and 1 mile NE, respectively, of the E extremity of Maria O. Ruths O, an island 530m high, is located 1.5

miles N of Maria O.

7.11 Kempes Fjord is entered NW of the W extremity of Ella O. It

trends SW for about 15 miles to Kap Hedlund (72°44'N.,

26°12'W.). The fjord then divides into three branches. Dicksons Fjord, the N branch, extends 20 miles WNW to Hisingers

Gletscher at its head. Rohss Fjord, the W branch, extends 15

miles WSW to a sloping valley at its head. Rhedins Fjord, the S

branch, extends 10 miles SSW to Wahlenbergs Gletscher at its

head.

7.11 Antarctics Sund (73°06'N., 25°23'W.), entered N of Ruth

O, extends 20 miles WNW between the NE coast of Suess

Land and the SW coast of Ymers O. It connects the head of

Kong Oscars Fjord with Kejser Franz Josephs Fjord.

7.11 Karl Jacobsens Bugt lies 3 miles NNE of Ruth O on the

Ymer O coast. A reef, 3 miles N of Ruth O, extends 0.5 mile

offshore and is steep-to on its SW side. In rough weather, it is

reported that the sea breaks on the reef. A dangerous rock lies

in mid-channel about 2 miles NW of the reef. 

Davy Sund and Kong Oscars Fjord to Kejser

Franz Joseph Fjord

7.12 Kap Moorsom (72°10'N., 22°07'W.) is located 4

miles NE of the N entrance point of Davy Sund. It is a short

promontory formed by a sharp ridge which juts out from the

NE end of Vandyke Klipper. An unnamed bay indents the coast

between this cape and Kap Young, 6 miles N. Rock O, an island 80m high, lies close E of Kap Young and should be given

a wide berth because of shoal water around it.

7.12 Mountnorris Fjord is entered between Kap Young and Kap

Parry, 8 miles N. This fjord extends 16 miles NW to low land at

its head, through which several rivers flow.

7.12 Vega Sund (72°37'N., 22°28'W.) is a narrow passage which

separates Traill O and Geographical Society O. It is entered between an unnamed point, located 7 miles N of Kap Parry, and

Kap MacClintock, 18 miles N. The passage extends 50 miles

NW and W to its junction with Kong Oscars Fjord, opposite

the N end of Ella O. Franklins O, an island 70m high, lies 5

miles SE of Kap MacClintock.

7.12 Kap Palander, marked by a beacon, projects from the S shore

of Vega Sund 8 miles NW of its S entrance point. Nordenskiolds O, located 1 mile N of the cape, is the largest of a group of

islands which lie close off the S coast of Geographical Society

O; its S extremity is marked by a beacon.

7.12 Kap Hovgard (72°42'N., 22°36'W.) projects from the N

shore of the passage, 12 miles W of Kap MacClintock. Malia

Havn, entered W of the cape, affords sheltered anchorage for

small vessels.

7.12 To the W of Kap Hovgard, the passage narrows considerably

and is encumbered for 8 miles to the NW by Scott Kelties Oer,

a group of islets, shoals, and rocks. Several drying patches lie

between the N islet of this group and the N shore of Vega Sund.

The fairway between the largest island of the group and the

coast of Traill O, to the S, is indicated by two pairs of range

beacons; the least depth on or near the range lines is reported to

be 9m.

7.12 To the W of Scott Kelties Oer, no known dangers have been

reported within Vega Sund. Osternaes, a point on the S side of

the passage, is located 4 miles W of the NW islet of the group

and is marked by a beacon.

7.12 Vessels, entering the passage from Kong Oscars Fjord, can

anchor, in a depth of 46m, with a hunting station (Sverresborg),

which stands on the shore close N of the NW islet of Scott

Kelties Oer, bearing 074°, distant 0.5 mile. 

7.13 Kap Mackenzie (72°55'N., 21°55'W.), formed by a

basalt cliff 150m high, is the NE extremity of Geographical Society O. Except for Kap Mackenzie, the E coast of the island is

low and rises gradually to a range about 10 miles inland. Cambridge Bugt, a bay located at about the middle of this section of

coast, has a group of islets lying in its entrance. A rock, with a

depth of 2m, lies about 4 miles SE of Kap Mackenzie. A shoal,

with a depth of 46m, was reported (1976) to lie about 14 miles

ENE of the same cape.

7.13 Sofia Sund is approached between Kap Mackenzie and Kap

Wijkander, the E extremity of Ymers O, 23 miles NW.

7.13 La Place Oer, a group of islets and rocks, lies between 6 and

11 miles NW of Kap Mackenzie, on the S side of the approach.

Several small islets and rocks lie off the coast between La

Place Oer and Kap Mackenzie.

7.13 Brochs Oer, a group of islands and islets, lies in the approach

9 miles NW of La Place Oer. Borgoen, the largest island of this

group, is located 5.5 miles SE of Kap Wijkander. A rock,

awash, and a flat islet lie 2 miles and 3.75 miles, respectively,

SE of Kap Wijkander.

7.13 Caution is necessary in the approaches to Sofia Sund as uncharted dangers may exist.

7.13 Robertsons O, an island 158m high, lies close off the N coast

of Geographical Society O, 6.5 miles SSW of Kap Wijkander.

A beacon stands on its N end.

7.13 Sofia Sund is entered from the E between Kap Humboldt, lo-
120 Sector 7. Greenland—East Coast—Scoresby Sund to Kap Morris Jesup 

Pub. 181

cated 5 miles SW of Kap Wijkander, and the N end of Robertsons O. The entrance channel is narrow and deep with tidal

currents which attain rates of up to 3 knots. The sound extends

28 miles WSW, between Geographical Society O and Ymers

O, to its junction with Kong Oscars Fjord. The depths in its

fairway are reported to be deep, with no known dangers.

7.13 Vessels may obtain anchorage close NE of Kap Humboldt, in

a depth of 58m, with a hunting station standing 0.5 mile N of

the cape bearing 313°, distant about 0.3 mile. When approaching the berth, vessels should keep in depths of more than 27m

as a crescent-shaped reef fringes the shore abreast the hunting

station.

7.13 It was reported (1941) that a vessel anchored during September, in a depth of 55m, sand, 1.5 miles W of Robertsons O, 0.5

mile off the S shore of the sound. At this time, several ice

bergs, both grounded and floating, were observed near Robertsons O.

7.13 Ymers O (73°10'N., 24°30'W.) is a large mountainous island lying on the N side of Sofia Sund. It is almost cut into two

parts by Dusens Fjord. The E part of the island is barren. However, the W end, particularly around Noa So, a lake located in

the valley between the head of Dusens Fjord and the W coast,

is rich in vegetation and animal life. The N part of the island,

which is only about half the size of the S part, is called Gunnar

Andersson Land.

7.13 Dusens Fjord is entered between Kap Wijkander and Kap

Grah (Graah), the E extremity of Gunnar Andersson Land, 8

miles NW. It extends 35 miles W to within 5 miles of the W

coast of the island. Vinteroer, a group of islands, lies in the entrance to the fjord. A channel, 1.5 miles wide, leads between

Kap Grah and the largest island of the group and has depths of

20 to 24m. The fjord narrows about 5 miles from its head and

navigation farther W is restricted to boats. 

7.13 It is reported that anchorage can be obtained about 5 miles

from the head of the fjord, close E of the point at which it narrows. Within the islands of the Vinteroer group, the holding

ground is good and the shelter is reported to make excellent

winter quarters, as the depths are sufficiently shoal to prevent

icebergs from drifting in.

Kejser Franz Joseph Fjord

7.14 Kejser Franz Joseph Fjord is entered between Kap

Grah and Kap Franklin, 16 miles E. This great fjord has a total

length of almost 100 miles. It first trends WNW between the N

coasts of Ymers O and the SW coasts of Gauss Halvo. Two

branches, Nordfjord and Geologfjord, extend from the N side

of the fjord, 30 miles within the entrance. Nordfjord extends N

between Gauss Halvo and Strindberg Land and Geologfjord

extends NNW between Strindberg Land and Andres Land.

Antarctics Sund branches ESE from the fjord about 60 miles

from its entrance and, about 8 miles farther W, Isfjord branches

WNW. Finally, Kjerulfs Fjord branches S about 5 miles from

the head of the main fjord. 

7.14 From Kap Grah to Kap Petersens, 38 miles WNW, the S side

of the fjord is steep and even with few indentations and no

known dangers. Kap Petersens, the NW extremity of Ymers O,

is comparatively low. A prominent red mountain, with a light

stripe extending diagonally across its face, stands close S of the

cape.

7.14 Blomsternbugten, a wide bay, is located between Kap Petersens and a point on the W coast of Ymers O, 6 miles SW. A

hunting hut stands on the shore at the head of this bay. Vessels

may anchor, in a depth of 60m, large broken stones, about

300m offshore, close S of the hunting hut. Vessels should approach the anchorage slowly on an E course, steering for a rectangle mark painted on the shore, as the depths decrease rapidly

to 9m at about 45m from the shore. 

7.14 Between Kap Franklin and the E entrance point of Nordfjord, 36 miles WNW, the N coast of Kejser Franz Joseph Fjord

is formed by the SW coast of Gauss Halvo. Margrethedal, a

prominent valley, extends NE from the coast 10 miles WNW of

Kap Franklin. A river, which flows through this valley, enters

the fjord through a small delta. A prominent hunting hut stands

close W of this delta. Vessels can anchor, in a depth of 22m,

mud and sand, 555m offshore, SW of the hut. Vessels should

approach this anchorage with caution until the soundings indicate that the delta bank off the river has been reached.

7.14 Nordfjord (73°40'N., 24°17'W.) extends 14 miles N to

Walter Hausen (Waltershausen) Gletscher at its head. A river

enters the fjord 10 miles N of the entrance and depths of 18 to

27m are reported to lie close offshore near its mouth. A bank,

with a least depth of 49m, lies in the entrance to the fjord and

caution is required in this area as the depths are very irregular. 

7.14 Moskusokse Fjord, an arm, is entered from Nordfjord at the

E side of the head. It extends E, SE, and NE for a total distance

of 35 miles between Gauss Halvo and Hudson Land. Mountains, up to 1,220m high, stand on each side of the entrance.

Anchorage may be obtained close off the N shore of this fjord,

about 7 miles within the entrance, and also 5 miles from its

head.

7.14 Geologfjord (73°35'N., 24°40'W.) extends 34 miles NNW

to Nunatak Gletsscher at its head. It passes between mountains

which rise to heights of over 2,100m and show a variety of superbly-colored strata. Bjorne O, a small island, lies in the middle of this fjord, 3 miles within the entrance.

7.15 Andres Land (73°30'N., 26°00'W.), an extensive

mountainous district, forms the N side of Kejser Franz Joseph

Fjord between the entrance to Geologfjord and Kap Lapparent,

32 miles SW. The mountains consist of bright and multicolored

strata; they are reported to be among the most exquisitely tinted in the entire fjord region.

7.15 Elenoras Bugt indents the NW side of Kejser Franz Joseph

Fjord between 8 and 15 miles SW of the entrance to Geologfjord. It is reported that vessels can anchor close S of the mouth

of a river that flows through a valley at the head of this bay.

7.15 Teufelsschloss (Djoevelslot), located 1.5 miles S of the S entrance point of Elenoras Bugt, is a striking formation that rises

to a height of 1,520m. It is reported to be a colossal cubic rock

with the towers and terraces resembling a ruined castle. 

7.15 Isfjord (73°22'N., 27°00'W.) is entered between Kap Lapparent and the E extremity of Frenkels Land, 4 miles W. This

fjord extends 24 miles NW to where Gerard de Geer Gletscher

and Jaette Gletscher flow into its head. It is believed that most

of the large icebergs in the main fjord come from these two

glaciers.

7.15 Renbugten, an inlet, is located on the E side of Isfjord, 7.5

miles within the entrance. The cliffs rise steeply from the sea,

on both sides of its entrance, to heights of 900m. It has been re-
Sector 7. Greenland—East Coast—Scoresby Sund to Kap Morris Jesup 121

Pub. 181

ported that vessels anchored, in a depth of 37m, near the head

of this inlet and, in a depth of 91m, 230m from the head.

7.15 Kejser Franz Joseph Fjord continues 24 miles W from the

entrance to Isfjord and continues to the foot of Nordenskiold

Gletscher.

7.15 Kjerulf Fjord (73°00'N., 27°23'W.) branches off the main

fjord a short distance from the foot of Nordenskiolds Gletscher.

It extends 11 miles SSW and terminates in mudflats. This fjord

has been described as a veritable graveyard for icebergs which

did not originate here but were driven in from Isfjord by wind

or tide.

Kejser Franz Joseph Fjord to Gael Hamkes Bugt

7.16 Kap Franklin, located 21 miles NNW of Kap Mackenzie, is the SE extremity of Gauss Halvo and the N entrance

point of Kejser Franz Joseph Fjord. Between this cape and Kap

Bennet, 14 miles NE, shoal waters and reefs are reported to

front the mouths of the many rivers which discharge along this

stretch.

7.16 Bontekoe O (73°07'N., 21°20'W.), an island, 353m high,

lies 15 miles ESE of Kap Franklin. An isolated shoal patch,

with a depth of 12m, was reported (1954) to lie about 6 miles

W of this island.

7.16 Mackenzie Bugt (73°26'N., 21°30'W.) is entered between Kap

Bennet and the coast 6 miles NE. Depths of 12 to 55m lie in the

bay, but the NW part is shoal. A submerged rock lies about 1.25

miles off the W side of the bay, midway between Kap Bennet and

the head. Vessels can anchor, in depths of 20 to 37m, between 1

and 2 miles from the head and 0.5 mile off the NE shore. Ice conditions in the bay are controlled by the winds and tides.

7.16 Hold With Hope (73°35'N., 21°00'W.) is the name applied

to a tract of land which lies between Foster Bugt and Gael

Hamkes Bugt, 30 miles farther N. High hills, very prominent

from offshore, form its SE side and large stretches of low land

lie to the N and W of its SE end. Several hunting huts stand

along the shore.

7.16 Kap Broer Ruys is located 6 miles NE of the S end of Hold

With Hope and 22 miles NE of Kap Bennet. A group of mountains stands close within it. A long and narrow stretch of stony

shore, which interrupts the coastal cliffs, is located SW of the

cape.

7.16 Between the cape and Arundel O, 15 miles NNE, the coast

recedes and the depths are comparatively shoal.

7.16 Holland O, a small island, lies 4 miles N of Kap Broer Ruys

and 1.5 miles offshore. A submerged rock lies 1.75 miles N of

the W extremity of the island. Depths of less than 5.5m are reported to lie between the island and the mainland. A shoal

patch, with a least depth of 11m, lies 2.25 miles ENE of the island. Temporary anchorage was taken by a vessel, in a depth of

44m, close SE of this patch.

7.17 Knudshoved (73°43'N., 20°27'W.), a small tongue of

land, is located 7 miles NNW of Holland O and forms the SW

entrance to Carlshavn. A rock, with a depth of 4m, and an

above-water rock, Irene O (Utburden), lie 1.75 miles and 4

miles, respectively, SE of the tongue. 

7.17 Carlshavn, a small bay, is entered between Knudshoved and

Kap Kraus, 4 miles NE. Several submerged rocks lie in its entrance and the inner part of the bay is very shoal.

7.17 Arundel O, a small and rocky island, lies 3.75 miles ESE of

Kap Kraus. A rock, with a least depth of 10m, was reported

(1977) to lie about 2 miles ESE of this island.

7.17 Home Forland (73°50'N., 20°30'W.) is a promontory which

forms the NE part of Hold With Hope. Its E side extends from

Kap Kraus to Kap James, 6 miles N. When seen from the NE,

the promontory can be distinguished by two remarkable hummocks at its extremities. A hunting hut stands close N of Kap

James.

7.17 Jackson O, an island, 283m high, lies 2 miles NE of Kap

James. It has steep cliffs and slopes on the NE side with depths

of 3.6m close inshore. 

Gael Hamkes Bugt

7.18 Gael Hamkes Bugt (74°00'N., 20°00'W.), a large bay,

is entered between Kap James and Kap Borlase Warren, 28

miles NE. It extends over 40 miles NW; its greater part is occupied by Clavering O. The bay is deep, with few obstructions to

navigation.

7.18 Clavering O (74°15'N., 21°05'W.) is one of the best known

and most frequently-visited places on the E coast of Greenland.

From a distance, the island appears to consist of rugged mountain masses which fall abruptly to the sea on all sides. However, along much of the coast, there is a narrow strip of low land

on which vegetation is abundant.

7.18 Finsch Oer, a group of islands, lies in the W part of Gael

Hamkes Bugt between 13 and 17 miles NNW of Kap James.

Store Finsch, 376m high, is the largest island of the group. It is

indented by Hirdhavn, a small bay, on the N side. The entrance

to this bay is encumbered by submerged rocks. A 5.5m shoal

patch is reported to lie about 3.75 miles E of Store Finsch.

7.18 Submerged rocks are reported to lie in the passages between

the other islands in the group; however, the depths in the passage lying between Store Finsch and Clavering O are deep.

7.18 Kap Borlase Warren (74°16'N., 19°23'W.), the N entrance

point of Gael Hamkes Bugt, consists of a sharp projecting

group of rocks. It is also the SE extremity of Wollaston Forland, an extensive peninsula. Anchorage is reported to be obtainable 0.4 mile offshore, 1 mile SW of the cape.

7.18 Herschell Bjerg, a mountain 683m high, stands 5 miles W of

the cape and a main hunting station stands on the S extremity

of Wollaston Forland.

7.18 Kap Breusing, the E extremity of Clavering O, is located 12

miles WSW of Kap Borlase Warren. Kap Mary, the SE extremity of Clavering O, is located 2 miles S of Kap Breusing and

rises to a height of 563m, 1 mile inland. Dahls Skaer, a rocky

islet 67m high, lies close offshore, 2 miles WSW of Kap Mary.

7.18 Dodemandsbugten (74°07'N., 20°52'W.), a slight indentation in the S side of Clavering O, is located 12 miles WSW of

Kap Mary. A river valley, located at the head of this indentation, is rich in vegetation and stands out against the bare surrounding countryside. A hunting station stands 0.5 mile E of

the river mouth. Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

37m, 0.5 mile from the head of the indentation.

7.19 Eskimonaes (Eskimonaesset) (74°05'N., 21°17'W.),

the S extremity of Clavering O, is located 7 miles WSW of

Dodemandsbugten. A dangerous submerged rock lies close S

of the point.
122 Sector 7. Greenland—East Coast—Scoresby Sund to Kap Morris Jesup 

Pub. 181

7.19 Osthavn, on the E side of Eskimonaes, affords anchorage, in

depths of 38 to 51m. The berth lies on the alignment, bearing

049°, of two white circles, which are painted on rocks at the

NE entrance point, and 275m from the front mark. A boat landing is located at the NW corner of the harbor near the former

site of a scientific station.

7.19 Vesthavn, on the W side of Eskimonaes, also affords anchorage, in a depth of 46m, 0.25 mile from its head. Range beacons, in line bearing 040°, indicate the berth. A boat landing is

located at the E side of the head.

7.19 Eskimonaes settlement and a scientific station, with a flagstaff and radio masts, were formerly situated at the NW end of

Osthavn.

7.19 Godthab Golf (74°06'N., 22°00'W.) is that part of Gael

Hamkes Bugt which lies on the SW side of Clavering O, inside

of Finsch Oer. The gulf is entered between Kap Stosch and

Stromtangen, 6 miles NNE. From its entrance, 5 miles wide,

just W of Finsch Oer, Godthab Golf widens to about 12 miles

at its head. 

7.19 Kap Stosch (74°04'N., 21°43'W.) is the NW extremity of

Hold With Hope, which forms the S side of the gulf as far as

Loch Fyne. A submerged rock lies close off the W side of this

point.

7.19 Loch Fyne is entered between a point, located 5 miles SW of

Kap Stosch, and Stromtangen, 2 miles farther W. It extends 22

miles SSE, between Hold With Hope and Hudson Land, to

within 5 miles of the head of Moskusokse Fjord. Loch Fyne

narrows to a width of 0.25 mile for a short distance, 6 miles

within the entrance. The tidal currents in the narrows were reported to be quite strong.

7.19 Vessels can anchor, in depths of 9 to 15m, 3 miles SSE of

Stromtangen and, in depths of 7 to 9m, 1.5 miles farther S.

7.20 Wordies Bugt (74°01'N., 22°15'W.) is entered between Stromtangen and Kap Ruth, 6 miles NW. The great

Wordies Gletscher flows into the head of the bay; several

mountains (nunataks) rise above it. Kap Ruth is the SE extremity of Jordanhill, a wide promontory which rises to a height of

1,410m.

7.20 Hansen Havn, located on the N side of Jordanhill, is entered

between Kap Eva, 10 miles NNW of Stromtangen, and Kap

Adam, 1 mile farther NW. Depths of 4m lie 0.75 mile E and

0.75 mile W of Kap Eva. The inlet extends 2 miles W and narrows to a width of 0.25 mile near the head where there is a

depth of 14m.

7.20 Copelands Fjord (74°16'N., 22°02'W.), a narrow extension

of Godthab Golf, is entered 4 miles NE of Kap Adam and extends 8 miles NNE. Kap Oetker, the W extremity of Clavering

O, is located 1.5 miles within the entrance.

7.20 Granta Fjord is entered 5.5 miles within the entrance to Copelands Fjord and extends 7 miles W. A shoal, with a least

depth of 2m, extends 0.75 mile N from its S entrance point and

almost to the N shore of Granta Fjord. Within the entrance,

there are depths of 33 to 84m.

7.20 Young Sund is entered between Kap Breusing (74°13'N.,

20°06'W.) and the SW coast of Wollaston Forland, 4.5 miles

NE. The sound extends 17 miles NNW, between Wollaston

Forland and Clavering O, to its junction with Tyrolerfjord. Clavering Bugt, a wide bay, indents the coast between Kap Breusing and a point located 9 miles NNW. Basalt O, a small island

80m high, lies close off the N part of this bay.

7.20 Kap Berghaus, the SW extremity of Wollaston Forland, lies

4 miles N of Kap Breusing. A hunting hut stands on the cape.

7.20 Sandoen (74°15'N., 20°09'W.), an islet, is located 1 mile S

of Kap Berghaus. It is completely covered with sand and gravel

and is so low that drift ice piles up on it during winter storms.

Depths of about 6m lie in the channel between the islet and

Kap Berghaus. Vessels are advised to pass well S of this islet,

as depths in its vicinity are very irregular.

7.21 Sandodden (Daneborg) (74°18'N., 20°13'W.), a hunting settlement and radio station, is situated 2 miles NW of Kap

Berghaus. Anchorage is obtainable, in a depth of 18m, sand,

good holding ground, 365m offshore. Ring bolts are available

on the shore for securing sternlines. The settlement can be contacted by VHF. There are no pilots, but persons with local

knowledge are available. Vessels up to 90m in length and 7m

draft have used the anchorage. 

7.21 Tide rises about 1.3m at springs and 0.9m at neaps. The dark

period lasts from 3 November to 9 February; the midnight sun

period lasts from 24 April to 18 August. 

7.21 Zackenburg Bugt, a bay, is located 14 miles NW of Kap

Berghaus. A hunting hut stands on its E side. A mudbank, the

outer edge of which is steep-to, extends 0.5 mile from the

mouth of a river lying at the head of the bay. Anchorage is obtainable, in a depth of 16m, 1 mile SW of the hunting hut, between 300 and 365m offshore. Caution is necessary when

approaching the anchorage.

7.21 Tyrolerfjord (74°28'N., 21°11'W.) extends W from Young

Sund for a distance of 16 miles. It passes between A. P. Olsens

Land and Clavering O to Kap Ehrenberg (74°26'N.,

21°46'W.). The fjord then turns NW for 12 miles and passes

between A. P. Olsens Land and Payers Land to a river that

drains Pasterze Gletscher. Rudis Bugt, wider than the fjord,

branches S for about 4.5 miles to the N end of Revet.

Gael Hamkes Bugt to Hochstetterbugten

7.22 Between Kap Borlase Warren and Kap Berlin, 27

miles N, the coast is formed by the E side of Wollaston Forland, an extensive peninsula. The SE part of this peninsula is

rugged and mountainous; its N part is still rugged, but much

lower. Several hunting huts are reported to stand along this

stretch of coast.

7.22 Pendulum Oer (74°37'N., 18°39'W.) lies close NE of Wollaston Forland and is separated from it by Claveringstraedt. It

Sandodden
Sector 7. Greenland—East Coast—Scoresby Sund to Kap Morris Jesup 123

Pub. 181

consists of Sabine O and Lille Pendulum O, two large islands;

Hvalros O and Bass Rock, two small islands; and several islets

and rocks. An island about 220m long and 50m wide has been

reported (2010) between Sabine O and Pendulum O, about 1

mile NE of Hansa Bugt. The island’s longitudinal direction lies

in a NE to SW direction. 

7.22 Kap Wynn, located 15 miles NNE of Kap Borlase Warren, is

formed by a precipitous cliff, 210m high. Several islets and

rocks lie close off the cape.

7.22 Claveringstraedt is entered between Kap Wynn and Hvalros

O, 3.5 miles ENE. The strait extends 6 miles WNW and then 8

miles N to its junction with Hochstetterbugten. A chain of

rocks, above and below-water, extends N for about 1.5 miles

from a position on the S shore of the strait, 3.5 miles NW of

Kap Wynn. A depth of 26m lies close off the outermost rock.

7.22 Hvalros O (Walrus Island) (74°31'N., 18°49'W.) lies on the

N side of the approach to Claveringstraedet. When viewed

from E or W, the island resembles a walrus asleep on the ice.

Depths of 9m and 14m lie in the middle of the channel that

leads between this island and Sabine O.

7.22 Germania Havn, a small and almost circular harbor, is located at the SE extremity of Sabine O. Depths of 3.7m and less lie

in the entrance. Griper Red, a roadstead lying close W of Germania Havn, affords anchorage, but there is little shelter from

storms and, at times, the berths are dangerous because of ice.

Vessels may anchor 1 mile offshore with the W entrance point

of Germania Havn bearing 075°, the N end of Hvalros O bearing 104°, and Kap Wynn bearing 207°.

7.23 Lars Jakobsens Pynt (74°33'N., 19°12'W.), the SW

extremity of Sabine O, is a long narrow peninsula which

projects into Claveringstraedet to within 1 mile of the coast of

the mainland. Heimlands Havn, an inlet, is located on the NW

side of the peninsula. Two small islets lie close off its N entrance point. The inlet affords good anchorage, in a depth of

44m, with Lars Jakobsens Pynt bearing 128° and the outermost

of the two small islets bearing 331°.

7.23 Pendulum Straedet leads between Sabine O and Lille Pendulum O. It extends NW for 7 miles and leads to Hochstetterbugten. A chain of islets and submerged rocks lies in the middle of the strait and extends 1 mile ENE from a position 3 miles

SE of Kap Neumayer, the N extremity of Sabine O. Another

chain, consisting of three small islets, lies 2.5 miles farther S

and has very irregular depths in its vicinity.

7.23 Hansa Bugt (74°38'N., 18°47'W.), located 3 miles SE of

Kap Neumayer, indents the E coast of Sabine O. It extends SW

for 2 miles and is believed to be navigable; however, it has not

been examined.

7.23 When navigating Pendulum Straedet, vessels are advised to

favor the Lille Pendulum O side where there are no known dangers.

7.23 Lille Pendulum O (74°40'N., 18°30'W.) is considered to be

an excellent landfall when approaching the mainland from SE.

The island rises steeply on all sides and attains a height of

602m in the center. Hunting huts stand on its N and S sides.

Kap Hartlaub, the NE extremity of the island, lies at the end of

a steep and narrow promontory. Bass Rock, 142m high, lies 0.5

mile off this cape. A traveler’s hut is reported to stand on the

rock.

Hochstetterbugten

7.24 Hochstetterbugten, a large bay, is bounded on the S

side by Pendulum Oer and Wollaston Forland, on the N side by

Shannon O and Hochstetters Forland, and on the W side by the

mainland. The principal entrance is from the E, between Lille

Pendulum O and Shannon O, 17 miles N. The bay is also entered from the S by way of Claveringstraedet or Pendulum

Straedet, and from the N by way of Shannon Sund.

7.24 Albrecht Bugt, a wide open bay, is entered between Kap

Berlin (74°41'N., 19°25'W.) and Kap Schumacher, 12 miles

W. An islet, with a submerged rock (position doubtful) lying

near its E side, is located close E of Kap Schumacher. Another

larger islet lies close NW of the cape.

7.24 Lindemans Fjord, entered 6 miles W of Kap Schumacher,

extends 8 miles W between A.P. Olsens Land and Thomas Thomsens Land.

7.24 Kuhn O lies in the SW part of Hochstetterbugten. This island

is separated from the head of the bay by Fligelys Fjord, which

is unnavigable because of shoals in its narrowest part. Kuhn O

is mountainous and its E coast is steep, but a valley extends N

and S through the island. Several hunting huts stand along the

shore.

7.24 Kap Hamburg, the S extremity of Kuhn O, is located 2 miles

NNE of Kap Schumacher. Kap Maurer, a low and sandy cape,

is located 11 miles NNE of Kap Hamburg and forms the E extremity of the island.

7.24 Anchorage is afforded, in a depth of 40m, mud, with a hunting hut, which stands 1.5 miles SSW of Kap Maurer, bearing

298°, and the SE extremity of the coast bearing 213°. During

the approach to the berth from a position 5 miles N of Bass

Rock, the current was observed to set SE at a rate of up to 3

knots.

7.24 Bastians Bugt, located on the E coast of Kuhn O, is an Lshaped indentation. It is entered between Kap Maurer and Kap

Bremen, 8.5 miles NNW. The S side of this indentation is bordered by a flat foreshore with scanty vegetation. The N side is

more rugged and made up of stony flats. Vessels can anchor, in

a depth of 18m, about 180m off the mouth of a stream that discharges 0.75 mile SW of Kap Bremen.

7.24 Grandjeans Fjord (75°00'N., 21°30'W.) is entered between

Kap Negri and Kap Buch, 5 miles NNE. It extends in a general

W direction, with many turns, to Heinkels Gletscher at its head.

The fjord separates Thomas Thomsen Land from C. H. Ostenfelds Land. Kap Buch is a steep headland and a good landmark

from seaward; the land close W of it rises to a height of over

1,100m. Ullas O lies in the middle of Grandjeans Fjord, 4

miles within its entrance. 

7.25 Freedens Bugt (75°01'N., 18°00'W.), a wide open

bay on the S coast of Shannon O, lies between Kap Philip

Broke and Kap David Gray, 12 miles W. Caution should be exercised when entering the bay. Depths decrease rapidly N of

the line joining the entrance points and the bottom is irregular.

A reef, with a depth of 2m (2009), lies 3 miles W of Kap Philip

Broke. A number of streams flow into the bay. The greater

depths are reported to be in the W part, close to Kap David

Gray.

7.25 Anchorage has been obtained in several places within the bay;

however, the recommended berth lies, in a depth of 33m, 1.25
124 Sector 7. Greenland—East Coast—Scoresby Sund to Kap Morris Jesup 

Pub. 181

miles E of Kap David Gray with the summit of Tellplatte, standing

at a height of 196m, 3 miles N of the cape, bearing 350°.

7.25 Kap Tramnitz is located 7 miles WNW of Kap David Gray.

Numerous short streams discharge along the coast between

these capes.

7.25 Kap Rink (75°08'N., 19°37'W.), the SE extremity of Hochstetter Forland, is located 13 miles NW of Kap Tramnitz and

forms the NW entrance point of the S end of Shannon Sund. A

bank, with a least known depth of 29m, extends 2.5 miles SW

and 3.5 miles SE from Kap Rink. Vessels are advised to stay at

least 4 miles from this bank.

7.25 Nanok (75°09'N., 19°47'W.) (World Port Index No. 20), a

hunting station, is situated 2.5 miles WNW of Kap Rink, near

the head of a slight indentation. Vessels can anchor, in a depth

of 55m, in an open roadstead lying 0.5 mile offshore, with Kap

Rink bearing 093° and the hunting station bearing 017°. 

7.25 Mainly due to the continual movement of pack ice S through

Shannon Sund, it is not uncommon for a summer to pass without a vessel being able to reach the vicinity of Nanok.

7.25 Kulhus (75°12'N., 20°00'W.), located 4.5 miles NW of

Nanok, is the site of an abandoned scientific station.

Anchorage is reported to be obtainable close offshore, abreast

the site. An abandoned coal mine is situated close S of the

former station.

7.25 Peters Bugt is entered between Karls Pynt, located 3 miles N

of Kulhus, and Kap Klinkerfues, 9 miles WNW. Lauge Kochs

Vig, located 2 miles N of Karls Pynt, is a small cove with a hunting hut at its head. Jonsbu, located 4 miles ENE of Kap Klinkerfues, is the site of a former radio and hunting station which was

destroyed (1979). Anchorage is available, in a depth of 46m,

with the SE extremity of the land near Kap Klinkerfues bearing

240° and the site of the former station bearing 356°. Safe anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of 55m, 180m off the mouth

of a stream located 2 miles SW of Jonsbu.

7.25 Ardencaple Fjord (75°20'N., 21°00'W.) is entered between

Kap Klinkerfues and Kap Reinhardt, 4 miles W. The fjord extends 15 miles NW to Kap Daly, where it forks. Smallefjord,

the S fork, extends 18 miles WNW and Bredefjord, the N fork,

extends NW for about the same distance. The shores of the

fjord and its forks are steep and the depths in the fairways are

deep throughout.

7.25 Caution.—A submerged rock lies about 2.7 miles S of Kap

Kilinkfaus and 3.7 miles ESE of Kap Reinhardt, near the entrance to Ardencaple Fjord. A rock, with a depth of 2m, lies in

the entrance of Ardencaple Fjord near position 75°14.7'N,

20°40.6'W.

Hochstetterbugten to Bessel Fjord

7.26 Shannon O has the least elevation of any large island

off this part of the coast. When viewed from the E, it appears

long and low, lying far out in the ice with a single moderately

high plateau breaking its otherwise horizontal contour. Meyersteins Bjerg, 305m high, stands near the NE end of the island

and is its highest point. A few hills stand on its E side, otherwise the island consists of muddy swamps. The whole island is

of volcanic formation and abounds in traces of former Eskimo

occupation.

7.26 The E coast of Shannon O extends 15 miles NNE from Kap

Philip Broke (74°56'N., 17°37'W.) to Kap Pansch, the N extremity of a low peninsula.

7.26 Caution.—It was reported that several submerged rocks exist and they are indicated by growing kelp, off the S part of this

coast.

7.26 A local magnetic anomaly was reported to exist off the E

side of Kap Philip Broke.

7.27 Frosnebugt (75°07'N., 17°45'W.) is located at the S

end of a large indentation which cuts deeply into the island between Kap Pansch and Kap Sussi, 11 miles NNW. A hunting

hut stands on the coast 1.5 miles SSW of Kap Sussi. A cove located in the NW corner of the indentation is known as Nordenskiolds Bugt; it is divided into two parts by a spit which

extends from the head. Several islets lie both outside and within the entrance to the cove.

7.27 Kap Borgen (75°26'N., 18°04'W.), located 8 miles NNW of

Kap Sussi, is the N extremity of Shannon O. Sengstackes Bugt

is entered between the cape and a 112m high headland, 7 miles

SW.

7.27 Shannon Sund (75°12'N., 19°08'W.), entered between Kap

Rink and Kap Tramnitz, extends 16 miles N. Both sides of the

Nanok Approach

Nanol Hochstetter Station
Sector 7. Greenland—East Coast—Scoresby Sund to Kap Morris Jesup 125

Pub. 181

sound present an even and regular appearance, broken only on

the mainland side by the mouths of several rivers. A bank extends from Kap Rink; shoal depths are reported to lie close off

this shore for about 10 miles N of the cape. Depths of 33 to

91m lie in the fairway and a mid-channel course may be safely

followed through the sound. Vessels are advised to stay 3 miles

from Kap Copeland (75°20'N., 18°57'W.), the NW extremity

of Shannon Island.

7.28 Kap Oswald Heer (75°33'N., 19°24'W.) is a slight

projection located 24 miles N of Kap Rink. A hunting hut

stands 2 miles S of the cape.

7.28 Haystack, located 11 miles N of Kap Oswald Heer, is a small

peninsula which extends 2 miles SE. Its N end is connected to

the mainland by a narrow low isthmus, on which stands a trapper’s hut. This peninsula rises to a height of 305m and is unmistakable, as there are no other prominent points or islands in

the vicinity; a cairn stands on its summit. 

7.28 Roseneathbugt (Roseneath Bugt) (75°43'N., 19°30'W.) lies

between the W side of Haystack and the mainland. A hunting

station, composed of several buildings, is reported to stand on

the W side of the bay. Depths of 55m lie in the E part of the bay

and decrease moderately towards the shore; however, abreast

the hunting station, depths of 3 to 5m lie up to 0.5 mile offshore. During the month of August, a vessel anchored 0.75

mile from the W shore of the bay with the cairn on the summit

of Haystack bearing 051° and the hunting station bearing 282°.

The bay is reported to often remain frozen over throughout the

year. 

7.28 Bessel Fjord is entered between Kap Mobius (75°56'N.,

20°01'W.) and Kap Beurmann, 8 miles NNE. It extends 33

miles W, between Hochstetter Forland and Adolf S. Jensens

Land, to two bays at its head. Several islands, islets, and rocks

lie in the entrance to this fjord and may best be seen on the

chart. Trums O, the largest island, rises to a height of over

600m. Within the entrance, the fairways are deep throughout

and the tidal currents are reported to attain rates of about 1

knot. Vessels can anchor, in a depth of 58m, sand, near the

middle of the entrance to the S bay located at the head of the

fjord. From the middle of the entrance to the bay, the depths

decrease regularly from 91m to 9m, about 230m from the

shore.

7.28 Vessels can also anchor, in a depth of 8m, within a bay located 2 miles W of Kap Beurmann.

Bessel Fjord to Kap Morris Jesup

7.29 Kong Frederik VII Land (Kong Frederik den VIII

Land) extends from the N shore of Bessel Fjord to the middle

of Independence Fjord, over 300 miles N. It includes Germania

Land, Hertugen af Orleans Land, Lambert Land, and Kronprins Christian Land. In several places along this coast, the

ice cap comes down to the sea and the ice-free land consists

mainly of isolated promontories and mountain peaks. In many

places, it has not been ascertained whether these promontories

are connected to the mainland or are islands separated from the

mainland by glacier-filled channels. Many areas remain unexamined. 

7.29 Dove Bugt (76°30'N., 19°30'W.), a large bay, indents the

coast between Kap Peschel, located 12 miles N of Kap Beurmann, and Kap Bismark, 35 miles NNE.

7.29 Store Koldewey O is a narrow island, 47 miles long, which

fronts the E side of Dove Bugt. Its S extremity lies 21 miles E

of the entrance to Bessel Fjord.

7.29 The bay may be entered by passing S or N of the island. The

depths in the S entrance are generally deep. In the N entrance,

the depths are more shoal, but are sufficient for most surface

vessels. The W side of the bay is bounded by glaciers and

mountains (nunataks); the N side is formed by the S coast of

Germania Land. Numerous islets lie in the SW, W, and N parts

of the bay and anchorage may be obtained in several places,

though the depths are generally deep. During the months of

August and September, open water may sometimes be found

within the bay.

7.29 Kap Alf Trolle (75°56'N., 18°45'W.), a low point, forms the

S extremity of Store Koldewey O. Troekpasset, a deep ravine,

cuts across the island almost at sea level, 14 miles N of this

cape. The land on the N side of this ravine rises to a plateau,

over 670m high. Between Troekpasset and Berg Fjord, 27

miles N, there are no indentations or off-lying dangers.

7.29 Berg Fjord is a deep indentation in the N part of the W side

of Store Koldewey O. This fjord extends 3.5 miles E and only a

low, narrow isthmus separates its head from the E coast of the

island. The entrance to the fjord may be identified by a peak

rising to a height of 760m on the S side and another peak rising

to a height of 305m on the N side. A yellow painted cairn

stands on the summit of the S peak and is visible from the E,

over the isthmus. A large island lies near the middle of the

fjord; islets lie close off its W and N sides. Another island, with

an islet on its SE side, lies E of the large island. Anchorage is

obtainable between the large island and the N shore of the

fjord, where depths of more than 64m have been reported;

however, the bottom is mostly soft mud and the holding ground

is poor. Tidal currents in the entrance to the fjord are reported

to attain a rate of up to 2 knots.

7.30 Kap Helgoland (76°43'N., 19°09'W.), the N extremity of Store Koldewey O, lies 9 miles N of Berg Fjord and is

high and steep. Three small islets, fringed by foul ground, lie

1.25 miles N of the N end of the island.

7.30 Kap Ullidtz (76°16'N., 21°42'W.), with a small island lying

1 mile E, is located on the W side of an inlet in the SW corner

of Dove Bugt. A hunting hut stands near the cape. Soranerbraeen, a glacier, flows into the head of the inlet. Syttendemajforden, a narrow fjord, is entered 8 miles E of the cape and

extends 13 miles SE.

7.30 Tvillingerne (76°17'N., 20°45'W.), an island, lies with Tommelen, a sharp peak, 671m high, forming its SE end, located 7

miles W of Kap Peschel. 

7.30 Nanok O lies 1 mile NE of Tvillingerne; Orgelpiberne, located on the SE side this island, is a headland which rises to a

height of 671m. Roon Bugt, a pronounced inlet, is entered between Orgelpiberne and Kap Belgen, 3.5 miles NNE. The inlet

and an area extending 2.5 miles ENE including Christain

Skaer, a submerged rock, is foul. Numerous ice bergs accumulate within this inlet and in the vicinity of its entrance points. 

7.30 Godfred Hansen O (76°26'N., 20°55'W.), a large island,

lies with its S end located at the W end of A. Stelling Sund.

Gefions Havn is entered between a low point, which forms the

S extremity of the island, and a conical peak, 1.75 miles E. Al-
126 Sector 7. Greenland—East Coast—Scoresby Sund to Kap Morris Jesup 

Pub. 181

borghus, a hunting station, stands on the W shore of this harbor. Gefions Havn is sheltered from all winds and deep water

lies close inshore. Anchorage is available, in a depth of 82m,

soft mud and good holding ground, 550m SSE of the hunting

station. Anchorage is also available, in a depth of 30m, good

holding ground, 180m from the head of the harbor.

7.31 Dronning Louise Land is located to the W of the W

side of Dove Bugt. It is mountainous with peaks rising to

heights of over 2,000m. Two huge glaciers, Storstrommen

Gletscher and L. Bistrup Brae, meet on the E side of this area

and cut off the various projections and islands, which form the

W side of Dove Bugt, from the mainland.

7.31 Daniel Bruun Land, a triangular tract, is located E of Storstrommen Gletscher. Edvards O lies close SE of its S extremity. Spydodden, located 13 miles NNE of Edvard O, is the E extremity of this tract. Ringoen, lying 3.5 miles S of Spydodden,

is the NE of numerous islets which front the SE coast of Daniel

Bruun Land. 

7.31 Borgfjorden (76°40'N., 22°00'W.) is entered between Kap

Stop and the N extremity of Lindhard O. This fjord trends in a

NW direction to the front of Bredebrae, a large glacier. Its entrance is completely barricaded by a mass of irregularly-shaped

icebergs, which constantly drift out of the fjord from the glacier. 

7.31 Kap Bismark (76°42'N., 18°36'W.) is located 7.5 miles E of

the N end of Store Koldewey O. It is the S extremity of a

tongue of land which projects 4 miles SSE from the S coast of

Germania Land. A foul area, with a least depth of 29m, fronts

this tongue of land and extends up to 1 mile offshore.

7.31 The N entrance to Dove Bugt lies between this cape and the

NE coast of the island. It is divided by Lille Koldewey O into

two main channels; Lille Baelt is the inner channel and Oresund is the outer one.

7.31 Lille Koldewey O (76°40'N., 18°43'W.) is, in reality, formed

by two narrow islands which are separated by Roselob, a narrow channel. It extends 8 miles NNW from Kap Christian, located 5.5 miles S of Kap Bismark, to Kap Bornholm. Shoal

depths are reported to extend up to 180m E and SE of Kap

Christian.

7.31 Lille Baelt, entered between Kap Christian and the NE coast

of Store Koldewey, 2 mile SW, has depths of 95 to 196m in its

fairway. This channel is the clearest and least encumbered in

the N entrance to Dove Bugt, but it is often blocked by ice after

the other channels are clear.

7.31 Oresund, entered between Kap Christian and Kap Bismark,

extends 7 miles NNW to Kap Bornholm, the N extremity of

Lille Koldewey O.

7.31 J. P. Jacobsen O (76°40'N., 18°40'W.) is the outermost and

largest islet of Simonsens Skaer, a group of islets and rocks

which lie close off the E coast of Lille Koldeway O. Shoal

depths extend up to 180m SE of the islet and a dangerous submerged rock lies 1 mile S of it. Maroussia O, marked by a

cairn, is located 1 mile E of J. P. Jacobsen O; a rock, dangerous

to navigation, was reported (1977) to lie about 180m N of this

islet. Renskaeret, a rocky islet 15m high, is located 1.5 miles

NE of J. P. Jacobsen O. A dangerous rock was reported (1977)

to lie about 275m SSE of this islet. Two skerries are reported to

lie between Maroussia O and Renskaeret.

7.32 Danmarkshavn (76°46'N., 18°45'W.), located 4

miles NW of Kap Bismark, is entered between Oster

Havnenaes and Vester Havnenaes, 0.75 mile WNW. It extends

1 mile N and is sheltered from the prevailing NW winds by low

and undulating hills which rise to a height of 180m. A radio

and weather station stands on the N shore of the harbor. A reef

extends from Vester Havnenaes and the depths are deeper at

the E side of the entrance. Anchorage is obtainable, in depths

of 16 to 27m, sand and gravel, with Vester Havnnenaes bearing

223°. Clear water is likely to be found in the harbor from July

until the end of September. There are no pilots, but persons

with local knowledge are available. Vessels of up to 70m in

length and 8m draft have used the anchorage. It is reported that

the radio station will, on request, send bearing signals to

vessels proceeding to the harbor. The dark period lasts from 28

October to 12 February; the midnight sun period lasts from 21

April to 22 August. 

7.32 Stormbugt (76°48'N., 19°00'W.), a name originally applied

to the whole of Dove Bugt, is entered between Wendels Pynt

(76°46'N., 18°50'W.) and Stormnaes, 5.5 miles NW. Stormnaes

is a broad and stony point which projects about 0.5 mile S. The

E part of the bay is generally deep with depths of over 64m.

Terneskaeret, lying 1 mile E of Stormnaes, is the outermost of

numerous islets and rocks which front the coast between that

point and Stormkap, a point at the head of the bay, 2 miles

ENE.

7.32 Snenaes, located 3 miles NW of Stormnaes, is the W entrance point of a small unnamed indentation. Winges Kyst is

the name given to that stretch of coast between Snenaes and

Lilli Snenaes, 7 miles NW.

7.32 Orienteringsoerne, a group consisting of three islands and

five islets, extends from 1 to 12 miles SSW of the middle of

Winges Kyst. Farsund, the channel between the N island and

Winges Kyst, is navigable and deep.

7.32 Hvalrosodden (76°54'N., 20°09'W.), located 4.5 miles W of

Lille Snenaes, is the site of a hunting station and former radio

station. Anchorage is obtainable, in a depth of 51m, 0.5 mile

Danmarkshavn (inner bay area)
Sector 7. Greenland—East Coast—Scoresby Sund to Kap Morris Jesup 127

Pub. 181

SSW of the station. Pladen O, lying 2.5 miles S of Hvalrosodden, is a narrow island with a submerged rock close N of it.

7.32 Morkefjord (76°55'N., 20°40'W.) is entered between Vaedderhornet (76°52'N., 20°35'W.) and Morkefjord Station, the

former site of a meteorological station, 3 miles ENE. The fjord

extends 17 miles W, almost to Storstrommen Gletscher. Kalven

O, an island, lies close within the fjord entrance. Anchorage

may be obtained 1 mile SE of Morkefjord Station, in a depth of

43m. However, it has been reported that S winds make this anchorage dangerous on account of ice. In such case, vessels may

anchor N of the NW end of Kalven O.

7.33 Germania Land (77°00'N., 19°00'W.) is a large island or peninsula, heavily indented by fjords, which lies between the parallels of 76°38'N and 77°58'N. The land is the

most extensive ice-free area in this part of NE Greenland. The

S part of its W side is separated from the mainland by Storstrommen Gletscher; the N part of its W side is separated from

the mainland by Kofoed-Hansens Brae, another large glacier.

The W part of Germania Land forms a nearly level plateau

with a height of about 800m, while its N and E parts consist of

undulating areas with heights of 300 to 600m. During good

years, it has been possible to reach the coast of Germania Land

by the middle of August.

7.33 Joh. G Guildals (76°42'N., 18°32'W.), a small island, lies

with S. Thomsens Pynt, its S extremity, located 0.75 mile E of

Kap Bismark. An islet lies close off its N end. Yderbugt is entered between S Thomsens Pynt and Kap Udkiggen, the S extremity of Ornens O, 1.75 miles NNE. This bay extends 4

miles NNW and is encumbered with numerous islets and

rocks.

7.33 Seventeen Kilometer Point (Syttenkilometernaesset)

(76°49'N., 18°20'W.) is a point which terminates in a rocky

knoll, about 12m high. Two small indentations lie between this

point and Oksebladet, the SE extremity of a peninsula, 2.25

miles N. They are both fronted by islets and rocks. Kap Steensby, located 6 miles N of Seventeen Kilometer Point, is a promontory. A hunting hut stands on a knoll, close S of the cape;

however, the existence of any provisions at this hut could not

be confirmed (1974).

7.33 Micardbu, a hunting station and the site of a former meteorological station, is located 10 miles N of Kap Steensby. Anchorage is afforded, in a depth of 35m, about 0.5 mile offshore with

the station bearing 313°. It is reported that the station is more

easily seen from S as it is situated on the S side of an outcrop

of rock.

7.33 Thomas Thomsens Naes (77°14'N., 18°23'W.), a point

which projects 0.75 mile NE, is low and stony with an open

bay on each of its sides. A hunting hut stands on its extremity

and is sheltered by a large prominent rock; however, the existence of any provisions at this hut could not be confirmed

(1974).

7.33 Kap Marie Valdemar is located 3 miles NW of Thomas Thomsens Naes. Rosio is the largest of several islets and rocks

which lie within 0.5 mile N of the cape; it is bare and, when

covered with snow, resembles an iceberg.

7.34 Skaerfjorden (77°25'N., 19°30'W.), a large bay with

several arms extending from it, is entered between Kajkap

(77°19'N., 19°03'W.) and Kap Amelie, 11 miles NNW. Kap

Amelie is prominent and rises steeply to a height of about

500m. Flade Bugt, the S arm, is entered between Kajkap and

Kap Li, 11 miles WNW, and extends 9 miles S.

7.34 C.F. Mouriers Fjord, at the SW end of Skaerfjorden, is entered between Kap Li and Kap Recamier, 2 miles NW. It trends

W for about 7 miles from its entrance. V. Clausen Fjord is entered between Kap Recamier and Kap Ellen, 5 miles WNW,

and extends 7 miles WNW; several islets and rocks lie off the

entrance to this fjord.

7.34 Joinvilles O (77°29'N., 20°00'W.), an island, 335m high, lies

in the middle of Skaerfjorden, with its S extremity located 3.5

miles NE of Kap Recamier. Theodolitskaer is the largest of a

group of rocky islets that lie close off the SE end of this island.

Penthievre Fjord is entered between Joinvilles O and Kap

Amelie, 6 miles ENE, and extends 13 miles NW.

7.34 From Kap Amelie, the coast extends 8 miles NE to Depotnaesset and then 10 miles NNW to Kap Louise. Bjornest, a

group of islets and rocks, extends 10 miles N from a position

close N of Kap Louise.

7.34 Orleans Sund (77°48'N., 20°00'W.) is entered between Kap

Louise and Kap Isabelle, 3.5 miles NNW; the latter cape is the

SW extremity of Gamma O, an island in the Bjornest group

which forms the N side of the sound. Formerly thought to be a

fjord, the sound extends 27 miles NW, to the N extremity of

Germania Land.

7.35 Duc d’Orleans Land (Hertugen af Orleans Land)

(77°50'N., 22°40'W.) is the area of continental land lying immediately N of Germania Land and separated from it by Koefoed-Hansen Brae, a large glacier. Pic de Gerlache (78°36'N.,

21°40'W.), a mountain 899m high, stands at the N end of Duc

d’Orleans Land and is visible from the pack ice. 

7.35 Ile de France (Qeqertaq Prins Henrik) (77°42'N.,

17°50'W.), the largest and SE of the islands lying off Duc

d’Orleans Land, presents an even skyline and may be identified

from a considerable distance in clear weather. It rises to a

height of 200m near the S end. Kap Sankt Jacques, the SW extremity of the island, is located 15 miles ENE of Kap Amelie.

Kap Philippe, the SE extremity of the island, is located 7 miles

ENE of Kap Sankt Jacques. During early August, a vessel anchored, in a depth of 55m, about 2 miles ESE of Kap Sankt

Jacques with Kap Philippe bearing 073°. The depths in this area are reported to be regular and it is more ice-free, in good

weather, than any other place off the island. 

7.35 Iles Francais, a maze of islands and islets, extend N for 36

miles from the N end of Bjornesk (Gamma O) to Pariseroerne

(Parisoer), a group of three small islands. 

7.35 Jokelbugten is the large area that lies between Iles Francais

(Francaises) and the mainland. The ice in this bay is reported to

be occasionally aground or afloat. Hagans (Hagans) O is located 15 miles NW of the SE extremity of Gamma O. It is the central island of a group which lies in the S part of Jokelbugten. 

7.36 Kap Kofoed (78°31'N., 18°34'W.), located 7 miles

NE of Pariseroerne, is the E extremity of the S island of Franske Oer, a chain of islands and islets which extends 25 miles

NNE.

7.36 Schnauder O (78°47'N., 19°40'W.) lies at the N end of

Jokelbugten, abreast Zachariaes Isstrom, a great glacier which

separates Duc d’Orleans Land from Lambert Land. Norske
128 Sector 7. Greenland—East Coast—Scoresby Sund to Kap Morris Jesup 

Pub. 181

Oer, consisting of a main island and two islets, lies 12 miles

NE of Schnauder O; the main island rises to a height of 500m.

During August 1933, a vessel succeeded in reaching Norske

Oer, penetrating farther N on the coast of East Greenland than

any previous vessel.

7.36 Belgica Bank (78°20'N., 15°00'W.) was discovered (1905)

by the Belgica while on passage from Svalbard to Greenland.

The least known depth on the bank is 46m and depths of 395 to

490m were found to lie between its W edge and the land ice. A

depth of 46m was reported (1961) to lie about 60 miles NE of

the shallowest part of the bank. A detached shoal, with a least

known depth of 355m, is reported to lie about 180 miles ENE

(76°10'N., 18°37'W.) of Shannon O.

7.37 Lambert Land (79°10'N., 20°20'W.), a large island

or perhaps a glacier, is bounded to the S by Zachariaes Isstrom

and to the N by Nioghalvfjerdsfjorden (Nioghalvfjerds

Fjorden). It is steep and has heights of 700 to 978m on its NE

side. A few islets lie close off its N and NE sides. 

7.37 Bronlunds Grave (79°08'N., 19°12'W.), the E extremity of

Lambert Land, is a hilly promontory which forms the E side of

a fjord. Nioghalvfjerdsfjorden (Nioghalvfjerds Fjorden) is a

large bay which lies between Lambert Land and Hovgaard O.

It is entered between Bronlunds Grave and Kap Anna Bistrup,

33 miles NNE. 

7.37 Hovgaard O is a large island, of which Kap Anna Bistrup is

the SE extremity. Kap H. N. Andersen, the NE extremity of the

island, lies 23 miles NNE of Kap Anna Bistrup.

7.37 Dijmphna Sund extends 40 miles W and SW. It is entered between Kap H. N. Andersen and Mellemukfjaeldet, 12 miles

NNE; the latter is the SE extremity of Holm Land, a large

mainland peninsula.

7.37 The N shore of the sound is formed by the outer part of the S

coast of Holm Land and consists of steep cliffs.

7.37 Lynn O, a triangular island, lies close off the NW coast of

Hovgaard O. Hekla Sund, a channel, lies between this island

and the mainland.

7.37 Eskimonaesset (Eskimonaes), a low point, is located 30

miles NNE of Kap H. N. Andersen. Maage Brae, located 7

miles W of Eskimonaesset, is an active glacier which discharges icebergs into the outer part of Ingolf Fjord.

7.37 Ingolf Fjord (80°40'N., 16°55'W.) is entered between Eskimonaesset and Kap Jungersen, 12 miles N. It extends 50 miles

W between Holm Land and Amdrup Land, the SE part of Kronprins Christian Land. Wegener Oer, consisting of three islets,

lies off a projection on the S shore of the fjord, 13 miles WNW

of Eskimonaesset. Spaerre Brae, a glacier, projects from the S

shore, 25 miles within the entrance. Its N end floats close to the

N shore of the fjord and it was formerly thought to form the

head; however, in 1939, the fjord was found to continue W for

25 miles and end in two short branches.

7.37 Kronprins Christian Land is a broad peninsula that lies between Ingolf Fjord and Danmark Fjord. It extends 60 miles NE

from Kap Jungersen (80°44'N., 15°55'W.) and narrows the

gateway of the sea between Spitsbergen and Greenland. Flade

Isblink, an ice cap, almost entirely covers the outer part of Kronprins Christian Land and is generally believed to be an independent formation, having no connection with the Greenland

Ice Cap.

7.38 Sophus Muller Naes (80°55'N., 14°40'W.) is located

23 miles NE of Kap Jungersen. Henrik Kroyer Holme, consisting of three islets, lies 8 miles SSE of the point.

7.38 Antarctic Bugt is entered between Sophus Muller Naes and

an unnamed point, 11 miles NE. The bay extends 9 miles NW

and its SW shore is formed by the NE side of Amdrup Land.

However, the ice of Flade Isblink covers the head and the NE

shore of the bay.

7.38 Nordostrundingen (81°36'N., 12°10'W.), located 30 miles

NE of Antarctic Bugt, is the E extremity both of Kronprins

Christian Land and of Greenland. Throughout much of this

stretch of coast, small icebergs, which are discharged from

Flade Isblink, may be seen grounded some distance offshore.

However, large icebergs, the size of those found in Scoresby

Sund, are never encountered in this area, although there are numerous active glaciers.

7.38 A depth of 24m was reported (1961) to lie about 20 miles E

of Nordostrundingen.

7.38 Erik S. Henius Land (81°45'N., 13°40'W.) is the name given to that part of the coast lying between Nordostrundingen

and Nakkehoved, a narrow strip of land 25 miles NW. Flade Isblink covers Erik S. Henius Land both SE and W of Nakkehoved, which only remains uncovered due to its height of about

300m.

7.39 Wandel Hav (82°10'N., 17°00'W.), a great bight, is

entered between Nakkehoved and Kap Eiler Rasmussen, 85

miles NW. The head of this bight contains the entrances to

Danmark Fjord and Independence Fjord. Prinsesse Ingeborg

Halvo, located 41 miles W of Nakkehoved, is a peninsula

which lies on the E side of the approach to Danmark Fjord and

rises to a height of 100m. Nord (81°43'N., 17°57'W.) is the

former site of a radio and weather station. 

7.39 Prinsesse Dagmars O, an island 90m high, lies with its S end

close W of Prinsesse Ingeborg Halvo to which, it may possibly

be connected. This island is the S of a group of three narrow islands which lie N and NW of the peninsula.

7.39 Kap Ringkjobing (81°33'N., 19°05'W.), located 15 miles

SW of Prinsesse Ingeborg Halvo, is the W entrance point of a

bay which extends 6 miles S. Several islets lie N and NW of

the cape. The entrance to an unnamed fjord, which extends 15

miles S, lies between the cape and the end of a long narrow

promontory, 10 miles NW. Prins Frederiks Oer, a group of islets, lies close off the promontory.

7.39 Kap Rigsdagen (82°04'N., 22°50'W.) is the NE extremity of

Valdemar Gluckstadt Land, a broad peninsula which projects E

and N and separates the outer part of Danmark Fjord from

Hagen Fjord.

7.40 Danmark Fjord (81°10'N., 22°45'W.) is entered between Prins Frereriks Oer and Kap Kronborg, 10 miles W. It

extends SSW for 75 miles to Fyens So, a large lake which is really an extension of the fjord, as they are connected by a narrow passage.

7.40 Between the entrance and Kap Viborg, 55 miles SSW, the SE

shore of the fjord is low, little indented, and backed by a range

of undulating hills which rise evenly a few miles inland. At

Kap Viborg, the fjord narrows abruptly from a width of about 7

miles to a width of 4 miles.

7.40 Kap Kronborg (81°42'N., 22°20'W.), the NW entrance
Sector 7. Greenland—East Coast—Scoresby Sund to Kap Morris Jesup 129

Pub. 181

point of Danmark Fjord, is a high and prominent hill. Jydske

Aas, located close W of the cape, is an ice-covered ridge which

extends across the peninsula nearly to Hagen Fjord; the remainder of Valdemar Gluckstadt Land is ice-free.

7.40 Kap Renaissance, located 23 miles SSW of Kap Kronborg, is

the NE entrance point of a bay that indents the shore for 7

miles SW. Pinseskaeret, an islet, lies close N of the SW entrance point of the bay, abreast a winding valley. A river, which

connects a chain of lakes in the valley, enters the fjord through

a broad delta.

7.40 Hjaertefjaeldsdalen is the name given to the stretch of shoreline that extends 10 miles SW of Pinseskaerett. It is low, covered with gravel and shells, and fronted by a few islets.

7.40 The precipitous basalt slopes of Finske Alper form a straight

and unbroken coastline between Hjaertefjaeldsdalen and the

mouth of a river, 10 miles SSW.

7.40 Kap Holbaek, located 5 miles S of the river mouth, is an isolated peak; the S and E sides of the cape rise vertically from the

water’s edge to a height of 180 to 240m.

7.41 Independence Fjord (82°00'N., 31°00'W.), formerly

thought to be a strait, is entered between Kap Rigsdagen and

Kap Kjobenhavn, 20 miles N. It extends W and SW for 100

miles, with a general width of about 10 miles.

7.41 Hagen Fjord is entered between Kap Ludovika, located 16

miles W of Kap Rigsdagen, and Kap Peter Henrik, 12 miles W.

It extends 13 miles S to Kap Bernhard and then 20 miles WSW

to a glacier at the head. A cairn is reported to stand close S of

Kap Peter Henrik. Kap Ludovika, a low and flat point, is the

NW extremity of Valdemar Gluckstadt Land.

7.41 Astrup Fjord (81°55'N., 30°40'W.), which extends 5 miles

S, is entered between Hugh Lee Gletscher, a glacial tongue,

and Kap Bogebjaerg, 3 miles WSW. Several islets lie close

within its entrance. J. C. Christensen Land extends between

Astrup Fjord and Hagen Fjord.

7.41 Mylius Erichsen’s Cairn (81°50'N., 32°40'W.) stands on

the E side of Independence Fjord, 15 miles from the head. A

river, which flows into a small bay lying close NE of the cairn,

forms the boundary between Ubberup Land and Academy

Land. Ubberup Land is the area lying W of Astrup Fjord.

Academy Land is the area which lies SW of the river and forms

the S shore of the fjord up to its head.

7.41 Academy Gletscher, a glacier located at the head, flows into

Independence Fjord between Academy Land and Vildtland, a

mountainous area. Navy Cliff (81°41'N., 34°02'W.) is a mountain which rises almost vertically; a cairn is reported to stand

on its summit. Nansens Nunatakker, a group of mountains in

the glacier, located at 16 miles S of Navy Cliff. This group rise

to heights of about 900m; and other mountains (nunataks)

stand on the E and W of them.

7.42 Jorgen Bronlund Fjord is entered between Kap

Harald Moltke (82°07'N., 31°20'W.) and Kap Knud

Rasmussen, 3.5 miles S. It extends NW and W for 10 miles to

the head. Wandel Dal, a valley, extends W from the head of

Bronlund Fjord to the head of J. P. Koch Fjord. Midsommer

So, a large lake in the valley, is located 12 miles from the head

of J. P. Koch Fjord and is connected by a river to the head of

Jorgen Bronlund Fjord.

7.42 Heilprin Land (82°00'N., 35°00'W.), which lies on the N

side of Independence Fjord, is located between Jorgen Bronlund Fjord and Marie Sophie Gletscher, 30 miles SW. Its central part is covered by an ice cap and the coastal strip is steep

and mountainous. Marie Sophie Gletscher, a large glacier,

flows into Independence Fjord between Kap Schmelck

(81°49'N., 34°15'W.) and Kap Lundbohm, 1.5 miles S. Lyngeholmene Oer, a group of islets up to 60m high, lies between 3

and 5 miles E and NE of Kap Schmelck.

7.42 Peary Land (82°30'N., 35°00'W.) is the extensive and only

vaguely-defined area which forms the northernmost part of

Greenland. The area was formerly thought to be an island;

however, it was found to be a huge peninsula which is connected to the mainland by a narrow strip.

7.42 Its W boundary is said to be marked either by Victoria Fjord or

by J. P. Koch Fjord. Its SW side is bounded by the Inland Ice

Cap; the SE side is bounded by Independence Fjord. A large part

of Peary Land, the northernmost land in the world, is ice-free.

7.43 Kap Eiler Rasmussen (82°35'N., 22°00'W.) is located

15 miles NE of Kap Kjobenhavn. It is a comparatively low point

and forms the E extremity of Peary Land. Herlufsholmstrand is

the name given to the area which lies between the coast and the

mountains. The entire foreland of the cape is composed of shingle and only near the foot of the mountains does a thin layer of

soil appear. Between this cape and Kap Henry Parish, 17 miles

NW, the coast rises to a height of over 600m.

7.43 Kap Clarence Wyckoff (82°05'N., 24°10'W.) is located 7

miles NW of Kap Henry Parish. It is a broad point on which

Clarence Wyckoff Bjaerg, a mountain, rises to a height of 850m.

A small bay lies on the W side of the cape. Wyckoff Land lies

between this bay and G. B. Schley Fjord, 5 miles NW.

7.43 G. B. Schley Fjord is entered between a point, marked by a

cairn, and Kap Isak Gluckstadt (83°00'N., 25°40'W.), 7 miles

NW. It extends 20 miles WSW, with several rivers flowing into

the head. A short branch indents the N shore of the fjord 8

miles within the entrance. Hans Egede Land is the area lying

between this fjord and Frederick E. Hyde Fjord, 15 miles NW.

7.44 Frederick E. Hyde Fjord (83°10'N., 30°00'W.) is

entered between Kap John Flagler, located 10 miles N of Kap

Kap Harald Moltke
130 Sector 7. Greenland—East Coast—Scoresby Sund to Kap Morris Jesup 

Pub. 181

Isak Gluckstadt, and an unnamed point, 10 miles NW. The

fjord was reported to extend about 85 miles WSW to Nordpasset, a valley, which continues 9 miles W to the head of O. B.

Boggild Fjord.

7.44 Nordkronen, a plateau 1,220m high, lies on the S side of the

fjord. It contains many glaciers and is intersected by deep ravines with steep sides. Vistars Bjaerg, 2,010m high, rises from

the plateau, 5 miles from its W end. This mountain is said to be

the highest point in Peary Land.

7.44 Freja Fjord and Thor Fjord, two short branches, indent the S

shore of Frederick E. Hyde Fjord 60 and 75 miles, respectively,

within the entrance. Frigg Fjord, which indents the N shore opposite Freja Fjord, extends 11 miles NNW; two islets lie near

its head. Drivhuset, a broad flat valley, extends for some distance NW from the head of Frigg Fjord.

7.45 Kap Bridgman (83°30'N., 27°45'W.) is located 5

miles N of the NW entrance point of Frederick E. Hyde Fjord.

In its vicinity, the coast flattens into the sea and the beach is

mainly covered with granite pebbles.

7.45 Between Kap Bridgman and Kap Morris Jesup, 45 miles

WNW, the coast is backed by low gravel plains which extend to

the foothills of Roosefelt Fjaeldene, an extensive range of

mountains occupying the NE part of Peary Land. Daly Bjaerge,

a chain of peaks standing to the S of Kap Bridgman, forms part

of Roosefelt Fjaeldene.

7.45 Bliss Bugt, located 12 miles WNW of Kap Bridgman, is a

fairly wide bay with a broad and flat foreshore. A river, which

is reported to drain two glaciers, discharges into the head of the

bay. Another river runs through a large delta system located

close W of the head.

7.45 Constable Bugt, a fairly large indentation, is located 22 miles

W of Bliss Bugt. Kaffeklubben, a small island, lies close offshore, 6 miles E of Kap James Hill, the E entrance point of

Constable Bugt.

7.45 Kap Morris Jesup (83°40'N., 33°24'W.), a small projection,

is the N extremity of Greenland.

7.45 Odaq O (83°40'N., 30°40'W.), a small island, lies N of Kaffeklubben and is the farthest N known land in the world.
Pub. 181

8. Iceland—West and North Coasts

8.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 8 — CHART INFORMATION
133

Pub. 181

SECTOR 8 

ICELAND—WEST AND NORTH COASTS

8.0 Plan.—The descriptive sequence of this sector commences

at Reykjanes, the SW extremity of Iceland. It trends N to Horn

(North Cape) and then E to Langanes, the NE extremity of the

island. 

General Remarks

8.1 Iceland lies 150 miles E of Greenland, 400 miles NW

of Scotland, and 600 miles W of Norway. Because of its location in the North Atlantic Ocean, Iceland is of extreme geographical and strategic importance.

8.1 The island of Iceland is a volcanic plateau. The interior is

marked by numerous mountain ranges and its coasts are deeply

indented by fjords and large bays.

8.1 The NW portion is almost severed from the main part of the

island by large bays which indent the coast. The mountainous

projections are cut by deep, narrow fjords. These fjords with

dark walls of basalt rise almost perpendicular from the sea,

reaching heights of 610 to 762m.

8.1 The W coast of the island affords some of the best harbors in

Iceland. Reykjavik, the capital, is situated in a large bight N of

Reykjanes.

8.1 The entire coast of the island is fronted by an extensive shelf,

on which large fishing fleets assemble every year. This coastal

shelf, as defined by the 200m curve, extends in some places

from 40 to nearly 60 miles offshore. In some area the shelf

drop indents close to the shore. These deeps are, from S to N,

known as Jokuldjup, Kolluall, Vikurall, and Djupall.

8.1 Jokuldjup extends in a NE direction across the approach to

Faxafloi to within about 13 miles of the N entrance point of the

bay.

8.1 Kolluall, which roughly parallels Jokuldjup, extends to the S

entrance point of Breidhafjordhur, a large bay lying N of Faxafloi. During fog, its depths are a useful guide. The bank, which

separates Jokuldjup from Kolluall, is known as Jokulgrunn.

8.1 Vikurall, a smaller deep, penetrates 20 miles into the bank

between the latitudes of 65°45'N and 66°00'N.

West and North Coasts of Iceland
134 Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 

Pub. 181

8.1 Djupall, the N deep, is an isolated area within the limits of

the bank. It extends in a SSE direction almost to the entrance of

Isafjardhardjup, the N of the large fjords on the W coast of the

island. During fog, this deep is also a useful guide.

8.1 For further information, refer to Pub. 180, Sailing Directions

(Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean. 

Winds—Weather.—The winds are usually canalized within

the deep fjords or are deflected along the coast. The cold air,

which flows down the slopes of the island plateau, often develops into squalls which reach gale force near sea level. This activity is generally confined to the narrow coastal strip and the

maximum force and frequency occurs at the entrances to the

ravines. However, when storms are raging at sea, the fjords

provide welcome shelter, but the amount of protection depends

on the wind direction and the local topography.

8.1 Within the fishing area, lying NW of Iceland, about 80 per

cent of gales blowing from NE or E, occasionally reaching hurricane force.

8.1 During the winter months, gales, from any direction, are very

common over most of the region lying S of latitude 75°N.

Some sections of this area are affected by prolonged gales, usually from the SW, which last for a week or more.

8.1 In the summer, gales are infrequent except over the area W

of Iceland.

8.1 Ice.—The shores of Iceland are visited in certain years and

at certain seasons, by drift ice which is carried down by winds

and currents. The N coast of the island is seriously affected by

this activity and the ice constitutes a hindrance to navigation in

this area. As a rule, except in the most severe ice years, vessels

can count on passing unhindered along the N coast after the

end of May. The first ice is usually observed in the vicinity of

Horn (North Cape). Recent studies have indicated that, after a

protracted period of SW winds in the Denmark Strait, there is

an increase in the amount of the East Greenland Current forced

into the flow of East Iceland Arctic Current. Consequently, ice

accumulates off the N coast of the island.

8.1 When large masses of ice are observed off Horn (North

Cape), ice may be found along the W coast of the island. However, as a rule, the ice does not approach the Western Fjords

(Vestfirdir). During very severe ice years with persistent N

winds, ice has been observed within the entrances of some of

these fjords.

8.1 Farther offshore, in the Denmark Strait, pack ice is usually

present in varying amounts. During most of the year, it stays

towards the Greenland side of the strait while the Icelandic side

almost always remains clear inside the 180m line. It is only

during unusual periods of persistent fresh or strong winds,

from between W and N, that the ice is forced inside the 180m

line. These rare occasions are most likely to occur in April or

May when the ice is beginning to break up. The edge of the ice

usually remains 40 to 60 miles off the W coast of Iceland until

early June, when it recedes.

8.1 The ice, which drifts from the NW or W, is carried along the

N coast of the island by the prevailing W current. At times, it

seems as though the ice is approaching from NE, but ice from

this direction never appears along the N coast before ice from

the NW has reached Horn (North Cape). The ice, which is carried towards the coast as a result of protracted SW winds in the

Denmark Strait, always remains for the longest period. Ice may

also be forced against the N coast by NE winds but never in

large packed masses.

8.1 When large masses of ice are carried unobstructed along the

N coast and are met, at Melrakkasletta, by N storms, the ice is

forced against the shore. However, it also continues to drift in

an E direction until stopped by the peninsula of Langanes. If

more ice is then forced from the W, it exerts a pressure on and

adds to the mass. Consequently, the pack spreads to the N and

NE until it can no longer be confined by the Langanes Peninsula. It is then carried S along the E coast by the polar current.

8.1 Fog.—Fog is an important weather element throughout this

region. It is most frequent during the warmer season when navigation in the these waters becomes feasible. July is the month

of most frequent occurrence. The fog is reported to be most

dense and widespread over the colder water lying close to the

ice areas. The least foggy section of Iceland is reported to be

that located near the NW coast.

8.1 Fog conditions around Iceland are most intense during seasons when the pack ice encroaches on the N coast, lowering

neighboring water temperatures.

8.1 Advection fogs are the preponderant variety throughout this

area. These occur when warmer, moist air moves over colder

surfaces. Such fogs are frequently extremely dense when the

lower layers of the air are stable, causing intensification of the

fog very close to the surface. Visibility from the upper portions

of the ship may be excellent during such conditions. Fogs most

frequently occur with air temperatures between -2° and 5°C

and are most closely associated with the colder open water

along the edge of the pack ice, especially in summer. When

navigating Arctic waters during the open season, vessels can

frequently detect the proximity of the ice pack by the observation of distant fog. This phenomenon occurs most frequently in

this region because the temperature of the sea surface is always

very cold close to the pack ice and winds from any seaward

quarter will quickly have their moisture condensed on contact

with this colder surface.

8.1 Caution.—Iceland has 20 volcanoes which have been active

at one time or another since the island was inhabited. Reykjanes, the peninsula located in the SW part of the island, has frequently been disturbed by volcanic outbursts. In the sea

surrounding this peninsula, islands have been alternately

thrown up and submerged by submarine volcanic action.

8.1 Local magnetic anomalies have been experienced from time

to time in the fjords and close off the coast of Iceland. Strong

disturbances have been noted in areas offshore in which the

depths were as great as 135m. Therefore, disturbed areas may

exist in other places of similar and perhaps greater depths.

8.1 Abnormal magnetic variation of 5° to 19°E has been experienced over depths of 140 to 180m on the meridian of 26°20'W,

between the latitudes of 64°54'N and 65°36'N.

8.1 Details of magnetic anomalies, which have been observed in

the area, are given in their respective places in this sector.

8.1 Attention is drawn to the danger of ice accumulation on vessels, which increases to the W and N of the island. In certain

weather conditions, this accumulation on the hulls and superstructures can be a very serious danger. These conditions are

most likely to be encountered in the Denmark Strait from December to April.

8.1 Numerous fishing vessels may be encountered in the vicinity

of Iceland.
Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 135

Pub. 181

8.1 Reports of mirages and displays of the aurora borealis are

common in this area.

West Coast

8.2 Reykjanes (63°49'N., 22°42'W.), the SW extremity

of Iceland, is a low, steep, rock strewn promontory. Reykjanes

Light, a white concrete tower, 31m high, is located 1 mile N of

Reykanes.

8.2 Tides—Currents.—Between Reykjanes and Gardskagi, 16

miles N, the tidal currents, up to a distance of 3 miles offshore,

flow N on the flood and S on the ebb. The S current is weaker

than the N, but it is still stronger in these parts than on any other portion of the W coast. However, with strong gales from the

S and SW, it may be decreased so as to run for only a couple of

hours. The N current, being the stronger, is liable, in case of

poor visibility, to carry a vessel farther N than was intended.

The tidal currents turn at about the time of HW and LW on the

shore or at about every sixth hour in fine weather.

8.2 Caution.—Vessels should not approach the coast between

Reykjanes and Gardskagi too closely as there is always a heavy

sea on the coastal shelf and, in bad weather, breakers may extend up to 1 mile offshore.

8.2 Karl, a high dark rock, is located 1 mile NNW of Reykjanes.

It is separated from the coast by a narrow channel and, when

seen from certain directions, resembles a church with a pointed

tower.

Skalafell, 76m high, and Syrfell, 93m high, are two prominent hills which stand 1 and 2.5 miles, respectively, NE of

Reykjanes. 

8.2 Thordharfell, 161m high, and Sulur, 144m high, are two hills

which stand close together, 7.5 miles NE of Reykjanes, and

form an excellent landmark.

8.3 Keilir (63°57'N., 22°11'W.), a conspicuous mountain

standing 14 miles inland, rises to a height of 378m and can be

seen from S over the intervening hills. Keilir is sometimes mistaken for other peaks, especially when approaching from S,

and care must be taken to avoid any confusion.

8.3 A light is shown from a tower, 31m high, standing 1 mile N

of the S extremity of Reykjanes. A light is also shown from a

tower, 5m high, standing on the S part of Reykjanes. It is reported that, when approaching from SE by day, the light tower

standing on the S part of the promontory may be seen before

the higher light tower as it seems to blend in with the hills.

8.3 Fuglasker is a chain of islets, rocks, and shoal patches which

are separated from each other by deep channels. It extends SW

from Reykjanes for about 40 miles and can best be seen on the

chart. Areas to be avoided encompass these shoals and can be

best seen on the chart. 

8.3 Eldeyjarbodhi (63°29'N., 23°48'W.), the outermost of these

dangers, is a small rocky patch, with a depth of less than 2m,

which is always marked by breakers. A bank, with a least depth

of 22m, lies about 11 miles SW of Eldeyjarbodhi and breaks in

heavy weather.

8.3 Geirfugladrangur, a rock, awash, lies about 18 miles NE of

Eldeyjarbodhi and is separated from it by a deep channel.

Nearby depths are reported to be changing continually due to

undersea volcanic action, the area should be avoided.

8.3 Geirfuglasker, located about 2.5 miles NE of Geirfugladrangur, is a group of rocks with depths of less than 2m on which

the sea always breaks; these breakers are especially heavy during W or NW seas or swells.

8.3 Eldey, located 8 miles SW of Reykjanes, is a sheer-sided

rock, 77m high. It is one of the largest gannet colonies in the

world and the ledges on the sides and the entire top of the rock

are white with guano from these birds.

8.3 Eldeyjardrangur, a large rock 4m high, lies 1 mile SW of Eldey. A ridge of submerged rocks extend from this rock almost

to Eldey. 

8.3 Kletturinn (Kletturrin), a rock with a depth 3.3m, lies 5 miles

WSW of Reykjanes and is the nearest danger to the mainland.

The passage lying between this rock and the mainland is the

one generally used. The other passages, although deep, should

be avoided because of heavy tide rips which are especially dangerous during spring tides 

8.3 Hafnarberg, a hill 40m high, stands on a promontory at the N

Courtesy of Jarrod M. Kushla

Reykjanes Light

Courtesy of Jarrod M. Kushla

Eldey
136 Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 

Pub. 181

end of a bay, Stora Sandvik, 5 miles N of Reykjanes. Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of 22m, sand, within the bay. 

8.3 The coast N of Hafnaberg recedes to form a bight at the head

of which is a foul inlet. A small settlement, with a prominent

church, stands near the S entrance point of the inlet.

8.3 Anchorage is obtainable, in a depth of 24m, during winds

from N to S through E, off the S side of the entrance to the inlet.

8.3 Stafnes (63°58'N., 22°45'W.) is located 10 miles N of Reykjanes. A light is shown from a tower, 11m high, standing on the

point. Shoals and rocks extend up to 0.5 mile offshore in this

vicinity. Five steel towers, 44m high, stand 1 mile NE of the

point and an aeronautical radiobeacon is reported to be situated

at this location. Four prominent dish antennas are reported to

stand SE of the point. From seaward, the hangers and facilities

of the airport, situated E of point, can be seen.

8.3 A local magnetic anomaly has been reported to exist between 2.5 and 5 miles W of Stafnes.

8.3 Hvalsnes, a settlement with a prominent church, is situated

1.25 miles N of Stafnes. Shoals and rocks extend up to 1 mile

offshore in this vicinity.

8.4 Sandgerdi (Sandgerdhi) (64°02'N., 22°43'W.), a

small trading and fishing harbor, is located 3 miles N of Hvalsnes. A reef, which dries, extends up to 1.25 miles offshore,

close S of the harbor. It is marked by a lighted buoy at the seaward end and protects the harbor from the S and W.

8.4 A light, which indicates the approach channel, is shown from

a tower on a dwelling, 19m high, standing at the NE corner of

the harbor. The fairway, 50m wide, through the entrance is then

indicated by pairs of lighted range beacons. Caution must be

exercised as shoals lie close on either side of the channel. Local

knowledge is advised. It is reported (1992) the entrance fairway and harbor have been dredged to a depth of 5.5m.

8.4 During offshore winds, anchorage may be obtained, in a

depth of 20m, off the harbor.

8.4 Gardskagi (Gardhskagi) (64°05'N., 22°42'W.), located 2.5

miles N of Sandgerdi, is the S entrance point of Faxafloi, a

large bay. The point is low and rocky and a reef extends 1 mile

NW from it. A shoal patch with a depth of 13m, lies about 0.5

mile NW of the outer end of the reef.

8.4 A light is shown from a tower, 27m high, standing at the extremity of the point. Another light is shown from a lower position on the same tower. A racon is situated at this light

structure.

8.4 Caution.—It has been reported that abnormal magnetic variations exist in a position about 4.5 miles NW of Gardskagi. A

waverider buoy lies about 4.25 miles ENE of Sandgerdhi. 

Faxafloi

8.5 Faxafloi (64°08'N., 22°40'W.), an extensive bay extending 25 miles E, is entered between Gardskagi and Malarrif,

a point 48 miles NW. Its S shore is low, with several hills rising

inland. Its E and N shores are backed by high mountains near

the coast and Snaefellsjokull, a conspicuous snow-covered

mountain, stands N of the N entrance point.

8.5 The depths in the greater part of the bay are less than 91m;

three banks, Vestra-Hraun (Vesturhraun), Sydhrahraun, and

Budhagrunn, lie in the bay. 

8.5 Vestra-Hraun (Vesturhraun), a detached bank, lies between 6

and 16 miles N of Gardskagi. It has a least depth of 17m in itse

N part. 

8.5 Sydhrahraun (Sydrahraun) is a bank which lies between 7

and 12 miles NE of Gardskagi. A least depth of 10m is charted

in its NW part. Areas to be avoided around Sydhrahraun can

best be seen on the chart. 

8.5 Budhagrunn, a detached bank of shingle and shells, lies

about 30 miles N of Gardskagi. A least depth of 29m is charted

in its S part.

8.5 Tides—Currents.—In Faxafloi, the tidal currents are regular. On the rising tide, the tidal current sets E along the S shore

of the bay. Farther offshore, the trend is more to the NE, curving N and then NW. On the falling tide, these currents are reversed but the rate is considerably weaker. After N or NW

gales, the ebb is strengthened and an onshore set may be experienced along the N and NE sides of the bay.

8.5 Local magnetic anomalies.—The magnetic compass is not

a reliable guide in Faxafloi, particularly in its S part. The following information is compiled from observations reported by

various vessels, the results of which have been found to be in

general agreement. 

8.5 On the track between Gardskagi and Reykjavik, in an area 2

or 3 miles square centered in position 64°08'N, 22°24'W, a local magnetic anomaly of up to 11°E has been experienced.

Within this area, the compass needle was found to swing suddenly from 3°E to 8°E and then slowly until the maximum of

11°E was reached.

8.5 To the N of Reykjavik, an area exists in which the variation

is W; a maximum deflection of 20° has been reported in the vicinity of the N extremity of Akrey Reef, about 1.5 miles NNW

of Reykjavik.

8.5 Abnormal variation is also experienced in the inner approach

to Hafnarfjordur; an anomaly of about 5.5° W occurs at a position 2 miles W of the outer breakwater, but, after quite a short

distance, this anomaly changes to about 8°E. This latter anomaly then decreases regularly and ceases at a position about 1

mile from the breakwater. At a position between 365 and 550m

farther inward, a W anomaly again occurs, which gradually

reaches a maximum of 5.5°.

Sandgerdi
Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 137

Pub. 181

The following data is based on limited observation:

1. In the N part of Vester-Hraun, the compass needle was

deflected 4°W.

2. Close N of the bank, which extends N from the island

of Videy, the compass needle was deflected 8°E.

3. About 5 miles N of Grotta, the compass needle was

deflected 8°E.

8.5 In an area about 4.5 miles WNW of Arkanes, between the

latitudes of 64°19'N and 64°20'N and the meridians of

22°13'W and 22°21'W, the compass needle is reported to be deflected first one way and then the other. During one run, it was

reported that a vessel, which was maintaining a good course by

observations of the land, experienced the following deflections

of the compass needle: first 4°E, then 3°W, next 13°E for a

short time, and finally 4°W. A maximum W deflection of 10°

has also been observed.

8.5 Abnormal variations have been observed in Hvalfjordur and

its approaches, but in the N part of Faxafloi, magnetic disturbances have only been observed in the vicinity of Snaefellsjokull.

8.5 For further information, refer to Pub. 180, Sailing Directions

(Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean. 

8.5 Caution.—During W gales, heavy seas are experienced on

Vestra-Hraun and Sydhrahraun. These are especially dangerous to trawlers and small vessels.

8.5 Vessels are advised not to proceed inside of the 20m curve

without local knowledge.

8.5 Large fishing fleets assemble each year on the coastal flat,

indicated by the 180m line, in the vicinity of the bay.

8.5 Caution is necessary in thick weather, when proceeding N

from Reykjavik or when crossing the entrance to the bay, as

vessels are liable to be set towards the dangerous rocks fringing

the coast NE of Vester-Hraun.

8.6 Keilisnes is located 12 miles ESE of Gardskagi. The

coast between these two points recedes to form a bight. The

shores of this bight are indented by a number of small coves

which afford anchorage for small craft. These coves are mostly

used by small vessels during the fine weather season for the

loading of locally-cured fish. However, they are, for the most

part, difficult to identify, as there are very few landmarks in the

vicinity.

8.6 From Keilisnes, the coast trends generally ENE for 7 miles

to the S entrance point of Hafnarfjordur.

8.6 Utskaler Church, standing 0.75 mile SE of Gardskagi Light,

is a high conspicuous building surrounded by several large

wooden houses. Gerdhar (Gardur), a trading and fishing station, is situated 0.5 mile SE of the church. 

8.6 Varaos, a landing place, is located close SE of Gerdhar. Anchorage is obtainable, in a depth of 27m, close NE of Varaos;

however, caution is necessary to avoid the reefs which extend

offshore in this vicinity.

8.6 A few scattered fishing villages lie S of Varaos.

8.6 Holmsberg (64°02'N., 22°33'W.), a steep prominent cliff,

stands 4 miles SE of Gardskagi. It is fronted by a reef; Stakkur,

a steep-sided rock, 21m high, lies close offshore. A light is

shown from a tower, 13m high, standing at the N end of the

cliff.

8.6 Helquvik, a boat harbor protected by a breakwater, is located

8.6 Ilunypa, located 1 mile SE of Holmsberg, is a point which

forms the N extremity of a small cove, at the head of which lies

Keflavik. A conspicuous church, with a spire, stands in the

middle of the town. It is reported that mooring buoys, for use

by fishing craft, are situated in the cove.

8.6 Vatnsnes, the S extremity of this cove, is formed by a rocky

promontory. A light is shown from a tower, 8m high, standing

on the N end of this promontory.

8.7 Keflavik (64°00'N., 22°33'W.) (World Port Index No.

70) is a fishing center. The small harbor lies on the S side of the

promontory.

Depths—Limitations.—There are concrete and wooden

Keflavik-Njarovik
138 Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 

Pub. 181

piers with depths of 6 to 13m alongside. A mole that extends

230m S from the S side of Vatnsnes provides 165m of quay

space, with depths of 7 to 13m alongside. Vessels up to 5,500

dwt and 118m in length have been handled. A quay, 55m in

length, with a depth of 6m alongside, lies E of the root of the

mole. Keflavik is equipped to handle tankers. 

8.7 Pilotage.—The pilots (call sign: Keflavik Pilot) can be

reached on VHF channels 12, 14, and 16. Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 100 dwt and is available 24 hours. Messages can also be sent through Reykjavik (TFA). The pilot

boards 1 mile off Vatnsnes.

8.7 Anchorage.—Winds are variable. Vessels may anchor in the

middle of the outer part of the cove, in a depth of 27m. The

bottom is clay and sand, and has good holding ground. Vessels

should moor with two anchors. During times when the winds

are from the NNE to SE, which blow with high velocity into

the cove, the anchorage becomes dangerous. The cove should

be avoided when the wind is a NE gale to avoid being driven

onto the rocks.

8.7 Caution.—Although it may be clear at sea, lights in this vicinity may become obscured, particularly during the autumn,

by dust clouds which may hang over the land.

8.8 Njardvik (Njardhvik) (63°59'N., 22°32'W.), a small

bay, is located 1.25 miles S of Keflavik. 

8.8 Ytri-Njardhvik, in the NW part of the bay, is a small fishing

harbor protected by breakwater. A number of stone jetties lie

within the harbor and are used by small vessels. A lighted buoy

marks a spit which extends seaward from the end of the breakwater. A directional light leads toward the S breakwater.

8.8 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 100 gross

tons and is available 24 hours. 

8.8 Anchorage.—Anchorage is obtainable, in a depth of 12m,

fair holding ground, in the middle of the entrance to the bay;

however, it is exposed to NE winds.

8.8 Keflavik Airfield is situated close W of Njardvik. An aeronautical lighted beacon is shown from the field. The tanks,

buildings, and other facilities are conspicuous from seaward.

8.8 Vogavik, a shallow cove, is located 3.5 miles E of Njardvik.

The shore between them is fronted by a long cliff, known as

Vogastapi. The entrance to the cove is indicated by ranges. Anchorage is obtainable, in a depth of 29m, sand, under the lee of

Vogastapi, but it is dangerous in N winds. Vogar, a small settlement with a shallow boat harbor, is situated at the NE side of

Vogavik.

8.8 Gerdistangi (64°01'N., 22°21'W.) is located 2 miles NNE of

Vogar. Rocks and shoals, extending up to 0.5 mile offshore,

fringe the coast and the point. A light is shown from a tower,

10m high, standing on the point.

8.8 Keilisnes (64°02'N., 22°16'W.), a fairly conspicuous point,

is located 2.5 miles ENE of Gerdistangi and is fronted by rocks

and shoals. Kalfatjorn, a settlement, is situated about midway

between these two points; a large church with a prominent tower stands on it.

8.8 Vatnsleysuvik, a rock-fringed bight, lies between Keilisnes

and Hraunsnes, 3.5 miles ENE. Temporary anchorage, during

S winds, can be obtained in the SW part of this bight; however,

local knowledge is essential because of the presence of dangerous rocks.

8.9 Straumsvik (64°03'N., 22°03'W.), located 2.5 miles

E of Hraunsnes, is a small harbor lying within a cove. Lambhagagrandi, a submerged reef, extends about 0.25 mile NW

from the E entrance point. A mole, 365m long, extends W into

the cove from close S of this reef. The entrance channel, 160m

wide, is indicated by a lighted range and marked by buoys

which may best be seen on the chart. A group of prominent silos stands at the root of this mole. The harbor is used by bulk

vessels which serve the nearby aluminum works.

8.9 It is reported that the harbor can accommodate vessels of up

to 60,000 dwt; however, they are limited to lengths of 205m in

winter and 215m in summer. The port is mainly used for the

aluminium trade and the import of LPG, but also has a general

and bulk cargo berth. 

8.9 Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots, supplied from Hafnarfjordur,

board about 1.5 miles NW of the entrance. The harbor can be

contacted by VHF.

8.9 Large vessels can anchor, in a depth of 40m, good holding

ground, about 5.5 miles NW of the entrance to the cove. Anchorage would be dangerous in N winds. For prominent mountains in the vicinity, see Reykjavik in paragraph 8.12. 

8.10 Hafnarfjordur (64°04'N., 21°57'W.) (World Port Index No. 80) lies within a small fjord between Straumsvik and

Melshofdi, the low SW extremity of the Alftanes Peninsula,

2.5 miles N. It is located 7 miles SW of Reykjavik. Hafnarfjordur harbor is sheltered by a breakwater. It lies at the head with

the town rising behind it. The channel entrance is 150m wide

and is 4 to 12m deep. The port handles imports of general cargo, timber, salt, oil, LPG, jet fuel,and marine diesel and exports

of fish products, scrap, and general cargo.

8.10 Winds—Weather.—Prevailing winds are SE to SW. The

fjord is exposed to W winds, which send in a fairly heavy sea,

though its force is broken by the gradually shelving bottom.

Winds from seaward generally blow with less force than those

from off the land.

8.10 Ice.—Ice is never a hindrance to navigation and neither the

fjord nor the anchorage freezes over.

Straumsvik
Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 139

Pub. 181

8.10 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 4m at springs and 3m

at neaps. The maximum tide rise is 4.5m. 

8.10 Depths—Limitations.—The inner harbor is contained by

two breakwaters; the N breakwater is 200m long, while the S

breakwater is 400m long. The entrance to the harbor is 150m

wide and 9m deep, with a soft clay bottom. 

8.10 North Quay, in the N part of the harbor, is 245m long, with

depths of 6 to 6.5m alongside; it is mainly used for general cargo and repairs. 

8.10 South Quay, in the E part of the harbor, is 430m long with

depths of 6 to 8m alongside; it is used by general cargo vessels.

8.10 Oseyrar Pier, in the S part of the harbor, is 130m long, with

depths of 6 to 6.5m alongside its N side and 2.5 to 4m alongside its S side; it is mainly used by breakbulk, general cargo,

and fishing vessels. 

8.10 A finger pier, 70m long, has depths of 5.5 to 6.6m alongside.

8.10 Tankers discharge alongside an oil berth, 62m in length, at

the inner side of the S breakwater. The berth has a depth of 9m

alongside, with a soft clay bottom. A maximum arrival draft of

9.5m may be allowed. The oil pier has been widened (2009)

and the inner water basin just inside of the breakwater has been

reclaimed and established as a contiguous quay up to the base

of the oil pier. 

8.10 Tankers moor and start to lighter 2 or 3 hours before HW to

lighten to 8m or less before LW. Tankers up to 27,350 dwt have

entered the port.

8.10 Vessels are limited to a length of 190m and a draft of 8.5m,

but tankers are allowed to have a draft of 9.5m.

There is a new breakwater and harbor area, Hvaleyri Harbor,

W of the S breakwater, with a new berth, 200m long, with an

alongside depth of 8 to 10m. It is used for breakbulk and general cargo. 

8.10 Aspect.—An outer approach lighted buoy is moored about

1.25 miles SW of Melshofdi. The entrance channel is indicated

by a lighted range, which may best be seen on the chart. A

prominent beacon, 4m high, stands on a hummock, 126m high,

located about 1 mile SSE of the town. 

8.10 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all foreign vessels and

is available 24 hours. The pilot usually boards 1 mile SSE of

the outer buoy. Smaller vessels and masters familiar with the

port are invited to proceed to the inner buoy. The pilot can be

contacted on VHF channel 14.

8.10 Vessels must notify the harbormaster’s office of their ETA 96

hours and 24 hours prior to arrvial. Vessels must call the pilot

on VHF channel 14, 2 hours prior to arrival with the details of

any dangerous cargo and its quantity. 

8.10 Tugs are available. The use of tugs is not compulsory. 

8.10 Anchorage.—Vessels waiting for a pilot may obtain anchorage about 1 mile SSE of the Valhusagrunn Buoy (64°05'N.,

22°05'W.). 

8.10 Anchorage may be found in all weathers, except strong

winds and waves from SW to NW. A good anchorage during W

winds is found 1 mile E of Helguvik (64°01'N, 22°31'W).

8.10 Directions.—Vessels approach the harbor entrance on heading 095.5° in line with the directional light, which is best seen

on the chart. The port anchor is dropped near the entrance of

the breakwater and the vessel is swung, assisted by tug. As the

stern enters the breakwater. The vessel is moored and brought

along to berth, port side-to. 

8.10 Caution.—Helgasker, a shoal patch which dries, lies on the

S side of the entrance channel, about 1 mile W of the harbor

entrance; it is marked by a lighted buoy. Vessels with a draft of

7m or greater are cautioned that shoals exist in position

64°04.7'N, 22°08.8'W, bearing 260° and 1.5 miles distant from

Valhusagrunn Buoy.

8.10 A coastal bank fronts the N shore of the fjord; foul ground

and shoal patches extend up to 1.25 miles SSE of Melshofdi.

Valhusagrunn, an isolated shoal patch with a depth of 4.6m,

lies 1 mile WSW of Melshofdi, near the W end of the bank.

8.10 In the outer approaches to the fjord, the alignment of the entrance channel lighted range leads over a depth of 8.6m, about

3 miles WSW of Melshofdi.

8.10 Due to isolated shoal patches in the outer approaches, vessels with drafts of over 7m should exercise caution.

8.10 A triangular restricted area has been established close S from

the Hafnarfjordur breakwater entrance and extends 1 mile W,

then S toward the entrance to Straumsvik. A submerged pipeline lies in this area. 

8.11 Skerjafjordur (64°09'N., 22°01'W.) (World Port Index No. 90) is separated from Hafnarfjordur by the Alftanes

Peninsula, which extends for 2 miles between Melshofdi and

Eyri, its NE extremity. The town of Skerjafjordur, which forms

a part of Reykjavik, is situated on the N side of the fjord.

8.11 Depths—Limitations.—In the inner part of the fjord, a Theaded pier, with a depth of 2.7m alongside its face, projects

338m from the NE shore. A submarine oil pipeline extends

from the pier head and wires extend from its outer end N and

NE to the shore. Vessels berth at HW heading SE. They use

two anchors and secure to two stern mooring buoys. Vessels up

to 6.6m draft can be handled. 

8.11 A reef, with two extended shoals, runs seaward for 0.75 mile

from the coast, located about 1 mile NNE of Melshofdi. Seltjarnarnes, 3.75 miles NNE of Melshofdi, is a peninsula which

extends 1.75 miles NW and has two extremities at its seaward

end.

8.11 Sudhurnes, the S extremity, is located 1 mile SW of Grotta.

A reef extends NE from Sudhurnes and nearly connects it to

Hafnarfjordur
140 Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 

Pub. 181

the islet. It is reported that a group of radio masts stand on the

SE part of this extremity.

8.11 Numerous dangers lie in the approaches to Skerjafjordur and

may best be seen on the chart.

8.11 Svidholtsbodhi, a shoal patch with a depth of 1.9m, lies

about 1.5 miles NW of Melshofdi. Leirubodi, a shoal patch

with a depth of 1.8m, lies about 0.75 mile NNW of Svidholtsbodhi. Jorundarbodi (64°08'N., 22°04'W.), a dangerous rock

lying on a shallow patch, is located about 1.5 miles SW of

Sudhurnes. Several shoal patches, with depths of 3.3 to 4.8m,

lie up to 0.75 mile E and 0.5 mile NE of this rock. 

8.11 Kerlingasker and Keppur are drying reefs which lie about 0.5

mile W and 0.75 mile SW, respectively, of Sudhurnes. The

main entrance channel lies between these reefs and Sudhurnes.

8.11 Longusker, a narrow ridge of reefs, lies between 0.75 and 1.5

miles SE of Sudhurnes, on the E side of the entrance channel.

8.11 The entrance fairway is narrow and fringed with dangers. It

is indicated by ranges and marked by buoys.

8.11 Aspect.—Grotta, an islet, lies on a reef which extends from

the N of these two extremities. A light is shown from a tower,

23m high, standing on the islet.

8.11 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots can be contacted

by VHF and come from Reykjavik. They will board in

Reykjavik roadstead about 2 miles NNE of Grotta Light.

8.11 Caution.—During bad weather, vessels cannot enter

Skerjafjordur and must either stand off or anchor in Reykjavik

roadstead.

8.11 Submarine cables lie in the fjord and may best be seen on the

chart. 

8.11 A restricted area has been established around a historical

wreck in position 64°07'N, 21°57'W. 

8.11 Numerous small craft may be encountered within the fjord.

Reykjavik (64°09'N., 21°56'W.)

World Port Index No. 100

8.12 Reykjavik, the capital of Iceland, is Iceland’s major

city. It is home to nearly half the country’s population. The first

people said to have inhabited Iceland were Irish Monks who

probably settled there in the eighth century, but Ingolfur Arnarson is said to be the first known settler in Iceland. A chieftain

from Norway, he arrived in Iceland with his family and dependents in 874. He built his farm in Reykjavik.

8.12 Reykjavik is a major port. There are two main harbor areas:

the Gamla Hofnin and the Sundahofn.

8.12 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 4m at springs and 3m

at neaps.

Depths—Limitations.—Gamla Hofnin (Old Harbor), protected by two breakwaters, is situated on the S side of Orfirisey.

The entrance is 100m wide. The harbor is divided into Vesturhofn (West Harbor) and Austurhofn (East Harbor). Total

quayage is 2900m, and 600m of the total is for small fishing

vessels. The depth of Gamla Hofnin at its entrance is 6 to 8m

(MLWS). It is best for larger vessels to berth at high tide. Vesturhofn is used for unloading small and large fishing vessels,

for berthing bunker barges, and as a lay-up area for repairs.

Austurhofn is a cruise ship berth, 170m long, at Midbakki, and

a ro-ro terminal for the Akranes ferry. The Icelandic Coast

Guard and the Icelandic Marine Research Institute both have

bases here. The harbor is used for landing wet fish from small

and medium-sized boats for auction. It is also used by deepsea

trawlers for landing frozen fish. 

Sundahofen is located SE of Laugarnes. The harbor has

unrestricted access. The four sections of Sundahofen are

Vatnagardar, Kleppsvik, Grafarvogur, and Eidsvik.

Vatnagardar, an open basin, has 780m of total quayage, and

has 8m of water alongside. It is used mainly for handling containers and unitised cargo. There is a ro-ro berth and a berth to

accomodate bulk carriers in Vatnagardar. The quay is also used

in summer for cruise ships over 170m that are too large to berth

in Gamla Hofnin.

Kleppsvik is the main quay in Sundalhafen. It is on the S

side of the basin. The approach channel is 50m wide and has a

depth of 7m (MLWS). The main quays are Holtabakki Quay,

which is 250m long, with depths of 7 to 8m alongside, and

Vogabakki Quay, which is 300m long, with a depth of 8m

alongside. The berths are mainly used for handling containers.

General cargo vessels, bulk carriers, and trawlers also use

Kleppsvik.

A boat harbor lies S of Vogabakki Quay.

Grafarvogur is used for discharging and storing cement,

gravel, and asphalt. The approach channel has been dredged to

4m (MLWS). There is a depth of 4.5m alongside.

Eidsvik serves as the State Fertilizer Plant. It has a deep water quay, with 7m of water alongside. 

Vessels up to 50,000 dwt, 240m in length, and 8m draft have

been accommodated within the port.

8.12 Two offshore tanker mooring berths lie within the port. They

are serviced by submarine pipelines and are situated close NE

of Orfirisey and close N of Laugarnes. Tankers up to 32,000

dwt, with a maximum draft of 12m, can be accommodated.

8.12 Aspect.—The harbor approach is unrestricted and ice-free

all year round. Lighted ranges indicate the channels leading to

the berths S of the open basin. 

8.12 Akurey, an islet 7m high, lies 1.5 miles ENE of Grotta. It is

surrounded by reefs and lies on the tongue of a bank, with

depths of less than 5m, which fronts the NE coast of the Seltjarnarnes Peninsula. Another tongue of this bank extends 1

Courtesy of Jarrod M. Kushla

Grotta Light
Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 141

Pub. 181

mile NE from Grotta. The bay entered between Grotta and

Akurey is foul and should be avoided.

8.12 Akureyjarrif is the name given to the part of the bank which

extends about 0.4 mile N of Akurey. It is marked by a lighted

buoy. An isolated shoal patch, with a depth of 12.7m, lies about

0.75 mile NNE of Akurey.

8.12 Orfirisey is located 1 mile SE of Akurey; several drying reefs

and shoals lie between them. A former islet, Orfirisey is now

joined to the mainland and a breakwater extends 275m E from

its E side.

8.12 Engey, 15m high, is located 1 mile E of Akurey. A reef,

which dries in places, extends about 550m S from the S exCourtesy of Jarrod M. Kushla

Panoramic view of Reykjavik

Reykjavik port diagram
142 Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 

Pub. 181

tremity of this island and is marked by a lighted buoy. A light,

which indicates the approaches, is shown from a tower, 9m

high, standing at the N end of the island. A racon is situated at

the light tower.

Reykjavik Harbor

Reykjavik Harbor

Courtesy of Jarrod M. Kushla

Reykjavik—Inner Harbor

Reykjavik from SW

Sundahofen—Reykjavik Container Terminal
Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 143

Pub. 181

8.12 Engeyjarrif, the W entrance channel, leads between Akurey

and Engey and towards City Harbor.

8.12 Videy is located 2.5 miles E of Akurey. Vidheyjarflak, a

bank, extends about 1 mile N from the N coast of the island.

Shoal depths of 6.8m and 2.2m lie about 0.75 mile NNW and

0.25 mile N, respectively, of the N end of the island. Several

rocks and reefs front the W shore of the N part of Videy and are

marked by a lighted buoy. Shallow water and a reef, marked by

a lighted buoy, lie between the S end of the island and the

mainland.

8.12 Vidheyjarsund, the E entrance channel, leads between Engey

and Videy and towards Sundahofn.

8.12 Laugarnes, a prominent point, is located on the mainland, 1.5

miles E of Orfirisey. A spit, with drying rocks, extends about

0.4 mile N from the N side of this point and is marked by a

lighted buoy. Skarfaklettur, a rock 10m high fringed by a reef,

lies 550m E of the point. 

8.12 Vifilsfell (64°02'N., 22°33'W.), a conspicuous mountain,

691m high, and Mount Esja, a conspicuous plateau, 851m

high, stand 12 miles SE and 8 miles NE, respectively, of Reyk8.12 Sjomannaskolin Light (64°08'N., 21°54'W.) is shown from

the conspicuous steeple tower, 32m high, of the nautical school

which stands 1.5 miles SE of Orfirisey. It indicates the entrance

channels. 

8.12 A conspicuous church tower, Landakotskirkja, stands 1 mile

SSE of Orfirisey.

8.12 A conspicuous block of flats and an oil installation, with a

prominent chimney close SE, stand on Laugarnes.

8.12 An aeronautical lighted beacon (64°08'N., 21°55'W.) is

shown from the top of a water tank standing on a hill about

0.75 mile SW of the nautical school. Vessels approaching from

W have reported that this light is especially useful in poor visibility. 

8.12 Vifilstadir Sanatorium stands about 4 miles S of Reykjavik

and 11.25 miles NE of Keilir. It is reported to be very conspicuous from the outer W approaches.

8.12 Facilities at the airport, situated 1 mile S of City Harbor,

stand prominent.

8.12 A tank farm is situated on the N side of Orfirisey. 

8.12 A prominent silo stands on the N side of Vatnagardar basin.

8.12 A prominent reservoir is situated on the summit of a hill,

Courtesy of Jarrod M. Kushla

View of Mount Esja from W

Reykjavik near Orfirisey from NE

Landakotskirkja (hilltop Catholic Church)
144 Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 

Pub. 181

49m high, standing close S of the nautical school.

8.12 Lighted Buoy No. 7 is moored about 1.5 miles NW of Engey

Island Light.

8.12 The entrance fairway in Vidheyjarsund is indicated by a

lighted range, which may best be seen on the chart.

8.12 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for all vessels over 60m

long, all vessels carrying hazardous or dangerous cargo, and

for Hvahjordhur Terminal, Helguvik. Pilots board near Lighted

Buoy No. 7 or at the anchorage.

8.12 The pilot station and pilot vessel can be contacted on VHF

channels 12, 16, and 17.

8.12 Vessels should send their ETA 24 hours and 3 hours in advance through Reykjavik (TFA) to the harbor authorities and

inform the harbormaster of any changes to the ETA. The harbor office must be contacted 3 hours before arrival on VHF

channel 12 or 17. 

8.12 Small craft owners are advised to contact the harbor control

on VHF channel 12 before berthing. 

8.12 Anchorage.—The best anchorage for large vessels is in the

roadstead lying E of City Harbor. There are depths of 11 to

12m, sand and shingle over hard solidified mud; however, the

holding ground is poor and the roadstead is exposed to N and E

winds, which are frequently strong. More sheltered anchorage

can be obtained, in depths of 9 to 14m, under the lee of Engey,

but heavy gales from W raise a considerable swell at this is anchorage. Well-sheltered anchorage can be found in Eidhsvik

(64°10'N., 21°50'W.) in depths of about 12.5m. 

8.12 Caution.—Several dangerous wrecks lie within the entrance

channels and may best be seen on the chart.

8.12 Submarine oil and gas pipelines, as well as submarine cables, lie within the port and may best be seen on the chart. A

submarine pipeline (2008) crosses the channel nearest the pier

area at Ellioaarvogur. 

8.12 Several marine farms are reported to have been established

along the coasts of the islands lying in the approaches.

8.12 A magnetic anomaly occurs at a position close N of the NE

extremity of Akureyjarrif. It reaches a maximum of nearly

20°W. However, this anomaly is not experienced suddenly but

increases regularly as the area is approached from N or W and

then decreases regularly as the entrance to City Harbor is

neared. A magnetic anomaly of about 8°E has also been experienced at about 2.5 miles N of this position.

8.12 An area centered in position 64°07.0'N, 21°57.2'W, about 0.3

mile SW of T-head fuel pier, is a restricted areas. 

8.12 Sjomannaskolinn Light is partly obscurred by buildings and

cranes from 158° to 162°. 

8.13 Kjalarnes (64°14'N., 21°55'W.), the W extremity of

the peninsula which forms the S entrance point of Hvalfjordur,

is located 3.5 miles NNW of the N extremity of Videy. Kollafjordhur, the bight formed between these two points, extends SE

and is indented by a number of fjords.

8.13 Eidsvik lies between the E side of Videy and Geldinganes, a

peninsula extending from the mainland, 0.5 mile E. This fjord

is clear of dangers except for a shoal area, with depths of less

than 5m, which extends up to 365m offshore from the E side of

the N part of Videy. A jetty, which serves a fertilizer plant, is

situated on the S shore of the fjord. A lighted range, which can

best be seen on the chart, is shown from close E of this jetty

and indicates the entrance channel. A lighted buoy is moored

about 0.4 mile NE of the NE extremity of Videy. Vessels may

obtain anchorage, in a depth of 14m, about 550m NNW of the

head of the jetty. 

8.13 Caution.—A dangerous wreck, with 15.2m over it, lies

close WNW of the NW extremity of Perney.

8.14 Lundey (64°11'N., 21°50'W.), a low and grass-covered islet, is located 1 mile NE of the N end of Videy. It is

fringed by a reef. Perney (Therney), a low and grass-covered

island, is located 0.75 mile E of Lundey.

8.14 Leiruvogur, a small shallow fjord, extends 2 miles E between

Perney and Geldinganes. The greater part of this fjord dries at

low water. Anchorage can be obtained by large vessels, in

depths of 9 to 13m, in the outer part of this fjord, S of Perney. 

8.14 Alfsnes, a small and rounded promontory terminating in a

steep slope, lies on the N side of Leiruvogur. 

8.14 Brimnes (64°12'N., 21°50'W.) a rounded promontory, is located 1.25 miles N of Lundey. It extends SW from the SW

slopes of the Esja Range and terminates in a hill with a steep

slope to seaward. Saltvik, a small bight, lies 0.75 mile E of

Brimnes and is foul up to about 365m offshore. Within this

bight, rocks extend up to 183m offshore, close E of two conspicuous waterfalls. 

8.14 A narrow fjord extends 1.5 miles ENE from the E entrance

point of Saltvik. An overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance of 8m, spans this fjord at a position about 2 miles E of

Brimnes. Helgusker, a rock, which dries 3m, lies in the middle of

the fjord in the vicinity of the cable. Anchorage may be obtained,

in a depth of 9m, in the middle of the fjord, about 550m W of the

cable. 

8.14 Hofsvik, a bay, is entered between Brimnes and Kjalarnes, 2.5

miles NW. It is encumbered by shoals, rocks, and islets and

should be avoided by vessels without local knowledge. Kjalarnes

is fronted by numerous rocks and reefs. Shoal patches, with

depths of 7m and 9m, lie up to 550m SW of the point.

8.14 Brautarholtsborg, 46m high, is a conspicuous crag standing

about 1 mile NE of Kjalarnes; it resembles a ruined castle.

8.14 Caution.—A magnetic anomaly exists in a small area locatSjomannaskolinn Light, Seaman’s School
Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 145

Pub. 181

ed about 1.5 miles SW of Kjalarnes. A sudden anomaly of

from 14° to 18°W has been experienced here. The variation is

reported to be normal to the N of the area and up to 0.5 mile S

of the area. However, farther S, anomalies of both E and W

variation have been experienced. A local magnetic anomaly

has also been reported to exist at a position about 5 miles N of

Kjalarnes.

8.15 Hvalfjordur (64°16'N., 22°00'W.) is entered between

Kjalarnes and Inri-Holmur (Inriholmur), a point and village 4

miles NNW. The fjord trends NE and E for 17 miles and is navigable for almost its entire length. It diminishes to a width of

less than 1 mile at the narrows, about 12 miles above the entrance, then broadens at the head and forms several bays and

inlets. There are several dangerous rocks in the fjord, particularly at the entrance and on the SE side of the outer part. 

8.15 Mount Esja, on the SE side of the fjord, and Akrafjall, a

prominent mountain, 643m high, standing 6.5 miles N of

Kjalarnes, serve to identify the entrance of the fjord. Thufufjall, a conspicuous mountain, 533m high, stands near the head

of the fjord. A prominent white building stands on the lower

slopes 1.75 miles SW of its summit. 

8.15 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in the entrance attain a

rate of about 0.75 knot at springs. They are generally weaker

towards the head. Tides at Grundartangi rise about 3.9m at

springs and 2.9m at neaps.

8.15 Caution.—Several submarine cables lie within the fjord and

may best be seen on the chart.

8.15 The wind may blow very strongly out of the fjord and, with

E winds, very heavy squalls may come down from the mountains.

8.15 Numerous streams pour down the mountains on the SE side

of the fjord and at the head. When the snow melts in the spring,

these streams become torrents and bring down large amounts

of shale and sand into the fjord.

8.15 Numerous small research buoys have been established within Hvalfjordur beginning near the lighted buoy at Hnausasker

and extending about 10 miles NE. Research is expected to continue until 2012.

8.16 Galtarvikurhofoi, a small point on the N shore, is located about 7 miles NE of Innri Holmur, a village with a prominent church near the shore. Kuludalsa, a conspicuous

farmhouse, stands 2 miles SW of Galtarvikurhofoi. 

8.16 On the N side of the entrance a coastal bank, with reefs and

rocks, extends up to almost 1 mile offshore. Heynesflogur, a

rock with a depth less than 1.8m, lies at the outer edge of this

bank, about 1 mile SE of Inriholmur. Shoal patches and rocks

extend up to 1.5 miles offshore, close W of Inriholmur.

8.16 Hvaleyri (64°21'N., 21°44'W.), a low and rocky spit,

projects about 0.5 mile into the fjord from the S shore, 8 miles

NE of Kjalarnes. A light is shown from a tower standing on the

N extremity of the spit and a prominent stack, 12m high, stands

on the beach 0.5 mile SSW of it.

8.16 A coastal bank, with reefs and rocks, lies between Kjalarnes

and Hvaleyri and extends up to 1 mile offshore. Hnausasker, a

dangerous rock, lies at the outer edge of the bank, 4 miles NNE

of Kjalarnes, and is marked by a lighted buoy. Andriosey, an islet 5m high, lies on the bank 1.25 miles N of Kjalarnes; it is

fringed by rocks and a reef. Isolated shoal patches lie up to

about 1.5 miles NW of this islet and are marked by a lighted

buoy. Numerous submarine cables cross the fjord and can be

best seen on the chart. Some are power cables and are marked

by beacons. A road tunnel has been constructed beneath the

fjord 4 miles NE of Kjalarnes. 

8.17 Grundartangi (64°20'N., 22°41'W.) (World Port Index No. 105) is located on the N coast of Hvalfjordur Fjord in

Faxafloi Bay, which is N of Reykjavik, 1.25 miles NE of Galtarvikurhofoi. 

Grundartangi is ice-free throughout the year. The port consists of a rectangular land fill square extending from the shore

with two berths. Berth A runs perpendicular to the shore line

and is 120m long ,with a depth of 8m alongside. It handles bulk

material imports and exports for the ferro-silicon plant. Berth

B runs parallel to the shore line and is 250m long, with with a

depth of 13m alongside. Alumina and other materials are discharged at this berth for the aluminium smelter plant.

Depths of 24 to 44m lie in the fairway of the fjord leading to

the pier. 

Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory but pilots are available from Akranes. It is reported that vessels are limited to a

draft of 7.5m at low water. Vessels up to 15,000 dwt and 161m

in length have been accommodated at the pier. Pilots can be

contacted by VHF channel 14.

8.17 Anchorage.—Vessels can obtain anchorage, in depths of 16

to 19m, with good holding found at Mariuhof, which is 1.5

miles E of Grundartangi Quay. Vessels should avoid the rocky

ridge on the SW corner of Mariuholf and the foul ground between Mariuhofn and Mariusker.

8.18 Hofdi (64°22'N., 21°34'W.), a small peninsula, is located on the S side of the fjord, 4.5 miles ENE of Hvaleyri.

Hvammsey, an island 30m high, lies close E of Hofdi and is

joined to it by a stony ridge which dries.

8.18 Hrafneyri, a low and stony point, is located 1 mile NNE of

Hvammsey. The channel between them forms the narrows and

the fairway is reduced to a width of only about 550m. A rock,

with a depth of 11m, lies on the S edge of the fairway in the

narrows.

8.18 Saurbaer, a village with a prominent church, stands on the N

shore of the fjord, 2.5 miles W of Hrafneyri. Brekka, a conspicuous farmhouse, stands 1 mile N of Hrafneyri.

8.18 Hvammsvik, a bay, is entered between the SE end of

Hvammsey and Hvitanes, a rocky headland, 1.25 miles SE.

The N part of this bay is encumbered by foul ground and rocks.

Vessels can obtain anchorage, in depths of 15 to 17m, in the

outer part of this bay.

8.19 Helguvik (64°24'N., 21°27'W.), a bay, is entered between Hrafneyri and the W extremity of Thyrilsnes (Pyrilsnes),

a narrow peninsula, 2 miles SE. Thraetusker (Praetusker), the

outermost of several rocks, lies about 1.25 mile ESE of

Hrafneyri and is marked by a lighted buoy. Geirsholmi, a conspicuous islet 13m high, is located at the SE side of the bay,

0.75 mile ESE of Thraetusker (Praetusker). A shoal patch with

a depth of 4.3m, lies about 0.5 miles NE of this islet. 

8.19 Midsandur, an oil installation SW of Oliustodh (Oliustoo), is

situated on the N shore of the bay and a jetty, 305m long, extends

S from it. The head of the jetty is of dolphin construction and has
146 Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 

Pub. 181

depths of 13.4 to 14m alongside. Vessels can anchor, in a depth

of 15m, S of the jetty. A new arm is being constructed (2009) on

the breakwater and will extend about 145m E of the head of the

existing breakwater.

8.19 A tank farm is situated on the NE shore of the bay and is

served by a pier, 360m long. Tankers up to 30,000 tons berth

off the pier head using both anchors and stern moorings. They

are berthed, bow outwards, during daylight hours only.

8.19 Brynjudalsvogur, at the head of the fjord, is entered between

Hvitanes and the SW end of Thyrilsnes. A drying stony bank

fringes the S shore of the bay and a conspicuous waterfall is

situated close within the coast. 

8.19 Botnsvogur, a shallow arm of Brynjudalsvogur, extends 2

miles NE; an overhead power cable, with a vertical clearance

of 10m, spans the entrance. Its head dries up to about 0.75 mile

offshore. The N and S shores of the arm are formed by steep

mountain slopes and the prominent summit of Mulafjall, 333m

high, stands 0.75 mile S of the head.

8.19 Caution.—Large magnetic disturbances have been observed

within an area which extends E and W for 1 mile and across the

whole breadth of the fjord SSE of Saurbaer. The greatest deflection observed was 30°.

8.19 In a position SE of Saurbaer, about 0.5 mile offshore, an

anomaly of 24°E was observed; however, in a position about

0.25 mile ESE of this last position, an anomaly of 23°W was

observed.

8.20 Akranes (64°19'N., 22°05'W.) is a small port and

fishing center standing on a low and rocky spit. The harbor is

located at the NW side of Krossvik, a bay entered between

Ytriholmur, and Sudurflos, the S extremity of the spit, 1.75

miles W.

8.20 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 4m at springs and 3m

at neaps.

8.20 Depths—Limitations.—There is a depth of 8.5m in the entrance. The main pier has 290m of total quayage with depths of

5.7 to 8.5m alongside. There are facilities for ferries and fishing vessels. Vessels of up to 8,800 dwt, 137m in length, and

7.9m draft have been accommodated in the harbor.

8.20 Numerous dangers front the entire stretch of coast between

the entrance to Hvalfjordur Fjord and Akranes and may best be

seen on the chart.

8.20 Holmur Ytri, an islet 5m high, is located about 185m offshore. It lies on a reef which extends SW for about 0.5 mile

from Ytriholmur Point. Thjotur (Pjotur), a rocky and dangerous reef fringed by shoal water, lies about 1 mile SSE of

Akranes Light and fronts the approach to Krossvik. 

8.20 The channel leading between Thjotur (Pjotur) and the dangers fronting Ytriholmur is indicated by a lighted range, in line

bearing 345°. However, it is difficult and should not be used by

vessels without local knowledge. 

8.20 The bay should be entered by the channel which leads between Thjotur (Pjotur) and Sudurflos. Its fairway is indicated

by a lighted range, in line bearing 051°. 

8.20 Aspect.—Akranes Light is shown from a prominent tower,

22m high, standing 550m within the S extremity of Sudurflos.

Outer Lighted Buoy No. 11 is moored about 1.25 miles SW of

the light tower.

A white tower stands on Sudurflos; a drying reef extends

about 455m SSW from it. 

8.20 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for foreign vessels. Pilots

can be contacted by VHF and board in the vicinity of the outer

lighted buoy. Local knowledge is necessary for a safe approach.

8.20 Anchorage.—Vessels may anchor, in depths of 14 to 17m,

in the inner approach, about 640m SSE of the outer breakwater.

The holding ground is good and the anchorage is well sheltered

from winds off the land, from W through N to ESE. However,

gales from other directions quickly raise a heavy sea in the bay.

8.20 Caution.—A dangerous wreck, with 8.8m over it, lies about

0.7 mile SSE of the Akranes S breakwater. 

8.21 Lambhusasund, a small and shallow bay encumbered

by rocks, is located between the drying reef, which extends SW

from Sudurflos, and Vesturflos, a narrow spit, 0.5 mile W.

Lighted ranges indicate the narrow entrance channel, but local

knowledge is required. The bay is used as a boat harbor.

8.21 Between Akranes and a point on the shore, 6 miles NNE, the

coast forms a bay, the shores of which are fronted with dangers

extending, in places, up to 1 mile offshore. A shallow estuary,

with a wide expanse of drying mud at the entrance, lies at the

head of the bay.

8.21 Caution.—The area within 4 miles of the coast NE of

Akranes is unsurveyed and should be avoided by vessels without local knowledge.

8.21 Mellaholmi, a low islet, lies on the foul coastal bank, 5 miles

N of Akranes. Flesjur, a small islet 2m high, is located 1.75

miles NNW of Mellaholmi. It is surrounded by several rocks,

awash, which form the outermost danger.

8.21 Alftanes (64°28'N., 22°10'W.) is located 10 miles N of

Akranes. It is fronted by foul ground and dangers which lie up

to about 1.25 miles offshore. Staumfjordhur, a trading station

and boat harbor, is located 2 miles NW of Alftanes; entry requires local knowledge.

8.22 Borgarfjordhur is entered E of Alftanes and trends NE

for 14 miles to where Hvita, a glacial river, discharges into its

head.

8.22 Midhfjardharsker (Miofjaroarsker), an islet, 8m high, lies on

the SE side of the entrance to the fjord, 2.5 miles NE of Flesjur.

It is fringed by a drying reef and numerous dangers lie on the

coastal bank to the E. It is reported that small vessels can anchor in the fjord, 0.5 to 2 miles N of this islet. 

8.22 An extensive coastal shelf, foul with numerous uncharted

rocks and shoals, lies on the N side of the approach to the fjord.

This area must be avoided by vessels without local knowledge.

8.22 Lamasker (Lambasker), a group of rocks and reefs, lies 3

miles WSW of Midhfjardharsker. Graenholmi, a conspicuous

islet 9m high, is located 1 mile WSW of Lamasker and is

fringed by a reef. Both of these dangers lie on the S edge of the

foul area. 

8.22 Within the entrance of the fjord, both shores are low, fringed

by numerous rocks and shoals, and backed by marshy grassland. On the SE shore, the grassland gives way to the steep

cliffs of Hafnarfjall, a prominent mountain, standing 4 miles

within the entrance.

8.22 The fjord can only be used by small vessels due to the shallow

depths. Numerous rocks and dangers lie on either side of the fairway and extensive sand banks are located in the inner part.
Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 147

Pub. 181

8.23 Borgarnes (64°32'N., 21°56'W.), a settlement, is situated 6 miles NNE of Midhfjardharsker, near the extremity of a

narrow peninsula which projects SSW from the NW side of the

fjord. An island lies close off the extremity of the peninsula

and is connected to it by a bridge. A quay, situated on the W

side of the island, is 29m long and has a depth of 1.9m alongside. Vessels with drafts up to 3.5m and local knowledge can

reach an anchorage area lying 365m S of the settlement. A submarine cable lies across the fjord in the vicinity of the settlement.

8.23 Ice.—The fjord never freezes except near the shore, but a

considerable amount of drift ice from Hvita may be encountered in it. The ice is often of the black variety; therefore, small

vessels should, proceed with caution in the winter season.

8.23 Tides—Currents.—Due to being the estuary of a large glacial river, the tidal currents in the fjord are, at times, considerable. They may attain rates of up to 6 knots in the narrow parts.

8.23 Caution.—Under certain circumstances, especially in February and August, the sea level may fall up to 0.6m below chart

datum.

8.23 Local magnetic anomalies exist within the fjord.

8.24 Thormodhssker (64°26'N., 22°19'W.), a prominent islet 15m high, is located on the edge of the coastal bank, 3.75 miles

W of Graenholmi. A light is shown from a tower, 23m high, standing on the islet. A racon is situated at the light tower.

8.24 Urdharbodhi (Uroarbooi), a shoal with a depth of 5.8m, lies

about 1.25 miles S of Thormodhssker and is the outermost danger in this vicinity. 

8.24 Sydhra Skogarives (Skogarnes) (64°48'N., 22°36'W.), a

projection in the NE corner of Faxafloi, is located 22 miles

NNW of Thormodhssker. The stretch of coast between has

many small indentations and is fronted by numerous dangers

which extend, in places, up to about 5 miles offshore. 

8.24 Caution.—In this part of Faxafloi, vessels without local

knowledge should not proceed into depths of less than 35m.

8.24 Akranes, located 13 miles NNW of Thormodhssker, is a narrow spit which extends 2.25 miles NW from the mainland.

Dangers lie up to 4.25 miles seaward of this spit. A bay, which

is unsurveyed, lies between the spit and Sydhra Skogarnes

(Skogarnes), about 8 miles NW. 

8.24 A trading station stands on Sydhra Skogarnes (Skogarnes).

An anchorage, partly sheltered by rocks and shoals, lies off the

station and can be used by small vessels with local knowledge.

A channel, marked by beacons, leads to the anchorage and is

reported to have a least depth of about 6.4m. 

8.25 Geldinganes, a small projection on the N coast of Faxafloi, is located 10.5 miles W of Sydhra Skogarnes (Skogarnes). Breidhasker, a rocky islet fringed by dangerous rocks, lies

2 miles SSE of the projection. 

8.25 Kirkjuholl, a settlement, is situated 2 miles W of Geldinganes. A light is shown from a tower, 6m high, standing at the

settlement.

8.25 Budir, a small trading station, is situated 7 miles W of Kirkjuholl, at the NW corner of a small bay. This station is rarely

visited, but anchorage is obtainable, in depths of 13 to 15m,

about 1 mile SSE of it. The approach to the roadstead leads between a number of rocks and reefs; local knowledge is required.

8.25 Maelifell, a hill, 566m high, and Budhaklettur, a domeshaped hill, 89m high, stand 2 miles NNW and 1.25 miles SW,

respectively, of Budir. Both of these hills are prominent from

seaward.

8.25 Breidhavik, a small bay, is located 4 miles W of Budir. Kirkjubodi, a shoal depth of 8.8m, lies in the E approach to this bay,

about 1.5 miles offshore. Arnarstapi, a small settlement consisting of several farms, is situated on the W shore of the bay

and is visible from seaward. A light is shown from a hut, 3m

high, standing on a hill close S of the settlement. Stapafell, a

prominent hill standing close NW of the settlement, has two

peaks; a beacon is reported to stand on the lower one. Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of 20m, good holding ground,

about 0.5 mile E of the settlement. It should only be used during the summer months and local knowledge is required. 

8.25 Caution.—Magnetic anomalies have been reported to exist

in the approaches to Arnarstapi; the magnetic compass is not

reliable in this area.

8.26 Hellnanes, located 8.25 miles WSW of Budir, is the

W entrance point of Breidavik. A reef extends about 0.75 miles

S from the point. Hellnagoltur (Goltur), a rock, lies about 1

mile E of the point. It only covers at the highest spring tides

and is always marked by breakers. Hellnar, a modern settlement, is situated close N of the point and prominent from seaward. 

8.26 Malarrif (64°44'N., 23°48'W.), the S extremity of Snaefellsnes and the N entrance point of Faxafloi, is located 4.5 miles

W of Hellnanes. The coast between is fronted by rocks. A light

is shown from a tower, 24m high, standing on this low point.

8.26 Londrangar, a remarkable group of rocks, lies close E of Malarrif. These rocks are high and steep and, on some bearings,

resemble a church with a high tower.

8.26 Snaefellsnes is the W part of the great promontory which separates Faxafloi, on its S side, from Breidafjordur, on its N side.

8.26 Snaefellsjokull, a very conspicuous mountain, stands at the

W end of Snaefellsnes, N of Malarrif. Its summit, which is always covered in snow, consists of two peaks; the W and highest peak attains a height of 1,446m. When the summit is clearly

visible, it is an indication of fine weather; however, the formaCourtesy of Ed Jackson

The Snaefellsness Peninsula
148 Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 

Pub. 181

tion of clouds around the summit indicates that changing

weather, usually a gale, is expected and will last as long as the

summit remains clouded.

West Coast (Continued)

8.27 The main features of this stretch of coast are Breidafjordur (Breidhafjordhur) and Vestfirdir (NW Fjords), which are

deeply indented by numerous fjords. Breidafjordur, a large bay

lying N of Snaefellsnes, is much encumbered with dangers. In

contrast, the rugged part of the coast N of Breidafjordur is

deeply indented by numerous fjords which, being deep, wellsheltered, and easily accessible, contain some of the best harbors in the country. This coastal area is usually known by the

comprehensive title of Vestfirdir (Northwest Fjords).

8.27 Winds—Weather.—Gales are moderately frequent, more so

than on the SW coast, but fog is relatively infrequent. Ice is seldom a hindrance to navigation, and is not usually encountered

S of 66°N.

8.27 Caution.—The coastal bank extends 40 to 60 miles offshore

and is indented by a number of deeps. The fall at its edge is

very steep. Large fishing fleets may be encountered on the

bank, especially in depths of 55 to 75m.

8.27 Dritvik, a small cove, is located 3 miles NW of Malarrif. A

reef, which breaks in heavy weather, extends about 0.5 mile

SW from its W entrance point.

8.27 Holaholar, a conspicuous hummock 113m high, stands close

to the shore, about 5 miles NW of Malarrif.

8.27 Beruvik, another small cove, is located 7 miles NNW of Malarrif. During E winds, vessels, with local knowledge, can obtain anchorage, in a depth of 25m, good holding ground, within

this cove.

8.27 Svortuloft is the name given to the stretch of coast lying between Beruvik and Ondverdarnes. A light is shown from a tower, 12m high, standing on this stretch, 1.25 miles S of

Ondverdarnes.

8.27 Ondverdarnes (Ondverharnes) (64°53'N., 24°03'W.), the

NW extremity of Snaefellsnes, is located 12 miles NNW of

Malarrif. The coast between is formed by steep cliffs and

fringed by rocks. Its volcanic origin is indicated by many small

volcanic cones, by its brown, red, and yellow color, and by its

lack of vegetation. A light is shown from a tower, 7m high,

standing on the point, but is obscured on some bearings.

8.28 Breidafjordur (Breidhafjordhur) (65°14'N.,

24°20'W.), a large bay, is entered between Ondverdarnes and

Bjargtangar, 40 miles NNW. It indents the W coast for a distance of about 45 miles and the shores are backed by high and

conspicuous mountains. The S and N shores of the outer part of

the bay are indented by a number of small fjords. The E part of

the bay is filled with innumerable islets and rocks and is, therefore, mostly unsuitable for navigation; however, two of the

most important trading stations within the bay, Stykkisholmur

and Flatey, are situated there. Vessels proceeding to these stations require local knowledge.

8.28 Tides—Currents.—Within Breidafjordur, the flood tidal

current sets N into the bay along the S shore. The ebb tidal current does the reverse.

8.28 Along the whole of the N shore, the S tidal current runs E;

however, the N tidal current runs E to the E of Skorarbodar

(65°24'N., 23°58'W.) and W to the W of it. At spring tides, the

N current may attain a velocity of up to 4 knots in the vicinity

of Latrabjarg.

8.28 In the W part of the bay, a portion of the S tidal current sets

SE.

Aspect.—On the S side of the bay, in addition to

Courtesy of Ed Jackson

 North side of the Snaefellsness Peninsula

Snaefellsjokull

Courtesy of Ed Jackson

Kirkjufell
Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 149

Pub. 181

Snaefellsjokull, the following conspicuous hills and mountains

may be observed:

1. Enni (64°54'N., 23°45'W.), a steep-sided mountain

417m high, standing on the coast N of Snaefellsjokull.

2. Bulandshofdi, a dark mountain, 323m high, standing

close to the shore, about 8 miles NE of Enni.

3. Stod (Stodh), a coffin-shaped hill, 266m high, standing 3 miles ENE of Bulandshofdi. 

4. Kirkjufell, a conical hill, 462m high, standing 2.5

miles E of Bulandshofdi.

5. Bjamarhafnarfjall (64°59'N., 23°00'W.), a mountain

573m high, with Helgafell, an isolated hill, 71m high, standing 8 miles ENE of it.

8.28 On the N side of the bay, the following hills and mountains

may be observed:

1. Kikafell (65°31'N., 23°18'W.), a mountain, 610m

high and Hagatafla, another mountain 603m high, standing

6.5 miles WSW of it.

2. Stalfjall, a mountain, 701m high, standing 8.5 miles

WSW of Hagatala and Latrabjarg, a coastal ridge, attaining a

height of 441m 15 miles WNW of it.

8.28 The following may be observed near the head of the bay:

1. Dimunnarklakkar (65°08'N., 22°36'W.), a hill with

twin summits, standing on an islet and rising to a height of

71m.

2. Klofningur (65°13'N., 22°27'W.), a mountain, 494m

high, and Tungumuli (65°11'N., 22°10'W.), a mountain,

640m high; both are very conspicuous.

8.28 Caution.—There is reason to believe that depths within the

bay and the branch fjords at the head are decreasing and the

land rising. Therefore, in many places depths less than those

charted may be found.

8.28 Patches of foul ground lie in an area located about 31 miles

NW of Ondverdarnes and may best be seen on the chart.

8.28 Several anomalies have been experienced in the area between Ondverdarnes and Bjargtangar. In an area bound by the

parallel of 65°03'N, and between the meridians of 24°00'W and

24°20'W, large deflections have been observed with anomalies

up to 22° both E and W.

8.29 Hellissandur (Sandur) (64°55'N., 23°54'W.), a trading station, is situated 4.25 miles NE of Ondverdarnes, at the

head of a cove. Brimnes, the W entrance point, is fringed with

reefs; a number of submerged rocks lie in the SW part of the

cove. There is a small boat harbor which dries. Range beacons

indicate the entrance fairway, but are reported to be difficult to

identify. Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of 20m, sand,

off the cove. Local knowledge is required. 

8.29 Anchorage, with good shelter from winds between SW to

SE, may also be obtained, in depths of 22 to 27m, off the coast,

about 2 miles SW of Brimnes. A conspicuous radio mast

stands near the coast, 0.5 mile SW of Brimnes.

8.29 Rif (64°55'N., 23°50'W.), a low point, is located 2.5 miles

ENE of Hellissandur. Several farms are situated on the point

and Rifshovn, a small harbor protected by breakwaters, lies

close S of it. Dangerous reefs front the harbor and is marked by

a buoy. Taska, a drying reef, is marked by a lighted beacon. An

entrance channel, dredged to a depth of about 3.5m, is indicated by lighted range beacons. The main quay berths is 320m in

lengt,h with depths of 3 to 5m alongside. Two new breakwaters (2009) have been built at Rif. The first one is about 500m

extension of Norougarour and the other is about 350m E of Suourgarour. A church, with a high tower, stands 1.5 miles SW of

Rif. 

8.29 From Rif to Snoppa, a point 3 miles ESE, the coast is fringed

with dangerous reefs which extend up to almost 1 mile offshore.

8.30 Olafsvik (64°54'N., 23°43'W.), a trading station, is

situated in the W corner of a wide bay which is entered

between Snoppa and Vatnstangi, 3 miles ENE. At the W end of

the station, there is a small enclosed harbor, which dries in its

inner part. There are berths, for small vessels, with depths up to

5.8m alongside. A light is shown from a tower, 3m high,

standing on the coast about 1 mile E of the station. Anchorage

may be obtained, in a depth of 20m, at an outer roadstead off

the harbor. The anchorage is exposed to N winds, which can

create dangerous swells. Lighted range beacons indicate the

channels leading to the harbor and the anchorage. However,

reefs and shoals lie adjacent to the fairways and local

knowledge is required. 

8.30 Caution.—An anomaly of up to of 8°E has been observed

over a small area in the approaches to Olafsvik.

8.30 Krossnes (64°58'N., 23°22'W.), a point fringed by steep-to

reefs, is located 10 miles NE of Olafsvik. The coast between is

fronted by rocks and shoals. A light is shown from a tower, 9m

high, standing on the point. Shoals and rocks, over which the

sea breaks, lie up to 1.5 miles N of Krossnes and are marked by

a lighted buoy.

Approaching Olafsvik

Olafsvik
150 Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 

Pub. 181

8.31 Grundar Fjordur (Grundarfjordhur) (65°00'N.,

23°18'W.) is entered between Krossnes and Skarfatangi, 5

miles NE. The fjord extends SSE for 4 miles and affords anchorage, but local knowledge is required. 

8.31 Skarfatangi is the N extremity of a peninsula which separates

Grundar Fjordur from Kolgrafafjordur, to the E. The coast in

the vicinity of this point is fronted by a bank, with depths of

less than 5m, which extends up to 1 mile offshore.

8.31 Numerous shoals and a group of rocks lie within a dangerous

area which extends 6 miles NNW from Skarfatangi; large vessels should not attempt to cross this area.

8.31 Eyrarfell, a mountain 352m high, rises close S of Skarfatangi

and is prominent.

8.31 Melrakkaey, a low islet, lies in the center of Grundar Fjordur,

1.5 miles NE of Krossnes. It is steep-to on its E side but a reef

extends up to 0.25 mile from the N side. 

8.31 The shores of the fjord are generally sparsely inhabited.

However, a settlement, with two jetties suitable for small craft,

is situated in the SE corner, 3.75 miles SSE of Krossnes. A bay,

with depths of mostly less than 5.5m, lies in the SW corner of

the fjord. Grafarnes, a salient point, is located on the E side of

this bay. A small settlement and a group of oil tanks stand on

the point and two breakwaters extend seaward from close E of

it.

8.31 Anchorage.—Good anchorage may be obtained, in a depth

of 15m, good holding ground, in the SE part and off the E side

of the fjord. Local knowledge is required, as reefs lie in the vicinity of the anchorages.

8.31 Caution.—During the summer, winds from seaward do not

blow directly into the head of the fjord, but frequently raise a

heavy swell. During S and SW winds, heavy squalls may come

down from the mountains.

8.31 Marine farms have been established in Grundarfjordhur and

may be floating or fixed structures. They are generally marked

by buoys and beacons. The farms and moorings should be

avoided. 

8.32 Kolgrafafjordur (65°00'N., 23°03'W.) is entered E

of Grundar Fjordur between the peninsula, on the W side, and

the coast under the NW slopes of Bjarnarhafnarfjall, 1.5 miles

E. Akureyjar, an island 19m high, lies 0.5 mile off the E entrance point and reefs lie between them. Brennubodhi, a drying

rock with depths of less than 7m, lies 0.5 mile W of Akureyjar

and in the entrance to Kolgrafafjordhur. 

8.32 This fjord offers one of the best shelters in the whole of Breidafjordur, but it is little used because of the dangers in its approach. No directions can be given for entering Kolgrafajordur

and local knowledge is required.

8.32 Hoskuldsey (65°06'N., 23°01'W.), a low islet, is located

11.5 miles NE of Krossnes and 5.5 miles N of the entrance to

the fjord. It is one of the outer dangers in the SE part of Breidafjordur. A light is shown from a tower, 10m high, standing

on the summit.

8.32 Between Kolgrafafjordur and Stykkisholmur, 9 miles NE,

the coast is fronted by numerous islets, shoals, rocks, and reefs

and should be avoided by vessels without local knowledge.

8.32 Ellidaey (65°09'N., 22°48'W.), an island lying near the outer

edge of theses dangers, is located 6 miles ENE of Hoskuldsey.

A light is shown from a tower, 8m high, standing on a hill in

the E part of the island. A small harbor, with depths of 5 to 7m,

is located at the S side of the island. It affords anchorage with

good holding ground, but local knowledge is required.

8.33 Stykkisholmur (65°05'N., 22°43'W.), an important

trading station, is situated 4.5 miles SSE of Ellidaey, on the N

extremity of a much-indented projection. The station is situated on the S side of a small natural harbor which is formed between the mainland shore and three islands, Landey,

Vadstakksey (Stakksey), and Sugandisey, lying close off it.

Two entrance channels lead from W through the dangers fronting the coast to the harbor. One passes N of Vadstakksey

(Stakksey), an island lying 2 miles S of Ellidaey; the other

passes to the S of it. They are indicated by lighted ranges and

beacons. Local knowledge is advisable, but the N entrance

channel is recommended for those vessels without it. There is a

wooden jetty, 30m long, with a depth of 5m alongside, in the

harbor.Vessels may anchor, in depths up to 27m, sand, good

holding ground, near the harbor E of the island, Sugandisey.

8.33 Caution.—Caution must be exercised in the shallowest parts

of the approach channels due to frequent changes taking place

on the sea bottom.

8.33 Local anomalies have been reported to exist at positions in

both the entrance channels. An anomaly of 11°W was observed

in the N channel and one of 6°E was observed in the S channel.

8.34 Alftafjordur (65°02'N., 22°38'W.), an unsurveyed

fjord, the entrance of which is obstructed by islets and rocks,

indents the coast in a S direction close E of Stykkisholmur.

8.34 Hvammsfjordur (65°06'N., 22°20'W.) is the name usually

applied to all the waters E of Stykkisholmur. However, properly speaking, the name belongs only to that part of the fjord that

lies E of the chain of islets that encumbers its entrance, 3 miles

E of Hrappsey (65°07'N., 22°36'W.). From its entrance,

Hvammsfjordur extends E and NE almost 25 miles. The chain

of islets, which encumbers the entrance to this fjord, lies on an

extensive shoal area. Most of the channels which lead between

these islets dry except for Rost (65°07'N., 22°31'W.), the principal channel. Hvammsfjordur can only be navigated by power

vessels with drafts up to 5m. There are no safe anchorages and

the fjord is characterized by baffling winds, strong tidal currents, eddies, and whirlpools.

8.34 Caution.—Vessels should not attempt to pass through

Hvammsfjordur without local knowledge.

Styykkisholmur
Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 151

Pub. 181

8.34 Tidal currents in the channels attain rates of 6 to 8 knots at

neaps and even greater rates at springs.

8.34 Due to changes of the sea bottom, vessels can only pass

through the channels at high water.

8.34 The depths in Rost may be less than charted. 

8.35 The part of Breidafjordur which lies NE of a line joining Ellidaey and Kikafell (65°31'N., 23°18'W.) is encumbered

with an immense number of islets, rocks, and shoals. These

dangers lie in groups, with navigable channels leading between

them. 

8.35 Caution.—Due to changes of the sea bottom, sections of the

channels may only be used at high water.

8.35 Only the main channels have been surveyed and these are so

narrow and intricate that they may only be used with local

knowledge.

8.36 Flatey (65°22'N., 22°55'W.), an island, 15m high, is

located 14 miles N of Ellidaey. It is the largest and central island of a group lying in the NE part of Breidafjordur. A trading

station is situated on its NW side. Reefs and small islets extend

along the S side of the island and about 0.5 mile off it.

8.36 Klofningur, an islet fronted by reefs and shoals, lies about

0.5 mile W of the W end of Flatey. A light is shown from a

tower, 9m high, standing on the islet. A racon is situated at the

light tower.

8.36 The principal outer dangers lying between Ellidaey and

Flatey are described below.

8.36 Gassasker, a small islet 9m high, is located 2.25 miles NNE

of Ellidaey. Dangerous reefs lie close N of it.

8.36 Stagley (65°14'N., 22°51'W.), an islet 13m high, is located 5

miles N of Ellidaey. This islet is fringed by reefs and a beacon

stands on it.

8.36 Bjarneyjar (65°16'N., 22°52'W.), a chain of islets and rocks

3.5 miles long, is centered about 6.5 miles SSE of Flatey.

8.36 Alasker (65°18'N., 22°56'W.), a drying reef with an islet on

it, is located 4.25 miles S of Flatey

8.36 Brekar, a rock, awash, lies about 4 miles NW of Stagley.

8.36 Lagibodi, a shoal with a least depth of 1.9m, lies about 1

mile ESE of Brekar.

8.36 Oddbjarnsker (65°21'N., 23°09'W.), a prominent islet 11m

high, is located about 6.5 miles W of Flatey. It is surrounded by

foul ground. Another islet, 11m high, is located 2.25 miles NE

of Oddbjarnsker and is fronted by rocks on its NE and SW

sides.

8.36 Kroksfjardharnes (65°27'N., 21°57'W.), a trading station,

is situated at the head of Breidafjordur. The main channel leading to it is approached between Gassasker and Stagley.

8.37 Hagi (65°30'N., 23°27'W.), a village, is situated on

the N shore of Breidafjordur, 5.5 miles W of Kikafell. An anchorage roadstead, known as Hagabot, fronts the shore near the

village and can be reached by small vessels. Channels lead

through the reefs to the roadstead from the SW and from

Flatey, but local knowledge is required.

8.37 Skor (65°25'N., 23°57'W.), the SW end of a short ridge, is

located 13 miles WSW of Hagi. It rises above a cliff to a height

of 700m and is prominent from E or W. A light is shown from a

structure, 5m high, standing on Skor.

8.37 A dangerous reef extends 2 miles SW from Skor and shoal

patches lie up to 3 miles WSW of the light structure.

8.37 Caution.—The coast between Kikafell and Skor is fronted

by numerous islets, rocks, reefs, and foul areas. The areas N

and W of Flatey have not been completely surveyed and breakers have been reported in several places.

8.37 At Skor, the N tidal current always runs strongly towards the

shore. Consequently, because of the outlying dangers, extreme

caution should be exercised in this area, especially in thick

weather.

8.38 Raudhasandsbugur, a large bay, lies between Skor and

Bjargtangar, 15.5 miles WNW. Raudisandur, two narrow sand

spits, is located on the E side of the bay and almost encloses,

Baejaros, a shallow area. Saurbaer, a small settlement, is situated at the N end of Baejaros. During N and E winds, good temporary anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of 10m, close off

the E part of the bay. However, this area is reported to be seldom visited, as a heavy swell is quickly raised.

8.38 Bjargtangar (65°30'N., 24°32'W.) is the N entrance point

Breidafjordurof. A light is shown from a dwelling, 6m high,

standing on the point. The light is not visible from Breidafjordur when bearing less than 337°.

8.38 Caution.—With strong N winds and especially during the

strength of the N tidal current, vessels should avoid approaching the vicinity of Bjargtangar, as a steep and tremendous sea is

formed. The S tidal current, when running against a strong S

gale, may also cause a heavy sea.

8.38 A dangerous race of great strength occurs off Bjargtangar.

This is caused not only by the N tidal current, but also by the

mass of water which is at the same time being emptied out of

Breidafjordur. In this case, the resultant current sets out from

the coast and boats are reported to have been saved by keeping

quite close-in.

8.38 The shore in the vicinity of the point is fringed with reefs which

extend up to 0.5 mile seaward. It should be given a wide berth.

8.38 Magnetic anomalies have been reported to exist in areas centered 22 miles NW and 5 miles W of Bjargtangar.

8.39 Between Bjargtangar and Ritur, 60 miles NE, the peninsula which forms the NW coast of Iceland is deeply indented

by numerous fjords which are usually known by the comprehensive title of Vestfirdir or the Western Fjords. This peninsula

is almost cut off from the rest of the Iceland and is joined to it

by a neck of land about 6 miles wide.

8.39 The shores of the fjords, which run for considerable distances SE between high and steep coasts, are heavily indented by

smaller fjords. A series of low points, consisting of shingle and

sand, extend transversely across the fjords from one side and

are the remains of terminal moraines of the Ice Age. Good harbors or anchorages lie behind these low points in almost all the

fjords and are used extensively by the fishing fleets which operate off this coast.

8.39 These fjords are easily navigated by power vessels as few

dangers exist and most of these are located close to shore.

8.39 Ice.—The fjords are practically free from polar ice, but they

are not suitable for vessels to winter in. Ice, which forms on the

surfaces of the fjords, often breaks adrift due to the influence

of tides and swell.

8.40 Occasionally, in severe ice years and after persistent
152 Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 

Pub. 181

N winds, the polar ice will approach the fjords. Under such circumstances, ice has been reported to fill the mouth of Sugandafjordur (66°08'N., 23°33'W.). It has also been observed at

the entrance to Onundarfjordur and within Dyrafjordur.

8.40 Tides—Currents.—Off all the fjords on the NW coast of

Iceland, the tidal current sets NE on the rising tide and SW on

the falling tide. The flood sets in along the S side of the fjords

and out along the N sides. The ebb runs in the reverse direction. How far into the fjords the tidal currents run in this manner differs, but it is often not more than 1 or 2 miles, for the

surface stream inside the fjords is usually outgoing as a result

of the discharge of fresh water from the rivers and streams.

This naturally varies with the season of the year. The ebb tidal

currents are always strongest along the N sides of the fjords

and frequently cause eddies on their S sides, especially off salient points.

8.40 Up to a distance of about 2 miles from the coast, the flood

current continues to run until about 1.5 hours after high water

by the shore. It usually runs longer than the ebb current which

is weaker. The greater the distance from shore the longer the

interval between high and low water and the corresponding

turn of the tidal current. At a distance of about 20 miles offshore, the N tidal current may continue for about 3 hours longer than close inshore.

8.40 Caution.—An area of foul ground patches, lying about 15

miles offshore, runs NE between Bjargtangar and Fjallaskagi

and may best be seen on the chart.

8.41 Blakknes (65°38'N., 24°20'W.), a steep headland, is

located 9.5 miles NNE of Bjargtangar. The coast between consists of grass-covered valleys running down to the sea between

steep but not very high hills. There are several small bays with

beaches located at their heads. The beaches are formed of yellow sand and are prominent from seaward. 

8.41 Latravik, an open bay, lies between Bjargtangar and Bjarnarnupur, 2.5 miles NNE. Hvallatur, a small settlement, is situated

in the NE corner of this bay. Anchorage can be obtained by

small vessels with local knowledge, in a depth of 6m, sand,

within the bay. Breidhavik, another open bay, lies N of Bjarnarnupur. Rocks fringe the shore. Dju’pibodi (Djupbodhi), a detached rock lies 0.7 mile offshore, and has a depth of 4.9m.

Kollsvik, a small open bay north of Breidhavik, has good tempoarary anchorage during offshore winds, but local knowledge

is required. A waverider buoy is moored 12 miles WNW of

Blakknes. 

8.41 Patreksfjordur (65°38'N., 24°08'W.) the S fjord of the Vestfirdir, is entered between Blakknes and Talkni, 6 miles E. The

entrance has depths between 4.7 to 4.9m and the harbor has a

depth of 6.4m at LW and 10m at HW. There is a quay.

8.41 Both of these entrance points are steep and from midway between them, the fjord trends SE for 12 miles. General depths in the

approach are 22 to 37m, but, as is the case with several others of

the Vestfirdir, the fjord contains a deep in which the depths increase to over 55m.Talkni is fringed by a submerged reef.

8.41 A light is shown from a stone tower, 14m high, standing at

Olafsviti, on the S side of the fjord, 4.5 miles ESE of Blakknes. 

8.41 Tunga, a small cove, is located on the S side of the fjord,

1.75 miles SE of Olafsviti Light. In the approach the depths decrease regularly from 20m to 11m, sand, at the entrance. Anchorage, well sheltered from S and SW winds, may be obtained

in the cove with local knowledge.

8.42 Vatneyri (Patreksfjordur) (65°35'N., 23°59'W.) is situated on the NW side of the fjord, 3.5 miles SSE of Talkni. The

settlement is closely backed by high mountains.

8.42 There is a small and well protected harbor. The entrance is

37m wide and indicated by a lighted range. There are depths of

3.5 to 5m alongside the quays and vessels up to 3,000 tons can

be accommodated. A prominent radio mast and a building

stand close E of the entrance. Pilotage is not compulsory, but

local knowledge is advisable. Anchorage can be obtained, in

depths of 14 to 16m, off the harbor.

8.42 Sandoddi (65°34'N., 23°59'W.) is located 6 miles SE of

Olafsviti Light. In this vicinity, a sand bank extends up to

650m into the fjord from the SW shore. An airstrip and a conspicuous bridge, which crosses the mouth of a river, are situated near this point. 

8.42 Caution.—Submarine cables lie across the fjord in the vicinity of Sandoddi.

8.42 Local knowledge is advisable as shoaling has been reported

in a few places within the fjord.

8.42 A heavy breaking sea has been reported N and E of Blakknes

with a light to moderate N wind against the tide. This can be

avoided by keeping close into the headland, but caution is necessary to avoid uncharted rocks close inshore.

8.43 Talknafjordur is entered between Talkni and a point

on the coast, 2.5 miles N. This fjord trends SE for 7 miles; its

shores are steep. It is free from dangers, but only sparsely populated. There are two small settlements, a few isolated farms,

and no roads.

8.43 A small cove, lying close S of a point, is located on the SW

side of the fjord, 3.75 miles ESE of Talkni. A disused whaling

station is situated in this cove.

8.43 Sveinseyri (65°37'N., 23°51'W.) (World Port Index No.

150), a shoal spit, projects S from the N shore of the fjord, 5.5

miles within the entrance. Its seaward end is marked by a lighted buoy. The fairway between this spit and the S shore has

depths of 9 to 14m, but is only about 183m wide. It is indicated

by lighted range beacons.

8.43 Tunga, a settlement, is situated 0.75 mile E of the spit. There

is a small wharf used by fishing and coastal vessels. Anchorage

is obtainable, in a depth of 20m, excellent holding ground,

about 365m E of the spit.

8.43 Caution.—Local knowledge is advisable, as depths may be

less than charted.

8.43 Submarine cables lie across the fjord at its narrowest part.

8.44 Kopanes (65°48'N., 24°07'W.), a point fringed by

rocks, is located 9 miles N of Talkni. A light is shown from a

structure, 6m high, standing on the point.

8.44 Caution.—A local magnetic anomaly has been experienced

close N of Kopanes.

8.44 Arnarfjordur (65°51'N., 24°00'W.) is entered between Kopanes and Slettanes, a point 7.5 miles NE. This fjord is considerably larger than Patreksfjordur and steep mountains rise to

heights of 610 to 762m on both of its sides. At the head, it is divided into two branches by Langanes, a peninsula. Depths in
Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 153

Pub. 181

the middle of the fjord are deep and range from 51 to 110m.

Except off Kopanes and Langanes, the shores of the fjord are

steep-to and free from dangers. A shoal sandspit extends about

1 mile NW from the W extremity of Langanes.

8.45 Bildudalur (65°41'N., 23°36'W.) (World Port Index

No. 160), a trading station, is situated on the NW shore of a

small cove, 14 miles SE of Kopanes. There is a T-head pier

which extends 50m from the shore; its head has a berth 37m

long, with a depth of 4.9m alongside. Vessels up to 2,500 tons

have been accommodated. An L-shaped jetty projects 60m

from the shore close SW of the pier.; it has a berth 46m long,

with a depth of 4.9m alongside. A breakwater extends 130m

SE from the shore close SW of this jetty. 

8.45 A light is shown from a tower, 5m high, standing on the W

extremity of Langanes, 2.25 miles NE of the station.

8.45 Anchorage can be obtained, in a depth of 11m, close SE of

the jetty.

8.45 Caution.—Submarine cables lie in the fjord close N of the

anchorage.

8.45 Heavy squalls frequently come down from the mountains

and N winds are reported to send in a considerable sea.

8.46 Hafnarnes (65°55'N., 23°48'W.), the S entrance point

of Dyrafjordur, is located 3 miles NE of Slettanes. The coast

between is fringed with rocks.

8.46 Svalvogar Light is shown from a tower, 6m high, standing on

the coast 1.25 miles SW of Hafnarnes.

8.46 Fjallaskagi, a low point, is located 5 miles N of Hafnarnes. A

spit extends S from this point and, with onshore winds, vessels

should not approach as the sea breaks up to 0.5 mile from it. A

light is shown from a tower, 12m high, standing on the point.

8.46 Caution.—An area of foul ground patches, lying between

about 20 and 40 miles offshore, runs NE from Fjallaskagi to

Straumnes and may best be seen on the chart.

8.47 Dyrafjordur (65°57'N., 23°51'W.), which extends

SE for 17 miles, is entered between Hafnarnes and Fjallaskagi.

This fjord is considered to be the best for shipping, because it

is wide, mostly clear of dangers. It is generally free from ice

and is used extensively by trawlers operating off the coast. Excellent anchorages may be found in the many bays located

along both sides of the fjord.

8.47 Aspect.—Skagafjall, a mountain range 700m high, rises behind Fjallaskagi on the NE side of the entrance.

8.47 Myrakollur, a peak 311m high, stands close to the N side of

the fjord, about 8.5 miles SE of Fjallaskagi.

8.47 Sandarfell, on the S side of the fjord, rises to a height of

372m, 2.75 miles SE of Myrakollur.

8.47 Caution.—Strong E winds may lower the sea level in the

fjord by up to 1.5m.

8.47 Submarine cables lie across the fjord SE of Thingeyri.

8.47 Heavy squalls come down from the mountains and blow out

of the fjord. These squalls are generally stronger near the head.

8.48 Thingeyri (Pingeyri) (65°53'N., 23°29'W.) (World

Port Index No. 170), a trading station, is situated on the S side

of the fjord, about 8 miles within the entrance. A fishing harbor

is situated close S of a low and flat point.

8.48 A light is shown from a tower, 5m high, standing on the

point and a prominent church, with a spire, stands in the station. 

8.48 A wooden pier, 110m long, projects from the shore near the

trading station. It has a berth 30m long, with a depth of 6.7m

alongside. This pier was reported (1975) to be unusable.

8.48 An L-shaped pier projects from the shore close S of the

wooden pier. The berthing face on its seaward side is 56m

long, with a depth of 5.5m alongside. On the inner side of this

pier, there are two berths, each 33m long, with depths of 1.8 to

4m alongside.

8.48 Good anchorage may be obtained E of the harbor. However,

anchorages for extended stays are preferable to the W of the

harbor. The best berth, in a depth of 20m, excellent holding

ground, is with the light tower bearing 305°. Small vessels may

anchor closer inshore. 

8.49 Onundarfjordur (66°06'N., 23°43'W.), entered 5

miles NNE of Fjallaskagi, extends 11 miles SE but its inner

part, projecting 3.5 miles from the head, dries. The fjord is surrounded by mountain ranges, which rise precipitously; its S

shore is broken by several valleys. It has not been fully surveyed; however, depths in the fjord are generally less than

37m, and, in most places, the holding ground is not good.

8.49 The entrance lies between a point, located 4 miles NNE of Fjallaskagi, and Saudhanes, 3.5 miles NE. The S entrance point is

formed by the steep N slopes of Bardi, a mountain mass which rises precipitously to a height of 487m. A light is shown from Saudhanes and reefs extend up to 0.25 mile from the point.

8.49 Flateyri (66°03'N., 23°31'W.), a low and shingle-covered

spit, extends 0.5 mile SSE from the NE shore of the fjord, 5

miles within the entrance. A trading station is spread out along

the spit facing the small bay formed E of it. A light is shown

from a building standing at the S end of the spit. A light is also

shown at the head of the breakwater. 

8.49 A quay projects fro m the E side of the end of the spit. Its

head and N sides have berths 52m long, with depths of 3 to 5m

alongside. A breakwater is reported (1990) to have been constructed. Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of 15m, with

the extremity of the spit bearing about 250°; however, the holding ground is poor, being composed of ooze.

8.49 Caution.—A submarine cable lies across the fjord in the vicinity of Flateyri.

8.49 Vessels anchoring off Flateyri must leave plenty of room for

veering cable as the wind, at times, blows out of the fjord with

great strength.

8.50 Sugandafjordur (66°08'N., 23°38'W.) is entered between Saudhanes and Goltur, a remarkable steep and flattopped headland, 2.5 miles NE. The fjord indents the coast for

6.5 miles, but only its outer 2.5 miles are navigable. The inner

section is obstructed by a sandbar which can be crossed by

only small boats.

8.50 Sudureyri, a trading station, stands on a spit at the S side of

the fjord, close W of the sandbar. Numerous fish drying sheds

stand in the station. There is a small harbor protected by a

breakwater and used only by fishing vessels. Cargo can be discharged alongside the breakwater in a depth of 2.4m.

8.50 Lighted buoys are moored 365m E and 820m ESE of the

head of the breakwater. Lighted range beacons, in line bearing

133°, indicate the approach channel.
154 Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 

Pub. 181

8.50 Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of 8m, good holding

ground, about 0.4 mile NW of the station. Good anchorage in

the entrance to the fjord in offshore winds is off Stadhur, but W

winds can raise a heavy sea. 

8.50 Stigi (66°12'N., 23°28'W.) is located 4 miles NE of Goltur.

Anchorage may be obtained in two coves, which are located

along this stretch of coast, but they are not recommended as the

sea is never calm.

8.50 Goltur Light is shown from a tower, 14m high, standing on

the coast about 1.3 miles NE of Goltur.

8.50 Caution.—Abnormal variations of 4.5°W and 2°W of the

normal were observed (1938) in positions located about 6

miles W and 5 miles N of Goltur Light.

8.51 Isafjardardjup extends for 30 miles in a SE direction

and is the largest fjord of all the Vestfirdir. It is deep and surrounded by mountains which rise steeply from the shores. The

SW side is indented by numerous narrow tributary fjords, some

of which extend for a considerable distance S and SSW. Local

knowledge is necessary for entering these tributary fjords.

8.51 The entrance lies between Stigi and Ritur, 12 miles NE, and

is easily identified by two steep mountain ranges.

8.51 Stigahlid, on the S side, are steep mountain slopes which

form the shore of the fjord for 5 miles E of Stigi.

8.51 Ritur is a steep headland, 480m high. It is easily identified by

a deep notch, which is prominent from N and S, located near

the NW extremity. Foul ground fronts this headland. Graenahlid is a mountain range which extends 5 miles E of Ritur and

forms the N shore of the fjord.

8.51 Drangajokull, 924m high, is a huge glacier located 25 miles

ESE of Ritur. It dominates the background.

8.51 Snaefjallaheidhi is a snow-covered and mountainous promontory which divides the main fjord, 9 miles within the entrance.

Snaefjall, a peak 792m high, stands on this promontory.

8.51 Bjarnagnupur, a steep point, 422m high, is located 9.5 miles

SE of Ritur. It is the W extremity of Snaefjallaheidhi.

8.51 Ice.—As this fjord is the first large opening to the S of Horn

(North Cape), the polar ice often enters. It presses into the fjord

in great masses and completely prevents navigation during the

early months of the year, sometimes remaining until the end of

July. Careful observations should be made of the ice and, as

soon as a movement is seen in the pack, vessels should hasten

S to beyond Patreksfjordur.

8.51 Tides—Currents.—The resultant of the N ocean current

and the tidal current almost always sets in along the S side of

the fjord. On the N side, the resultant current always sets out.

Off Ritur, there is frequently a rapid tidal current which should

be avoided by small vessels.

8.51 Caution.—Heavy squalls are frequent off the mountain

slopes in the outer part of the fjord.

8.51 Because the fjord is deep, there are no anchorages in the

main fjord. However, small vessels, with local knowledge,

sometimes obtain temporary open anchorage on a narrow shelf

at a few places along the shore.

8.52 Bolungavik (66°10'N., 23°14'W.), a trading station, is

situated in the W corner of a small cove on the S side of the

fjord, 6 miles E of Stigi. A light is shown from Osholar tower,

9m high, standing on the SE entrance point of the cove and a

radio mast is situated near it. Tradharhorn, a prominent mountain 635m high, stands at the E end of Stigahlid, close W of the

station. A breakwater projects 183m E from the shore at the

station. Its S side has a berth, with a depth of 7m alongside,

that is used by coastal vessels. Another breakwater extends NE

from the shore and forms a sheltered harbor. This breakwater

has berths for small craft on its inner face. It is reported that

vessels up to 3,260 dwt and 81m in length have been handled. 

8.52 Hnifsdalsvik, a small cove, is located 3.25 miles SE of Bolungavik. A settlement and trading station, known as Hnifsdalur, is situated at the head of this cove. Reefs and foul ground

front the E entrance point of the cove and it should not be approached.

8.52 Winds from NE, through E, to ESE, send a heavy sea into the

cove.

8.52 A fish factory is situated close S of the E entrance point and

a jetty, with berths for fishing vessels on its S side, extends

100m E from the shore.

8.52 Anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 11 to 13m, fine

brown sand, within the cove, about 0.5 mile offshore. Vessels

require local knowledge and this anchorage should only be

used in the fine-weather season.

Approaching Isafjurdardjup

Bolungavik
Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 155

Pub. 181

8.53 Skutulsfjordur (66°06'N., 23°05'W.), an inlet, is entered between Hnifsdalsvik, on the W side, and Arnarnes, 2

miles ESE. It trends SSE for 3.5 miles between high mountains

to the drying flats at the head.

8.53 A light, indicating the approach, is shown from a tower, 6m

high, standing on the extremity of Arnarnes. An aeronautical

radiobeacon is reported to transmit from a mast, 91m high,

standing close WSW of the light tower.

8.53 A reef, which dries, extends 230m N from Arnarnes and

shoal depths of 5.5m or less extend up to 825m NNE and 548m

NW from the point. 

8.53 A small jetty, 24m long, is situated on the W side of the inlet,

about 365m within the entrance; it is used by fishing vessels.

8.53 Caution.—Dangerous wrecks lie 2.5 and 4.75 miles N of

Arnarnes. The S wreck is marked by a lighted buoy.

8.54 Isafjordur (66°04'N., 23°07'W.) (World Port Index

No. 190), a fishing center, lies 1.75 miles within the entrance of

the inlet and is situated on a spit which extends 640m SE, then

0.5 mile SW, from a point on the W shore. Isafjordur is approximately 120 miles N of Reykjavik.

8.54 Winds—Weather.—The prevailing winds are NE and SW.

8.54 Very strong winds sometimes blow either up or down the inlet. The heaviest squalls appear to be those from SE.

8.54 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 2.2m at springs and

1.6m at neaps. The tidal current continures to set NE through

the channel for approximately 2 hours after LW. The best time

to pass through the channel is when the tidal current is weak

and is setting in a contrary direction. 

8.54 Depths—Limitations.—Sundahofn, a small harbor sheltered by breakwaters, is located close S of the elbow of the spit.

There is a wooden wharf 55m long, with a depth of 4m alongside.

8.54 Sundin, a narrow channel, leads into Pollurinn. In places, the

fairway is only 45m wide.

8.54 Asgeivssons Wharf, the main quay in Pollurinn, is 260m

long, with depths of 5 to 6.6m alongside. Vessels of 7, 000 grt

may berth alongside. 

8.54 Sundabakki, a wharf, 220m long, with depths of 7 to 8m

alongside, has been constructed at Sundahofn. 

8.54 It has been reported (1999) that vessels up to 270m long,

with a maximum draft of 8m, can be accommodated.

8.54 Aspect.—A shallow shoal extends 0.25 mile N from the NE

elbow of the above-mentioned spit. Another shoal extends S

from the S extremity of the spit to almost the opposite shore

and forms Pollurinn, an enclosed harbor at the inner end of the

In the vicinity of Isafjordur Isafjordur

Courtesy of Ed Jackson

Isafjordur
156 Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 

Pub. 181

inlet. The entrance channel is indicated by a number of lighted

ranges. An airstrip is situated on the S side of the inner harbor.

8.54 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot boards 1 mile

from the harbor. 

8.54 The vessel’s ETA is to be sent to Isafjordur Radio on VHF

channel 16, 24 hours in advance, with the vessel’s size, number

of passengers, last port of call, port of destination, agent, and

call sign.

8.54 The port may be contacted on VHF channel 12 or 16. Messages may be sent through Isafjordur Radio (TFZ).

8.54 Anchorage.—Vessels not entering Pollurinn may anchor, in

depths of 12 to 14m, within the bay which lies between the N

side of the spit and the W shore of the inlet. This anchorage

does not freeze, but polar ice may enter. Vessels may obtain anchorage in Pollurinn as convenient, but the holding ground in

the N part of the harbor is not reliable.

8.54 Caution.—A submarine cable extends across the inlet from

the E side of the spit.

8.54 Dangers lie close to both sides of the fairway and local

knowledge is required. The shoals frequently change and the

range beacons are moved as necessary. 

8.55 Alftafjordur (66°03'N., 22°58'W.) is entered between the steep coast curving S from Arnarnes and Kambsnes,

the N extremity of a narrow promontory, 4 miles SSE of Arnarnes. It is narrow and extends 6 miles SSW. Kambsnes is

fringed by a reef.

8.55 Sudavik, a trading station, is situated on the W side of the

fjord, about 4 miles SSE of Arnarnes. It is fronted by a small

harbor protected by breakwaters.

8.55 Langeyri, a small spit with a red house on it, projects from

the shore, 0.75 mile S of Sudavik. Anchorage may be obtained,

in a depth of 27m, good holding ground, about 185m offshore,

close S of the spit. Local knowledge is required.

8.55 Kofri, a prominent mountain, 635m high, stands close SW of

the spit.

8.55 Hattareyri, another small spit, projects from the SE shore,

2.5 miles SSW of Langeyri. Anchorage is obtainable, in a

depth of 18m, close S this spit.

8.55 Seydisfjordur (66°02'N., 22°55'W.) is entered close E of

Alftafjordur and extends 4.5 miles S. Its head is liable to freeze

in winter. Tjaldtangi, the E entrance point, is the N end of a

narrow promontory. Hestur, a prominent mountain, 546m high,

stands 2.5 miles S of it.

8.55 Eyri (66°01'N., 22°55'W.), a settlement with a church and

several houses, is situated on a small spit projecting from the

W side of the fjord, 2.5 miles S of Kambsnes. Anchorage may

be obtained, in a depth of 22m, good holding ground, close S

of the spit. Local knowledge is required.

8.55 Vigur, a narrow islet, is located 1 mile NE of Tjaldtangi. A

reef connects the islet to the point.

8.55 Hestfjordur is entered 2.5 miles S of Vigur and extends 6.5

miles SSW. Its entrance is encumbered by reefs and rocks,

which extend S from Vigur, and the fjord can only be used by

small boats. 

8.55 Skotufjordur (66°03'N., 22°48'W.) is entered between Vigur and Ogurnes, a sharp point 1.5 miles E. It extends 7 miles S

between steep mountains. It is deep but there are no trading

stations within this fjord.

8.55 Caution.—Several submarine cables lie in the vicinity of

Vigur and in the entrances to Hestfjordur and Skotufjordur.

8.56 Digranes is located 6.5 miles SE of Ogurnes. Between

these points, the S shore of the fjord is generally steep, broken

by several small bays and coves, and fronted by rocks and

reefs.

8.56 Ogur, a settlement with a church and school, is situated within Ogurvik, a cove, located 1.25 miles SE of Ogurnes.

8.56 Aedey (66°05'N., 22°40'W.), a comparatively low island, is

located 4.5 miles NE of Vigur. It is separated from the N shore

of the fjord by a channel, less than 0.5 mile wide. A small islet,

connected to the island by a reef, is located in the S part of this

channel. A narrow passage, with a depth of 7.3m, leads between this small islet and the mainland. An overhead cable,

with a vertical clearance of 14m, spans this passage.

8.56 A light is shown from a tower, 13m high, standing on the S

end of Aedey.

8.56 Breidasker, a group of three dangerous rocks surrounded by

foul ground, lies centered about 3.25 miles SSE of the S extremity of Aedey. Reefs extend from this group to the S shore

of the fjord.

8.56 Mjoifjordur is entered between Digranes and Vatnsnes, 1

mile E. This fjord trends SSE for 10 miles, but only the first 3

miles are navigable. Its head freezes in winter. A low islet is located 3 miles within the entrance of the fjord and reefs extend

from it to both shores. An overhead cable spans the fjord and

several submarine cables lie across the fjord in the vicinity of

the islet.

8.56 Reefs surround Vatnsnes and extend up to 0.5 mile N of the

point.

8.56 Kaldalon, a small fjord, is entered 5 miles ESE of Aedey and

branches NE from the main fjord. It is for the most part shallow and foul and should not be entered.

8.57 The head of Isafjordur is entered between Vatnsnes

and Melgraseyri, 3 miles S of the entrance to Kaldalon. It

curves gradually for 16 miles from SE to SW. Borgarey, an island 32m high, lies in the fairway, 1.5 miles ESE of Vatnsnes.

It is steep-to except on its N side, where rocks extend up to 1

mile N. Vessels generally use the passage leading E of the island.

8.57 Vatnsfjordur, entered 2 miles SSE of Vatnsnes, is a small and

shallow fjord of little importance.

8.57 Reykjarfjordur is entered 3.5 miles SSE of Vatnsnes and its

entrance is encumbered by submerged rocks. A peninsula

forms the E side of this fjord and steam, constantly rising from

hot springs, may be always observed near its N extremity.

8.57 Isafjordhur, which forms the actual head of the main fjord, is

entered E of Reykjarfjordur. Arngerdareyri, a small settlement,

is situated on the E side of the fjord, about 2.5 miles S of the

entrance to Reykjarfjordur. Anchorage may be obtained off the

settlement, but the bottom shelves so steeply that a vessel 60m

in length would have to anchor in a depth of over 46m. Vessels

may therefore prefer to anchor, in depths of 18 to 22m, at the

opposite side of the fjord.

8.57 Caution.—A submarine cable lies across the fjord, about 0.5

mile N of the settlement.

8.57 Local knowledge is required for proceeding to and anchoring

off Arngerdareyri. It is reported that N winds do not blow hard

in thr fjord, but S winds raise a heavy sea. 
Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 157

Pub. 181

8.58 Jokulfirdir, on the NW side of Isafjardardjup, is entered between Bjarnagnupur and Slettaeyri, 4 miles N. It trends

E for 15 miles to Hrafnsfjordur, at the head. Reefs and shoal

water extend up to 275m S from Slettaeyri and a light is shown

from the point.

8.58 Hesteyrarfjordur, Veidileysa (Veidhileysufjordhur), and

Lonafjordur, three branch fjords, indent the N side of Jokulfirdir and Leirufjordur, a small branch, indents the S side.

8.58 During gales or when polar ice is coming down the coast, anchorage is obtainable within Hesteyrarfjordur. However, it is

subject to strong E squalls and W winds raise a heavy swell.

Anchorage is also available within Veidileysa but it is seldom

used. Local knowledge is required for proceeding into and anchoring in these branches.

8.58 Ice.—In years of heavy incursion of polar ice, Jokulfirdir

and the subsidiary fjords, except Hesteyrarfjordur, are liable to

be filled with polar ice. Hesteyrarfjordur is kept clear of polar

ice by tidal currents.

8.59 Horn is located 18 miles ENE of Ritur. The coast between is remarkable and consists of five high, steep, and salient

points, separated by bays which have no great depths in them.

8.59 Caution.—In stormy weather or when the tidal current is

opposed to the wind, heavy tide rips may extend seaward for

several miles from the coast between Ritur and Horn. These

tide rips are extremely dangerous to vessels of even moderate

size and should be avoided.

8.59 An area of foul ground patches, lying between about 15 and

40 miles offshore, extends W, NW, and N of Straumnes and

may best be seen on the chart.

8.60 Straumnes (66°26'N., 23°08'W.), a high headland, is

located 4.5 miles NNE of Ritur. A light is shown from a tower,

24m high, standing near the extremity of the headland. A

waverider buoy is moored 5.5 miles W of the headland. 

8.60 Caution.—An anomaly of up to 10°W has been observed in

a position about 4 miles W of Straumnes. A deflection of

3.5°W was observed (1938) in a position about 3 miles NNE of

Straumnes.

8.60 Adhallvik, a large bay, lies between Ritur and Straumnes and

is free of off-lying dangers. Depths within it decrease regularly

to the shores. A high and prominent slope of white sand,

backed by a steep mountain spur, is located at the head. A derelict settlement is situated in a cove at the S end of the bay. Latravik, a cove, is located at the NE corner of the bay. During

bad weather, fishing vessels find temporary anchorage in this

bay as it is sheltered from all winds except those between SW

and NW.

8.60 Kogur (Kogurnes) (66°28'N., 22°57'W.), a headland, is located 5 miles ENE of Straumnes and is similar to it. Two coves,

in which temporary anchorage may be obtained, lie between

these headlands. 

8.60 The coast extending for 5 miles SE of Kogur is formed by

the precipitous slopes of a mountain range and fronted by

rocks.

8.60 Heljarvikurbjarg, a high headland with precipitous slopes on

its NE side, is located 9 miles E of Kogur. A bay indents the

coast between these two headlands and Hlodhuvik, a cove, lies

at its head. During fine weather, anchorage may be obtained in

this bay by vessels with local knowledge.

8.60 Goltur, a group of rocks, extends seaward from the N side of

Heljarvikurbjarg. Sulnastapi, a detached rock a short distance

from the shore, lies 1.5 miles SE of Haelavikurbjarg.

8.60 Horn (66°28'N., 22°28'W.) is a prominent headland. Its high

cliffs rise steeply from the sea and drying rocks extend up to

365m seaward from the foot. A reef, on which the sea breaks,

extends up to 0.25 mile W of the headland.

8.60 Caution.—An anomaly of 10° from the normal has been observed in a position about 4 miles N of Horn.

North Coast

8.61 The N coast of Iceland, between Horn and Langanes

(66°23'N., 14°32'W.), is heavily indented, especially towards

the W part where, it is steep and rugged. The coast is backed by

high mountains and the bays and fjords penetrate for considerable distances into the land.

8.61 The fjords seldom freeze over, except at their heads, but

drifting pack ice often interferes with navigation. Ice conditions as related to specific ports are discussed with each port.

Fog is more common than on the W coast, occurring approximately 11 days per month.

8.61 The entire N coast is fronted by a succession of banks alternating with deeps which may best be seen on the chart. In most

cases, the banks are submerged extensions of projections on

the coast. The nature of the bottom varies considerably, being

mostly sand, shells, and pebbles on the banks, and soft mud in

the deeps, though boulders are to be found scattered about everywhere.

8.61 Tides—Currents.—At Horn, the warm current, which runs

Straumnes Lt N along the W coast of Iceland, turns E and follows the N
158 Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 

Pub. 181

coast. The flood tidal current sets in the same direction, so that

on this coast, as on the W coast, the resultant of the E tidal current is markedly stronger than that of the W tidal current.

8.61 Caution.—At certain times of the year, numerous fishing

vessels may be encountered in the vicinity of the banks which

lie off this stretch of coast.

8.62 Kalfatindur, a high mountainous and narrow point, is

located 1.5 miles SE of Horn. Rocks front this point which is

backed by a prominent mountain, 532m high. 

8.62 Hornbjarg Light (66°25'N., 22°23'W.) is shown from a

tower connected to a dwelling, 10m high, standing on the

coast, 2.5 miles SSE of Kalfatindur. 

8.62 Drifandifoss, a high and conspicuous waterfall, is located

2.75 miles SE of Hornbjarg Light.

8.62 Bardi, a point fronted by rocks, is located 5 miles SSE of

Hornbjarg Light. Smidjuvik and Bardsvik are small bays which

lie, respectively, on the NW and S sides of this point.

8.62 Straumnes (66°20'N., 22°12'W.) is the SE entrance point of

Bardsvik. It is foul for up to 2.5 miles offshore.

8.62 Between Straumnes and the entrance to Ingolfsfjordur, 21

miles SE, numerous bays and fjords indent the coast. However,

all of their approaches are encumbered with shoals, reefs, and

rocks which extend up to 10 miles seaward in places. Strandabrekar is the name given to the area fronting the coast in which

these dangers lie. The fjords are also exposed to onshore winds

and fill rapidly with ice. 

8.62 Odinsbodi (Ooinbvooi), a rocky shoal over which the sea

breaks, lies 12 miles ENE of Straumnes. It is the northernmost

of the dangers within Strandabrekar. 

8.62 Drangasker (66°14'N., 21°49'W.), a high rock, lies on foul

ground about 2.5 miles offshore, 11 miles SE of Straumnes. It

is surrounded by reefs, prominent, and can be easily identified. 

8.62 Drangaskordh, a row of pointed peaks, stands on the NE end

of a steep promontory, 14.5 miles SE of Straumnes. The peaks,

which rise to heights of 372m, are rocky and very conspicuous

from N or S.

8.62 Drangajokull, a prominent mountain, 930m high, stands 10

miles SSW of Straumnes.

8.62 Caution.—Vessels should give Strandabrekar, the area encumbered with dangers, a wide berth.

8.63 Ingolfsfjordur (66°02'N., 21°38'W.) is the westernmost harbor on the N coast of Iceland. It is entered between

Seljanes and Munadarnes, the NW extremity of a small peninsula, about 1 mile NE. The fjord is 3.5 miles long; Eyri, a small

trading station is situated on its E side, near the head. 

8.63 A group of five small islets, surrounded by numerous rocks,

extends up to 1 mile NNW of Munadarnes. Kalfatindar, a

prominent mountain with two peaks, rises to a height of 645m

near the middle of the small peninsula.

8.63 Selsker (66°08'N., 21°32'W.), a steep-to rock, 5m high, is

located 4 miles NE of Munadarnes at the SE end of

Strandabrekar. Foul ground lies off its N and NE sides and

shoal patches extend up to about 3.5 miles N of it. A light is

shown from a prominent tower, 15m high, standing on the

rock. A racon is situated at the light tower. 

8.63 Ofeigsfjardharsker, a group of rocks, lies 3.5 miles W of Selsker. A reef extends 1 mile NE from the N end of the group.

Hnuasker, a large rock marked by a beacon, is located at the E

side of the group.

8.63 Vessels approaching the entrance to the fjord from E should

steer to pass S of Selsker. Vessels entering the fjord require local knowledge.

8.63 A main wharf, 37m long, with a depth of 5.8m alongside, is

situated at Eyri, the trading station. A pier extends 45m from

the shore and has a depth of 8.5m alongside its head. Anchorage can be obtained, in a depth of 20m, good holding ground,

off the head of the fjord.

8.63 It was reported (1991) that the trading station was deserted.

8.63 Caution.—A magnetic anomaly has been reported to exist

within an area centered about 2 miles NE of Selsker.

8.64 Krossnes (66°03'N., 21°30'W.), the SE extremity of

the small peninsula, is located 3.5 miles SE of Munadarnes.

Hornbjarg Light

Selsker Light
Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 159

Pub. 181

The N and E shores of the peninsula are fringed by rocks.

8.64 Trekyllisvik, a small bay, is entered between Krossnes, and

Reykjaneshyrna, 2.5 miles SE. A conspicuous isolated hill,

316m high, stands on Reykjaneshyrnala.

8.64 Illagrunn, a shoal with a least depth of 9.5m, lies in the approach to the bay, about 1 mile N of Reykjaneshyrnala. The sea

is reported to break heavily over this shoal.

8.64 Arnesey, a small island fringed by a reef, is located close off

the S shore of the bay, 2 miles W of Reykjaneshyrnala.

8.64 Nordhurfjordhur, an inlet, is located at the NW corner of the

bay. Vessels, with local knowledge, can obtain anchorage, in

depths of 8 to 9m, good holding ground, off a prominent detached rock at the N side of this inlet. This anchorage is sheltered from N and NE winds, but heavy squalls may occur

during N gales, which alternate in direction as gusts from E or

W of Kalfatindar. 

8.64 In 1991, it was reported that a trading station with a wharf,

40m long, had been constructed on the N shores of the inlet.

8.65 Hunafloi (66°00'N., 21°00'W.), a large bay, is entered

between Reykjaneshyrna and Rifsnes, the NW extremity of the

Skagi Peninsula, 24 miles ENE. The bay extends S for more

than 50 miles to the head of Hrutafjordur, its S branch. The W

and S shores are indented by numerous branch fjords and small

inlets, but the E shore has a comparatively even coast line.

With the exception of Skagi, the shores of Hunafloi are mountainous.

8.65 Winds—Weather.—Winds from the N and NE are the most

frequent in Hunafloi and are usually accompanied by fog.

8.65 Ice.—The drift ice, which appears first along the N coast of

Iceland at Horn, is sometimes carried into Hunafloi by the

strong current which enters the bay along the W side. Ice in

small masses is frequently carried far in, even against a moderate gale. Sometimes navigation may be impeded well into the

summer.

8.65 Tides—Currents.—The flood tidal current flows in along

the W coast of Hunafloi and out along the E coast. The ebb tidal current, which is much weaker, takes the reverse course. The

white glacier water, which is carried down the rivers and discharged into the bay, is always found, in summer, along the E

side, frequently far out beyond Rifsnes.

8.65 Caution.—Navigation in the approaches and within Hunafloi is often difficult because of the frequent fogs, the irregularity of the bottom, and the unreliability of the magnetic compass

in this area.

8.65 Abnormal variation has been reported to exist in areas lying

about 6 miles NNE, between 10 and 15 miles ENE, and about

17 miles SE of Reykjaneshyna. Compass needles have been

deflected from 10°W to 21°W of the normal, but in some places the magnetic compass appeared to be quite dead.

8.66 Hunafloi—West side.—Djupahlein (65°59'N.,

21°20'W.) is located 3 miles SE of Reykjaneshyrnala. The

coast between is fringed with rocks and reefs which extend up

to 0.75 mile offshore. Gjogur Light is shown from a framework

tower, 24m high, standing 0.5 mile N of the point. An aeronautical radiobeacon is situated 0.5 mile W of the light tower.

8.66 Orkin, a prominent mountain 634m high, stands 2.75 miles

W of Gjogur Light.

8.66 Barmar, a detached reef with a least depth of 2.8m, lies about

2.25 miles ENE of Gjogur Light. Hornalsflaga, a rocky shoal

with a depth of 4.3m, lies about 0.5 mile SW of Barmar.

8.66 Reykjarfjordur is entered between Djupahlein and Kambur,

2.25 miles SW. It is deep and extends 6 miles WSW. Reykjarfjardarkambur, a conspicuous mountain 549m high, stands on

the S side of the fjord, 3.25 miles SW of Gjogur Light.

8.66 A small settlement, known as Gjogur, is situated 0.5 mile W

of Djupahlein. Vessels, with local knowledge, can anchor, in a

depth of 27m, close S of this settlement.

8.67 Djupavik (65°57'N., 21°34'W.) a fishing settlement,

was situated on the S side of the fjord, near the head. A large

herring oil factory stands at the settlement and three piers

project from there, having depths of up to 6.1m alongside. In

1991, it was reported that the factory had closed and the settlement was deserted. A submarine cable crosses the fjord 0.75

mile E of Djupavik and is marked by beacons at the landing

places. 

8.67 Veidhileysufjordur is entered between Kambur and Byrgisvikurnes, 1.75 miles SE. It is mostly unsurveyed and seldom

used. A chain of submerged rocks extends N from Byrgisvikurnes and Midhfardharbodhi, a shoal with a depth of 4.3m,

lies in the middle of the entrance, close NW of the N end of the

chain.

8.67 Byrgisvikurfjall, a conspicuous mountain 744m high, stands

on the S side of Veidhileysufjordur, 4 miles S of Gjorur Light.

Kolbeinsvikurfall, a prominent mountain 776m high, stands

1.5 miles S of Byrgisvikurfjall.

8.67 Bjarnarfjordur (65°46'N., 21°23'W.), a small fjord, indents

the coast 10 miles S of the entrance to Veidhileysufjordur. The

coast between is fronted by reefs and rocks extending up to 1

mile offshore. Sveinbjarnargrunn, an isolated shoal patch with

a depth of 11m, lies about 3 miles offshore, 6.5 miles SE of

Byrgisvikurnes.

8.67 Kaldbaksvik, a small inlet, indents this stretch of coast, 4

miles S of Byrgisvikurfjall; Kaldbakshorn, a mountain 508m

high, stands near its S entrance point. A low and prominent waterfall is located at Asparvik, 3.75 miles S of Kaldbaksvik.

8.67 Bjarnarfjordur is shallow and both the approaches and the

fjord are encumbered with small islets, rocks, and reefs, which

may best be seen on the chart.

8.68 Bjarnarnes (65°45'N., 21°21'W.), a projecting point,

is located on the S side of the entrance to Bjarnarfjordur. A

prominent church, with a steeple, stands on the S side of the

fjord, 2 miles WNW of the point.

8.68 Storibodhi, a large group of rocks and shoal patches, lies

about 2.75 miles ENE of Bjarnarnes and is the outermost danger off the approach to Bjarnarfjordur. Thorkelssker, a rock

marked by a beacon and radar reflector, lies 0.25 miles ENE of

Bjarnarnes. 

8.68 Malarhorn (65°41'N., 21°26'W.), a prominent point, is located 4 miles SW of Bjarnarnes and appears from seaward as a

detached rock. A light is shown from a hut standing on the

point. Baejarfell, a steep mountain 345m high, stands close

NNW of the point.

8.68 Ingolfsgrunn, a group of three rocky shoals, lies between 5.5

and 6.5 miles ENE of Grimsey and is usually marked by breakers.

8.68 Dagmalagrunn, a rocky shoal with a least depth of 3.7m, lies
160 Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 

Pub. 181

about 2 miles E of the N end of Grimsey. Trollesgrunn, a rocky

patch with a depth of 10.6m, lies 1.25 miles SW of Dagmalagrunn and the sea breaks on it in heavy weather.

8.68 Svartafossdjup, a deep entrance channel, passes between

Dagmalagrunn and Ingolfsgrunn.

8.68 Steingrimsfjordur, entered between Malarhorn and Smahamrar, 3 miles SSW, extends W and NW for about 11 miles. The

natural beauty of the fjord is in sharp contrast to the dreary and

barren N coast approach. Although the depths in this fjord are

considerable, it is seldom used.

8.68 Holmavik (65°42'N., 21°41'W.), a small trading station, is

situated in a cove on the W shore of the fjord, 6 miles W of

Malarhorn. A small harbor, protected by a breakwater, fronts

the station. A light is shown from a structure, 3m high, standing close WSW of the station. An L-shaped jetty, with a depth

up to 6m alongside, encloses the harbor to the SW. Anchorage

may be obtained off the station, in a depth of 33m, good holding ground, but local knowledge is required as rocks lie close

to the berth. 

8.68 Anchorage may also be obtained, in depths of 26 to 38m, off

Hrofberg, at the head of the fjord.

8.69 Hunafloi—East side.—Rifsnes (66°05'N.,

20°26'W.), the E entrance point of Hunafloi, is the NW extremity of the Skagi Peninsula. A beacon stands on the point. Skallarif, a sandy shoal, extends up to 2.5 miles NW from the point.

In heavy weather, the entire shoal covers with breakers.

8.69 Kalfshamar (Kalfshamarsnes), a projecting point with a cove

on its S side, is located 4 miles S of Rifsnes. A light is shown

from a tower, 16m high, standing near the extremity of the

point. 

8.69 Bjargarstapi, a large rock covered with guano, is located 2.75

miles SSE of Kalfshamar. It lies close to the N side of the

mouth of a stream. A waterfall is located a short distance up

this stream and is conspicuous from seaward.

8.69 Hofsgrunn, a rocky shoal patch with a least depth of 5.9m,

lies centered about 2.25 miles WSW of Bjargarstapi. During

stormy weather, the sea breaks over this whole patch.

8.69 Skagastrond (65°50'N., 20°19'W.) (World Port Index No.

240) is situated on the S side of a small peninsula, 11.5 miles

SSE of Kalfshamar. The peninsula is steep-to on its W side and

very prominent. The trading station, sometimes known as

Hofdhakaupstadhur, stands on the N shore of the bay formed

by the peninsula. A settlement, known as Holanes, stands on

the E shore of the bay and is prominent. The S part of the bay is

encumbered by rocks.

8.69 A small harbor, suitable for small craft with drafts up to

3.7m, is formed by two jetties on the N side of the bay. The entrance fairway is indicated by range lights. A beacon stands on

the SW end of the peninsula and a light is shown near it when a

vessel is expected. Anchorage can be obtained, in a depth of

13m, good holding ground, 0.25 mile SSW from the SW end of

the peninsula. However, this anchorage is not good in unsettled

weather as there is no shelter from onshore gales.

8.69 Spakonufellsborg, a prominent coastal mountain, 646m high,

stands 2 miles ENE of Skagastrond. 

8.69 Solvabakki, a small settlement, stands 7.5 miles S of Skagastrond. The coast between is fringed, in places, with small islets,

rocks, and shoals. Hafstadabodi, an isolated shoal with a depth

of 6m, lies 1.5 miles offshore, about 2.5 miles SSW of Skagastrond. The sea breaks over it in heavy weather. Ytriey, an islet,

is located close offshore, 3.5 miles S of Skagastrond.

8.69 A conspicuous high church building stands 0.5 mile inland,

about 2 miles NNE of Solvabakki.

8.69 Hunafjordur (65°38'N., 20°34'W.), a bight open to the N, is

entered between Solvabakki and Brandstangi, 8 miles WSW.

The E and W shores of this bight are backed by mountains. The

head consists of extensive sandflats formed by the silt of several rivers. 

8.69 Rocks and foul ground fringe the shore to the N and NW of

Brandstangi.

8.69 Blonduos (65°40'N., 20°18'W.) (World Port Index No. 230),

a settlement, stands on both sides of a glacial river, 3 miles S of

Solvabakki. A breakwater lies about 95m NNW of the concrete

pier that extends 200m WSW from the shore close N of the

mouth of the river. It has a berthing head 9m long, with a depth

of more than 5m alongside the head and shoaling to less than

2m about 100m from the head. 

8.69 Anchorage may be obtained, according to draft, in the roadstead off the settlement, but it is very exposed.

8.69 It is reported that a radiobeacon is situated about 2 miles N

of Blonduos.

8.69 Selsker, a shoal patch that dries, stretches 1 mile seaward

from the edge of the sandflats at the SW corner of Hunafjordur.

Lambhusavik, a small cove, is located SW of Selsker and affords anchorage, in depths of 13 to 15m, close inshore to small

vessels with local knowledge. During fresh onshore winds vessels should anchor farther out, in depths of about 26m, where

the holding ground is good. 

8.69 Trollakirkja, a snow-covered mountain, 829m high, stands

about 10 miles inland of the head of Hrutafjordur and is very

conspicuous.

8.70 Vatnsnes (65°40'N., 20°41'W.), a mountainous promontory, separates Hunafjordur from Hunafloi. It rises to high

mountain ridges that falls in terraces to the sea. Brandafell,

743m high, stands 9.5 miles SW of Branstangi and is the highest of these mountains. A cove, open to the N, is located close

W of the N extremity of this promontory.

8.70 Langasker, an above-water rock, lies on foul ground that exSkagastrond
Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 161

Pub. 181

tends 1 mile N of the N extremity of Vatnsnes. The N coast of

this promontory is fronted by rocks and shoals.

8.70 Faskrudssker, an islet, is located 1.5 miles NNW of the N extremity of Vatnsnes. A shoal patch with a depth of 7.5m, lies

about 0.5 mile N of it.

8.70 Caution.—An area, in which several dangers lie, extends up

to 8 miles NNW, W, and SW of the N extremity of Vatnsnes.

Vessels, without local knowledge, are advised to avoid this area.

8.71 Eversgrunn, a shoal with a least depth of 11m, lies

about 6 miles NNW of Faskrudssker at the N side of the abovementioned area. A rock, with a depth of 2.7m, lies about 1.5

miles S of this shoal. Both of these dangers break heavily in N

gales.

8.71 Fyllugrunn, a group of rocky shoals with a least depth of

2.8m, lies about 7 miles WNW of Faskrudssker at the W side

of the above mentioned area. Tjarnarbodi, a rocky shoal with a

least depth of 3.7m, lies about 1 mile SE of Fyllugrunn.

8.71 Illugasttadasker, a rocky shoal patch with a least depth of

0.6m, lies about 6 miles S of Fyllugrunn at the SW side of the

above mentioned area.

8.71 Burfellsrenna is the deep entrance channel which passes between Fyllugrunn and Ingolfsgrunn.

8.72 Hunafloi—Inner section.—The inner section of

Hunafloi is entered between Smahamrar, the S entrance point

of Steingrimsfjordur, and the N extremity of Vatnsnes. The area fronting the shore on either side of the entrance to the fjord

is foul. Vessels entering this section of the fjord require local

knowledge.

8.72 Kollafjordur is entered between Kollafjardarnes (65°37'N.,

21°21'W.), located 2.75 miles SE of Smahamrar, and Broddanes, 1 mile ESE. The fjord is unsurveyed and its entrance is

encumbered with shoals and reefs. Broddanesey, an islet

marked by a beacon, is located 0.5 mile N of Broddanes. Rocks

and reefs, some marked by beacons, extend up to 1.25 miles N

and NE of this islet. 

8.72 Ennishofdi, a headland 263m high, stands on the E side of

the entrance to Kollafjordur. Ennisstigi, a conspicuous solitary

rock, is located at the NE extremity of this headland. Shoals

extend up to 1 mile from the shore in the vicinity of this rock.

8.72 Bitrufjordur (65°29'N., 21°20'W.) is entered between Brekka, located 4.5 miles S of Ennishofdi, and Gudlaugshofdi, 2.5

miles SSE. The fjord extends 5.5 miles SW and its middle is

considered to be deep and free of dangers. Ospakseyri, a settlement, stands near a spit on the NW shore at the head. There is a

jetty for small craft. Vessels may anchor, with local knowledge,

under the lee of Ospakseyri, in depths of 15 to 20m, or between

the spit and the head of the fjord, in a depth of about 17m. The

holding ground is good. 

8.72 Gudlaugshofdi is a high and conspicuous point. Vigursker, a

dangerous rocky shoal with a depth of 4.3m, lies 1.75 miles

ESE of the point. Foul ground and rocks lie between this dangerous rock and the shore.

8.73 Hrutafjordur (65°29'N., 21°08'W.), a long and narrow fjord extending 19 miles S, forms the head of Hunafloi. It

is entered between Gudlaugshofdi and Skarfatatangi, 5 miles

ESE. A low and swampy valley is located at the head of the

fjord. A river flows through this valley and discharges into drying mud flats which extend up to 1 mile from the head.

8.73 Prestbakki, a low point at the mouth of a small river, is located 9 miles S of the entrance, on the W side of the fjord. A

prominent church and a house with a red roof stand near the

point. Prestbakkaey, a small island with an islet close NW, is

located 0.25 mile NE of the point.

8.73 To the S of Prestbakki, the shores of the fjord are fronted by

rocks and reefs and the entrance channel is very narrow in

places.

8.73 Bordeyri, a settlement, stands on the W side, 3 miles from

the head. There is no jetty and cargo must be landed on a sandy

beach. A submarine cable crosses the fjord; its landing places

are marked by beacons. 

8.73 Winds—Weather.—The sea breeze, which commences

around noon, may send in a heavy sea.

8.73 Ice.—It is reported that the ice penetrates to the head of Hrutafjordur, but it is not likely to be dangerous because large pieces ground before they reach the inner part. However, ice may

remain in the fjord for some time after the polar ice has left the

N coast.

8.73 Balkastadanes (65°24'N., 21°02'W.) is a narrow and high

projection which falls steeply to the sea on all sides. It separates Hrutafjordur from Midfjordur.

8.74 Midfjordur is entered between Heggsstadanes, the NE

extremity of Balkastadanes and Anastadir, 2 miles ENE. The

fjord extends 7.5 miles SSE. It is open to N winds and exposed

to incursions of polar ice.

8.74 Hvammstangi (65°24'N., 20°57'W.), a trading station,

stands on the E side of the fjord, 4 miles within the entrance. A

jetty, 137m long, projects from the shore near the station and

has a depth of 3.4m alongside its outer end. There is a small

craft basin protected by a breakwater. It is reported that there is

also a wharf, 50m long with a depth of 4m alongside. Range

beacons indicate the approach and a conspicuous church stands

close NE of the station. Anchorage is obtainable, in depths of

13 to 14m, off the station. Local knowledge is required. Anchorage is reported to be untenable in N winds. 

8.74 Skard Light (65°29'N., 20°59'W.) is shown from a tower,

13m high, standing 1.25 miles N of Anastadir.

8.74 From Skard Light to the N extremity of Vatnsnes, the coast is

fronted by rocks and reefs.

8.74 Skagata (66°07'N., 20°06'W.), the NE extremity of the Skagi Peninsula, is located 8 miles ENE of Rifsnes. The coast between is fronted with islets, rocks, and shoals which extend up

to 1.5 miles seaward. The point consists of a small promontory

and is high in comparison with the adjacent coast.

8.74 A light is shown from a tower, 9m high, standing on the

point. A racon is situated at the light.

8.75 Skagafjordur (66°00'N., 19°50'W.) is entered between Skagata and Malmey, an island 15 miles ESE. The fjord

extends SSE for 18 miles and then forms into two small separate bays at its head. Depths in the fjord are quite irregular and

range from 119m at the entrance to 20m at the head. On its E

side, flat-top mountains with no prominent feature are seen

sloping toward a coastal plain. Two rivers, which empty into

the small bays, flow through a wide valley located at the head

of the fjord. These rivers form a large delta in the middle of
162 Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 

Pub. 181

which a narrow and hilly ridge projects N and divides the head

into the two bays. Several dangerous rocks and shoals lie in the

entrance to this fjord.

8.75 Caution.—The polar ice is sometimes a serious obstacle to

navigation in Skagafjordur.

8.75 Vessels approaching the fjord should give the dangers, which

lie off the coasts on both sides of the entrance, a wide berth.

8.75 Abnormal variation exists within Skagafjordur and in a position about 5 miles NNW of Malmey. It is also reported that the

magnetic compass needle is almost dead in the vicinity of

Drangey, W of Malmey, and 1 mile SW of Hegranes Light. A

rock on an isolated shoal has been reported (2009) to lie about

2.3 miles WNW of Hegranes Light.

8.76 Ketubjorg, located 6 miles SSE of Skagata, is a hummock, 121m high, which falls steeply to the sea. A prominent

waterfall is located on its S side. A conspicuous white church

stands at Keta, 1.5 miles N of the hummock.

8.76 Selvik, a cove, is located 5 miles SSE of Ketubjorg. A river

flows through a gorge at its S side. Small vessels can anchor, in

depths of 13m, sand, in the middle of the entrance to this cove.

Small craft can obtain better anchorage, in a depth of 7m, closer to the shore.

8.76 Between Skagata and Selvik, the coast is fringed with rocks

and shoals. Thursasker, a large low rock, is located 0.75 mile E

of Ketubjorg.

8.76 Ingveldarstaoaholmi, a large and low rock, is located 0.5

mile offshore, 8 miles SSE of Selvik. 

8.76 Tindastoll, a large mountainous mass, stands 2 miles W of

the coast, 9.75 miles SSE of Selvik. It rises to a height of 990m

and is very conspicuous.

8.77 Malmey (66°05'N., 19°32'W.), a high and narrow island, forms the E entrance point of the fjord. A hill, 156m high,

stands at its N end and falls steeply to the sea. A light is shown

from a tower, 10m high, standing on a hummock at the S end of

the island. 

8.77 A dangerous reef extends 1.5 miles N from the N end of the

island. Malmeyjarbodhi, an isolated rocky patch with a depth

of 15m, lies about 2.5 miles N of the N end of the reef.

8.77 Thordarhofdi, an isolated headland, is located 2 miles S of

the S end of Malmey. It rises to a height of 202m and is prominent. A reef, which nearly dries, extends from the headland to

the S extremity of the island. 

8.77 Holmasker, a drying pinnacle rock with a depth of 20m close

S, is located 3.5 miles W of the N end of Malmey.

8.77 Kvislarsker, a group of three drying rocks fringed by a shoal,

is located 4 miles WSW of Malmey Light. Shoals, with depths

of 13 and 28m, lie 1.5 and 3.5 miles, respectively, W of Kvislarsker. The sea breaks over these shoals in heavy weather. A

rocky patch with a depth of 17m lies 2 miles NE of Kvislarsker.

8.77 Drangey, a conspicuous islet 183m high, is located in the

middle of the fjord, 5 miles SW of Malmey Light. It has vertical sides and is fringed by a reef. A deep cleft, located at its

center, is visible from the N. Kerling, a high and spindle-like

rock, lies close off the SE extremity of this islet.

8.77 Hofsos, a small trading station, is situated in a cove, 4 miles

SSE of Thordarhofdi. A small harbor, with an entrance 46m

wide, is formed between a breakwater and a jetty. A wharf,

60m long, has depths of 3.5 to 6m alongside. Anchorage can be

obtained, in a depth of 15m, about 185m SSW of the breakwater head, but it is open to NW winds and exposed to drift ice. 

8.77 Kolkuos, a farm, is situated 4.5 miles S of Hofsos, at the

mouth of a river. Anchorage can be obtained, in depths of 8 to

9m, offshore. There is no jetty and cargo is landed on an open

beach. A patch with a depth of 20m lies about 3 miles NW of

the farm.

8.77 Hegranes (65°46'N., 19°33'W.), a steep point, is located 5

miles SW of Kolkuos. It forms the N extremity of the narrow

ridge that divides the head of the fjord into two small bays. A

light is shown from a tower, 10m high, standing on the point. 

8.77 Lundey, a grass-covered islet, 18m high, is located 2 miles

ESE of Hegranes, in the center of the bay which lies on the E

side of the point. This bay is less frequented and the few settlements here are of little importance. No information is available

concerning the depths or navigation in this bay.

8.78 Saudarkrokur(Saudharkrokur) (65°45'N., 19°39'W.)

(World Port Index No. 250), the most important settlement in

the fjord, is situated in the SW part of the bay lying W of

Hegranes. 

8.78 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 1.3m at springs and 1m

at neaps.

8.78 Depths—Limitations.—From the N side of the harbor, a

breakwater extends 200m ESE, then an additional 200m SE,

with a boulder breakwater spur extending a further 100m from

the mole head. A 70m jetty extends E from the mole head and

has depths of 5 to 9m depths alongside.

8.78 The main quay, situated on the S side of the breakwater, has

a berth 200m long, with depths of 5 to 7m alongside. A basin

for small craft is located close S of the breakwater.

8.78 The harbor can be contacted by VHF. 

Aspect.—A prominent church stands in the S part of the settlement and an airstrip is situated S of it.

8.78 The approach to the harbor is indicated by a range which is

formed by a beacon and the tower of the church. Lights are

shown from these range marks when a vessel is expected.

8.78 A group of tanks stand in the vicinity of the root of boulder

breakwater breakwater.

8.78 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots meet vessels at a

point 400m from the harbor entrance. 

8.78 Anchorage—Good anchorage can be obtained, in depths of

5.5 to 9.4m, sand, about 250m SE of the head of the breakwater.

8.78 Caution.—Winds from the N blow right into the fjord and

frequently do considerable damage.

8.78 Silting in the harbor makes frequent dredging necessary.

8.79 Hrolleifshofdi, a detached and flat-topped hummock

87m high, stands on the coast, 2.75 miles ENE of the N end of

Malmey. Malmeyjarfjordur, a small bay, is entered between the

N end of the island and this hummock. Anchorage can be obtained, according to draft, within this bay by vessels with local

knowledge.

8.79 Straumnes (66°05'N., 19°22'W.) is located 2.75 miles NE of

Hrolleifshofdi. A light is shown from a tower, 9m high, standing on this point.

8.79 Hammersbodi and Reksbodi, two small rocky patches with
Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 163

Pub. 181

depths of 15m, lie about 4 miles NNE and 4 miles NE, respectively, of Straumnes Light.

8.79 Haganesvik, a small cove, is located 5 miles E of Straumnes

Light. It has easy access, but both entrance points are foul and

should be given a wide berth. Anchorage can be obtained, in a

depth of 8m, hard sand, within the cove, but it is exposed to N

winds. Haganes, a trading station with a small pier, is situated

on the SE shore of the cove.

8.79 Saudanes (66°11'N., 18°58'W.), a high and steep point, is

located 9 miles NE of Haganesvik. The coast between is fronted by foul ground and backed by mountains which, in most

places, fall steeply to the sea. A light is shown from a tower

with a dwelling, 10m high, standing on the point. A radio mast

stands near the tower.

8.79 Illvidhranjukur, the most conspicuous mountain along this

part of the coast, rises to a height of 895m, 3.25 miles SSW of

Saudanes.

8.79 Caution.—Abnormal variations have been reported in positions off the coast between Hrolleifshofdi and Saudanes. Compass deflections of up to 8°E have been observed.

8.80 Siglufjordhur (Siglufjordur) (66°10'N., 18°53'W.) is

entered between Saudanes and Siglunes, 2.25 miles ENE. It

extends 3 miles S and is flanked by high mountains which fall

steeply to the sea. A shoal area, some parts of which dry, lies at

the head. The fjord is an important center for the herring fishing industry and one of the best harbors of refuge, along the N

coast of Iceland. All other fjords on the N coast is subject to

polar ice incursions. Anchorage may be obtained temporarily

anywhere in the fjord according to draught, but close S of Siglunes the bottom is rocky and holding ground is poor. 

8.80 Caution.—Siglufjordur is notorious for the tremendous

squalls that descend from the surrounding mountains.

8.80 Abnormal variations, up to 2°W of the normal, have been

observed in an area lying between 1 and 2 miles N of Siglunes.

8.80 Siglunes, the E entrance point of the fjord, is a low and flat

point which extends 1 mile NW from the foot of Nesnupur, a

steep and conspicuous mountain. It is easily recognized, as

there are no other similar points in the vicinity. A light is

shown from a tower with a dwelling, 12m high, standing on the

N slopes of Nesnupur, 1 mile ESE of the point.

8.80 Hellubodar, a rocky reef, extends about 0.25 mile WNW

from the NW extremity of Siglunes. Its inner part dries and the

outer part is fronted by a shoal. Vessels should give this reef a

wide berth as it has been reported to extend farther W.

8.80 Selvikurnef, a small point, is located on the E side of the

fjord, 2.25 miles S of Siglunes. A light, indicating the entrance

channel, is shown from a tower, 8m high, standing on the point.

8.81 Siglufjord (Siglufjordur) (Hvanneyri) (66°09'N.,

18°55'W.) (World Port Index No. 260), one of the largest herring fishery stations in Iceland, is situated on the W side of the

fjord near the head.

8.81 It is subject to incursions of polar ice, but during summer,

because of good access and position, it is one of the best harbors of refuge on the N coast of Iceland.

8.81 There are several piers and wharves inside the N mole.

8.81 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 1.6m at springs and

Saudarkrokur
164 Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 

Pub. 181

0.5m at neaps.

8.81 Depths—Limitations.—There are numerous small piers for

the use of fishing vessels and four main quays. 

8.81 Oldbrjotur is a breakwater that extends 120m SE from the

NE extremity of the harbor and protects the berths on the E

side of Hvanneyri. A light is located at the head of Oldbrjotur.

The three northernmost main alongside berths are, as follows:

1. Brjoturinn, at the NE corner, is about 100m long, with

depths of 4 to 5 m alongside. 

2. Londunarbryggja Quay, close S, is 80m long, with a

depth of 7.5 to 8.5m alongside. An L-shaped jetty lies close

S and SW of Londunarbrygga, with inside depths of less

than 5m and outside depths of 6 to 7m. 

3. Baejarbryggja Quay, at the SE corner, has two berthing faces, the SE berth is about 100m long and the SW

berth is about 65m long, both with a depth of 6 to 7m alongside. 

8.81 Togarabruggja, close W of Baejarbryggja, is 60m long, with

depths of 6m alongside. Vessels up to 3,540 dwt and 85m in

length can be accommodated. 

8.81 Ingvarsbryggja Quay, close W of Togarabruggja, is about

60m long, with a depth of 6m alongside. 

8.81 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. Pilots may be contacted

on VHF channel 24, 26, or 27, through Siglfjordur Radio, call

sign TFX, or by radiotelephone. The pilot meets the vessel approximately 400m from the harbor entrance. 

8.81 Anchorage.—Temporary anchorage can be taken, according

to draft, anywhere in the fjord. Vessels may anchor, in depths

of 25 to 30m, good holding ground, E of the fishery station.

Gales from the N cause heavy seas, therefore vessels may seek

anchorage in the small bay SW of Siglunes.

8.82 Eyjafjordur (66°10'N., 18°30'W.), an important herring fishing center, is the most populous and most frequented

of the fjords on the N coast of Iceland. Akureyri, a large town,

stands at the head.

8.82 The fjord is entered between Siglunes and Gjogurta, 14

miles ESE. It extends 33 miles SSE; both sides of the outer part

are flanked by prominent mountains. Farther S, these mountains become lower and are separated by wide valleys which

run down to the shores.

8.82 Kaldbakur, a conspicuous mountain 1,167m high, stands on

the E side of the fjord, 10.5 miles SSE of Gjogurta. Arnfinnsfjall, another conspicuous mountain 854m high, stands on the

W side of the fjord, 7 miles SE of Siglunes.

8.82 Winds—Weather.—As a rule, the winds blow in the direction of the fjord. Heavy mountain squalls are also frequent. In

the summer, fairly regular land and sea breezes occur. The N

winds, which are the most frequent and strongest, usually begin in the afternoon and last for a few hours. Occasionally at

Akureyri, they attain a considerable force. The land breezes,

which are seldom of great strength, begin between 0500 and

0600 and last only a short time.

8.82 Ice.—The fjord is open to incursions of polar ice which, during bad years, have penetrated its entire length.

8.82 Tides—Currents.—Along the N coast of Iceland, the E tidal current runs in along the W shores and out along the E

shores of all the fjords; the W tidal current runs in the reverse

direction. In Eyjafjordhur, the resultant tidal current is almost

always outgoing as a result of the many rivers and great quantity of melted snow which discharge into it. During the spring

thaw, the tidal current may be fairly strong, especially in the

channel abreast Hrisey and in the vicinity of Latur. The ebb

current is always strongest on the E side of the fjord, off the entrance of Eyjafjordhur.

8.82 Caution.—Vessels should exercise caution when passing by

or approaching the entrance of this fjord as, at times, a strong

flood current has been experienced.

8.82 Submarine cables lie across the fjord and may best be seen

on the chart. A marine farm lies 1 mile NW of Akureyri. 

8.82 Vessels are advised to pass W of Hrisey due to the strength

of the resultant current on the E side of the fjord. A submarine

cable lies across this passage between Hrisey Island and

Halshofoi. 

8.82 Abnormal variations, up to about 8°W of the normal, have

been observed in the area off the entrance to Hedinsfjordur.

8.82 Abnormal variations, between 11°E and 3°W of the normal,

have been observed in an area between 2 and 3 miles N of Hrisey.

Siglufjord (Siglufjordur)
Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 165

Pub. 181

8.83 Eyjafjordur—West side.—Hedinsfjordur is entered

between Torfuvogar, located 2.75 miles SE of Siglunes, and

Thorhildarvogur, 2 miles SE. The fjord extends 2.5 miles SSW

and a narrow strip of boulders separates the head from a large

lake that drains into it through a small channel. This fjord

should only be entered in an emergency as it is entirely open,

subject to frequent incursions of drift ice, and has very poor

holding ground.

8.83 Brik, a small point at the foot of a mountain, is located 3

miles SE of Thorhildarvogur. A light is shown from a tower,

4m high, standing on this point.

8.83 Olafsfjordur is entered between Brik and a point, 1.75 miles

SE. The fjord extends 2.5 miles SW and should only be entered

in an emergency as it is subject to incursions of drift ice and the

holding ground is not good.

8.83 Kleifar, a small settlement with a jetty for small craft, stands

on the NW shore of the fjord. Vessels can obtain anchorage, in

a depth of 9m, sand, off this settlement; the berth is indicated

by range beacons.

8.83 Olafsfjordur (Olafsfjordhur) (66°05'N., 18°38'W.) (World

Port Index No. 270), a trading station, is situated on the SE side

of the head. A small harbor, with an entrance 70m wide, is protected by two breakwaters. The E breakwater is 170m long and

has berthing quays on its inner side with depths of 4 to 6m

alongside. 

8.84 Dalvik (65°58'N., 18°31'W.) (World Port Index No.

280), a small trading station, is situated at the head of a wide

bay, 7.5 miles S of Olafsfjordur. A prominent church, with a

steeple, stands at the station and another church stands close

WNW of it. A small harbor, with an entrance 45m wide, is protected by breakwaters. There is a total of 250m of main berthing space, with depths of 5 to 6m alongside. Anchorage can

be obtained, in depths of 22 to 26m, 1.25 miles E of the N

church. The harbor can be contacted by VHF. channels 16, 12

and 14. 

8.84 Arskogssandur, a small settlement, is situated 5 miles ESE of

Dalvik. It is fronted by a small pier and a breakwater from

which a light is shown. It is reported that a ferry runs between

this settlement and Hrisey. 

8.84 Hauganes, a small settlement, is situated 1.75 miles SSE of

Arskogssandur. A breakwater, with berths for fishing vessels

on its inner side, projects from the settlement. Holl, a rock with

a depth of 3.7m, lies about 500m ESE of the settlement. 

8.85 Eyjaffjordur—East side.—Gjogurta, the E entrance

point of the fjord, is the N extremity of a large mountainous

projection which rises to a height of 738m, about 2 miles S. A

light is shown from a tower, 4m high, standing on the point.

8.85 Latur, an isolated rock 11m high, rises vertically about 185m

offshore, 3 miles SSW of Gjogurta. Latur Farm is situated on

the coast, about 1 mile S of this rock. The shore of the fjord in

the vicinity of Latur is fringed by a chain of rocks, some of

which dry.

8.85 Hofdi (Hofoi), a bold headland 261m high, projects from the

coast of the fjord, 12 miles SSE of Latur. 

8.85 Grenivik, a trading station, is situated at the head of a small

bay on the N side of Hofdi. A 260m long breakwater extends

SSW into the bay. It has a 140m quay on the E side, with

depths of 5 to 6m alongside. Temporary anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 18 to 27m, in the bay, but winds from between N and W raise a heavy swell. A submarine cable lies in

this area and can be best seen on the chart. 

8.85 It is reported (1992) that a fish factory with a pier has been

constructed close N of Grenivik.

8.86 Hrolfssker (66°05'N., 18°25'W.), consisting of two

small rocks, lies on a shoal in the middle of the fjord, 3.5 miles

SW of Latur. A light is shown from a tower, 16m high, standing on the larger rock which is 6m high.

8.86 Hrisey (66°00'N., 18°23'W.), a narrow island, lies in the

middle of the fjord, with its N extremity located 3.5 miles S of

Hrolfssker. It has a high and steep coast, except in the SW part,

where it slopes gradually to a flat beach. Reefs and rocks extend up to 183m N from the N extremity of the island. Longubodhi, a patch with a depth of 14.2m, lies about 1.25 miles

NNW of the N extremity.

8.86 A light is shown from a tower, 9m high, standing near the E

side of the island, 0.75 mile SSE of the N extremity.

8.86 Sydhstibaer, a trading station situated along the S end of the

island, is fronted by several small jetties, with depths of 3.7 to

5.5m alongside. An airstrip is situated 0.5 mile NW of the station.

8.87 Eyjaffjordur—Inner section.—The inner section of

the fjord is entered between Hauganes and Grenivik.

8.87 Between Hauganes and Hajalteyri lies Arnarnesvik, a small

bay. Anchoring and fishing are prohibited in an area located in

the green light sector N of Hjalteyri, close N of an unnamed

point.

8.87 Hjalteyri (65°51'N., 18°12'W.), a settlement situated 5 miles

SE of Hauganes, stands on a low sand bar which encloses a lagoon. A light is shown from a tower, 13m high, standing at the

settlement. A racon was reported (1986) to be situated at the

tower. A large herring factory with several piers fronts the settlement. The main wharf has a length of 30m and a depth of

5.5m alongside. Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 27 to

40m, close S of the settlement.

8.87 It was reported (1990) that the factory and settlement were

closed down.

8.87 Horgargrunn, an extensive sandbank marked by a lighted

buoy, lies off the mouth of the Horga River, 3.5 miles S of

Hjalteyri. Caution is advised as this bank is reported to be extending seaward. 

8.87 Four conspicuous radio masts stand close S of the river

mouth.

Dalvik
166 Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 

Pub. 181

8.87 Laufasgrunn, an extensive sandbank, lies on the E side of the

fjord, 4.5 miles SSE of Grenivik. Caution is advised as it is reported to be extending farther S.

8.87 Gloesiboer, a small trading station, is situated 5.5 miles S of

Hjalteyri. It is fronted by a pier, 82m long, with a depth of 4.6m

alongside the outer end.

8.87 A conspicuous red and white pylon stands on the W shore,

1.5 miles SW of the station.

8.87 Svalbardseyri, a trading station, is situated on the E side of

the fjord, 12.5 miles SSE of Grenivik. It stands on a low and

flat spit that is fringed by a sandy beach. A light is shown from

a tower, 8m high, standing on the end of the spit. A pier, with

shallow depths alongside, projects from the S side of the spit.

Good temporary anchorage can be taken, in depths of 10 to

20m, in the lee of the flat, about 185m offshore.

8.87 A hut with a flagstaff stands on the summit of a mountain,

about 2.5 miles E of the station. It is reported to be prominent

in clear weather. An aeronautical radiobeacon is reported to be

situated about 0.5 mile N of the station.

8.87 Krossanes, a small trading station, is situated 3 miles SSE of

Gloesiboer. A fish oil factory with a conspicuous chimney,

stands at the station and is fronted by several small jetties with

depths of 4m alongside.

8.87 A small boat harbor, protected by a breakwater, is situated

close W of the mouth of the Glera River, 1 mile SE of Krossanes.

8.88 Akureyri (65°41'N., 18°05'W.) (World Port Index

No. 310), one of the principal ports on the N coast of Iceland,

is situated at the head of the fjord. The trade activity is considerable despite disruptions caused by ice that can last for several

months during years when there are large incursions of polar

ice.

8.88 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise 1.7m at springs and 1m at neaps.

8.88 Aspect.—Oddeyri, a flat and sandy spit, projects from the W

shore to within 0.5 mile of the E side of the fjord. Akureyri lies

on and extends S of this spit. A light is shown from a framework tower, 12m high, standing on the SE extremity of this

spit. Several prominent tanks stand in the vicinity of the SE end

of the spit.

Courtesy of Ed Jackson

Akureyri

Courtesy of Ed Jackson

Approach to Akureyri

Akureyri
Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 167

Pub. 181

8.88 A conspicuous cathedral, with twin towers, stands 0.5 mile

SW of the light tower. A prominent school, with a red roof,

stands close S of the cathedral. A roadway was reported (1986)

to be constructed across the head of the fjord. 

8.88 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory but is available by arrangement with the harbormaster. The fjord pilot boards close

S of Hrisey; the harbor pilot boards NE of Oddeyri.

8.88 The port can be contacted from 0800 to 1200 and from 1300

to 1700 on VHF channel 12 or 16.

8.88 Anchorage.—The holding ground in the port, being composed of soft and slimy mud, is poor. Anchorage may be obtained, in depths of 27 to 33m, under the lee of the spit.

8.89 Geldinganes (66°09'N., 18°01'W.), a hilly point, is

located 6.75 miles ESE of Gjogurta. The coast between is high,

steep, and fringed with rocks. Thorgeirsfjordur and Hvalvatnsfjordur, two bays, indent the coast, 3.25 and 5.5 miles, repectively, E of Gjogurta. Both are mostly foul and should be

avoided.

8.89 In 1991, it was reported that a waverider lighted buoy is

moored about 7 miles NNE of Gjogurta.

8.89 Caution.—Abnormal variations have been reported to exist

in an area centered about 11 miles NNE of Gjorurta. A

constant deflection of 16°E of the normal was observed within

a radius of 8 miles of this position.

8.90 Grimsey (66°32'N., 18°00'W.), a grass-covered

island, 104m high, is located 23 miles N of Geldinganes. It

rises steeply on the E side and forms a wall of rock about 90m

high. The W side slopes more gradually and is mostly bounded

by cliffs up to 15m high. A light is shown from a tower, 10m

high, standing on the S extremity of the island. A radiobeacon

is situated close to the tower.

8.90 Flatasker and Hlidharstapi, two drying rocks, lie 1.25 miles

and 0.7 mile respectively N of the light tower. A reef extends

for a short distance S from it. 

8.90 Eyjarfotur, a steep-sided islet, lies close E of the N extremity

of the island. A rocky reef, which dries, extends about 275m

NW from it.

8.90 Sandvik, a settlement, stands along the SW coast of the island. Prominent marks include a small gray church, two large

white buildings, and two radio masts. A shallow harbor for

fishing vessels, protected by a breakwater, fronts the settlement. Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 18m, off the settlement, about 0.5 mile WSW of the church, but it is untenable in

strong W and SW winds. 

8.90 Holl (66°50'N., 18°09'W.), with a least depth of 14.9m, lies

about 16 miles NNW of the N extremity of Grimsey.

8.90 Kolbeinsey (Mevenklint) (67°09'N., 18°41'W.) is a rocky

islet 7m high lying about 23 miles NW of Holl. It is about 70m

long and about 30 to 60m wide. The islet is surrounded by

submerged and above-water rocks, especially at the NW end,

where they extend almost 0.4 mile WNW.

8.91 Skjalfandi, a large bay, is entered between

Geldinganes and Tjornes, 21 miles ENE. It extends S for 12

miles and is entirely open to the N. The coasts of the bay are

mountainous, except for a large plain located at the head,

through which flow two large rivers. With the exception of a

minor traffic to Husavik, this bay is seldom visited. It is mostly

deep, but polar ice penetrates to the head. Several rocks and

reefs fringe the shores of the bay.

8.91 Caution.—Vessels should exercise caution when passing or

entering Skjalfandi, as a strong flood current has been experienced.

8.91 Tjornes (66°12'N., 17°09'W.), a somewhat salient point, is

located near the middle of the N side of a hilly promontory. A

light is shown from a tower, 13m high, standing on the extremity of the point. Breidhavik, a small open bay, is located close

W of the point and encumbered with rocks. Burfell, a conspicAkureyri—Berths and Limitations

Berth No. Length Depth at LW Remarks

Krossanes 1 130m 6.5-9.0m Oil, fish-oil meal, cement.

Drattarbraut 3 — — Slipway.

Slippkantur 4 275m 6-7.0m Ship repairs. 

Togarabrygja-1 6 110m 6.5m General cargo and fish landing. 

Togarabrygja-2 7 67m 6.5m General cargo and fish landing. 

Londunarkantur-1 8 65m 6.5m Ice

Londunarkantur-2 9 75m 6.0m Fish landing.

Esso-bryggja 10 — — Oil.

Tangabryggja 11 70m 8-11m Cattle feed, general cargo.

Oddeyrarbryggja 12 140m 9.0m General cargo, passengers.

Torfunefsbryggja 13 100m 3-5.5m Passengers.

Austurbakki — 170m 7.0m Fish landing.

Tankers—At Oddeyri (KEA-bryggia) and Krossanes, there are oil berths with alongside depths of 5 to 6m.
168 Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 

Pub. 181

uous flat-topped mountain, 760m high, stands 9.5 miles S of

Tjornes. 

8.91 Flatey (66°10'N., 17°52'W.), a flat island 16m high, is located on the W side of the entrance to the bay, 3.25 miles E of

Geldinganes. A light is shown from a framework tower, 8m

high, standing in the middle of the E end of the island. A racon

is situated in middle of the E end of the island. A small and

shallow boat harbor is reported (1990) to be deserted.

8.91 Flateyjarsund, a channel with a least mid-fairway depth of

9.4m, separates the island from the mainland. A bank extending about 0.5 mile S of Flatey has depths of less than 5.5m.

Several rocks lie close off the mainland on the SW side of this

channel and during N gales, seas break right across its NW entrance. In N winds, anchorage can be taken under the lee of the

island. The best berths, in depths of 12 to 14m, good holding

ground, lie about 0.5 mile from the S shore of the island. During N gales, the anchorage may still be approached by the SE

entrance. The tidal current in the channel sets NW on the flood

tide and SE on the ebb tide. 

8.91 Lundey (66°07'N., 17°22'W.), an islet, 41m high, is located

about 1.25 miles off the E shore of the bay, 8 miles SE of

Tjornes. A drying reef extends about 0.5 mile N from the N

side of the islet and a chain of submerged rocks lies between

the S side of the islet and the mainland. A light is shown from a

tower, 6m high, standing on this islet. 

8.91 Lundeyjarbreki, a shoal with a least depth of 3.7m, lies about

1.25 miles NW of Lundey. It is marked by heavy breakers in

stormy weather.

8.91 Husavikurhofdi (66°03'N., 17°22'W.), with a high hummock on it, on the SE side of Skjalfandi, is the N entrance point

of Husavik. A light stands near this point.

8.92 Husavik (66°02'N., 17°20'W.) (World Port Index No.

320), a trading station, is situated in a small cove entered 3.25

miles S of Lundey and S of Husavikhurhofdi, on Husavik

Promontory. The N entrance point of the cove, from which a

light is shown, consists of a prominent hummock, 70m high.

8.92 Winds—Weather.—Prevailing winds are mainly SE.

Depths—Limitations.—A small harbor, protected by

breakwaters, is situated in the N part of the cove. Two moles

form the outer harbor; the entrance is 160m wide, with depths

of 5.9 to 8.3m, gently shelving to the shore. The W mole

extends 140m SSE from the root of the outer breakwater and

has depths of 5.0 to 7.8m alongside. 

The inner harbor lies N of the mole that forms the E side of

the outer harbor entrance. The entrance to the inner harbor is

55m wide, with depths of 4.5 to 6.0m gently shelving to the

shore. The E mole extends about 250m from the shore and has

depths of 5.0 to 6.3m near its head. Vessels of up to 4,000 grt

have been accommodated. 

8.92 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but is available upon

request. The pilot can be contacted on VHF channels 12 and

16. A pilot station is located about 2 miles E of Husavik, near

position 66°02.6'N, 17°22.6'W. 

8.92 Regulations.—The vessel’s ETA is to be given to agent 72

Grimsey Light

Grimsey

Husavik Light
Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 169

Pub. 181

hours, 48 hours, 24 hours, and 12 hours prior to arrival. Cargo

information, if applicable, is to be advised, together with any

requirements which the master might need the agent to arrange.

8.92 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 9m,

sand, about 185m SW of the head of the W breakwater, but this

position is exposed to WNW winds, which are dangerous. 

8.92 Care must also be taken to avoid a 4.5m shoal patch which

lies about 365m S of the harbor entrance. The approach to the

roadstead is indicated by lighted range beacons. 

8.93 Manareyjar (66°17'N., 17°07'W.), composed of two

islets, is located 4.5 miles NNE of Tjornes and surrounded by

rocks. Haey, the S islet, is the smaller but higher of the two. It

is 39m high and a conspicuous large hole, which is best seen

from SE or NW, pierces it. A light is shown from a structure

standing on a red house on this islet. 

8.93 Lagey, located 0.75 mile NW of Haey, is 22m high and the

larger of the two islets. A rock, with a depth less than 2m, lies

about 0.75 mile NW of this islet. The channel between Manareyjar and the mainland is mostly free of dangers and frequently used.

8.93 Eyjabrekar, a group of dangerous rocks, lies on a shoal patch

about 2 miles N of Lagey. The channel between Manareyjar

and Eyjabrekar should be avoided.

8.93 Isolated depths of 20m and 15.5m have been reported to lie

about 5.5 miles N and 15 miles NW, respectively, of Eyjabrekar.

8.93 Caution.—Abnormal variations exist in an area lying between

Manareyjar and the mainland. In some places the magnetic compass appears to be quite dead, while in others deflections of up to

34° from the normal have been observed.

8.93 Deflections of 17°E and 5°E of the normal have been observed in positions located about 3 miles and 6 miles, respectively, N of Eyjabrekar. A deflection of 9°E of the normal was

also observed in a position about 3 miles farther N.

8.94 Axarfjordur (66°13'N., 16°45'W.), a wide bay open

to the N, is entered between Tjornes and Raudhinupur, 23.5

miles NE. An extensive plain, through which several rivers discharge, is located at the head of the bay. Axarfjordur is subject

to incursions of polar ice and is mostly only used by fishing

vessels bound for Kopasker.

8.94 Caution.—Vessels should exercise caution when entering or

passing Axarfjordur as a strong flood current has been experienced off the entrance.

8.94 Raudinupur, the NE entrance point, is a reddish-colored

headland. It rises vertically from the sea to a height of 60m and

is conspicuous as the surrounding land is low. A detached rock,

which also rises to a height of 60m, stands close off the headland. A light is shown from a tower, 8m high, standing on the

headland.

8.94 Caution.—Strong tidal rips, which are dangerous to small

craft, sometimes extend for several miles N of Raudinupur.

8.94 Abnormal variations, up to 18°W of the normal, have been

observed to the NW of Raudinupur. Over a small area, centered

about 1 mile N of the headland, a deflection of 11°W of the

normal was also observed.

8.94 Gefla, a prominent hill 209m high, stands on the E side of

the bay, 5.5 miles S of Raudinupur.

8.94 Snartarstadhanupur, a detached hill 284m high, stands close

to the E coast of the bay, 9.5 miles S of Raudinupur. It rises to a

flat summit and is conspicuous.

8.94 Thverarhyrna, a prominent mountain 539m high, stands 4.5

miles inland, 12.75 miles S of Snartarstadhanupur. Its summit

resembles a horn when viewed from certain directions. Sandfell, 524m high, and Hafrafell, 534m high, stand 2 miles and 6

miles, respectively, S of Thverarhyrna; they are also both

prominent.

8.94 Gaesafjoll, a conspicuous mountain 881m high, stands 21

miles S of the head of the bay.

8.95 Kopasker (66°17'N., 16°27'W.) (World Port Index

No. 330), a trading station, is situated on the E side of the bay,

12.5 miles S of Raudinupur. It stands on the N shore of a small

cove which may be identified by a large farm building, with a

white gable, standing in an extensive cultivated area, about 0.5

mile ESE of it. A light is shown from a tower, 14m high, standing at Grimshafnartangi, a point located 1 mile NW of the station. The approach channel is indicated by pairs of lighted

range beacons.

8.95 A jetty, 110m long, extends SSE from the shore and is proHusavik
170 Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 

Pub. 181

tected by a breakwater. A berth, 50m long, with a depth of 4m

alongside, is situated at its outer end. A shoal extends S from

the head of the breakwater. 

8.95 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory but is available and

recommended.

8.95 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in depths of 6 to 7m,

about 410m SSW of the head of the breakwater. However, a

very heavy sea is raised by strong winds from between NW and

SW. During summer, fishing vessels also anchor off the E

shore of the bay.

8.96 Melrakkasletta (66°28'N., 16°15'W.) is an extensive

projection that lies between Axarfjordur and Thistilfjordur.

This projection consists, for the most part, of a large and low

plain bounded on its E and W sides by mountains. The N side

of the projection is low, much indented by small coves, and

fronted by rocks.

8.96 Caution.—Vessels should give the N coast of Melrakkasletta a wide berth, especially when approaching it from the E as,

in certain lights, the low land in the vicinity of Hraunhafnartangi, the NE extremity, does not show up against the higher background.

8.97 Haganes, a small point, is located 2.5 miles ENE of

Raudinupur and a dangerous reef extends about 0.5 mile seaward from it.

8.97 Rifstangi, a salient point, is located 6 miles ENE of Haganes.

It is the N extremity of Melrakkasletta and the N point of Iceland. A reef extends NNW for about 0.5 mile from this point.

A disused framework light structure is reported to stand near

the extremity of the point, but it is often obscured by dust

clouds. Sigurdharstadhavik, a wide bay with marshes at its

head, lies between Rifstangi and Haganes.

8.97 Hraunnnhafnartangi (66°32'N., 16°02'W.), a salient point,

is located 4 miles E of Rifstangi. A light is shown from a tower,

19m high, standing on the point.

8.97 Asmundarrrstadhavik, a cove fronted by several islets, is located 2.25 miles SE of Hraunnnhafnartangi. It affords anchorage to small vessels with local knowledge.

8.97 Gegnisvik, a small cove, is located 2 miles SSE of

Asmundarrrstadhavik. The coast between is fronted by Asmundastadhaeyjar, a group of dangerous rocks, which extends up to

1 mile offshore and is marked by a racon.

8.98 Raufarhofn (66°27'N., 15°56'W.) (World Port Index

No. 340) is the northernmost port in Iceland with a harbor that

is safe and easy to enter. There is a trading station and fish factory at Raufarhofn. It is situated on the shores of a small cove

and is located S and close to Gegnisvik.

8.98 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 1.4m at springs and 1m

at neaps.

8.98 Depths—Limitations.—A small craft basin, protected by a

breakwater, is situated in the inner part of the harbor.

8.98 Hafnarbryggja Quay is 90m long, with depths of 5.5 to 6.6m

alongside. Togarakantur Quay is 50m long, with a depth of

6.7m alongside. There is also 130m of berthing space, with a

depth of 4m alongside. Vessels of up to 120m in length and

6.5m draft have been accommodated.

8.98 Aspect.—A promontory, 34m high, extends 550m S and

protects the harbor on its E side. A light is shown from a tower,

10m high, standing near the end of this promontory. A radiobeacon transmits from a position about 0.5 mile W of the light.

8.98 Holminn, an islet, lies close off the SW extremity of the

promontory. A reef extends 250m SSE from this islet and provides further protection to the harbor. Baka, a shoal with a least

depth of 1.5m, lies at the S extremity of the reef and is marked

by a lighted buoy. 

8.98 A dredged entrance channel leads to the quays and is indicated by lighted range beacons.

8.98 Pilotage.—Pilots are available for Raufarhofn. Pilotage is

not compulsory, however entry to the harbor should not be attempted without local knowledge.

8.98 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 10m,

sand and shells, in the roadstead outside the harbor, slightly N

of the entrance range. 

8.98 Caution.—With onshore gales, the sea breaks right across

the narrow entrance of the cove.

8.98 The entrance channel is liable to shoal.

8.99 Melrakkanes (66°24'N., 15°43'W.) is located 6.5

miles ESE of Raufarhofn; a rocky spit extends up to 0.5 mile

NE from it. A light is shown from a tower, 12m high, standing

on this point.

Raufarhofn
Sector 8. Iceland—West and North Coasts 171

Pub. 181

8.99 The coast between Raufarhofn and Melrakkanes is indented

by four coves which are mostly foul. However, fishing vessels,

with local knowledge, occasionally take temporary anchorage

in some of them.

8.99 Faxasker, a shoal patch with a depth of less than 2m, lies

0.75 mile offshore, about 1.5 miles SE of Raufarhofn Light.

8.99 Thistilfjordur (66°20'N., 15°30'W.), a wide bay open to the

N, indents the coast for 14 miles between the E side of Melrakkasletta and the NW side of the Langanes Peninsula. It is

entered between Melrakkanes and Svinalaekjartangi (Karl) 21

miles E. Thorshofn, the only trading station in the bay, is situated on the E side near the head. A wide plain, traversed by numerous rivers, backs the head of the bay. A mountain range

rises at the W side of this plain and extends N to Melrakkanes.

8.99 Caution.—Vessels should exercise caution when passing or

entering Thistilfjordur as a very strong inset has been experienced off it.

8.99 Thistilfjordur is frequently entirely filled with ice.

8.100 Vidarfjall, a prominent peak, 410m high, stands 8

miles S of Melrakkanes. Ottarshnjukurand, another prominent

peak, 456m high, stands 4 miles SW of Vidarfjall.

8.100 Svalbardhsnupur, a conspicuous peak 703m high, stands

12.5 miles SSW of Vidarfjall.

8.100 Raudhanes, a small promontory, is located on the W side of

the bay, 8 miles S of Melrakkanes. It may be identified by two

fairly high rocks, which lie close off it, and by an arch near its

extremity. Kollavik, a small bay lying close N of this promontory, should not be entered without local knowledge.

8.100 Grenjanes, a point on the E side of the bay, is located 15

miles SW of Svinalaekjartangi (Karl). The coast between is

fronted by foul ground and, in places, shoals and rocks extend

up to 2 miles offshore. A shoal spit extends up to 1.75 miles

NW of Grenjanes and a light is shown from a prominent tower,

20m high, standing on the point. It is reported that a stranded

wreck lies close NW of the point.

8.100 Heidarhofn, a cove fronted by foul ground, is located about 3

miles ENE of Grenjanes. It is formed by a spit on the N side

and a small projection on the S side, and affords anchorage to

small craft with local knowledge.

8.100 Thorshofn (66°12'N., 15°20'W.), a trading station, is situated 3.5 miles S of Grenjanes. It stands on the shores of a cove at

the E side of Lonafjordur, a small bay occupying the head of

Thistilfjordur.

8.100 On the W side of the harbor, the remains of the outer breakwater, which collapsed in 1984, extend 220m SSW and should

not be approached within 50m. A spur of this breakwater

projects 60m SSE then 60m NE. A jetty, which forms the E

side of the harbor, extends 70m S. There are depths of 3.3 to

5m within the harbor, with berths for fishing vessels. The approach is indicated by lighted range beacons.

8.100 Anchorage.—In the fine weather season, the cove may be

considered a good anchorage, but the swell is heavy at times.

Coastal vessels can anchor, in a depth of 10m, sand, very good

holding ground, off the cove.

8.101 Fontur (Langanes) (66°23'N., 14°32'W.), the NE extremity of the Langanes Peninsula, is located 7.5 miles E of Svinalaekjartangi (Karl). The coast between forms a bight, within

which temporary anchorage can be taken, in depths of 10 to

20m, near the head. This anchorage is frequently used by fishing vessels with local knowledge.

8.101 Langanes Light is shown from a round tower, 10m high,

standing on Fontur.

8.101 Caution.—With good visibility, the rounding of the

Langanes Peninsula presents no difficulties, but with low

visibility every precaution must be taken, as this area has a

deservedly bad reputation. Frequent thick fogs, strong tidal

currents, and the unreliability of the magnetic compass have

caused the loss of many vessels. Additional dangers and

difficulties may be encountered due to the presence of polar ice

or Langanesrost, an area of heavy overfalls, which may extend

far out to sea even in calm weather.

8.101 In conditions of low visibility, vessels approaching from the

W should endeavor to make a landfall at Svinalaekjartangi

(Karl) or keep in depths of over 90m. If Langanes Light is observed, during a temporary clearing of the fog, vessels should

steer a course to pass well clear of it, as there is usually a very

strong set into Thistilfjordur.

8.101 Vessels approaching from the S or E in low visibility should

keep in depths of over 90m and make allowance for the tidal

currents that will usually set to the S.

8.101 A local magnetic anomaly has been observed in a position

close E of Langanes Light.

Langanes Light
Pub. 181

9. Iceland—East and South Coasts

9.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 9 — CHART INFORMATION
175

Pub. 181

SECTOR 9 

ICELAND—EAST AND SOUTH COASTS

9.0 Plan.—This sector describes the E and S coasts of Iceland

from Langanes, the NE extremity of the island, to Reykjanes,

the SW extremity. 

General Remarks

9.1 The E coast of Iceland trends SSE, S, and then SW for

more than 200 miles. Topographically, it may be divided into

three parts.

9.1 The N part is located between Fontur and Kogur, 50 miles

SSE, and indented by three large bays from the heads of which

large valleys penetrate the island. The middle part is located

between Kogur and Eystrahorn, 85 miles SSW, and indented

by numerous deep and narrow fjords which are separated by

narrow and mountainous peninsulas. The S part is located between Eystrahorn and Ingolfshofdi, 65 miles SW, and made up

of two large bights which are separated by a point. From this S

part of the coast, the land slopes upward to Vatnajokull, the

largest glacier in Iceland. For more information, see Pub. 180,

Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean. 

9.1 In respect to off-lying dangers, the E coast may be divided

into two sections. The section lying to the N of Gerpir, the E

extremity of Iceland, is comparatively free of off-lying dangers, but the section lying to the S is more or less fringed with

rocks and islets which are a great hindrance to navigation, especially during poor visibility. 

9.1 A succession of banks and deeps lies off the whole of the E

coast and may best be seen on the chart. The deeps usually extend toward the larger bays and fjords.

9.1 Traffic Separation Schemes can best be seen on the chart. 

East and South Coasts of Iceland
176 Sector 9. Iceland—East and South Coasts 

Pub. 181

9.1 TRANSREP Ship Reporting System.—The TRANSREP

Reporting System covers the eastern Area To Be Avoided (ATBA) located entirely within Icelandic territorial waters and is

bounded by lines connecting the following positions:

1. Dyrholaey Light (63°24'08''N., 19°07'50''W.).

2. South of Surtsey Island (63°10’00’'N., 20°38’

00’'W.).

3. South of Reykjanes Point (63°40'54''N.,

20°40'12''W.).

4. Southwest of Reykjanes Point (63°45'48''N.,

22°44'24''W.).

5. Hullid Passage—Southeast section (63°47'00''N.,

22°47'36''W.).

6. Hullid Passage—Northeast section (63°48'00''N.,

22°48'24''W.).

7. Southwest of Litla Sandvik (63°49'12''N.,

22°47'18''W.).

8. Off Sandgerdi (64°01’42''N., 22°58'18''W.).

9. Northwest of Gardskagi Point (64°07'12''N.,

22°47'30''W.).

10. North of Gardskagi Point (64°07'20''N.,

22°41'24''W.).

11. Gardskagi Light (64°04'55''N., 22°41'24''W.).

9.1 The Maritime Traffic Service Center can be contacted 24

hours on VHF channel 16 or 70.

9.1 The TRANSREP procedures are, as follows:

1. Participation in the TRANSREP Reporting System is

mandatory for the following:

a. Vessels calling in at ports located within the eastern

Area To Be Avoided (ATBA) off the S and SW coast of

Iceland.

b. Vessels of less than 5,000 gross tons permitted to

transit the eastern ATBA S of latitude 63°45'00''N when

engaged on voyages between Icelandic ports and not carrying dangerous or noxious cargoes in bulk or in cargo

tanks.

2. Participation is not mandatory for any warship, naval

auxilliary, coast guard vessel, or other vessel owned or operated by a contracting government and used, for the time being, only on non-commercial service. Such vessels are,

however, still encouraged to participate.

3. The Reporting System does not apply to fishing vessels with fishing rights within Iceland’s Exclusive Economic

Zone (EEZ) and research vessels.

4. The language used for communication shall be English, using the IMO Standard Marine Communication

Phrases where necessary.

5. Notice of ETA—Vessels should report to the Icelandic

Maritime Traffic Service, on VHF channels 16 or 70, 4 hours

before entering the area, or when departing from harbors in

Faxafloi Bay. Vessels leaving harbors within the ATBA shall

report on departure.

6. Vessels unable to communicate on VHF channel 16 or

70 shall use MF DSC or INMARSAT.

7. The report shall contain the following information as

listed in the table titled TRANSREP Reporting Information.

8. In the event of defect, pollution, or goods lost overboard, additional information may be requested

9. Following the reception of a report, the Maritime

Traffic Service Center can, on request, provide:

a. Information on navigational conditions.

b. Information on weather conditions.

9.1 Note.—Detected and identified vessels are monitored by

AIS, which in no way releases the master from the responsibility for safe navigation.

9.1 Caution.—Numerous fishing vessels may be encountered in

the waters off the E and S coasts of Iceland.

East Coast

9.2 Fontur (Langanes) (66°23'N., 14°32'W.), described

in paragraph 8.101, is the NE extremity of Iceland.

9.2 Budhahorn, a small point, is located 6 miles SW of Fontur.

The coast between consists of a sheer cliff, 46 to 76m high,

which forms the side of a plateau at the N end of the Langanes

Peninsula.

9.2 Skalar, a small deserted settlement, stands on the shore of a

slight indentation at the W side of Budhahorn. There is no harbor, but a shallow jetty, 18m in length, fronts the former settlement. Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 10m, about 0.5

mile offshore. However, the holding ground is poor and the

roadstead is very exposed. 

9.2 Vatnnadalur, a wide and prominent valley, extends across the

Langanes Peninsula in the vicinity of Skalar.

9.2 Kumbl, a small projection, is located 3 miles SW of

Budhahorn. The coast between is steep and rocky.

9.2 Eidisvik (66°16'N., 14°51'W.), a wide bay, is entered between Kumbl and Fagranes, 6.5 miles SSW. A reef extends

about 0.75 mile NE from a point on the shore located 1 mile N

of Fagranes.

9.2 Eidhiskardh, a swampy valley, extends W across the Langranes Peninsula from close within the head of this bay. An extensive lake, at the E end of the valley, is separated from the

bay by a narrow strip of land mostly formed by boulders.

9.2 This bay is used as a temporary anchorage by fishing vessels.

TRANSREP Reporting Information

ID Information Required

A Vessel’s name, call sign, and IMO number

C * Position (latitude/longitude)

D * Position (bearing/distance in relation to a landmark)

E Course

F Speed

G Port of departure

H Date, time, and point of entry into the system

I Port of destination

K Date, time, and point of exit from the system or 

departure from a harbor within the ATBA

L Intended track within the ATBA

* Either C or D can be used.
Sector 9. Iceland—East and South Coasts 177

Pub. 181

The best berth lies, in a depth of 15m, good holding ground, E

of the N side of the valley, about 0.5 mile offshore.

9.2 Caution.—A local magnetic anomaly has been reported to

exist in a position centered 5 miles ESE of Fagranes and another anomaly close E of Fontur. For more information, refer to

Pub. 180, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Arctic Ocean.

9.2 The sea area surrounding Langanes has a reputation for

frequent fog, strong tidal currents, and the unreliability of the

magnetic compass in the vicinity, all of which have contributed

to the loss of many vessels. Additional dangers may be caused

by the presence of ice. 

9.3 Bakkafloi, a large bay, is entered between Fagranes

and Digranes, 10 miles SE. The head consists of a low tract of

land with two hilly projections, fringed by reefs, which divide

it into three bights.

9.3 Gunnolfsvikurfjall stands on the N side of the bay, 5.5 miles

SW of Fagranes. It rises to a height of 719m and is the highest

hill in this area.

9.3 Finnafjordhur is the northernmost bight at the head of the

bay. Gunnolfsvik, a small cove, in the NW part of this fjord affords anchorage, in depths of 22 to 26m, to vessels with local

knowledge.

9.3 Midfjordur (Midhfjordhur), a bight with depths of 13 to

20m, is entered 3 miles SE of Finnafjordhur. A sandbank extends for a considerable distance offshore, at its head. This

bight is seldom used for anchorage as it does not offer good

shelter.

9.3 Bakkafjordur (Sandvik) is the southernmost bight and affords good anchorage, in depths of 15 to 20m, off its E shore to

vessels with local knowledge. 

9.3 Hofn, a small trading station, is situated at the E entrance

point of Bakkafjordur, 2 miles SW of Digranes. A jetty

projects 90m from the shore near the station and has depths of

5 to 7.7m alongside. However, during strong N or W winds,

vessels cannot remain alongside.

9.3 It is reported (1990) that a small breakwater, with depths of 3

to 4m alongside, has been constructed about 1 mile S of the

station. 

9.3 Digranes (66°03'N., 14°44'W.) is the NE part of a broad

headland. A light is shown from a conspicuous tower, 20m

high, standing on the headland.

9.3 Strandhofn (65°54'N., 14°39'W.), a small settlement, stands

on the coast, 9 miles SSE of Digranes. A radiobeacon is situated 0.5 mile N of the settlement.

9.3 Caution.—The magnetic compass is very unreliable within

this fjord, especially off the S shore.

9.3 An anomaly of up to 20° has been observed in an area centered about 4 miles W of Svartnes.

9.4 Svartnes (65°47'N., 14°20'W.), a low projection, is

located at the foot of a mountain range. Kollumuli, 601m high,

stands close SW of Svartnes and is the NE extremity of this

range.

Bjarnarey, a grass-covered island, 22m high, is located 0.5

mile E of Svartnes and surrounded by dangerous rocks. A

prominent isolated rock, with vertical sides, stands on its N extremity. Foul ground extends up to 1.5 miles S of the island and

also lies in the channel between the island and the coast. A

light is shown from a stone building, 8m high, standing on the

island.

9.4 Midhfjardharbodhi, a small pinnacle rock with a depth of

3.5m, lies in the middle of the entrance to the fjord, about 6.5

miles NW of Svartnes. It is marked by breakers in heavy

weather. An isolated patch, with a depth of 18m, lies 2.5 miles

ENE of the rock. Styrbjarnarrif, an isolated reef of stones with

a depth of 7.5m, lies about 4 miles WNW of Svartnes.

Thufugrunn, a shoal patch with a least depth of 8.5m, lies

about 4.5 miles W of Styrbjarnarrif. The sea breaks heavily

over it during NE gales.

9.4 Kolbeinstangi, located 7 miles SSW of Strandhofn, is the

low but distinctive extremity of a tongue of land which projects

4.5 miles NE from the head of the fjord. It is separated from the

NW shore by a shallow lagoon. A light is shown from a tower,

20m high, standing 1.5 miles SSW of the point.

9.4 Leidharholmi, a grassy islet, lies close S of the light tower

and is separated from the coast by a narrow and shallow channel.

9.4 Midholmi, a grass-covered island is joined to the mainland N

by a breakwater and is one of a number of islands and reefs

fronting Vopnafjordhur Trading Station at the head of the fjord.

Hukkasker, which shows a light, and Hjalmarsbaka lie close

SE and E, respectively, from Midholmi. Krossvikurlending,

which shows a light, lies close W of Hukkasker. Reclamation

work has been in progess since 2003 to join Midholmi to Skipholmi. 

9.4 A spit, with depths of less than 5m, extends SSW from

Hlassidh, a small island close S of Skipholmi. Helenufludh, a

submerged rock with a depth of 1.7m, lies about 60m SW of

the S tip of Skipholmi. 

9.5 Vopnafjordur (65°45'N., 14°50'W.) (World Port Index No. 380) is a trading station. It is situated at the NW side of

the head of the fjord. The harbor is subject to occasional incursions of polar ice. 

9.5 Tides—Currents.—Tides rise about 1.5m at springs and

1.1m at neaps.

9.5 Depths—Limitations.—Two L-shaped piers, with depths of

5.5 and 6.6m at their outer faces, front the station. There is also

Vopnafjordur
178 Sector 9. Iceland—East and South Coasts 

Pub. 181

a T-shaped pier and a number of quays with depths of 1 to 4.3m

alongside. Vessels with drafts up to 3m can be accommodated.

It is reported that vessels up to 4,550 dwt and 95m in length

have been handled.

Vopnafjordur, open to the NE, is entered between Strandhofn

and Svartnes, 10.5 miles SE. The depths in the fjord are very irregular, but a narrow deep, with depths of over 90m, extends to

within 4.5 miles of the head. It has been reported that vessels

may approach to within 0.5 mile of the shores in safety.

9.5 Aspect.—Several small islands and reefs are located within

600m of the shore fronting the station. Midholmi, the northernmost island, is grass-covered and joined to the shore at its N

end by a causeway. It is reported (1990) that a breakwater has

been constructed close W of this causeway. The fairway leading to the harbor and anchorages is indicated by three pairs of

lighted range beacons. Local knowledge is required.

9.5 Pilotage.—Persons with local knowledge are available and

recommended, especially for anchoring.

9.5 Anchorage.—There are no good anchorages in Vopnafjordur. However, the recommended anchorage berth lies, in a

depth of 13m, about 0.25 mile S of the trading station; local

knowledge is required.

9.5 Caution.—With S winds, the fjord is notorious for its

squalls which descend from the mountains. They are more violent near the land than farther out in the fjord.

9.6 Heradsfloi (65°42'N., 14°10'W.), a wide bay open to

the NE, is entered between Svartnes and Kogur, 15.5 miles SE.

A low beach of black sand, located at the head, contrasts with

the mountains at the NW and SE sides of the bay.

9.6 Within the head, a wide valley extends far inland and several

rivers flow through it.

9.6 Caution.—Vessels entering this bay should exercise caution,

as the beach appears to be farther away than it really is. 

9.7 Kogur (65°36'N., 13°52'W.) is a steep point. A light

is shown from a tower, 8m high, standing on a point 0.75 mile

SE of Kogur. Submerged rocks lie about 0.25 mile N of Kogur

and a shoal, with a depth of 10m on which the sea breaks, was

reported to lie about 1 mile N of the point. Osfles, a group of

above-water rocks, lies 1.5 miles NW of Kogur and is connected to the mainland SSE of it by a chain of submerged rocks. 

9.7 Njardhvik, a small bay, is entered 2 miles SSE of Kogur and

extends 1.5 miles W. Gunnarssker, a group of drying rocks, lies

slightly N of the middle of the entrance and, with offshore

winds, is not marked by breakers. A spit, with depths of 5 to

9m, extends about 350m N from Gunnarssker. This spit, along

with a small reef fringing the N entrance point, makes the narrow channel lying N of Gunnarssker foul and, in heavy weather, there are breakers across it.

9.7 The bay should only be used as a temporary anchorage by

small craft with local knowledge, as it is open to the E and subject to frequent incursions of polar ice.

9.8 Borgarfjordur (Borgarfjordhur) (65°33'N.,

13°46'W.), located 2 miles SE of Njardhvik, is entered between

Landsendi and Hafnartangi, 2.5 miles ESE. It extends 2.5 miles

S and is completely open to N winds. The fjord never freezes

over, but there may be considerable quantities of ice.

9.8 Alfaborg, a prominent four-sided hummock 41m high,

stands a short distance W of the lowland which lies at the head

of the fjord.

9.8 Galmur, a rock with a depth of 5.2m, lies about 0.25 mile NE

of the Hafnartangi. A shoal, with a depth of 18m, lies 1.75

miles NE of Galmur. The sea breaks over this shoal during

heavy weather.

9.8 Hafnarholmi, a flat and rocky islet, is located close offshore,

1 mile SSW of the SE entrance point. Small craft with local

knowledge can anchor S of this islet. A jetty and a boat harbor

are situated close S of a causeway which connects the islet to

the mainland.

9.8 The E shore of the fjord is free from off-lying dangers, but

the W shore is foul up to about 275m offshore.

9.8 Bakkagerdhi (65°32'N., 13°49'W.), a small trading station,

is situated at the SW corner of an inlet which lies at the W side

of the head. The approach fairway is indicated by pairs of lighted range beacons. 

9.8 A jetty, with a depth of 6m at its head, extends 140m from

the shore, close NW of the station. However, it was reported

(1980) that this jetty had been damaged by ice. 

9.8 Anchorage.—Vessels may anchor, in a depth of 10m, off the

station. This anchorage may be used with local knowledge, but

not during N winds or in bad weather.

9.8 Caution.—Small craft should exercise caution in the ice season as the ice within the fjord is often black and difficult to see.

9.9 Brunavik (65°32'N., 13°41'W.), a large cove, is located 2.5 miles E of Borgarfjordur. It is open to the N and sometimes used by fishing vessels with local knowledge. Temporary

anchorage, in a depth of 11m, can be obtained, but the holding

ground is poor. Two low islets lie close off the NW entrance

point of the cove. The channel between them and the point has

a least depth of 11m, but can only be used by boats.

9.9 Glettinganes (65°31'N., 13°37'W.), a salient point fronted

by submerged rocks, is located 2.25 miles SE of Brunavik. A

light is shown from a tower, 20m high, standing on the NE extremity of the point.

9.9 Breidavik and Husavik, two small bays, are located 3 miles

and 6.5 miles, respectively, S of Glettinganes. These bays are

open, encumbered with rocks, and unsuitable for even temporary anchorage.

9.9 Caution.—The coast in the vicinity of Glettinganes, Breidavik, and Husavik is fronted by rocks and a heavy race has been

experienced offshore.

9.10 Lodmundarfjordur (65°21'N., 13°45'W.) is entered

10 miles SSW of Glettinganes. It extends 3.25 miles WNW between high and steep mountains and is free from dangers beyond 200m from either shore. The depths decrease regularly

from 37m, at the entrance, to 11m about 650m from the head

where a river discharge through a shallow lagoon almost enclosed by a tongue of sand. Fishing vessels use this fjord for

temporary anchorage. The usual berth, in depths of 22 to 26m,

is off the N shore.

9.10 Caution.—A considerable swell is raised by onshore winds,

even when not blowing directly into the fjord.

9.10 This fjord is noted for the violence of the squalls within it,

especially from N.

9.10 Skaelingur, a peak, 931m high, stands on the N side of Lod-
Sector 9. Iceland—East and South Coasts 179

Pub. 181

mundarfjordur. It is prominent and the summit resembles a pagoda.

9.11 Seydisfjordur (Seydhisfjordhur) (65°18'N.,

13°40'W.) is entered between Borgarnes, the S entrance point

of Lodmundarfjordur, and Skalanes, 2 miles SSE. This fjord is

one of the most important centers of trade on the E coast of Iceland. It extends 8.5 miles WSW and is surrounded by steep

mountains. General depths in the fairway are 37 to 90m and a

trading station is situated at the head of the fjord. 

9.11 Caution.—A disused submarine cable lies within the fjord

and may best be seen on the chart.

9.11 Occasionally, violent squalls descend from the mountains

and are stronger off the S shore of the fjord.

9.12 Brimnes, a point fronted by foul ground, is located

1.75 miles SW of Borgarnes. A light is shown from a tower,

7m high, standing on the point.

9.12 Imslandhus, a prominent house fronted by a jetty, is situated

on the S shore of the fjord, 1 mile from the head. Several oil

tanks stand close SW of the house.

9.12 Vestdalseyri, a small trading station fronted by the ruins of a

pier, is situated on the N side of the fjord, 1.5 miles from the

head. A prominent farm house stands 2.5 miles NE of this station.

9.12 Skalanesbot, a small bay, is located on the S side of the fjord,

close W of Skalanes. Its shores are fringed with foul ground.

Anchorage can be obtained, in depths of 11 to 15m, good holding ground, in the SE part of this bay.

9.13 Seydisfjordur Harbor (65°16'N., 14°00'W.) (World

Port Index No. 400), a settlement, is located at the SW end of

the fjord of the same name. It is divided into two sections by a

river, the mouth of which is spanned by an iron bridge.

9.13 The port has a deep and well-sheltered harbor which is

among the best in Iceland. There are two herring processing

plants in the town. Regular passenger and car ferry connections

operate to and from Scandinavia.

9.13 Depths—Limitations.—Fjardahofn Quay is 140m long,

with a depth of 6.5m alongside. Engros Quay is 65m long, with

a depth of 6.5m alongside. Baejarbryggja Quay is 45m long,

with a depth of 6.5m alongside. Fiskuinnslubryggja Quay is

60m long, with a depth of 6.5m alongside. There are facilities

for fishing, ro-ro, tanker, container, and ferry vessels.

9.13 A wreck, with a depth of 22m, lies almost in the middle of

the fjord, about 1,000m NNE of the lighted beacon; it is

marked by a lighted buoy. 

Aspect.—Alda Church, a white building, stands in the settlement and is conspicuous. A lighted beacon stands 0.25 mile

NE of the church.

9.13 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory, but is available and

recommended. The harbor may be contacted on VHF channels

16 and 12.

9.13 Anchorage.—Vessels may attempt to anchor wherever the

depths are less than 40m, off the settlement and clear of the

wreck lying in the approach. Good anchorage may be obtained

in Skalanebot, in depths of 11 to 15 m. The holding ground is

good but a considerable swell is raised by NE winds. 

9.13 Small vessels may obtain anchorage 0.7 miles WSW of Sorlastadharvik, which lies clos W of Hanefsstadhareyri, in a

depth of about 26m, off a prominent building on the shore.

9.13 Small craft may anchor W of Gullsteinseyri, in about 20m,

midway between Hanefsstadhareyri, with Brimnes in line with

the extremity of Gullsteinseyri bearing about ENE. Storms

blowing into the fjord do not raise much sea at these anchorages, but gales blowing out of the fjord may cause vessels to drag

as the bottom slopes steeply.

9.13 Temporary fine weather anchorage may be obtained, in a

depth of 37m, off Vestdalseyri, but it is not a safe anchorage as

the bottom shelves so steeply that it is necessary to lay out

hawsers to the shore. 

9.14 Dalatangi (65°16'N., 13°34'W.), fronted by two small

islets, is located 3.5 miles SE of the S entrance point of Seydisfjordur. It is the E extremity of a peninsula and conspicuous

from N and S. A light is shown from a tower with a building,

10m high, standing on the point. A radiobeacon is situated at

the light tower.

9.14 Caution.—One of the strongest tidal races on the E coast of

Iceland runs in the vicinity of Dalatangi. A submarine cable

lies in this area and extends approximately 150m ESE. 

9.15 Dalafjall, 834m high, and Akurfell, 916m high, are

two prominent mountains standing 1.25 miles WSW and 2.25

miles SW, respectively, of Dalatangi. The mountains are usually snow-free due to their steep sides. 

9.15 Mjoifjordur (65°12'N., 13°46'W.), a narrow fjord, is entered between Steinsnes, located 3.75 miles SW of Dalafjall,

and Hafnartangi, 1.5 miles S. It extends 10 miles W between Seydisfjordur steep and high mountains and is comparatively unimportant. (Seydhisfjordhur)
180 Sector 9. Iceland—East and South Coasts 

Pub. 181

The depths in the fjord become less from 90m, at the entrance,

to 42m, close to the head. A pipeline, submerged at high tide, is

located W of the jetty and obstructs the approach. 

9.15 Brekka, a small trading station with a shallow jetty, is situated on the N side of the fjord, 4 miles within the entrance. It is

seldom visited except by fishing vessels. Anchorage can be obtained, in a depth of 40m, good holding ground, close off the

station, but it is limited to small vessels with local knowledge

as the depths increase rapidly towards the middle of the fjord.

9.15 Toarfjall, a prominent mountain 994m high, stands 3 miles

ENE of Brekka.

9.15 Anchorage may also be obtained off Fjordhur, a deserted settlement at the head of the fjord, but it is also limited by the

steeply shelving shore bank.

9.15 Caution.—A submarine cable lies across the fjord, about 1

mile E of the trading station.

9.15 Heavy squalls occasionally descend from the nearby mountains.

9.15 The fjord is liable to incursions of polar ice.

9.16 Nordfjardarfloi (Nordhfjardharfloi) (65°09'N.,

13°36'W.), a large bay, is entered between Flesjartangi, located

0.75 mile SE of Hafnartangi, and Nordfjardharhorn, 3.25 miles

ESE. The head of the bay is formed by two hilly projections

which divide it into three branches, known as, Nordfjordur,

Hellisfjordur, and Vidfjordur. The E side of the bay is formed

by Bardhsnes, a hilly peninsula. 

9.16 Flesjartangi, the NW entrance point, is fronted by foul

ground which extends up to about 180m seaward. It rises steeply to the 609m high summit of Nipa, which stands 0.25 mile inland.

9.16 Nordfjardharhorn, the E entrance point, is the N extremity of

Bardsnes. It is fronted by foul ground which extends about

650m N and NE. Two rocky islets lie close off the point; a detached rock, with a least depth of 5.9m, lies about 0.5 mile N of

them; occasionally, this rock is marked by breakers. A light is

shown from a metal tower, 4m high, standing on the point; it is

obscured on some bearings.

9.16 Grunnbodhi, a shoal with a least depth of 8m on its SW end,

lies about 0.5 mile NW of the point. 

9.16 Fossbodi, a shoal with a depth of 16.5m, lies about 1 mile

ENE of Nordfjardharhorn. Reykjabodi, a group consisting of

three rocks with a least depth of 11.2m, lies 2 miles NE of Nordfjardarhorn. During heavy weather, the sea breaks over this

group and vessels are advised not to pass between it and the

point. Breakers were reported (1931) to have been observed

between this group and the point. 

9.16 Caution.—Frequent heavy tidal races have been experienced off Nordfjardarhorn.

9.16 Heavy squalls, which descend from Nipa, have been experienced close off Flesjartangi, especially when the wind is blowing out of the bay.

9.16 A local magnetic anomaly of 5°E has been reported to exist

in a position about 0.5 mile ENE of Nordfjardharhorn.

9.17 Nordfjordur (65°08'N., 13°42'W.) is entered between Uxavogstangi, located 2.5 miles SSW of Flesjartangi

and Hellisfjardarnes, 1.25 miles S. It extends 2.5 miles W between steep shores and is mainly used by fishing vessels.

9.17 Nordfjordur Light is shown from a tower, 8m high, standing

on Uxavogstangi. A radiobeacon is situated at the light tower.

9.17 Hoflaugartindur, 930m high, and Bagall, 1,060m high, are

two prominent peaks that stand 1.5 miles and 2 miles, respectively, WNW of the head of Nordfjordur.

9.18 Neskaupstadur (Nes) (65°09'N., 13°41'W.) (World

Port Index No. 420), a trading and fishing station, is situated on

the N side of Nordhjordhur, almost 1 mile W of Uxavogstangi.

Several fish factories stand on the N shore between the station

and the head of the inlet. An aeronautical radiobeacon is situated close W of the station. 

9.18 The port can be contacted on VHF channel l6; messages can

be sent through Neskaupstadhur (TFM).

9.18 Depths—Limitations.—The main pier is 75m long and

75m wide, with depths of 6 to 10m alongside. Large vessels are

berthed at its S side and smaller ones at the E and W sides.

9.18 There are two fueling piers with depths of 5.2m alongside.

9.18 Vessels of up to 4,450 dwt and 99m in length have been accommodated.

9.18 A new breakwater at the head of the inlet protects two quays

and the boat harbor. One quay is 152m long, with depths of 6

to 7m alongside. A second quay is 112m long, with depths of

5.5 to 6m alongside. 

Neskaupstadur and Norfjordur

Neskaupstadur
Sector 9. Iceland—East and South Coasts 181

Pub. 181

9.18 Pilotage.—The harbor can be contacted on VHF channel 16,

23, 25, 26, or 27, call sign (TFM). There are no local pilots, but

authorized pilots may be requested through Seydisfjordur. 

9.18 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

35m, off the trading station, S of the church.

9.18 Caution.—This inlet is notorious for the heavy squalls

which descend from the mountains surrounding it.

9.18 Hellisfjordur is entered 1.25 miles SSE of the entrance to

Nordfjordur. It extends 1.75 miles WSW between steep mountain slopes and is deserted. A river flows into the head which is

low and fronted by drying sand flats. 

9.18 Vidfjordur is entered 0.75 mile SE of the entrance to Hellisfjordur. It extends 1.75 miles SSW and is deserted. The shores

are mostly rocky except at the head which is low and fringed

with sand and shingle.

9.18 Although free of dangers, these two inlets do not afford suitable anchorage as they are open to N winds and subject to frequent incursions of drift ice.

9.19 Gerpir (65°05'N., 13°30'W.), the E extremity of Iceland, is located 5.5 miles SSE of Nordhfardharhorn. The point

may be identified by a steep and conspicuous hill, 477m high,

standing on it. The shore in the vicinity of the point is fringed

by rocks and a small islet.

9.19 Sandvik, a small bight, indents the coast on the N side of

Gerpir. It is free from dangers although its shores are rocky in

places. Fishing vessels use this bight for temporary anchorage

as the holding ground is good, but it is completely exposed to

onshore winds.

9.19 Dianabodi, a detached rocky patch with a least depth of 20m,

lies 8 miles ESE of Gerpir.

9.19 Caution.—Several abnormal magnetic variations have been

observed in the vicinity of Gerpir and Dianabodi, the greatest

deflection being 22°E of normal.

9.19 Gerpifles and Mafastapar, two islets, are located close inshore, 0.75 mile S of Gerpir; they are useful landmarks by

which to identify the point in thick weather.

9.19 Vadlavik (65°01'N., 13°36'W.), an open bay, is entered 4

miles SW of Gerpir. It is free of dangers, but the shores are

fringed with rocks in places. Fishing vessels, with local knowledge, occasionally obtain temporary anchorage within this bay

as the holding ground is good, but it is exposed to all onshore

winds.

9.20 Reydarfjordhur (Reydharfjordhur) (65°00'N.,

13°51'W.), the largest fjord on the E coast, is entered between

Krossanes, located 1.75 miles S of Vadlavik, and Vattarnes, 4

miles SW. It extends for 10 miles in a general NW direction to

Holmanes and then divides into two branches. Eskifjordhur,

the N branch, extends NW for 2.5 miles; a trading station, of

the same name, is situated near its head. Innri-Reydarfjordur,

the W branch, extends W for 6 miles and Budareyri, a trading

station, is situated near its head. 

9.20 Reydarfjordur is about 2 miles wide at its narrowest part and

surrounded by conspicuous mountain ranges which fall steeply

to the sea. Some of these mountain peaks are among the highest on the E coast of Iceland.

9.20 Snaefugl, 757m high, stands on the N side of the fjord, 1.5

miles W of Krossanes. Holmatindur, 985m high, stands 2 miles

NW of Holmanes and its summit resembles a pyramid. Both of

these mountains are conspicuous from seaward.

9.20 Vattarnes, the S entrance point of the fjord, is the NE extremity of a peninsula. A light is shown from a tower, 12m high,

standing on the point.

9.20 Vattarnestangi, a narrow tongue of land, extends about 0.25

mile N of the light tower and is fronted by rocks, foul ground,

and a reef. It should be given a wide berth.

9.20 Krossanes, the N entrance point of the fjord, is backed close

WNW by a prominent mountain, 603m high.

9.20 Vatnsbodi, a shoal with a depth of 5.5m, lies about 0.5 mile S

of Krossanes and is nearly always marked by breakers. Laggi,

an isolated rocky patch with a depth of 5.5m, lies about 0.75

mile offshore, 1.25 miles SW of Vatnsbodi.

9.20 Seley, a grass-covered islet, 21m high, is located 2.5 miles

ESE of Krossanes. A light is shown from a tower, 14m high,

standing at the W side of the islet, near its N end. A racon is

situated at the light tower.

9.20 Holmur, a small islet fringed by foul ground and a reef, is located close N of the N end of Seley to which it is connected by

a reef.

9.20 Eyjarsker, Midhsker, and Soetusker are three islets which extend in a line up to 0.75 mile SSW of the S end of Seley.

9.20 Sulnabodi, a patch with a depth of 20m, lies in mid-channel

between Seley and Krossanes and is, at times, marked by

breakers.

Directions.—The N channel, which lies between Seley and

Krossanes, is almost 2.25 miles wide. It is free of dangers, except for Vatnsbodi and Sulnabodi, and the depths are mostly

less than 45m, so vessels may anchor if necessary. The tidal

currents are fairly strong, but set in the direction of the channel.

9.20 The E channel, which lies S of the dangers extending from

the S end of Seley, is 2.75 miles wide, free of dangers, and the

one most used.

9.20 The S channel, which lies between Skrudhur and Andey, is

described in paragraph 9.24 with the approaches to Faskrudsfjordur.

9.20 Refsker, a long and narrow reef, extends 0.75 mile S from

the N shore of the fjord, 3 miles W of Krossanes. Parts of this

reef dry and a depth of less than 2m lies at its S extremity. It is

always marked by breakers during E winds.

9.20 Svartasker, a dark rock, is located close off a steep and dark

cliff, 4.75 miles W of Krossanes, where the coast turns NW. A

beacon is reported to stand about 550m E of it.

9.20 Helgustadhir, a farm, is situated 3.25 miles NW of

Svartasker, near a former mine.

9.20 Grima, a point on the S shore of the fjord, is located 7.25

miles NW of Vattarnes. A light is shown from a structure, 3m

high, standing on the point.

9.21 Eskifjordur, the N branch of Reydharfjordhur, is entered between Holmanes, located 2.75 miles NW of Grima,

and a small promontory on the coast, 1 mile NE. An extensive

grassy valley penetrates W into the mountains from the head of

this branch. The streams, which flow through this valley, discharge so much water into the head that the surface water is almost fresh and the strength of the ebb is increased accordingly.

9.21 Holmanes is fronted by foul ground and patches, with depths

of 11m, lie up to 1 mile E of the point. 

9.21 Mjoeyri, a steep-to and sandy spit, projects from the N side
182 Sector 9. Iceland—East and South Coasts 

Pub. 181

of this branch, 1.25 miles N of Holmanes. A light is shown

from a tower, 4m high, standing on its extremity. The spit lies 1

mile NW of Innstekkur.

9.22 Eskifjordur (Eskifjordhur) (65°04'N., 14°01'W.)

(World Port Index No. 430), a trading station, is situated on the

N shore of the branch, between Mjoeyri and the head. It is located on the E shore of N Reydarfjordur including Budareyri. It

is mainly used by fishing vessels. 

9.22 The waters of the fjord only freeze during exceptionally cold

winters but, in years of heavy incusion, polar ice may penetrate

to the waters in the vacinity of the trading station.

9.22 Depths—Limitations.—A number of shallow piers project

at intervals from the shore abreast the trading station and are

used by small fishing craft.

9.22 A main pier, 140m long, with depths of 5 to 6.3m alongside,

projects from the shore close NW of a prominent oil tank.

9.22 Another main pier has berthing spaces of 70m on its S side

and 90m on its N side, with depths of 6.2m to 8.9m alongside. 

9.22 Vessels of up to 4,450 dwt and 96m in length have been accommodated.

9.22 Another jetty lies close W near the oil tanks, and has a berthing face of 20m and 40m on either side. 

9.22 Anchorage.—Good anchorage may be obtained, in a depth

of 40m, 650m or more NW of Mjoeyri and about 180m offshore. Anchorage can also be obtained, in a depth of 32m, off

the two main piers at the station or, in depths of 33 to 40m, in

the middle of the branch. The harbor can be contacted on VHF

channel 12. 

9.22 Caution.—The bottom consists of clay covered with soft

mud; sufficient chain must be used to ensure that the anchor

sinks through the mud and reaches the clay below it.

9.22 Strong squalls are occasionally experienced within Eskifjordur, especially when the wind is blowing out of the branch.

These may occur without warning when the weather appears

calm and settled. Therefore, larger vessels should always drop

a hauling-off anchor when going alongside.

9.23 Innri-Reydarfjordur, the W branch of Reydharfjordhur, is entered between Holmanes and Eyri, 1.75 miles

SSW. This branch decreases slightly in width as it extends between high mountains. A river flows through a valley into the

head of this branch and carries silt which forms a narrow drying flat.

9.23 Storholmi, the southernmost and highest of a group of islets,

is located 1 mile WSW of Holmanes and a drying rock lies

90m SW of it. With these exceptions, the shores of the branch

are steep-to and, in most places, free of dangers.

9.23 Budareyri (65°02'N., 14°13'W.), a small trading station, is

situated on the N side of the head. A church, with a red roof, is

a prominent landmark.

9.23 Two wharves, about 50m and 30m long, are located in the

poer; the latter wharf is adjacent to a group of storage tanks.

An L-shaped jetty W of the river has a 60m long berth on its S

side. 

9.23 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained, in depths of 20 to

30m, good holding ground, either on a bank lying between

Storholmi and the mainland NW of it, or, in depths of 37 to

46m, about 0.25 mile off the N shore abreast the station.

9.24 Faskrudsfjordur (64°56'N., 13°48'W.) is one of the

most important fishing ports on the E coast of Iceland and has

several fish processing factories. The port includes Budir. The

trading station and port are on the N side of the fjord of the

same name at its end.

Faskrudsfjordur is much frequented by fishing vessels and at

times many of them may be anchored off the shore between

Mjoeyir and Budhir. There are five piers, approximately 25m

long, which have depths of 4.6m. There are other small berths

for fishing vessels as well.

9.24 Anchorage.—The first good anchorage is 0.25 miles W of

Mjoeyri, close E of the mouth of a stream, in depths of 35 to

49m. The holding ground is poor and the bottom shelves steeply. Better anchorage may be obtained by small vessels off Budhir with the extremity of the land W of Vikussker bearing

ESE and in line with Mjoeyri. The bottom is soft and the holding ground no better than at the anchorage W of Mjoeyri, but

the bottom shelves more gradually. 

Faskrudsfjordur is entered between Hafnarnes, located 1.5

miles S of Vattarnes and another point of the same name, 3

miles SW. The island of Andey is S of Hafnarnes off the N

shore at the fjords mouth. The fjord extends WNW for 8.5

miles between steep and generally rocky shores. A valley extends W into the mountains from the head of the fjord which is

low. Several rivers discharge into the head and form a delta

with a wide expanse of sand and mud which dries.

9.24 A mountain range with some prominent peaks stands on the

N side of the fjord. Halaklettur, a peak 573m high, stands close

W of the N entrance point. Reydharfjall, a peak 597m high,

stands 0.5 mile NW of Halaklettur and has a beacon on its

summit. Lambafell, a peak 1,097m high, stands 2.5 miles N of

the head of the fjord. A beacon is situated on its summit which

is the highest of the range.

9.24 Skrudur, an islet 161m high, is located on the N side of the

approach, 1.5 miles ESE of the N entrance point. It is an excellent landmark because of its shape, which resembles a haystack, and its height. However, the islet also obscures the

navigation lights in the vicinity. A small islet lies close off the

N side of Skrudur and a reef extends about 0.25 mile N from it.

Another small islet lies off the N side of Skrudur. Einbui, a

small drying rock, lies about 0.5 mile NW of the NW side of

Skrudur.

9.24 Brokur, located 1.5 miles ENE of Skrudur, is a small chain

of rocks, some of which dry. The northeasternmost rock of this

chain is nearly always marked by breakers, but not so the

southwesternmost rock. Two rocks (existence doubtful), with

depths of less than 2m, lie 550m and 1 mile SW of the SW end

of Brokur.

9.24 Andey, a low grass-covered islet, is located 0.75 mile S of

the N entrance point of the fjord, to which it is connected by a

shallow spit. A reef extends about 0.25 mile N from its N end,

otherwise the islet is steep-to. It is reported to be not easily distinguished from seaward because of the high land behind it.

Fles, formed by two rocks lying on a shoal patch, is located

about 0.5 mile NNE of the N end of the islet.

9.24 Aedarsker, located 0.5 mile W of Andey, is a steep-to reef

which is always partially visible. General depths of 22 to 24m

lie between the reef and the islet.

9.24 Directions.—The channel lying between Skrudur and

Andey may be used, but the tidal current runs both N and S
Sector 9. Iceland—East and South Coasts 183

Pub. 181

with great force and rates of 4 knots are not unusual. Tide rips

may also be encountered throughout this channel. The fairway,

which is narrowed to a width of about 0.75 mile, lies between

Einbui and Fles. It is inadvisable to pass between Einbui and

Skrudur.

9.24 Caution.—The passage between Brokur and Skrudhur

should not be used as it is not free from dangers and the tidal

current is very strong.

9.24 Local magnetic anomalies exist off the entrance to Faskrudsfjordur and the magnetic compass is very unreliable. The greatest anomaly, up to 22°E of normal, was observed in a position

centered 3.5 miles SSE of Skrudur. An anomaly of 11°W was

observed about 0.75 mile N of this position and deflections

ceased altogether about 0.25 mile S of this position. An anomaly of 17°E was observed in a position about 4.75 miles E of

Skrudur and another of 11° between Skrudur and the mainland.

9.25 Hafnarnes, the S entrance point of Faskrudsfjordur, is

the N end of a mountain range. Gvendarnesfles, a low and

rocky islet, lies about 600m off the coast, 1.5 miles SSE of the

point. Snaefuglsbodi, an isolated shoal, with a depth of 9m, lies

about 1.25 miles SE of this islet. A light is shown from a tower,

7m high, standing on Hafnarnes.

9.25 Mjoeyri (64°55'N., 13°58'W.), a small projection, extends S

from the N side of the fjord, 2.25 miles ESE of the head. A

light is shown from a tower, 4m high, standing on the S extremity of this projection.

9.25 Budir (64°56'N., 14°01'W.) (World Port Index No. 450), an

important fishing and trading station, is situated on the N shore

of the fjord, close to the head. Several fish factories stand along

the shore fronting the station. Budir may be referred to as Faskrudhsfordur. 

9.25 Depths—Limitations.—The fueling jetty has a berthing

space of 80m, with a depth of 7.6m alongside. Fiokeyri Quay is

110m long, with a depth of 7m alongside. Hafskipabryggia

Quay is 60m long, with a depth of 9m alongside. Five subsidiary jetties, each 25m long, have depths of 4.6m alongside.

There are several other small jetties at the station which are

used by fishing craft.

9.25 Anchorage.—Vessels may anchor off the N shore of the

fjord. A fair berth, in depths of 35 to 49m, poor holding

ground, lies about 0.25 mile W of Mjoeyri Light and close E of

the mouth of a stream. Small vessels and fishing craft anchor

closer in, all along the shore between Mjoeyri and Budir.

9.25 Caution.—Between Faskrudsfjordur and Eystrahorn, 35

miles SW, the coast is fronted with dangers, some lying up to

20 miles offshore.

9.25 Nyibodi (64°51'N., 13°26'W.), an isolated shoal with a least

depth of 13m, lies about 8.5 miles ESE of Hafnarnes Light.

9.26 Stodhvarfjordhur (64°50'N., 13°55'W.) is entered

between Landatangi, located 3.5 miles SW of the S entrance

point of Faskrudsfjordur, and Kambanes, 1 mile S. Within the

entrance, the shores of the fjord are clear and the depths decrease regularly from about 55m to the shore at the head. The

shores are low but are backed by mountain ranges on either

side. A narrow valley extends WNW from the head into the

mountains. A river flows through this valley and discharges into a delta of swamp, sand, and silt. 

9.26 Landatangi, the N entrance low point near Landaholl, is a

small tongue of land which extends S and has a low grass-covered hummock standing at its extremity. A rock, with a depth

of less than 2m, lies close S of the point. A light is shown from

a building, 8m high, standing on the root of the point. 

9.26 Flautagerdhisgrynnsli, a shoal patch with a depth of 6.4m,

lies about 1.75 miles ESE of Landatangi.

9.26 Kambanes, the S entrance point, is backed by several prominent peaks. A light is shown from a tower, 11m high, standing

on the SE extremity of the point. A beacon stands on the summit of a hill which rises close NW of the light tower.

9.26 Sulur, a mountain 664m high, stands 1.5 miles W of Kambanes and has three distinctive peaks. Thverhamarsfell, a peak

844m high, stands 2 miles NW of Sulur.

9.26 Fjardhbodhi, a shoal with a depth of 4m, lies 1 mile NE of

Kambanes and is usually marked by breakers. A depth of

10.4m lies about 0.5 mile S of Fjardhbodhi and, during strong

onshore winds, the whole area is reported to be filled with

breakers.

9.26 Kirkjubol (64°50'N., 13°53'W.), a small settlement, is situated on the N side of the fjord, 1.5 miles WNW of Landatangi.

An L-shaped jetty fronts the settlement; the berthing face is

30m long, with depths of 5.5m to 7m alongside. Vessels usually obtain anchorage, in depths of 35 to 40m, off the settlement,

but there are no good berths within the fjord. A harbor light is

located on a mole 185m ESE of the jetty. 

9.26 Caution.—Faerabakur (64°46'N., 13°32'W.), a shoal with

a depth of 6.3m, lies about 8.5 miles ESE of Kambanes and is

marked by breakers in heavy weather. Grillir, a rock with a

least depth of 22m, lies 2.5 miles ENE of Faerabakur. Alftindsbodi, a rock with a least depth of 17m, lies about 1 mile SSE of

Faerabakur. Naggur, a rock with a depth of 13m, lies about 3.5

miles SE of Alftindsbodi.

9.27 Breiddalsvik (Breidhdalsvik) (64°46'N., 13°55'W.), a

large bay, is entered between Kambanes and Streitishvarf

(Stretishorn) (64°44'N., 13°59'W.), 6 miles SW. It contains

good anchorages, but they are seldom used because of the frequent fog in this vicinity and the numerous dangers which lie

both in the approaches and inside the bay. 

9.27 A light is shown from a tower, 12m high, standing on a point

near Streitishvarf. Satur, a peak, 715m high, stands 2 miles W

of the light tower and is a prominent landmark. 

9.27 Several small islets and rocks front Streitishvarf and lie up to

about 0.5 mile offshore.

9.27 Hlada, an islet with a small rock lying close NE, is located 1

mile NE of Streitishvarf. A disused light tower, 13m high,

stands on this islet. Fjardbodi, a shoal with a depth of 13m, lies

about 2 miles E of Hlada; the sea has been reported to break

over it in heavy weather. 

9.27 Idhusker, an above-water rock surrounded by foul ground, is

located 0.5 mile S of Kambanes. Rocks, awash, lie between

this rock and the point. Hvopa, a small group of submerged

rocks, lies 1.25 miles SSW of Kambanes. Larungar, a shoal

with a depth of less than 2m, lies 1.25 miles S of Hvopa and is

always marked by breakers.

9.27 Blotolfsbodi, a rock with a depth of 4.9m, is located 2.5

miles SE of Kambanes. It is the outermost of the dangers lying

in the approach to the bay and is marked by breakers, even in

fairly calm weather. 

9.27 Meleyri, a long and narrow tongue of sand, projects S from
184 Sector 9. Iceland—East and South Coasts 

Pub. 181

the NW corner of the bay and nearly encloses a lagoon, which

mostly dries, at the head. Stapi, a small point, projects from the

N shore of the bay, close E of the root of Meleyri.

9.27 The SW shore of the bay is fringed with islets, rocks, and

shoals which extend, in places, up to 1.5 miles offshore.

Hafnarey and Gunnhildarey, two of the larger grass-covered islets, are located 1.5 and 2 miles, respectively, NW of Hlada.

9.27 The N shore of the bay is fronted by several dangers. Rifsker,

the principal one, is a narrow chain of rocks which extends 1.5

miles S from a point on the shore, 2 miles WSW of Kambanes.

A beacon is reported to stand near the S extremity of this chain.

9.27 Selnes, a small projection, extends S from the N shore of the

bay, close E of Stapi. A light is shown from a tower, 9m high,

standing near the S extremity of this projection.

9.27 Breiddalsvik (64°47'N., 14°01'W.), a small trading station,

is situated at the head of Selnesbot, a cove formed between Stapi and Selnes.

9.27 A rock, with a depth of less than 2m, lies in the middle of the

entrance to the cove and is marked by a lighted buoy. The entrance fairway is indicated by a lighted range.

9.27 A breakwater extends 100m WSW from the SW side of the

extremity of Selnes. A main L-shaped jetty close N of the

breakwater projects 75m WNW from the shore. It has a berthing face 30m long, with depths of 4 to 6m alongside.

9.27 The fjord should be entered S of Larungar and Selnes Light

indicates the approach channel; however, local knowledge is

required.

9.27 Anchorage.—Good anchorage may be obtained, in depths

of 11 to 15m, off the entrance to Selnesbot. However, this anchorage is open to E winds. 

9.28 Krossnafir (Krossnes) (64°41'N., 14°11'W.), a point

fronted by small islets and rocks, is located 5.5 miles SSW of

Streitishvarf. The coast between is fronted by several dangers

and should not be approached within 1 mile.

9.28 Berufjordur (64°42'N., 14°20'W.) is entered between

Krossnafir and Bulandsnes, 3 miles SW. It extends 12 miles

NNW between low and steep shores which are backed, in places, by grassy slopes. These rise steeply to the foothills of the

mountain ranges which stand on either side of the fjord.

9.28 Tides—Currents.—Off Berufjordur, the tidal current is

very strong and may attain a rate of up to 7 knots at springs.

During the flood tide, it is SW; during the ebb tide, it is NE.

During gales, both currents are subject to great variations.

9.28 Karlsstadhatangi, a point on the N shore of the fjord, is located 1.25 miles W of Krossnafir. A light is shown from a tower,

8m high, standing near the extremity of this point. 

9.28 Bjarnarsker, a low islet marked by a beacon, is located about

1 mile off the N shore, 2.25 miles ESE of Karlsstadhatangi.

Several dangers lie E, N, and W of this islet and vessels should

not pass between it and the mainland.

9.28 Bulandsnes, the promontory forming the S entrance point of

the fjord, is fronted by numerous small islets, rocks, and shoals

which extend up to 2 miles S, 2 miles E, and 1 mile N of it.

9.28 Ketilsfles, formed by two rocky islets lying close together, is

located 4.25 miles S of Karlsstadhatangi Light. It is the southernmost of the islets lying off the promontory. A light is shown

from a tower, 12m high, standing on the S and larger islet of

the two.

9.28 Lifolfssker, an irregular islet marked by a beacon, is the

northeasternmost of the many dangers which lie in a group

within 1 mile of the E extremity of the promontory.

9.28 The entrance channel of the fjord lies between Bjarnarsker

and Lifolfssker.

9.28 Caution.—Kjoggur (64°39'N., 13°57'W.), an isolated shoal

with a depth of 5m, lies 7 miles ESE of Krossnafir; the sea is

reported to break over this shoal with any swell. Langsgrunn, a

patch on which the sea breaks, lies about 2 miles SSW of Kjoggur and has a least depth of 11.2m.

9.28 Hvalsbakur (64°36'N., 13°17'W.), an isolated islet 5m high,

is located 17.5 miles ESE of Kjoggur. It is the outermost danger and resembles the back of a whale. A radar reflector is reported to stand on this islet.

9.28 The many islets lying off Bulandsnes are not easily distinguished from seaward as they do not show up against the land

behind them.

9.29 Bonda, a prominent hill 43m high, stands 0.75 mile

within the extremity of Bulandsnes. It is reported (1990) that

several conspicuous radio masts stand on this hill. Bulandstindur, a pyramid-shaped mountain 1,115m high, stands on the

SW shore of the fjord, 5 miles W of Karlsstadhatangi Light.

Dysin, a peak 1,156m high, stands 2 miles NNW of Bulandstindur.

9.29 Langitangi, the extremity of a small peninsula, is located 1

mile N of Bulandsnes and fringed with foul ground.

Aedharsteinn, from which a light is shown, is located 1 mile

WNW of Langitangi. Two small islets and a drying reef front

this point. A small inlet, which is divided into three coves at

the head, is entered between Langitangi and Aedharsteinn.

9.29 Inward of Aedharsteinn, the fjord is mostly free of dangers

outside 200m of the shores; the depths in mid-channel vary

from 37 to 55m.

9.29 Caution.—Submarine cables lie across the fjord about 1.75

miles NW of Aedharsteinn.

9.30 Djupivogur (64°40'N., 14°17'W.) (World Port Index

No. 470) is a trading station and is located in the southeasternmost cove at the head of the inlet entered between Langitangi

and Aedharsteinn. It is at the entrance to Berufjordur. The port

has a natural harbor, which is well sheltered, but narrow; cargo

Djupivogur
Sector 9. Iceland—East and South Coasts 185

Pub. 181

vessels may have difficulty maneuvering within the harbor. 

9.30 The main quay is 60m long with depths of 5.2 to 5.5m alongside. There is also a small L-shaped jetty with a depth of 3m

alongside.

The fairway is indicated by a lighted range and buoys; however, local knowledge is essential as several dangers lie adjacent to the channel.

9.30 District pilots may be obtained at Djupivogur.

9.30 Vessels can anchor, in depths of 13 to 15m, off the cove. Vessels up to 55m in length have anchored here. Gautavik, a bight,

is located on the NE side of the fjord, 3.5 miles NW of Karlsstadhatangi Light. It affords anchorage, in depths of 8 to 10m,

good holding ground.

9.31 Hamarsfjordur and Alftafjordur are two bays located

SSW of Bulandsnes which extend inland for about 5 miles.

They are almost enclosed at the seaward side by a chain of narrow tongues of sand, small islets, and rocks. Hamarsfjordur,

the N bay is entered by Djupasund, a narrow passage lying

close S of Bulandsnes. Small vessels, with drafts up to 3.4m,

can enter this bay. However, local knowledge is required as the

fairway is subject to change, the tidal currents strong, and the

channel encumbered with rocks. A narrow channel, with a bar

across it, leads into Alftafjordur, the S bay; however, the passage can only be used by small boats, with local knowledge, at

high water.

9.31 Hvalsnes (64°24'N., 14°32'W.), located 16 miles SSW of

Bulandsnes, is the S extremity of Eystrahorn, a mountain mass.

A light is shown from a tower, 12m high, standing on the point.

Smellur, a rock with a depth of less than 2m, lies 2.25 miles

ENE of the point and, occasionally, the sea breaks over it. Hvitingar, a drying rock, lies 2 miles E of the point and a reef extends about 0.5 mile WSW from it. Brokur, a rock with a depth

of 7m, lies 2 miles SE of the point and the sea usually breaks

on it.

9.31 The coast between Bulandsnes and Hvalsnes is fronted by

several dangers which can best be seen on the chart.

9.32 Papey (64°35'N., 14°10'W.), located 4.5 miles SE of

Bulandsnes, is the largest island off the E coast of Iceland. A

light is shown from a prominent tower, 8m high, standing on

the summit of the island, near the center. From a distance, the

island appears long and low with fairly steep sides, but at close

range the coastal areas are seen as mostly indented. Attaeringsvogur, an inlet on the N coast of the island, is entered between

two islets. Depths decrease within this inlet from 13m, at the

entrance, to 3.7m, near the head. It affords temporary anchorage to small vessels with local knowledge. Selavogur, an inlet

on the S coast of the island, is not suitable for anchorage.

9.32 Nyztibodi (Yztibodi), a rock that dries, lies 3.25 miles E of

Papey. Heimastibodi, a patch with a depth of 2m, lies 1.75

miles ESE of Papey and is surrounded by foul ground. Flydrusker (Flydhrusker), a small rock which dries 1.2m, lies 1

mile NE of Papey and a submerged rock lies close NNE of it. 

9.32 Svartasker, a steep-to and dark islet 6m high, lies about 0.5

mile NE of Papey. Steinbitssker, with a depth of less than 2m,

lies 360m W of Svartasker.

9.32 Kallhofdhi, an islet 29m high, is located close off the N coast

of Papey and Flatey, a low islet, lies close NW of it. The narrow channel between the two islets is deep and free of dangers,

but the channels separating these islets from Papey are foul.

9.32 Arnarey, a grass-covered islet, lies 180m off the NW coast of

Papey. It has three summits which stand in a NE to SW direction; the narrow channel between this islet and Papey dries. A

rock, on which the sea generally breaks, lies 360m NW of the

N extremity of Arnarey. Several other small islets lie close off

the W coast of Papey and can best be seen on the chart.

9.32 Selsker, consisting of two comparatively high islets lying

close together, is located 2.5 miles SSE of Papey.

9.33 Lonsvik (64°21'N., 14°46'W.), a wide bay, is entered

between Hvalsnes and Brimnes, 12 miles SW. Its shore consists of a narrow tongue of sand and shingle which almost completely encloses Lonsfjordur and Papafjordur, two large

lagoons.

9.33 Brimnes is the E extremity of Vestrahorn, a mountainous

mass. Several small islets and rocks lie up to about 1 mile seaward of this point.

9.33 Lonsfjordur, the N lagoon, is entered by Baejaros, a narrow

channel, located 6 miles SW of Hvalsnes. It can only be used

during calm weather by small craft, with local knowledge, at

slack water. The tidal currents are reported to attain rates of 3

to 4 knots. Tthe channel is liable to silt and has to be dredged at

times.

9.33 Vigur, a narrow islet 14m high, is located 1.25 miles SSE of

Baejaros. An above-water rock lies 650m W of its W side. In

fair weather, small vessels may pass between the rock and the

mainland.

9.33 Papafjordur, the S lagoon, is entered by Papos, a narrow and

tortuous channel, located about 1 mile N of Brimnes. The least

depth in this channel was reported (1950) to be 3m, but the sea

level varies with the season and also from year to year. The tidal currents in the channel are very strong; the ebb current may

attain a rate of 6 knots. At times, breakers are observed in the

entrance to the channel over a group of rocks lying on its N

side. Local knowledge is essential and it is ill-advisable for

vessels with drafts of more than 2.4m to attempt to enter. 

9.33 Stokksnes (64°14'N., 14°58'W.), a point, 14m high, is located 3 miles SSW of Brimnes. Even in calm weather, it is fringed

by breakers up to 0.25 mile seaward. A light is shown from a

tower, 20m high, standing near the extremity of the point. Two

conspicuous spherical structures, painted white, stand at a radar station, close NE of the light tower. An islet is located 0.25

Djupivogur
186 Sector 9. Iceland—East and South Coasts 

Pub. 181

mile SW of the point and the passage between it and the mainland is foul.

9.33 Hornsvik, a small bay, lies close N of Stokksnes and, during

good weather, affords temporary anchorage to vessels with local knowledge. Depths in the bay decrease regularly from 13m

to 4m near the head and the bottom is fine black sand. An

above-water rock, connected to the shore by a spit, lies near the

middle of this bay, about 180m offshore.

9.34 Hornafjardaros (64°14'N., 15°11'W.), located 6

miles W of Stokksnes, is the common entrance channel leading

to Hornafjordur and Skardsfjordur, two bays. It lies between

Austurfjorutangi and Sudurfjorutangi, which shows a light.

9.34 Austurfjorutangi is the W end of Austurfjorur, which extends

to Stokksnes and is the E part of the narrow tongue of sand

fronting the bays. Sudurfjorutangi is the E end of Sudhurffjorur, which extends W and is the W part of the tongue.

9.34 Hvanney, a small and hilly peninsula, is located at the SE extremity of Sudurfjorutangi, at the W side of the entrance channel. A light is shown from a tower, 8m high, standing near the

E extremity of this peninsula. A racon is situated at the light

tower. A reef, with depths of less than 1.8m over its inner part

and less than 5.5m over its outer part, extends up to about

200m NE of the light tower.

9.34 Several dangers lie in the approach to the entrance channel.

Einholtsklettar, formed by two islets joined together, is located

close S of Sudurfjorutangi and connected to it by a drying reef.

Einholtsbodi, a rock with a depth of 3m, lies about 1 mile

WSW of Hvanney Light and the sea breaks on it in bad weather. Sveinsbodi, a patch with a depth of 3.4m, lies 1 mile SSW

of Hvanney Light; Skerjagrunn, with a depth of 5m, lies 1.25

miles SSE of it. Borgeyjarbodi, a detached rock with a depth of

less than 2m, lies 1.75 miles E of Sveinsbodi. Hvanneyjarsker,

formed by two islets, lies 0.5 mile ESE of Sveinsbodi and

patches of foul ground lie close N and S of it.

9.34 Hellir, an island, is located 0.75 mile N of Hvanney. A light

is shown from a tower, 6m high, standing on its E side.

Skardsfjordur and Hornafjordur are separated from each other by a hilly projection. They are little frequented because of

the difficulty in navigating the entrance and the shallow channels inside them; local knowledge is essential.

9.35 Hornafjordur (Hofn) (64°15'N., 15°14'W.) (World

Port Index No. 480) includes the port of Hofn, which may

freeze during severely cold weather. It is a trading and fishing

station, and is situated at the S end of the projection which separates Hornafjordur from Skardsfjordur.

9.35 Tides—Currents.—The tides rise about 1.2m at springs and

0.9m at neaps.

9.35 Depths—Limitations.—Hofn is fronted by many quays and

wharves which are used extensively by fishing vessels; information on theze piers is given in the accompanying table. Vessels of up to 3,800 tons, 90 to 100m in length, and 5.5m draft

have been accommodated.

Hornafjordur—Berthing Information

Pier Length Depth

Alagarey East Quay 45m 5.5m

Hornafjordur

Hornafjordur

Hornafjordur
Sector 9. Iceland—East and South Coasts 187

Pub. 181

9.35 Aspect.—Several radio masts, some marked by red obstruction lights, stand near the station. The entrance channel is indicated by lighted range beacons.

9.35 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for vessels over 300 tons

and recommended for all vessels without local knowledge. The

harbor can be contacted by VHF channels 12 and 16.

9.35 Anchorage.—The best anchorage outside Hornafjardaros is

reported to be, in a depth of 13m, with Hvanney Light bearing

between 274° and 286°; the berth is reported to be uncomfortable but with good holding ground. An alternative berth lies

closer in, between the same bearings of Hvanney Light, with

Hellir Light bearing between 322° and 328°.

9.35 Inside the channel, anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of

5.5m, close to the NE side of Sudurfjortangi; however, the

holding ground is not good, the swinging room is restricted,

and the tidal current may attain a rate of up to 5 knots.

9.35 Caution.—The entrance channel is narrow and tortuous and

shifting sand banks lie in the approach.

9.35 Navigation is not without danger and is at times very difficult due to the strong tidal currents causing a continual shifting

of the off-lying sand.

9.36 Between Hornafjordur and Ingolfshofdi, 46 miles SW,

the coast consists of fairly wide coastal plains separated by

hills which descend to the water’s edge and are backed by

some of the highest mountains in Iceland. Still farther inland,

the summits of the mighty group of glaciers, having the common name of Vatnajokull, may be seen in very clear weather.

Lagoons, located in several places along this coast, were in all

probability at one time bays or inlets which have been enclosed

by the formation of narrow sandbanks.

9.36 Skinneyjarhofdi (64°14'N., 15°29'W.), a low and black island, is located 7.5 miles W of Hvanney. An isolated dangerous

rock lies 1 mile offshore, about 3.5 miles E of this island. A

sunken wreck, over which the depth was unknown (1968), and

a shoal, with a depth of 3.4m, lie about 1 mile S of this isolated

rock. Saevarholaklettu, a low islet, is located close inshore,

about 3.5 miles WSW of Skinneyjarhofdi; a conspicuous hummock stands on the mainland, N of this islet.

9.36 Borgarbodi, a rock with a depth of 3m, lies about 3 miles

ESE of Skinneyjarhofdi.

9.36 Myrabugur is the name given to the wide bight formed by the

slight recession of the coast lying between Stokksnes and Ingolfshofdi, 51 miles SW. Several small and unnavigable breaks

in the shore are located within the bight and can best be seen on

the chart.

9.36 Styrmissker and Hestgerdhissker, 1 mile ENE, are two detached drying rocks lying about 1 mile offshore, 16 miles

WSW of Hvanney Light. Halsasker, a drying reef nearly 1 mile

long, is located 2 miles NE of Styrmissker.

9.36 Hrollaugseyjar (64°02'N., 15°59'W.), consisting of three islets, is located 4.25 miles offshore, 22.5 miles NE of Ingolfshofdi. A light is shown from a tower, 16m high, standing on

the northeasternmost islet. A racon is situated at the light tower.

9.36 Tvisker, consisting of two islets, is located 4.5 miles offshore, 7.5 miles SW of Hrollaugseyjar. A reef, the outer end of

which dries, extends about 0.5 mile S from Tvisker.

9.36 The channels lying inshore of Tvisker and Hrollaugseyjar

are deep and free of dangers.

9.36 Ingolfshofdi (63°48'N., 16°38'W.), a headland 74m high,

appears from seaward as a flat hummock; it is steep on the seaward side but slopes gradually toward the mainland. A light is

shown from a tower, 10m high, standing on its E extremity. A

shoal, with a depth of 17m, lies 3 miles S of the headland.

South Coast

9.37 Several shelters have been established along parts of

the S coast of Iceland in case of shipwrecks. To aid persons in

reaching these shelters or nearby settlements, guide posts have

been erected, about 0.75 mile apart, on certain parts of this

coast. After landing, persons should find the nearest guide post

and continue according to the routes and directions that are

given in various languages.

9.37 Medhallands Bugur (63°40'N., 17°20'W.), an open bay, is

located between Ingolfshofdi and Myrnatangi, 45 miles SW.

The shores of the bay are broken in several places by the outlets of rivers and streams. They are also fringed in some places

by reefs and shoals. The whole of this coast is somewhat dangerous to approach, having no shelter of any kind. From seaward, it is difficult to make out the low coast against the high

land and snow-covered glaciers of the interior. At times, it has

not been visible until breakers were observed.

9.37 Anchorage.—Medhallands Bugur affords anchorage, but it

is not advised as the bottom is composed of soft sand and,

therefore, the holding ground is poor. Landing is very difficult

on account of the surf and the sand bars which have formed

along the coast.

9.37 Caution.—West of Ingolfshofdi, the W current sets strongly

into Medhallands Bugur and makes the coast very dangerous.

9.38 Skaftaros (63°40'N., 17°47'W.), the estuary of a large

glacial river, is located 31 miles WSW of Ingolfshofdi. During

spring and summer, it discharges a great volume of turbid water and silt. The tidal currents are very strong within the estuary

and during winter, it is generally filled with masses of ice. A

light is shown from a framework tower, 20m high, standing 1.5

miles SW of the estuary. A racon is situated at the light tower.

9.38 A racon is also situated about 1 mile inland at Skaftafellsfjara, 17 miles W of Ingolfshofdi.

9.38 Skardsfjara is located 9.25 miles SSW of Skaftaros. A light

is shown from a framework tower, 20m high, standing on the

point. A racon is situated at the light. 

9.38 Myrnatangi (63°28'N., 18°09'W.) is located 5.5 miles SW

of Skardsfjara (Skardhsfjara), at the mouth of Kudafjot

(Kudhafljot). The estuary has strong tidal currents and is often

Alagarey South Quay 75m 6.0m

Osland Quay 50m 6.0m

Krossey Quay 120m 5.5-6.3m

Iskantur Quay 40m 6.0m

Miikl-Trebryggja Quay 90m 4.0-6.0m

Braedslubryggja Quay 25m 6.0m

Hornafjordur—Berthing Information

Pier Length Depth
188 Sector 9. Iceland—East and South Coasts 

Pub. 181

filled with ice in winter. The lower reaches form a delta of islets and lagoons several miles in extent. 

9.38 A light is shown from a tower, 18m high, standing at Alvidruhamrar, 4.5 miles W of Myrnatangi. A racon is situated at

the light tower.

9.38 A beacon is reported to stand close to the highest part of the

coast, 3 miles WSW of Alvidruhamrar Light.

9.38 Kotlutangi (63°23'N., 18°44'W.), the southernmost point of

Iceland, is located 11 miles WSW of Alvidruhamrar Light. It is a

flat stretch of land extending 2 miles S from Hjorleifshofdi, a detached hill, 220m high. This hill, which has a beacon standing on

its summit, is reported to be very conspicuous from the SE.

9.38 Myrdalsvik (63°25'N., 19°00'W.), a small bight, is formed

by an abrupt bend in the coastline, 8 miles W of Kotlutangi.

9.38 Reynisfjall, a narrow mountain, stands at the W side of the

bight and rises steeply from the water’s edge. A beacon stands

on its S summit and a group of radio masts stands close within

its S extremity. Hatta, a mountain 510m high, stands close E of

the N end of Reynisfjall. Reynir, a village with a church, is situated on the W side of Reynisfjall.

9.38 Reynisdrangar, a small chain of narrow pinnacles, lies close

inshore, S of Reynisfjall. The highest and largest, 65m high, is

located close to the S end of the chain, but except when closeto, they cannot be distinguished from the coast behind them. A

rock, with a depth of less than 2m, lies about 0.5 mile SSW of

the largest pinnacle.

9.39 Vik (63°25'N., 19°01'W.) is a settlement at the head

of Myrdalsvik. There is a conspicuous red-roofed church, with

a white tower in the village. Vik does not have a harbor. Beause

of the sand bars and the continous heavy swell off the settlement make landing a craft at Vik almost impossible. For this

reason practically no fishing is done by the inhabitants, and the

village is never visited by shipping. 

9.39 During calm weather or during offshore winds, temporary

anchorage may be obtained with good holding ground, in a

depth of 13m, close E of the S extremity of Reynisfjall; local

knowledge is essential.

9.40 Dyrholaey (63°24'N., 19°08'W.), located 3.25 miles

W of Vik, is an isolated headland, 118m high. It terminates in a

steep wall-like formation, which projects S from the coast;

when viewed from E or W, it can be readily identified by two

gate-like openings. A light is shown from a tower with a dwelling, 13m high, standing on the SW end of this headland.

9.40 Lundadrangur is the outermost and largest of several rocky

pinnacles, 33 to 55m high, which are located within about 0.75

mile of the light tower. 

9.40 Areas to be avoided begin at Lundadrangur and continue

ESE to about 8 miles S of Surtsey Island, then continue ENE

toward Reykjanes. These areas are best viewed on the chart. 

9.40 A prominent church stands at Skeidflotur, 2.5 miles NW of

Dyrholaey.

9.40 Myrdalsjokull, a large and flat glacier 1,400m high, is located 10 miles N of Dyrholaey. Eyjarfjallajokull, another large

glacier, rises to a height of 1,670m about 19 miles NW of

Dyrholaey and has two prominent peaks.

9.41 Markarfljot (63°32'N., 20°05'W.) flows, along with

another river, into the sea through a delta, composed of shale

and rubble, located 27 miles WNW of Dyrholaey. Many glacier rivers and streams drain into the section of coast between

them. The shoreline is completely open to onshore winds and,

except in calm weather, there is usually a heavy surf. Behind

the beach, the land consists of low and swampy grassland

which extends to the high foothills of glaciers. Vessels invariably give this section of coast a wide berth.

9.41 Petursey, a detached hummock 273m high, stands 5 miles

NW of Dyrholaey; it is prominent, with a beacon standing on

the summit. Eyvindarholar Church, a building with a spire,

Reynisdranger—Rocks off the coast in the vicinity of Vik

Part of Reynisdranger from ashore

Vik
Sector 9. Iceland—East and South Coasts 189

Pub. 181

stands 14 miles WNW of Dyrholaey and is conspicuous from

offshore. Holtsos, a large tidal lagoon almost enclosed by a

spit, is located 4 miles WNW of the church. Steinafjall, a plateau rises to a height of 600m, close N of Holtsos and is reported to be radar conspicuous.

9.41 Bakkafjara Light (63°32'N., 20°09'W.) is shown from a

building standing 2 miles W of the Markarfljot delta. A racon

is situated at the light structure.

9.42 Vestmannaeyjar (63°26'N., 20°14'W.) is a small

group of islands and rocks approximately 16 miles SW of the

Icelandic coast. 

9.42 The group lies on an extension of the coastal bank, over

which there are depths of less than 80m. The islands are

especially subject to gales, often severe, which are most

frequent in the winter months and predominantly from the E.

The channel lying N of the group is used extensively by both

eastbound and westbound vessels.

9.43 Vestmannaeyjahofn (Heimaey Harbor) (63°26'N.,

20°17'W.) (World Port Index No. 510) is situated in the NE

part of Heimaey and used mainly by fishing vessels.

Dyrholaey from E

Dyrholaey Light

Vestmannaeyjahofnr—Berthing Information

Pier Length Depth

Binnabryggia Quay 127m 8.0m

Skai Quay 90m 7.0m

Fridarhofn Quay 210m 8.0m

Eldi Quay 150m 8.0m

Nausthamar Quay 150m 8.0m
190 Sector 9. Iceland—East and South Coasts 

Pub. 181

9.43 Tides—Currents.—The tides rise about 2.7m at springs and

2m at neaps.

9.43 Depths—Limitations.—The depth at the harbor entrance

between the breakwaters is 9.0m and at the depth approaches

to the quays is 8.0m. 

9.43 Vessels up to 5,000 dwt and 7m draft can be accommodated.

9.43 Aspect.—A breakwater, which formerly projected from the

S side of the entrance, was mostly engulfed by the flow of lava

from Helgafell (1973). Range lights indicate the narrow entrance fairway; a lighted buoy is reported to be moored 360m

ENE of the entrance. The inner harbor is protected by Horgeyrargardhur, a mole which extends about 0.1 mile S across the

reefs on the N side of the entrance. There is a light at its head. 

9.43 Pilotage.—The port and the pilots can be contacted on VHF

channel 12 or 16.

9.43 Pilotage is compulsory and is available 24 hours. Vessels

should send request for a pilot at least 1 hour in advance

through Vestmannaeyjar (TFV). Pilots board between Heimaey

Vestmannaeyjahofn (Heimaey Harbor)

Vestmannaeyjahofn (Heimaey Harbor)
Sector 9. Iceland—East and South Coasts 191

Pub. 181

and Bjarnarey Island except in SE gales, when the pilot will

board to the N of Heimaey. Large vessels must enter at HW.

9.43 Anchorage.—Vessels may anchor, in depths of 28 to 34m,

about 0.5 mile N of the harbor entrance. The holding ground is

good, but the berth is exposed to W and N winds. Care should

be taken to avoid the submarine cables and the pipeline which

extends to the mainland. 

9.43 When the wind is S and SE, anchoring is possible N of the

harbor.

9.43 Caution.—Anchoring and fishing are prohibited within the

submarine cable and pipeline area, which lies between and the

mainland NE. Also, attention is drawn to a submarine cable

that makes its landing close W of Heimklettur. 

9.43 The harbor is liable to be congested with fishing vessels and

turning room is restricted.

9.44 Heimaey (63°26'N., 20°16'W.), the largest and highest island of the group, lies with its N extremity located 5 miles

SSW of Bakkafjara Light. Its N coast consists of volcanic,

rocky cliffs that rise steeply from the sea to heights of about

280m. A light is shown from the E extremity of the island.

Storhofdhi, the S extremity of the island, consists of cliffs,

120m high. A light is shown from a building, 7m high, standing on the cliff top.

9.44 The coastline of the island is almost completely fringed with

foul ground. In addition, volcanic eruptions have taken place

on Heimaey and formed several underwater obstructions.

9.44 Caution.—Numerous isolated patches of foul ground surround this group of islands and may best be seen on the chart.

Submarine cables and pipelines lie between Heimaey and the

mainland. Submarine cables also extend seaward from the S

part of the island. These may best be seen on the chart. 

9.45 Geirfuglasker (63°19'N., 20°30'W.), a steep-sided islet 58m high, is located 7.5 miles SW of the S extremity of Heimaey. A detached pointed rock and several others, which are

nearly awash, lie on its S side. A light is shown from a tower,

3m high, standing on the summit of the islet.

9.45 Surtsey (63°18'N., 20°36'W.), a small island with two conical peaks, is located 3 miles WSW of Geirfuglasker and was

formed by an active volcano which erupted in 1963. It is encircled by a bank, with depths of less than 73m, which extends up

to 0.75 mile seaward. Shoals, with depths of less than 20m, lie

on this bank and were formed by further volcanic action in

1965 and 1966. Vessels should give this island and bank a wide

berth. Special permission is required from the Icelandic Nature

Conservation Agency to land on this island. All shooting is

prohibited within a 2,000m zone around the island. 

9.45 Caution.—Anchoring is prohibited within the submarine cable and pipeline area, which begins approximately 7.5 miles

SSE of Surtsey and continues SSE for 17. 5 miles. 

9.45 Hellisey, a grass-covered islet, is located 2.75 miles SW of

the S extremity of Heimaey. It rises to a height of 130m at the

NE end and is fronted by dangerous rocks. 

9.45 A group of islets and rocks, fronted by foul ground, extends

up to 2.5 miles SW of Hellisey and vessels are cautioned

against passing between the island and this group of dangers.

9.45 Sudhurey, a grass-covered islet, is located 1 mile SW of the

S extremity of Heimaey. It has a conical summit at the center

which attains a height of 160m. Several rocks lie close off its S

side.

9.45 Alsey, an islet 143m high, is located 2 miles W of the SW

extremity of Heimaey. Brandur, an islet 89m high, is located

close S of Alsey and, when seen from E or W, appears as two

islets. The narrow passage lying between Alsey and Brandur

should not be used as it is foul. Three patches of foul ground,

over which the sea breaks in heavy weather, are reported to lie

about 1.5 miles SW of Brandur.

9.45 Breki, a rocky patch with a depth of 11m, lies about 1 mile N

of Alsey. Thorsteinsbodhi, a patch with a depth of 21m, lies 3.5

miles W of Breki. The sea is reported to break over both of

these patches in heavy weather.

9.46 Einidrangur, two small islets, 32m high, is located 8

miles W of Heimaey. Two rocks lie close N of it and several

shoals lie in the vicinity. 

9.46 Thridrangar, located 6 miles NW of Heimaey, consists of

three rocky islets. The southernmost islet is the highest and attains a height of 39m. A light is shown from a tower, 4m high,

standing on Thridrangar. Foul ground, shoals and a group of

dangerous rocks extend up to 1.5 miles W of Thridrangar.

9.46 Faxasker, a small islet 9m high, lies 0.25 mile NNE of the

NE extremity of Heimaey. Rocks and reefs extend for a considerable distance both NW and SE of Faxasker, but Faxasund,

the narrow channel lying between Faxasker and Heimaey is

clear with depths of 17 to 22m. A light is shown from a framework tower standing on the roof of a refuge hut at the center of

Faxasker.

9.46 Ellidaey, a small island, is located 2 miles NE of Heimaey. It

has a pronounced summit, 144m high, at the N end. A shoal

patch, Rofubodi (Haeringsklakkur), with a depth of 12m, lies

about 2 miles ENE of Ellidaey. 

9.46 Caution.—Local magnetic anomalies have been reported to

exist 4 miles NW and between 1 and 2 miles NE of Ellidaey.

9.46 Bjarnarey, a grass-covered islet 163m high, is located 1 mile

SSW of Ellidaey. It is steep-to except on its N side, where a

reef, on which the sea breaks, extends NNE for 0.25 mile.

When the wind is against the tidal current, a race extending towards Ellidaey may be formed .

9.47 Loftstadhaholl (63°48'N., 20°54'W.), a dark and

prominent knoll 13m high, is located close to the coast, 25

miles NW of Bakkafjara Light. A beacon stands on its summit,

which is located 3 miles NW of Thjorsaros, the mouth of the

Thjorsa River.

9.47 Knarraros Light (63°49'N., 20°58'W.) is shown from a

tower, 22m high, standing 3 miles NW of Loftstadhaholl. A racon is situated at the light tower.

9.47 The coast between Bakkafjara Light and Knarraros Light

forms the seaward end of an extensive, low valley, lying on the

W side of the glacial areas of Eyjafjallajokull and Myrdalsjokull. Through this valley flow some of the largest glacial

rivers in Iceland. There are very few landmarks, though some

of the higher mountain peaks behind the coast may be observed.

9.47 Caution.—Several isolated patches of foul ground lie up to

22 miles seaward of this section of the coast and may best be

seen on the chart.
192 Sector 9. Iceland—East and South Coasts 

Pub. 181

9.48 Stokkseyri (63°50'N., 21°05'W.), a small trading settlement, is situated 2.5 miles NW of Knarraros Light. The

small harbor lies between the reefs and is used by fishing vessels. It has depths up to 3.7m in the outer part and 1.8m in the

inner part. A concrete jetty, 100m long, has a depth of 2.1m

alongside the head. Local knowledge is required. Temporary

anchorage may be obtained outside the harbor in calm weather,

but it is quite unsheltered. 

9.48 Eyrarbakki (63°52'N., 21°09'W.), a small trading settlement, is situated 3 miles NW of Stokkseyri. A conspicuous

church with a spire can be seen from seaward between the

houses of the settlement. The small harbor lies between the

reefs and is used by fishing vessels. Two shallow entrance

channels lead into the outer harbor; local knowledge is required. There are depths of 3 to 5m in the outer part of the harbor. A jetty projects 180m from the E end of the outer harbor

and has a depth of 1.2m alongside its head. At times, the reefs

break without warning and the surf may be so heavy that it is

impossible to enter the harbor. Temporary anchorage during

good weather may be obtained, in a depth of 22m, good holding ground, outside the harbor. 

9.49 Hafnarvik (63°52'N., 21°18'W.), a wide bay, indents

the coast between Eyrarbakki and Hafnarnes, 5 miles W. Olfusa, a river, discharges into this bay at its E side. Thorlakshofn

Light is shown from a tower, 8m high, standing on Hafnarnes,

the W entrance point of the bay. During S gales, the sea breaks

on a shoal spit which extends about 0.5 mile E from Hafnarnes.

9.49 Thorlakshofn (63°51'N., 21°23'W.), a fishing station, is situated at the W side of the bay. The harbor is protected by two

breakwaters which form an entrance 70m wide. There are

depths of 6.2m. The minimum charted depth between the entrance and the main berth is 3.4m. A lighted range indicates the

approach channel but local knowledge is required. An Lshaped pier has a depth of 5.5m alongside its head and the inner ends of both breakwaters are quayed. Vessels may anchor,

in depths of 11 to 15m, good holding ground, outside the harbor.

9.49 Selvogur (63°49'N., 21°39'W.), a small settlement, is situated 8 miles WSW of Thorlakshofn. A light is shown from a

tower, 15m high, standing at the settlement. A racon is situated

at the light tower. A conspicuous church, with a small spire,

stands at Strandar, 1.5 miles NW of the light tower. The coast

between the light tower and the church is fringed with reefs

which extend up to about 0.5 mile offshore. It is reported that

breakers have been observed in an area lying 0.75 mile S of the

light tower.

9.50 Herdisarvik (63°51'N., 21°47'W.), an open bay, is

entered W of Selvogur. It affords temporary anchorage during

offshore winds, but several rocks lie off the shores and local

knowledge is required.

9.50 Caution.— A local magnetic anomaly, up to 4°E, has been

observed off this part of the coast.

9.50 Krisuvikurberg Light (63°50'N., 22°05'W.) is shown from

a tower, 5m high, standing on a stretch of steep and rocky

coast, 11.5 miles W of Selvogur.

9.50 Hopsnes (63°50'N., 22°25'W.), a lava-strewn headland, is

located 9 miles W of Krisuvikurberg Light. A light is shown

from a tower, 6m high, standing on its S extremity.

9.50 Jarngerdharstadhavik, a small bay with rocky shores, is loThorlakshofn

Grindavik
Sector 9. Iceland—East and South Coasts 193

Pub. 181

cated on the W side of Hopsnes. A rock, awash, lies off the

edge of the shore, about 0.5 mile W of Hopsnes Light. A shoal,

with a depth of 2.4m, lies at the outer end of a spit that extends

about 0.25 mile SE from the NW shore of the bay. Temporary

anchorage may be taken, in a depth of 15m, within the bay.

However, the berth is exposed to winds between SE and SW,

which raise a heavy swell, and local knowledge is required.

9.51 Grindavik (63°50'N., 22°27'W.), a small fishing

station, is situated 1 mile NW of the S extremity of Hopsnes.

The harbor is entered by a narrow channel, which is indicated

by sets of lighted range beacons, and is protected by

breakwaters. The inner W breakwater has berths on its N side

with depths of 5 to 7.2m alongside. A jetty in the E side of the

harbor is 170m long, with a depth of 7m alongside the head,

reducing to 2m at the foot. Local knowledge is required. There

are quays, with depths of 2.7 to 3.7m alongside, which are used

by fishing vessels. Grindavik is a subport for Hafnarfjordur

(see paragraph 8.10). 

9.51 Two radio masts, conspicuous from seaward, stand at

elevations of 200m and 256m, 2 miles NW of Grindavik.

Grindavik approach Grindavik
Pub. 181

Glossaries 195

Glossaries DANISH

DANISH English

A

ankerplads ........................................................... anchorage

B

bjaerg .................................................................... mountain

brae............................................................................ glacier

bugt ................................................................................ bay

D

dal............................................................................... valley

F

fjaeld ..................................................................... mountain

fjord.............................................................................. fjord

flak .............................................................................. shoal

G

gletscher.................................................................... glacier

grund ........................................................................... shoal

H

halvo..................................................................... peninsula

hav....................................................................................ses

havn........................................................................... harbor

holm .............................................................................. islet

I

is...................................................................................... ice

K

kap................................................................................ cape

klippe ....................................................................cliff, rock

kyst............................................................................... coast

L

lille............................................................................... .little

lobet ........................................................................ channel

N

naes .............................................................................. point

nord............................................................................. north

nordre....................................................................... northen

O

o (oer, oerne).............................................................. island

odde ............................................................................. point

ost .................................................................................. east

oster, ostre................................................................. eastern

S

skaer, skjaer ...................................................................rock

so................................................................................... lake

sondre .................................................................... southern

store ............................................................................. great

strand .......................................................................... beach

strommen .................................................................. stream

sund............................................................................ sound

syd............................................................................... south

T

tangen .............................................................. narrow point

V

vest................................................................................ west

vestern..................................................................... western

vig ................................................................................ cove

DANISH English
Pub. 181

196 Glossaries

GREENLANDIC (KALAALLISUT)

GREENLANDIC English

A

akuliariseq......................lowland between two higher tracts

amitsuarsuk .................................. a narrow, uncommon bay 

angmagssalik..........................place where there are capelin

angmagssat.................................capelin (Mallotus villosus)

angmagssavik...........................................place with capelin

anoritok ...................................... place that is always windy

aqitseq ..........................................................without a name

auarkat................................................fiord with much color

E

eqaluk..................................................trout (Salmo alpinus)

I

igdlo ............................................................... Eskimo house

ikerasak ........................................................................ strait

ikermiut..................................................inhabitants of strait

ikerssuaq ........................................................the great strait

iketeq.................................................... shallow water, shoal

ilua ..................................................................inner, interior

iluileq .................................. peninsula resembling an island

imeg ....................................................................fresh water

inigssalik ............................................... a good place to live

inugsuit ...................................................................... cairns

isortoq .......................................... a muddy channel, muddy

iterdlak ................................................................ a wide bay

itivdleq ................................................. a low, shallow place

ivnaq...................................................................... precipice

K

kangeq.............................................................a promontory

kangerdluara..................................................... a small fjord

kangerdlugssuaq................................................ a large fjord

kangerdlugluk ....................................small dangerous fjord

kangerujuk ..................promontory with several projections

kangikitsoq.................................................a small headland

karrat ......................................... the extremity of something

kialineq................................................................ a hot place

kingigtit................................................................ high lands

kitdleq ..................................................................... seaward

kitsigit .................................................. the outermost island

M

miut (suffix) ..................................the inhabitants of a place

N

nagtoralik ............................................... a place with eagles

napasorsuak .......................................... the big upright land

narssaq .............................................................. a level place

naujatalik ..................................................a place with gulls

niaqoq ...................................................the head of a person

nuk ...........................................................point, promontory

nuna .............................................................................. land

nunatak ................................... land protruding from glacier

nunatsuk.................................................................little land

P

pikiutdleq............................. low place, covered at high tide

puissoirtoq ..............................where ice rises to the surface

putulik........................................................place with a hole

Q

qaqaq..................................................................... mountain

qasigissat...................................................... the spotted seal

qasingortoq ........................................... the much faded one

qavdlunaq............................................................. white man

qeqertaq ..................................................................... island

qeqertarsuaq....................................................... large island

qipinguaq .............................................that which is warped

qiteq .............................................................. the middle one

S

sangmissoq ................that which can be seen from all sides

sarfaq ........................................................................ current

sermiligaq ................................... fjord with several glaciers

sermilik ...................................................place with glaciers

sigssak.................................................................... the shore

sioraq ............................................................. sand or gravel

supertoq .......................................................the windy place

T

takisseq ............................................................ a dark island

taseq............................................................................ a lake

taterakasit................................... nesting place of kittiwakes

taterat ............................................................ kittiwake gulls

tugtilik................................................. a place with reindeer

tunua ............................................................. a back channel

U

uivak ......................................................a cape to be skirted

umanaq ........................................................... heart-shaped

upernarsuak.......................a good place to live in the spring

utorqaq............................................................................ old

GREENLANDIC English
Pub. 181

Glossaries 197

ICELANDIC

ICELANDIC English

A

a.........................................................................river, stream

all ........................................................ narrow deep channel

austur.............................................................................. east

B

baer................................................................................ farm

bakki.............................................................. bank of a river

bard (bord) ........................................................ verge, brink

bjarg ......................................................................rock, cliff

bodhi (bodhar).............................rock, awash or submerged

borg (borgir)................................................ town, rocky hill

botn ............................................................... head of a fjord

breidhur..............................................................broad, wide

breki ..........................................................................breaker

brekka............................................................. hillside, slope

bugur .....................................................................bay, bight

D

dalur ............................................................................valley

djup ...............................................................................deep

drangur (drangar) ................................. isolated rock or cliff

E

ey (eyjar) .....................................................................island

eidhi ......................................................................... isthmus

eyri .......................................................... gravel or sand spit

eystri.......................................................................... eastern

F

fell, fjall (fjoll) ............................................mountain or hill

fjara .............................................................. low tide, beach

fjordhur (firdhir)............................................................fjord

fljot....................................................................... large river

floi..........................................................................large bay

foss ......................................................................... waterfall

G

gardhurinn.....................................................................mole

gerdhi ...........................................................................fence

gill ...................................................................ravine, gulley

gja........................................................................ fissure, rift

grunn ................................................................... shoal bank

H

hals ............................................................isthmus, long hill

hamar .....................................................................precipice

heidhi ...........................................................................heath

hlidh .................................................... slope, mountain-side

hnjukur ..........................................................................peak

hofdhi ..................................................................... headland

hofn (hafnir)............................................................... harbor

holmi, holmur.................................................................islet

hop .............................................................. landlocked inlet

hraun ...................................................................... lava field

hvammur....................................................................hollow

hvoll ................................................................................ hill

hyrggur..........................................................................ridge

hyrna ............................................................................. peak

I

innri...............................................................................inner

J

jokulsa................................................................glacial river

jokull..........................................................................glacier

K

kaupstadhur...................................................................town

kirkja..........................................................................church

klettur.................................................................... rock, cliff

kollur.........................................................................summit

L

laxa....................................................................salmon river

leir......................................................................... mud, clay

lending ............................................................ landing place

litli................................................................................. little

lon .....................................................................inlet, lagoon

M

muli........................................................................ headland

myri............................................................................swamp

N

nef, nes..........................................................................point

nordhur......................................................................... north

nupur............................................................................. peak

nyrdhri ................................................................... northerly

O

oddi ................................................................tongue of land

os........................................................................ river mouth

pollur..............................................................................pool

R

reykur......................................................................... smoke

ICELANDIC English
Pub. 181 

198 Glossaries

rif.................................................................................... reef

S

sandur......................................................................sand flat

skagi ............................................................. large peninsula

skeidh ...................................................................... flat land

sker..................................................................... reef, skerry

sljetta.............................................................................plain

standhur......................................................place, parsonage

steinn............................................................................ stone

stor ................................................................................great

strond ................................................................beach, shore

sudhur...........................................................................south

sydhri .....................................................................southerly

T

tangi ................................................................. narrow point

tindur.............................................................................peak

ICELANDIC English

V

vardha ....................................................................... beacon

vatn ................................................................................ lake

vestri ........................................................................ western

vestur ............................................................................ west

vik ..........................................................................bay, cove

viti........................................................................ lighthouse

vogur...................................................................... bay, inlet

vollur (vellir)................................................................fields

Y

ytri.................................................................................outer

ICELANDIC English
199

 Pub. 181

How to use the Index—Gazetteer

Geographic names of navigational features are generally those used by the nation having sovereignty and are listed

alphabetically. Diacritical marks, such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to specific letters in certain foreign

languages, are not used in the interest of typographical simplicity.

Geographic names or their spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political status of an area by the United States

Government. Positions are approximate and are intended merely as locators to facilitate reference to the charts.

To use as a Gazetteer note the position and Sector number of the feature and refer to the Chart Information diagram for the

Sector. Plot the approximate position of the feature on this diagram and note the approximate chart number.

To use as an Index of features described in the text note the paragraph number at the right. To locate this feature on the best

scale chart use the Gazetteer procedure above. 

Index—Gazetteer

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

A

AALUIARTIK 66 55 N 33 52 W 6.28

AAPPILATTOQ 60 08 N 44 18 W 1.6

AASIAAT 68 43 N 52 53 W 4.4

AEDEY 66 05 N 22 40 W 8.56

AGDLUMERSAT 62 48 N 50 18 W 2.14

AGGAS O 67 23 N 33 13 W 6.29

AGPAT 70 54 N 51 55 W 4.26

AGTORSSUIT 64 03 N 52 07 W 2.20

AKIA 60 40 N 46 13 W 1.22

AKRANES 64 19 N 22 05 W 8.20

AKUGDLIT 68 35 N 53 30 W 3.23

AKUREYRI 65 41 N 18 05 W 8.88

ALAKRATIAK FJORD 80 40 N 65 47 W 5.38

ALASKER 65 18 N 22 56 W 8.36

ALFTAFJORDUR 65 02 N 22 38 W 8.34

ALFTAFJORDUR 66 03 N 22 58 W 8.55

ALFTANES 64 28 N 22 10 W 8.21

ALLUITSUP PAA 60 28 N 45 34 W 1.17

AMANGA 66 14 N 37 36 W 6.16

AMANGAQ 65 46 N 36 58 W 6.23

AMDRUPS O 74 45 N 57 30 W 5.14

AMMASSALIK O 65 45 N 37 40 W 6.17

AMMASSIVIK 60 36 N 45 24 W 1.17

AMORSINGUAQ 60 57 N 48 06 W 2.4

ANDRES LAND 73 30 N 26 00 W 7.15

ANGISIT 60 38 N 46 43 W 1.30

ANGISSOQ 59 57 N 45 07 W 1.12

ANGISSUNGSUAK 63 57 N 51 45 W 2.19

ANGMAGSSALIK 65 36 N 37 37 W 6.19

ANGMARQUA 72 36 N 55 17 W 5.5

ANTARCTICS SUND 73 06 N 25 23 W 7.11

ARDENCAPLE FJORD 75 20 N 21 00 W 7.25

ARFERFIK 62 00 N 49 23 W 2.11

ARNARFJORDUR 65 51 N 24 00 W 8.44

ARPATSIVIK 60 47 N 45 55 W 1.22

ARSUK 61 10 N 48 27 W 2.7

ARSUK FJORD 61 06 N 48 21 W 2.6

ARSUK O 61 09 N 48 22 W 2.6

ASTRUP FJORD 81 55 N 30 40 W 7.41

ATA SUND 69 40 N 50 55 W 4.16

ATANGMIK 64 48 N 52 11 W 3.3

AUGISSUNGUAQ 63 57 N 51 45 W 2.19

AUGPILAGTOQ 60 08 N 44 18 W 1.6

AUGPILAGTOQ 72 53 N 55 36 W 5.7

AVARQAT KANGERLUA FJORD 61 17 N 42 55 W 6.4

AVATDLEG 60 43 N 47 15 W 1.34

AVATDLERSSUAQ 59 49 N 43 35 W 1.3

AVATDLIANGUAK 60 43 N 47 22 W 1.36

AVATDLINGUAQ 60 43 N 47 22 W 1.36

AVATLEK 60 41 N 47 04 W 1.33

AXARFJORDUR 66 13 N 16 45 W 8.94

B

BAKKAFJARA LIGHT 63 32 N 20 09 W 9.41

BAKKAGERDHI 65 32 N 13 49 W 9.8

BALKASTADANES 65 24 N 21 02 W 8.73

BANCROFT BUGT 78 47 N 70 16 W 5.34

BELGICA BANK 78 20 N 15 00 W 7.36

BERUFJORDUR 64 42 N 14 20 W 9.28

BILDUDALUR 65 41 N 23 36 W 8.45

BITRUFJORDUR 65 29 N 21 20 W 8.72

BJARGTANGAR 65 30 N 24 32 W 8.38

BJARNARFJORDUR 65 46 N 21 23 W 8.67

BJARNARNES 65 45 N 21 21 W 8.68

BJARNEYJAR 65 16 N 22 52 W 8.36

BJORLINGS O 76 43 N 72 33 W 5.20

BJORNBUGT 66 04 N 35 55 W 6.25

BLACK REEF 68 06 N 31 58 W 6.30

BLAKKNES 65 38 N 24 20 W 8.41

BLONDUOS 65 40 N 20 18 W 8.69

BLOSSEVILLE KYST 68 44 N 26 20 W 6.33

BOLUNGAVIK 66 10 N 23 14 W 8.52

BONSALL OER 79 10 N 66 39 W 5.35

BONTEKOE O 73 07 N 21 20 W 7.16

BORGARFJORDUR 65 33 N 13 46 W 9.8

BORGARNES 64 32 N 21 56 W 8.23

BORGFJORDEN 76 40 N 22 00 W 7.31

BREDEBUGT 69 17 N 50 59 W 4.16

BREDEFJORD 60 46 N 46 47 W 1.33

BREIDAFJORDUR 65 14 N 24 20 W 8.28

BREIDDALSVIK 64 46 N 13 55 W 9.27

BREIDDALSVIK 64 47 N 14 01 W 9.27

BREIDHAFJORDHUR 65 14 N 24 20 W 8.28

BRIMNES 64 12 N 21 50 W 8.14

BRONLUNDS GRAVE 79 08 N 19 12 W 7.37

BRUNAVIK 65 32 N 13 41 W 9.9

BUDAREYRI 65 02 N 14 13 W 9.23

BUDIR 64 56 N 14 01 W 9.25

BYLOT SUND 76 30 N 69 30 W 5.21

C

CAIRN PYNT 78 31 N 72 29 W 5.34

CAMP LLOYD 66 58 N 50 57 W 3.13

CANNING LAND 71 40 N 22 12 W 7.8

CAPE BURNIL 66 32 N 53 34 W 3.15

CAPE LAWRENCE 80 21 N 69 35 W 5.37

CAREY OER 76 47 N 72 58 W 5.20

CASS FJORD 80 05 N 64 32 W 5.36

CHRISTIANSHAAB 68 49 N 51 11 W 4.13

CLAVERING O 74 15 N 21 05 W 7.18

COMANCHE BUGT 65 02 N 40 18 W 6.13

COPELANDS FJORD 74 16 N 22 02 W 7.20

CROZIER O 80 30 N 67 11 W 5.38

D

DALATANGI 65 16 N 13 34 W 9.14

DALLAS BUGT 79 05 N 68 00 W 5.35

DALVIK 65 58 N 18 31 W 8.84

DANEBORG 74 18 N 20 13 W 7.21

DANELLS FJORD 60 51 N 43 09 W 6.3
200 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 181

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

DANMARK FJORD 81 10 N 22 45 W 7.40

DANMARKSHAVN 76 46 N 18 45 W 7.32

DANNEBROGS O 65 18 N 39 34 W 6.14

DAVY SUND 72 00 N 22 00 W 7.9

DECEPTION O 67 37 N 32 54 W 6.29

DEPOT O 82 30 N 50 30 W 5.45

DIGRANES 66 03 N 14 44 W 9.3

DISTANT CAPE 83 10 N 46 05 W 5.47

DJUPAHLEIN 65 59 N 21 20 W 8.66

DJUPAVIK 65 57 N 21 34 W 8.67

DJUPIVOGUR 64 40 N 14 17 W 9.30

DODEMANDSBUGTEN 74 07 N 20 52 W 7.18

DOVE BUGT 76 30 N 19 30 W 7.29

DRONNING LOUISE O 60 21 N 43 15 W 6.2

DROWN BUGT 76 52 N 70 48 W 5.24

DUC D'ORLEANS LAND 77 50 N 22 40 W 7.35

DUNDAS FJELD 76 34 N 68 53 W 5.22

DYRAFJORDUR 65 57 N 23 51 W 8.47

DYRHOLAEY 63 24 N 19 08 W 9.40

E

EGEDESMINDE 68 43 N 52 53 W 4.4

EGGERS ISLAND 59 51 N 44 02 W 1.3

EIDISVIK 66 16 N 14 51 W 9.2

ELDEYJARBODHI 63 29 N 23 48 W 8.3

ELLA O 72 51 N 25 00 W 7.11

ELLIDAEY 65 09 N 22 48 W 8.32

EQALUGAARSUIT 60 37 N 45 55 W 1.31

ERIK DEN RODES O 65 47 N 36 18 W 6.25

ERIK S. HENIUS LAND 81 45 N 13 40 W 7.38

ESKIFJORDUR 65 04 N 14 01 W 9.22

ESKIMONAES 74 05 N 21 17 W 7.19

ETAH 78 19 N 72 36 W 5.33

EYJAFJORDUR 66 10 N 18 30 W 8.82

EYRARBAKKI 63 52 N 21 09 W 9.48

EYRI, 66 01 N 22 55 W 8.55

F

FAERABAKUR 64 46 N 13 32 W 9.26

FAERINGE NORDHAVN 67 40 N 53 34 W 3.20

FAERINGEHAVN 63 42 N 51 33 W 2.18

FASKRUDSFJORDUR 64 54 N 13 48 W 9.24

FAXAFLOI 64 08 N 22 40 W 8.5

FINNEFJELD 65 16 N 52 09 W 3.2

FISKEFJORD 64 43 N 52 08 W 3.3

FISKEMESTERENS HAVN 66 01 N 53 28 W 3.11

FISKENAES FJORD 63 05 N 50 41 W 2.15

FLATEY 65 22 N 22 55 W 8.36

FLATEY 66 10 N 17 52 W 8.91

FLATEYRI 66 03 N 23 31 W 8.49

FONTUR 66 23 N 14 32 W 8.101

FREDERICK E. HYDE FJORD 83 10 N 30 00 W 7.44

FREDERIKSDAL 60 00 N 44 39 W 1.6

FREDERIKSDAL 60 00 N 44 40 W 1.11

FREDERIKSHAAB UMANAK 61 46 N 49 36 W 2.11

FREDERIKSHAABS GLACIER 62 29 N 50 19 W 2.13

FREDERIKSHAABS ISBLINK 62 29 N 50 19 W 2.13

FREDERIKSHAB 62 00 N 49 40 W 2.12

FREEDENS BUGT 75 01 N 18 00 W 7.25

FROSNEBUGT 75 07 N 17 45 W 7.27

G

GAEL HAMKES BUGT 74 00 N 20 00 W 7.18

GARDHSKAGI 64 05 N 22 42 W 8.4

GARDSKAGI 64 05 N 22 42 W 8.4

GEIRFUGLASKER 63 19 N 20 30 W 9.45

GELDINGANES 66 09 N 18 01 W 8.89

GEOLOGFJORD 73 35 N 24 40 W 7.14

GERDISTANGI 64 01 N 22 21 W 8.8

GERMANIA LAND 77 00 N 19 00 W 7.33

GERPIR 65 05 N 13 30 W 9.19

GIESECKES ISFJORD 73 37 N 56 00 W 5.9

GLETTINGANES 65 31 N 13 37 W 9.9

GODFRED HANSEN O 76 26 N 20 55 W 7.30

GODTHAB GOLF 74 06 N 22 00 W 7.19

GRAAHS FJORD 63 24 N 41 17 W 6.9

GRAAHS OER 65 09 N 39 39 W 6.14

GRAEDEFJORD 63 18 N 51 06 W 2.16

GRANDJEANS FJORD 75 00 N 21 30 W 7.24

GRIFFENFELDS O 62 58 N 41 30 W 6.8

GRIMSEY 66 32 N 18 00 W 8.90

GRINDAVIK 63 50 N 22 27 W 9.51

GRIVEL BUGT 68 32 N 27 40 W 6.33

GRONNE EJLAND 68 50 N 51 55 W 4.12

GRONNEDAL 61 14 N 48 06 W 2.8

GRUNDAR FJORDUR 65 00 N 23 18 W 8.31

GRUNDARTANGI 64 21 N 21 47 W 8.17

GUNNBJORNS FJELD 68 55 N 29 52 W 6.32

GURREHOLM 71 15 N 24 36 W 7.5

GYLDENLOVES FJORD 64 10 N 41 00 W 6.11

H

HAFNARFJORDUR 64 04 N 21 57 W 8.10

HAFNARNES 65 55 N 23 48 W 8.46

HAFNARVIK 63 52 N 21 18 W 9.49

HAGI 65 30 N 23 27 W 8.37

HAKLUYT O 77 26 N 72 42 W 5.25

HALL BASIN 81 25 N 63 00 W 5.40

HALVDANS FJORD 63 14 N 41 20 W 6.8

HANSA BUGT 74 38 N 18 47 W 7.23

HASLUMS OER 72 28 N 24 05 W 7.10

HEILPRIN LAND 82 00 N 35 00 W 7.42

HEIMAEY 63 26 N 20 16 W 9.44

HEIMAEY HARBOR 63 26 N 20 17 W 9.43

HELGUVIK 64 24 N 21 27 W 8.19

HELHEIMFJORD 66 18 N 37 42 W 6.16

HELLISSANDUR 64 55 N 23 54 W 8.29

HENDRIK O 82 03 N 53 18 W 5.43

HERADSFLOI 65 42 N 14 10 W 9.6

HERBERT O 77 25 N 70 29 W 5.25

HERDISARVIK 63 51 N 21 47 W 9.50

HERTUGEN AF ORLEANS LAND 77 50 N 22 40 W 7.35

HJALTEYRI 65 51 N 18 12 W 8.87

HOFN 64 15 N 15 14 W 9.35

HOLD WITH HOPE 73 35 N 21 00 W 7.16

HOLL 66 50 N 18 09 W 8.90

HOLMAVIK 65 42 N 21 41 W 8.68

HOLMSBERG 64 02 N 22 33 W 8.6

HOLSTEINSBORG 66 55 N 53 42 W 3.17

HOME FORLAND 73 50 N 20 30 W 7.17

HOPSNES 63 50 N 22 25 W 9.50

HORN 66 28 N 22 28 W 8.60

HORNAFJARDAROS 64 14 N 15 11 W 9.34

HORNAFJORDUR 64 15 N 15 14 W 9.35,

9.39

HORNBJARG LIGHT 66 25 N 22 23 W 8.62

HOSKULDSEY 65 06 N 23 01 W 8.32

HOVGAARDS KYSTLAND 74 43 N 56 55 W 5.14

HRAPPSEY 65 07 N 22 36 W 8.34

HRAUNNNHAFNARTANGI 66 32 N 16 02 W 8.97

HRISEY 66 00 N 18 23 W 8.86

HROLFSSKER 66 05 N 18 25 W 8.86

HROLLAUGSEYJAR 64 02 N 15 59 W 9.36

HRUTAFJORDUR 65 29 N 21 08 W 8.73

HUNAFLOI 66 00 N 21 00 W 8.65

HUNDE EJLAND 68 52 N 53 07 W 4.5

HURRY INLET 70 37 N 22 31 W 7.4

HUSAVIK 66 02 N 17 20 W 8.92

HUSAVIKURHOFDI 66 03 N 17 22 W 8.91

HVALEYRI 64 21 N 21 44 W 8.16

HVALFJORDUR 64 16 N 22 00 W 8.15

HVALROS O 74 31 N 18 49 W 7.22

HVALROSODDEN 76 54 N 20 09 W 7.32

HVALSBAKUR 64 36 N 13 17 W 9.28

HVALSNES 64 24 N 14 32 W 9.31

HVALSUND 77 19 N 70 40 W 5.25

HVAMMSFJORDUR 65 06 N 22 20 W 8.34

HVANNEYRI 66 09 N 18 55 W 8.81

I

IGALIKO 60 59 N 45 26 W 1.26

IGALIKO FJORD 60 44 N 45 45 W 1.26

IGALIKU 60 59 N 45 26 W 1.26

IGALIKUP KANGERLUA 60 44 N 45 45 W 1.26
Index—Gazetteer 201

 Pub. 181

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

IGARDLUT 60 15 N 45 38 W 1.16

IGAUSSAQ 61 53 N 49 29 W 2.11

IGDLUKASIK 60 02 N 44 51 W 1.13

IGDLULIK 74 21 N 56 43 W 5.11

IKARDLUK 60 30 N 46 05 W 1.20

IKASAK 65 51 N 36 53 W 6.24

IKATEQ 65 38 N 37 57 W 6.16

IKEQ CHANNEL 59 55 N 43 50 W 1.3

IKERASAK 70 32 N 51 30 W 4.24

IKERMIT 64 49 N 40 17 W 6.13

IKERMIUT 65 46 N 53 20 W 3.7

IKERSAUQ 60 46 N 46 47 W 1.33

IKERSSUAQ 65 30 N 39 38 W 6.15

IKERSUAQ 66 36 N 34 30 W 6.27

IKERTIVAQ 65 30 N 39 38 W 6.15

IKERTIVAQ 66 36 N 34 30 W 6.27

IKKATTEQ 65 38 N 37 57 W 6.24

ILE DE FRANCE 77 42 N 17 50 W 7.35

ILERTAKAJIK 63 27 N 41 09 W 6.9

ILIMAUSSAQ MOUNTAIN 61 00 N 45 56 W 1.23

ILULISSAT 69 13 N 51 06 W 4.15

INDEPENDENCE FJORD 82 00 N 31 00 W 7.41

INGLEFIELD BREDNING 77 26 N 68 00 W 5.28

INGOLF FJORD 80 40 N 16 55 W 7.37

INGOLFSFJORDUR 66 02 N 21 38 W 8.63

INGOLFSHOFDI 63 48 N 16 38 W 9.36

INNAARSUIT 73 12 N 56 02 W 5.7

INUARUGDLIGAQ 60 21 N 45 38 W 1.16

INUGSULIK BUGT 74 19 N 57 00 W 5.11

INUKAVSAIT 71 15 N 52 19 W 4.25

ISAFJORDUR 66 04 N 23 07 W 8.54

ISBOJORN 76 44 N 73 03 W 5.20

ISCENTRALEN NARSARSSUAQ 61 09 N 45 25 W 1.33

ISERTUP KANGERTIVA 65 38 N 39 07 W 6.15

ISFJORD 73 22 N 27 00 W 7.15

ISIP ILUA 65 38 N 38 18 W 6.15

ITILLEQ 59 51 N 44 02 W 1.3

ITIVDLIARSSUP KANGERDLUA 70 49 N 51 00 W 4.27

ITSAKO 71 41 N 53 52 W 4.28

ITTERAJIK 66 04 N 37 44 W 6.17

ITTOQQORTOORMIIT 70 29 N 21 58 W 7.3

IVIANGIT 64 01 N 51 36 W 2.22

IVIGTUT 61 12 N 48 11 W 2.7

IVNARSSUIT 73 12 N 56 02 W 5.7

J

J. P. JACOBSEN O 76 40 N 18 40 W 7.31

JAKOBSHAVN 69 13 N 51 06 W 4.15

JAKOBSHOLM 64 04 N 51 55 W 2.20

JAMESON LAND 71 00 N 23 30 W 7.4

JOH. G GUILDALS 76 42 N 18 32 W 7.33

JOHAN MOLLERS SKAER 63 46 N 51 53 W 2.19

JOHAN PETERSENS FJORD 65 52 N 38 15 W 6.16

JOINVILLES O 77 29 N 20 00 W 7.34

JULIANEHAAB 60 43 N 46 02 W 1.24

K

KAJKAP 77 19 N 19 03 W 7.34

KAKADOKAK 66 38 N 52 52 W 3.15

KAKATSAAK 66 33 N 53 09 W 3.15

KAKATSIAK 65 01 N 51 30 W 3.3

KANAJORMIUT 60 24 N 45 13 W 1.15

KANGAATSIAQ 68 18 N 53 28 W 3.22

KANGAMIUT 65 50 N 53 21 W 3.8

KANGARSSUK 69 16 N 53 51 W 4.5

KANGARSSUK 72 00 N 55 37 W 5.2

KANGARTIK 65 49 N 37 01 W 6.24

KANGATSIAQ 68 18 N 53 28 W 3.22

KANGEQ 60 11 N 45 25 W 1.15

KANGEQ 64 06 N 52 03 W 3.2

KANGEQ 69 43 N 51 24 W 4.18

KANGEQ 77 16 N 69 06 W 5.28

KANGEQ PENINSULA 72 27 N 55 05 W 5.5

KANGERDLIKAJIK 63 27 N 41 09 W 6.9

KANGERDLUARSSUQSSUAQ 66 14 N 53 37 W 3.14

KANGERDLUK 71 37 N 52 00 W 4.29

KANGERDLUK FJORD 60 10 N 43 38 W 1.7

KANGERDLULUK 61 05 N 43 08 W 6.4

KANGERLUARSORUSEQ 63 42 N 51 33 W 2.18

KANGERLUARSORUSEQ FJORD 63 42 N 51 33 W 2.17

KANGERLUGSSUATSIAK 66 22 N 35 46 W 6.26

KANGERLUSSUAK 68 22 N 32 14 W 6.30

KANGERLUSSUAQ 66 58 N 50 57 W 3.13

KANGERLUSSUAQ 68 22 N 32 14 W 6.30

KANGERSUAK KUJALLEK 59 47 N 44 05 W 1.10

KANGERSUATSIAQ 72 22 N 55 34 W 5.4

KANGERTITTIVATSIAQ 66 22 N 35 46 W 6.26

KANGIGDLEQ 71 37 N 52 00 W 4.29

KANGILINGUIT 61 14 N 48 06 W 2.8

KAP ABERNATHY 76 41 N 69 16 W 5.24

KAP AGASSIZ 79 08 N 66 10 W 5.35

KAP ALEXANDER 78 10 N 73 09 W 5.30

KAP ALF TROLLE 75 56 N 18 45 W 7.29

KAP ATHOLL 76 23 N 69 38 W 5.19

KAP BERLIN 74 41 N 19 25 W 7.24

KAP BISMARK 76 42 N 18 36 W 7.31

KAP BORGEN 75 26 N 18 04 W 7.27

KAP BORLASE WARREN 74 16 N 19 23 W 7.18

KAP BREUSING 74 13 N 20 06 W 7.20

KAP BREVOORT 81 59 N 60 17 W 5.42

KAP BREWSTER 70 09 N 22 03 W 6.35

KAP BRIDGMAN 83 30 N 27 45 W 7.45

KAP BRYAN 81 07 N 64 00 W 5.39

KAP BRYANT 82 20 N 55 15 W 5.43

KAP C CHRISTIANSEN 67 13 N 33 22 W 6.28

KAP CHRISTIAN 59 47 N 44 05 W 1.10

KAP CLARENCE WYCKOFF 82 05 N 24 10 W 7.43

KAP COPELAND 75 20 N 18 57 W 7.27

KAP CORT ADELAER 61 50 N 42 05 W 6.5

KAP COSTER 68 58 N 25 27 W 6.34

KAP DALTON 69 24 N 24 10 W 6.35

KAP DAN 65 31 N 37 11 W 6.23

KAP DEICHMANN 68 03 N 32 02 W 6.29

KAP DESOLATION 60 44 N 48 10 W 2.2

KAP DUDLEY DIGGS 76 10 N 68 49 W 5.19

KAP EDVARD HOLM 67 51 N 32 11 W 6.29

KAP EGEDE 60 11 N 45 25 W 1.15

KAP EHRENBERG 74 26 N 21 46 W 7.21

KAP EILER RASMUSSEN 82 35 N 22 00 W 7.43

KAP GLADSTONE 71 31 N 21 53 W 7.8

KAP GREG 70 57 N 21 35 W 7.7

KAP GUDBRAND TORLAKSEN 65 15 N 39 41 W 6.14

KAP GUSTAV HOLM 66 34 N 34 21 W 6.28

KAP HARALD MOLTKE 82 07 N 31 20 W 7.42

KAP HATHERTON 78 28 N 72 34 W 5.33

KAP HEDLUND 72 44 N 26 12 W 7.11

KAP HEGGEMAN 67 04 N 33 27 W 6.28

KAP HELGOLAND 76 43 N 19 09 W 7.30

KAP HILDEBRANDT 66 48 N 33 54 W 6.28

KAP HODGSON 70 33 N 21 30 W 7.7

KAP HOEGH 70 43 N 21 33 W 7.7

KAP HOMMOCK 83 22 N 41 31 W 5.48

KAP HOPE 70 28 N 22 23 W 7.2

KAP HOPPE 59 56 N 43 15 W 1.4

KAP HORRING 65 38 N 37 38 W 6.20

KAP HOVGARD 72 42 N 22 36 W 7.12

KAP IRMINGER 68 05 N 30 56 W 6.31

KAP ISAK GLUCKSTADT 83 00 N 25 40 W 7.43

KAP J.A.D. JENSEN 68 10 N 29 49 W 6.32

KAP J.C. JACOBSEN 68 06 N 30 30 W 6.31

KAP JACKSON 80 03 N 67 03 W 5.37

KAP JAPETUS STEENSTRUP 66 16 N 35 05 W 6.26

KAP JOHNSTRUP 68 28 N 28 02 W 6.32

KAP JUNGERSEN 80 44 N 15 55 W 7.37

KAP KANE 83 27 N 40 05 W 5.48

KAP KOFOED 78 31 N 18 34 W 7.36

KAP KRONBORG 81 42 N 22 20 W 7.40

KAP LOUIS USSING 67 18 N 33 18 W 6.28

KAP LUPTON 81 41 N 61 53 W 5.41

KAP MACKENZIE 72 55 N 21 55 W 7.13

KAP MAECHEL 72 23 N 25 16 W 7.10

KAP MELVILLE 76 03 N 64 01 W 5.16

KAP MIDDENDORFF 82 40 N 47 30 W 5.45

KAP MOBIUS 75 56 N 20 01 W 7.28

KAP MOHN 83 17 N 43 24 W 5.48

KAP MOLTKE 63 29 N 40 47 W 6.9

KAP MOORSOM 72 10 N 22 07 W 7.12

KAP MORRIS JESUP 83 40 N 33 24 W 5.49,

7.45

KAP MORTON 81 12 N 63 26 W 5.40
202 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 181

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

KAP MOSTING 63 41 N 40 30 W 6.10

KAP MURDOCH 76 08 N 61 52 W 5.16

KAP NANSEN 68 13 N 29 26 W 6.32

KAP NORDENSKIOLD 66 08 N 35 36 W 6.26

KAP OSWALD HEER 75 33 N 19 24 W 7.28

KAP PARRY 77 01 N 71 22 W 5.24

KAP PAYER 83 08 N 46 30 W 5.47

KAP PHILIP BROKE 74 56 N 17 37 W 7.26

KAP POUL LOVENORN 64 28 N 40 09 W 6.13

KAP POWELL 77 54 N 71 54 W 5.30

KAP RAVN 68 25 N 28 15 W 6.32

KAP RIGSDAGEN 82 04 N 22 50 W 7.39

KAP RINGKJOBING 81 33 N 19 05 W 7.39

KAP RINK 68 22 N 28 38 W 6.32

KAP RINK 75 08 N 19 37 W 7.25

KAP ROBERTSON 77 48 N 71 26 W 5.26

KAP RYDER 69 04 N 25 07 W 6.34

KAP SALOR 82 56 N 48 05 W 5.46

KAP SAVARY 68 36 N 27 03 W 6.33

KAP SCHMELCK 81 49 N 34 15 W 7.42

KAP SEDDON 75 21 N 58 39 W 5.14

KAP SHACKLETON 73 47 N 56 50 W 5.9

KAP SIMPSON 72 07 N 22 15 W 7.9

KAP SKJOLD 63 07 N 41 12 W 6.8

KAP SMITH 71 15 N 21 38 W 7.7

KAP STANTON 82 13 N 57 18 W 5.43

KAP STEEN BILLE 62 01 N 42 05 W 6.6

KAP STEPHENSEN 68 25 N 28 31 W 6.32

KAP STOSCH 74 04 N 21 43 W 7.19

KAP SUMNER 81 54 N 60 41 W 5.42

KAP THORVALDSEN 60 40 N 47 54 W 1.39

KAP TORDENSKJOLD 61 25 N 42 22 W 6.5

KAP TORFAEUS 64 42 N 40 24 W 6.13

KAP TUPINIER 68 45 N 26 19 W 6.34

KAP TYRCONNEL 77 31 N 68 36 W 5.28

KAP ULLIDTZ 76 16 N 21 42 W 7.30

KAP VEDEL 68 30 N 27 38 W 6.32

KAP WALKER 75 48 N 59 45 W 5.16

KAP WANDEL 66 19 N 34 52 W 6.27

KAP WARMING 67 01 N 33 43 W 6.28

KAP WASHINGTON 83 31 N 38 50 W 5.49

KAP YORK 75 54 N 66 27 W 5.17

KARMAT 60 44 N 46 55 W 1.33

KARRAT O 71 30 N 53 00 W 4.28

KARRATS FJORD 71 30 N 53 40 W 4.28

KASIT 59 58 N 43 26 W 1.4

KEFLAVIK 64 00 N 22 33 W 8.7

KEILIR 63 57 N 22 11 W 8.3

KEILISNES 64 02 N 22 16 W 8.8

KEKERTARSSUAK 63 54 N 51 29 W 2.19

KEKERTARSUAK 71 32 N 53 13 W 4.29

KEKERTAT OERNE 60 35 N 47 34 W 1.36

KIATAQ 64 22 N 40 32 W 6.12

KIGATAQ 72 05 N 55 50 W 5.3

KIGTAJIK 65 51 N 37 05 W 6.22

KIGTORQAT LIGHT 63 56 N 51 35 W 2.19

KIGTORSAQ 73 56 N 56 45 W 5.10

KINALITA MOUNTAIN 60 34 N 45 39 W 1.19

KINGAQ 66 38 N 53 26 W 3.16

KINGARTAK 72 05 N 55 50 W 5.3

KINGATSIAQ 66 10 N 53 36 W 3.14

KINGIGTOK 61 30 N 49 07 W 2.9

KINGIGTORTAGDLIT 73 02 N 56 55 W 5.7

KIRKJUBOL 64 50 N 13 53 W 9.26

KITAK 65 32 N 38 45 W 6.15

KITDLIAT 68 17 N 53 45 W 3.21

KITSIGSUARSSUIT 68 52 N 53 07 W 4.5

KITSIGSUT 67 47 N 53 59 W 3.20

KJALARNES 64 14 N 21 55 W 8.13

KJERULF FJORD 73 00 N 27 23 W 7.15

KJOGGUR 64 39 N 13 57 W 9.28

KNARRAROS LIGHT 63 49 N 20 58 W 9.47

KNOFFELD 62 00 N 49 23 W 2.11

KNUDSHOVED 73 43 N 20 27 W 7.17

KOBBERMINEBUGT 60 51 N 48 14 W 2.3

KOGUR 65 36 N 13 52 W 9.7

KOLBEINSEY 67 09 N 18 41 W 8.90

KOLGRAFAFJORDUR 65 00 N 23 03 W 8.32

KONG OSCAR HAVN 65 37 N 37 37 W 6.20

KOPANES 65 48 N 24 07 W 8.44

KOPASKER 66 17 N 16 27 W 8.95

KORNOK 64 32 N 51 06 W 2.23

KOTLUTANGI 63 23 N 18 44 W 9.38

KRAEMER O 68 12 N 31 51 W 6.30

KRAULSHAVN 74 07 N 57 04 W 5.11

KRISUVIKURBERG LIGHT 63 50 N 22 05 W 9.50

KROKSFJARDHARNES 65 27 N 21 57 W 8.36

KROSSNAFIR 64 41 N 14 11 W 9.28

KROSSNES 64 41 N 14 11 W 9.28

KROSSNES 64 58 N 23 22 W 8.30

KROSSNES 66 03 N 21 30 W 8.64

KUANIT ISLAND 62 14 N 49 53 W 2.13

KUK 73 43 N 56 13 W 5.9

KULHUS 75 12 N 20 00 W 7.25

KUNGMIUT 65 51 N 37 00 W 6.24

KUNGNAT 61 13 N 48 26 W 2.6

KUTDLEK 61 31 N 42 13 W 6.5

KUTSEQ 60 41 N 42 47 W 6.3

KUUMMIIT 65 51 N 37 00 W 6.24

KVANEFJORD 61 59 N 49 44 W 2.11

L

LAFAYETTE BUGT 80 27 N 66 47 W 5.38

LAKSEBUGT 69 18 N 53 56 W 4.6

LAMBERT LAND 79 10 N 20 20 W 7.37

LANGANES 66 23 N 14 32 W 8.101

LANGEBUGT 69 51 N 51 09 W 4.18

LARS JAKOBSENS PYNT 74 33 N 19 12 W 7.23

LILLE KOLDEWEY O 76 40 N 18 43 W 7.31

LILLE PENDULUM O 74 40 N 18 30 W 7.23

LILLE TUGTUTOQ 60 45 N 46 48 W 1.35

LINDENOW FJORD 60 27 N 43 17 W 6.2

LITTELTON O 78 21 N 72 52 W 5.33

LIVERPOOL LAND 71 00 N 22 00 W 7.7

LODMUNDARFJORDUR 65 21 N 13 45 W 9.10

LOFTSTADHAHOLL 63 48 N 20 54 W 9.47

LONSVIK 64 21 N 14 46 W 9.33

LUNDEY 64 11 N 21 50 W 8.14

M

MACCORMICK FJORD 77 39 N 70 00 W 5.26

MACKENZIE BUGT 73 26 N 21 30 W 7.16

MALARHORN 65 41 N 21 26 W 8.68

MALARRIF 64 44 N 23 48 W 8.26

MALIGIAQ 69 27 N 54 14 W 4.6

MANAREYJAR 66 17 N 17 07 W 8.93

MANIITSOQ 65 25 N 52 55 W 3.6

MANITSOQ 65 28 N 52 57 W 3.5

MANUSSAQ 76 45 N 69 54 W 5.24

MARIA O 72 57 N 24 54 W 7.11

MARKARFLJOT 63 32 N 20 05 W 9.41

MARMORILIK 71 08 N 51 17 W 4.25

MARRAQ 63 26 N 51 15 W 2.16

MATO LOB 60 45 N 46 45 W 1.27

MCCORMICK BUGT 78 14 N 72 48 W 5.33

MEDHALLANDS BUGUR 63 40 N 17 20 W 9.37

MELLEMFJORD 69 46 N 54 52 W 4.7

MELRAKKANES 66 24 N 15 43 W 8.99

MELRAKKASLETTA 66 28 N 16 15 W 8.96

MELVILLE MONUMENT 75 46 N 59 25 W 5.14

MESTERS VIG 72 08 N 23 44 W 7.10

METEORITE O 76 03 N 65 00 W 5.17

MEVENKLINT 67 09 N 18 41 W 8.90

MIKI FJORD 68 08 N 31 30 W 6.31

MISUGTOQ 65 58 N 37 05 W 6.22

MJOEYRI 64 55 N 13 58 W 9.25

MJOIFJORDUR 65 12 N 13 46 W 9.15

MOGENS HEINESEN FJORD 62 23 N 42 30 W 6.6

MOLLERS O 66 55 N 53 45 W 3.17

MORIUSAQ 76 45 N 69 54 W 5.24

MORKEFJORD 76 55 N 20 40 W 7.32

MORRIS BUGT 80 08 N 67 04 W 5.37

MUDDERBUGTEN 69 41 N 52 00 W 4.17

MYLIUS ERICHSEN'S CAIRN 81 50 N 32 40 W 7.41

MYRDALSVIK 63 25 N 19 00 W 9.38

MYRNATANGI 63 28 N 18 09 W 9.38
Index—Gazetteer 203

 Pub. 181

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

N

NAAJAT 59 52 N 44 57 W 1.12

NANOK 75 09 N 19 47 W 7.25

NANORTALIK HAVN 60 07 N 45 12 W 1.14

NANUSEQ FJORD 60 29 N 43 13 W 6.3

NAPASSORSSUAQ FJORD 61 42 N 42 30 W 6.5

NARSALIK 61 39 N 49 19 W 2.10

NARSAQ 60 55 N 46 03 W 1.32

NARSAQ KUJALLEQ 60 00 N 44 40 W 1.11

NARSARSUAQ 61 09 N 45 26 W 1.33

NARSSAQ 60 55 N 46 03 W 1.32

NARSSAQ 70 26 N 54 05 W 4.18

NARSSARSSUAQ 61 09 N 45 26 W 1.33

NATDLUARSUK 70 39 N 54 36 W 4.19

NATERNAQ 68 20 N 52 00 W 3.22

NATHORST FJORD 71 41 N 22 30 W 7.8

NATSILIVIK 77 10 N 70 52 W 5.25

NAUJARTALIK 60 46 N 48 15 W 2.2

NAUJAT 59 52 N 44 57 W 1.12

NAUJAT 73 09 N 55 51 W 5.7

NAUTSARSORFIK 61 43 N 48 38 W 2.9

NAVY CLIFF 81 41 N 34 02 W 7.41

NERERNAQ 65 41 N 37 18 W 6.22

NES 65 09 N 13 41 W 9.18

NESKAUPSTADUR 65 09 N 13 41 W 9.18

NIAQORNAP 60 44 N 46 35 W 1.31

NIAQORNARSSUK 68 14 N 52 52 W 4.19

NIAQORNAT 70 48 N 53 40 W 4.21

NIAQUNGUNAQ 64 43 N 52 08 W 3.3

NIGERTULUK 66 16 N 35 02 W 6.26

NJARDHVIK 63 59 N 22 32 W 8.8

NJARDVIK 63 59 N 22 32 W 8.8

NORD 81 43 N 17 57 W 7.39

NORDFJARDARFLOI 65 09 N 13 36 W 9.16

NORDFJORD 73 40 N 24 17 W 7.14

NORDFJORDUR 65 08 N 13 42 W 9.17

NORDLIGE KITSISSUT 59 57 N 45 12 W 1.12

NORDOSTRUNDINGEN 81 36 N 12 10 W 7.38

NORDRE APUTITEEQ 67 48 N 32 16 W 6.29

NORDRE STORO 62 08 N 49 45 W 2.13

NORDVESTFJORD 71 30 N 25 40 W 7.5

NORSSAERSERFIK 61 43 N 48 38 W 2.9

NORTH STAR BUGT 76 34 N 68 52 W 5.22

NORUJUK 69 39 N 51 50 W 4.10

NUGARSSIK 65 38 N 37 20 W 6.21

NUGATSIAQ 71 32 N 53 13 W 4.29

NUGSSUTA 70 39 N 54 36 W 4.19

NUK 60 15 N 44 10 W 1.7

NUK 61 28 N 42 19 W 6.5

NUK 68 45 N 51 19 W 4.13

NUK 69 39 N 51 50 W 4.10

NUKAGPIAQ 65 30 N 51 51 W 3.5

NUKAJIK 65 33 N 38 33 W 6.15

NULUK 73 33 N 55 58 W 5.9

NUNARSSUAQ 60 01 N 45 12 W 1.12

NUSSAQ 70 26 N 54 05 W 4.18

NUTARMIUT-IKERASAARSUK 73 32 N 56 26 W 5.8

NUUSSUAQ 74 07 N 57 04 W 5.11

NYEBOE LAND 81 55 N 58 20 W 5.42

NYHAVN 72 16 N 23 53 W 7.10

NYIBODI 64 51 N 13 26 W 9.25

O

O FJORD 71 00 N 26 12 W 7.6

ODAQ O 83 40 N 30 40 W 7.45

ODDBJARNSKER 65 21 N 23 09 W 8.36

OFFLEY O 81 18 N 61 51 W 5.40

OLAFSFJORDUR 66 05 N 18 38 W 8.83

OLAFSVIK 64 54 N 23 43 W 8.30

OLRIK FJORD 77 12 N 67 35 W 5.26

ONDVERDARNES 64 53 N 24 03 W 8.27

ONUNDARFJORDUR 66 06 N 23 43 W 8.49

ORLEANS SUND 77 48 N 20 00 W 7.34

OTTE KRUMPEN FJORD 63 57 N 40 40 W 6.10

OUTER BUOY 64 05 N 22 05 W 8.10

P

PAAMIUT 62 00 N 49 40 W 2.12

PAGGIVIK LIGHT 60 37 N 46 11 W 1.23

PAPEY 64 35 N 14 10 W 9.32

PARKER SNOW BUGT 76 09 N 68 37 W 5.18

PATREKSFJORDUR 65 38 N 24 08 W 8.41

PATREKSHOFN 65 35 N 23 59 W 8.42

PEABODY BUGT 79 37 N 65 10 W 5.35

PEARY LAND 82 30 N 35 00 W 7.42

PENDULUM OER 74 37 N 18 39 W 7.22

PERDLERDIUP KANGERDLUA 71 02 N 51 30 W 4.25

PIC DE GERLACHE 78 36 N 21 40 W 7.35

PITUFFIK 76 32 N 68 52 W 5.23

POKULUFIK 74 15 N 57 30 W 5.11

PORSILD GRUND 69 19 N 51 53 W 4.10

PORT OF THULE AIR BASE 76 32 N 68 52 W 5.23

PRINS CHRISTIAN SUND 60 04 N 43 02 W 1.5

PROVEN 72 22 N 55 30 W 5.4

PRUDHOE LAND 78 00 N 71 00 W 5.30

PUIAGTOQ FJORD 61 17 N 42 55 W 6.4

PUKULUGFIK 74 15 N 57 30 W 5.11

PUTO 66 07 N 53 10 W 3.10

Q

QAANAAQ 77 28 N 69 18 W 5.27

QAERSUT 70 44 N 52 38 W 4.21

QAGSSIARSSUK 61 09 N 45 31 W 1.33

QAGSSIMIUT 60 47 N 47 10 W 1.36

QAGSSIT 67 00 N 54 08 W 3.17

QALLUMIUT 60 42 N 45 22 W 1.17

QAQARSSUATSIAQ KUJATDLEQ 62 02 N 49 33 W 2.11

QAQATOQOQ 66 38 N 52 52 W 3.15

QAQATSIAQ 66 33 N 53 09 W 3.15

QAQORTOQ 60 43 N 46 02 W 1.24

QARMAT 60 44 N 46 55 W 1.33

QASIGIANNGUIT 68 49 N 51 11 W 4.13

QASIGISSAT 65 34 N 37 41 W 6.18

QASSIARSUK 61 09 N 45 31 W 1.33

QASSIMIUT 60 47 N 47 10 W 1.36

QEQERTARSSUAQ 63 54 N 51 29 W 2.19

QEQERTARSSUAQ 71 32 N 53 13 W 4.29

QEQERTARSSUAQ 72 15 N 55 20 W 5.4

QEQERTARSSUAQ 77 25 N 70 09 W 5.25

QEQERTARSSUATSIAIT 63 05 N 50 41 W 2.15

QEQERTAT 71 00 N 52 15 W 4.26

QEQERTAT 77 30 N 66 42 W 5.29

QEQERTAT OERNE 60 35 N 47 34 W 1.36

QERNERTOQ 59 58 N 43 26 W 1.4

QERNERTUT 60 54 N 48 07 W 2.4

QINGERTIVAQ 66 03 N 37 12 W 6.22

QINGMUT 63 36 N 51 33 W 2.17

QIPA 66 10 N 37 50 W 6.16

QIPISARGO 61 01 N 47 52 W 2.5

QORNOQ 64 32 N 51 06 W 2.23

QUARATIT 76 19 N 69 21 W 5.19

QULLIMIUT 60 42 N 45 22 W 1.17

QUTDLEQ 61 31 N 42 13 W 6.5

QUTDLIGSSAT 70 05 N 53 00 W 4.17

R

RAUFARHOFN 66 27 N 15 56 W 8.98

RAVNEOER 63 58 N 51 53 W 2.19

RAVNEOERNE 63 58 N 51 53 W 2.19

RAVNS STORO 62 43 N 50 23 W 2.14

REDEKAMMEN MOUNTAIN 60 53 N 45 45 W 1.23

REPULSE HAVN 82 06 N 59 08 W 5.42

REYDARFJORDHUR 65 00 N 13 51 W 9.20

REYKJAVIK 64 09 N 21 56 W 8.12

RIF 64 55 N 23 50 W 8.29

RIFKOL 67 58 N 53 47 W 3.21

RIFSNES 66 05 N 20 26 W 8.69

ROBESON CHANNEL 81 57 N 60 47 W 5.41

RODEBAYNAESSET 69 21 N 51 01 W 4.16

ROMER FJORD 69 39 N 23 36 W 6.35

ROSENEATH BUGT 75 43 N 19 30 W 7.28

ROSENVINGES BUGT 70 27 N 22 05 W 7.2

ROST 65 07 N 22 31 W 8.34

ROTTEN 68 52 N 53 25 W 4.5

RYDERS OER 74 39 N 57 40 W 5.13
204 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 181

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

S

SAARLOQ 60 32 N 46 02 W 1.21

SAATTUT 70 49 N 51 39 W 4.27

SABINE OER 75 30 N 60 13 W 5.15

SAGDLIARUSEQ 63 38 N 40 37 W 6.10

SAGIARUSEK 63 38 N 40 37 W 6.10

SANDERSONS HOPE 72 43 N 56 11 W 5.5

SANDGERDHI 64 02 N 22 43 W 8.4

SANDGERDI 64 02 N 22 43 W 8.4

SANDODDEN 74 18 N 20 13 W 7.21

SANDOEN 74 15 N 20 09 W 7.20

SANDUR 64 55 N 23 54 W 8.29

SANERUT 61 00 N 48 20 W 2.4

SARDLOQ 60 32 N 46 02 W 1.21

SARFARTOK POINT 66 31 N 52 03 W 3.12

SARKAK 70 01 N 51 57 W 4.18

SARPAKAJIK 65 37 N 37 31 W 6.21

SARPAQ 65 52 N 37 47 W 6.17

SARQAQ 70 01 N 51 57 W 4.18

SATUT 60 55 N 48 18 W 2.4

SATUT 63 42 N 51 36 W 2.17

SAUDANES 66 11 N 18 58 W 8.79

SAUDARKROKUR 65 45 N 19 40 W 8.78

SAUNDERS O 76 34 N 69 43 W 5.21

SAVIGSIVIK 76 01 N 65 05 W 5.17

SCHADES OER 71 23 N 53 51 W 4.28

SCHNAUDER O 78 47 N 19 40 W 7.36

SCORESBY SETTLEMENT 70 29 N 21 58 W 7.3

SEGELSALLSKAPETS FJORD 72 26 N 25 00 W 7.10

SELSKER 66 08 N 21 32 W 8.63

SELVOGUR 63 49 N 21 39 W 9.49

SERFARSSUIT 70 20 N 54 23 W 4.7,

4.17

SERFARTORSSUAQ 64 06 N 51 38 W 2.22

SERMERSUT 61 16 N 48 50 W 2.9

SERMILIGAAQ 66 00 N 36 28 W 6.25

SERMILIGAQ 66 00 N 36 28 W 6.25

SERMILIK FJORD 63 29 N 51 12 W 2.17

SERMITSIAK 63 21 N 50 19 W 2.16

SEYDISFJORDUR 65 18 N 13 40 W 9.11

SEYDISFJORDUR 66 02 N 22 55 W 8.55

SEYDISFJORDUR HARBOR 65 16 N 14 00 W 9.13

SHANNON SUND 75 12 N 19 08 W 7.27

SHERARD OSBORN FJORD 82 15 N 52 06 W 5.44

SIGLUFJORDHUR 66 10 N 18 53 W 8.80

SIGLUFJORDUR 66 09 N 18 55 W 8.81

SIGLUFJORDUR 66 10 N 18 53 W 8.80

SIMIUTA LIGHT 64 03 N 51 38 W 2.19

SIMIUTARSSUP IKARDLUE 68 11 N 53 58 W 3.21

SINGARNAQ 72 35 N 55 46 W 5.5

SIORAGDLIT 68 30 N 53 36 W 3.22

SIORAK 61 21 N 48 59 W 2.9

SIORAPALUK 77 47 N 70 42 W 5.26

SISIMIUT 66 55 N 53 42 W 3.17

SKAERFJORDEN 77 25 N 19 30 W 7.34

SKAFTAROS 63 40 N 17 47 W 9.38

SKAGAFJORDUR 66 00 N 19 50 W 8.75

SKAGASTROND 65 50 N 20 19 W 8.69

SKAGATA 66 07 N 20 06 W 8.74

SKALO 71 52 N 55 36 W 5.2

SKANSEN 69 26 N 52 26 W 4.10

SKARD LIGHT 65 29 N 20 59 W 8.74

SKERJAFJORDUR 64 09 N 22 01 W 8.11

SKINNEYJARHOFDI 64 14 N 15 29 W 9.36

SKJOLDUNGEN 63 20 N 41 30 W 6.8

SKOR 65 25 N 23 57 W 8.37

SKORARBODAR 65 24 N 23 58 W 8.28

SKOTUFJORDUR 66 03 N 22 48 W 8.55

SKUTULSFJORDUR 66 06 N 23 05 W 8.53

SMALLESUND 61 33 N 49 16 W 2.10

SMITH SOUND 78 24 N 73 30 W 5.32

SOKONGENS BUGT 68 40 N 26 40 W 6.33

SONDE STORO 62 03 N 49 42 W 2.13

SONDRE KANGEQ 61 21 N 48 59 W 2.9

SONDRE STROMFJORD 66 02 N 53 32 W 3.10

SONNTAG BUGT 78 00 N 72 26 W 5.30

SOPHUS MULLER NAES 80 55 N 14 40 W 7.38

SORTSKAER 68 06 N 31 58 W 6.30

SPANIOLO 65 18 N 52 48 W 3.5

STAFNES 63 58 N 22 45 W 8.3

STAGLEY 65 14 N 22 51 W 8.36

STEWART O 69 54 N 22 50 W 6.35

STIGI 66 12 N 23 28 W 8.50

STODHVARFJORDHUR 64 50 N 13 55 W 9.26

STOKKSEYRI 63 50 N 21 05 W 9.48

STOKKSNES 64 14 N 14 58 W 9.33

STORMBUGT 76 48 N 19 00 W 7.32

STOROEN 70 43 N 51 48 W 4.24

STRANDHOFN 65 54 N 14 39 W 9.3

STRAUMNES 66 05 N 19 22 W 8.79

STRAUMNES 66 20 N 22 12 W 8.62

STRAUMNES 66 26 N 23 08 W 8.60

STRAUMSVIK 64 03 N 22 03 W 8.9

STYKKISHOLMUR 65 05 N 22 43 W 8.33

SUGANDAFJORDUR 66 08 N 23 38 W 8.50

SUGAR LOAF 74 01 N 56 58 W 5.10

SUKKERTOPPEN 65 25 N 52 55 W 3.6

SUKKERTOPPEN ICE CAP 66 13 N 52 02 W 3.10

SUKKERTOPPEN ISKAPPE 66 13 N 52 02 W 3.10

SVARTENHUK POINT 71 41 N 55 53 W 5.2

SVARTNES 65 47 N 14 20 W 9.4

SVEINSEYRI 65 37 N 23 51 W 8.43

SYDHRA SKOGARIVES 64 48 N 22 36 W 8.24

SYDKAP 71 17 N 25 03 W 7.5

SYDPROVEN 60 28 N 45 34 W 1.17

T

TAKISSEQ 65 00 N 39 50 W 6.14

TALERUA 60 33 N 45 55 W 1.21

TALERULIK 64 59 N 52 22 W 3.4

TASIILAQ 65 36 N 37 37 W 6.19

TASILAP NUA 65 35 N 37 34 W 6.20

TASILARTIK 65 38 N 37 25 W 6.21

TASIUSAQ 73 22 N 56 00 W 5.8

TASIUSAQ BUGT 73 12 N 55 30 W 5.8

TASIUSSAQ 60 50 N 45 43 W 1.25

TATERAT 61 14 N 42 38 W 6.4

THALBITZERS NAES 76 03 N 60 58 W 5.16

THANK GOD HAVN 81 38 N 61 48 W 5.40

THINGEYRI 65 53 N 23 29 W 8.48

THISTILFJORDUR 66 20 N 15 30 W 8.99

THOMAS THOMSENS NAES 77 14 N 18 23 W 7.33

THOMS O 75 43 N 60 36 W 5.15

THORLAKSHOFN 63 51 N 21 23 W 9.49

THORMODHSSKER 64 26 N 22 19 W 8.24

THORSHOFN 66 12 N 15 20 W 8.100

THORSTEIN ISLAENDER 60 46 N 48 26 W 2.2

THULE 77 28 N 69 18 W 5.27

TINDINGEN 61 30 N 49 07 W 2.9

TINGMIARMIUT FJORD 62 39 N 42 43 W 6.7

TINITEQILAAQ 65 54 N 37 48 W 6.17

TJORNES 66 12 N 17 09 W 8.91

TOQULINEQ 60 05 N 43 06 W 6.2

TORGILSBU 60 33 N 43 13 W 6.3

TORSSUKATAK 69 56 N 51 00 W 4.18

TOVQUSSAQ 64 53 N 52 10 W 3.2

TOVQUSSAQ BANKE 64 25 N 53 25 W 3.2

TOVQUSSAQ HAVN 64 52 N 52 12 W 3.4

TUAPAIT 60 07 N 45 11 W 1.13

TUGSAQ 73 03 N 56 08 W 5.7

TUGTORQORTOQ 73 40 N 56 58 W 5.9

TUGTULIPALUK 75 34 N 58 23 W 5.15

TUKINGASSRASSUAQ LIGHT 64 00 N 51 42 W 2.19

TULUVARTALIK 62 29 N 50 19 W 2.14

TUVSSAQ 73 03 N 56 08 W 5.7

TVILLINGERNE 76 17 N 20 45 W 7.30

TYROLERFJORD 74 28 N 21 11 W 7.21

U

UGSSUGTUSSOQ 65 38 N 39 07 W 6.15

UJARASUGSSUK 69 52 N 52 27 W 4.17

UMANAK 74 01 N 56 58 W 5.10

UMANAK HARBOR 70 41 N 52 09 W 4.23

UMANAQ 65 16 N 52 35 W 3.4

UMANAQ ISLAND 60 35 N 46 08 W 1.21

UMANARSSUAQ 60 56 N 42 38 W 6.4

UMANARSUK 60 56 N 42 38 W 6.4

UMANAT 65 52 N 53 24 W 3.9

UMIGTUARTIVIT 65 54 N 38 00 W 6.16
Index—Gazetteer 205

 Pub. 181

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

UMIIVIITAA 64 20 N 40 12 W 6.11

UNAMAI 60 43 N 47 40 W 1.37

UNAMAQ 60 43 N 47 40 W 1.37

UPERNAVIARSUK 60 45 N 45 54 W 1.25

UPERNAVIK 72 46 N 56 09 W 5.6

UPERNAVIK 72 47 N 57 20 W 5.1

UPERNAVIK ISFJORD 72 53 N 55 20 W 5.7

UPERNAVIK KUJALLEQ 72 09 N 55 32 W 5.4

UTTORSIUTIT 62 30 N 42 09 W 6.7

UUMMANNAQ 70 41 N 52 09 W 4.23

UVTORTIUTIT 62 30 N 42 09 W 6.7

V

VADLAVIK 65 01 N 13 36 W 9.19

VAEDDERHORNET 76 52 N 20 35 W 7.32

VATNEYRI 65 35 N 23 59 W 8.42

VATNSNES 65 40 N 20 41 W 8.70

VEGA SUND 72 37 N 22 28 W 7.12

VESTER EJLAND 68 37 N 53 32 W 4.2

VESTMANNAEYJAHOFN 63 26 N 20 17 W 9.43

VESTMANNAEYJAR 63 26 N 20 14 W 9.42

VIK 63 25 N 19 01 W 9.39

VOPNAFJORDHUR 65 45 N 14 50 W 9.5

W

WALRUS ISLAND 74 31 N 18 49 W 7.22

WANDEL HAV 82 10 N 17 00 W 7.39

WATKINS FJORD 68 15 N 31 55 W 6.30

WENDELS PYNT 76 46 N 18 50 W 7.32

WILCOX HEAD 74 29 N 57 31 W 5.12

WOLSTENHOLME FJORD 76 38 N 68 30 W 5.22

WORDIES BUGT 74 01 N 22 15 W 7.20

Y

YDERO 60 41 N 47 04 W 1.33

YMERS O 73 10 N 24 30 W 7.13